THE  BOYS  OF  '76. 


A  HISTORY  OF 


THE  BATTLES  OF  THE  REVOLUTION. 


BY   CHARLES   CARLETON    COFFIN, 

AUTHOR    OF 

"Ml    DAYS  AND   NIGHTS   ON  THE   BATTLE-FIELD,"  "FOLLOWING  THE  FLAG,"  "FOUR  YEARS   OF 
FIGHTING,"  "WINNING  HIS  WAY,"  "OUR  NEW  WAY  ROUND  THE  WORLD,"  &c. 


Illustrated. 


NEW  YORK   AND  LONDON: 
HARPER    &    BROTHERS,    PUBLISHERS, 


BOOKS  BY 
CHARLES  CARLETON  COFFIN 

OLD  TIMES  IN  THE  COLONIES.      Ill'd.  .  .  .8vo  $2.00 

THE  BOYS  OF  '76.     Illustrated 8vo  2.00 

BUILDING  THE  NATION.     Illustrated 8vo  2.00 

THE  DRUM-BEAT  OF  THE  NATION.     Ill'd.  8vo  2.00 

MARCHING  TO   VICTORY.     Illustrated 8vo  2.00 

REDEEMING  THE   REPUBLIC.     Ill'd 8vo  2.00 

FREEDOM  TRIUMPHANT.      Illustrated 8vo  2.00 

ABRAHAM  LINCOLN.     Illustrated 8vo  2.00 


HARPER  &  BROTHERS,  PUBLISHERS,  NEW  YORK 


Copyrigm,  1876,  by  HARPER  &  BROTHERS. 
Copyright,  1904,  by  SALLIE  R.  COFFIN. 

F-N 


TO  MY  NEPHEWS, 

HENRY  L.  LITTLE,  LUTHER  B.  LITTLE, 
AND  HERMAN  L.  SAWYER. 

WHOSE  ANCESTORS  TOOK  PART  IN  THE  BATTLES  OF  THE   REVOLUTION, 


THIS  VOLUME 


Js 


338012 


PREFACE. 


story  of  the  American  Revolution — what  our  fathers  accomplished, 
their  hardships,  heroism,  and  self-denial,  in  securing  the  independ 
ence  of  the  country  and  in  advancing  liberty  and  happiness  throughout 
the  world — will  have  an  interest  and  charm  of  its  own  so  long  as  the  de 
sire  for  freedom  exists  in  the  hearts  of  men. 

In  this  volume  an  attempt  has  been  made  to  give  a  concise,  plain,  and 
authentic  narrative  of  the  principal  battles  of  the  Revolution  as  witnessed 
by  those  who  took  part  in  them. 

Although  the  name  of  Elijah  Favor  may  not  be  found  on  the  Rye- 
field  muster-roll,  yet  we  have  more  than  his  counterpart  in  the  person  of 
Alexander  Scammell,  who  fought  at  Bunker  Hill,  became  Washington's 
trusted  adjutant-general,  and  who  gave  his  life  to  his  country  at  York- 
town  ;  while  Dodifer  Hanscom,  Esek  Earl,  and  Nicholas  Dolof  are  repre 
sentative  boys  of  the  time. 

One  hundred  years  have  passed  since  "  the  Boys  of  '76  "  shouldered 
their  muskets  and  fought  for  their  liberties.  The  sufferings,  hardships, 
hatreds,  and  barbarities  of  that  struggle,  all  have  passed  away,  and  Ameri 
cans  and  Britons  are  brothers ;  but  the  story  of  the  struggle — the  patriot 
ism,  self-denial,  and  devotion — will  never  be  forgotten.  That  a  perusal  of 
these  pages  may  deepen  the  love  of  the  boys  of  the  present  generation  for 
their  country,  and  quicken  their  love  for  libertv  and  the  rights  of  man,  is 
the  earnest  hope  of 

c.  c.  c. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  ALARM. 


17 


CHAPTER  XL  PAG1 

BATTLE  OF  TRENTON....  ..  129 


CHAPTER  II. 


BUNKER  HILL..  .    42 


CHAPTER  III. 
BATTLE  OF  BUNKER  HILL... 


47 


CHAPTER  IV. 
DRIVING  THE  BRITISH  OUT  OF  BOSTON    61 

CHAPTER  V. 
EXPEDITION  TO  QUEBEC 71 

CHAPTER  VI. 
FORT  SULLIVAN 82 

CHAPTER  VII. 
BATTLE  OF  LONG  ISLAND....  .    91 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
EVACUATION  OF  NEW  YORK... 


108 


CHAPTER  IX. 
BATTLE  OF  WHITE  PLAINS...  ..  113 


CHAPTER  X. 
LAKE  CHAMPLAIN... 


123 


CHAPTER  XII. 
PRINCETON 139 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

TlCONDEROGA  AND  HUBBARDTON...        ..   152 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
FORT  SCHUYLER 166 

CHAPTER  XV. 
BENNINGTON 180 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
BRANDYWINE 195 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
STILL  WATER 204 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
GERMANTOWN 215 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
THE  HIGHLANDS  OF  THE  HUDSON 223 

CHAPTER  XX. 
SARATOGA..,  ..  231 


12 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XXI.  PAOK 

OPERATIONS  ON  THE  DELAWARE 245 


CHAPTER  XXII. 
VALLEY  FORGE  AND  PHILADELPHIA 254 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 
STONY  POINT....  ..  262 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

MONMOUTH...  ..   269 


CHAPTER  XXV. 
AFFAIRS  IN  RHODE  ISLAND... 


280 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 
AFFAIRS  IN  SOUTH  CAROLINA... 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 
WEST  POINT... 


303 


CHAPTER   XXVIII.  PAOK 

KING'S  MOUNTAIN  AND  THE  COWPENS..  334 


CHAPTER   XXIX. 
GENERAL  GREENE'S  RETREAT 345 

CHAPTER  XXX. 
GUILFORD  COURT-HOUSE...  ..  353 


CHAPTER   XXXI. 
EUTAW 364 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 
FORT  GRISWOLD 372 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

YORKTOWN , 380 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 
CONCLUSION ..  396 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


The  Alarm 

Samuel  Adams 18 

John  Hancock 19 

Lord  North 20 

Carted  through  the  Streets 24 

A  Tory 25 

Paul  Revere.— [1735-1818] 27 

The  Midnight  Ride  of  Paul  Revere 28 

Ebenezer  Dorr 29 

"  The  Regulars  are  coming  !" 30 

The  Lexington  Massacre 31 

The  British  Troops  on  Concord  Common. — 

[Fac-simile  of  an  Old  Engraving] 33 

14  Let  us  stand  our  Ground  " 35 

Major  Pitcairn  stirring  his  Brandy 36 

Mr.  Hunt's  House 37 

Burning  the  Cannon  Carnages 37 

Map  illustrating  the  Concord  Fight 38 

"The  Shot  that  is  heard  around  the  World"  39 

Halt  of  Troops  near  Elisha  Jones's  House . .  40 

Merriam's  Corner,  on  the  Lexington  Road  . .  40 

View  of  Bunker  Hill 45 

General  Israel  Putnam 46 

General  Joseph  Warren 46 

Plan  of  the  Battle  of  Bunker  Hill 48 

Bunker  Hill 50 

Burning  of  Charlestown 53 

Bunker  Hill  after  the  Battle 55 

Putnam  putting  out  the  Fire   at  Fort  Ed 
ward  56 

The  French  Commander  saving  Putnam 58 

General  Putnam  starting  for  Boston 59 

Putnam's  Sign 60 

General  Washington 61 

Washington  taking  Command  of  the  Army.  62 


PAGB 

Washington's  Head-quarters,  Cambridge.. .  63 

Boston,  with  its  Environs,  1776 64 

"From  the  Right  Bank  of  the  Potomac, 

General !". 66 

General  Henry  Knox 67 

Boston  from  Dorchester,  where  the  Intrench- 

ments  were  erected.— [1776] 68 

British  Fortifications  on  the  Neck 69 

The  Old  South 70 

Getting  the  Boats  around  the  Falls 72 

Arnold's  Route  to  Quebec 75 

View  of  Point  Levi  from  Quebec 77 

Wolfe's  Ravine 78 

Richard  Montgomery 78 

General  Guy  Carleton 79 

The  Cliff. 79 

Where  Arnold  attacked 80 

Lord  Germain 82 

Colonel  Moultrie 83 

Fort  Sullivan 83 

Sir  Henry  Clinton 84 

Charleston  in  1776 85 

Sir  Peter  Parker 86 

Sullivan's  Island — Position  of  British  Fleet  86 

The  Way  the  Guns  were  mounted 87 

The  Flag 88 

Sergeant  Jasper 89 

King's  Bridge 92 

New  York,  with  the  Entrance  of  the  North 

and  East  Rivers 93 

Washington's  Head-quarters 94 

The  British  Fleet  in  the  Lower  Bay 96 

The  Place  where  the  British  landed 97 

Map — Battle  of  Long  Island 99 

Lord  Stirling 101 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


New  York,  1776 101 

John  Callender  saved  by  a  British  Officer. .   103 
Lord  Stirling's    Last  Struggle  around  the 

Old  Cortelyou  House 104 

Browyer's  Mill 105 

The  Marbleheaders  at  Home 105 

Colonel  Glover 106 

Jolonel  Glover  superintending  the  Embar 
kation 107 

Jacobus  Kip's  House 108 

Beekman's  Mansion 110 

Morris's  House Ill 

Battle-field  at  Harlem 112 

Howe's  Head-quarters 113 

Washington's  Head-quarters  at  White  Plains  1 14 

Alexander  Hamilton 114 

Place  where  the  British  crossed  the  Bronx  115 

Chatterton  Hill 116 

Operations   after  the    Evacuation  of  New 

York,  1776 117 

The  Palisades 119 

Landing  of  the  British  Forces  in  the  Jerseys, 

November  20th,  1776 121 

Engagement  between  Valcour  Island  and  the 

Western  Shore  of  Lake  Champlain 124 

Action  of  the  13th  of  October 125 

Scene  of  Arnold's  Naval  Battle 126 

The  Crew  escaping 127 

Independence  Hall. 129 

General  Charles  Lee 130 

Lee's  House 131 

General  Sullivan 131 

Trenton 132 

Place  where  Washington  crossed 133 

Washington  crossing  the  Delaware 134 

Trenton,  1777 135 

Colonel  Rail's  Head-quarters 136 

Robert  Morris 140 

Bridge  at  Worth's  Mill 141 

Battle  of  Princeton 144 

Princeton,  1777 146 

Battle-ground  at  Princeton 147 

"  God  bless  you  !" 150 

General  Burgoyne 152 

St.  Johns,  1776 153 

Isle  Aux  Noix 154 

Crown  Point 154 

A  Tender-hearted  Hyena ...   155 

Edmund  Burke 155 

Burgoyne  making  a  Speech  to  the  Indians.   156 
Country  around  Ticonderoga 157 


Ticonderoga 158 

Chimney  Point 168 

Ticonderoga  and  the  Lake,  from  Mount  De 
fiance 160 

General  St.  Clair 161 

The  Place  where  the  Boats  were  burned.. .  162 

Battle  of  Hubbardton 164 

Battle-field  at  Hubbardton 165 

Albany  One  Hundred  Years  ago 166 

General  Philip  Schuyler 167 

Bundle  of  Sticks 168 

Johnson's  House 168 

Butler's  House 169 

The  Church 169 

The  Mohawk  at  Little  Falls 170 

Stone  Meeting-house  at  German  Flats 170 

Colonel  Gansevoort 171 

Colonel  Marinus  Willett 171 

St.  Leger's  Attack  upon  Fort  Schuyler ....  172 

Battle-field  at  Oriskany 174 

General  Herkimer's  House 176 

Place  where  Jane  M'Crea  was  murdered.    .  181 

John  Langdon's  House 182 

General  John  Stark 183 

Dragging  the  Cannon 184 

New  Hampshire  Boys 185 

Van  Schaick's  Mill 186 

Bennington  Battle-ground 188 

Bennington  Heights 190 

Battle  of  Bennington 192 

Washington's  Head-quarters  at  Brandywine  196 

Chad's  House 196 

Lafayette 197 

Lafayette's  Head-quarters  at  Brandywine.  .  197 
Place  where  Howe  and  Clinton  crossed  the 

Brandywine , 199 

Birmingham  Meeting-house 199 

Plan  of  the  Battle  of  Brandywine,  Septem 
ber  llth,  1777 200 

The  Place  where  Knyphausen  crossed  the 

Brandywine 202 

Howe's  Head  -  quarters  after  the  Battle  of 

Brandywine 202 

Old  Philadelphia 203 

Kosciuszko 205 

Gates's  Head-quarters  at  Saratoga 206 

Neilson's  House. .  ; 206 

I  Colonel  Morgan. . ...      .........  208 

Colonel  Morgan's  House ;    ........  209 

Flag  of  Morgan's  Rifle  Corps 209 

Battle-field  at  Stillwater 212 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


15 


The  Tunker  Meeting-house 216 

The  Chew  House,  Germantown 216 

The  Chew  Coach 217 

Reception  in  Chew  House 218 

Battle  of  Germantown 220 

View  from  Fort  Clinton  (looking  North). . .  223 

General  George  Clinton 224 

Bloody  Pond 227 

Burning  the  Ships 229 

The  Prison-ship  Jersey 230 

Battle  of  the  7th  of  October 234 

Never  again  will  hear  the  Footsteps  of  her 

Boy 236 

House  in  which  General  Fraser  died 237 

Place  where  General  Fraser  was  buried  . . .  239 

General  Schuyler's  House 239 

General  Schuyler's  Mill 240 

The  House  occupied  by  Baroness  Reidesel.  240 

The  Cellar 241 

Burgoyne's  Camp  on  the  13th  of  October. .  241 

Surrender  of  Burgoyne 242 

Place  where  the   British   laid   down   their 

Arms 243 

Operations  on  the  Delaware 246 

The  Fort  at  Red  Bank 246 

Whitall's  House  at  Red  Bank 247 

View  from  Red  Bank 248 

The  Explosion  of  the  British  Ship 249 

Fort  Mifflin 250 

Continental  Money 254 

General  Howe's  Quarters  at   High   Street, 

Philadelphia 255 

Whitemarsh 255 

Lydia  Darrah's  House 256 

Washington's  Head-quarters,  Valley  Forge.  258 

Baron  Steuben.' 258 

One  of  the  Ladies 259 

Captain  Cathcart 260 

Stony  Point 262 

General  Anthony  Wayne 263 

"  The  Fort  is  our  own  !" 266 

Stony  Point  and  Verplanck's  Point 267 

A  Baggage-wagon 270 

The  Country  between  New  York  and  Phila 
delphia 271 

The  Meeting-house  at  Freehold 272 

Plan  of  the  Battle  at  Monmouth 276 

The  Battle-field  at  Monmouth 278 

Colonel  Barton 281 

The  House  in  which  Prescott  was  captured  282 

The  Alden  Tavern. . .  .  283 


Admiral  D'Estaing 284 

Map  of  Rhode  Island,  1778 285 

British  Encampment 287 

Butts's  Hill  (looking  South) 287 

View  looking  North  from  Butts's  Hill 288 

General  Lincoln 289 

Governor  Rutledge 290 

Plan  of  the  Siege  of  Charleston,  in  South 

Carolina 291 

Colonel  Tarleton 292 

The  Butchery  of  Buford's  Men 29o 

Andrew  and  the  British  Officer 294 

House  in  which  Andrew  Jackson  was  born  295 

Baron  De  Kalb 295 

Colonel  Sumter 296 

Rugeley's  Bridge 296 

Marion  on  his  Way  to  join  Gates 297 

Sander's  Creek 298 

Plan  of  the  Battle  fought  near  Camden, 

August  16th,  1780 299 

Marion  in  Pursuit  of  the  British 301 

Map  of  Hudson  River  at  West  Point 303 

Part  of  the  Chain 304 

The  Beverly  Robinson  House 305 

Benedict  Arnold 305 

John  Andre.  —  [From  Portrait  by  Joshua 

Reynolds] 306 

West  Point 308 

Hall  in  the  Beverly  Robinson  House — Head 
quarters  of  Arnold 310 

Colonel  Robinson 311 

Smith's  House 312 

Colonel  Lamb 313 

Honora  Sneyd 314 

Arnold,  Andre,  and  Smith :  the  Midnight 

Meeting 316 

The  Hudson  between  Dobbs's  Ferry  and 

West  Point 317 

View  from  Smith's  House 319 

The  Breakfast  of  Hasty-pudding 320 

The  Old  Church  at  Sleepy  Hollow 321 

The  Old  Mill  in  Sleepy  Hollow 322 

The  Headless  Horseman,  Sleepy  Hollow  . . .  323 

Capture  of  Andre 326 

Major  Tallmadge 327 

The  Breakfast-room 329 

Arnold's  Escape 331 

Fac- simile  of  a  Sketch  by  Major  Andre, 

made  the  Day  before  he  was  executed  . .  332 

Monument  to  Andre 333 

King's  Mountain  Battle-ground 336 


16 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Depeyster  raises  a  White  Flag 337 

General  Nathaniel  Greene 339 

Colonel  William  Washington 340 

Colonel  John  E.  Howard 342 

The  Cowpens  Battle-ground 343 

Cowan's  Ford 347 

Where  Greene  crossed  the  Yadkin 348 

Colonel  Otho  H.  Williams 349 

Retreat  of  the  Cavalry 350 

Greene  crossing  the  Dan 351 

Colonel  Lee 353 

The  Pond 355 

Guilford  Court-house 356 

Battle  of  Guilford 357 

Battle-field  at  Guilford 359 

General  Marion 360 

Marion  inviting  the  British  Officer  to  Din 
ner 361 

Marion  and  Lee  capturing  Fort  Watson  ...  363 

Nelson's  Ferry 364 

Eutaw  Springs 365 

Colonel  Pickens. . .  .367 


PAGE 

Rochainbeau 380 

Thomas  M'Kean 382 

Raleigh  Tavern 383 

"  Give  me  Liberty,  or  give  me  Death  !".  .  . .  384 
Position  of  the  English  and  French  Fleets 

previous  to  the  Action 385 

The  Landing  at  Jamestown 386 

Governor  Nelson's  House 386 

Siege  of  Yorktown,  October,  1781 387 

Lauzun 388 

The  Place  where  Adjutant  -  general  Scam- 

mell  was  killed 389 

The  Fortifications  at  Yorktown 389 

The  only  Safe  Place 390 

View  at  Yorktown 391 

Moore's  House 392 

British  Flag 392 

Surrendering  the  Colors 393 

Washington's   Head  -  quarters   below  New- 
burgh 396 

Interior    of    Room  —  Washington's    Head 
quarters  at  Newburgh 397 


THE  BOYS  OF  '76. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE   ALARM. 

ELIJAH  FAYOR,  lived  in  Ryefield,  up  among  the  New  Hampshire 
hills.  On  the  morning  of  April  20th,  1775,  as  he  was  milking  the 
cows,  he  heard  a  clattering  of  hoofs,  and,  looking  up,  saw  Deacon  Clyde 
coming  as  fast  as  his  old  mare  could  bring  him,  and  that  was  not  fast 
enough  to  suit  the  deacon,  for  he  was  striking  the  creature  with  a  switch 
and  digging  his  heels  into  her  sides.  He  was  leaning  forward;  his  coat- 
tails  were  streaming  in  the  wind.  The  mare  was  striking  fire  on  the 
gravel  and  leaving  a  cloud  of  dust  behind. 

"  Tarn  out !  turn  out !"  shouted  the  deacon.  As  there  was  no  one  in 
the  way,  Elijah  wondered  if  the  good  man  had  gone  crazy. 

"Alar-urn!  alar-uni!"  he  cried.  Elijah  thought  that  surely  the  man 
had  lost  his  reason. 

"Alar-um  !  alar-um  !  The  red-coats  are  out,  cutting  and  slashing  all 
before  'em  !  they  have  killed  a  lot  of  folks  at  Concord !  Go — the  minute- 
men  are  parading !"  the  deacon  shouted  to  Elijah's  father,  who  was  stand 
ing  in  front  of  the  house.  The  deacon  did  not  stop — did  not  slacken  his 
speed  even,  but  rode  on,  and  in  a  moment  disappeared  behind  a  cloud  of 
dust. 

Mr.  Favor  stepped  into  the  house,  seized  his  gun  and  fired  it,  reloaded 
and  fired  again,  and  a  third  time.  Almost  before  the  reports  had  ceased 
to  echo,  there  were  answering  guns  from  the  neighbors  up  the  road,  a  half 
mile  away. 

They  were  alarm  guns — the  signal  agreed  upon  for  alarming  the  coun 
try,  if  the  services  of  the  minute-men  were  needed.  Mr.  Favor  was  an  old 
soldier  and  a  minute-man.  He  fought  at  Louisburg  in  1745,  at  Ticonde- 
roga  in  1756,  and  at  Quebec,  with  General  Wolfe,  in  1759,  and  now  he  was 


IS 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


enrolled  to  be  ready  to  go  at  a  minute's  notice  to  defend  the  country  against 
the  British  troops. 

Elijah  ran  into  the  house.  He  was  sixteen  years  old,  stout  and  hearty. 
He  found  his  father  taking  down  his  powder-horn  and  bullet-pouch. 

u  Let  me  go  in  your  place,  father,'  said  Elijah.  His  blood  was  up. 
The  news  brought  by  the  deacon  had  set  him  on  tire.  "  Let  me  go  ;  I  am 
young  and  strong,  and  can  stand  it  better  than  you  can." 

Mr.  Favor  knew  that  Elijah  had  spoken  truly,  for  he  was  well  along  i» 
life ;  the  gray  hairs  were  hanging  about  his  ears,  and  the  rheumatism  was 

racking  his  bones.  Yet  he  was  ready 
to  go,  to  defend  his  own  rights  and 
the  rights  of  his  countrymen. 

"  If  either  of  you  must  go,  let  it 
be  Elijah,"  said  Mrs.  Favor. 

That  settled  it.  Mr.  Favor  hand 
ed  the  powder-horn  to  Elijah;  Mrs. 
Favor  bustled  around,  and  in  a  few 
minutes  had  his  knapsack  filled  with 
bread  and  cold  meat,  besides  a  pair 
of  stockings  and  a  shirt. 

"  Don't  show  the  white  feather 
to  the  red-coats,  my  boy!"  said  Mr. 
Favor. 

"  Take  good  care  of  yourself. 
Don't  get  sick,  and  God  bless  you, 
'Lijah  !"  said  Mrs.  Favor. 
"  You'll  come  back  again,  'Lije,  won't  you  ?"  said  his  sister  Dolly,  who 
threw  her  arms  about  his  neck  and  kissed  him.  He  saw  a  tear  on  her 
cheek ;  it  was  that  which  made  something  come  up  in  his  throat,  but  he 
gulped  it  down,  shouldered  his  gun,  said  u  Good-bye,"  and  started  for  the 
meeting-house. 

He  could  hear  a  drum  beating  the  long  roll.  Men  were  running,  with 
guns  in  their  hands.  He  could  see  that  the  minute-men  were  parading  on 
the  green.  When  he  arrived  at  the  meeting-house,  he  found  Captain  Ab 
bot  and  the  other  officers,  and  nearly  all  the  members  of  the  company. 
Among  them  were  three  of  his  playmates — Dodifer  Hanscom,  Nicholas 
Dolof,  and  Esek  Earl — who  were  going  in  the  place  of  their  fathers. 

The  boys  took  their  places  in  the  ranks.  Just  before  the  company  was 
ready  to  start,  the  old  gray -haired  minister,  Rev.  Mr.  Truegrace,  stood 
upon  the  horse-block,  and  all  took  off  their  hats  while  he  offered  prayer. 


SAMUEL    ADAMS. 


THE  ALARM. 


19 


When  he  had  finished,  Captain  Abbot  stepped  to  the  head  of  the  company, 
drew  his  sword,  and  gave  command. 

"'Tention,  comp'ny!  Trail  arms!  By  the  right  flank — file  right — 
march !" 

The  drummer  and  fifer  struck  up  "  Yankee  Doodle,"  and,  with  Deacon 
Clyde  on  the  right  of  the  line,  and  Captain  Abbot  at  the  head,  in  advance 
of  the  drummer  and  fifer,  the  Ryefield  minute-men  filed  across  the  green 
and  turned  into  the  road  leading  to  Boston,  leaving  their  friends  and 
neighbors — old  men  leaning  on  their  canes,  and  women  and  children — 

standing  on  the  steps  of  the 
meeting-house  and  around  the 
horse-block,  gazing  after  them 
with  throbbing  hearts  and  tear 
ful  eyes. 

Captain  Abbot  and  his  men 
knew  what  they  were  on  the 
march  for  —  to  defend  their 
rights.  They  understood  the 
whole  question  at  issue  between 
England  and  the  colonies.  Eli 
jah,  Dodifer,  Nicholas,  and  Esek 
had  read  the  speeches  of  James 
Otis  and  Samuel  Adams,  the  el 
oquent  patriots  of  Boston.  Eli 
jah  could  repeat  by  heart  what 
they  had  said  in  Boston  town- 
meetings  about  the  rights  of  the  colonies  to  be  represented  in  Parlia 
ment.  He  knew  what  John  Hancock  had  said,  the  rich  merchant  of 
Boston,  who  had  been  in  England,  and  was  present  at  the  king's  corona 
tion,  and  who  was  now  President  of  the  Congress  in  session  at  Philadel 
phia.  He  had  read  the  letters  of  the  Pennsylvania  farmer,  John  Dicken- 
son,  and  the  speeches  of  Edmund  Burke  and  Colonel  Barre,  who  had  main 
tained  the  right  of  the  colonies  to  be  represented  in  Parliament,  and  who 
had  contended  that  without  such  representation  Parliament  had  no  right 
to  tax  them.  He  knew  all  the  arguments  that  had  been  put  forth  by  Lord 
North  and  Lord  Grenville  on  the  other  side,  maintaining  that,  as  the  debt 
of  England  was  largely  contracted  in  driving  the  French  out  of  Canada, 
the  colonies  ought  to  help  pay  it.  He  had  heard  all  about  the  Stamp  Act, 
and  had  rejoiced  to  hear  that  the  people  in  Boston  had  thrown  a  lot  of  tea 
into  the  harbor  rather  than  have  it  landed,  But  the  king's  ministers  had 


JOHN   HANCOCK. 


18 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


enrolled  to  be  ready  to  go  at  a  minute's  notice  to  defend  the  country  against 
the  British  troops. 

Elijah  ran  into  the  house.  He  was  sixteen  years  old,  stout  and  hearty. 
He  found  his  father  taking  down  his  powder-horn  and  bullet-pouch. 

"  Let  me  go  in  your  place,  father/  said  Elijah.  His  blood  was  up. 
The  news  brought  by  the  deacon  had  set  him  on  tire.  "  Let  me  go  ;  I  am 
young  and  strong,  and  can  stand  it  better  than  you  can." 

Mr.  Favor  knew  that  Elijah  had  spoken  truly,  for  he  was  well  along  in 
life ;  the  gray  hairs  were  hanging  about  his  ears,  and  the  rheumatism  was 

racking  his  bones.  Yet  he  was  ready 
to  go,  to  defend  his  own  rights  and 
the  rights  of  his  countrymen. 

"  If  either  of  you  must  go,  let  it 
be  Elijah,"  said  Mrs.  Favor. 

That  settled  it.  Mr.  Favor  hand 
ed  the  powder-horn  to  Elijah;  Mrs. 
Favor  bustled  around,  and  in  a  few 
minutes  had  his  knapsack  filled  with 
bread  and  cold  meat,  besides  a  pair 
of  stockings  and  a  shirt. 

"  Don't  show  the  white  feather 
to  the  red-coats,  my  boy !"  said  Mr. 
Favor. 

"  Take  good  care  of  yourself. 
Don't  get  sick,  and  God  bless  you, 
'Lijah  !"  said  Mrs.  Favor. 
"  You'll  come  back  again,  'Lije,  won't  you  ?"  said  his  sister  Dolly,  who 
threw  her  arms  about  his  neck  and  kissed  him.  He  saw  a  tear  on  her 
cheek ;  it  was  that  which  made  something  come  up  in  his  throat,  but  he 
gulped  it  down,  shouldered  his  gun,  said  "  Good-bye,"  and  started  for  the 
meeting-house. 

He  could  hear  a  drum  beating  the  long  roll.  Men  were  running,  with 
guns  in  their  hands.  He  could  see  that  the  minute-men  were  parading  on 
the  green.  When  he  arrived  at  the  meeting-house,  he  found  Captain  Ab 
bot  and  the  other  officers,  and  nearly  all  the  members  of  the  company. 
Among  them  were  three  of  his  playmates — Dodifer  Hanscom,  Nicholas 
Dolof,  and  Esek  Earl — who  were  going  in  the  place  of  their  fathers. 

The  boys  took  their  places  in  the  ranks.  Just  before  the  company  waa 
ready  to  start,  the  old  gray- haired  minister,  Rev.  Mr.  Truegrace,  stood 
upon  the  horse-block,  and  all  took  off  their  hats  while  he  offered  prayer. 


SAMUEL    ADAMS. 


THE  ALARM. 


19 


When  he  had  finished,  Captain  Abbot  stepped  to  the  head  of  the  company, 
drew  his  sword,  and  gave  command. 

"'Tention,  comp'ny!  Trail  arms!  By  the  right  flank — file  right — 
march !" 

The  drummer  and  fifer  struck  up  "  Yankee  Doodle,"  and,  with  Deacon 
Clyde  on  the  right  of  the  line,  and  Captain  Abbot  at  the  head,  in  advance 
of  the  drummer  and  fifer,  the  Kyefield  minute-men  filed  across  the  green 
and  turned  into  the  road  leading  to  Boston,  leaving  their  friends  and 
neighbors — old  men  leaning  on  their  canes,  and  women  and  children — 

standing  on  the  steps  of  the 
meeting-house  and  around  the 
horse-block,  gazing  after  them 
with  throbbing  hearts  and  tear 
ful  eyes. 

Captain  Abbot  and  his  men 
knew  what  they  were  on  the 
march  for  —  to  defend  their 
rights.  They  understood  the 
whole  question  at  issue  between 
England  and  the  colonies.  Eli 
jah,  Dodifer,  Nicholas,  and  Esek 
had  read  the  speeches  of  James 
Otis  arid  Samuel  Adams,  the  el 
oquent  patriots  of  Boston.  Eli 
jah  could  repeat  by  heart  what 
they  had  said  in  Boston  town- 
meetings,  about  the  rights  of  the  colonies  to  be  represented  in  Parlia 
ment.  He  knew  what  John  Hancock  had  said,  the  rich  merchant  of 
Boston,  who  had  been  in  England,  and  was  present  at  the  king's  corona 
tion,  and  who  was  now  President  of  the  Congress  in  session  at  Philadel 
phia.  He  had  read  the  letters  of  the  Pennsylvania  farmer,  John  Dicken- 
son,  and  the  speeches  of  Edmund  Burke  and  Colonel  Barre,  who  had  main 
tained  the  right  of  the  colonies  to  be  represented  in  Parliament,  and  who 
had  contended  that  without  such  representation  Parliament  had  no  right 
to  tax  them.  He  knew  all  the  arguments  that  had  been  put  forth  by  Lord 
North  and  Lord  Grenville  on  the  other  side,  maintaining  that,  as  the  debt 
of  England  was  largely  contracted  in  driving  the  French  out  of  Canada, 
the  colonies  ought  to  help  pay  it.  He  had  heard  all  about  the  Stamp  Act, 
and  had  rejoiced  to  hear  that  the  people  in  Boston  had  thrown  a  lot  of  tea 
into  the  harbor  rather  than  have  it  landed,  But  the  king's  ministers  had 


JOHN    HANCOCK. 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


undertaken,  in  revenge,  to  destroy  the  liberties  of  the  people.  They  had  a 
bill  passed  by  Parliament,  called  the  Regulation  Act,  which  took  away  the 
rights  and  liberties  of  the  people  of  Massachusetts.  Under  the  charter  the 
people  elected  their  councilors  and  representatives,  but  under  the  new  law 
the  number  of  councilors  was  changed.  There  might  be  twelve,  or  thirty- 
six,  and  they  were  to  be  appointed  by  the  king  through  the  governor,  who 
could  remove  them  at  any  time  and  appoint  others.  The  sheriffs,  judges, 
justices,  and  all  officers  who,  under  the  charter,  had  been  appointed  by 
the  governor  and  council  together,  were  to  be  appointed  by  the  governor 
alone.  The  governor  was  to  say  what  salaries  all  officers  were  to  receive, 
and  the  people  were  to  have  nothing  to  say  about  it. 

As  the  governor  was  appointed  by  the  king,  such  a  law  made  the  king 
the  government,  but,  as  the  king  was  three  thousand  miles  away,  it  virt 
ually  made  the  governor  the  government.  The  people  were  not  permitted 
even  to  elect  jurors ;  that  was  to  be  done  by  the  sheriffs.  Twice  a  year 
the  people  might  meet  in  town-meeting,  and  elect  town  officers  and  repre- 

resentatives ;  but  nothing  else  was  to  be  done, 
nor  could  any  other  meeting  be  held  without 
the  permission  of  the  governor. 

Troops  had  been  sent  over  from  England 
to  enforce  these  laws,  and  Governor  Hutchin- 
son  had  been  instructed  to  arrest  Samuel  Ad 
ams  and  John  Hancock,  and  send  them  to  En 
gland  to  be  tried  for  treason. 

This  was  in  1774.  Parliament  had  also 
passed  a  bill,  called  the  Boston  Port  Bill,  shut 
ting  up  the  port  of  Boston,  so  that  no  ships 
could  arrive  or  depart  except  war-ships.  Gen 
eral  Gage  had  been  ordered  to  Boston,  to 
take  command  of  the  troops  and  enforce  these 
laws. 

On  the  first  day  of  June,  1774,  Governor  Htitchinson  sailed  for  En 
gland,  and  when  the  clock  on  the  old  brick  meeting-house  in  Cornhill 
struck  twelve  on  that  day,  the  Boston  Port  Bill  went  into  effect. 

What  that  bill  was,  and  what  effect  it  had  upon  Boston,  Elijah  Favor 
learned  from  a  letter  written  by  his  cousin,  Peter  Tremont,  who  lived  in 
Boston : 

"  Boston,  January  1st,  1775. 

" COUSIN  ELIJAH, — You  can't  think  how  dull  it  is  here  in  Boston.     Six 
months  ago  this  was  the  liveliest  town  in  America.     Every  body  was  busy 


LORD    NORTH. 


THE  ALARM.  21 

the  streets  were  filled  with  people,  the  shop-keepers  were  selling  their  goods, 
the  carpenters  were  putting  up  houses,  the  shipwrights  were  building  ves 
sels,  the  calkers  and  rope-makers  were  all  at  work,  ships  were  coming  and 
going:  but  now  it  is  just  like  Sunday.  Not  a  ship  can  come  into  the  har 
bor,  nor  can  one  go  out.  The  war-ships  are  anchored  in  the  channel,  and 
the  guns  at  the  castle  are  kept  loaded,  ready  to  fire  upon  any  vessel  at 
tempting  to  pass.  A  fishing  smack  can't  go  down  to  Cohasset  to  catch 
cod,  nor  a  dory  even  to  Spectacle  Island  to  catch  mackerel  or  dinners. 

"  The  people  of  Watertown  or  Newton  can't  load  a  gundalow  with  cord- 
wood  and  bring  it  down  Charles  River,  and  unload  it  at  Boston  ;  nor  can 
the  farmers  who  cut  hay  on  the  Medford  marshes  load  a  scow  and  bring  it 
down  the  Mystic,  and  deliver  it  at  the  Blue  Anchor  or  any  other  stable. 

"  The  brick-makers  at  Leeclnnere's  Point  can't  load  a  boat  with  bricks 
and  take  them  across  the  water  to  this  town.  The  people  of  Charlestown 
have  some  nice  cabbage-gardens  out  on  the  road  leading  to  Charlestown 
Neck,  but  they  can't  bring  a  cabbage  or  turnip  across  the  ferry  and  sell 
it  in  market. 

"A  man  who  owns  an  apple  orchard  on  Bunker  Hill,  and  some  pear- 
trees  on  Breed's  Hill,  just  beyond  Charlestown,  when  he  wanted  to  market 
his  fruit  last  fall,  couldn't  bring  it  across  the  ferry,  but  had  to  take  his 
apples  in  a  cart,  out  over  Charlestown  Neck,  round  through  Cambridge 
and  Roxbury,  to  get  to  market.  Nothing  can  come  or  go  by  water. 

"Perhaps  the  king  and  his  ministers  think  that  they  can  bring  us  to 
terms  by  corking  us  up,  as  if  we  were  so  many  flies  in  a  bottle ;  but  they 
will  find  themselves  mistaken.  The  people  are  more  determined  than 
ever  not  to  give  in. 

"  It  is  hard  on  the  poor.  There  are  hundreds  of  sailors  lounging 
around  the  taverns  and  boarding-houses,  drinking  grog,  with  nothing  tc 
do.  Hundreds  of  ship -carpenters,  house-joiners,  arid  mechanics  are  idle. 
The  wharves  are  rotting;  grass  will  grow  in  the  streets  in  the  spring. 
The  town  looks  as  if  half  the  people  were  dead,  and  the  other  half  were 
attending  their  funeral. 

"  The  town  is  full  of  soldiers.  The  Common  is  covered  with  tents, 
cannon,  and  baggage -wagons.  Sentinels  are  posted  everywhere.  Every 
morning  and  evening,  and  at  midday,  we  hear  the  drums  beating. 

"  People  all  over  the  country  are  sympathizing  with  us,  in  a  practical 
way,  by  sending  provisions.  The  people  in  Hartford,  Connecticut,  were 
the  first  to  inform  us  that  they  would  help  us,  but  the  Windham  County 
folks  got  ahead  of  them.  They  sent  two  hundred  and  fifty-eight  sheep  in 
July.  A  few  days  later,  Colonel  Israel  Putnam,  who  is  an  old  soldier,  and 


22  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

who  fought  against  the  French  and  Indians  with  Governor  Gage,  and  who 
was  with  Lord  Howe  at  Ticonderoga  when  he  was  killed,  came  with  one 
hundred  and  thirty  sheep.  From  almost  every  town  in  New  England  the 
people  have  sent  something — rye,  wheat,  flour,  pease,  beans,  cattle,  sheep,  or 
fish.  The  people  of  Wilmington,  North  Carolina,  have  raised  £2000  for 
us.  A  ship-load  of  rice  has  been  sent  by  the  people  of  Charleston,  South 
Carolina,  to  be  landed  at  Newport,  for,  of  course,  it  could  not  be  landed 
here.  Mr.  Gadsden,  who  wrote  a  letter  to  the  people  here,  is  full  of  pluck. 
'  Don't  pay  a  cent  for  the  tea,'  he  writes,  using  an  oath  to  make  it  em 
phatic.  The  French  and  English  at  Quebec  have  sent  one  thousand  bush 
els  of  wheat. 

"  Lord  North  planned  a  mean  game.  He  thought  that  he  would  play 
off  Marblehead  against  Boston,  making  that  place  the  port  of  entry.  He 
reckoned  that  the  Marblehead  merchants  would  be  so  eager  to  get  the 
trade,  that  he  could  get  up  a  rivalry  which  would  divide  the  people  of  the 
colony.  Some  of  the  traders  of  Marblehead  jumped  at  the  bait,  and  were 
mean  enough  to  solicit  General  Gage  for  his  patronage,  but  one  hundred 
and  twenty-five  others  signed  an  address  to  General  Gage,  in  which  they 
say :  c  Nature,  in  the  formation  of  our  harbor,  forbids  our  being  rivals  in 
commerce  to  Boston.  And  were  it  otherwise,  we  must  be  lost  to  all  the 
feelings  of  humanity,  could  we  indulge  one  thought  to  seize  on  wealth  and 
raise  our  fortunes  on  the  ruin  of  our  suffering  neighbors.' 

"  Do  you  think  that  Boston  is  going  to  give  in,  so  long  as  the  whole 
country,  except  here  and  there  a  Tory,  is  with  her  ? 

"  When  Colonel  Putnam  was  here,  he  stopped  with  Dr.  Warren.  He 
is  well  acquainted  with  most  of  the  officers  in  the  regiments  here,  and 
went  out  to  the  camps  on  the  Common  to  see  them.  He  had  a  good  talk 
with  Major  Small.  '  If  Boston  don't  give  in,  she  may  expect  twenty  ships 
of  the  line  and  twenty  regiments  over  here  pretty  soon,'  said  Small.  l  If 
they  come,  I  shall  treat  them  as  enemies,'  Putnam  replied. 

"  General  Gage  finds  it  difficult  to  get  the  machinery  of  the  new  gov 
ernment  into  working  order.  He  has  appointed  a  set  of  councilors,  but 
some  won't  accept,  and  others  who  have  accepted  have  been  obliged  to  re 
sign.  Timothy  Paine,  of  Worcester,  accepted,  but  the  people  of  that  town 
turned  out  one  night,  formed  a  hollow  square,  and  made  Paine  stand  in  the 
centre,  take  off  his  hat,  and  resign  the  office.  Then  they  started — about 
fifteen  hundred  of  them — for  Rutland,  where  Mr.  Murray,  another  coun 
cilor,  lives;  but  Murray  took  to  his  heels,  and  they  couldn't  find  him. 

"  Mr.  Willard,  another  councilor,  who  lives  in  Lancaster,  happened  to 
be  down  in  Connecticut,  and  the  people  there,  hearing  of  it,  made  him 


THE  ALARM.  23 

march  six  miles,  and  so  frightened  him  that  he  promised  never  to  take  his 
seat.  Out  of  thirty-six  appointed  by  Gage,  more  than  twenty  have  backed 
oat,  while  the  others  are  sneaking  round  like  dogs  that  have  been  stealing 
sheep. 

"  Gage  don't  have  any  better  success  with  the  judges  whom  he  has  ap 
pointed.  When  the  time  came  for  holding  the  court  at  Springfield,  where 
Gage's  new  judge  was  to  sit,  about  two  thousand  people  formed  in  proces 
sion,  and,  with  drums  beating,  marched  to  the  court-house,  set  up  a  black 
flag,  and  told  the  judge  that  if  he  entered  the  court-house  it  was  at  his 
peril.  One  of  the  officers  of  the  court — Williams,  of  Hatfield — had  to  go 
round  a  large  circle  and  ask  the  people's  forgiveness.  Two  others  got 
down  on  their  knees  and  resigned  their  offices.  The  crowd  put  old  Cap 
tain  Mirrick,  of  Monson,  upon  a  cart,  drew  him  round  a  while,  and  threat 
ened  to  give  him  a  coat  of  tar  and  feathers  for  accepting  office  ;  but,  as  he 
is  an  old  man,  concluded  not  to  do  it. 

"Any  man  can  lead  a  horse  to  water,  but  a  whole  army  can't  make  him 
drink,  and  that  is  what  Gage  is  just  finding  out.  When  the  Superior  Court 
was  opened  the  other  day  here  in  the  State-house,  every  man  who  had  been 
selected  as  juror  refused  to  take  the  oath. 

"'Why  do  you  refuse?'  the  chief -justice  (Oliver)  asked  of  Thomas 
Chase. 

"'Because  the  chief -justice  of  this  court,  Judge  Oliver,  has  been  im 
peached  by  the  late  representatives  of  this  province,'  was  the  fearless  reply. 
Three  cheers  for  him  ! 

"  General  Gage  called  a  meeting  of  his  new  council  at  Salem,  but  not 
enough  for  a  quorum  obeyed  the  summons,  and  so,  though  it  is  contrary  to 
the  Regulation  Act  for  the  council  to  meet  in  Boston,  he  had  to  adjourn  it 
to  meet  here,  on  the  pretense  that  it  can't  do  business  unless  protected  by 
the  troops.  He  is  the  first  to  break  the  new  law ! 

"  The  people  are  in  earnest,  as  General  Gage  and  all  his  officers  will 
soon  find.  Judge  Myrie,  who  lives  up  in  Monson,  is  one  of  Gage's  coun 
cilors.  He  has  made  himself  obnoxious  to  the  people,  and  not  long  ago 
they  treated  him  to  a  free  ride  in  a  dung-cart. 

"An  outrage  was  committed  on  the  morning  of  September  1st.  The 
province  powder-house  is  at  Quarry  Hill,  almost  on  the  line  between  Med- 
ford  and  Cambridge.  The  powder  there  belonged  to  the  different  towns, 
and  Gage  concluded  to  seize  it.  About  daylight  two  hundred  and  sixty 
soldiers  got  into  boats  at  Long  Wharf,  rowed  up  the  Mystic,  and  landed  at 
Mr.  Temple's  farm  ;  marched  to  the  magazine ;  took  away  two  hundred 
and  fifty  half -barrels  (all  there  was) ;  then  went  on  to  Cambridge  and 


THE   BOYS   OF  7<>. 


CARTKI)    THROUGH    THE    STREETS. 


seized  two  field-pieces,  and  returned  as  if  they  had  been  making  an  exclu 
sion  into  the  enemy's  country. 

"  The  next  day  there  was  a  lively  time  in  Cambridge.  All  Middlesex 
was  aflame,  to  say  nothing  of  the  towns  in  Worcester.  The  people  came 
flocking  into  town — several  thousand  of  them.  Dr.  Warren  and  some  of 
the  other  patriots  rode  out  and  persuaded  the  citizens  not  to  do  any  thing 
rash.  They  found  old  Judge  Danforth  standing  on  the  Court-house  steps, 
promising  never  to  have  any  thing  more  to  do  with  Gage's  government. 
He  is  a  councilor.  Then  the  sheriff  was  called  upon  to  resign. 

uThe  boys  are  as  wide  awake  as  the  men.  They  hoot  at  the  Tories 
and  pin  papers  to  their  backs.  The  Tories  do  not  like  such  notoriety ;  but 
so  long  as  they  uphold  the  unjust  measures  of  the  king,  they  must  expect 
to  be  hooted  at. 


THE  ALARM, 


25 


"  The  people  in  the  country  towns  are  organizing  companies  of  minutt- 
raen,  who  are  to  be  ready,  in  case  of  an  alarm,  to  start  at  a  minute's  notice. 
A.  ship  just  in  from  England  brings  word  that  a  lot  more  of  troops  are  to 
be  sent  over  to  force  us  to  submit,  and  the  prospect  is  that,  sooner  or  later, 
we  shall  have  to  fight  for  our  liberties ;  for  as  to  submitting  to  such  tyran 
ny,  we  will  not.  PETER." 

Elijah,  Esek,  Nicholas,  and  Dodifer  were  equally  determined  with  Peter 
that  they  never  would  submit  to  such  tyranny,  and  so  they  were  hastening 
toward  Boston.  So  rapidly  did  they  march  that  they  found  themselves 


A    TORY. 


at  Medford,  only  five  miles  from  Boston,  at  the  end  of  the 
having  marched  nearly  sixty  miles.  The  New  Hampshire 
assembling  in  that  town.  The  Essex  County  (Massachusetts) 
in  Chelsea.  Other  Massachusetts  troops  were  at  Cambridge. 
necticut  troops  were  there.  The  Rhode  Island  soldiers  were 
In  all,  there  were  twenty  thousand. 

The  New  Hampshire  troops  were  commanded  by  Colonel 
an  old  Indian  fighter.     When  he  was  a  young  man,  he  was 


second  day, 
troops  were 
troops  were 
Some  Con 
in  Roxbury. 

John  Stark, 
captured  by 


26  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

the  Indians  while  out  hunting  on  a  stream  called  Baker's  River,  one  of  the 
branches  of  the  Merrimac.  He  was  taken  to  Canada.  When  he  arrived 
there,  the  Indians  told  him  that  he  must  run  the  gantlet,  and  they  formed 
themselves  into  two  lines,  with  clubs  in  their  hands,  to  give  him  a  blow  as 
he  passed.  His  fellow-prisoner,  named  William  Stinson,  ran  first,  and  was 
terribly  beaten.  Stark  had  no  intention  of  suffering  that  way,  and  when 
it  came  his  turn  to  run,  he  wrenched  the  club  from  the  hands  of  the  first 
Indian,  then,  swinging  it  with  all  his  might,  knocked  the  Indians  right  and 
left,  tumbling  them  one  upon  another,  and  getting  through  without  receiv 
ing  a  blow,  but  leaving  many  aching  heads  behind  him.  Instead  of  pun 
ishing  him  for  what  he  had  done,  the  Indians  patted  him  on  the  back,  and 
called  him  a  "  brave,"  and  wanted  him  to  be  their  chief. 

One  day  they  set  Stark  to  hoeing  corn.  That  was  degradation,  for  the 
squaws  hoe  corn  —  the  braves  never.  Stark  pretended  that  he  did  not 
know  corn  from  weeds,  and  so  cut  it  up.  They  threatened  to  punish  him, 
whereupon  he  threw  the  hoe  into  the  river.  The  Indians  found  that  they 
could  do  nothing  with  him  as  a  prisoner,  and  were  glad  to  sell  him  his 
freedom.  He  came  back  to  New  Hampshire,  and,  when  war  broke  out 
between  England  and  France  in  1755,  he  went  to  Lake  Champlain  as  a 
captain  of  the  New  Hampshire  Rangers,  and  fought  the  French  and  In 
dians,  made  many  a  weary  march  through  the  wilderness,  and  did  the  en 
emy  all  the  damage  he  could.  Now  he  was  ready  to  do  what  he  could  in 
defense  of  his  rights. 

The  soldiers  felt  their  blood  flow  more  quickly  through  their  veins  as 
they  listened  to  the  story  of  what  had  occurred  at  Lexington  and  Concord. 
This  is  the  way  it  was :  the  Sons  of  Liberty  saw  that  in  all  probability  they 
would  have  to  fight  for  their  liberties.  Samuel  Adams,  John  Hancock, 
and  men  from  all  parts  of  Massachusetts,  had  met  in  convention  to  delib 
erate  upon  the  dangers  that  threatened  them.  They  collected  some  can 
non,  powder,  balls,  flour,  fish,  and  rice  at  Concord.  Governor  Gage  heard 
of  it,  and  on  the  20th  of  March  sent  two  of  his  officers,  Captain  Brown  and 
Ensign  De  Bernicre,  dressed  as  citizens,  to  see  what  the  Sons  of  Liberty 
were  doing.  General  Gage  had  ten  regiments  of  troops  in  Boston,  and  he 
resolved  to  send  out  a  party  secretly,  and  destroy  the  cannon,  seize  the  sup 
plies,  and  also  to  capture  Hancock  and  Adams,  who  were  stopping  with 
Rev.  Jonas  Clarke,  in  Lexington.  It  was  eighteen  miles  to  Concord,  and 
about  twelve  to  Lexington. 

The  Sons  of  Liberty  in  Boston  kept  a  sharp  lookout  on  all  of  Gage's 
movements.  One  of  the  most  active  of  them  was  Paul  Revere,  who 
cleaned  watches  and  clocks,  and  who  had  tried  his  hand  at  engraving. 


THE   ALARM. 


27 


Another  was  Ebenezer  Dorr,  who 
dressed  calf -skins.  Another  was 
Henry  Knox,  a  young  man  who  kept 
a  book -store  in  Cornhill,  where  the 
British  officers  of  a  literary  turn  used 
to  lounge  when  they  had  nothing  else 
to  do.  Another  was  Mr.  Hall,  who 
kept  a  grog-shop.  Another  was  Mr. 
Devens,  an  adjutant  in  the  militia. 
All  of  these,  and  scores  more,  had 
their  eyes  open. 

Mr.  Hall  was  in  his  grog-shop  on 
the  evening  of  the  18th  of  April, 
when  a  woman  stepped  in.  She  was 
a  poor  creature  who  lived  in  the  bar 
racks  of  the  Forty -third  regiment. 
She  had  been  drinking,  and  was  a  lit 
tle  tipsy,  but  wanted  another  drink. 

"  The  troops  are  going  out  to  Con 
cord  to-night,"  said  the  woman. 

Mr.  Hall  pricked  up  his  ears. 
Out  to  Concord!  The  cannon  were  there  —  and  the  powder.  Mr.  Hall 
had  an  apprentice,  William  Baker.  He  took  William  one  side,  whispered 
in  his  ear,  and  in  a  short  time  William  was  going  upon  the  run  to  see 
Adjutant  Devens.  And  a  few  minutes  later,  the  people  who  lived  at  the 
north  end  of  the  town  were  surprised  to  see  two  lighted  lanterns  hang 
ing  in  the  belfry  of  the  North  Meeting-house.  Little  did  they  think  that 
those  two  tallow-candles  would  throw  their  feeble  rays  far  down  the  cent 
uries.  But  people  over  in  Charlestown  and  Cambridge,  who  were  on  the 
watch,  understood  the  signal,  that  the  British  troops  were  going  to  cross 
from  Boston  to  the  main -land  in  boats,  instead  of  marching  out  over 
the  "Neck"  to  Roxbury.  William  Baker  was  meanwhile  upon  the  run 
toward  the  north  end  of  the  town.  The  sentinele  knew  him,  and  did  not 
stop  him,  for  he  served  them  with  grog.  He  found  a  boat,  and  pulled 
across  the  river  to  Charlestown,  and  ran  to  see  good  Deacon  Larkin,  who 
had  a  fast  horse.  The  deacon  heard  what  William  had  to  say,  and  ran  to 
his  stable,  and  saddled  and  bridled  the  horse.  A  moment  later  the  in 
genious  watch-maker  and  engraver,  Paul  Revere,  leaped  into  the  saddle 
and  disappeared  in  the  darkness,  riding  north-west  along  the  road  to 
Charlestown  Neck  and  Medford. 


PAUL    REVERE. [1  785-1818.  J 


THE    BOYS  OF   70. 


THE    MIDNIGHT    RIDE    OF   PAUL   REVERE. 

"A  hurry  of  hoofs  in  a  village  street, 
A  shape  in  the  moonlight,  a  bulk  in  the  dark, 
And  beneath  from  the  pebbles,  in  passing,  a  spark 
Struck  out  by  a  steed  flying  fearless  and  fleet ; 
That  was  all !    and  yet,  through  the  gloom  and  the  light, 
The  fate  of  a  nation  was  riding  that  night ; 
And  the  spark  struck  out  by  that  steed  in  his  flight 
Kindled  the  land  into  flame  with  its  heat. 
He  has  left  the  village  and  mounted  the  steep, 
And  beneath  him,  tranquil  and  broad  and  deep, 
Is  the  Mystic  meeting  the  ocean  tides; 
And  under  the  alders  that  skirt  its  edge, 
Now  soft  on  the  sand,  now  loud  on  the  ledge, 
Is  heard  the  tramp  of  his  steed  as  he  rides. 
It  was  twelve  by  the  village  clock 
When  he  crossed  the  bridge  into  Medford  town ; 
He  heard  the  crowing  of  the  cock 
And  the  barking  of  the  farmer's  dog, 
And  felt  the  damp  of  the  river  fog, 
That  rises  after  the  sun  goes  down." 

People  who  had  just  gone  to  bed  heard  the  clattering  of  hoofs,  and 
wondered  who  was  riding  at  such  a  break-neck  speed.    He  halted  at  houses 


THE  ALARM. 


29 


here  and  there,  thundering  at  the  doors.    "  The  Regulars  are  out,"  he  says, 
and  the  next  moment  is  away. 

While  Paul  Revere  is  riding  out  through  Medford,  Ebenezer  Dorr, 
mounted  on  an  old  plod-jogging  horse,  with  his  saddle-bags  flopping  at 
every  step  of  the  animal,  is  going  out  over  Boston  Neck.  The  British  sen 
tinels  say  to  themselves,  "  He  is  a  countryman,'"1  never  once  mistrusting 
that  as  soon  as  the  rider  is  past  the  last  sentinel  the  old  mare  will  be  going 
like  the  wind  toward  Cambridge. 


Ebenezer  reaches  Cambridge,  stops  a  moment  with  the  Committee  of 
Safety,  and  then,  with  the  old  mare  all  afoam,  is  riding  toward  Lexington 
with  a  letter  from  Dr.  Warren  to  John  Hancock. 

About  eight  hundred  British  are  on  the  march,  under  Lieutenant-col 
onel  Smith,  of  the  Tenth  regiment,  and  Major  John  Pitcairn,  of  the  Marines. 


30 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


Paul  Revere  has  the  start  of  Mr.  Dorr,  and  comes  thundering  up  to 
Rev.  Mr.  Clark's  at  midnight.  Sergeant  Monroe  and  eight  men  are  guard 
ing  the  house. 

"  You  can't  come  in,  and  you  mustn't  make  a  noise,"  the  sergeant  says. 

"  You'll  have  noise  enough  before  morning,"  the  rider  replies. 

"  I  can't  admit  strangers  at  this  time  of  night,"  the  good  minister  says. 

John  Hancock  knows  the  watch-maker's  voice. 

"  Come  in,  Revere ;  we  know  you,"  he  shouts  from  the  chamber  window. 

They  hear  the  exciting  news. 


"THE  REGULARS  ARE  COMING!" 

"  Ring  the  bell !"  says  Hancock ;  and  a  few  minutes  later  the  people  of 
Lexington  hear  the  bell  ringing  as  it  never  has  rung  before.  They  hear 
it  saying,  "  The  Regulars  are  coming !  the  Regulars  are  coming !" 

John  Hancock,  young  and  full  of  fire,  is  cleaning  his  gun.  His  lady- 
love,  Dorothy  Quincy,  is  there  at  Mr.  Clark's.  Will  not  her  presence  make 
him  brave  \ 

"  John,  it  isn't  our  business  to  fight  to-night ;  we  belong  to  the  Com 
mittee,"  Samuel  Adams  says,  with  his  hand  on  John's  shoulder,  and  John 
goes  with  him  to  the  next  town,  Burlington,  to  write  his  name,  a  year  later, 


THE  ALARM. 


31 


so  large,  upon  the  Declaration  of  Independence,  that  King  George  can 
read  it  without  putting  on  his  spectacles. 

Up  in  Lexington  village,  young  Jonathan  Harrington,  fifer  to  the  min 
nte-men,  is  sleeping ;  but  his  mother  hears  the  bell,  and  hastens  to  Jona 
than's  chamber. 

"  Get  up,  Jonathan !  The  Regulars  are  coming,  and  something  must 
be  done." 

The  minute-men  with  the  guns  are  running  to  Mr.  Buckman's  tavern. 

Half-past  four  in  the  morning,  Thaddeus  Brown  comes  running  up  the 
road  to  Buckman's. 


THE  LEXINGTON  MASSACRE. 


"  The  red-coats  are  almost  here !" 

The  drummer  beats  the  long  roll  out  on  the  green,  in  front  of  the  meet 
ing-house.  The  minute-men  come  out  from  the  tavern  and  form  in  line. 
Captain  Parker  is  their  commander.  He  sees  in  the  dawning  light  the 
long  column  of  British  troops  coming  up  the  Boston  road.  He  has  only 
fifty  men ;  they  will  be  powerless  against  eight  hundred. 

"  Disperse — don't  fire !"  is  the  order  of  the  cool-headed  captain.  Just 
as  they  begin  to  disperse,  Lieutenant-colonel  Smith  and  Major  Pitcairn 
ride  forward.  The  major  is  sixty  years  old.  People  say  he  is  a  kind 
and  genial  man,  but  he  has  lost  his  head  this  morning.  He  is  a  terrible 
swearer. 


32  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

"  Lay  down  your  arms,  you  rebels,  and  disperse !"  he  shouts,  with  an 
oath,  and  fires  his  pistol. 

"Fire!"  It  is  Lieutenant-colonel  Smith  who  issues  the  order,  and  the 
British  open  fire,  killing  eight  and  wounding  ten  of  the  minute-men.  The 
others  flee,  and  the  British  give  a  hurra  over  the  victory,  which  is  nothing 
but  a  massacre. 

At  two  o'clock,  Paul  Revere  rode  into  Concord.  A  few  minutes  later, 
the  meeting-house  bell  was  ringing,  and  the  whole  town  was  astir.  The 
cannon,  powder,  balls,  flour,  and  supplies  must  be  saved.  Some  of  the 
farmers  came  with  their  ox-carts,  others  with  their  horses,  to  convey  the 
articles  to  places  of  safety.  The  cannon  carriages,  poor  things,  roughly 
made  by  the  country  wheelwrights,  were  taken  across  Concord  River  to 
Colonel  Barrett's  house.  It  was  thought  best  to  bury  the  cannon,  and  some 
of  the  pieces  were  dragged  into  a  field,  a  trench  dug,  the  cannon  laid  in  it, 
the  earth  thrown  over  them ;  then  a  farmer  began  to  plow  the  field.  Some 
of  the  flour  was  carted  away  to  barns  and  covered  with  hay.  No  sleep  in 
Concord  after  two  o'clock ;  but  men  and  women  are  astir,  doing  what  they 
can  to  secure  every  thing  before  the  British  make  their  appearance. 

Although  it  is  the  19th  of  April,  the  season  is  far  advanced.  The  fields 
are  green,  the  peach-trees  in  bloom,  and  the  birches  and  maples  are  putting 
forth  their  leaves.  The  robins  are  building  their  nests,  and  the  sparrows 
are  chirping  in  the  thickets,  on  this  bright,  sunny  morning. 

Seven  o'clock.  The  people  of  Concord  hear  a  drum  beat,  and  the  shrill 
notes  of  the  fife,  playing  the  "  White  Cockade."  The  fifer  down  by  Lex 
ington  played  "  Yankee  Doodle,"  and  a  boy  laughed  to  hear  him. 

"  What  are  you  laughing  at,  boy  ?"  asked  Major  Pitcairn. 

"  The  Yankees  will  make  you  dance  it  before  night,"  said  the  boy. 

Perhaps  the  fifer  was  tired  of  "  Yankee  Doodle,"  and  so  struck  up  the 
"  White  Cockade  "  for  a  change. 

And  now  the  people,  looking  down  the  Boston  road,  behold  the  even 
ranks  of  the  British.  Major  Pitcairn  and  Lieutenant-colonel  Smith  are  on 
horseback.  Above  the  advancing  column  waves  the  cross  of  St.  George, 
which  has  waved  in  triumph  over  many  a  battle-field.  The  sunlight  glints 
from  the  bright  gun-barrels  and  bayonets.  Proudly,  defiantly,  the  column 
moves  on. 

The  people  of  Concord  know  nothing  of  the  slaughter  at  Lexington. 
Fifty  or  more  minute-men  have  gathered  under  Major  Buttrick,  ready  to 
defend  their  homes  and  fight  for  their  rights,  if  need  be.  Oh,  if  they 
only  knew  what  had  been  done  at  Lexington !  But  no  word  has  reached 
them.  What  can  fifty  farmers  do  against  eight  hundred  disciplined 


THE   ALARM. 


35 


"LET  us  STAND  OUR  GROUND." 

troops  ?  Not  much.  They  have  succeeded  in  secreting  most  of  the  can 
non  and  nearly  all  of  the  powder,  and  some  other  things.  They  have  done 
what  they  could.  The  flag  that  waves  above  them  is  not  so  gorgeous  as 
the  banner  of  the  king ;  it  is  only  a  piece  of  cloth  with  a  pine-tree  painted 
upon  it,  but  brave  men  are  marshaled  around  it.  The  minister  of  Con 
cord,  Rev.  Mr.  Emerson,  is  there,  with  his  gun  on  his  shoulder. 

"Let 'iis  stand  our  ground,"  he  says. 

"  We  are  too  few ;  we  had  better  retreat  to  the  other  side  of  the  river," 
says  Major  Buttrick.  He  is  no  coward,  but  is  cool-headed,  and  gives  wise 
counsel.  The  minute-men  march  up  the  street,  cross  the  bridge,  but  come 
to  a  halt  by  Mr.  Hunt's  house. 

The  British  troops  halt  in  the  road  by  the  meeting-house.  Colonel 
Smith  and  Major  Pitcairn  dismount,  leave  their  horses,  go  into  the  burial- 
ground,  and  with  a  spy-glass  look  across  the  river  to  see  what  the  minute- 
men  are  doing.  Some  of  the  troops — about  two  hundred — cross  the  river 
to  Colonel  Barrett's,  and  set  the  gun  -  carriages  on  fire.  Other  squads  are 
sent  to  search  the  houses  and  barns  of  the  people.  They  find  a  barrel  of 
musket -balls  and  throw  them  into  a  well,  break  off  the  trunnions  of  the 
cannon  which  the  people  had  not  time  to  bury,  and  stave  in  the  heads  of 
fifty  barrels  of  flour. 


36 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


The  troops  have  marched  all  night,  are  weary,  hungry,  and  thirsty. 
They  call  for  breakfast,  which  the  people  give  them — bread  and  milk  or 
bacon  and  eggs.  The  officers  pay  liberally,  in  some  instances  handing  out 
a  guinea  and  refusing  to  take  any  change.  Major  Pitcairn  and  some  of 
the  officers  go  into  Mr.  Wright's  tavern  and  call  for  brandy.  Major  Pit- 
cairn  stirs  the  grog  with  his  fingers. 

"  I  mean  to  stir  the  Yankee  blood  as  I  stir  this  before  night,"  he  says, 
with  an  »>ath. 


/ 


MAJOR   PITCAIRN    STIRRING    HIS    BRANDT. 


The  minute-men  are  all  west  of  the  river.  From  the  west  come  men 
from  Acton,  the  next  town,  under  Captain  Isaac  Davis.  He  has  kissed  his 
wife,  Hannah,  good-bye,  saying  to  her,  "Take  good  care  of  the  children, 
Hannah,"  and  here  he  is  wiping  the  sweat  from  his  brow,  for  he  and  his 
men  have  come  up  on  the  run.  The  Sudbury  men  are  coming  from  the 


THE   ALARM. 


37 


south,  and  the  Bedford  men  from  the  west.      They  met  near  the  north 
bridge,  in  front  of  Major  Buttrick's  house.     They  can  see  smoke  ascending 


MR.  HUNT'S  HOUSE. 


from  the  town  and  from  Colonel  Barrett's,  where  the  gun-carriages  are 
burning,  but  think  that  the  British  have  applied  the  torch  to  their  houses. 


BURNING   THE    CANNON    CARRIAGES. 


The  party  of  British  which  have  been  to  Colonel  Barrett's  house  have  re 
turned  to  the  bridge,  and  are  taking  up  the  planks. 


38 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


"  They  are  burning  the  town.  Shall  we  stand  here  and  permit  it?" 
says  Adjutant  ilosmer. 

"  Let  us  march  and  defend  our  houses.  I  haven't  a  man  that  is  afraid 
to  go,"  says  Major  Buttrick. 

"  Neither  have  I.     Let  us  go,"  says  Captain  Davis. 

They  are  five  hundred  now.    Colonel  Barrett  is  commander. 

"  File  right ;  march  to  the  bridge.  Don't  lire  unless  you  are  fired  upon," 
is  his  order. 

John  Buttrick  and  Luther  Blan  chard,  fifers,  strike  up  the'4  White  Cock 
ade,"  the  drums  beat,  and  the  men  move  on  in  double  files,  Captain  Davis 
and  the  Acton  men  leading,  the  Sudbury,  Concord,  Lincoln,  and  Bedford 
men  following. 


MAP   ILLUSTRATING   THE    CONCORD    FIGHT. 


The  British,  one  hundred  and  fifty,  are  on  the  east  side,  and  the  Ameri 
cans  on  the  west  side,  of  the  river.  They  are  not  ten  rods  apart.  A  British 
soldier  raises  his  gun.  There  is  a  flash,  and  the  fifer,  Luther  Blanchard, 
feels  a  prick  in  his  side.  A  dozen  British  fire.  Captain  Davis  leaps  into 
the  air  and  falls  with  a  ball  through  his  heart.  Nevermore  will  Hannah, 
the  beloved  wife  minding  the  children  at  home,  feel  the  lips  of  the  brave 
man  upon  her  cheek.  Abner  Hosmer  also  falls  dead. 

"  Fire  !  for  God's  sake,  fire !"  Major  Buttrick  shouts  it.  He  raises  his 
gun,  takes  quick  aim,  and  fires  the  shot  which  Kev.  Mr.  Emerson's  grandson 
says,  "  is  heard  around  the  world." 

Captain  Brown  is  a  Christian.  He  never  swore  an  oath  in  his  life,  but 
his  blood  is  up,  and  he  utters  a  terrible  curse,  and  shouts,  "  They  are  firing 


THE  ALARM.  39 

balls !     Fire,  fire  !"  he  shouts,  takes  aim,  and  a  British  soldier  falls,  the  first 
in  the  affray.     "  Fire  !  fire  !  fire  !" 

The  shout  runs  along  the  line.     Two  or  more  of  the  British  fall  killed 
or  wounded,  and  the  others  flee  toward  the  village. 


"THE  SHOT  THAT  is  HEARD  AROUND  THE  WORLD." 

"  The  war  has  begun ;  and  no  one  knows  when  it  will  end,"  says  Noah 
Parkhurst,  one  of  the  Lincoln  men. 

It  is  eleven  o'clock.  Lieutenant -colonel  Smith  and  Major  Pitcairn 
are  alarmed.  They  send  out  messengers  to  bring  in  the  scattered  troops. 
The  Yankee  blood  is  getting  hotter  than  Major  Pitcairn  thought  possible. 
He  has  stirred  it  effectually,  and  his  own  life  will  yet  go  out  in  the  fire  he 
has  kindled.  Colonel  Smith  marshals  the  troops  in  front  of  Elisha  Jones's 
house. 

It  is  high  time  he  was  on  his  return  to  Boston.  Yet  he  does  not  like 
to  go,  for  fear  the  Yankees  will  think  he  is  afraid.  He  will  not  be  in  a 
hurry.  But  the  Yankees  are  gathering  in  larger  force.  He  can  see  them 
down  by  the  river.  They  are  marching  round  through  the  meadows  to  cut 
off  his  retreat.  Twelve  o'clock.  The  British  move  out  of  the  town,  but 
instantly  from  behind  the  fences  rise  up  unseen  faces.  There  is  a  rattle  of 


THE   BOYS    OF  76. 


muskets,  and  British  soldiers  drop  by  the  roadside.     The  minute-men  are 
no  longer  in  line.     Every  man  fights  for  himself.     He  is  his  own  general 


HALT  OF  TROOPS  NEAR  ELISHA  JONES  8  HOUSE. 

and  captain.  Colonel  Smith  is  wounded  in  the  leg,  and  Major  Pitcairn  in 
the  arm.  He  tumbles  from  his  horse,  and  the  horse  escapes.  The  Ameri 
cans  see  it  running  wild  in  the  fields  and  capture  it.  The  British  are  upon 
the  run  now.  Down  the  road  toward  Lexington  they  flee,  stopping  now 
and  then  to  load  and  fire,  then  running  again,  with  men  dropping  from  the 
ranks  at  every  step. 

The  Billerica  and  the  Reading  minute-men  have  arrived  to  harass  them, 
and  there  is  a  sharp  fight  at  Merriam's  Corner. 


MERRIAM'S  CORNER,  ON  THE  LEXINGTON  ROAD. 

At  every  corner,  every  turn,  in  every  orchard,  in  every  wood,  the  min 
ute-men  attack  the  retreating  troops. 


THE  ALARM.  41 

Back  to  Lexington  they  hasten.  Oh,  what  a  welcome  sight  is  that  which 
they  behold !  Lord  Percy,  with  eleven  hundred  men  and  two  pieces  of 
cannon,  are  at  Lexington.  The  fugitives  are  worn  out.  Their  tongues 
hang  from  their  mouths,  like  the  tongues  of  deer  when  hunted  by  hounds, 
as  they  throw  themselves  upon  the  ground  under  the  protection  of  the 
sheltering  cannon. 

And  now  it  is  a  battle  all  the  way  to  Charlestown.  The  shades  of 
evening  fall  as  the  British  troops  rush  across  the  narrow  neck  of  land  to 
Charlestown.  Severity-three  of  their  number  have  been  killed,  and  one 
hundred  and  seventy-two  wounded,  and  twenty-six  missing.  Of  the  min 
ute-men,  forty-nine  have  been  killed  and  thirty-six  wounded.  Men  from 
thirty-one  towns  have  followed  them.  Such  the  story. 

It  was  no  great  hardship  for  Elijah  and  Dodifer,  Esek  and  Nicholas,  to 
spread  their  blankets  in  a  barn  and  sleep  on  a  haymow,  for  many  a  time, 
while  out  hunting  raccoons,  they  had  slept  on  the  ground. 

From  Medford  they  could  look  across  the  salt-marshes  and  see  the 
steeples  of  the  meeting-houses  "in  Boston,  and  at  night,  when  all  was  quiet, 
could  hear  the  clock  on  one  of  the  steeples  striking  the  hours. 

Colonel  Stark  drilled  the  regiment  every  day.  The  boys  had  enough 
to  eat,  the  nights  were  warm,  the  days  beautiful,  and  so  the  time  passed 
swiftly  by.  2* 


12  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


CHAPTER  II. 

BUNKER    HILL. 
«<  T>OOM!" 

It  was  day-break  on  the  morning  of  the  17th  of  June,  when  the 
roar  of  a  cannon  went  over  the  marshes  toward  Medford  and  Cambridge. 
Elijah,  and  Dodifer,  and  Nicholas,  and  all  the  other  soldiers,  sprung  to 
their  feet  and  rushed  out-of-doors. 

"  Boom  !"  it  came  again.  And  now,  looking  toward  Charlestown,  they 
saw  a  white  cloud  enveloping  the  war-ship  Lively,  which  was  at  anchor  in 
the  stream  between  Boston  and  Charlestown.  There  was  a  bright  flash,  and 
again  the  deep,  heavy  thunder  of  the  cannon  came  rolling  over  the  green 
marshes. 

They  wondered  what  was  going  on,  but  as  the  day  brightened  they 
could  see  that  not  only  the  Lively,  but  the  other  ships,  were  firing  at  an 
embankment  of  earth  which  had  been  thrown  up  during  the  night  on  a 
hill  overlooking  Charlestown.  When  the  sun  rose,  they  could  see  men  at 
work  with  picks  and  shovels.  The  firing  soon  ceased,  -but  the  work  went 
on.  Soon  it  was  rumored  through  the  camp  that  Colonel  William  Prescott, 
with  about  one  thousand  men,  part  of  his  own  regiment,  about  one-third 
of  Colonel  Bridge's,  and  a  third  of  Colonel  Frye's,  and  one  company  of 
Connecticut  men,  under  Lieutenant -colonel  Knowlton,  had  started  from 
Cambridge  the  evening  before,  to  construct  a  fort  on  one  of  the  hills  near 
Charlestown.  Before  they  started  they  paraded  on  Cambridge  Common, 
in  front  of  the  meeting-house ;  and  the  President  of  Harvard  College,  Rev. 
Mr.  Langdon,  offered  prayer.  Two  sergeants  with  dark  lanterns  led  the 
way,  and  the  soldiers  marched  in  silence,  followed  by  two  carts  loaded  with 
picks  and  shovels.  They  crossed  Charlestown  Neck  about  eleven  o'clock, 
but  it  was  after  midnight  before  a  shovelful  of  earth  was  thrown  up;  and 
there  they  were,  working  like  beavers,  with  the  cannon-shot  flying  around 
them. 

About  nine  o'clock  an  officer  came  to  Medford,  where  Colonel  Stark 
had  his  head-quarters,  with  a  message  from  General  Artemus  Ward,  who 
was  commander-iii-chief  of  all  the  troops  around  Boston.  His  head-quar- 


BCJNKER  HILL.  43 

ters  were  at  Cambridge.  A  few  minutes  later  the  adjutant  of  the  regi 
ment  came  out  of  Colonel  Stark's  quarters  with  an  order  for  Lieutenant- 
colonel  Wyman  to  march  with  two  hundred  men  to  Charlestown,  to  re- 
enforce  Colonel  Prescott.  Dodifer  had  been  transferred  to  another  com 
pany,  and  his  was  one  of  those  ordered  to  march. 

"  I  wish  that  our  company  had  been  selected,"  said  Elijah. 

"  Don't  be  in  a  hurry,  boy,"  said  the  old  soldier,  who  had  fought  at 
Quebec.  "  Likely  as  not  you'll  have  a  chance  to  show  your  pluck  before 
night,  for  what  our  boys  are  doing  on  the  hill  there  is  like  giving  General 
Gage's  nose  a  tweak.  Ye  see,  our  boys  can  fire  right  plum-down  upon  the 
ships ;  and  if  he  don't  try  to  drive  'em  out,  then  I'm  mistaken." 

Elijah  looked  across  the  marshes  once  more  and  saw  that  the  tide  was 
coming  in,  and  that  the  Lively  and  another  war-ship,  the  Symmetry,  were 
floating  up-stream.  The  Symmetry  came  well  up  toward  Charlestown  Neck 
and  dropped  anchor.  The  firing  from  the  ships  had  stopped,  but  now  it 
began  again  louder  than  ever.  The  church  bells  were  ringing  in  Cam 
bridge,  and  there  was  a  general  commotion  in  all  the  camps. 

About  eleven  o'clock  another  officer  came  in  haste  from  Cambridge  to 
see  General  Stark.  A  minute  or  two  later,  the  drummers  came  out  with 
their  drums  and  began  to  beat  the  long  roll. 

"  Fall  in  !  fall  in !"  shouted  the  officers. 

The  boys  seized  their  powder-horns  and  bullet-pouches  and  guns,  and 
took  their  places  in  the  ranks.  The  regiment  marched  to  Colonel  Stark's 
quarters,  and  each  man  received  a  gill  of  powder  and  several  bullets  and 
an  extra  flint.  Colonel  Stark  came  out,  drew  his  sword,  and  turned  to  the 


regiment. 


"  By  sections,  quick  step,  shoulder  arms,  march !"  was  his  order.  The 
irums  beat,  the  regiment  moved  down  the  street,  crossed  a  bridge  spanning 
the  Mystic  River,  and  took  the  road  leading  to  Charlestown. 

The  bell  on  Medford  meeting-house  was  ringing  for  twelve  o'clock 
when  they  started.  An  hour's  march  brought  them  to  an  elevation  called 
Plowed  Hill,  from  whence  they  could  look  down  upon  the  harbor  and 
upon  Charlestown.  The  Symmetry,  with  twenty  guns,  threw  shot  across 
Charlestown  Keck,  over  which  they  must  march.  Farther  down  the  har 
bor,  near  the  ferry  between  Charlestown  and  Boston,  was  the  Lively,  with 
twenty  guns ;  beyond  it  the  Glasgow,  with  twenty-four  guns ;  the  Cerbe 
rus,  with  thirty-six  guns  ;  and  the  Somerset,  with  sixty-eight  guns.  Admi 
ral  Graves's  flag  was  floating  in  the  breeze  above  the  quarter-deck  of  the 
Somerset.  The  Symmetry  was  sweeping  the  Keck  with  its  guns,  while 
the  other  ships  were  firing  at  the  bank  of  yellow  earth  on  the  hill. 


44  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

The  regiment  marched  on,  and  came  to  some  troops  that  had  halted  in 
the  road,  as  if  afraid  to  cross  the  narrow  isthmus  leading  to  Oharlestown. 
Elijah  saw  Major  Maclary,  of  Colonel  Stark's  regiment — a  tall  man,  for 
whom  he  had  great  respect — step  forward  to  see  what  the  trouble  was. 

"  Why  don't  you  go  ahead  ?"  Major  Maclary  asked. 

The  halting  troops  made  no  reply. 

"  If  you  ain't  going,  step  one  side,  will  you,  and  give  us  a  chance  ?" 

The  troops  stepped  to  the  side  of  the  road,  and  the  regiment 
marched  on. 

"  Bang  !  bang !  bang !"  went  the  cannon  of  the  Symmetry.  Suddenly 
the  air  was  full  of  horrifying  noises.  Something  unseen  went  by  with  a 
terrible  screech.  Something  plowed  a  furrow  in  the  ground  and  threw 
the  gravel  stones  into  the  boys'  faces.  Something  came  with  a  terrible 
whirr,  and  passed  over  their  heads.  Their  hair  stood  on  end.  They 
wished  that  they  were  not  there,  and  wanted  to  turn  and  run.  They 
never  were  so  frightened  before.  Colonel  Stark  was  marching,  at  the 
head  of  the  regiment,  a  slow  and  measured  step.  They  wished  he  would 
go  faster. 

"  Don't  you  think  it  would  be  well  to  go  across  upon  the  double 
quick  ?"  Captain  Dearborn  asked. 

"No;  one  fresh  man  is  worth  two  tired  ones,"  the  colonel  replied, 
keeping  the  same  steady  step.  They  crossed  in  safety.  As  they  passed 
up  the  hill  on  the  other  side,  they  met  some  soldiers  who  had  been  afc  work 
through  the  night  upon  the  intrenchments. 

"  What's  the  news  ?"  Elijah  asked. 

"  The  red-coats  are  landing  at  Moulton's  Point,"  said  one. 

"A  cannon-shot  killed  one  of  our  men — Asa  Pollard,  of  Billerioa,"  said 
another. 

"  But  ain't  you  going  the  wrong  way  ?"  Esek  Earl  asked. 

"  We  have  worked  all  night  and  through  the  forenoon  without  a  wink 
of  sleep,  nor  have  we  had  any  thing  to  eat  or  drink,"  said  one  of  the  retir 
ing  soldiers. 

The  regiment  came  to  some  houses,  where  Colonel  Reed's  New  Hamp 
shire  regiment  was  quartered.  It  was  under  arms,  and  followed  Colonel 
Stark's  up  a  hill,  and  over  it  to  a  rail -fence,  which  ran  from  the  wate1 
straight  up  the  hill,  toward  the  intrenchment. 

The  farmers  had  been  mowing  their  grass  the  day  before,  and  had 
raked  some  of  it  into  cocks  and  windrows.  As  they  came  to  the  fence, 
Elijah  saw  the  Connecticut  troops  under  Colonel  Knowlton  at  work,  tear- 
*nfi[  down  another  rail -fence  and  setting  it  up  against  the  one  behind, 


BUNKER  HILL. 


which  they  had  halted,  and  stuffing  the  space  between  with  hay. 
Stark  told  his  men  to  do  the  same.     The  boys  laid 
down  their  guns,  and  in  a  few  minutes  had  a  hay 
breastwork,  which,  if  it  would  not  stop  a  bullet,  would 
at  least  screen  them  from  the  red-coats. 

Colonel  Stark  got  over  the  fence,  went  out  about  w 
eight  rods,  and  drove  a  stake  into  the  ground.  | 

"  There,  boys,"  he  said,  "  if  the  red-coats  attack  us,  w 
wait  till  they  get  to  this  stake  before  you  fire." 

The  boys  had  shot  partridges  farther  away  than 
that,  and  they  thought  that  a  red-coat  would  stand  a 
poor  chance  at  that  distance.  *> 

All  the  while,  Dodifer  was  in  the  intrenchment  on    |* 
the  top  of  the  hill.     He  could  look  over  the  breast-    | 
work  and  see  all  that  was  going  on.     At  first  he  did    p 
not  dare  to  look,  the  cannon-balls  flew  so  thick ;  but 
he  soon  got  accustomed  to  hearing  them  fly  past,  and 
took  a  look  now  and  then.  ; 

There  was  a  great  commotion  in  Boston.  Officers  s°  ' 
were  riding  furiously  through  the  streets,  and  soldiers  g  « 
were  marching  from  their  barracks  to  Long  Wharf,  f  | 
The  roofs  of  the  houses  were  covered  with  people.  51  \ 
Cannon  on  Copp's  Hill  were  flaming  and  thundering,  r  g 
sending  their  shot  across  the  water.  The  harbor  was  f 
alive  with  boats  bringing  soldiers  from  Long  Wharf 
to  Moulton's  Point. 

One  of  the  hills  was  owned  by  Mr.  Breed,  and  £ 
the  other  by  Mr.  Bunker.  The  fortifications  were  on  | 
Breed's  Hill,  but  the  engagement  is  known  as  the  bat-  | 
tie  of  Bunker  Hill. 

Behind  him,  Dodifer  saw  an  embankment  of  earth, 
extending  from  the  north-east  corner  of  the  intrench 
ment  down  the  hill.     There  were  few  soldiers  in  the    ?* 
intrenchment  at  this  moment — not  more  than  three    | 
hundred.     The   rest  —  worn   and    tired,  hungry  and    <f 
sleepy — had  straggled  away,  except  a  few,  whom  Col-    | 
onel  Prescott  had  sent  down  into  the  village  of  Charles- 
town.     Dodifer  was  glad  when  he  saw  the  rest  of  the 
regiment,  followed  by  Colonel  Eeed's,  march  down  to 
the  fence,  and  when  some  soldiers  from  Colonel  Nix- 


Colonel 


'aft 


46 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


GENERAL   ISRAEL   PUTNAM. 


on's,  Colonel  Little's,  and   other  regiments,  arrived,  to  help  defend  the 
intrench  me  nts.     An  officer  on  a  white  horse  was  riding  furiously  about. 

One  moment  he  would  be  at  the  intrenchment, 
talking  with  Colonel  Prescott;  then  he  would 
gallop  to  the  rail -fence  and  talk  with  Colonel 
Reed  and  Colonel  Stark,  and  with  the  men; 
then  he  would  be  away  to  the  rear,  hurrying 
up  re-enforcements,  and  planning  another  in 
trenchment  on  Bunker  Hill. 

"  That  is  <  Old  Put.'  He  is  a  tiger  at  fight 
ing;  I  was  with  him  at  Ti,"  said  a  soldier  who 
had  fought  the  French  and  Indians  at  Ticon 
deroga.  It  was  Israel  Putnam,  from  Connect 
icut. 

A  noble-looking  man,  well  dressed,  and  in  the  prime  of  life,  entered 
the  intrenchment.  Dodifer  saw  some  of  the  soldiers  take  off  their  hats  tc 
him.  "  That  is  Dr.  Warren,  of  Bos 
ton,  one  of  the  truest  patriots  that 
ever  lived.  lie  has  just  been  made  a 
general,"  said  a  soldier. 

Dr.  Warren  went  up  to  Colonel 
Prescott  and  shook  hands  with  him. 

"I  yield,  the  command  to  you," 
said  Colonel  Prescott. 

"Oh  no;  I  come  as  a  volunteer," 
the  doctor  replied,  and  looked  around 
for  a  gun. 

The  cannon-balls  were  flying  thick 
er  than  ever,  and  some  of  the  soldiers 
were  frightened.  To  inspire  them 
with  courage,  Colonel  Prescott  step 
ped  upon  the  embankment  and  walk 
ed  backward  and  forward,  telling  the  soldiers  not  to  fire  till  the  British 
were  so  near  that  they  could  see  the  white  of  their  eyes,  and  then  to  aim 
at  their  belts.  The  soldiers  admired  him,  he  was  so  cool.  They  fixed 
their  flints,  looked  at  the  priming,  and  waited  for  the  cpming-on  of  the 
British. 


GENERAL    JOSEPH    WARREN. 


BATTLE  OF  BUNKER  HILL.  47 


CHAPTER  ILL 

BATTLE   OF  BUNKER  HILL. 

THE  sun  was  shining  from  a  cloudless  sky,  and  Dodifer  could  see  all 
that  was  going  on  down  in  the  harbor.  The  British  troops  were  land 
ing  and  forming  on  the  beach.  While  the  boats  went  back  to  Boston  for 
more  soldiers,  those  already  landed  sat  down  upon  the  grass  and  eat  their 
dinners.  When  all  had  arrived,  the  regiments  formed  in  a  field.  There 
were  five  01  tnern — the  fifth,  thirty-eighth,  forty-third,  forty-seventh,  and 
fifty-second,  and  a  battalion  of  marines ;  nearly  three  thousand  men  in  all. 
The  officers  were  noble-looking  men.  General  Howe  was  commander-in- 
chief ;  General  Burgoyne  and  General  Pigot  commanded  under  him. 

It  was  a  grand  sight — the  long  lines,  the  red  coats  faced  with  buff,  the 
white  pantaloons  of  the  soldiers,  the  white  cross-belts,  the  bright  buckles, 
the  tall  caps,  the  sunlight  gleaming  from  the  guns  and  bayonets,  the  mov 
ing  columns,  the  drums  beating,  the  fifes  playing,  the  bugles  blowing,  the 
ships  all  aflame,  and  great  white  clouds  rolling  high  above  the  masts,  an 
other  white  cloud  ascending  from  Copp's  Hill  in  Boston,  the  roofs  of  the 
houses  covered  with  people :  all  together  it  was  the  grandest  sight  Dodifer 
had  ever  seen — so  grand  that  he  almost  forgot  that  he  was  standing  there 
to  fight  those  advancing  columns  of  Old  England.  The  thought  came: 
vvhat  chance  would  he  and  his  fellow-soldiers  have,  men  and  boys  as  they 
were,  without  discipline,  knowing  nothing  of  war,  without  bayonets,  with 
only  their  shot-guns,  with  a  few  bullets,  and  only  a  gill  of  powder  in  their 
horns — what  chance  would  they  have  of  defeating  troops  that  had  fought 
the  veteran  soldiers  of  France  and  Spain?  Not  much.  Yet  it  was  no 
time  to  flinch.  He  resolved  to  do  his  best. 

Similar  thoughts  came  to  Elijah,  Esek,  and  Nicholas,  as  they  lay  upon 
the  grass  behind  the  fence.  They  could  hear  the  cannon  roaring,  and,  as 
they  looked  along  the  water  toward  Mo  niton's  Point,  could  see  the  lighi- 
infantry  and  grenadiers  getting  ready  to  advance. 

The  British  troops  were  in  motion,  advancing  slowly.  They  were  yet 
at  a  considerable  distance,  when  there  was  a  flash,  a  puff  of  smoke. 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


"  Down  !  down !"  shouted  every  body.  The  boys  dropped  behind  the 
fence,  and  the  next  moment  a  cannon-ball  went  screaming  over  their 
heads. 

"  It  whistles  a  lively  tune,"  said  Esek. 

Behind  the  intrenchments  there  was  a  good  deal  of  excitement  just  at 
this  moment.  Some  of  the  men  had  rifles,  and  they  had  been  accustomed 
to  bring  down  a  buck  or  a  wolf  or  fox  at  long  range.  They  laid  their 
rifles  on  the  top  of  the  intrenchment  and  took  aim  and  fired,  and  men 
down  in  the  British  ranks  suddenly  threw  up  their  hands  and  fell  headlong. 

"Stop  firing!"  shouted  Colonel  Prescott;  and  an  officer  jumped  upon 
the  embankment  and  kicked  up  the  rifles. 

"  Save  your  powder.  Wait  till  they  get  within  eight  rods,"  he  said,  and 
the  soldiers  reloaded  their  rifles  and  waited. 

The  light -infantry  and  grenadiers  were  getting  nearer  to  tne  fence. 
Elijah  peeped  through  the  hay  and  saw  the  soldiers  of  the  front  rank  come 
to  a  halt.  He  heard  the  colonel  commanding  them  say,  "Take  aim!" 
They  leveled  their  pieces.  "  Fire !"  he  shouted.  There  was  a  flash,  a  white 
cloud,  and  the  air  was  filled  with  leaden  hail  which  struck  into  the  ground, 
splintered  the  rails  of  the  fence,  or  flew  above  the  heads  of  the  boys  and 
their  fellow-soldiers. 


BATTLE  OF  BUNKER  HILL.  51 

"  Keep  quiet,  boys ;  don't  be  in  a  hurry,"  said  Captain  Abbot,  as  he 
walked  up  and  down  the  line. 

Another  volley  came,  and  another.  The  bullets  were  whistling  close  to 
Elijah's  ears.  He  was  getting  nervous,  for  the  British  troops  were  only  a 
few  rods  away — so  near  that  he  could  hear  their  tramping.  He  cocked  his 
gun — he  was  down  on  one  knee,  with  the  muzzle  resting  on  a  rail.  There 
was  a  clicking  of  locks  all  along  the  line. 

"  Don't  get  flustered  ;  keep  cool,"  said  Captain  Abbot. 

"Aim  low,"  said  an  old  soldier  at  Elijah's  right  hand. 

"  Take  good  aim,"  said  one  at  the  left. 

"  Pick  off  the  officers,"  said  Esek. 

Elijah  ran  his  eye  along  his  gun-barrel  and  took  aim  at  a  white  belt. 
It  was  a  good  mark  to  aim  at,  a  white  belt  on  a  red  coat,  and  many  a  sol 
dier  died  that  day,  as  there  has  on  many  other  battle-fields,  simply  because 
the  showy  uniform  of  Old  England  is  the  best  of  targets. 

The  white  pantaloons  and  red  coats  were  up  to  the  stake  which  Colonel 
Stark  had  driven.  There  was  a  sudden  crack,  a  rattle,  a  roar.  The  boys 
fired,  then  sprung  to  their  feet  and  loaded  their  guns  as  quick  as  they 
could.  There  was  a  white  cloud  along  the  fence  from  the  water  up  the  hill 
almost  to  the  embankment.  Looking  through  the  smoke,  Elijah  could  see 
men  reeling  and  falling  to  the  ground.  Some  were  down  on  their  knees 
trying  to  get  up.  Some  were  trying  to  save  themselves  from  going  down. 
The  front  rank  was  broken  up.  Some  were  running;  officers  were  flour 
ishing  their  swords,  and  trying  to  stop  them.  Elijah  fired  again  as  quick 
as  he  could,  and  so  did  all  around  him.  The  second  line  of  the  British 
was  tumbling  to  pieces,  and  the  third ;  and  a  moment  later  all  except  the 
officers  took  to  their  heels  and  ran  back  through  the  fields  to  Moulton's 
Point. 

The  boys  off  with  their  hats,  swung  them  over  their  heads,  and  hurraed 
as  loud  as  they  could.  And  now  the  intrench  men  t  on  the  hill  was  all 
aflame,  and  the  regiments  under  General  Pigot  were  fleeing. 

"Hurra!  hurra!  hurra!"  came  from  the  hill.  The  back -woodsmen 
were  a  match  for  the  troops  of  Old  England ! 

There  was  a  great  commotion  at  Moulton's  Point.  Officers  were  run 
ning  here  and  there  rallying  the  men,  telling  them  how  disgraceful  it  was 
for  them  to  be  whipped  by  a  handful  of  Yankees.  After  a  while  the  lines 
were  reformed,  and  the  British  troops  advanced  a  second  time. 

There  were  some  brick-kilns  in  one  of  the  fields,  and  the  artillery  came 
past  them,  wheeled  into  position,  and  began  to  fire  upon  the  breastwork. 
The  light-infantry  and  grenadiers  came  on  again,  but  not  quite  so  proudly 


52  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

as  before.  They  halted,  fired,  advanced,  and  fired  again.  The  bullets 
came  through  the  hay.  A  soldier  close  to  Elijah  was  wounded.  At  first 
Elijah,  Esek,  and  Nicholas  had  trembled,  but  now  they  were  as  cool  as  if 
waiting  to  get  a  shot  at  a  deer. 

The  British  came  on.  Click,  click,  click,  went  the  gun-locks  again. 
They  were  so  near  that  Elijah  could  see  the  whites  of  their  eyes. 

Again  there  was  a  ripple  and  a  deafening  roar.  When  the  smoke  cleared 
away  there  was  a  heap  of  dead  and  wounded — a  windrow  of  men.  Some 
staggered  a  few  steps  before  they  fell,  while  others  dropped  as  nine -pins 
drop  when  the  ball  goes  down  the  alley.  Again  the  British  troops  were 
fleeing,  and  vain  were  all  the  efforts  of  the  officers  to  stop  them. 

While  this  was  going  on  in  front  of  the  fence,  Dodifer  and  the  men 
behind  the  intrenchment  were  waiting  for  the  advance  of  the  troops  under 
General  Pigot.  The  British  went  slowly  up  the  hill.  They  almost  reached 
the  intrenchment  when  the  parapet  blazed,  and  the  ranks  went  down  as 
the  grass  falls  before  the  mower,  and  those  who  could  get  away  fled  to 
Moulton's  Point.  Again  there  was  a  hurra. 

"We  can  lick  the  lobsters,"  shouted  Dodifer,  in  his  enthusiasm. 

"  We'll  drive  'em  into  the  sea,"  shouted  another. 

Nearly  a  third  part  of  the  British  had  been  killed  or  wounded.  Gen 
eral  Howe  saw  his  fine  army  melting  away.  Thus  far  he  had  been  de 
feated,  but  it  never  would  do  to  give  it  up  so.  What  would  the  king  say  ? 
What  would  all  England  say  ?  He  must  drive  the  rebels  out  of  the  fort, 
or  his  honor  and  every  thing  else  would  be  lost. 

"  It  is  murder,"  said  the  British  soldiers.  "  No  troops  can  stand  such  a 
fire." 

General  Clinton  was  in  Boston,  and  now  he  came  across  the  harbor 
with  four  hundred  men  to  help  in  a  third  attack. 

The  British  soldiers  laid  aside  their  knapsacks  and  prepared  for  a  last 
desperate  attempt.  General  Howe  had  learned  a  lesson  from  the  New 
Hampshire  boys  behind  the  fence.  He  would  not  have  any  more  men 
slaughtered  there;  he  would  only  make  believe  that  he  was  going  to  attack 
them ;  he  would  march  a  few  soldiers  in  that  direction,  but  would  hurl  his 
main  body  upon  the  handful  of  men  behind  the  intrenchment  on  the  hill. 
He  had  discovered  the  weak  place  in  the  intrenchment:  it  was  at  the 
north-east  corner. 

Suddenly  a  black  smoke  rolled  up  from  Charlestown,  growing  blacker 
every  moment.  The  town  was  on  fire.  A  shot,  called  a  carcass,  had  been 
fired  across  the  water  from  Boston,  with  the  intention  of  setting  the  town 
on  fire,  and  now  the  flames  were  leaping  from  window  and  roof  and  steeple. 


BATTLE   OF   BUNKER  HILL. 


53 


In  a  few  minutes  four  hundred  houses  were  on  fire.     While  the  town 
was  burning,  the  light  -  infantry,  as  before,  marched  toward  the  fence,  but 


BURNING    OF    CHARLESTOWN. 

[This  picture  was  drawn  by  a  British  engineer  at  the  time  of  the  battle.  The  view  is  from  Copp's  Hill, 
in  Boston,  looking  north.  A  British  battery  on  Copp's  Hill  fired  across  the  water  and  set  the  town  on  fire. 
The  smoke  of  the  battle  is  seen  on  the  hill  behind  the  town.  The  wind  was  south-west,  and  carried  the 
smoke  eastward  over  the  Mystic  Eiver.  The  boats  around  the  ship  at  the  right  hand  are  carrying  Sir  Henry 
Clinton  and  the  re-enforcements  to  Moulton's  Point.  The  meeting-house  is  the  North  Church,  from  which  the 
lanterns  were  hung  out  on  the  night  before  the  battle  at  Concord.  Medford  lies  over  the  vessel  at  the  left 
hand.  Charlestown  Neck  is  immediately  behind  the  steeple.  Cambridge  lies  at  the  left,  and  is  not  included 
in  the  picture,  which  is  a  spirited  and  faithful  represeptation  of  the  scene  as  witnessed  from  Copp's  Hill.] 

when  the  troops  reached  the  brick-kilns  they  turned  to  the  left  and  marched 
toward  the  intrenchment.  Elijah  and  the  men  at  the  fence  saw  them  turn, 
rank  after  rank,  and  fired  at  them,  but  they  were  a  good  distance  away, 
and  the  balls  fell  short  and  the  ranks  pressed  on.  Dodifer  and  the  few 
soldiers  in  the  fort  fired  as  fast  as  they  could,  but  their  powder  was  gone, 
for  they  had  only  a  gill  at  the  outset.  The  British  came  nearer.  Dodifer 
heard  a  hurra  behind  him,  and  saw  them  leaping  over  the  parapet  at  the 
north-east  corner.  He  had  no  bayonet,  nor  had  many  of  those  by  his  side. 
Some  used  the  butts  of  their  guns  to  beat  out  the  brains  of  the  British,  but 
they  were  quickly  shot  or  bayoneted.  He  saw  Dr.  Warren  in  the  thickest 
of  the  fight.  A  British  soldier  was  aiming  at  him,  and  the  next  moment 
the  noble  man  fell. 

"  Retreat !"  said  Colonel  Prescott. 

The  British  had  already  cut  off  Dodifer's  escape  toward  the  north-east. 
He  ran  to  the  west  side,  leaped  over  the  embankment  almost  into  the  faces 
of  the  British  that  were  coming  up  on  that  side.  A  red-coat  stabbed  at 
him,  but  did  not  hit  him.  Bullets  whizzed  past  him.  One  soldier  fired  in 
his  face.  The  smoke  covered  him,  and  the  grains  of  powder  from  the  gun 
made  his  cheeks  smart,  but  the  bullet  did  not  touch  him.  He  escaped  past 


54  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

the  advancing  line.  ITe  was  going  to  throw  away  his  gun,  that  he  might 
run  faster,  but  concluded  he  would  not.  He  reached  a  rail-fence,  sprung 
over  it,  and  fell  upon  the  other  side.  The  bullets  came  against  the  rails 
like  hail-stones  in  a  shower.  He  was  out  of  breath,  ariw  concluded  to  lie 
still  a  moment. 

"We've  stiffened  that  young  Yankee,"  said  a  British  soldier. 

"  They  think  that  they  have  hit  me,"  said  Dodifer  to  himself.  He 
heard  the  tramp  of  those  who  were  fleeing,  and  the  shouts  and  hurras  of 
the  British.  He  recovered  his  breath  and  started  once  more.  The  balls 
flew  around  him,  but  in  a  minute  he  was  so  far  away  that  he  dropped  into 
a  walk. 

Colonel  Stark,  Colonel  Reed,  and  Colonel  Knowlton  were  coming  up 
from  the  fence.  Dodifer  saw  Elijah  and  Esek  carrying  a  wounded  soldier. 
Getting  nearer,  he  saw  that  it  was  Nicholas — a  ball  had  gone  through  his 
foot.  He  helped  them,  and  together  they  went  to  Bunker  Hill.  General 
Putnam  was  there,  riding  to  and  fro,  shouting  and  swearing. 

"  Stop  here,  you  cowards !  We  can  beat  'em  here !"  he  cried.  He  was 
wet  with  sweat  and  covered  with  dust. 

The  soldiers  would  not  stop,  and  as  the  boys  went  down  the  hill  toward 
the  "  Neck,"  they  could  hear  him  still  shouting,  "  Stop  here !  we  can  lick 
em  here !" 

The  ships  were  firing  faster  than  ever  across  the  "  Neck."  Just  in  ad 
vance  of  the  boys  was  Major  Maclary,  the  brave  man  who  had  opened  the 
way  for  the  regiment  in  the  morning.  They  saw  him  fall,  struck  by  a 
grape-shot.  He  lived  only  a  few  minutes.  The  shot  flew  all  around  them, 
but  they  got  across  the  "  Neck  "  safely,  and  carried  Nicholas  into  a  house 
where  a  surgeon  had  set  up  his  hospital. 

It  was  sunset  when  they  reached  the  high  ground  on  Plowed  Hill. 
They  were  tired  and  hungry.  They  had  no  tents,  but  kindled  fires  in  the 
field  and  cooked  their  supper,  and  through  the  evening  talked  over  the 
events  of  the  day. 

They  were  sorry  to  learn  that  one  hundred  and  forty  of  their  number 
had  been  killed,  and  two  hundred  and  seventy-one  wounded.  But  the  loss 
of  the  British  was  terrible — two  hundred  and  twenty-six  killed,  and  eight 
hundred  and  twenty-eight  wounded. 

The  old  soldiers  lighted  their  pipes,  threw  themselves  upon  the  grass, 
and  told  stories  of  the  days  when  they  fought  the  French  and  Indians.  A 
Connecticut  soldier  told  about  General  Putnam's  exploits. 

"  He  has  smelled  gunpowder  before,"  he  said.  "  He  is  as  brave  as  a 
lion.  I  never  heard  him  swear,  though,  before  to-day ;  he  is  a  member  of 


BATTLE  OF   BUNKER  HILL,. 


55 


the  church,  but  it  made  him  mad  to  see  the  retreat,  when  we  had  all  but 
beaten  the  British.  I  was  with  Old  Put  at  Fort  Edward  in  '55.  One 
hot  dav  in  August,  he  and  Captain  Robert  Rogers,  of  the  New  Hampshire 


BUNKElt    HILL    AFTER    THE    BATTLE. 

[This  picture  was  drawn  by  a  British  engineer  a  few  days  after  the  battle.  The  view  is  from  the  north 
side  of  the  hill,  looking  south  from  the  spot  occupied  by  the  New  Hampshire  troops,  under  Colonel  Stark  and 
Colonel  Reed.  Portions  of  the  rail-fence  are  to  be  seen.  The  Connecticut  troops,  under  Colonel  Knowltou, 
occupied  the  ground  between  the  tree  in  the  centre  of  the  view  and  the  fort.  The  ground  between  the  tree 
and  the  fort,  and  toward  the  left  of  the  picture,  was  thickly  strewed  with  the  killed  and  wounded  British  sol 
diers.  The  Americans  retreated  past  the  trees  at  the  right  of  the  picture.] 

Rangers,  and  a  dozen  of  us  took  a  tramp  to  see  what  the  French  and  red 
skins  were  doing  at  Crown  Point.  We  got  close  up  to  the  fort.  Rogers 
and  Put  crept  up  under  the  walls  and  made  what  discoveries  they  could, 
but  stumbled  upon  two  French  soldiers.  One  of  the  Frenchmen  seized 
Rogers's  gun,  and  the  other  was  about  to  stab  him,  when  Put  up  with  his 
gun  and  split  the  fellow's  head  open.  The  other  Frenchman  took  to  his 
heels,  and  gave  an  alarm ;  and  the  whole  garrison,  French  and  Indians, 
several  hundred,  swarmed  out  like  so  many  hornets  when  you  give  the  nest 
a  stirring-up ;  but  we  all  got  back  safe  and  sound. 

"  The  next  year,  in  '57,  we  were  at  Fort  Edward.  One  day  a  party  of 
wood  -  choppers  and  a  guard  of  fifty  British  soldiers  were  surprised  by  a 
legion  of  Indians.  The  captain  of  the  guard  sent  to  the  fort  for  help, 
General  Lyman  was  commander,  but  was  afraid  to  send  out  any  troops. 
Old  Put  boiled  over  at  that,  and  started  upon  the  run  with  the  Rangers. 
Lyman  called  to  him  to  stop ;  but  Put  was  deaf  just  then,  and  we  rushed 
into  the  woods  yelling  like  so  many  devils.  We  poured  a  volley  into  tho 
Indians  and  drove  them. 


56 


THE  BOYS   OF 


PUTNAM   PUTTING   OUT   THE   FIRE   AT   FORT   EDWARD. 

"I  was  there  with  Putnam  all  the  next  winter,"  the  old  soldier  went  on 
to  say,  "  and  one  morning  the  barracks  took  fire.  We  rushed  out  with  our 
camp-kettles,  formed  a  line  down  to  the  river,  and  passed  the  kettles  from 


BATTLE    OF   BUNKER  HILL.  57 

hand  to  hand  to  Putnam,  who  climbed  upon  the  roof  and  dashed  the  water 
on  the  fire,  which  was  close  to  the  magazine,  where  all  our  powder  was 
stored.  A  single  spark  lighting  on  the  powder  would  have  sent  him  and 
all  the  rest  of  us  sky-high  quicker  than  you  can  say  Jack  Robinson. 

"  Colonel  Haviland  was  our  colonel,  and  he  ordered  the  captain  to  get 
down,  but  Putnam  refused,  and  kept  throwing  water  till  the  fire  was  put 
out.  His  hands  and  face  were  badly  blistered,  and  it  was  a  month  before 
he  got  out  of  the  hospital. 

"  The  next  summer  we  had  a  nice  scrimmage  with  five  hundred  French 
and  Indians  under  Molong.  Putnam,  and  sixty  of  us  soldiers,  were  order 
ed  to  go  to  Lake  Champlain  to  see  what  the  French  and  red-skins  were  up 
to.  We  built  a  stone  wall  on  the  shore  of  the  lake  for  a  breastwork, 
planted  a  lot  of  pines  and  hemlocks  in  front  of  it,  so  that  from  the  lake 
you  never  would  have  mistrusted  that  a  wall  had  been  built  there.  We 
were  as  still  as  mice.  The  canoes  came,  got  abreast  of  us,  when  one  of 
the  Rangers  hit  his  gun  against  a  stone.  Quick  as  a  flash  the  Indians 
stopped  paddling. 

" i  Let  'em  have  it !'  shouted  Old  Put,  and  we  sent  a  lot  of  red-skins 
heels  over  head  into  the  lake.  But  we  were  only  a  handful,  as  they  could 
see  by  our  firing,  and  the  French  captain  landed  to  cut  us  off.  We  saw 
what  he  was  up  to,  and  got  ahead  of  him,  and  all  hands  returned  without 
a  scratch. 

"A  few  days  later  we  were  out  on  a  scout,  and  the  French  and  In 
dians,  under  Molong,  ambushed  us.  We  sprung  behind  trees  and  fought 
like  tigers.  Putnam  shot  four  Indians  and  aimed  at  another,  but  his 
gun  missed  fire,  and,  before  he  could  fix  the  flint,  the  Indians  sprung 
upon  him,  and  seized  his  gun.  They  had  surrounded  us,  and  we  had  to 
surrender. 

"  The  Indians  had  a  special  spite  against  Putnam  because  he  had  killed 
so  many  of  'em ;  so  at  night,  when  we  halted,  they  tied  him  to  a  tree,  got  a 
lot  of  wood,  heaped  it  around  him,  and  were  going  to  burn  him  at  the 
stake ;  but  it  was  raining  hard,  and  put  the  fire  out.  They  kindled  it 
again ;  but  the  French  captain,  Molong,  found  out  what  the  red-skins  were 
about,  rushed  up,  kicked  away  the  brands,  and  took  him  to  his  own  tent, 
and  so  saved  his  life. 

"  The  next  year  General  Amherst  sent  Putnam  up  to  Oswegatchie 
(Ogdensburg),  and  he  captured  a  lot  of  French  and  Indians.  He  was 
with  Wolfe  at  Quebec.  In  '62  he  fought  the  Spaniards  in  Cuba ;  and  in 
'64,  when  that  red-skin  Pontiac  got  up  his  conspiracy,  Putnam  command 
ed  the  Provincials  that  were  sent  away  up  the  lakes  to  Detroit.  I  guess 


THE    FRENCH    COMMANDER    SAVING    PUTNAM. 


there  ain't  a  man  in  America  who  has  seen  more  fighting  than  Old  Put. 
He  has  had  lots  of  hair-breadth  escapes.  He  is  as  generous  as  he  is  brave. 
He  drove  a  flock  of  sheep  to  Boston  last  summer  when  the  people  were 
almost  starving  after  the  port  was  shut  up.  He  had  a  square  talk  with 


BATTLE   OF   BUNKER  HILL. 


69 


GENERAL    PUTNAM    STARTING    FOR    BOSTON. 


General  Gage  and  Lord  Percy.     He  is  well  acquainted  with  them,  for  all 
three  were  together  in  Canada.     Gage  laughed  at  the  idea  of  our  fighting 
" '  Why,  with  five  thousand  troops  I  can  march  from  Massachusetts  to 
Georgia,'  said  he. 


60 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


"  '  So  you  can,'  says  Putnam,  l  if  you  behave  yourself,  and  pay  for  what 
you  eat ;  but  if  you  attempt  to  do  it  in  a  hostile  manner,  the  women  will 
give  you  a  drubbing  with  their  skimmers.' 

"  Putnam  has  a  farm  in  Connecticut,  and  keeps  a  tavern.  He  has  a 
picture  of  General  Wolfe  on  the  sign.  When 
the  news  came  of  the  battle  of  Lexington,  he 
was  plowing.  He  unharnessed  his  team,  left 
the  plow  in  the  furrow,  mounted  his  horse,  and, 
without  stopping  to  change  his  clothes,  start 
ed.  "  If  there  is  any  fighting  to  be  done,  he 
is  always  'round." 

The  old  soldier  had  finished  his  pipe,  and 
now  threw  himself  on  the  ground  on  the  lee 
ward  side  of  the  fire. 

"  The  smoke  will  blow  in  your  face,"  said 
Esek. 

"  That  won't  hurt  me ;  but  let  me  tell  you  a 
thing  worth  knowing,  my  boy,"  said  the  soldier.  "Always  sleep  on  the 
leeward  side  of  the  fire.  True,  you  will  get  the  smoke,  but  the  heat  will 
dry  up  the  dampness  and  keep  you  from  having  the  rheumatiz.  If  you 
don't  want  your  bones  to  ache  by -and -by,  sleep  on  the  side  where  the 
smoke  blows." 

The  boys  saw  the  philosophy  of  it,  and  lay  down  by  his  side,  and  so 
spent  their  first  night  after  a  battle. 


CeriWO 


PUTNAM  S    SIGN. 


DRIVING  THE  BRITISH  OUT  OF  BOSTON. 


61 


CHAPTER  IV. 

DRIVING  THE  BRITISH   OUT  OF  BOSTON. 

NOW  came  hard  work  with  the  spade  and  shovel.     While  some  of  the 
soldiers  kept  guard,  others  threw  np  intrenchments,  till  from  Winter 
Hill,  where  Colonel  Stark's  regiment  was  stationed,  around  to  Dorchester, 
were  fortifications,  completely  shutting  the  British  army  in  Boston. 

There  came  an  important  day — the  3d  of  July.  Congress  had  appoint 
ed  General  George  Washington 
commander-in-chief,  and  he  had 
arrived  at  General  Ward's  head 
quarters  in  Cambridge.  The 
boys  had  heard  of  him  —  that 
he  had  been  a  surveyor,  and 
had  accompanied  General  Brad- 
dock  in  his  disastrous  campaign 
against  Fort  Du  Quesne,  and 
had  shown  himself  to  be  a  brave 
and  able  commander. 

On  the  morning  of  the  3d 
of  July,  the  regiment  paraded 
and  marched  to  the  colleges  in 
Cambridge,  and  were  drawn  up 
in  brigades  on  the  Common. 
They  saw  a  noble-looking  man, 
accompanied  by  General  Put 
nam,  General  Ward,  and  nearly 
all  the  generals  in  the  army, 
ride  cut  from  General  Ward's  head  -  quarters.  The  cavalcade  drew  up 
under  a  great  elm. 

The  regiments  presented  arms,  the  drums  beat  a  salute,  General  Wash 
ington  raised  his  cocked  hat,  and  then,  replacing  it  on  his  head,  drew  his 
sword,  and  rode  along  the  lines.  He  was  in  the  prime  of  life.  He  wore 


GENERAL    WASHINGTON. 


THE    BOYS   OF   76. 


WASHINGTON    TAKING    COMMAND    OF    THE    ARMY. 


a  blue  coat  witli  buff  trimmings,  buff  breeches,  and  high  top-boots,  an 
epaulet  on  each  shoulder,  and  a  black  cockade  on  his  hat.  He  sat  splen 
didly  on  his  horse.  There  were  decision  and  energy  in  all  his  movements. 
He  was  reputed  to  be  rich,  and  owner  of  a  great  estate  on  the  banks  of  the 
Potomac ;  but  he  had  left  all  to  take  command  of  the  army.  The  soldiers 
regarded  him  with  great  respect,  and  his  coming  gave  them  renewed  con 
fidence. 

A  strict  guard  was  kept  everywhere,  and  the  British  troops  in  Boston 
soon  found  themselves  in  want  of  fresh  provisions.  They  could  get  no  veg 
etables,  nor  fresh  meat.  Somebody  in  the  American  camp  got  up  a  hand 
bill  and  printed  it.  Elijah  took  a  copy  when  he  went  out  on  picket  at 
Charlestown  Neck.  He  was  so  close  to  the  British  sentinel,  that  they  could 
talk  with  one  another.  Elijah  rolled  the  handbill  round  a  stone,  and  threw 
it  at  the  British  soldier,  who  picked  it  up,  and  this  is  what  he  read : 


DRIVING  THE  BRITISH  OUT  OF  BOSTON. 


63 


AMERICAN  ARMY. 

1.  Seven  dollars  a  month. 

2.  Fresh  provisions  in  plenty. 

3.  Health. 

4.  Freedom,  ease,  affluence,  and  a  good  farm. 


ENGLISH  ARMY. 

1.  Three-pence  a  day. 

2.  Rotten  salt  pork. 

3.  The  scurvy. 

4.  Slavery,  beggary,  and  want. 


The  red-coat  put  it  into  his  pocket ;  but  the  next  night  a  deserter  came 
over  to  the  Americans — the  next  night  another ;  and  so  many  came  thai 
General  Howe  was  much  perplexed,  and  shot  several  who  tried  to  escape. 

In  September,  volunteers  were  called  for  to  go  on  a  secret  expedition 
through  the  woods  of  Maine  to  capture  Quebec.  Dodifer  joined  the  ex 
pedition,  and  bid  good-bye  to  Elijah  and  Esek.  Where  he  went,  and  what 
he  saw,  will  be  narrated  in  the  next  chapter. 

Elijah,  Esek,  and  Nicholas  remained  with  the  army  digging  trenches, 
standing  as  sentinels,  or  acting  as  guards  at  Washington's  head-quarters  in 
Cambridge. 

There  was  a  scarcity  of  arms  in  the  American  ranks  around  Boston,  but 
there  came  a  day  of  great  rejoicing,  for  an  American  vessel,  the 
Lee,  commanded  by  Captain  Mosely,  captured  the  English  brig        <-_ 
Nancy,  and  took  it  into  Marblehead,  with  two  thousand  mus-    %~  > 
kets,  one  hundred  thousand  flints,  thirty  thousand  cannon  -  shot,  ^  *" 
thirty  tons  of  musket -balls,  and  one  thirteen- inch   mortar.  j 

The  Essex  County  farmers  turned  out  with  their  oxen,  and 
drew  the  ammunition  into  camp.      When  the  long 
line  of  teams  wound  over  the  Medford  marshes  and 
reached  Cambridge,  the   soldiers  cheered  till 
they  were  hoarse. 

Elijah    #nd  Esek 
worked    with     levers 
and  crow-bars,  helping 
place  the  mortar  be 
hind  one  of  the  in- 
trenchments.   When 
they  got  it  in  posi 
tion,  General  Put 
nam,  in  his  enthu 
siasm,  mounted  it, 
with  a  bottle  of  rum, 

-,      -,  ,  WASHINGTON'S    HEAD-QUARTERS,    CAMBRIDGE. 

and  drank  to  its  new 

name,  "  The  Congress,"  and  soon  sent  a  shell  whizzing  through  the  air  into 

Boston. 


64 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


On  a  foggy  morning  in  December,  1775,  Elijah  and  Esek  were  sent 
with  other  soldiers  to  a  little  round  hill  called  "Cobble  Hill,"  almost 
down  to  the  edge  of  the  water,  to  throw  up  an  intrenchment.  There  was 
a  British  war-ship  at  anchor  only  a  short  distance  away,  but  the  fog  was 
so  thick  that  they  worked  all  the  forenoon  without  being  discovered.  At 


J  BOSTON, WITH    ITS  ENVI  RONS. 1776 


last  the  fog  lifted,  and  then  the  ship's  cannon  began  to  thunder,  and  the 
balls  came  so  thick  that  they  had  to  quit.  In  the  night  they  went  back 
with  a  cannon  and  placed  it  in  position — a  thirty-four-pounder.  As  soon 
as  it  was  light  enough  in  the  morning,  Captain  Smith  sighted  the  cannon, 
and  sent  a  ball  whizzing  over  the  marsh  that  went  plump  into  the  side  of 


DRIVING  THE   BRITISH   OUT   OF  BOSTON.  65 

the  vessel,  and  followed  it  up  till  the  captain  raised  his  anchor,  hoisted  his 
sails,  and  made  all  haste  to  get  away.  The  soldiers  shouted  so  loud  that 
the  British  on  Bunker  Hill  heard  the  hurra,  and  began  to  let  their  cannon 
roar  in  reply.  They  wasted  a  great  deal  of  powder,  doing  no  harm  to  any 
body. 

General  Washington-  established  strict  discipline,  and  looked  carefully 
after  the  health  of  the  army.  Provisions  were  plenty.  This  is  what 
Elijah  and  Esek  had  served  to  them  during  a  week: 

MEATS. 

Corned  beef  or  pork,  half  a  pound  per  day,  four  days  in  a  week. 
Fresh  beef  two  days. 
Salt  fish  one  day. 

FLOUR. 

One  pound  of  flour  per  day. 

Three  pints  of  pease  or  beans  during  the  week. 

Half  a  pint  of  rice  once  a  week. 

OTHER   THINGS. 

Potatoes,  onions,  cabbages,  turnips,  butter,  molasses,  and  a  quart  of  spruce  -  beer  every  day, 
with  now  and  then  a  glass  of  grog. 

The  determination  of  the  Americans  to  resist  the  aggressions  of  the 
king  and  his  ministers  was  not  confined  to  New  England,  but  extended  to 
all  the  colonies.  It  was  a  common  cause,  and  the  people  of  Virginia  and 
the  Carol inas  were  just  as  ready  to  take  up  arms  in  defense  of  their  rights 
as  the  people  of  Massachusetts. 

One  day  there  came  marching  into  camp  a  regiment  from  Virginia, 
from  the  beautiful  valley  of  the  Shenandoah.  It  was  commanded  by 
Daniel  Morgan.  The  men  wore  frocks  trimmed  with  fur,  and  fur  caps 
ornamented  with  buck-tails.  On  their  breasts  were  the  words  uttered  by 
Patrick  Henry  in  the  House  of  Burgesses  in  Virginia,  "  Liberty  or  Death !" 
They  were  armed  with  rifles,  and  had  marched  all  the  weary  way  from 
beyond  the  Potomac,  to  have  a  hand  in  driving  the  British  out  of  Boston. 

General  Washington  was  riding  out  to  inspect  the  intrenchments,  and 
met  the  brave  riflemen.  General  Morgan  saluted  the  cornmander-in-chief. 

"  From  the  right  bank  of  the  Potomac,  general !" 

From  the  Potomac !  Then  they  were  old  neighbors.  He  must  shake 
hands  with  them ;  and  the  commander-in-chief  dismounts,  goes  along  the 
line,  and,  with  tears  upon  his  cheeks,  shakes  hands  with  the  hardy  hunts 
men  of  the  Shenandoah,  who  have  shown  such  devotion  to  their  country. 

The  1st  of  January,  1776,  was  an  eventful  day.     The  regiments  were 


66 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


"FROM  THE  RIGHT  BANK  OF  THE  POTOMAC,  GENERAL!" 

paraded  to  receive  the  new  flags  which  Congress  had  agreed  upon.  Up  to 
this  time  some  of  the  regiments  had  carried  the  pine-^ree  flag;  other  regi 
ments,  those  from  Connecticut,  with  flags  bearing  this  motto,  "  Qui  trqns- 
tulit  sustinet"  ("God,  who  hath  transported,  will  sustain");  but  now  the 
regiments  were  to  fight  under  a  common  flag.  The  drums  beat  a  salute, 
the  soldiers  presented  arms,  and  the  flags  were  unfurled — each  flag  with 
thirteen  stripes,  blue  and  white,  and  thirteen  white  stars  on  a  field  of  blue. 
Thirteen  guns  were  fired,  and  the  regiments  marched  back  to  their  camps 
with  the  flags  waving  above  them. 

Just  about  the  time  the  flags  were  received  the  sentinels  at  Charlestown 
Neck  saw  a  British  officer  coming  down  to  the  picket-line  with  a  flag  of 
truce.  An  officer  went  to  meet  him,  to  see  what  he  wanted,  and  found  that 
he  had  a  proclamation  which  had  just  been  received  from  England,  sent 
over  by  the  king.  The  king  said  that  the  Americans  had  turned  rebels, 
and  were  carrying  on  a  war  for  the  purpose  of  establishing  an  independent 
empire,  and  that  the  British  nation  would  never  give  up  the  colonies.  He 
had  enlisted  thousands  of  soldiers,  and  was  negotiating  with  the  Prince  of 
Hesse,  in  Germany,  for  a  large  number  of  troops  to  aid  in  putting  down 
the  rebellion. 


DRIVING  THE  BRITISH  OUT  OF  BOSTON.  67 

If  the  American  soldiers  would  lay  down  their  arms  and  go  home,  he 

would  not  punish  them ;  but  if  not,  they  must  take  the  consequences. 

The  proclamation  was  read  in  camp,  and  the  soldiers  laughed  at  it; 

they  swung  their  hats,  and  cheered  louder  than  ever.     Lay  down  their 

arms !     Not  they. 

Henry  Knox,  the  young  book-seller,  whose  store  was  on  Cornhill,  a  stout, 

thick -set  man,  was  placed  in  command  of  all  the  artillery.     He  went  to 

Ticonderoga,  where  there  were  many  can 
nons,  engaged  ox-teams,  and  one  day  in  Feb 
ruary  the  army  saw  forty -two  sleds  drawn 
by  oxen  come  into  camp,  loaded  with  can 
non  and  powder  and  balls.  "Now  we  will 
drive  the  red-coats  out  of  Boston,"  said  the 
soldiers.  They  went  to  work  with  a  will, 
and  soon  had  forty -nine  cannon  and  six 
mortars  in  position  to  send  shells  arid  solid 
shot  across  the  water  into  the  town.  One 
ball  struck  Brattle  -  street  Church,  and  im- 

GENERAL,    HENRY    KNOX.  t        i  t      t     •         tf    •  n  r^.          i  •     i  6 

bedded  itself  in  the  wall.  On  the  night  of 

the  3d  of  March  the  cannon  and  mortars  were  thundering  from  sunset 
till  sunrise.  One  shot  went  into  the  British  guard-house,  and  wounded  six 
men.  Very  little  sleep  in  Boston  that  night. 

Elijah  did  not  know,  nor  did  any  one  in  the  army  know,  that  behind 
all  this  cannonading  General  Washington  had  a  grand  plan. 

The  next  night,  the  cannon  began  to  roar  again.  As  soon  as  it  was 
dark,  the  soldiers  in  Roxbury  under  General  Thomas  were  paraded — two 
thousand  in  number. 

"  You  are  to  march  in  silence.     No  talking  allowed,"  said  the  officers 

The  regiments  came  out  from  their  camps  into  the  road  leading  to 
Dorchester  Neck,  and  found  a  long  line  of  carts,  drawn  by  oxen  and 
horses  —  three  hundred  carts  in  all.  In  the  carts  were  gabions — great 
baskets  which  had  been  made  in  Dorchester  in  an  alder  swamp.  Some 
were  loaded  with  picks  and  spades.  The  teamsters  had  wound  wisps  of 
hay  around  the  felloes,  so  that  the  wheels  would  make  no  noise. 

The  troops  marched  down  the  road  across  the  marsh,  followed  by  the 
carts.  The  teamsters  were  not  allowed  to  speak  to  their  teams,  but  in 
silence  all  moved  on.  The  moon  was  shining  brightly,  but  all  the  while 
the  cannon  were  flashing  and  thundering,  sending  shot  and  shells  into  the 
town. 

The  soldiers  crossed  the  lowlands  and  came  to  the  hills  on  Dorchester 


68  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

Neck,  overlooking  the  harbor.  They  marched  up  the  steep  ascent  on  the 
south-west  side,  reached  the  top,  seized  the  gabions,  placed  them  on  the 
ground,  filled  them  with  earth,  and  soon  had  a  line  of  strong  intrench- 
ments.  Besides  gabions,  the  carts  contained  a  large  number  of  barrels. 
These  the  soldiers  filled  with  stones,  and  laid  them  in  position,  so  that  by 
pulling  away  the  trigs  they  would  go  rolling  down  the  steep  hill.  If  the 
British  attempted  to  inarch  up  the  hill,  they  would  be  crushed  to  death  by 
the  barrels. 


BOSTON    FROM   DORCHESTER,  WHERE    THE    INTRENCHMENTS    WERE    ERECTED. [1776.] 

General  Howe,  in  Boston,  listening  to  the  cannonade,  never  mistrusted 
what  was  going  on  over  on  the  hills  of  Dorchester  Neck. 

Admiral  Shuldham,  commanding  the  fleet  down  in  the  harbor,  never 
dreamed  that  the  Yankees  were  getting  ready  to  send  a  plunging  fire 
down  upon  his  decks.  The  sailors  on  the  watch  and  pacing  the  deck  of 
the  Glasgow,  frigate,  and  calling  out  "All  is  well,"  through  the  night,  did 
not  even  catch  a  glimpse  of  the  swarm  of  men  on  the  hills,  close  at  hand, 
till  daylight  streaked  the  east.  They  opened  their  eyes  wide,  and  inform 
ed  the  admiral  of  what  was  going  on.  The  admiral  came  up  from  his 
cabin  and  opened  his  eyes  very  wide,  and  sent  a  boat  off  in  all  haste  to  Bos 
ton  with  a  message  to  General  Howe,  that  if  the  Yankees  were  not  driven 
from  the  hill,  they  would  soon  be  able  to  drive  the  fleet  out  of  the  harbor. 

There  was  a  sudden  stir  that  morning  in  Boston.  Officers  were  riding 
furiously  through  the  streets,  and  orders  were  given  for  the  whole  army  to 


DRIVING  THE   BRITISH    OUT  OF   BOSTON.  69 

be  ready.  Boats  were  collected,  and  General  Howe  intended  to  start  from 
Long  Wharf  and  land  his  troops  on  Dorchester  Neck,  and  march  up  the 
hill ;  or  get  in  rear  of  it,  and  cut  off  the  retreat  of  the  Americans,  and  so 
defeat  them.  General  Washington  was  as  wide  awake  as  General  Howe. 
He  sent  more  troops,  and  had  the  whole  army  ready  to  march  at  a  mo 
ment's  notice.  A  high  wind  arose.  The  waves  rolled  in  from  the  sea. 
General  Howe  could  not  embark  his  troops,  and  before  the  waves  calmed 
the  Americans  were  so  strongly  intrenched  that  he  saw  the  only  thing  for 
him  to  do  \vas  to  get  out  of  Boston. 

On  Sunday  morning,  the  17th  of  March,  the  British  troops  went  on 
board  their  ships,  with  a  large  number  of  the  citizens  who  adhered  to  the 
cause  of  the  king.  It  was  a  sad  day  to  them — to  leave  their  comfortable 
homes  and  sail  away,  never  again  to  set  foot  in  these  streets.  As  the  Brit 
ish  troops  went  down  the  harbor,  the  Americans  marched  into  the  town  over 
the  Neck.  Elijah  noticed  that  the  fortifications  which  General  Howe  had 
erected  were  very  strong.  General  Howe  sailed  for  Halifax,  and  General 


BRITISH   FORTIFICATIONS    ON  THE   NECK. 

Washington  took  possession  of  the  town.  The  people  who  remained  wel 
comed  him  as  a  deliverer.  A  hard  time  they  had  had— cooped  up  for 
eleven  months  with  thirteen  thousand  soldiers,  and  nothing  to  eat  except 
salt  beef  and  fish — no  milk,  no  fresh  meat  or  vegetables.  The  only  thing 
that  they  could  have  in  abundance  was  rum,  and  that  they  could  get  at 
three-pence  a  quart ! 

Once,  in  the  month  of  August,  General  Gage  sent  some  ships  around 
Cape  Cod  to  Connecticut  with  soldiers,  who  landed  and  stole  a  few  flocks 
of  sheep  and  some  cattle,  so  that  the  army  and  the  citizens  had  a  taste  of 
fresh  meat.  A  few  months  later,  a  ship  came  from  London  bringing  a  file 
of  newspapers.  One  paper,  The  London  Chronicle,  contained  some  lines 
ridiculing  General  Gage's  operations  : 

"In  days  of  yore,  the  British  troops 

Have  taken  warlike  kings  in  battle. 
But  now,  alas  !    the  valor  droops, 

For  Gage  takes  naught  but  harmless  cattle. 
"  Britons,  with  grief  your  bosoms  strike  ; 

Your  faded  laurels  loudly  weep ! 
Behold  your  heroes,  Quixote-like, 
Driving  a  timid  flock  of  sheep  J" 


70  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

General  Howe  had  torn  down  several  hundred  houses,  and  used  the 
lumber  for  fuel.  The  Old  South  Meeting-house  was  used  for  a  riding- 
school.  One  of  the  officers  had  taken  Deacon  Wheelock's  pew,  and  used 
it  for  a  pig-pen.  The  other  meeting-houses  had  been  used  for  hospitals, 
and  the  city  was  in  a  sad  plight. 

To  pass  the  time  away,  the  British  officers  opened  a  theatre  in  Faneuil 
Hall,  and  brought  out  a  play  during  the  winter,  written  by  General  Bur- 
goyne,  entitled  "  The  Blockade  of  Boston." 

On  the  evening  when  it  was  to  be  enacted,  General  Howe  and  all  the 
officers  were  there  to  see  it.  It  happened  that  on  the  same  evening  Gen 
eral  Putnam  sent  two  companies  of  soldiers,  about  two  hundred  in  all,  to 
burn  some  houses  at  Charlestown  Neck,  in  which  the  British  outposts  were 
quartered  ;  and  when  they  attacked  the  pickets,  drove  them  in,  and  set  the 
houses  on  fire,  the  whole  British  army  was  alarmed.  The  play  had  just 
begun  when  a  soldier  rushed  upon  the  stage. 

"  The  Yankees  are  attacking  Bunker  Hill !"  he  shouted. 

The  audience  thought  it  was  a  part  of  the  play,  and  cheered  his  vigor 
ous  acting. 

"  I  tell  you  they  are  attacking  Bunker  Hill !" 

Just  then  a  cannon  w^as  heard. 

"  Officers  to  your  commands !"  shouted  General  Howe,  and  all  hands 
made  haste.  It  was  the  end  of  the  play  for  that  night. 


THE    OLD    SOUTH. 


EXPEDITION  TO    QUEBEC. 


CHAPTER  Y. 

EXPEDITION  TO  QUEBEC. 

IN"  August,  after  General  Washington  took  command  of  the  army,  a 
committee  from  Congress,  sitting  in  Philadelphia,  reached  Cambridge 
to  confer  with  him  about  sending  an  expedition  secretly  to  Canada, 
through  the  woods  of  Maine,  to  capture  Quebec.  General  Philip  Schuy- 
ler  was  on  Lake  Ghamplain  getting  ready  to  capture  St.  John's  and  Mon 
treal.  Captain  Benedict  Arnold,  of  Connecticut,  who  started  in  life  as  an 
apothecary,  but  who  had  bought  horses  in  Quebec  and  knew  all  about 
the  town,  believed  that  if  an  expedition  were  sent  up  the  Kennebec 
River  to  co-operate  with  an  army  sent  from  Lake  Champlain,  Canada 
might  be  secured  to  the  colonies.  He  thought  that  the  French  would 
take  up  arms  against  the  British.  The  plan  was  agreed  upon,  and  Captain 
Arnold  was  made  a  colonel  and  appointed  to  command  the  expedition.  It 
was  a  great  undertaking  to  march  so  far  through  a  wilderness,  where 
there  were  no  paths,  and  of  which  very  little  was  known.  Only  one  white 
man  had  been  over  the  route — Captain  Montressor,  of  the  British  army. 

There  were  thirteen  companies.  Two  of  the  captains  were  Captain 
Dearborn,  who  had  fought  bravely  at  Bunker  Hill,  and  Captain  Daniel 
Morgan,  from  Virginia.  There  were  two  lieutenant  -  colonels ;  one  was 
Christopher  Green,  of  Rhode  Island,  and  the  other  Timothy  Bigelow,  of 
Worcester,  Massachusetts.  There  were  about  eleven  hundred  men  in  all. 

On  the  13th  of  September,  Dodifer  bade  Elijah  and  Esek  good-bye  in 
Cambridge,  slung  his  knapsack  on  hk  shoulders,  and  marched  to  Medford, 
and  from  there  to  Maiden.  The  next  night  the  battalions  camped  at  Bev 
erly,  and  the  next  day,  Friday,  reached  Newburyport. 

The  good  people  of  that  town  opened  the  Presbyterian  Meeting-house 
for  them  to  sleep  in.  On  Sunday,  Dodifer  heard  Rev.  Mr.  Parsons  preach 
After  meeting,  the  troops  marched  down  to  the  wharves,  went  on  board 
the  vessels  in  waiting,  and  the  fleet,  sixteen  vessels  in  all,  sailed  down  the 
river,  out  into  the  ocean,  and  steered  eastward.  On  the  second  morning 
they  were  in  the  Kennebec,  and  sailed  up  that  river  to  Mr.  Gardner's  town, 


72 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


where  boats  were  in  waiting.  Now  came  h**vd  work.  The  boats  were 
heavy  and  leaky,  and  were  loaded  with  provisions — barrels  of  pork  and 
bread  and  flour.  They  rowed  up  the  river  five  miles  to  Fort  Western,  and 
from  there  to  Fort  Halifax,  which  stood  at  the  mouth  of  a  small  river 
which  the  Indians  called  Sebasticook.  There  the  boats  were  unloaded, 
and  every  thing  carried  about  eighty  rods  past  some  falls.  Then  the  boats 
were  drawn  up  by  ropes  and  reloaded.  The  river  was  so  rapid  that  halt 

_ the  time  Dodifer  had  to  be  in  the  water,  lifting  the 

boats  over  the  rocks.  At  night  the  soldiers  built 
arbors,  kindled  great  fires,  and  dried  their  clothes, 
but  the  air  was  chilling,  and  they  shivered  before 
morning. 

It  was  harder  and  colder  work  the  next  day,  for 
the  river  was  rapid.  The  boats  leaked  badly,  wet 
ting  their  flour  and  sugar.  The  night  was  so  cold 
that  their  clothes  froze,  but  every  body  was  in  good 
spirits.  At  night  the  boats  had  to  be  unloaded 
again,  and  the  barrels  of  pork  and  flour  carried  up 
a  steep  ledge,  and  the  boats  dragged  past  Skow- 
hegan  Falls,  where  the  river  boiled  and  foamed 
fearfully. 

The  next  day  the  water  was  smoother.  Seven 
miles  brought  the  expedition  to  Norridgewock  Falls. 
Colonel  Arnold  had  sent  oxen  and  sleds  in  advance 
to  this  point,  and  the  soldiers  loaded  the  teams  and 
dragged  boats  and  provisions  a  mile  and  a  quarter 
through  the  woods.  The  flour  was  examined,  and 

it  was  found 
that  a  great 
deal  of  it  was 
spoiled. 

From    Nor- 


GETTING    THE    BOATS    ABOUND    THE    FALLS. 


EXPEDITION   TO    QUEBEC.  73 

ridgewock  it  was  only  thirteen  miles  to  Carrytunk,  or  the  Devil's  Falls, 
where  the  river  leaps  over  a  ledge  and  falls  sixteen  feet.  The  boats  were 
unloaded  again.  Seven  miles  beyond  the  Devil's  Falls  there  was  another 
unloading,  and  every  thing  was  packed  on  sleds  and  dragged  through  the 
woods  four  miles.  The  expedition  had  passed  the  last  settlement ;  beyond 
was  a  pathless  wilderness.  One  of  the  riflemen  shot  a  moose  as  large  ai 
an  ox,  and  the  soldiers  had  a  delicious  supper. 

Colonel  Arnold  had  so  few  teams  that  the  soldiers  nn headed  the  pork 
ban-els,  slung  the  thick  slices  of  pork  on  poles,  and  so  helped  get  the  pro 
visions  over  the  carrying  places  ;  but  it  was  hard  work,  staggering  over  the 
hillocks  arid  fallen  trees.  Again  the  boats  were  launched,  but  could  only 
go  a  short  distance  before  they  were  again  unloaded.  Ther°  vrere  trout 
in  the  streams,  and  Dodifer  and  the  other  soldiers  caught  line  strings  of 
them,  which  they  cooked  for  supper. 

A  hard  time  they  had  the  next  day  at  the  seventh  carrying  place,  which 
was  across  a  bog.  At  times  Dodifer  found  himself  sinking  in  the  rnire  up 
to  his  knees,  while  staggering  along  with  pork  on  his  shoulders. 

On  October  13th,  the  army  had  been  a  month  on  its  way,  and  was  now 
moving  up  Dead  River,  a  branch  of  the  Kennebec.  The  mountains  were 
white  with  snow.  Lieutenant-colonel  Bigelow  thought  that  perhaps  Que 
bec  might  be  seen  from  the  top  of  one  of  the  highest  mountains,  and 
climbed  it.  He  could  see  mountains  all  around,  but  no  shining  steeples. 
Quebec  was  far,  far  away.  The  mountain  from  that  day  to  this  has  been 
called  Mount  Bigelow. 

The  next  day  Colonel  Arnold  sent  a  man,  with  two  Indians,  ahead  to 
some  of  his  friends  in  Quebec,  to  let  them  know  he  was  on  his  way,  that 
they  might,  be  ready  to  aid  him.  It  would  have  been  better  if  he  had  not 
sent  the  letter,  as  we  shall  see. 

Dodifer's  company  was  in  advance  of  the  others,  and  the  next  night 
they  had  a  light  supper,  for  the  provisions  were  behind,  and  there  were 
only  six  pounds  of  flour  for  sixty  men.  The  next  day  they  had  no  flour, 
and  only  a  small  piece  of  pork.  The  night  set  in  dark  and  rainy  ;  the  rain 
poured  in  torrents,  and  the  river  rose  suddenly.  The  banks  were  low,  and 
at  midnight  they  found  the  water  sweeping  around  them.  The  drift-wood 
was  floating  down  stream — old  logs  started  by  the  freshet — and  they  could 
hear  the  water  roaring  louder  and  louder.  They  stood  still,  not  knowing 
which  way  to  go.  Before  daylight  the  water  was  up  to  their  knees,  but 
they  reached  dry  ground  at  last. 

On  the  23d  of  October  the  soldiers  came  to  their  eleventh  carrying 

place  early  in  the  morning.     Getting  past  that,  and  going  two  miles,  they 

3* 


74:  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

came  to  the  twelfth ;  a  half  mile  beyond  that  they  came  to  the  thirteenth. 
Getting  past  that,  they  went  seven  miles,  but  the  stream  was  rapid  and 
swollen,  and  tilled  with  drift-wood,  and  six  of  their  boats  were  destroyed  on 
the  rocks,  and  all  their  salt  washed  away. 

Snow  had  fallen,  and  the  river  was  full  of  ice.  From  morning  till  night 
Dodifer  was  wet  to  the  skin.  Many  times  during  the  day  he  had  to  stand 
in  the  water  and  lift  the  boats  over  the  rocks.  His  shoes  were  wearing 
out.  His  feet  and  legs  were  black  and  blue,  and  his  ankle-joints  began  to 
swell.  The  last  ox  had  been  killed ;  he  could  have  no  more  fresh  meat. 
The  flour  and  pork  were  nearly  gone. 

Colonel  Arnold  decided  to  send  back  the  sick.  Forty-eight  men,  with 
a  sergeant,  started.  Some  of  the  well  men  lost  heart.  Captain  Williams 
and  Captain  Scott,  and  their  men  belonging  to  Major  Enos's  battalion,  de 
cided  to  return.  The  rest  of  the  captains  and  their  men  would  not  turn 
back.  It  was  a  tearful  parting. 

"  I  wish  you  success,  but  I  never  shall  see  you  again.  You  will  perish 
in  the  wilderness,"  said  Captain  Williams  to  those  who  were  going  on. 

"  I  am  ready  to  go  on  and  meet  whatever  fate  awaits  me ;  but  my  offi 
cers  and  men  will  not  go,"  Major  Enos  replied,  the  tears  upon  his  cheeks. 

Major  Enos  and  his  men  turned  their  faces  homeward,  and  the  braver- 
hearted  set  their  boats  up  stream.  The  wilderness,  hardship,  starvation, 
ice,  snow,  disease,  possible  failure,  imprisonment,  and  death,  were  before 
them;  but  they  would  not  turn  back. 

On  the  26th  of  October  the  expedition  passed  three  carrying  places. 
The  night  was  very  cold.  The  soldiers  had  very  little  supper  and  less  for 
breakfast ;  but  they  pushed  on. 

Oh,  brave  hearts  !  What  a  day  is  this  28th  of  October !  In  the  morn 
ing  they  pass  a  carrying  place,  come  to  a  pond,  and  then  to  the  long  carry 
ing  place,  four  miles  and  a  quarter:  They  are  on  the  dividing  line  be 
tween  the  Atlantic  and  the  St.  Lawrence.  Weak,  staggering  under  their 
burdens,  over  bogs,  along  steep  hill  -  sides,  through  the  dense  forest,  break 
ing  the  ice  in  the  streams  with  the  butts  of  their  guns  as  they  wade  through 
them,  sinking  knee-deep  in  the  mud  of  the  bogs — yet  they  push  on.  Rheu 
matism  seizes  them.  Some  are  burning  up  with  fever,  others  shaking  with 
ague.  But  there  is  no  turning  back.  On  they  toil.  They  know  not  how 
far  it  is  to  Sertigan,  the  place  where  they  can  get  something  to  eat.  They 
reach  a  little  stream  running  north  leading  to  Lake  Megantic.  They  have 
passed  their  last  carrying  place.  Twenty-four  times  they  have  dragged 
their  boats  past  the  rapids. 

No  pork  to  carry  now ;  the  last  mouthful  gone ;  seven  pints  of  flour  to 


EXPEDITION  TO  QUEBEC. 


75 


each  man  left.  They  measure  it  out,  a  gill  to  each  in 
the  morning,  stir  it  up  with  water,  lay  it  on  the  coals, 
bake  it  a  few  moments,  shoulder  their  guns,  and  move 
on.  At  noon  each  man  has  two  gills  of  flour,  at  night 
one  gill.  They  are  so  weak  that  a  stick  trips  them, 
and  when  they  are  down  in  the  snow,  it  takes  them  a 
long  time  to  get  up. 

Dodifer  and  his  company  lose  their  way.  There 
is  no  path.  They  have  a  compass,  and  steer  by  that 
west-north-west,  for  Canada  lies  in  that  direction.  Col 
onel  Arnold,  with  Captain  Hanchet  and  sixty  men,  have 
started  to  make  a  rapid  march  to  Sertigan — how  far  it 
is  they  do  not  know,  but  sixty  or  seventy  miles.  They 
will  hasten  back  with  provisions.  Oh,  the  gnawing 
within  !  and  the  gill  of  flour  makes  but  a  mouthful. 
The  last  morsel  of  meat  is  gone ;  but  there  are  the 
hides  of  the  oxen  which  they  had  killed,  lying  in  one 
of  the  boats,  which  they  have  dragged  four  miles 
across  the  dividing  ridge.  They  have  made  some  of 
the  hides  up  into  cartridge-boxes.  The  skins. are  mus 
ty,  but  perhaps  there  is  nourishment  in  them.  Dodi 
fer  cuts  a  skin  into  pieces,  boils  it  in  a  camp-kettle,  and 
makes  hide  soup.  He  broils  a  piece,  and  tries  to  chew 
the  burned  leather.  One  of  the  soldiers  cooks  his  moccasins.  Another 
has  an  old  pair  of  moose  leather-breeches,  which  he  boils  for  supper. 

Captain  Dearborn  has  a  large  Newfoundland  dog,  which  is  killed  and 
eaten,  entrails  and  all.  They  chew  the  leather,  then  scrape  away  the  snow, 
cut  a  few  hemlock  boughs  with  their  hatchets,  and  lie  down  to  sleep,  to 
rise  before  daylight,  eat  the  two  mouthfuls  of  cake  and  another  piece  of 
broiled  leather,  and  then  stagger  on  toward  Canada. 

There  are  women  in  the  party.  Mrs.  Grier,  wife  of  Sergeant  Grier,  a 
large,  athletic  woman,  has  accompanied  her  husband,  to  take  care  of  him, 
if  he  should  be  sick  or  wounded.  She  wades  through  the  streams,  carries 
her  heavy  pack,  eats  her  gill  of  flour,  lies  down  to  sleep  in  the  snow,  thus 
helping  to  secure  liberty  to  the  country.  Every  body  treats  her  with  re 
spect.  Mrs.  Warner,  wife  of  a  soldier,  accompanies  her  husband.  The 
soldier  is  weak  and  faint,  and  the  wife  shoulders  his  knapsack  and  trudges 
by  his  side.  He  staggers  and  falls  —  strength  gone,  hope  gone,  courage 
gone.  He  leans  his  head  against  a  tree.  He  is  ready  to  welcome  death  in 
any  form.  His  wife  urges  him  on,  but  he  can  not  stand  upon  his  feet. 


ARNOLD  8  ROUTE  TO 
QUEBEC. 


76  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

Dodifer  would  gladly  help  him,  but  the  expedition  can  not  halt  for 
any  one.  Others  have  dropped  by  the  way,  never  to  rise  again.  The 
ranks  are  growing  thinner.  Dodifer  beholds  the  wife  standing  with  the 
knapsack  on  her  back,  the  gun  on  her  shoulder,  trying  to  lift  her  husband 
to  his  feet.  It  is  the  last  view.  The  column  moves  on,  leaving  them 
there. 

Joyful  news !  Colonel  Arnold  has  reached  Sertigan,  and  a  messenger 
has  arrived  with  the  information  that  a  party  of  Frenchmen  are  on  their 
way  with  cattle  and  flour. 

Hurra!  hurra!  They  make  the  forest  ring.  Six  pints  of  flour  left 
for  each  man.  That  will  keep  them  alive  till  the  cattle  arrive.  They 
launch  their  boats  upon  the  Chaudiere.  One  is  smashed  in  the  swift 
stream — another,  another,  six — every  thing  on  board  lost.  All  their  flour 
gone  !  God  help  them  now!  In  the  wilderness,  and  nothing  to  eat.  They 
have  dragged  their  boats  across  the  great  divide  to  no  purpose.  They  must 
march.  There  is  no  road;  but  on,  picking  their  way  over  rocks  and  fallen 
trees,  eating  pine  bark,  so  the  seven  hundred,  like  a  long  line  of  shadows, 
move  on,  ever  toward  Quebec. 

God  be  praised !  The  cattle  have  come.  The  French  have  arrived. 
A  bullet  is  sent  through  the  brain  of  an  ox ;  flfty  knives  gleam  in  the  air. 
Before  the  flesh  has  ceased  to  quiver  it  is  broiling  on  the  coals.  Saved; 
strength  returns.  The  desponding  pluck  up  heart.  They  break  out  into 
singing,  and  move  on. 

While  on  the  march,  Dodifer  made  the  acquaintance  of  a  young  officer 
(Aaron  Burr)  who  was  acting  as  aid  to  Colonel  Arnold,  and  who  was  only 
twenty  years  old.  He  was  from  Pennsylvania;  had  left  home,  and  joined 
the  army  against  the  wishes  of  his  friends.  lie  was  a  very  agreeable  young 
man,  and  Dodifer  set  it  down  that  he  would  be  heard  from  in  the  future, 
if  they  ever  reached  Canada. 

With  buoyant  hopes  the  men  go  on.  They  do  not  mind  the  snow,  the 
cold  nights,  the  fording  of  streams,  the  hardships,  now  that  they  have 
something  to  eat.  But  they  are  weak,  some  have  swollen  limbs,  some  are 
afflicted  with  rheumatism,  some  are  burning  up  with  fever;  yet  they  are 
approaching  Sertigan,  where  the  French  have  an  abundance  of  provisions. 
The  French  are  delighted  to  see  the  Boston  men,  as  they  call  Colonel  Ar 
nold's  party;  but  they  are  shrewd  enough  to  charge  high  prices  for  all 
they  sell.  Refreshed,  strengthened,  glad  to  know  that  they  are  out  of  the 
wilderness,  the  army  marches  up  the  Chaudiere,  and  on  the  9th  of  Novem 
ber  reaches  the  St.  Lawrence.  For  thirty-two  days  the  seven  hundred  and 
fifty  have  struggled  in  the  wilderness.  Colonel  Arnold  is  in  high  spirits. 


EXPEDITION  TO  QUEBEC. 


77 


VIEW    OF    POINT    LEVI    FROM    QUEBEC. 


He  sends  the  young  lieu 
tenant,  Aaron  Burr,  with 
two  Indians,  to  Montreal, 
to  inform  General  Mont 
gomery  (who  has  reached 
that  place  from  Lake 
Champlain)  of  his  arrival. 

It  is  a  snowy  morning  when  the  little  army  marches  out  from  the 
woods  and  makes  its  appearance  at  the  little  French  village  at  Point  Levi, 
opposite  Quebec.  The  sentinels  on  the  walls  of  Quebec  look  across  the 
river  and  see  the  line  of  men,  and  give  the  alarm.  Lieutenant-governor 
Cramahe  has  heard  that  Arnold  was  on  the  way,  for  the  man  who  was  sent 
by  Arnold  to  inform  the  French  that  he  was  coining  has  proved  a  traitor, 
and  the  lieutenant-governor  has  seized  all  the  boats.  The  frigate  Lizard 
and  another  war-ship  are  swinging  at  their  moorings  in  the  river.  A  furi 
ous  storm  is  raging.  The  wind  is  cold  and  raw.  There  is  Quebec ;  but 
with  no  boats  Colonel  Arnold  and  his  brave  men  might  as  well  be  at  Boston. 

Still,  there  are  boats  to  be  had,  and  before  night  the  French  and  In 
dians  furnish  him  with  thirty-six  birch  canoes.  Night  comes,  and  before 
morning  six  hundred  of  the  little  band  are  landed  in  Wolfe's  Ravine,  the 
spot  where  General  Wolfe  landed  in  '59.  The  crews  of  the  war-shij* 
have  been  on  the  watch,  but  in  the  darkness  the  canoes  have  glided  back 
ward  and  forward  landing  the  men.  Day  dawns,  and  one  hundred  and 
fifty  are  forced  to  remain  at  Point  Levi. 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


WOLFE  S    RAVINE. 


General  Guy  Carleton  was  at  Montre 
al,  and  Colonel  M'Lane  commanded  the 
troops  in  Quebec.  He  had  eighteen  hun 
dred  men  under  arms,  not  more  than  five 
hundred  of  whom  could  be  depended  upon. 
The  people  of  Quebec  were  favorably  dis 
posed  toward  the  Americans,  and  Colonel 
Arnold  expected  that  the  moment  he  made 
an  attack  the  inhabitants  would  open  the 
gates.  The  little  army  climbed  the  bluff 
and  stood  upon  the  Plains  of  Abraham ; 
but  Arnold  had  no  cannon.  The  people 
upon  the  walls  gazed  at  the  Americans, 

but  did  not  open  the  gates.  Arnold  saw  that  he  must  wait  for  General 
Montgomery.  The  next  day  Dodifer  found  himself  marching  away  from 
Quebec,  up  the  north  bank  of  the  St.  Lawrence.  The  troops  inarched 
twenty  miles,  and  learned  that  General  Carleton  had  just  gone  down  the 
river  with  his  troops,  that  he  had  evacuated  Montreal,  and  that  General 
Montgomery  was  close  at  hand. 

Joyful  news  !  Happy  day !  Montgomery  arrives  with  provisions  and 
clothing,  but  he  has  only  five  hundred  men,  and  some  of  those  are  on  the 
sick-list.  Together,  he  and  Arnold  have  less  than  one  thousand  effective 
men.  Montgomery  has  brought  several  cannon,  and  the  troops  march 
back  to  the  city. 

The  cannon  are  only  small  field-pieces,  and  will  be  of  little  account 
against  the  solid  walls,  but  they  drag  them  through  the  snow.  It  is  hard 
work,  and  Montgomery's  men  are  as 
weak  as  those  who  have  toiled  through 
the  wilderness.  The  small-pox  breaks 
out,  and  the  men  begin  to  die.  Mont 
gomery  is  commander-in-chief,  and  re- 
»olves  to  attack  the  city  at  once.  He 
is  a  brave  man.  He  was  born  in  Ire 
land,  1737,  and  is  thirty -eight  years 
old.  He  was  with  Wolfe  in  the  bat 
tle  on  the  Plains  of  Abraham,  and 
now  he  is  here  upon  the  same  spot  to 
wrench  the  place  from  the  grasp  of 
England.  Every  body  loves  him.  He 

all    about   the    city,  and    plans  RICHARD  MONTGOMERY. 


EXPEDITION  TO  QUEBEC. 


79 


GENERAL    GUY    CARLETON. 


the  attack.      He  decides  to  leave  Major  Brown  and  Major  Livingstone 

with  two  hundred  men  to  make  a 
feint  from  the  Plains  of  Abraham, 
west  of  the  city.  Arnold  is  to  attack 
on  the  north  side,  while  Montgomery 
himself,  with  the  rest  of  the  troops, 
will  creep  along  the  narrow  cart-path 
under  the  rocky  bluff  of  Cape  Dia 
mond,  and  attack  on  the  south  side. 

It  was  a  desperate  undertaking 
which  Montgomery  had  in  hand.  The 
stone  walls  surrounding  the  city  only 
came  to  the  edge  of  the  bluff,  but  a 
post  fence,  fifteen  feet  high,  ran  down 
the  precipice  to  the  river.  The  posts 
were  spiked  and  bolted  together.  Be 
yond  the  fence  was  a  block-house,  fif 
ty  feet  square,  of  solid  timber  walls, 
with  loop-holes  for  musketry,  and  four  cannons  loaded  with  grape-shot, 
pointing  their  muzzles  to 
sweep  the  road.  Montgom 
ery  must  saw  away  the  posts, 
rush  up  the  cart -way,  and 
take  the  block-house. 

It  was  past  midnight,  the 
last  night  of  the  year.     Dodifer 
was  asleep,  wrapped  in  his  blank 
et.     He  had  made  a  shelter  of 
pine   boughs,  but    the   wind   whirled 
through  it,  and  was  drifting  the  snow 
over  him.    He  was  dreaming  of  home 
and  the  warm  fireside  there.     He  was 
getting  ready  to  sit  down  to  a  nice 
supper,  when  Captain  Dearborn  touch 
ed  his  shoulder. 

"  Fall  in,  my  boy,"  said  the  captain. 
He  arose,  shook  the  snow  from  his  blank 
et,  wrapped  it  round  him,  and  shouldered  his 
gun.     It  was  dark,  and  snowing.     The  wind 
whirled  the  snow  in  drifts.     He  was  near- 


THE    CLIFF. 


80 


THE   BOYS   OF  '76. 


ly  frozen.  His  teeth  chattered.  He  had  no  overcoat  or  mittens,  but  took 
his  place  in  the  line.  He  could  barely  see  his  comrades,  moving  like  shad 
ows,  through  the  gloom. 

Montgomery  and  his  men  go  down  the  steep  bank  to  the  river-side, 
and  creep  along  under  the  rocky  cliff,  the  wind  whirling  the  snow  in  their 
faces,  and  the  river  filled  with  floating  ice  sweeping  past  them.  They 
come  to  the  post-fence.  Montgomery  takes  a  saw,  and  with  his  own  hands 
saws  off  several  of  the  posts.  The  British  sentiiiels  in  the  block-house 
look  out  into  the  storm,  and  see  the  dark  forms  rushing  through  the 
opening. 

"Come   on!"      It   is  Montgomery's  last   command  —  his  last  words. 
From  loop-hole  and  port-hole  there  are  blinding  flashes.     A  storm  more 
terrible  than  the  whirling  snow  sweeps  through  the  air.     Grape  and  solid 
shot  crash  against  the  rocks  and  into  the  columns  of  men.     Montgomery 
,.—_.  .^   _-. -^... ,    falls,  both    of   his   aids  fall,  several  sol 
diers  fall,  pouring  out  their  warm  blood 
upon  the  drifting  snow.      The  soldiers 
j   flee  back  to  Wolfe's  Ravine. 

Dodifer  and  his  comrades  mean 
while  are  marching  through  the  deep 
snow-drifts  to  the  north  side  of  the  city. 
The  line  is  formed  in  the  darkness. 
They  rush  up  a  narrow  street.  Muskets 
flash  and  cannon  blaze  before  them.  He 
sees  Colonel  Arnold  fall,  shot  through 
the  knee.  Captain  Lamb  has  a  part  of 
his  face  torn  away.  Men  fall,  but  the 
column  does  not  retreat.  The  men  com 
posing  it  have  not  endured  the  hardships 
of  the  wilderness  to  run  at  the  first  fire, 
nor  the  first  disaster.  Colonel  Arnold  is 
carried  back  to  camp,  but  under  their 
captains  the  men  fight  on.  Dodifer  shel 
ters  himself  in  a  door- way,  takes  aim  at 
the  flashes  on  the  walls.  Bullets  whiz  past  him,  or  strike  into  the  sides 
of  the  buildings  around  him.  Solid  shot  sweep  down  the  street,  but  he 
and  his  comrades  brave  the  blinding  snow  and  the  storm  of  lead  and  iron. 
For  more  than  an  hour  they  continue  the  contest.  Suddenly  a  gate  opens, 
and  the  British  rush  out.  Before  he  is  aware  of  it,  their  retreat  is  cut  off. 
They  might  continue  the  fight  and  die  there,  but  it  would  be  throwing 


WHERE    ARNOLD    ATTACKED. 


EXPEDITION   TO   QUEBEC.  81 

away  their  lives.  They  lay  down  their  gnus  and  give  themselves  up. 
One  hundred  and  sixty  have  been  killed  or  wounded.  All  their  toiling, 
suffering,  and  privation  have  ended  in  failure.  Dodifer  finds  himself  at 
day-break  locked  into  a  building  inside  the  garrison ;  but  General  Carleton 
is  a  humane  man,  and  they  suffer  no  cruel  treatment  at  his  hands. 

Colonel  Arnold,  with  the  few  men  left,  retreated  three  miles,  estab 
lished  a  camp,  and  waited  for  re-enforcements  from  Montreal.  The  small 
pox  raged  in  the  camp.  The  men  had  little  to  eat,  and  were  dishearten 
ed.  It  was  midwinter,  and  the  snow  was  deep.  General  Carleton  might 
have  captured  all  of  them,  but  he  knew  that  disease  was  thinning  the 
ranks ;  he  had  nothing  to  fear  from  Arnold,  and  he  might  as  well  let  time 
do  its  certain  work. 

While  lying  there,  the  troops  were  astonished  one  morning  to  see  a 
woman  come  into  camp,  the  wife  of  private  Warner.  They  had  seen  their 
comrade  sitting  by  a  tree  in  the  wilderness,  unable  to  move  on,  and  his 
wife,  with  his  knapsack  on  her  back  and  his  gun  on  her  shoulder,  trying  to 
help  him  to  his  feet.  They  had  thought  of  them  as  dead ;  biit  there  was  the 
brave-hearted  woman.  She  had  sat  by  the  side  of  her  husband  while  the 
column  passed  on.  She  heard  the  sound  of  their  retreating  footsteps,  and 
their  voices  growing  fainter  in  the  distance.  She  sat  there  through  the 
day,  through  the  night ;  sat  till  to  sit  longer  was  to  die  by  his  side.  He 
still  breathed — the  fire  was  feebly  burning — might  burn  a  day  or  two 
longer.  Should  she  go  and  live,  or  remain  and  die.  The  last  kiss  was 
given,  the  last  look  taken,  and  then,  alone,  day  after  day,  she  traveled,  fol 
lowing  the  trail,  digging  roots  from  beneath  the  snow,  and  eating  hem, 
reaching  the  French  settlement  at  last. 

Spring  came.  General  Wooster,  who  had  been  at  Montreal  during  the 
winter,  arrived  with  re-enforcements ;  but  before  he  could  accomplish  any 
thing,  some  troops  arrived  from  England  to  re-enforce  General  Carleton, 
and  General  Wooster  was  obliged  to  retreat. 

Months  passed,  but  there  came  at  length  an  exchange  of  prisoners,  and 
Dodifer  was  glad  to  set  his  face  once  more  toward  home.  Yet  his  suffer 
ings,  hardships,  and  privations  had  not  abated  his  love  for  liberty,  nor  hi* 
determination  to  do  what  he  could  to  secure  the  liberties  of  the  country. 


THE  BOYS  OF   76. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

FORT    SULLIVAN. 

ALL  of  the  thirteen  colonies  had  revolted.     The  people  of  Charleston, 
South  Carolina,  were  as  rebellious  as  the  people  of  Boston.     They 
had  seized  all  the  cannon,  muskets,  and  powder  they  could  lay  their  hands 
on,  and  had  every  reason  to  expect  that  the  king  and  the  ministry  would 
strike  a  blow  at  them. 

In  December,  1775,  Lord  North,  Lord  Germain,  and  Lord  Dartmouth, 
sitting  in  the  king's  chamber,  in  London,  decided 
to  chastise  the  people  of  Charleston.  They  sent 
word  to  Governor  Dunmore,  in  Virginia,  that  an 
expedition  would  be  fitted  out  for  that  purpose. 
Governor  Dunmore  sent  word  to  Governor  Eden, 
who  was  Governor  of  Maryland,  residing  at  An 
napolis.  The  ship  with  Governor  Dunmore's  letter 
sailed  from  Norfolk  up  the  Chesapeake  Bay,  but 
it  so  happened  that  Captain  James  Barron,  com 
manding  an  American  vessel  in  the  Chesapeake, 
captured  the  vessel,  and  the  plan  of  the  ministers 
was  made  known  to  the  inhabitants  of  Charleston. 
This  was  in  April,  1776.  The  people  of  Charles 
ton  were  for  the  most  part  Whigs ;  but  up  in  the 
interior  of  the  State  the  Tories  were  in  the  majority.  The  ministers 
concluded  that  if  Charleston  were  taken  possession  of,  and  the  royal 
standard  raised,  the  whole  State  would  once  more  acknowledge  allegiance 
to  the  king. 

To  protect  the  city,  Colonel  William  Moultrie  was  directed  to  build  a 
fort  on  Sullivan's  Island,  in  the  harbor.  The  island  is  about  three  miles 
long,  but  not  more  than  half  a  mile  wide ;  and  it  was  believed  that  a  fort 
erected  there  would  prevent  the  war-ships  from  coming  up  to  the  town. 
There  were  plenty  of  palmetto-trees  on  the  island,  and  a  large  number  of 


LORD    GERMAIN. 


FORT  SULLIVAN. 


83 


COLONEL  MOULTRIB. 


negroes  were  set  to  work  cutting  them  down,  and  hauling  them  to  the 
lower  end  of  the  island. 

The  engineers  laid  up  the  logs,  one  upon  another,  in  two  lines,  six 
teen  feet  apart,  with  cross -logs  binding  them  firmly  together,  and  filled 
the  space  between  with  sand,  making 
the  wall  of  the  fort  sixteen  feet  high, 
with  embrasures  for  cannon.  Thirty- 
one  guns  were  mounted ;  nine  of  them 
were  twenty-six-pounders,  six  were  eight 
een  -  pounders,  the  rest  smaller.  Only 
twenty-two  of  the  thirty-one  could  be  of 
much  service.  Another  work,  called 
Fort  Johnson,  was  erected  between  Sul 
livan's  Island  and  Charleston ;  so  if  a  fleet 
were  to  pass  Fort  Sullivan  it  would  have 
to  take  the  fire  of  Fort  Johnson  and  its 
twenty  guns. 

On  the  main -land,  west  of  the  fort, 
at   Haddrell's   Point,   two    batteries    of 
nine  guns  were  erected  to  prevent  the  fleet  from  getting  into  a  cove,  and 
firing  at  the  rear  of  the  fort,  where  no  guns  were  in  position. 

On  the  31st  of  May,  the  people  living  on  the  sea-coast,  twenty  miles 
north  of  Charleston,  saw  a  fleet  of  more  than  fifty  vessels  sailing  into  a 
harbor  by  Dewee's  Island,  and  dropping  anchor.  Word  was  sent  to 

Charleston.  So,  then,  the  blow  which 
had  been  anticipated  was  about  to  be 
struck. 

General  Washington  sent  General  Lee 
to  take  command  of  the  troops  in  Charles 
ton.    He  arrived  on  the  3d  of  June;  went 
down  and  visited  the  fort;  saw  that  it 
was  not  finished  on  the  south-west  side.     He  shook  his  head. 

"  The  ships  will  take  position  out  there,"  he  said,  pointing  to  the  south 
west,  "  and  will  make  it  a  perfect  slaughter-pen.  Do  you  think  you  can 
defend  it,  Colonel  Moultrie  ?" 

"  Yes,  sir,  I  think  I  can." 

Colonel  Moultrie  was  a  cool-headed,  good-natured  man,  and  had  not 
the  least  doubt  of  his  ability  to  hold  the  fort. 

While  Lee  and  Moultrie  were  talking,  the  fleet  made  its  appearance  off 
the  bar.  It  was  commanded  by  Sir  Peter  Parker.  Governor  Campbell, 


PORT    SULLIVAN. 


84 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


SIR    HENKY    CLINTON. 


who  had  been  governor  of  the  State,  was  on  board;  also  Sir  Henry  Clinton, 
with  three  thousand  troops.     Wind  and  tide  were  favorable,  and  thirty-six 

of  the  vessels  succeeded  in  cross 
ing  the  bar  before  the  tide  ebb 
ed.  One  of  the  ships,  the  Prince 
of  Piedmont,  loaded  with  pro 
visions,  got  among  the  breakers 
and  was  wrecked. 

The  next  day  a  boat  with  a 
white  flag  came  in  from  the 
fleet,  but  a  sentinel  down  by  the 
shore  fired  at  it,  doing  what  he 
had  no  business  to  do.  The 
boat  started  back  and  would  not 
return,  although  an  officer  waved 
his  handkerchief  to  call  it  back. 
Colonel  Moultrie  sent  a  boat  out 
to  Sir  Peter  Parker  with  an  apol 
ogy.  The  sentinel  had  fired 
without  orders,  and  if  another 
flag  were  to  be  sent,  it  would  be  properly  received.  Sir  Henry  Clinton 
and  Sir  Peter  Parker  accepted  the  apology ;  and  Sir  Henry  being  com 
mander  of  the  land-forces,  and  authorized  to  re-establish  the  government, 
sent  a  proclamation  to  the  Committee  of  Safety,  ordering  all  the  subjects 
of  the  king  to  lay  down  their  arms  and  acknowledge  his  authority.  The 
Committee  of  Safety  read  it,  laid  it  aside,  and  went  on  with  their  work 
getting  the  troops  ready. 

Although  the  ships  crossed  the  bar  during  the  first  week  in  June,  the 
British  were  so  slow  in  their  movements  that  they  were  not  ready  to  make 
an  attack  till  the  28th.  General  Lee  and  the  people  of  Charleston  were 
much  obliged  to  them  for  waiting  so  long.  Troops  from  Virginia  and 
North  Carolina,  as  well  as  those  from  South  Carolina,  had  time  to  reach 
Charleston. 

Sir  Henry  landed  troops  on  Long  Island,  and  marched  them  to  its  far 
ther  end,  opposite  the  upper  part  of  Sullivan's  Island ;  took  all  the  ship's 
boats  up  there  into  a  cove,  intending  to  cross  to  Sullivan's  Island,  disperse 
the  American  troops  there  under  Colonel  Thompson,  and  march  down  and 
attack  the  fort  in  the  rear,  while  the  fleet  attacked  in  front.  Together,  the 
army  and  fleet  would  make  themselves  masters  of  the  island. 

Colonel  Moultrie  had  four  hundred  and  thirty-five  men.     He  had  only 


FORT   SULLIVAN. 


85 


five  thousand  four  hundred  pounds  of  powder  —  enough  for  twenty -six 

rounds  to  each  cannon ;  but  lie  resolved  to  make  it  last  as  long  as  possible. 

Beautiful  the  morning  of  Friday,  June  28th.     A  few  light,  fleecy  clouds 

dot  the  horizon.    Colonel  Moultrie  is  riding  up  toward  the  north  end  of  the 


CHARLESTON    IN    1776. 

island  to  see  the  troops  under  Colonel  Thompson,  when  he  discovers  that 
the  ships  are  spreading  their  top-sails  and  raising  their  anchors.  The  tide 
is  coming  in,  the  wind  favorable,  and  the  ships,  one  after  another,  are 
moving  up  the  harbor.  Over  on  Long  Island  drums  are  beating,  and  the 
regiments  forming.  He  gallops  back  beneath  the  palmetto -trees  to  the 
fort. 

"  Beat  the  long  roll !"  The  drums  beat  and  the  soldiers  take  their  places 
beside  the  guns,  seize  their  rammers  and  sponges,  and  are  ready  to  defend 
the  flag  floating  from  the  staff  at  the  south-eastern  bastion — a  blue  flag, 
with  a  crescent  moon  in  the  upper  corner. 

Sir  Peter  Parker  has  a  powerful  fleet :  the  Bristol,  fifty  guns ;  Experi 
ment,  fifty  guns ;  Active,  twenty-eight  guns ;  Solebay,  twenty-eight  guns ; 
Actceon,  twenty  -eight  guns;  Siren,  twenty -eight  guns;  Sphinx,  twenty  - 
eight  guns;  Ranger,  twenty  -eight  guns;  Friendship,  twenty -two  guns; 
one  bomb-vessel. 


86 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


SIR    PETER    PARKER. 


In  all,  there  are  two  hundred  and  ninety  guns,  besides  the  mortars  for 
firing  bombs.     Proudly  the  ships  sail  up  the  bay  —  their  sails  filled,  their 
waving,  the  water  rippling  against  their  sides.    The  drums  have  beat 
en  to  arms,  and  on  the  decks  arc 
the  sailors,  ready  to  open  fire  when 
ever  the  word  is  given. 

In  Charleston  the  roofs  are  cov 
ered  with  men,  women,  and  chil 
dren.  They  cluster  in  the  belfries 
of  the  churches,  gazing  at  the  fleet, 
hoping  that  the  garrison  in  the  fort 
will  be  able  to  defend  it,  yet,  after 
what  General  Lee  has  said,  fearing 
the  worst. 

Half -past  ten.  The  bomb  boat 
has  dropped  anchor  more  than  a 
mile  away.  There  is  a  puff  of 
smoke  on  her  decks.  A  deep, 
heavy  roar  rolls  up  the  harbor,  and 
a  shell  thirteen  inches  in  diameter 
rises  in  the  air,  leaving  a  thin  white  trail  to  mark  its  course.  Up,  up, 
up  it  rises,  sails  away,  describing  a  beautiful  curve,  and  falls  slowly,  then 
faster,  and  still  faster,  and  strikes  upon  the  magazine  at  the  north-west  an 
gle  of  the  fort.  It  explodes,  whirls  up  a  column  of  sand,  but  no  one  is 
harmed. 

The  Active  leads  the  fleet.  She  swings  around  the  northern  end  of  the 
sandy  reef,  called  the  Lower  Middle 
Ground,  followed  by  the  Bristol,  Ex 
periment,  and  Solebay.  They  come 
close  to  the  fort.  Sir  Peter  will  make 
quick  work  of  it.  The  fight  may  be 
sharp,  but  it  shall  be  decisive.  He 
will  knock  that  cob -house  affair  of 
logs  to  pieces  in  a  few  minutes. 
Down  go  the  anchors,  with  spring- 
ropes  on  the  cables  to  keep  the  ships 
broadside  to  the  fort.  He  will  soon 
have  one  hundred  and  fifty  cannon  SULLIVAN'S  ISLAND— POSITION  OF 

ISH    FLEET. 

pouring  a  continuous  fire  upon  it. 

As  the  anchors  go  down,  the  twenty-six  and  eighteen  pounders  open 


A.  f 

B    TAffjn s oil's  J3 ctcc y. 

C  Clinton's  Faroe. 
DBri'tfye  of  touts 


THE    BRIT- 


FORT  SULLIVAN.  87 

fire,  and  the  ships  send  back  a  reply  from  all  the  guns  on  the  starboard 
side.  The  roar  of  the  cannonade  jars  the  windows  in  Charleston.  The 
sailors  on  the  ships  work  with  a  will,  determined  to  send  the  shot  thick 
and  fast  into  the  fort,  and  make  it  so  hot  that  the  rebels  will  be  astounded. 
In  a  few  minutes  they  will  see  a  white  flag  hung  out,  or  else  the  Ameri 
cans  will  be  fleeing  in  consternation  over  the  bridge  of  boats  west  of  the 
fort  to  the  main-land.  One  hundred  and  fifty  guns  are  thundering  on  one 
side,  and  less  than  thirty  on  the  other.  The  fire  of  the  one  hundred  and 
fifty  is  concentrated,  while  the  fire  of  the  fort  is  distributed.  Surely  it 
can  not  take  the  fleet  many  minutes  to  silence  every  gun  in  the  fort. 
Rapid  the  fire  from  the  ships,  slow  that  of  the  fort.  The  shot  from  the 
ships  strike  into  the  palmetto  logs ;  but  the  wood  is  soft  and  spongy,  and 
no  splinters  fly.  Shells  from  the  mortar-boat  descend  into  the  area  and 
blow  up  cart-loads  of  sand,  but  do  little  harm.  Not  so  the  fire  from  the 
fort :  the  twenty-six-pound  shot  crash  through  the  sides  of  the  ships,  splin 
ter  the  masts,  and  make  terrible  havoc  on  the  decks. 

Twelve  o'clock.  The  white  flag  is  not  yet  flung  out.  Slowly  and 
steadily  the  twenty-six-pounders  reply  to  the  fire  of  the  fleet. 

"  Move  down  and  take  position  south-west  of  the  fort,"  is  the  signal 
which  Sir  Peter  makes  to  three  of  the  ships.  He 
has  discovered  that  the  fort  is  weak  on  that  side. 
Once  there,  the  heavy  guns  of  the  fort  will  not 
reach  the  ships,  and  the  platform  inside  the  fort, 
on  which  the  guns  are  mounted,  may  be  raked 
from  end  to  end.  But  the  tide  is  ebbing,  and  the 
Actceon,  Siren,  and  Sphinx  get  aground.  The 
Sphinx  loses  her  bowsprit,  but,  with  the  Siren,  THE  WAY  THE  GUNS  WERB 
manages  to  get  into  deep  water  once  more,  while 

the  Actceon  remains  firmly  fixed  on  the  shoal.  If  they  had  gone  in  on 
the  flood -tide,  they  would  have  made  it  uncomfortable  for  the  men  in 
the  fort ;  but  now  it  is  too  late. 

The  bomb-ship  has  thrown  sixty  shells ;  but  it  is  too  far  away,  and  the 
heavy  charges  have  shattered  the  bed-plates  of  the  mortars,  and  the  firing 
ceases. 

While  this  is  going  on  around  the  fort,  Sir  Henry  Clinton  is  embarking 
his  troops  in  boats  to  cross  to  the  upper  end  of  Sullivan's  Island.  The 
boats,  with  field-pieces  on  board,  glide  over  the  water,  and  approach  the 
island ;  but  Colonel  Thompson  is  ready  for  them.  He  opens  with  his 
eighteen-pounders,  and  they  pull  back  to  Long  Island.  Sir  Henry  sees 
that  he  can  not  hope  to  get  a  foothold  till  the  ships  have  silenced  the  fort. 


88  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

Sir  Peter  Parker  and  Governor  Campbell  are  on  board  the  Bristol^ 
directly  in  front  of  the  fort. 

"  Take  good  aim.  Mind  the  big  ships,  and  don't  waste  your  powder," 
is  Colonel  Moultrie's  order,  as  he  passes  from  gun  to  gun  ;  and  the  twenty- 
six-pounders,  aimed  accurately  and  fired  deliberately,  make  fearful  havoc 
on  the  Bristol.  Men  go  down  in  groups,  torn  and  mangled  by  the  shot 
and  splinters.  A  shot  cuts  the  spring-rope  of  the  Bristol,  the  ship  swings 
with  the  tide,  and  the  cannon-balls  sweep  the  deck  from  end  to  end. 

"  Give  it  to  her !  Now  is  the  time !  She  can't  bring  a  gun  to  bear !" 
is  the  cry  in  the  fort.  But  the  ship  swings  back  again,  and  the  fight 
goes  on. 

"Fire  once  in  ten  minutes!"  Colonel  Moultrie  is  obliged  to  issue  the 
order,  for  there  are  only  a  few  cartridges  left. 

"  When  your  powder  is  gone,  spike  your  guns,  and  retreat,"  is  General 
Lee's  order,  brought  by  Major  Boyd.  Colonel  Moultrie  has  no  thought  of 
retreating.  Oh  for  more  powder !  The  cartridges  are  almost  gone. 

"  Stop  firing !" 

Colonel  Moultrie  will  wait  a  while.  Perhaps  the  ships  will  try  to  get 
nearer ;  and  then,  with  the  few  remaining  cartridges,  he  will  bore  them 
through  and  through. 

"  The  rebels  have  done  firing,"  says  a  sailor  on  the  Bristol  to  his  com 
rade. 

"  Glad  am  I,  for  we  have  had  a  terrible  drubbing,"  the  comrade  re 
plies. 

But  the  rebels  are  not  done  firing. 

"  I  send  you  five  hundred  pounds  of  powder,"  is  the  note  which  a  mes 
senger  brings  from  Governor  Rutledge.  "Don't  make  too  free  use  of 
your  cannon ;  keep  cool,  and  do  mischief." 

Oh  yes,  Colonel  Moultrie  will  keep  cool ;   but  he  will  let  Sir  Peter 
Parker  know  that  they  are  still  alive  inside  the  fort,  and  the  cannon  thun 
der  once  more. 

So  the  rebels  are  at  it  again !     Sir  Peter  will  see 
about  it,  and  the  ships  pour  all  together  their  broadsides 
upon  the  little  fortress,  which  shakes  beneath  the  shock. 
A  ball  enters  an  embrasure,  and  strikes  down  nearly 
every  man  at  a  gun ;   another  ball  chips  a  great  piece 
from  the  muzzle  of  an  eighteen-pounder;  another  cute 
the  flag-staff,  and  the  blue  banner,  with  its  crescent  moon, 
falls  into  the  dttch  outside  the  fort.     There  are  sad  hearts  in  Charleston 
now.     So  the  fort  has  surrendered  !     Not  yet. 


FORT   SULLIVAN.  89 

Out  from  an  embrasure  leaps  Sergeant  Jasper — out  where  the  cannon- 
balls  are  flying.  He  picks  up  the  flag,  ties  it  to  the  rammer  of  a  cannon, 
mounts  the  parapet,  and  plants  it  on  the  bastion.  The  balls  are  whirling 
past  him ;  they  strike  around  him ;  but  not  till  it  is  firmly  planted  will  he 
stir  from  the  spot. 

Oh,  Sergeant  Jasper !  unknown  by  the  world  till  now,  this  act  of 
yours  shall  send  your  name  down  to  the  advancing  ages ! 

I       I 


SERGEANT    JASPER. 


Surrendered !  No.  The  cannon  still  are  flaming,  and  the  thousands 
on  the  roofs  in  Charleston  take  heart  once  more. 

The  sun  goes  down.  The  cannon  still  are  roaring.  Through  the 
evening  those  who  still  gaze  seaward  from  the  steeples  see  the  flashes,  and 
hear  the  roar  of  battle. 

Eleven  o'clock.  The  tide  is  flooding  the  marshes,  and  on  the  incoming 
flood  the  ships  slip  their  cables  and  creep  away.  Terrible  the  scene  on  the 
Bristol.  The  decks  are  slippery  with  blood.  There  are  mangled  corpses 
lying  amidst  the  dismantled  cannon.  The  cockpit  is  crowded  with  wound 
ed.  There  are  great  rents  in  the  sides  of  the  ship,  and  the  carpenters 
are  at  work  plugging  the  holes.  The  mizzen  mast  is  gone,  the  mainmast 
shattered,  the  rigging  cut  to  pieces,  the  sails  rent.  The  captain  has  lost 
his  left  arm.  A  cannon-ball  has  carried  away  the  seat  of  Sir  Peter's 
breeches,  and  a  splinter  has  wounded  him  in  the  thigh.  Forty  of  the  crew 
have  been  killed,  and  seventy-one  wounded.  The  Experiment  is  almost  as 


90  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

badly  damaged.  The  decks  are  crimsoned  with  the  blood  of  more  than 
eighty  killed  and  wounded.  The  Actceon  is  still  aground.  Two  hundred 
and  twenty-five  in  all  have  been  killed  or  maimed,  while  in  the  fort  ten 
only  have  been  killed,  and  twenty -two  wounded.  Noble  the  death  of 
Sergeant  M'Daniel. 

"  Fight  on,  boys !    Don't  let  liberty  die  with  me  !"  were  his  last  words. 

The  morning  dawns.  The  Actceon  is  still  firmly  fixed  on  the  sand 
bar.  The  crew  have  been  stripping  her  during  the  night.  They  fire  a 
few  guns,  set  the  ship  on  fire,  and  take  to  their  boats.  Out  go  Jacob 
Mulligan  and  a  party  in  three  boats.  They  climb  the  sides  of  the  burning 
ship,  aim  the  guns  at  the  fleet,  and  fire  them  once  more,  seize  the  bell  and 
the  flag,  which  the  crew  left  flying,  and  hasten  away.  The  flames  reach 
the  magazine,  and  the  Actceon  goes  up  into  the  air,  masts,  spars,  planks, 
knees,  braces,  cannon — all  in  a  sulphurous,  flaming  cloud,  to  rain  down,  a 
mass  of  ruins,  into  the  sea.  Charleston  shakes  beneath  the  explosion, 
and  those  who  look  seaward  behold  a  great  cloud  like  a  huge  umbrella 
hanging  over  the  harbor,  while  beneath  it,  floating  serenely  in  the  morning 
air,  is  the  blue  banner,  with  its  crescent  moon,  still  waving  where  Sergeant 
Jasper  planted  it. 

Baffled  and  defeated,  Sir  Peter  Parker  and  Sir  Henry  Clinton  re-em 
bark  their  troops,  and  sail  away  to  New  York ;  and  for  two  years  the  peo 
ple  of  Charleston  have  rest  from  war. 


BATTLE  OF  LONG  ISLAND.  91 


CHAPTEE  VII. 

BATTLE  OF  LONG  ISLAND. 

IN  January,  while  General  Washington  was  waiting  at  Cambridge  for 
General  Knox  to  arrive  with  the  cannon  from  Ticonderoga,  his 
thoughts  were  turned  to  New  York.  He  learned  that  Sir  Henry  Clinton 
was  to  be  sent  somewhere  with  a  portion  of  the  fleet.  Where  but  to  New 
York  would  he  go  ?  New  York  was  the  largest  town  in  America,  with 
twenty  thousand  inhabitants.  It  was  a  central  point,  and  had  a  good  har 
bor.  By  taking  possession  of  it,  the  war-ships  could  go  up  the  Hudson 
and  cut  off  communication  between  New  England  and  the  other  colonies. 
There  were  a  great  many  Tories  in  New  York,  on  Long  Island,  and  in 
New  Jersey.  The  moment  the  British  arrived,  they  would  side  with  the 
king. 

Something  must  be  done,  and  that  quickly,  to  prevent  the  British 
from  getting  possession.  He  would  send  a  man  who  would  act  with  en 
ergy,  General  Charles  Lee.  He  was  an  old  soldier — a  Welshman,  wht 
was  commissioned  ensign  by  George  II.  when  he  was  a  boy.  He  had 
fought  in  Europe,  was  well  educated,  could  speak  all  the  languages  of 
Europe,  and  the  Mohawk  besides ;  for  in  '55  he  came  to  America  with  his 
regiment,,  and  was  stationed  at  "  Schenectada,"  as  he  wrote  to  his  sister. 
The  Mohawks  liked  him,  and  chose  him  to  be  one  of  their  chiefs,  and 
called  him  Boiling  Water.  He  was  with  young  Lord  Howe  at  Ticonde 
roga,  and  was  well  acquainted  with  General  Howe. 

General  Washington  had  no  troops  to  spare ;  but  Governor  Trumbull, 
in  Connecticut,  was  ready  to  aid  in  the  matter,  and  the  Connecticut  patri 
ots  were  ready  to  place  themselves  under  General  Lee. 

The  New  York  Committee  of  Safety  heard  that  General  Lee  was  on 
his  way  with  twelve  hundred  troops.  The  Committee  of  Safety  were  a 
timid  set  of  men.  They  were  afraid  it  would  be  impolitic  to  take  military 
possession  of  New  York.  They  had  sent  to  the  West  Indies  for  powder, 
and  if  General  Lee  were  to  take  possession  of  the  town,  the  Asia,  a  sixty- 
four-gun  ship,  and  the  Duchess  of  Gordon,  a  smaller  vessel  in  the  harbor, 


92  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

might  fire  on  the  vessels  when  they  arrived.  They  requested  General  Lee 
to  remain  in  Connecticut  a  little  while. 

But  General  Lee  had  no  time  to  wait.  Sir  Henry  Clinton  had  sailed 
for  Boston,  and  the  Connecticut  troops  started.  General  Lee  was  down 
with  rheumatism,  and  could  not  ride  his  horse,  nor  bear  the  jolting  of  a 
carriage,  and  the  soldiers  carried  him  on  a  litter.  He  was  none  too  soon, 

for  on  the  very  day  the  troops 
crossed  the  Harlem  River  at 
King's  Bridge,  and  entered 
New  York,  Sir  Henry  Clin 
ton,  with  several  ships,  was 
sailing  up  the  harbor. 

The  Committee  of  Safety 
KING'S  BHIDGE.  jn  New  York  were  in  great 

o 

trepidation.  Between  General  Lee  on  the  one  hand,  and  General  Clinton 
on  the  other,  they  feared  the  town  would  be  destroyed :  they  hoped  Gen 
eral  Lee  would  not  do  any  thing  to  provoke  the  British.  "  Boiling  Water" 
boiled  over  at  that. 

"  If  the  ships  of  war  are  quiet,"  he  said,  "  I  shall  be  quiet ;  but  I  de 
clare  solemnly  that  if  they  make  a  pretext  of  iny  presence  to  fire  on  the 
town,  the  first  house  set  in  flames  by  the  guns  shall  be  the  funeral  pile  of 
some  of  their  best  friends." 

That  frightened  the  Tories,  who  hastened  to  see  General  Clinton. 
They  were  glad  to  hear  from  him  that  he  did  not  intend  to  attack  the 
town,  and  they  were  glad  to  see  the  ships  sail  away  southward  a  day  or 
two  later. 

Whither  Sir  Henry  had  gone  was  soon  understood  from  the  letter 
which  Captain  James  Barron  captured  in  the  Chesapeake.  The  fleet  was 
on  its  way  to  Charleston,  and  General  Washington  sent  General  Lee  to 
meet  Sir  Henry  there.  We  have  already  seen  how  Sir  Peter  Parker  was 
defeated  at  Fort  Sullivan,  and  how  Sir  Henry  Clinton  accomplished 
nothing. 

As  soon  as  General  Howe  sailed  from  Boston  for  Halifax,  General 
Washington  sent  a  portion  of  the  army  to  New  York,  for  he  very  well 
knew  that  the  British  felt  humiliated,  and  that  neither  General  Howe,  nor 
the  king,  the  minister,  nor  the  people  of  England  would  sit  down  quietly 
after  being  driven  out  of  Boston.- 

Soon  word  came  that  the  king  had  hired  thousands  of  soldiers  of  the 
Landgrave  of  Hesse  to  aid  in  putting  down  the  Americans,  and  that  great 
fleets  were  fitting  out  in  England,  and  that  by  midsummer  a  great  blow 


BATTLE   OF  LONG  ISLAND. 


93 


would  be  struck  somewhere,  and  in 
all  probability  at  New  York. 

While  Dodifer  was  making  his 
way  home  from  Canada,  and  while 
Nicholas  was  waiting  for  his  wound 
to  heal,  Elijah  and  Esek  were  inarch 
ing  from  Boston  to  New  York.  On 
a  pleasant  afternoon  in  April,  they 
crossed  King's  Bridge  over  the  Har 
lem  River,  marched  down  the  Bos 
ton  road,  as  it  was  called,  and  went 
into  camp  close  by  the  town. 

On  the  29th  of  June,  General 
Howe,  with  a  great  fleet  of  vessels, 
entered  the  harbor ;  and  a  few  days 
later  another  fleet  arrived  from  En 
gland  with  the  Hessians.  And,  still 
later,  a  third  fleet,  under  Sir  Peter 
Parker  with  Sir  Henry  Clinton, 
arrived  from  the  South.  General 
Howe  found  himself  at  the  head  of 
nearly  thirty  thousand  men.  On 
the  8th  of  July  he  landed  nine 
thousand  men  on  Staten  Island. 
The  British  soldiers  spread  their 
tents  on  the  green  slopes  of  Staten 
Island,  washed  their  clothes  in  the 
clear  running  brooks,  glad  to  stretch 
their  legs  on  land  after  a  long  sea- 
voyage. 

The  9th  of  July  came.  Impor 
tant  news  was  brought  by  a  post 
rider  from  Philadelphia  that  Con 
gress,  on  the  4th,  had  signed  one  of 
the  most  important  papers  the  world 
had  ever  seen,  declaring  the  colo 
nies  free  and  independent  of  Great 
Britain  forever.  Elijah's  regiment 
was  encamped  on  the  "  Common," 
the  place  now  occupied  by  the  City 


THE   BOYS   OF   76. 


WASHINGTON  S    HEAD-QUARTERS. 


Hall.  During  the  afternoon  the  colonel  received  orders  to  have  his  men 
paraded  at  six  o'clock  that  evening.  The  hour  came,  and  with  it  a  gen 
eral  beating  of  drums  in  all  the  regiments.  The  brigade  to  which  his  regi 
ment  belonged  was  drawn  up 
in  a  hollow  square.  Gener 
al  Washington,  whose  head 
quarters  were  down  at  Bowling 
Green,  came  riding  up  Broad 
way  with  his  staff.  The  sol 
diers  presented  arms,  the  guns 
gave  a  salute,  and  Washing- 
tori  sat  upon  his  horse,  while 
one  of  his  aids  in  a  voice  so 
loud  and  clear,  that  not  only 
the  soldiers,  but  the  great 
crowd  of  citizens  around,  could  hear  read  the  Declaration  of  Independ 
ence.  When  the  reading  was  finished,  the  soldiers  and  people  hurraed, 
and  the  citizens,  fired  up  by  what  they  had  heard,  started  off  upon  the  run 
down  Broadway  toward  Bowling  Green. 

"  Pull  it  down !"  they  cried.  They  ran  to  the  statue  of  the  king  on 
horseback,  which  stood  in  the  centre  of  the  Green,  erected  in  1770.  Some 
of  the  people  ran  for  a  ladder,  others  for  ropes.  A  man  climbed  the  lad 
der  and  fastened  the  ropes  to  the  statue. 

"Down  with  it!"  they  cried;  and  men  and  boys  and  soldiers — every 
body  who  could  get  hold  of  a  rope — pulled,  and  over  it  went,  with  a  thud, 
to  the  ground.  It  was  of  lead,  and  gilded. 

"  It  will  make  a  lot  of  bullets,"  said  the  people ;  and,  sure  enough,  it 
was  melted  into  bullets,  which  a  few  days  later  were  fired  at  the  king's 
troops. 

General  Washington  saw  that  General  Howe  probably  intended  to  land 
on  Long  Island,  and  several  thousand  troops  were  sent  across  Brooklyn 
ferry. 

Elijah  and  Dodifer,  and  the  other  soldiers,  marched  past  the  Fly  Mar 
ket  in  Maiden  Lane,  stepped  into  the  boats,  were  rowed  across  the  river, 
and  landed  at  the  ferry  stairs  on  the  Brooklyn  side.  They  climbed  the 
stairs  and  formed  in  line  in  front  of  the  ferry  tavern,  which  stood  on  the 
east  side  of  the  road,  kept  by  Captain  Waldron,  who  owned  the  ferry 
Captain  Waldron  was  a  patriot,  ready  to  fight  for  his  country.  Just  be 
yond  the  tavern  was  another  large  stone  house,  with  a  beautiful  garden 
behind  it,  owned  by  John  Kapalje,  a  bitter  Tory. 


BATTLE    OF   LONG   ISLAND.  95 

The  troops  marched  out  to  the  fortifications  which  General  Greene  had 
been  erecting.  General  Greene  had  constructed  a  formidable  line  of  in- 
trencliments.  Over  on  the  marsh  at  Wallabout  Bay  (the  present  Navy 
Yard)  he  dug  a  ditch,  from  tide- water  to  a  spring  on  the  edge  of  the 
marsh,  at  the  junction  of  Flushing  Avenue  and  Portland  Street.  From 
the  spring  a  line  of  earth- works  was  carried  to  the  top  of  a  hill  on  John 
Cowenhoven's  farm,  where  a  strong  fort  was  erected  (Washington  Park). 
It  was  named  Fort  Putnam. 

From  the  fort  the  line  of  intrenchments  was  carried  in  a  zigzag  course 
south,  to  another  small  fort  (corner  of  De  Kalb  Avenue  and  Hudson  Street), 
and  from  there  across  the  Jamaica  turnpike  (Fulton  Avenue),  to  Mr. 
Freeck's  mill-pond  at  the  head  of  Go  wan  us  Creek. 

Inside  of  this  line  were  several  forts.  One  at  Red  Hook,  one  on  a 
conical  hill,  which  was  called  the  "  Corkscrew "  fort,  because  the  trench 
wound  around,  it  spirally. 

The  troops  did  not  halt  in  the  intrenchments,  but  marched  out  the  Ja< 
maica  turnpike,  past  a  little  old  Dutch  church,  and  went  into  camp  upon 
the  hills. 

One  day  Elijah  went  out  with  a  party  to  get  some  fresh  beef  from 
some  of  the  farmers.  They  were  instructed  to  take  the  cattle  that  be- 
longed  to  the  Tories.  The  party  took  a  road  which  led  down  toward  the 
Narrows,  passing  a  house  where  a  Tory  by  the  name  of  Cortelyou  lived. 
It  was  an  old  stone  and  brick  house.  On  one  end  of  it  Elijah  saw  the 
figures  1699,  the  year  in  which  it  was  built.  He  passed  on  to  Gravesend 
Bay,  and  had  a  good  view  of  the  British  fleet  at  anchor.  From  there  he 
turned  north-east,  and  went  by  a  winding  road  to  the  hamlet  of  Flatlands. 
He  might  have  turned  north-wTest  there  and  gone  to  Flatbush,  about  two 
miles  distant,  and  from  thence  kept  right  on  in  the  same  direction  by  a 
narrow  road  called  Martenses  Lane,  to  their  camp ;  but  instead  of  that  he 
went  north-east,  and  came  round  through  the  hills  by  the  Jamaica  turn 
pike,  driving  in  a  herd  of  cattle. 

The  last  of  the  British  army  arrived  on  the  13th  of  July,  but  General 
Howe  seemed  to  be  undecided  what  to  do.  One  day  the  great  fleet  sailed 
up  the  bay,  as  if  General  Howe  intended  to  push  up  the  Hudson  and  land 
north  of  the  city,  which  he  could  have  done ;  but  after  the  fleet  had  spread 
her  sails,  making  the  harbor  white  with  canvas,  the  vessels  dropped  back 
to  their  anchorage. 

On  another  day  two  ships  sailed  up  the  Hudson,  paying  no  attention 
to  the  American  cannon  in  a  battery  at  Red  Hook,  which  opened  fire. 
The  ships  were  two  miles  away,  and  no  harm  was  done.  The  ships  went 


96 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


up  to  Haverstraw  to  land  some  arms  for  the  Tories  ;  but  they  quickly  re- 
turned,  for  the  Americans  had  a  lot  of  fire-ships  ready  to  let   ioose. 


THE    BRITISH    FLEET    IN    THE    LOWER   BAY. 


All  the  while  General  Howe  had  his  spies  in  General  Washington'! 
camp  finding  out  the  strength  of  the  army,  and  how  the  fortifications  were 
defended. 

Every  day  the  Americans  were  making  the  works  stronger.  General 
Greene  worked  so  hard  that  he  was  taken  down  with  a  fever,  and  General 
Putnam  was  appointed  to  the  command. 

On  the  night  of  the  27th  of  August,  Elijah  was  out  on  picket  at 
Gravesend  Bay.  Early  in  the  evening  he  could  hear  a  commotion  on 
ship-board,  and  on  Staten  Island.  Before  sunrise  all  the  drums  were  beat 
ing,  and  bugles  were  playing.  When  the  sun  rose  he  could  see  the  sailors 
shaking  out  the  sails  of  the  ships,  and  raising  the  anchors.  Boats  were 
plying  here  and  there.  About  nine  o'clock  the  whole  fleet  were  under 
way,  and  soon  after  the  bay  was  covered  with  boats  putting  out  for  Staten 
Island,  filled  with  troops.  There  were  thirty-seven  men-of-war,  and  more 
than  four  hundred  transport  ships,  besides  the  boats.  The  war-ships  stood 
in  toward  Gravesend  Bay,  opened  their  port -holes,  ran  out  their  guns, 
opened  fire,  and  threw  shot  and  shell  on  shore.  It  was  the  most  magnifi 
cent  spectacle  he  had  ever  seen. 

Colonel  Howard  was   commanding   the  Americana   along  the  shore. 


BATTLE   OF  LONG  ISLAND.  97 

He  sent  messengers  to  General  Putnam,  with  information  that  the  British 
were  landing;  and  as  their  boats  reached  the  shore  he  fell  back  toward 
Brooklyn,  with  his  riflemen  and 
pickets. 

General  Howe  planned  so  well 
that  by  noon  he  had  fifteen  thou 
sand  men  and  forty  pieces  of  can 
non  on  shore. 

General  Howe  commanded  in 
person.  He  was  a  great  favorite 
with  the  king.  He  was  an  affable 

gentleman,  but  he  loved  good  din-  TUB  I>LACE  WHERE  THE  BRITISH  LANDED. 

ners  and  good  wine..    He  was  fond  of  gambling,  and  sometimes  played 
cards  all  night. 

Sir  Henry  Clinton,  Earl  Percy,  Earl  OornwalKs.  Sir  William  Erskine, 
and  General  Grant  were  with  him,  all  able  officers,  who  had  bee-n  in  bat 
tie.  Earl  Percy  was  the  officer  who  went  out  from  Boston  to  Lexington 
with  re-enforcements,  and  saved  Colonel  Smith  and  Major  Pitcairn  from 
being  cut  off  by  the  minute-men.  Sir  Henry  Clinton  was  the  officer  who 
had  hastened  from  Copp's  Hill  to  Charlestown,  to  help  Howe  at  the  Battle 
of  Bunker  Hill.  He  was  smarting  under  the  repulse  he  and  Sir  Peter 
Parker  had  met  with  at  Charleston,  South  Carolina.  Corn  wall  is  had  seen 
fighting  in  Europe,  and  so  had  Sir  William  Erskine  and  General  Grant. 
The  last  named  officer  was  a  great  gourmand.  lie  could  eat  as  much  as 
two  or  three  ordinary  men.  He  thought  so  much  of  his  victuals,  that  he 
used  to  have  his  cook  sleep  in  his  tent,  so  that  he  could  tell  him  in  the 
night  what  to  get  for  breakfast. 

Besides  these  there  was  the  Hessian  General  De  Heister,  a  fat  old  man 
who  had  been  sea-sick  all  the  way  over.  He  was  a  great  smoker,  having 
used  up  all  his  tobacco  long  before  the  voyage  was  finished,  and  was  out 
of  sorts  with  himself  and  every  body  else.  Sevb/al  days  before  the  'fleet 
reached  the  harbor,  Sir  George  Collier  went  on  board  of  De  Heister's  ship 
with  a  package  of  tobacco.  The  old  general  filled  his  long-stemmed  pipe, 
took  a  few  whiffs,  and  felt  so  much  better  that  he  set  the  band  to  playing, 
and  drank  several  bottles  of  wine  to  the  health  of  George  III.,  the  Land 
grave  of  Hesse,  and  the  success  of  the  expedition. 

As  soon  as  the  British  troops  landed,  they  marched  to  Flatlands,  while 
Count  Donop,  with  a  party  of  Hessians,  took  possession  of  Flatbush.  Col 
onel  Hand,  with  three  hundred  Pennsylvania  riflemen,  were  in  that  village. 
The  riflemen  had  heard  a  great  deal  about  the  Hessians — how  terrible  the/ 


98  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

were  in  battle.  They  were  tall  and  ferocious-looking  with  their  bushj 
mustaches,  which  the}7  blacked  every  morning  with  their  boot -blacking. 
They  wore  tall  caps  with  bright  brass  plates  in  front.  They  plastered 
their  hair  with  tallow  mixed  with  flour,  wore  it  long,  braided  it  into  a  cue, 
which  hung  down  their  backs  like  a  whip-lash.  Their  uniform  was  a  blue 
coat,  yellow  vest  and  breeches,  and  black  gaiters. 

The  Grenadiers  of  Anspach  wore  towering  black  caps.  The  Waldeck 
ers  wore  cocked  hats  edged  with  yellow  scollops. 

Colonel  Hand  did  not  believe  all  that  he  had  heard  about  the  Hes 
sians.  He  withdrew  into  the  woods  with  his  riflemen,  but  took  a  look 
now  and  then  from  behind  the  trees  to  see  what  they  were  up  to,  and  re 
solved  to  give  the  fellows  who  blacked  their  mustaches  with  a  shoe-brush 
a  stirring-up. 

The  next  morning  at  day-break  the  riflemen  crept  down  close  to  the 
village  and  fired  upon  the  pickets.  The  Hessian  sentinels  flred  in  return, 
the  drums  beat,  and  the  sleepy  soldiers  came  tumbling  out  from  their  tents 
in  a  hurry.  The  riflemen  began  to  pick  them  off;  but  Count  Donop  had 
six  cannon,  which  opened  fire,  and  the  riflemen  were  driven.  General 
Sullivan  sent  a  cannon  down  to  Colonel  Hand,  and  at  noon,  while  some  of 
the  Hessian  officers  were  sitting  down  to  dinner  in  Mr.  Axtel's  house,  Sul 
livan's  artillery  fired  a  shot  through  it  which  sent  them  out-of-doors  in  a 
hurry.  Then  in  the  afternoon  the  riflemen  crept  up  once  more  and  poured 
in  volley  after  volley  upon  the  Hessians,  and  drove  them.  The  fight  be 
came  quite  hot.  The  riflemen,  from  behind  the  trees,  picked  off  the  Hes 
sians  very  fast.  The  Hessians  did  not  understand  such  fighting.  They 
could  see  only  an  enemy  here  and  there,  skulking  behind  a  tree  or  wall. 
They  could  see  flashes,  puffs  of  smoke,  and  then  came  the  bullets,  and 
somebody  was  sure  to  be  killed  or  wounded. 

Some  of  the  Hessians  ran  into  Judge  Leffert's  house,  to  fire  from  the 
windows  upon  the  Americans,  but  Sullivan's  artillery-men  sent  solid  shot 
through  the  house.  Some  of  the  riflemen  crept  up  and  set  it  on  fire,  and 
the  Hessians  had  to  leave. 

Count  Donop  opened  with  all  his  guns,  and  the  battle  raged  more  fierce 
ly,  Three  houses  were  burned,  besides  hay-stacks  and  barns. 

The  next  day,  the  25th,  Sullivan's  men  opened  fire  again,  and  harassed 
the  Hessians  exceedingly.  One  British  officer  was  killed,  and  the  rifleman 
who  shot  him  found  his  pockets  well  filled  with  gold.  A  Hessian  officer 
also  was  killed,  besides  several  soldiers;  but  though  the  Hessians  fired 
many  times,  not  an  American  was  injured,  and  the  riflemen  began  to  think 
that  the  Hessians  were  not  so  terrible  after  all. 


BATTLE   OF  LONG  ISLAND. 


99 


A  little  after  midnight  on  the  morning  of  the  26th,  the  riflemen  made 
another  attack,  creeping  up  close  to  the  Hessians  before  opening  lire.  The 
Hessians  were  utterly  disgusted  with  such  fighting.  What  was  the  use  in 
fighting  at  midnight?  And  who  wanted  to  be  routed  up  from  sleep  to 
fight  an  enemy  whom  they  could  not  see  even  in  the  day-time?  They 
made  such  complaint  that  Cornwallis  sent  some  British  to  do  picket  duty. 

On  the  afternoon  of  the  26th,  the  riflemen  attacked  again,  now  vigor 
ously^  their  enemy ;  and  as  General  Howe  was  not  ready  to  fight  a  battle, 
Count  Donop  was  ordered  to  fall  back  upon  the  main  body,  and  to  Flat- 
lands.  The  riflemen  took  possession  of  Flatbush.  General  Howe  had  a 
grand  plan  and  an  excellent  one,  as  we  shall  see. 

The  Americans  on  Long  Island  numbered  about  five  thousand.  Very 
few  of  the  soldiers  had  ever 'been  in  battle.  General  Howe  had  an  army 
of  seventeen  thousand  of  the  best  troops  in  the  world. 

The  right,  of  the  American  line  was  commanded  by  Lord  Stirling. 
Colonel  Atlee,  with  about  two  hundred  Pennsylvanians,  was  south  of  Go- 
wanus  Bay,  close  down  to  the  shore  (near  Twenty -third  Street).  Then 
came  the  Delaware  troops  under  Colonel  Hazlet,  and  the  Maryland  regi 
ment  under  Colonel  Smallwood.  Then  three  regiments  were  extended 
east  toward  Flatbush — in  all  about  eleven  hundred  men. 


MAP — BATTLE    OF    LONG    ISLAND. 


100  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

Behind  Stirling's  position  toward  the  ferry  was  Gowanus  Creek  and 
a  wide  marsh  (all  the  space  between  Court  Street  and  Fifth  Avenue), 
with  only  one  bridge  across  the  creek  near  a  mill  owned  by  Mr.  Brower. 

General  Sullivan  commanded  the  left.  He  had  only  four  regiments: 
Colonel  Williams's,  Colonel  Parsons's,  Colonel  Miles's,  and  Colonel  Hand's 
riflemen.  Colonel  Miles  held  the  extreme  left,  and  it  was  supposed  that 
he  would  keep  pickets  out  on  the  Jamaica  road.  But  the  Jamaica  pass 
was  a  good  way  from  him,  and  no  one  expected  that  the  British  would 
come  from  that  quarter.  General  Putnam  was  sure  that  Howe  would  at 
tack  in  front  of  Stirling  and  Sullivan.  The  Jamaica  road  was  like  the 
back  door  to  a  house.  Stirling  and  Sullivan  were  guarding  the  front 
and  side  doors,  while  the  back  door  was  left  wide  open,  which  was  a 
great  mistake. 

Such  is  the  position  of  the  American  lines  on  the  evening  of  the  26th 
of  August. 

Cornwallis  has  formed  his  plan.  He  leaves  General  Grant,  with  two 
brigades  of  British,  about  two  thousand  men  and  ten  cannon,  in  front  of 
General  Stirling.  He  leaves  De  Heister,  with  all  the  Hessians  (eight  thou 
sand),  in  front  of  Sullivan,  and  starts  at  nine  o'clock  with  Cornwallis,  Clin 
ton,  and  Percy,  for  a  long  night  march.  He  moves  east  toward  Jamaica. 
He  has  eight  thousand  men,  and  a  great  train  of  artillery.  He  leaves  his 
tents  standing,  so  that  in  the  morning  Sullivan  and  Stirling,  looking  through 
the  trees,  will  see  that  the  British  army  is  still  there.  He  sends  out  men 
to  seize  all  the  inhabitants  on  his  line  of  march,  so  that  no  one  shall  give 
information  of  his  movement. 

At  two  o'clock  in  the  morning,  Cornwallis  arrived  at  Mr.  Howard's 
tavern  (corner  of  Broadway  and  Brooklyn  turnpike).  The  tavern-keeper 
has  a  son,  William,  fourteen  years  old. 

"  Can  you  pilot  me  to  Jamaica  pass,  rnj  lad  ?"  Cornwallis  asks.  Wil 
liam  knows  every  inch  of  the  ground,  and  leads  Cornwallis  across  the  fields 
and  up  a  narrow  path  through  the  hills.  Cornwallis  is  surprised  to  find 
no  Americans  in  the  pass.  Before  day-break  he  is  through  the  back  door, 
and  halts  for  breakfast. 

Just  about  the  time  that  Cornwallis  started  for  Howard's  tavern,  some  of 
Colonel  Atlee's  pickets,  down  on  the  sea-shore,  by  Gowanus  Bay,  discern 
some  British  in  a  melon-patch,  and  fire  upon  them.  Soon  after  two  hun 
dred  of  Grant's  men  advance  upon  Colonel  Atlee ;  but  the  Pennsylvanians 
drive  them  back.  The  volleys  of  musketry  roll  over  the  hills,  waking  up 
the  Americans. 

General  Putnam  is  in  the  saddle.     He  is  confident  that  when  the  day 


BATTLE  OF  LONG  ISLAND 


breaks  Howe  will  attack  with  his  whole  force  Stirling  and  Sullivan.     Gen 
eral  Washington  is  at  Brooklyn,  looking  after  things  there. 

General  Stirling  forms  his  line  near  the  Red  Lion  tavern,  and  along 
what  is  now  the  western  boundary  of  Greenwood  Cemetery.  A  regiment 
of  riflemen,  under  Colonel  Kichline,  comes  to  re-enforce  Stirling.  Just  at 
day-break,  while  Cornwallis  is  up  at  Jamaica  Pass,  seven  miles  away, 
eating  breakfast,  the  firing  begins. 

General  Grant  sends  forward  several  regiments  to  begin  the  contest 

He  has  no  intention  of  pushing  things  just 
yet.  He  is  only  attracting  attention,  while 
Howe,  with  Clinton  and  Percy  and  Cornwal 
lis,  gets  into  position.  But  Stirling  orders  up 
two  cannon,  under  Captain  Carpenter,  which 
are  put  in  a  favorable  position,  and  the  rifle 
men,  from  behind  trees  and  fences,  make  it  so 
hot  for  Grant  that  he  is  obliged  to  fall  back, 
and  Stirling's  men  take  courage.  Little  do 
they  know  of  what  is  going  on  at  Jamaica ! 

And  now  the  Hessians,  under  De  Eeister, 
march  up  Martenses  Lane,  and  come  into  position  in  front  of  Sullivan. 

The  fleet  has  weighed  anchor,  and  Admiral  Howe  is  trying  to  sail  up 
the  bay  to  silence  the  American  batteries  at  Red  Hook,  and  be  ready  to 


LORD    STIRLING. 


ponr  a  shower  of  shot  and  shell  upon 
the   rear  of  the  Americans ;    but  the 
wind  is  contrary,  and  the  Roebuck  is 
the  only  vessel  that  has  succeeded  in  getting  near  enough  to  open  fire. 
Nine  o'clock  comes.     The  battle  thus  far  has  been  only  a  skirmish. 


102  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

There  are  some  American  pickets  at  Bedford.  They  can  hear  the  roar  of 
the  cannonade  and  the  rattle  of  musketry  in  the  south.  They  are  two 
miles  from  the  scene.  But  what  is  this  which  they  discover?  A  lono- 
column  of  bright -red  uniforms  —  thousands  of  bayonets  gleaming  in  the 
sun — a  great  park  of  artillery  rapidly  advancing  along  the  Jamaica  road. 
They  spring  to  their  arms.  There  comes  a  rattling  lire.  The  British  un- 
imber  their  cannon,  and  the  deep,  heavy  roar  rolls  away. 

General  Sullivan  hears  it.  What  is  the  meaning  of  it?  De  Heister 
and  Grant  hear  it,  and  comprehend  it.  There  is  a  quick  movement  in  the 
Hessian  and  British  lines,  and  the  battle  begins  in  earnest.  Two  thousand 
troops  hasten  on  shore  from  the  fleet  to  re-enforce  General  Grant,  making 
fully  nineteen  thousand  British  to  attack  five  thousand  Americans. 

A  severe  conflict  is  going  on  between  Sullivan's  men  and  the  Hessians, 
but  the  enemy  is  in  Sullivan's  rear. 

"  Retreat !"  is  the  order  which  runs  along  the  line,  and  the  men  turn 
their  backs  to  the  Hessians,  and  make  their  way  upon  the  run  through  the 
woods.  Suddenly  they  find  themselves  face  to  face  with  the  British,  under 
Cornwallis,  Clinton,  and  Percy. 

An  enemy  in  front — an  enemy  in  rear.  Cornwallis's  troops  received 
them  with  a  volley.  The  slaughter  had  begun.  The  Hessians  charge 
with  bayonet.  Some  of  Miles's  and  Parsons's  men  throw  down  their  guns 
and  beg  for  mercy ;  but  the  Hessians  plunge  their  bayonets  into  them, 
paying  no  heed  to  their  cries.  Others,  seeing  that  no  quarter  is  given, 
resolve  to  sell  their  lives  as  dearly  as  possible,  shooting  their  assailants  and 
using  the  butts  of  their  guns  in  defense. 

In  Sullivan's  ranks  is  John  Callender,  of  Massachusetts.  He  com 
manded  the  artillery  at  Bunker  Hill,  and  was  accused  of  being  a  coward, 
and  his  command  was  taken  from  him.  But  he  is  a  patriot,  and  is  in  the 
ranks.  He  sees  a  lieutenant  commanding  a  battery  fall,  and  the  gunners 
begin  to  leave  their  guns.  "  Stop !"  he  shouts.  It  is  the  voice  of  one 
accustomed  to  be  obeyed,  and  the  gunners  return.  He  opens  fire,  and 
holds  the  position  till  the  British  sweep  up  the  hill.  The  other  soldiers 
flee,  but  he  will  not.  He  is  ramming  home  a  charge,  when  a  bayonet  is 
leveled  at  his  breast.  A  British  officer  admires  his  heroism,  and  will  not 
let  him  be  harmed.  He  is  a  prisoner,  and  when  at  last  he  is  exchanged, 
General  Washington  sends  for  him,  to  take  by  the  hand  one  so  brave  and 
true. 

Sullivan  is  taken  prisoner,  and  so  are  many  of  his  men.  Others  flee 
toward  Freeck's  Mill. 

General  Grant  has  heard  Cornwallis's  guns,  and  now,  with  four  thou- 


BATTLE   OF  LONG  ISLAND. 


103 


JOHN    CALLENDER    SAVED    BY    A    BRITISH    OFFICER. 

sand  men,' attacks  Stirling,  driving  him  toward  the  creek.  The  fight  goes 
on  in  the  woods  and  fields,  and  by  Cortelyou's  house.  Corn  wall  is's  men 
take  possession  of  it.  The  Maryland  regiment,  Colonel  Smallwood's,  comes 
through  the  woods  to  make  its  way  to  the  bridge  by  the  mill,  but  Corn- 
wallis  has  cut  off  the  retreat.  The  Marylanders  are  brave  men.  They  are 
only  four  hundred.  Two  thousand  British  confront  them.  Cornwall's 
cannon  plow  through  their  ranks. 

"  Close  up !"  shouts  General  Stirling,  and  the  regiment  —  alone  now, 
without  any  supports  —  is  to  attack  four  times  its  number,  and  succeeds 
in  driving  Cornwallis's  front  line  back  to  Cortelyou's  house.  A  shower 
bursts  upon  the  Marylanders  from  the  windows.  Two  cannon  blaze  upon 
them.  They  are  driven,  but,  rallying  once  more,  they  pour  in  a  deadly 
fire,  and  shoot  the  British  artillery-men.  For  a  half-hour  the  battle  rages 


104 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


LORD    STIRL1NGS    LAST    STRUGGLE    AROUND    THE    OLD    CORTELYOU    HOUSE. 

around  the  house  till  two  hundred  and  fifty  of  the  four  hundred  have 
fallen,  and  then  Stirling  surrenders  his  sword. 

The  remaining  Americans  are  rushing  toward  the  mill,  the  only  place 
by  which  they  can  retreat.  Stirling  is  taken  prisoner.  Some  of  Small- 
wood's  men  gain  the  mill;  but  Cornwallis  has  planted  his  cannon  to  sweep 
the  road,  and  the  balls  come  through  the  ranks.  Some  of  Stirling's  men, 
cut  off  from  the  bridge,  retreat  across  the  marsh,  and  leap  into  the  creek 
to  swim  to  the  other  shore.  Some  sink  to  rise  no  more.  Some  are  shot 
by  the  brutal  Hessians  and  equally  blood-thirsty  British,  as  they  struggle 
in  the  water.  Others,  who  fall  upon  their  knees,  are  bayoneted  without 
mercy.  The  water  is  crimson  with  their  blood. 

The  British  officers  gloat  over  the  massacre.  One,  after  the  battle, 
writes  home  to  his  friends  about  it : 

"  The  Hessians  and  our  brave  Highlanders  gave  no  quarter,  and  it  was 


BATTLE   OF  LONG   ISLAND. 


105 


a  fine  sight  to  see  with  what  alacrity  they  dispatched  the  rebels  with  their 

bayonets  after  we  had  surrounded  them,  so  that  they  could  not  resist.    We 

took  care  to  tell  the  Hessians  that  the 

rebels  had  resolved  to  give  no  quarter 

to  them  in  particular,  which  made  them 

fight  desperately,  and  put  all  to  death 

who  fell  into  their  hands." 

General  Washington  is  up  in  one  of 
the  forts,  and  the  tears  roll  down  his 
cheeks  as  he  sees  the  slaughter ;  but  he 
is  powerless  to  save  them.  Before  noon 
the  battle  is  over;  and  from  fifteen  hundred  to  two  thousand  Americana 
have  been  killed,  wounded,  or  taken  prisoners.  The  British  have  lost  be 
tween  three  and  four  hundred. 


BROWYEK  8    MILL, 


THE    MARBLBHEADERS    AT    HOME. 


With  bullets  falling  around  them,  Elijah  and  Esek  made  their  way 
across  the  creek  by  the  mill,  and  reached  the  intrenchments. 

If  General  Howe  had  attacked  the  intrenchments  at  once,  quite  likely 
he  would  have  taken  them  and  the  whole  of  the  American  troops  on  the 


106 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


island ;  but  he  allowed  his  troops  to  rest,  resolving  to  begin  a  regular  siege, 
and  so  lost  a  golden  opportunity. 

Elijah  and  Esek  lay  all  night  within  musket-shot  of  the  British.  They 
could  hear  the  British  soldiers  at  work  with  axes  and  shovels,  and  knew 
that  they  were  erecting  batteries. 

A  thick  fog  had  settled  over  the  island.  Day  dawned,  but  the  fog  re- 
Aiained.  General  Washington  called  a  council  of  his  officers,  and  it  was 
decided  to  evacuate  the  island.  All  day  long  the  troops  lay  in  the  in- 
trenchments,  but  when  night  came  there  was  a  busy  scene  at  Brooklyn 
ferry. 

One  of  the  American  regiments  was  from  Marblehead,  in  Massachu 
setts,  and  the  men  composing  it  were  fishermen.  Every  man  knew  how  to 
pull  an  oar.  The  Marbleheaders  were  more  at  home  on  the  sea  than  on 
the  land.  The  regiment  was  commanded  by  Colonel  Glover,  and  General 


COLONEL    GLOVER. 


Washington  selected  him  as  the  fittest  person  in  the  army  to  superintend 
the  ferrying,  and  he  did  it  nobly. 

Elijah  and  Esek  were  asleep  when  their  captain  touched  them.  "  Get 
up !"  he  said,  in  a  whisper.  "  Don't  speak  ;  make  no  noise." 

They  took  their  places  in  the  ranks,  and  the  regiment  marched  away  to 
the  ferry  so  silently  that  the  British  heard  nothing  of  the  movement. 

Boat  after  boat  was  filled  and  sent  away  in  the  fog  and  darkness,  land 
ing  the  troops  in  New  York,  then  returning  for  more  From  midnight 


BATTLE   OF  LONG  ISLAND. 


107 


till  morning  the  fishermen  plied  their  oars.  When  the  morning  dawned, 
the  fog  lifted,  and  the  sun  rose  bright  and  clear.  The  British  were  ready 
to  open  fire  on  Fort  Putnam,  but  found  it  deserted.  General  Clinton  or 
dered  out  the  cavalry  to  pursue  the  fleeing  Americans.  The  troops  dashed 
down  to  the  ferry,  but  General  Washington  had  just  left,  and  his  army 

was  safely  landed  in  New  York. 
]g  General  Howe  thought  that  he  had 
Washington  in  a  trap,  but  found 
himself  mistaken,  and  was  greatly 
mortified  when  he  found  that  the 
whole  army  had  escaped. 


C4>LONEL    GLOVER    SUPERINTENDING    THE    EMBARKATION. 


10$  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


CHAPTER  YIIL 

EVACUATION  OF  NEW  YORK,  AND  BATTLE  AT  HARLEM. 

next  day,  after  the  troops  retreated  from  Brooklyn,  some  of  the 
ships  of  the  British  fleet  sailed  up  the  harbor  and  dropped  anchor 
within  cannon-shot  of  the  city.  In  the  night  one  ship  passed  into  the  East 
River,  while  a  portion  of  the  fleet  sailed  around  Long  Island  and  came 
np  the  Sound.  It  was  very  plain  that  General  Howe  intended  to  move  the 
army  from  Long  Island  across  to  New  York,  and,  by  taking  possession  of 
the  region  north  and  east  of  the  city,  capture  the  American  army. 

General  Washington  wanted  to  find  out  exactly  what  Howe  intended 
to  do,  and  Captain  Nathan  Hale,  of  Connecticut,  went  over  to  Long  Island 
to  learn  what  he  could  of  Howe's  intentions.  While  he  was  gone,  General 
Washington  made  preparations  for  leaving  the  city.  The  Marbleheaders 
were  kept  at  work  ferrying  the  sick  in  the  hospitals  across  the  Hudson  to 
New  Jersey,  and  in  transporting  the  supplies  up  the  river  to  Dobb's  Ferry. 
On  the  night  of  the  14th  of  September,  ten  war-ships  moved  up  and 

dropped  anchor  in  Kip's  Bay.  Mr.  Jacobus 
Kip  lived  in  an  old-fashioned  Dutch  house, 
built  of  bricks  make  in  Holland  and  brought 
to  America,  because  the  old  Dutch  burghers 
thought  that  there  was  no  clay  in  America 
suitable  to  be  made  into  bricks.  The  house 
stood  a  short  distance  from  the  water,  and 
had  curiously  shaped  windows  in  the  roof, 
and  a  weather-cock  above  the  ridge-pole. 
Several  regiments  of  Americans,  under  Colonel  Parsons  and  Colonel 
Fellows,  were  stationed  along  the  shore  to  prevent  the  British  from  land 
ing  at  Kip's ;  but  soon  after  day-break  the  ships  ran  out  their  guns  and 
began  to  fire.  The  shot  came  crashing  through  the  trees,  and  some  of  the 
soldiers,  who  never  had  been  under  fire,  were  greatly  frightened.  They 
started  to  run ;  but  the  officers  stopped  them,  and  they  curled  down  behind 
the  intrenchments. 


JACOBUS    KIPS    HOUSE. 


EVACUATION  OF  NEW   YORK,  AND   BATTLE   AT  HARLEM.  109 

Esek  and  Elijah  saw  a  great  fleet  of  boats  start  from  the  Long  Island 
shore  filled  with  troops — four  thousand  or  more — under  Sir  Henry  Clin 
ton.  They  pulled  past  the  ships,  which  were  roaring  all  the  while.  Be 
fore  the  first  boat  reached  the  shore  some  of  the  Americans  started  to 
run. 

"  Stop,  you  cowards !"  shouted  Colonel  Parsons. 

"  Come  back !"  cried  Colonel  Fellows ;  but  a  panic  had  seized  the  mili 
tia,  and  the  officers  might  as  well  have  tried  to  stop  the  wind.  Esek  and 
Elijah,  and  a  few  who  had  been  in  battle,  fired  a  volley,  and  then,  with 
the  officers,  retreated. 

As  they  fell  back  they  saw  General  Washington  trying  to  stop  the  fu 
gitives.  He  shouted  to  them,  but  they  paid  no  heed  to  him.  He  was  so 
mortified  and  angry  that  he  drew  his  sword  and  started  alone  across  the 
field  toward  the  British,  who  were  landing  and  forming.  His  bravery  had 
gotten  the  better  of  his  judgment.  One  of  his  aids  seized  his  horse  by  the 
bit.  Not  till  then  did  Washington  see  how  foolish  it  would  be  for  him  to 
rush  upon  the  enemy  alone. 

Elijah  heard  a  tramping  of  feet,  and  saw  the  fishermen  of  Marble- 
head,  who  had  finished  their  work  on  the  river,  and  were  once  more  in  the 
field.  They  had  braved  the  ocean  all  their  lives,  and  were  not  frightened 
now  in  the  presence  of  the  British.  Elijah  and  Esek,  and  the  other  cool- 
headed  soldiers,  faced  about  and  poured  in  such  a  fire  that  the  British, 
who  had  started  in  pursuit,  came  to  a  halt. 

All  this  time  General  Putnam  was  in  the  city  with  four  thousand  men, 
ignorant  of  what  was  going  on  at  Kip's.  General  Clinton  had  landed  two 
miles  in  his  rear,  and  was  ready  to  move  westward  to  the  Hudson.  It  was 
only  a  mile  that  he  would  have  to  inarch.  General  Washington  sent  a 
messenger  to  Putnam.  "Evacuate  immediately,"  was  the  order. 

The  only  way  of  escape  left  open  was  up  the  shore  of  the  Hudson, 
along  cart-paths,  for  the  British  were  already  in  possession  of  the  Boston 
road. 

General  Putnam  did  not  know  the  way,  but,  fortunately,  he  had  a 
young  officer  for  an  aid  who  knew  every  path  and  by-way — the  officer 
whose  acquaintance  Dodifer  made  in  the  wilderness  on  the  march  to  Que 
bec—Aaron  Burr.  General  Putnam  started. 

There  was  one  brigade  (Colonel  Silliman's)  in  a  little  fort  which  the 
Americans  had  named  Bunker  Hill  (corner  of  Broadway  and  Grand 
Street).  Major  Burr  rode  up  to  it. 

"  What  are  you  lingering  here  for '{  Why  don't  you  retreat  ?"  he 
shouted. 


110  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

"  We  can  not  retreat.  The  British  have  possession  of  the  road !  We 
will  stay  here  and  hold  the  fort,"  said  General  Knox. 

"  You  can't  hold  it  ten  minutes.     You  have  no  water,  no  provisions. 
There  is  no  place  where  the  troops  can  be  sheltered  from  the  bombs.     The 
British  will  throw  in  shells  and  make  it  a  slaughter-pen,"  said  Burr. 
"  It  will  be  madness  to  attempt  to  retreat,"  Knox  replied. 
"  I  can  guide  you.     I  know  every  cow-path." 

They  trusted  him,  and  went  upon  the  run,  down  through  the  fields  to 
the  Hudson,  past  Mr.  De  Lancey's  house,  then  through  woods,  along  narrow 
paths,  and  so  escaped. 

Just  about  the  time  that  General  Putnam  started,  General  Howe  and 
General  Clinton,  having  compelled  Washington  to  retreat,  rode  west  half 
way  to  the  Hudson,  and  drew  up  at  the  house  of  Mr.  Murray.  It  was  a 
delightful  mansion,  with  a  lawn  and  graveled  walks  in  front,  a  green-house, 
and  rustic  seats.  Mrs.  Murray  received  them  courteously,  and  it  occurred 
to  her  that  if  she  could  entertain  them  a  while  it  might  be  of  some  service 
to  General  Washington.  She  invited  them  in,  told  the  servants  to  prepare 
a  lunch,  and  entertained  them  so  charmingly  that  they  forgot  all  about 
affairs  outside.  She  kept  them  fully  two  hours ;  and  while  they  were  sip 
ping  Mrs.  Murray's  wine,  and  listening  to  her  engaging  conversation,  Gen 
eral  Putnam,  with  his  four  thousand 
men,  was  slipping  past  them  not  a  half 
mile  away. 

General  Howe  was  greatly  cha 
grined  when  he  learned  that  Putnam 
had  escaped,  but  set  up  his  head-quar 
ters  at  Mr.  Beekman's  fine  old  mansion. 
General  Washington  had  retreated 
toward  King's  Bridge,  and  was  quar 
tered  in  a  house  owned  by  an  old  ac 
quaintance  (Major  Morris)  who  had  served  with  him  under  General  Brad- 
dock.  Major  Morris  had  sided  writh  the  king,  and  was  absent  from  home 
with  his  beautiful  wife,  nee  Phillipse,  whom  General  Washington  once 
met  at  the  house  of  Colonel  Beverly  Robinson,  on  the  banks  of  the  Hud 
son,  near  West  Point,  in  1756.  Mrs.  Morris  was  Mrs.  Robinson's  sister, 
who,  as  Miss  Phillipse,  had  so  charmed  the  rich  young  planter  from  Virginia 
that  he  asked  her  to  become  Mrs.  Washington ;  but  she  declined  the  offer, 
and  married  Major  Morris,  and  now  Washington  was  occupying  her  house. 
The  next  morning,  the  British  light -infantry,  under  General  Leslie, 
advanced  toward  Harlem  through  a  narrow  path,  which  was  guarded  by 


BEEKMAN  S    MANSION. 


EVACUATION   OF   NEW    YORK,  AND   BATTLE   AT   HARLEM. 


Ill 


MORRIS  S    HOUSE. 


Colonel  Knowlton,  of  Connecticut,  the  brave  officer  who  had  fought  so  no- 

biy  at  Bunker  Hill ;  and  by  Major 

Leitch,  of  Virginia,  who  had  three 

companies  from  Colonel  Weeden's 

regiment. 

At  the  first  volley  of  the  light- 
infantry  Major  Leitch  fell,  with 
three  bullets  through  his  body ; 
and  a  moment  later  Colonel 
Knowlton  was  shot  through  the 
head.  This  was  a  sad  loss,  for 
he  was  one  of  the  ablest  officers 
in  the  army.  General  Washing 
ton  wrote  this  in  regard  to  him :  "  He  would  have  been  an  honor  to  any 
country." 

Colonel  Griffith  and  Colonel  Richardson,  commanding  two  Maryland 
regiments,  hastened  to  re-enforce  those  already  engaged.  The  light-in 
fantry  had  come  out  into  a  field,  and  the  Marylanders  and  Connecticut 
men  opened  such  a  vigorous  fire  that  they  fled  to  the  shelter  of  the  woods. 

General  Washington  feared  that  Howe  had  all  his  army  drawn  up  be 
hind  the  hills  (now  in  Central  Park),  and  did  not  dare  to  follow  up  the 
advantage.  The  Americans  lost  only  a  few  killed  and  wounded,  while 
the  light-infantry  lost  more  than  one  hundred. 

While  this  was  going  on,  Captain  Hale  was  returning  from  Long  Isl 
and.  He  had  been  through  the  British  camp,  but  was  recognized  by  a 
Tory  who  knew  him,  and,  having  a  grudge  against  him,  had  him  arrested. 
He  was  brought  over  to  General  Howe's  head- quarters,  at  Mr.  Beekmari's 
house,  and  turned  over  to  the  provost-marshal,  Cunningham,  a  brutal  Irish 
man,  who  had  charge  of  the  prisoners.  He  was  so  brutal  that,  if  he  saw 
a  prisoner  eating  his  dinner,  he  improved  the  opportunity  to  kick  the  dish 
from  his  hands.  No  scene  of  suffering  moved  him,  and  many  Whigs  were 
hanged  under  his  command. 

Captain  Hale  was  shut  up  in  Mr.  Beekman's  green-house.  Sentinels, 
with  loaded  muskets,  paced  the  graveled  walk  through  the  night.  In  the 
morning  Captain  Hale  was  told  that  he  was  to  be  hanged.  No  trial  was 
granted  him.  He  asked  for  a  Bible,  that  he  might  read  some  of  its  com 
forting  words  before  being  executed ;  but  Cunningham  would  not  permit 
him  to  have  one.  He  asked  that  a  clergyman  might  be  permitted  to  pray 
with  him ;  but  this  Cunningham  would  not  grant.  He  had  written  some 
letters  to  his  mother  and  sisters;  but  these  the  unfeeling  wretch  tore  to 


112 


THE   BOYS    OF  76. 


pieces.  Without  judge  or  jury,  court  or  trial,  on  a  bright  September 
morning,  he  was  taken  into  the  orchard  and  hanged.  There  was  no  quiv 
ering  of  the  lip,  no  blanching  of  his  cheek,  as  he  stood  beneath  the  tree. 
"  I  only  regret  that  I  have  but  one  life  to  give  to  my  country,"  he  said. 
They  were  his  last  words. 

General  Howe,  in  the  flush  of  his  success,  ignored  the  usages  of  war- 
to  try  men  by  court-martial  before  hanging  them.  He  decreed  that  the 
young  patriot  should  die  the  death  of  a  dog,  without  trial  of  any  kind.  It 
was  an  unworthy,  ungracious  act;  and  it  came  back  to  trouble  him,  as  we 
shall  see  by-and-by. 


BATILE   OF   WHITE   PLAINS. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

BATTLE   OF  WHITE  PLAINS. 

ENERAL  WASHINGTON  was  in  a  strong  position,  and  Howe 
did  not  dare  to  attack  him  in  front:  he  would  get  in  his  rear.  He 
embarked  his  army  in  boats,  sailed  east  through  Hell  Gate,  sixteen  miles 
to  Throck's  Neck,  a  point  of  Jand  owned  by  Mr.  Throckmorton. 

Washington  sent  Genera1  Heath  with  Colonel  Hand  and  Colonel  Pres- 
cott,  to  defend  a  bridge  over  a  causeway.  Heath  took  up  the  planks, 
planted  his  cannon  to  sweep  the  causeway,  and  Howe  had  to  re-embark 
once  more,  and  go  farther  east  to  Pell's  Neck,  where  a  body  of  Hessians 
had  landed.  When  Howe  reached  that  place  he  found  General  Sullivan 
confronting  him,  and  the  fishermen  of  Marblehead,  under  Colonel  Glover; 
but  the  British  greatly  outnumbered  the  Americans,  and  Howe  was  able 
to  push  inland  to  the  hills  south  of  New  Rochelle.  The  country  was 
thickly  covered  with  woods ;  but  Howe  found 
a  small  house  in  which  he  established  his  head 
quarters. 

The  next  day  seventy-two  ships  sailed  up 
the  Sound,  bringing  ten  thousand  Hessians,  two 
hundred  British,  and  two  thousand  horses,  be 
sides  an  immense  amount  of  supplies.    General         HOWB,g  HEAD_QUARTERS. 
Howe  had  left  several  thousand  troops  in  New 

York ;  but  this  arrival  gave  him  an  army  of  thirty  thousand  in  the  field, 
well  supplied ;  while  Washington  could  number  only  nineteen  thousand, 
many  of  whom  were  farmers  who  had  hastened  in  to  serve  a  few  days. 

Washington  saw  that  Howe  intended  to  get  in  his  rear  and  sweep  in 
the  whole  army,  as  a  fisherman  incloses  a  school  of  fish  in  a  seine ;  but  he 
had  no  intention  of  being  caught. 

On  the  21st  of  October  the  army  moved  from  Harlem  north,  in  four 
divisions,  commanded  by  Sullivan,  Lee,  Heath,  and  Lincoln. 

There  was  a  small  fort  on  the  bank  of  the  Hudson  called  Fort  Wash 
ington,  and  another  fort  opposite  on  the  west  bank,  called  Fort  Lee.  They 


114 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


were   erected   to  prevent   the  British   fleet  from  going  up  the  Hudson. 

General  Washington  wanted  to  evacuate  Fort  Washington,  but  Congress 

thought  it  ought  to  be  held,  and,  out  of 
deference  to  the  wishes  of  that  body,  he 
left  Colonel  Magaw  with  two  thousand 
men  to  hold  it. 

A  little  river  called  the  Bronx  rises 
among  the  hills  fourteen  miles  north  of 
New  Rochelle,  runs  to  the  Sound  par 
allel  with  the  Hudson,  four  miles  from 
it.  Howe  was  east  of  the  Bronx,  while 
Washington  was  between  the  Bronx  and 

the  Hudson.     Washington  made  a  rapid  march  and  reached  White  Plains 


WASHINGTON  S    HEAD-QUARTERS    AT 
WHITE    PLAINS. 


ALEXANDER    HAMILTON. 


BATTLE   OF  WHITE   PLAINS.  115 

on  che  night  of  the  21st  of  October,  and  established  his  head-quarters  in 
Mr.  Miller's  house. 

No  use  for  Howe  to  attempt  to  inclose  him  now.     Washington  was  be 
yond  the  sweep  of  the  net. 

Elijah  and  Esek  camped  in  a  corn-field.  While  sitting  by  their  camp 
fire,  a  young  captain  of  artillery  came  and  sat  down  by  it  to  warm  himself. 
He  had  two  cannon  in  the  woods  near  by,  placed  so  as  to  sweep  the  Brit 
ish  if  they  should  attempt  to  cross  the  Bronx  at  the  foot  of  the  hill  below 
them.  There  was  something  about  the  officer  that  attracted  Elijah's  atten 
tion.  He  was  very  polite  and  well-informed.  Elijah  learned  that  his 
name  was  Alexander  Hamilton,  and  that  he  was  born  in  the  West  Indies. 
Little  did  he  imagine  what  a  career  Captain  Hamilton  would  have — that 
he  would  become  Washington's  most  intimate  friend,  and  be  known  as  one 
of  the  ablest  writers  and  most  accomplished  orators  of  the  age;  that  he 
would  finally  be  shot  in  a  duel,  across  the  Hudson,  by  the  young  officer 
who  had  piloted  General  Putnam  out  of  New  York — Aaron  Burr. 

General  M'Dougall  commanded  the  troops  on  the  hill.  The  next 
morning,  the  28th  of  October,  General  Howe  brought  up  twenty  cannon, 
and  began  to  throw  shot  and  shell  across  the  Bronx.  Captain  Hamilton 
made  no  reply.  Soon  the  British  under  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  and  the  Hes 
sians  under  De  Heister,  who  had  the  left  of  the  line,  moved  down  from 
the  hill  to  cross  the  little  stream.  The  pioneers,  with  axes  and  fence-rails, 
came  in  advance  to  build  a  bridge.  Captain  Hamilton  opened  with  his 
two  guns.  He  had  the  exact  range,  and  sent  his  shot  right  down  into  the 
Hessian  ranks.  The  fire  was 
so  destructive  that  the  Hessians 
fled  in  confusion  ;  but  General 
Leslie,  with  a  British  brigade, 
and  a  brigade  of  Hessians,  un 
der  Colonel  Rail,  crossed  where 
they  were  sheltered  from  Cap 
tain  Hamilton's  guns.  They 
came  upon  M'Dougall's  right 
wing,  south-west  of  the  hill,  and 
the  battle  began.  M'Dougall's 

men  had  made  breastworks  of    PLJIOIB  WHfiRK  THE  ^^  ^^  TOE  BRONX. 
the    corn  -  stalks,   piling    them 

against  a  fence,  and  were  well  protected.  General  Leslie  attempted  to 
charge  up  the  hill;  but  Colonel  Smallwood,  with  the  Maryland  troops  who 
had  fought  so  gallantly  at  Cortelyou's  house,  and  had  escaped  by  swim- 


116  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

ming  Gowanus  Creek,  cut  them  down,  and  drove  them  in  confusion  back 
to  the  shelter  of  a  hill.  For  more  than  an  hour  they  held  the  ground 
against  four  times  their  number. 

General  Howe  had  two  hundred  and  fifty  cavalry,  which  went  out 
through  the  fields  and  woods  toward  the  Hudson,  making  a  wide  sweep. 
They  were  followed  by  Colonel  Rail.  After  marching  west,  they  turned 
north,  and  came  upon  some  militia  companies  on  M'Dougall's  right.  The 
militia  fired  once  and  then  ran,  and  the  troopers  and  Hessians  attacked 
Smallwood  on  his  right  flank,  and  so  forced  him  to  retreat  to  the  main 
line,  which  Washington  had  established  on  the  hills  a  mile  in  the  rear  of 
Chatterton  Hill. 

When  M'Dougall  began  to  retreat,  General  Putnam,  with  several  regi 
ments,  started  out  from  the  main  line,  and  M'Dougall's  men  retreated 
through  the  advancing  ranks.  The  Hessians  were  following,  thinking 
they  had  won  the  victory,  but  suddenly  found  themselves  face  to  face 
with  Putnam.  They  saw  a  flash,  heard  a  roar,  and  then  came  the  storm 
of  leaden  rain. 


CHATTERTON    HILL. 


General  Howe  came  up,  looked  at  Washington's  position,  and  con 
cluded  that  it  would  not  do  to  attack  him  in  front.  He  had  lost  three 
hundred  men,  and  did  not  care  to  march  directly  against  the  strong  in- 
trenchmeiits. 

Although  he  had  ten  thousand  more  troops  than  Washington,  he  halt 
ed,  and  sent  for  Lord  Percy  to  come  from  New  York  with  four  thousand 
men.  Percy  arrived  on  the  30th  of  October.  Every  body  expected  that 
there  would  be  a  great  battle  the  next  day;  but  at  midnight  a  terrible 
storm  arose,  which  lasted  all  the  next  day,  damaging  the  ammunition  of 
both  armies.  General  Washington  was  not  satisfied  with  his  position,  for 
he  saw  that  Howe,  by  marching  east,  might  get  in  his  rear.  There  was  a 
much  stronger  position  three  miles  farther  north,  where  the  hills  were  high 


BATTLE   OF  WHITE    PLAINS. 


119 


and  steep,  and  where  the  Croton  River  would  prevent  Howe  from  getting 
in  his  rear.  lie  had  constructed  strong  intrenehments  on  these  hills,  and, 
just  before  day-break,  while  the  storm  was  still  raging,  the  army  moved 
silently  away. 

Howe  was  greatly  surprised  when  he  found  the  Americans  had  re 
created.  He  advanced  with  his  army ;  but  when  he  saw  Washington's 
cannon  planted  on  hills  one  hundred  feet  high,  and  that  there  was  no  op 
portunity  to  get  in  his  rear,  he  was  greatly  perplexed.  He  had  expected 
to  capture  the  army  on  Long  Island  ;  was  confident  of  hemming  the 
Americans  in  New  York ;  was  sure  of  sweeping  them  in  by  the  move 
ment  to  New  Eochelle,  and  here  he  was,  completely  baffled.  Winter  was 
coming  on.  What  should  he  do  ?  There  were  Fort  Washington  and  Fort 


THE    FALISADKS. 


120  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

Lee ;  he  would  turn  his  attention  to  those  fortifications,  and,  instead  of  at 
tacking  Washington,  moved  his  army  toward  New  York. 

What  should  Washington  do  ?  More  than  half  of  his  army  were  of 
the  militia,  who  had  come  out  to  serve  a  few  days  ;  their  time  had  expired, 
and  they  went  home.  He  saw  that  Howe  would  probably  invade  New 
Jersey,  and,  leaving  General  Putnam,  with  a  portion  of  the  army,  to  guard 
the  Highlands,  crossed  the  Hudson,  and  encamped  in  the  rear  of  Fort  Lee. 

General  Howe  invested  Fort  Washington.  Colonel  Magaw  made  a 
brave  defense,  but  a  hopeless  one.  In  a  few  days  he  was  forced  to  sur 
render,  and  the  soldiers,  who  might  have  been  saved  if  Congress  had  but 
allowed  Washington  to  manage  affairs,  were  taken  to  New  York  and  put 
into  the  prison -ship  Jersey,  an  old  seventy -four- gun  ship  moored  in  the 
East  River,  vshere  they  suffered  the  most  inhuman  treatment,  and  where 
they  nearly  all  sickened  and  died. 

General  Washington  stood  on  the  Palisades,  at  Fort  Lee,  and  saw  how 
bravely  the  fort  was  defended.  There  were  tears  on  his  cheeks  as  he  saw 
the  flag  hauled  down  and  the  garrison  march  out  as  prisoners,  going  to 
their  terrible  fate ;  but  he  was  powerless  to  aid  them. 

Howe,  having  captured  Fort  Washington,  sent  Cornwallis  with  six 
thousand  troops  across  the  Hudson  in  boats  to  take  Fort  Lee.  Cornwallis 
crossed  from  Fort  Washington,  landing  at  the  foot  of  the  Palisades.  A 
British  engineer  drew  a  picture  of  the  landing,  which  shows  how  the  Pali 
sades  looked,  and  how  the  army  climbed  the  steep  bluff.  The  soldiers 
tugged  at  the  cannon  and  got  them  to  the  top ;  the  army  formed  to  make 
the  attack,  but  there  was  no  one  in  the  fort  to  oppose  Cornwallis.  The 
place  was  of  no  value  to  the  Americans,  now  that  Fort  Washington  had 
been  captured,  and  the  garrison  was  retreating  to  Hackensack  to  join 
Washington.  If  Cornwallis  had  pushed  on,  he  might  have  scattered  Wash 
ington's  little  army,  for  it  numbered  only  four  thousand  now ;  but  he  was 
well  satisfied  with  what  had  been  accomplished.  He  waited  two  days,  and 
BO  missed  a  great  opportunity. 


LAKE  (JHAMPLAIN.  123 


CHAPTER  X. 

LAKE    CHAMPLAIN. 

WHEN  spring  opened  and  the  ice  went  out  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  a 
fleet  of  vessels  sailed  up  the  river  to  Quebec  with  re-enforcements, 
under  General  Burgoyne,  for  Sir  Guy  Carleton.  There  were  only  a  few 
American  troops  in  Canada,  under  General  Wooster.  Generals  Arnold 
and  Sullivan  were  with  Wooster,  but  General  Carleton  had  much  the  largest 
army.  He  advanced  to  Montreal,  then  to  St.  Johns — the  American  gen 
erals  retreating  before  him ;  and  in  June  there  was  not  an  American  sol 
dier  in  Canada.  The  last  week  in  May,  General  Burgoyne  and  General 
Carleton  moved  from  Montreal  to  St.  Johns.  The  Americans  shipped 
their  supplies  and  cannon  on  boats,  and  sent  them  up  the  river  to  Lake 
Champlain.  The  last  boat  put  off.  General  Arnold  and  Major  Wilkin 
son,  his  aid,  rode  out  two  miles  toward  Montreal,  saw  the  British  rapidly 
approaching,  rode  back,  shot  their  horses  to  prevent  them  from  falling  into 
the  hands  of  the  British,  jumped  into  a  canoe,  paddled  south,  and  overtook 
the  retreating  boats.  All  the  toiling  through  the  wilderness,  all  the  hard 
ships  at  Quebec,  had  ended  in  failure.  Carleton  had  no  boats  to  pursue 
the  Americans,  who  retreated  to  Crown  Point  and  Ticonderoga ;  but  they 
very  well  knew  that  he  would  soon  have  a  fleet  of  vessels  on  the  lake,  for 
seven  hundred  British  went  to  work  cutting  down  trees  and  hewing  tim 
ber.  Congress  decided  that  a  fleet  must  be  built  to  hold  the  lake,  and 
ship-carpenters  were  soon  on  their  way  from  Rhode  Island,  Massachusetts, 
and  New  Hampshire  to  Ticonderoga.  They  felled  the  trees  on  the  shores 
of  the  lake,  hewed  the  timbers,  floated  them  to  Ticonderoga,  and  by  Sep 
tember  had  quite  a  fleet  of  vessels — three  schooners,  two  sloops,  three  gal 
leys,  eight  gondolas,  and  twenty-one  gun-boats.  One  of  the  schooners  car 
ried  twelve  guns,  the  other  two  eight.  One  of  the  sloops  carried  twelve, 
and  the  others  eight  guns.  The  gondolas  carried  three  guns,  and  the  gun 
boats  one  gun  each. 

General  Carleton  had  one  very  powerful  vessel,  the  Thunderer — a  flat- 
bottomed  craft,  carrying  eighteen  guns,  six  of  them  twenty-four  pounders. 


124 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


The  Inflexible  carried  eighteen  guns,  the  Carleton  twelve,  the  Loyal 
sort  seven,  the  schooner  Maria  fourteen  guns.  Besides  these,  General 
Carleton  had  twenty-one  gun-boats,  each  carrying  one  gun.  His  fleet  was 
much  more  powerful  than  the  American  fleet  commanded  by  General 

Arnold.  Captain  Pringle 
commanded  it,  and  one  of 
his  officers  was  young  Ed 
ward  Pellew,  who  after 
ward  became  one  of  the 
great  naval  commanders  of 
England,  known  as  Admi 
ral  Viscount  Exmouth. 

About  ten  miles  south 
of  Plattsburg,  near  the 
western  shore  of  the  lake, 
is  Valcour  Island.  Be 
tween  this  island  and  the 
New  York  shore,  Arnold 
was  lying  with  all  his  fleet 
on  the  llth  of  October.  It 
was  a  dangerous  position, 
for  the  British  fleet  could 
sail  south,  past  Valcour, 
and  cut  off  his  retreat  to  Ticonderoga.  Many  of  Arnold's  men  never 
had  sighted  a  cannon,  very  few  had  ever  loaded  one ;  while  Carleton  had 
old  artillery-men.  He  had  seven  hundred  men,  and  Arnold  less  than  five 
hundred.  Carleton  had  experienced  seamen,  while  many  of  Arnold's  men 
did  not  know  the  difference  between  the  foresail  and  the  mainsail. 

It  is  early  in  the  morning,  when  Carleton's  fleet  is  seen  under  full  sail, 
coming  round  a  wooded  point  of  land  called  Cumberland  Head,  forming 
Plattsburg  Bay.  The  wind  is  favorable,  and  all  sails  are  spread  to  the 
breeze.  It  is  the  largest  fleet  ever  seen  on  the  lake.  General  Arnold  or 
ders  the  Royal  Savage,  of  twelve  guns,  one  of  his  largest  vessels,  and 
three  galleys,  to  get  under  way,  advance,  and  engage  the  enemy.  Arnold 
is  a  general,  not  an  admiral.  In  manoeuvring  troops,  he  sends  out  skir 
mishers,  and  so  will  he  begin  this  battle  on  the  water.  An  admiral  would 
bring  all  of  his  vessels  into  action  at  once,  if  possible. 

In  attempting  to  approach  the  British,  the  Royal  Savage  runs  aground. 
So  firmly  is  the  vessel  grounded  that  it  will  be  impossible  to  get  her  off, 
and  the  crew  leap  into  the  water,  or  push  off  in  boats  to  the  other  ships, 


LAKE   CHAMPLAIN. 


125 


and  this  ship  is  set  on  fire.  Thus,  at  the  outset,  Arnold  loses  one  of  his 
largest  ships,  and  all  his  personal  baggage,  which  is  on  board,  though  he 
himself  is  on  board  the  Congress. 

It  i&  twelve  o'clock  when  the  British  fleet,  having  sailed  past  the  island, 
approaches  the  American  fleet,  and  the  battle  begins.  The  British  gun 
boats  are  within  musket-shot,  but 
the  Thunderer  has  not  been  able 
to  beat  up  against  the  wind. 
All  through  the  afternoon,  from 
twelve  till  five,  the  unequal  con 
test  rages.  The  vessels  are  at 
anchor.  The  British  do  not  come 
to  close  quarters,  but,  having  ex 
perienced  gunners,  take  position 
and  send  the  shot  into  the  Amer 
ican  vessels.  The  rigging  is  cut 
to  pieces.  Two  shot  go  through 
the  mainmast  of  the  Congress. 
Twelve  times  that  vessel  is  struck 
— seven  of  the  shot  going  below 
the  water-line.  The  deck  is  slip 
pery  with  blood.  The  slaughter 
is  fearful.  But  brave  men  are 
on  board.  They  know  very  little 
about  naval  warfare,  and  Arnold 
himself  has  to  sight  most  of  the 
guns. 

The  Washington  galley  is  shat 
tered  to  pieces — the  captain  and  sailing-master  wounded,  the  lieutenant 
killed.  All  the  officers  on  one  of  the  gondolas  are  killed  or  wounded. 
Another  gondola  is  so  riddled  with  solid  shot,  that  it  sinks  soon  after  the 
engagement.  Sixty  have  been  killed  and  wounded.  On  the  British  side 
forty  have  fallen,  but  the  vessels  are  very  little  injured. 

Night  closes  upon  the  scene,  with  the  British  fleet  anchored  in  a  line 
from  the  island  to  the  main-land.  The  wind  is  blowing  from  the  north, 
cold  and  raw.  The  Americans  can  not  beat  up  against  it,  and  go  round 
between  the  island  and  Cumberland  Head,  and  so  escape.  In  the  morn 
ing  Carleton  will  finish  the  work,  sinking  every  vessel, 

It  was  a  sad  plight  in  which  the  Americans  found  themselves.  The 
vessels  were  leaking  badly ;  their  ammunition  was  nearly  gone  ;  the  Royal 


126  THE  BOYS   OF  76. 

Savage  was  lost ;  one  of  the  gondolas  sunk ;  the  Lady  Washington  was  a 
wreck ;  sixty  men  had  fallen.     What  was  to  be  done  ? 

As  the  last  rajs  of  twilight  faded  away,  General  Arnold  took  particu 
lar  notice  of  the  position  of  the  British  vessels.  If  possible,  the  fleet  must 
escape  to  Crown  Point.  There  was  no  moon,  no  stars,  and  dark  clouds 
were  rolling  from  the  north.  The  wind  was  blowing  briskly.  At  a  sig 
nal,  one  by  one,  the  vessels  slipped  away,  sailing  past  the  British  so  quietly 
that  no  sentinel  pacing  the  decks  discerned  the  white  sails  in  the  darkness. 
The  Congress  was  the  last  to  run  the  gantlet. 


SCENE    OF    ARNOLD  S    NAVAL    BATTLE. 


Morning  dawned,  and  the  British,  all  ready  to  blow  the  American  ves 
sels  out  of  the  water,  were  surprised  to  see  the  entire  fleet  ten  miles  away. 
Up  came  the  anchors.  Quickly  were  the  sails  shaken  to  the  wind,  and  the 
fleet  went  gayly  up  the  lake  before  the  wind.  The  Congress  and  some  of 
the  other  vessels  were  leaking  so  badly  that  Arnold  was  obliged  to  drop 
anchor  while  the  carpenters  tried  to  stop  the  leaks.  The  wind  died  away, 
and  the  lake  became  calm ;  but,  though  smooth,  nothing  could  keep  two 
of  the  gondolas  from  sinking. 

The  wind  changed  to  the  south,  and  neither  of  the  fleets  could  make 
much  progress  against  it,  and  night  shut  in  once  more.  Carleton  had  not 
overtaken  his  prey. 

The  morning  of  the  13th  dawned.  The  Congress,  Lady  Washington, 
and  four  of  the  gondolas  had  made  little  progress,  while  the  rest  of  the 
fleet  was  well  on  its  way  to  Crown  Point.  The  British  were  hastening  on. 
The  Lady  Washington  was  overhauled  and  obliged  to  surrender.  On 
came  the  British  fleet — a  ship  of  eighteen  guns,  another  of  fourteen,  an 
other  of  twelve — all  pouring  their  broadsides  into  the  Congress  and  one 
of  the  galleys.  The  fire  was  returned.  With  all  sail  set,  the  pursuers  and 
pursued  pressed  on ;  but  the  wind  was  light,  and  very  little  headway  was 
made.  For  four  hours  the  battle  went  on,  till  the  American  vessels  were 


LAKE    CHAMPLAIN. 


127 


joining  but  wrecks — sails  rent,  sides  stove  in,  water  pouring  into  the  holds, 
yet  the  men  on  board  will  not  surrender.  They  run  the  vessels  into  a 
creek  on  the  east  side  of  the  lake.  The  vessels  ground.  "  Set  them  on 
fire !"  Arnold  shouts  from  the  deck  of  the  Congress,  "  Leap  ashore  with 
your  muskets !"  are  his  orders  to  the  marines. 


THE    CREW    ESCAPING. 


The  men,  holding  their  muskets  over  their  heads  to  keep  them  from 
being  wet,  jump  into  the  water,  wade  to  the  shore,  ready  to  open  fire  upon 
the  British. 

Up  from  the  decks  roll  the  flames.     Wreaths  of  fire  curl  around  the 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

masts.  The  sails  are  broad  sheets  of  flame.  When  every  man  has  left  the 
fleet,  Arnold  lets  himself  into  the  water  by  a  rope,  and  wades  to  the  shore. 
The  British  are  close  upon  him.  The  soldiers  on  the  nearest  ship  open 
tire;  but  from  the  alders  and  beneath  the  pines  the  rifles  are  cracking, 
and  they  continue  to  crack  till  the  ships  are  all  aflame.  Then,  helping  on 
the  wounded,  the  crews  make  their  way  to  Crown  Point,  just  in  time  to 
escape  the  Indians  whom  Carleton  has  landed  to  intercept  them. 

The  fleet  was  destroyed,  but  not  captured,  and  the  country  rang  in 
praise  of  the  men  who  had  fought  so  bravely  against  a  superior  foe. 

General  Carleton  had  driven  the  Americans  out  of  Canada,  had  at 
tached  the  Indians  to  the  cause  of  the  king ;  but  he  was  not  strong  enough 
to  attack  Ticonderoga,  and  returned  to  Montreal ;  while  General  Burgoyne, 
with  great  plans  for  the  future,  hastened  to  England  to  make  them  known 
to  the  ministers  and  the  king. 

There  being  no  further  need  for  an  army  at  Ticonderoga,  all  except 
three  or  four  regiments  were  dismissed,  or  else  went  south  under  General 
Sullivan,  to  join  General  Washington ;  but  before  they  arrived  General 
Washington  was  retreating  before  Cornwallis  across  New  Jersey,  as  we 
shall  see. 


THE   BATTLE   OF   TRENTON. 


12(J 


CHAPTER  XL 

BATTLE  OF  TRENTON. 

ENERAL  HOWE,  liaving  secured  New  York,  began  to  make  prep- 
arations  to  take  Philadelphia.  Congress  was  in  session  there,  in 
Independence  Hall,  and 
had  declared  America  to 
he  independent  of  Great 
Britain.  He  would  see 
about  that.  He  would 
chase  Washington 
through  New  Jersey  as  a 
hound  chases  a  fox,  scat 
ter  the  last  remnant  of 
the  rebel  army,  seize  the 
members  of  Congress, 
and  send  them  to  En 
gland  to  be  hanged  as 


INDEPENDENCE    HALL. 


traitors.      A  division   of 

the  army  was  placed    under  Cornwallis,  who  was   instructed    to   pursue 

Washington. 

Washington  had  less  than  three  thousand  men.  It  was  a  weary  march 
to  Elijah  and  Esek  across  the  marshes  from  Hackensack  to  Newark,  and 
from  there  to  New  Brunswick.  Their  hearts  sunk  at  New  Brunswick 
when  the  New  Jersey  and  Maryland  troops,  whose  time  had  expired,  left 
camp  and  started  for  home.  The  army  numbered  only  seventeen  hun 
dred,  after  their  departure. 

From  New  Brunswick  they  marched  to  Princeton,  with  Cornwallis 
pressing  hard  after  them.  From  Princeton  they  hastened  to  Trenton  o\  er 
the  frozen  roads,  with  Cornwallis  marching  faster  than  ever.  They  were 
hastening  to  the  Delaware.  If  they  could  but  reach  Trenton,  where  a 
large  number  of  boats  had  been  collected — if  they  could  have  an  hour  or 
two  there,  they  would  be  safe.  They  reached  the  river;  sent  over  the 

5 


130 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


cannon  first,  then  the  baggage.  Kegiment  after  regiment  crossed ;  and 
just  as  the  last  reached  the  Pennsylvania  bank,  Cornwallis  marched  into 
Trenton,  his  drums  beating  and  colors  flying. 

Cornwallis  was  baffled.  The  river  could  not  be  forded.  He  had  no 
boats,  and  must  wait  till  it  was  frozen  before  seizing  his  prey.  General 
Howe  issued  a  proclamation,  offering  pardon  to  all  who  would  lay  down 
their  arms  arid  own  allegiance  to  the  king.  A  great  many  people  who  had 
favored  Congress  flocked  to  Cornwallis's  camp,  and  swore  fealty  to  the 
king.  Half  of  the  people  in  New  Jersey  were  Tories,  and  Washington 
knew  not  whom  to  trust. 

The  little  army  was  disheartened  to  learn  that  General  Lee,  who  had 

returned  from  Charleston,  had  been 
captured.  He  was  marching  from 
the  Highlands  of  the  Hudson  to 
ward  the  Delaware  with  a  division 
of  the  army.  General  Sullivan 
was  with  him.  Lee  was  ambitious, 
and  wanted  to  be  commander-in- 
chief,  and,  though  ordered  to  join 
Washington,  was  meditating  a  dis 
obedience  of  his  orders.  His  troops 
were  at  Morristown.  He  left  them 
under  Sullivan,  and  rode  down  to 
Basking  Ridge,  a  few  miles,  to  pass 
the  night  in  his  own  house,  and  was 
surprised  the  next  morning  to  find 
the  house  surrounded  by  British 
dragoons.  The  Tories  had  given  them  information. 

In  his  dressing-gown  and  slippers,  bare-headed,  with  nothing  but  a 
blanket  to  protect  him  from  the  cold,  he  was  taken  to  New  York.  Per 
haps,  instead  of  being  a  loss,  his  capture  was  a  gain,  for  Sullivan,  with  the 
troops,  hastened  on,  and  crossed  the  river  at  M'Conkey's  Ferry,  twelve 
miles  above  Trenton.  A  bridge  now  spans  the  river  there,  but  then  there 
was  no  bridge  all  the  way  from  the  mountains  to  Delaware  Bay. 

Although  Cornwallis  had  not  been  able  to  capture  Washington,  Gen 
eral  Howe  was  well  satisfied  with  what  had  been  accomplished.  He  had 
gained  possession  of  New  York,  scattered  the  American  army,  driven 
Washington  beyond  the  Delaware,  and  could  write  home  to  the  ministers 
that  the  people  were  becoming  loyal,  and  that  the  rebellion  would  soon  be 
crushed.  He  was  well  situated  in  New  York,  gave  grand  dinners,  drank 


GENERAL    CHARLES    LEE. 


THE   BATTLE   OF   TRENTON. 


131 


LEE  S   HOUSE. 


his  wine,  enjoyed  his  evenings  in  playing  cards,  and  looked  forward  to  an 
agreeable  winter. 

General  Gornwallis  was  well 
satisfied  with  the  part  he  had  per 
formed.  He  had  captured  Fort 
Washington,  chased  Washington 
across  the  Delaware,  and  was  go 
ing  home  to  England  to  enjoy 
the  honors  which  the  king  would 
confer  upon  him.  He  left  Col 
onel  Rail,  with  fifteen  hundred 
Hessians  and  two  hundred  Brit 
ish  cavalry,  at  Trenton  ;  stationed 
Count  Donop  eight  miles  farther 
down  the  river,  at  Bordentown  ; 
and  sent  another  party  eight  miles 
south  of  Bordentown,  to  Burling 
ton  ;  and  another  party  ten  miles 

from  Burlington,  to  Mount  Holly. 


GF.VKBAL  SULLIVAN. 


132 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


TRENTON. 


He  left  some  troops  at  Princeton,  and  made  his  grand  supply  of  stores 
at  New  Brunswick.     By  dividing  the  army  into  detachments,  the  troops 

could  obtain  forage  and  fresh 
provisions.  He  held  Washing 
ton  and  his  little  force  in  con 
tempt.  The  American  army  had 
dwindled  from  twenty  thousand, 
at  White  Plains  on  the  28th  oi 
October,  to  less  than  two  thou 
sand  in  December. 

But  Congress  had  made  a 
patriotic  appeal  to  the  country, 
promising  to  give  each  officer 
and  soldier  a  liberal  bounty  of 
land,  and  the  militia  of  Pennsyl 
vania  were  coming  into  camp. 
Two  thousand  came,  under  Gen 
eral  Cadwalader  and  General 
Ewing,  and  took  post  at  Bristol,  between  Trenton  and  Philadelphia. 

Elijah  and  Esek  could  look  across  the  river,  at  Trenton,  and  see  the 
Hessians  on  parade,  or  roaming  through  the  village.  The  Hessians  en 
joyed  themselves.  At  night  they  plundered  pig-pens  and  hen-roosts,  and 
made  themselves  at  home  in  the  kitchens.  They  insulted  the  girls,  and 
felt  that  they  were  conquerors. 

General  Washington  saw  that  Cornwallis  had  made  a  mistake  in  the 
military  game :  he  had  spread  his  troops  out  too  much.  He  resolved  to 
take  advantage  of  it,  and  laid  his  plan.  He  had  about  twenty-five  hun 
dred  men  opposite  Trenton,  and  twenty  cannon.  The  boats  in  which  he 
had  crossed  the  river  had  been  taken  up  stream  to  M'Con  key's  Ferry,  and 
were  safely  moored  on  the  Pennsylvania  side.  Generals  Cadwalader  and 
Ewing,  at  Bristol,  also  had  some  boats.  He  would  send  the  two  thousand 
men  there  across  the  river  to  attack  Count  Donop  at  Bordentown.  Such  a 
movement  would  prevent  Donop  from  helping  Rail  at  Trenton. 

With  his  twenty-five  hundred,  with  Greene,  Sullivan,  and  Knox  to  aid 
him,  Washington  resolved  to  make  a  night  march  up  the  river  to  M'Con- 
key's,  cross  there,  divide  his  army,  and  make  a  rapid  march  to  Trenton  in 
two  divisions — one  on  the  river  road,  and  the  other  by  the  road  leading 
through  the  village  of  Pennington.  He  would  knock  at  the  front  door 
and  back  door  at  the  same  instant,  surprise  the  Hessians,  get  them  between 
two  fires,  cut  off  their  retreat,  and  capture  the  whole  force. 


THE   BATTLE   OF  TRENTON. 


133 


General  Washington  thought  that  Christmas -night  would  be  the  best 
time  to  make  the  attack,  for  the  Hessians  kept  Christmas,  and  would  drink 
a  great  deal  of  beer,  and  be  boozy  before  morning. 

General  Putnam  was  in  Philadelphia;  and,  to  help  the  plan  on,  two 
days  before  Christmas,  sent  Colonel  Griffith,  with  four  hundred  and  fifty 
militia,  across  the  river  to  march  toward  Mount  Holly,  but  to  make  nq 
attack  upon  the  British  there.  If  they  advanced,  he  was  to  retreat.  Col 
onel  Griffith  crossed  the  river,  and  Count  Donop  started  south  from  Bor- 
dentown  with  all  his  troops. 

Christmas  came.  The  wind  was  raw,  the  ground  frozen  and  covered 
with  snow.  Elijah  arid  Esek  sat  around  their  camp-fire,  thinking  of  the 
folks  at  home,  and  the  comfort  by  the  fires  in  the  old  kitchens.  They 
had  been  fighting  for  liberty  a  year  and  a  half,  and  now  the  prospect 
was  gloomier  than  ever  before.  In  a  few  days  the  river  would  be  fro 
zen  over,  for  it  was  now  filled  with  floating  ice,  and  then  the  British  could 
cross  anywhere,  and  the  little  army  would  be  scattered  to  the  winds. 

Night  came.  The  wind  was  east,  and  the  cold,  gray  clouds  came  roll 
ing  in  from  the  sea,  bringing  darkness  at  an  early  hour. 

"  Fall  into  line,  boys  !"  said  the  captain  of  their  company.  The  soldiers 
wondered  what  was  going  on,  but  the  regiments  all  paraded.  There  was 
no  beating  of  drums,  but  silently  they  moved  away,  marching  up  the  road 
leading  to  M'Conkey's. 

They  reached  the  ferry,  and  found  the  Marblehead  men  there,  in  the 
boats,  ready  to  pull  at  the  oars.  They  were  the  men  for  the  hour — as  they 
were  at  Brooklyn. 

The  artillery-men  led  the  horses  into  the  flat-bottomed  boats,  and  held 
them  by  the  bit,  while 
the  soldiers  wheeled 
the  cannon  on  board, 
and  the  boats  pushed 
out  into  the  stream. 
The  current  was  strong, 
and  the  great  cakes  of 
ice  whirled  against  the 
boats  and  ground  their 
sides.  It  was  slow 
work,  cold  work,  hard 
work.  Elijah  and  Esek 
stood  at  the  bow  of  one  of  the  boats,  with  poles  to  push  the  ice  away. 
They  had  no  mittens,  nor  had  any  of  the  soldiers,  nor  the  rowers.  The 


PLACE    AVHERE    WASHINGTON    CROSSED. 


134 


THE   BOYS   OF  ;76. 


water  froze  upon  the  oars.  They  thrashed  their  hands  till  the  blood  oozed 
from  under  their  finger -nails.  The  current  carried  them  down  stream. 
The  night  was  dark,  but  they  pulled  and  pushed,  and  reached  the  shore, 
and  lifted  the  cannon  np  the  bank ;  then  the  boats,  pulled  by  the  ever 
faithful  fishermen,  pushed  off  in  the  darkness  for  another  load. 

General  Washington  stood  upon  the  Pennsylvania  shore,  wrapped  in 
his  cloak,  directing  affairs ;  while  General  Knox,  on  the  New  Jersey  side, 
shouted  to  the  men  to  be  quick  in  getting  the  cannon  up  the  bank.  From 
seven  in  the  evening  till  four  in  the  morning  the  boatmen  pulled  at  the 
oars,  and  the  soldiers  stood  shivering  upon  the  bank.  Many  of  them  had 


WASHINGTON    CROSSING    THE    DELAWARE. 


THE   BATTLE  OF  TRENTON. 


135 


no  overcoats,  some  no  blankets ;  some  had  no  shoes,  but  stood  in  the  snow 
with  old  rags  around  their  feet.  The  wind  was  blowing  more  keenly  from 
the  east,  and  the  snow-flakes  began  to  fall.  Some  of  the  soldiers  curled 
down  under  the  bank  to  keep  themselves  warm ;  some  stamped  their  feet 
and  thrashed  their  hands,  waiting  through  the  gloomy  night. 

The  last  boat  came,  bringing  General  Washington.  He  took  General 
Greene,  General  Stirling,  General  Mercer,  and  General  Stevens,  and  start 
ed,  with  about  half  the  troops,  down  the  Pentonville  road.  Esek  was  with 
this  division.  General  Sullivan,  with  the  rest  of  the  troops,  started  down 
the  river  road,  to  knock  at  the  front  door,  while  General  Washington  was 
approaching  the  back  door.  General  Sullivan  had  half  of  the  artillery. 
Elijah  was  with  this  division. 

They  move  rapidly,  for  the  cocks  are  crowing  in  the  barns,  and  they 
have  fully  seven  miles  to  march,  and  it  will  be  daylight  before  they  reach 
Trenton.  They  fear  that  the  plan  will  fail.  Oh,  the  dreariness  of  the 
night !  So  cold,  so  dark ;  the  wind  cutting  like  a  knife,  the  snow  falling 


136  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

in  their  faces,  their  clothes  frozen,  the  crust  cutting  through  the  rags  bound 
around  their  feet.  They  leave  their  blood-stains  on  the  snow ;  they  stagger 
and  stumble  over  the  uneven  ground.  They  are  hungry  and  weary,  but  on 
they  go — tramp,  tramp,  tramp !  For  what  ?  To  secure  their  liberties  and 
the  liberties  of  those  who  may  live  when  they  are  dead.  Dead !  For  this 
night's  work  they  shall  live  forever. 

In  Trenton  the  Hessians  are  asleep,  or  else  singing  songs  and  drinking 
their  last  mugs  of  beer.  Colonel  Rail  is  at  Mr.  Abraham  Hunt's.  Mr. 
Hunt  is  a  Quaker — some  say  that  he  is  a  patriot,  others  that  he  is  a  Tory. 
At  any  rate,  he  has  invited  Colonel  Rail  and  his  officers  to  take  Christmas 
supper  with  him,  and  they  are  there,  having  a  merry  time,  smoking  their 
pipes,  drinking  wine,  and  playing  cards,  with  an  old  negro  to  wait  upon 
them. 

It  is  not  quite  day-break,  but  a  Tory  has  discovered  the  a\  proach  of 
the  Americans,  and  has  sent  a  man  upon  the  run  to  Trenton.     The  mes 
senger,  out    of    breath,  brings    a 
note  to    Colonel  Rail.      The   old 
negro  guards  the  door. 

"I    must    see    Colonel    Rail," 
says  the  messenger. 

"  The    gemmen    can't   be    dis 
turbed,  sah,"  the  negro  replies. 
"  Then  give  that  to  him,  quick !" 
"  Oh  yes,  sah." 

COLONEL    RALL  S    HEAD-QUARTERS.  mi  ,-1  i 

The  negro  enters  the  parlor; 

but  Colonel  Rail  is  dealing  the  cards,  and  can  not  look  at  it  at  that  mo 
ment.  The  candles  have  burned  low.  There  are  bottles  and  glasses  upon 
the  table.  The  officers  are  puffing  their  pipes.  Colonel  Rail  puts  the  note 
in  his  pocket.  He  will  examine  his  hand  before  reading  it.  The  destiny 
of  a  nation  has  been  thrown  into  the  game,  but  Colonel  Rail  does  not 
know  it.  His  own  life  is  at  stake,  but  he  does  not  dream  of  it. 

A  Hessian  picket  sees  something  moving  along  the  road  in  the  dim 
gray  of  the  morning.  Men  on  horseback  and  on  foot  appear.  He  hears 
the  heavy  rumbling  of  wheels,  and  the  tramp  of  an  army.  He  fires  his 
gun,  and  the  report  goes  out  over  the  snow-clad  hills  and  the  half-frozen 
waters  of  the  dark  rolling  rivers. 

"  Forward !"  It  is  General  Sullivan  who  shouts  it  The  soldiers  break 
into  a  run.  The  artillery-men  whip  up  their  horses.  The  cannon  rumble 
heavily  over  the  frozen  ground.  Elijah  can  hear  a  hubbub  in  the  village. 
The  Hessian  pickets  are  shouting  to  one  another,  and  running  here  and 


THE  BATTLE  OF  TRENTON.  137 

there.     They  hear  a  drum  beating  the  long  roll,  and  can  see  soldiers  form 
ing  in  the  street. 

"  Unlimber  !"  shout  the  artillery -men.  The  cannon  are  wheeled  into 
position,  a  cartridge  is  rammed  home ;  there  is  a  flash,  a  roar  that  awakens 
every  sleeper  in  Trenton. 

Colonel  Kail  hears  the  drum-beat,  the  cards  drop  from  his  hands — the 
game  unfinished.  The  deep  thunder  of  that  gun,  jarring  the  windows  and 
shaking  the  earth,  brings  home  to  his  intellect,  beclouded  with  wine,  some 
sense  of  the  greater  game  now  beginning.  The  cards,  the  empty  wine-bot 
tles,  the  half-filled  glasses,  the  pipes  and  tobacco  are  still  upon  the  table ; 
the  candles  are  burning  low  in  their  sockets.  Colonel  Rail  is  leaping  into 
his  saddle.  Too  late !  Sullivan  has  knocked  at  one  door  ;  Washington  is 
about  to  knock  at  the  other. 

The  column  under  Washington  is  coming  down  the  Pentonville  road. 
It  reaches  a  farm-house,  where  a  farmer  is  chopping  wood. 

"  Can  you  tell  me  where  the  Hessian  pickets  are  ?"  Washington  asks. 

The  chopper  hesitates. 

"  It  is  General  Washington  who  asks  you,"  says  the  aid  at  Washing 
ton's  side. 

A  gleam  of  joy  lights  up  the  chopper's  face  as  he  points  to  the  spot. 

And  now  comes  the  roar  of  a  cannon.  Joyful,  soul-thrilling  sound ! 
Sullivan  is  there!  "Forward!" 

Out  from  the  road,  over  the  fields  sweep  the  shivering  men.  Shiv 
ering  no  longer  now,  for  that  deep  and  heavy  roar  has  warmed  them. 
There  it  is  again  !  They  hear  the  rattling  of  muskets.  Moments  are 
ages  now. 

A  little  stream,  called  the  Assaupink,  comes  down  through  the  town, 
and  empties  into  the  Delaware.  There  is  a  bridge  across  the  stream,  and 
a  mill-dam.  Sullivan  has  seized  the  bridge.  No  escape  for  the  Hessians 
in  that  direction ;  and  now  Washington  is  coming  down  from  the  north 
west,  in  their  rear.  It  is  scarcely  five  minutes  after  Sullivan  begins  the 
attack  before  the  troops  under  Washington,  Greene,  and  Stirling  make 
their  appearance. 

Captain  Forrest  wheels  six  cannon  into  position,  to  send  his  shot  down 
King  Street.  While  he  is  doing  it,  the  Hessians  bring  two  guns  into 
the  street.  The  gunners  are  ramming  down  the  cartridges,  the  match-man 
is  lighting  his  port -fire,  but  before  he  can  touch  them  off  a  company  of 
brave  men,  under  Captain  William  A.  Washington,  of  Colonel  Mercer's 
regiment  of  Virginians,  dash  up  the  street,  drive  the  Hessians  from  their 

guns,  and  capture  them.     In  tiiis  company  is  a  young  lieutenant,  James 

5* 


138  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

Monroe,  destined  to  be  President  of  the  country  for  whose  redemption  he 
is  fighting. 

Sullivan  is  pressing  nearer,  driving  the  Hessians  over  against  Washing 
ton,  and  Washington  is  driving  them  back  again.  Colonel  Rail  is  riding 
here  and  there  shouting  to  them ;  but  the  men,  just  aroused  from  sleep, 
know  not  which  way  to  turn. 

The  British  cavalry  have  saddled  their  horses,  but  are  in  confusion* 
They  ride  up  the  Assanpink  to  a  ford  above  the  mill-pond,  spur  their 
horses  across  the  stream,  and  flee  toward  Bordentown.  Colonel  Rail  falls 
from  his  horse  mortally  wounded.  All  is  confusion  now.  Some  of  the 
Hessians  throw  down  their  arms,  while  others  flee  toward  Princeton ;  but 
Washington  has  not  come  so  far  to  leave  the  Princeton  road  open  for  their 
escape.  Colonel  Hand  and  his  riflemen,  who  gave  the  Hessians  such  a 
stirring-up  at  Flatbush,  is  there.  Surrounded ;  no  chance  to  escape ;  the 
bewildered,  panic-stricken  men  who  have  not  had  time  to  blacken  their 
whiskers  with  their  shoe -brushes  this  morning  rush  back  to  the  village, 
throw  down  their  guns,  fall  on  their  knees,  hold  up  their  hands,  and  make 
doleful  cries. 

So  Stirling's  men,  and  Sullivan's,  pleaded  for  life  at  Brooklyn ;  but 
the  Hessians  and  British  drove  the  bayonet  home,  and  crimsoned  the 
ground  with  blood,  and  thought  it  pleasant  work,  and  a  pretty  sight  to  see 
the  life-blood  flow.  Little  did  they  think,  then,  that  the  time  would  come 
when  the  begging  for  life  would  be  on  the  other  side.  But  it  has  come. 
Oh,  life  is  so  dear,  so  sweet,  now ! 

Kindness  is  better  than  brutality,  forgiveness  more  noble  than  revenge. 
No  bayonet  is  plunged  remorselessly  into  the  hearts  of  unresisting  foes. 
Humanity  triumphs  on  this  glorious  morning.  One  thousand  prisoners 
are  captured,  with  six  cannon,  a  thousand  muskets,  and  all  the  baggage. 
It  is  the  work  of  twenty  minutes. 

Washington,  in  the  kindness  of  his  heart,  visits  the  dying  Hessian  col 
onel,  and  does  what  he  can  to  soothe  his  last  moments  on  earth. 

Cadwalader  and  Ewing  have  not  been  able  to  cross  the  river  at  Bor 
dentown,  and  it  will  not  be  wise  for  Washington  to  remain  on  the  New 
Jersey  side.  Back  to  the  ferry  with  the  prisoners,  with  six  cannon,  with 
tents  and  supplies,  moves  the  victorious  army.  Last  night  the  cause  of 
liberty  was  dark  and  gloomy ;  but  now  the  future  is  radiant  with  hope. 

Little  do  those  patriots,  toiling  through  the  snow,  know  what  they  have 
done  for  the  world.  Coming  centuries  alone  will  reveal  the  worth  of  their 
morning's  work. 


PRINCETON.  139 


CHAPTEE  XII. 

PKINCETON. 

GENERAL  CORNWALLIS  was  in  New  York.  He  had  his  trunk 
packed  ready  to  sail  for  England,  when  a  messenger  arrived  with 
the  news  that  General  Washington  had  crossed  the  Delaware  and  swooped 
up  one  thousand  men !  General  Cornwallis  was  astonished,  and  so  was 
General  Howe.  They  had  not  supposed  such  a  thing  possible.  The  Yan 
kee  army  had  dwindled  to  a  handful  of  poor,  half-starved  men — a  rabble 
of  wretches  destitute  of  every  thing,  and  yet  they  had  crossed  the  Dela 
ware  and  captured  a  thousand  of  the  best  German  troops  under  an  old 
and  experienced  commander!  Such  audacity  was  amazing.  It  must  be 
punished,  and  General  Cornwallis  mounted  his  horse,  and  rode  with  all 
haste  to  Newark,  and  on  to  New  Brunswick  and  Princeton,  gathering  up 
the  troops  in  those  places  to  chastise  the  Yankee  general. 

The  news  of  the  success  at  Trenton  filled  the  country  with  enthusiasm. 
The  Whigs  rejoiced.  The  Tories  did  not  know  what  to  think  of  it.  Those 
who  had  made  up  their  minds  to  take  the  oath  of  loyalty  to  the  king  con 
cluded  to  wait  a  little,  and  see  what  would  happen  next.  The  Whigs, 
who  had  been  desponding,  plucked  up  courage.  The  militia  began  to 
flock  into  Washington's  head-quarters.  Congress,  sitting  in  Baltimore,  in 
vested  Washington  with  full  powers,  for  six  months,  to  raise  and  muster 
into  service  sixteen  battalions  of  infantry,  if  he  should  need  so  many,  and 
three  thousand  cavalry.  That  was  well  for  Congress  to  do;  but  how 
would  the  men  be  paid  ?  Some  of  the  soldiers'  time  had  expired,  and 
Washington  had  no  money  to  pay  them.  There  was  a  noble  man  in  Phila 
delphia,  Robert  Morris,  who  had  spent  a  great  deal  of  money  for  the  cause. 
The  next  day  after  the  victory  at  Trenton  he  sent  Washington  all  the  hard 
money  he  could  lay  his  hands  on — four  hundred  and  ten  Spanish  dollars, 
two  English  crowns,  half  a  French  crown,  and  ten  and  a  half  English 
shillings !  That  was  all ;  and  yet  so  firm  was  the  faith  of  Washington, 
that  he  promised  each  soldier  ten  dollars  bounty,  in  hard  money,  if  he 
would  stay  six  weeks  longer !  He  wrote  to  Morris  what  he  had  promised. 


140 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


It  would  take  fifty  thousand.  Mr.  Morris  had  no  money,  but  he  had  a 
Quaker  friend  in  Philadelphia  who  had  the  cash.  Mr.  Morris  called  upon 
him.  "What  security  canst  thee  give,  Robert?"  the  Quaker  asked. 

"  My  note  and  my  honor." 

"  Thee  shall  have  the  money,  Robert,"  and  the  next  day  a  messenger 
came  with  the  fifty  thousand  dollars,  with  this  note : 

"  I  was  up  early  this  morning  to  dispatch  a  supply  of  fifty  thousand 
dollars  to  your  excellency.  It  gives  me  great  pleasure  that  you  have  en 
gaged  the  troops  to  continue ;  and  if  further  occasional  supplies  of  money 
are  necessary,  you  may  depend  on  my  exertions,  either  in  a  public  or  pri 
vate  capacity." 


HUBERT    MORRIS. 


No  wonder  Washington  felt  encouraged  upon  receiving  such  a  note ! 
The  very  next  day  he  crossed  the  Delaware  to  Trenton  with  his  army. 
He  had  about  five  thousand  men ;  but  half  of  the  number  had  never  been 
under  arms  before. 

On  the  morning  of  the  2d  of  January,  1777,  Cornwallis  was  at  Prince 
ton.  He  had  gathered  up  eight  thousand  soldiers,  and  more  were  close 
at  hand — ten  thousand  in  all— and  he  would  quickly  put  an  end  to  the  re 
bellion.  He  started  for  Trenton,  marching  south,  crossing  a  stone  bridge 


PRINCETON. 


141 


BRIDGE   AT   WORTHS    MILL. 


three  miles  out  of  Trenton,  by  Mr.  Worth's  mill.  He  reached  the  little  vil 
lage  of  Maidenhead  by  noon,  and 
left  General  Leslie  there  with  three 
thousand,  and  pressed  on  with  the 
other  five ;  before  night  he  would 
scatter  the  rebel  army  to  the  winds. 

General  Washington  knew  that 
Cornwallis  was  on  his  way,  and 
sent  General  Fermoy  and  General 
Stevens,  with  Captain  Forest's  bat- 
tery  of  six  guns,  Colonel  Hand's 
riflemen,  and  Colonel  Scott's  regi 
ment  of  Virginians,  to  skirmish 
with  the  British,  while  he  placed  the  main  army  on  the  south  side  of  the 
Assanpink.  (See  map  in  preceding  chapter,  page  135). 

General  Fermoy  went  out  about  five  miles.  Soon  a  citizen  came  riding 
down  the  road  pursued  by  a  Hessian  dragoon,  with  his  sword  flashing  in 
the  air.  One  of  the  riflemen  raised  his  rifle,  there  was  a  crack,  and  the 
Hessian  tumbled  to  the  ground.  Soon  the  British  skirmishers  made  their 
appearance,  but  a  volley  stopped  them.  Other  British  came  up,  and  Fer 
moy  retreated  two  miles  to  a  little  rivulet.  There  he  formed  his  men  in 
the  thick  woods  on  both  sides  of  the  road.  Forest  planted  his  cannon  to 
sweep  the  road.  Cornwallis  came  on ;  but  his  skirmishers  were  shot  down. 
Cornwallis  thought  that  Washington  was  intending  to  offer  him  battle 
there,  and  formed  his  army  on  both  sides  of  the  road,  planted  his  cannon, 
and  commenced  firing. 

The  troops  under  General  Fermoy  held  their  ground  manfully.  They 
kept  up  a  rattling  fire,  and  it  took  Cornwallis  more  than  two  hours  to  drive 
them  oat  of  the  woods.  Fermoy  retreated  nearer  the  town.  Washington 
and  Greene  rode  out  and  thanked  the  men  for  what  they  had  done. 
Greene  staid  to  take  command  of  the  troops,  while  Washington  rode 
back  to  Trenton.  He  had  resolved  to  use  the  Assanpink  for  a  line  of  de 
fense.  There  was  only  one  bridge  by  the  mill  across  the  Assanpink ;  but 
the  stream  could  be  forded  between  the  bridge  and  the  Delaware,  and 
above  the  mill-pond  there  was  also  a  ford.  He  placed  General  St.  Clair, 
with  two  guns  and  several  regiments,  to  guard  the  upper  fords,  and  sta 
tioned  General  Knox  with  his  cannon  to  sweep  the  bridge. 

The  bank  of  the  Assanpink  was  high,  and  the  soldiers  were  hard  at 
work  with  spades,  digging  ditches  and  throwing  up  embankments.  There 
were  two  breastworks,  one  above  the  other.  Colonel  Hitchcock,  with  some 


142  THE  BOYS   OF  76. 

Massachusetts  and  Rhode  Island  troops,  were  over  in  Trenton.  General 
Washington  sat  on  his  horse  and  directed  the  troops  as  they  filed  past  him 
across  the  bridge.  Cornwallis  was  pressing  hard  upon  Greene,  and  the 
troops  were  coining  down  through  the  streets  of  Trenton  upon  the  run. 

"  Take  position  in  that  field  instantly,"  said  Washington  to  Colonel 
Hitchcock,  as  his  troops  came  upon  the  bridge.  The  cannoneers  stood  by 
their  guns  with  lighted  port-fires  ready  for  the  British. 

Cornwallis  formed  his  men  in  two  columns,  one  to  rush  upon  the 
bridge,  the  other  to  attack  the  upper  ford. 

It  was  not  wise  generalship,  but  the  British  commander  was  burning  to 
take  revenge  upon  Washington  for  the  disaster  of  Christmas  night,  and  he 
wanted  to  chastise  him  upon  the  spot. 

The  troops  come  down  the  street  upon  the  run.  Washington,  Knox, 
and  Greene  are  upon  the  bank.  The  infantry  are  behind  the  banks  of 
earth,  with  their  muskets  cocked.  The  cannon  are  loaded  with  grape  and 
solid  shot.  The  match-men  are  waving  their  port-fires,  to  keep  them  burn 
ing.  The  British  reach  the  bridge.  The  cannon  blaze,  the  river-side  is  a 
sheet  of  flame,  and  the  head  of  the  column  goes  down  in  an  instant.  The 
British  flee  up  King  Street,  beyond  the  reach  of  the  murderous  fire. 

The  officers  swear  at  them — strike  them  with  their  swords.  "  What ! 
be  driven  by  such  a  miserable  rabble  of  countrymen,  with  old  firelocks  1 
For  shame  !  Charge,  and  scatter  them  as  you  would  a  flock  of  sheep !" 

Once  more  the  British  rush  down  the  street  to  the  bridge.  Washing 
ton  and  Greene  and  Knox,  the  cannoneers,  the  infantry — all  stand  calmly 
waiting.  Again  the  roar,  again  the  discomfiture.  No  troops  can  stand 
such  a  concentrated  fire.  The  British  flee,  and  a  wild  hurra  goes  up 
from  the  Americans.  Cornwallis  hears  it,  and  it  inflames  him.  The 
bridge  must  be  carried.  A  third  time  the  soldiers  are  driven  to  the  attack, 
but  are  scattered  by  the  stream  of  death  thrown  across  the  bridge. 

Not  willing  to  give  up  the  contest  so,  Cornwallis  looks  around  to  see 
what  he  can  do  next.  There  are  the  fords  above  the  mill-pond.  He  will 
cross  there,  and  attack  Washington's  right  flank.  But  the  men  under  St. 
Clair  are  ready  for  him.  The  British  inarch  in  splendid  order  almost  to 
the  bank,  down  which  they  go  upon  the  run ;  but,  from  up  stream  and 
down  stream,  from  every  bush,  from  every  fence,  from  cannon  and  mus 
kets,  a  pitiless  storm  bursts  upon  them.  They  fall  as  the  leaves  drop 
from  the  maples  in  the  autumn.  The  water  is  crimsoned  with  blood. 
They  flee,  discomfited,  up  the  bank,  and  the  midwinter  darkness  settles 
over  the  scene. 

Sir  William  Erskine  wanted  Cornwallis  to  march  up  the  Assanpink  to 


PRINCETON.  145 

a  higher  ford,  cross  the  stream  with  most  of  the  army,  leaving  the  artillery 
and  a  few  troops  to  keep  Washington  from  crossing  the  bridge,  and  come 
down  the  other  side  of  the  Assanpink  and  attack  Washington  in  the  rear; 
but  it  was  almost  dark,  the  troops  were  tired,  and  Cornwallis  concluded  to 
wait  till  morning. 

"  Washington  will  be  off  somewhere  else  before  morning,"  said  Erskine 

"  That  fox  can't  escape  me :  I'll  catch  him  in  the  morning,"  said  Corn 
wallis. 

Both  armies  kindled  their  bivouac-fires  and  cooked  their  suppers,  sep 
arated  only  by  the  little  stream.  It  had  been  a  disastrous  beginning  for 
Cornwallis,  who  had  lost  one  hundred  and  fifty  men,  while  Washington 
had  lost  very  few.  But  Washington  was  anxious  about  the  morrow. 
While  the  soldiers  were  cooking  their  suppers,  he  called  his  generals  to 
gether,  to  consult  as  to  what  was  best  to  be  done.  Should  they  fight  a 
battle  there  in  the  morning  ?  If  so,  what  were  the  chances  ?  They  had 
only  five  thousand  men,  and  half  of  these  were  raw  troops,  just  arrived— 
militia;  few  of  them  had  ever  been  in  battle.  Cornwallis  had  as  large  a 
force,  and  his  troops  were  nearly  all  British — the  best  in  the  service.  The 
chances  were  that  the  Americans  would  be  defeated.  Could  he  retreat 
down  the  Delaware  to  Bordentown,  and  cross  the  river  with  all  his  bag 
gage  and  cannon,  before  Cornwallis  could  overtake  him  ?  Doubtful.  All 
the  officers  said  so. 

But  there  was  another  move  that  could  be  made.  Cornwallis  had  just 
come  from  Princeton.  He  had  left  a  body  of  troops  there,  while  at  New 
Brunswick  there  was  a  large  supply  of  stores  for  the  British  army.  Why 
not  steal  away  during  the  night  along  the  road  leading  through  the  little 
village  of  Sandtown,  march  to  Princeton,  capture  every  thing  there,  then 
push  on  to  New  Brunswick  and  seize  the  supplies  ?  It  was  a  bold  plan. 

"We  can't  get  the  artillery  through  the  mud,"  said  General  Knox. 

"We  can  send  the  baggage  to  Bordentown,  and  have  it  ferried  across 
the  river  before  Cornwallis  can  overtake  it,"  said  Washington 

The  council  decided  that  on  account  of  the  mud  the  plan  could  not 
be  carried  out. 

The  day  had  been  calm,  not  a  breath  of  air  had  stirred  the  twig?  of 
the  leafless  trees;  but  now  there  came  a  gust  of  wind  from  the  north-Vest, 
sweeping  through  the  trees  and  rattling  the  windows. 

"  It  is  going  to  be  colder,"  said  the  officers. 

The  soldiers,  sitting  by  their  bivouac-fires,  drew  their  blankets  around 
them. 

"  We  shall  have  a  cold  night,"  said  Elijah  to  Esek. 


146 


THE  BOYS   OF  76. 


"We'll  keep  up  a  good  fire,"  said  Esek,  as  lie  pulled  the  rails  from  a 
fence,  and  built  a  rousing  fire.  The  ground  was  stiffening  fast,  and  would 
be  frozen  solid  before  morning. 

"  We  will  go  to  Princeton,"  said  General  Washington,  breaking  up  the 
council. 

An  officer  came  down  the  line,  and  in  a  whisper  ordered  the  soldiers  to 
fall  in.  The  artillery-men  harnessed  their  horses  and  started  away,  follow 
ed  by  the  .  soldiers.  A 
man  from  each  compa 
ny  was  left  to  keep  the 
fires  burning.  Elijah 
was  selected,  for  one,  to 
stay  behind.  He  pulled 
the  rails  from  the  fences, 
and  heaped  them  upon 
the  fires  to  let  the  Brit 
ish  know  that  their  an 
tagonists  were  keeping 
themselves  warm. 

The  baggage  -  wag 
ons,  instead  of  following 
the  army  toward  Prince 
ton,  turned  off  in  the 
opposite  direction  to 
ward  Burlington.  As 
soon  as  the  baggage-men 
were  beyond  hearing  of 
the  British,  they  whip 
ped  up  their  horses,  de 
termined  to  reach  Bur 
lington  and  get  the  wag 
ons  ferried  across  the 
river  before  Cornwallis 
could  overtake  them. 

It    was    about    mid- 

•  '•  night   when     the    army 

started.  Washington  took  a  road  leading  through  the  little  hamlet  called 
Sandtown,  north-east  from  Trenton.  It  was  nearly  four  o'clock  when  Eli 
jah  and  his  fellow  fire-tenders  put  their  last  armful  of  rails  upon  the  fires, 
took  their  muskets,  and  started  up  the  same  road  to  overtake  the  army. 


PRINCETON. 


147 


Beyond  Sandtown  was  a  new  road,  cut  through  the  woods  to  Prince 
ton.  It  was  only  half  finished.  There  were  stumps  and  logs  in  it ;  but 
Washington  chose  to  take  it,  for  on  the  direct  road,  at  Maidenhead,  were 
some  British  troops,  under  General  Leslie,  whom  he  wished  to  avoid ;  but 
it  was  slow  getting-on. 

The  morning  dawned  clear  and  beautiful.  Washington  was  approach 
ing  Princeton.  Just  at  that  moment  Lieutenant-colonel  Mawhood,  with 
the  Seventeenth,  Fortieth,  and  Fifty-fifth  regiments,  which  were  on  their 
way  to  re-enforce  Cornwallis,  and  which  had  halted  at  Princeton  the  night 
before,  started  from  Princeton  for  Trenton.  Mawhood  was  on  the  old 
road,  while  Washington  was  on  the  new  road.  Mawhood  was  marching 
south,  and  Washington  north.  The  Fifty-fifth  regiment  was  in  Princeton; 
the  other  two  had  advanced  to  the  bridge  by  Mr.  Worth's  mill. 

General  Washington  directed  General  Mercer,  with  three  hundred  and 
fifty  rner,,  mostly  young  men  from  Philadelphia,  to  file  through  the  fields 
and  take  possession  of  the  bridge,  and  to  intercept  any  fugitives  that  might 
fly  that  way  to  join  Cornwallis. 

Mawhood,  with  the  Seventeenth,  had 
crossed  it,  and  a  few  minutes  later  would 
have  been  out  of  sight ;  but  it  so  happened 
that  Mawhood,  looking  eastward,  saw  the 
troops  of  Mercer  coming  through  the  fields 
toward  the  bridge.  Mercer  saw  Mawhood's 
troops  at  the  same  moment.  Mawhood 


BATTLE-GROUND    AT   PRINCETON. 


148  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

faced  his  men  about,  recrossed  the  bridge,  and  started  to  gain  possession 
of  a  hill  east  of  the  road  near  a  house  occupied  by  Mr.  William  Clark. 
Mercer's  men  crouched  down  behind  a  rail-fence,  and,  as  Mawhood  ad 
vanced,  fired  a  volley.  The  British  returned  it,  and  after  two  or  three 
volleys,  with  a  hurra,  charged  across  the  field. 

Mercer's  troops  had  no  bayonets;  besides,  the  British  outnumbered 
them  two  to  one ;  and  the  Americans  broke  and  fled  in  confusion.  Gen 
eral  Mercer's  horse  was  wounded  at  the  first  fire,  and  he  fought  on  foot. 
He  tried  in  vain  to  rally  his  men.  While  attempting  it,  a  British  soldier 
knocked  him  down  with  the  butt  of  his  gun.  The  soldier  saw  that  he  was 
a  general,  and  thought  that  he  had  captured  Washington. 

"  The  rebel  general  is  taken,"  he  shouted.     Other  soldiers  rushed  up. 

"  Call  for  quarter,  you  rebel !"  they  shouted,  with  oaths. 

"  I  am  not  a  rebel,"  Mercer  replied,  still  grasping  his  sword.  lie 
made  a  fatal  mistake  in  the  excitement  of  the  moment,  and,  stunned  as 
he  was,  perhaps  did  not  knoAV  what  he  was  about.  He  struck  at  them  with 
his  sword,  and  they  plunged  their  bayonets  into  his  body,  and  left  him 
mortally  wounded. 

Mawhood  was  rushing  after  the  fleeing  troops;  but  suddenly  found 
himself  confronted  by  Washington's  whole  force.  The  column  has  been 
marching  north,  but  now  it  turns  from  the  road  into  the  fields  to  the 
west. 

Captain  Moulder  commands  a  battery.  His  men  are  from  Philadel 
phia — ship-riggers,  quick  and  active.  They  see  the  British. 

"  Unlimber !"  shouts  Moulder,  and  the  men  wheel  the  cannon  in  a 
twinkling. 

Mawhood  sees  the  cannon.  He  is  flushed  with  the  success  of  the 
morning. 

"  Take  the  rebel  guns !"  he  shouts. 

The  British  rush  upon  the  cannon.  "  Hurra !"  they  shout,  as  if  the 
victory  were  already  won.  and  the  cannon  theirs. 

The  cannon  blaze,  and  there  are  wide  gaps  in  the  advancing  ranks. 
Upon  the  run,  to  support  Captain  Moulder,  came  the  Rhode  Island 
troops,  under  Colonel  Hitchcock,  pouring  in  a  volley.  The  ship-riggers 
have  rammed  home  another  cartridge  of  grape,  and  the  cannon  blaze  once 
more,  and  the  British,  astounded  by  the  sudden  appearance  of  Washing 
ton's  whole  force,  flee  in  confusion,  throwing  away  their  guns.  They  rush 
for  the  bridge  and  cross  it,  fleeing  toward  Trenton. 

Washington  sends  Major  Kelley,  with  a  company,  to  destroy  the 
bridge,  and  pushes  on  to  Princeton ;  but,  just  before  reaching  the  village, 


PRINCETON.  149 

he  encounters  the  Fifty-fifth  regiment.  The  officer  commanding  the 
regiment  has  heard  the  firing,  and  is  hastening  to  aid  Mawhood.  He 
turns  about,  retreats  to  Princeton,  and  takes  possession  of  the  college — a 
large  stone  building.  The  soldiers  fire  from  the  windows  upon  the  Amer 
icans.  General  Iviiox  plants  his  cannon,  to  riddle  it  with  solid  shot. 

The  first  ball  crashes  into  the  chapel,  and  makes  a  hole  through  the 
portrait  of  King  George  II.  The  Americans  rush  up  and  batter  down  the 
door.  "  Surrender !"  they  shout,  and  the  British  throw  down  their  guns 
and  give  themselves  up  as  prisoners.  It  has  been  a  disastrous  morning  to 
Lord  Comwallis.  He  has  lost  altogether  about  four  hundred  men. 

To  go  back  a  little — to  the  moment  when  Mawhood  is  rushing  upon 
Captain  Moulder's  guns.  Comwallis  is  getting  ready  to  move  up  the  west 
side  of  the  Assanpink  at  Trenton,  cross  the  stream,  march  through  the 
woods,  and  come  down  the  other  side  and  attack  Washington,  whose  camp- 
fires  have  been  burning  brightly  through  the  night ;  but  they  are  getting 
low  just  now,  at  day-break.  His  own  soldiers  are  kindling  theirs  to  cook 
their  breakfasts.  After  breakfast  he  will  begin  the  march  to  catch  the 
"  fox,"  as  he  calls  General  Washington. 

There  does  not  seem  to  be  much  stir  in  the  American  camp.  The  sen 
tinels  are  not  on  their  posts.  Has  Washington  taken  a  new  position  ? 
Whither  can  he  have  gone  ?  Down  the  river  to  Bordentown  2  Possibly. 

Comwallis  hears  a  heavy  rumbling  far  away  in  the  north.  "  Can  it 
be  thunder  ?"  Impossible,  for  it  is  midwinter,  and  there  is  not  a  cloud 
in  the  sky.  Sir  William  Erskine  comprehends  it. 

"It  is  Washington !  He  is  at  Xew  Brunswick.  He  has  outgen 
eraled  us." 

Gradually  Comwallis  comprehends  it.  He  is  astounded.  Yesterday 
he  toiled  all  day  through  the  mud  to  catch  the  fox  before  he  could  get- 
across  the  Delaware ;  but  the  fox  is  in  his  rear,  committing  terrible  havoc. 
The  drums  beat;  officers  give  hasty  orders,  and  do  a  deal  of  swearing; 
the  troops  take  a  quickstep ;  and  the  outwitted  general,  with  his  five  thou 
sand  men,  starts  for  Princeton  over  the  deep-rutted  road  along  which  he 
toiled  yesterday  to  Trenton. 

They  meet  Mawhood's  straggling  troops,  and  learn  of  the  disaster  of  the 
morning.  They  rush  on  to  Worth's :  Major  TCelley  and  his  men  are  hack 
ing  away  with  their  axes  upon  the  bridge.  Comwallis  mistrusts  that  Wash 
ington,  with  his  army,  is  in  the  woods  on  the  north  side  of  the  stream,  and 
moves  cautiously.  He  unlimbers  his  cannon  and  opens  fire.  Major  Kel- 
ley  sends  the  last  timber  down  stream,  and  then  retreats.  Comwallis  can 
not  wait  to  have  the  bridge  rebuilt.  He  is  in  great  haste  to  get  at  Wash- 


150 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


ington.  "  Plunge  in !"  he  shouts,  and  the  soldiers  rush  into  the  stream. 
It  is  a  foolish  order  for  Lord  Cornwallis  to  give,  for  nothing  is  gained  by 
it.  The  wintry  air  is  biting  cold,  and  in  five  minutes  the  soldiers'  clothes 
are  frozen ;  and  they  are  so  chilled  that  they  could  not  fight  if  there  were 
any  fighting  to  be  done.  The  soldiers  are  across,  but  the  cannon  are  not, 
and  the  army  must  wait,  after  all,  till  the  bridge  is  rebuilt.  An  hour  is 
lost. 

Across  at  last.  Cornwallis  moves  on  toward  Princeton.  Surely  he 
will  find  Washington  there.  He  sends  out  his  cavalry  to  reconnoitre. 
The  troopers  approach  the  town.  A  cannon-shot  comes  whizzing  over 
their  heads,  and  the  report  goes  rolling  over  the  hills  to  Worth's.  Corn 
wallis  is  delighted  to  hear  it.  Now  he  will  give  Washington  a  good  drub 
bing  for  outgeneraling  him.  The  cavalry  reconnoitre  a  long  while.  They 
can  see  the  intrenchments  and  the  cannon  behind  it.  They  form  to  attack 
it.  With  a  whoop  and  a  hurra  they  rush  forward,  and  find  nobody  there ! 
The  single  cannon  stands  there — a  British  gun  which  Washington  had  capt 
ured,  but  which  he  conld  not  take  away.  An  American  soldier  lingering 
in  Princeton  had  determined  to  have  some  fun,  and  had  sent  the  shot  to 
ward  the  advancing  troopers,  and  then  had  fled  ;  but  he  had  detained  Corn 
wallis  another  hour. 

Precious  hours  to  Washington!  He  is  pushing  north-west  —  not  to 
ward  New  Brunswick.  It  is  a  great 
temptation  to  move  on  to  that  town, 
and  seize  all  the  British  stores;  but 
his  troops  are  nearly  worn  out.  They 
have  been  without  sleep  for  thirty-six 
hours,  have  eaten  nothing  since  their 
supper  on  the  Assanpink,  have  fought 
two  battles,  and  made  a  rapid  night- 
march  over  the  frozen  ground.  They 
have  no  overcoats ;  some  have  no 
shoes,  and  are  marching  with  rags 
bound  around  their  feet.  Cornwal 
lis  will  soon  be  upon  him,  with  his 
whole  army.  Tempting  the  prize, 
but  too  great  the  risk.  Prudence 
will  be  valor  now.  He  turns  north 
west,  and  marches  eighteen  miles 
from  Princeton  to  the  town  of  Pluckemin,  before  halting. 

It  is  a  weary  march.     The  soldiers  are  foot-sore,  hungry,  exhausted. 


GOD    BLESS    YOU: 


FKINCETON.  151 

Some  drop  from  the  ranks,  and  fall  asleep  in  a  moment  upon  the  frozen 
ground.  Mile  after  mile  they  drag  themselves  along.  Some  are  dressed 
in  rags,  but  the  people  are  kind  to  them.  Little  children  give  them  bread, 
glad  to  do  so  much  for  those  who  have  fought  so  bravely,  and  receive  in 
return  a  kind  "  God  bless  you  !" 

Washington  breaks  down  the  bridges  behind  him.  At  midnight  he 
allows  the  troops  to  halt.  A  great  day's  march  they  have  made — a  great 
day's  work  have  they  done  for  liberty ! 

Cornwallis  arrives  at  Princeton,  finds  Washington  gone,  fears  that  he 
is  at  New  Brunswick,  and  hastens  on.  He  finds  his  supplies  are  safe;  but 
he  is  chagrined  at  being  so  completely  outgeneraled. 

Washington  moves  north  to  Morristown,  and  there,  amidst  the  hills, 
where  nearly  all  the  people  are  patriots,  builds  log- huts,  and  goes  into 
winter-quarters;  while  Cornwallis  and  Howe,  who  begin  to  respect  Mister 
Washington,  as  they  have  called  him,  gather  in  their  scattered  detachments 
to  New  Brunswick  and  New  York,  and  settle  down  for  the  winter.  Gen 
eral  Howe  likes  good  dinners  and  good  wines  and  a  game  of  cards.  He 
will  let  the  troops  rest  till  winter  is  over;  but  when  summer  comes,  he 
will  speedily  crush  the  rebellion. 


152 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

TICONDEROGA  AND  HUBBARUTON. 

ENERAL  BURGOYNE,  in  October,  1776,  after  the  destruction  of 
the  American  flotilla  on  Lake  Champlain,  hastened  to  England.  He 
had  thought  out  a  plan  by  which  the  rebellion  could  be  crushed,  and  laid 
it  before  Lord  North  and  Lord  Germaine.  It  was  to  send  a  large  army  to 
Canada,  and  from  thence  through  Lake  Champlain  to  Ticonderoga,  capt 
ure  that  place,  and  push  on  to  the  .Hudson. 
At  the  same  time  another  army  was  to  ascend 
the  Hudson  from  New  York;  they  would 
meet  at  Albany.  These  movements  would 
sever  New  England  from  the  other  colonies ; 
it  would  be  like  cutting  the  head  from  the 
body.  New  England  started  the  rebellion, 
and  if  it  were  separated  from  the  other  colo 
nies,  the  rebellion  would  soon  come  to  an  end. 

The  ministry  and  the  king  favored  the 
plan ;  it  was  reasonable ;  the  invading  armies 
could  go  almost  the  entire  distance  by  water ; 
there  would  only  be  a  short  march  from  Lake 
Champlain  to  the  Hudson  ;  Canada  was  loyal, 
and  all  the  horses,  wagons,  and  forage  necessary  could  be  obtained 
at  Quebec  and  Montreal.  More,  the  Canadians  would  enlist,  and  the 
Indians.  It  was  an  excellent  plan,  the  ministers  thought;  and  they  be 
gan  at  once  to  make  preparations,  and  appointed  General  Bourgoyne 
commander  of  the  expedition. 

In  April,  1777,  as  soon  as  the  ice  was  out  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  a  great 
fleet  sailed  up  that  noble  river  to  Quebec,  and  from  there  to  Montreal. 
General  Burgoyne  sent  out  runners  to  all  the  Indian  tribes,  to  have  the 
warriors  come  and  join  their  great  father,  the  king,  in  putting  down  the 
Boston  men,  as  the  Indians  called  the  Americans.  He  bought  horses,  oats, 
and  other  supplies,  and  set  the  Canadian  carpenters  to  making  boats,carts, 


GKNKRAL  BURGOTNK. 


TICONDEROGA  AND   HUBBAEDTON. 


153 


and  wagons  at  St.  Johns.      The  Indians  gathered  there,  set  up  their  wig 
wams  on  the  bank  of  the  river,  or  slept  at  night  under  their  birch  canoes. 


ST.   JOHNS,    1776. 

One  feature  of  Bnrgoyne's  plan  was  to  have  a  portion  of  his  army  go 
up  the  St.  Lawrence  to  Lake  Ontario,  across  the  lake  to  Oswego,  up  the 
Oswego  River  to  the  Mohawk,  take  Fort  Schnyler  on  that  stream,  and 
then  go  down  the  Mohawk  and  meet  him  and  the  army  from  New  York 
at  Albany. 

Such  a  movement  would  secure  all  the  Indians  of  Western  New  York 
to  the  king.  They  would  be  at  home,  on  their  own  ground,  and  would 
soon  drive  all  the  Whigs  out  of  the  Mohawk  Valley.  Many  Tories  lived 
there.  Sir  John  Johnson,  from  Johnstown ;  Colonel  Butler  and  a  great 
many  other  Tories,  who  had  fled  from  their  homes,  would  go  with  the 
expedition,  and  enlist  all  the  friends  of  the  king  in  the  Mohawk  Valley. 

This  expedition  was  commanded  by  Colonel  St.  Leger.  He  had  some 
British  troops,  a  regiment  of  Canadians,  commanded  by  Sir  John  John 
son,  which  wore  a  uniform  trimmed  with  green,  and  so  the  troops  were 
called  the  "Johnson  Greens."  There  was  another  regiment,  under  Colonel 
Butler;  and  the  Indians,  with  Thayendanegea,  or  "Bundle  of  Sticks,"  at 
their  head.  In  all,  St.  Leger  had  about  two  thousand  men.  The  expedi 
tion  started  from  Montreal. 


154 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


Having  sent  Colonel  St.  Leger  away,  Burgoyne  came  from  St.  Johns 
to  the  island  Aux  Noix,  where  he  issued  a  pompous  address  to  the  army. 


"  This  army  must  not  retreat,"  he  said.      Great 
generals  are  just  as  ready  to  retreat  as  to  ad vance,  if 
they  see  that  victory  lies  in  that  direction.     King  Al 
fred,  Frederick  the  Great,  Napoleon.  Wellington,  Washington,  and  a  great 
many  other  generals  have  known  how  to  retreat.     None  of  them  ever 
made  such  an  address  to  their  armies. 

Burgoyne's  boats  were  ready,  his  provisions  on  board  ;  and  the  first  week 
in  June,  the  great  army,  numbering  between  nine  and  ten  thousand,  with 
a  great  park  of  artillery,  sailed  from  the  island  into  Lake  Champlain, 
moving  south  to  Crown  Point.  Arriving  there,  four  hundred  Indians 


CROWN    POINT. 


TICONDEROGA  AND   HUBBARDTON. 


155 


A    TENDER-HEARTED 
HYENA. 


joined  the  army,  with  war-paint  on  their  faces,  and  eagles'  feathers  in  their 
hair,  ready  to  steal  out  into  the  country  and  tomahawk  the  peaceful  inhab 
itants. 

On  the  21st  of  June,  Burgoyne  gave  them  a  great  feast  on  the  shore  of 
the  lake  near  Crown  Point.     He  was  dressed  in  his  showy  uniform,  and  so 
were  all  his  officers.     The  Indians  painted  their  faces, 
and  rigged  themselves  out  in  all  their  finery.     Gen 
eral  Burgoyne  made  a  grand  speech. 

"  Go,"  said  he,  "  in  the  might  of  your  valor  and 
your  cause.  Strike  at  the  common  enemies  of  Great 
Britain  and  America;  disturbers  of  public  order, 
peace,  and  happiness;  destroyers  of  commerce  and 
parricides  of  state.  I  positively  forbid  bloodshed 
when  you  are  not  opposed  in  arms.  Aged  women 
and  children  and  prisoners  must  be  held  sacred  from 
the  knife  and  hatchet,  even  in  time  of  conflict.  You 
shall  be  paid  for  the  prisoners  you  take,  but  you  will 
be  called  to  account  for  scalps.  You  will  be  allow 
ed  to  take  the  scalps  of  the  dead,  when  killed  by  you  in  opposition ;  but 
on  no  account  or  pretense  are  they  to  be  taken  from  the  wounded,  or  even 
the  dying." 

General  Burgoyne  might  as  well  have  addressed  a  pack  of  wolves. 
When  the  news  reached  England  that  Burgoyne  had  employed  the 
Indians,  Edmund  Burke  made  a 
speech  in  regard  to  it  in  Parlia 
ment.  He  said : 

"  Suppose  there  was  a  riot  on 
Tower  Hill.  What  would  the 
keeper  of  his  majesty's  lions  do? 
Would  he  not  fling  open  the  doors 
of  the  wild  beasts,  and  address  them 
thus,  'My  gentle  lions,  my  hu 
mane  bears,  my  tender-hearted  hy 
enas,  go  forth  !  but  I  exhort  you,  as 
you  are  Christians  and  members 
of  civilized  society,  to  take  care 
and  not  hurt  any  man,  woman,  or 
child."' 

Mr.  Burke  supposed  that  Gen 
eral  Burgoyne  had  employed  the 


EDMUND    BURKE. 


156 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


Indians  of  his  own  accord,  and  did  not  know  that  Lord  North  and  Lord 
Germaine  had  especially  instructed  him  to  employ  the  savages.  Lord 
North  was  present,  and  laughed  till  the  tears  ran  down  his  cheeks,  while 
Mr.  Burke  pictured  the  scene,  laying  all  the  blame  on  Burgoyne. 

An  old  chief,  with  his  face  covered  with  war-paint,  replied  to  Bur 
goyne  : 

"  We  receive  you  as  our  father,  for  when  you  speak  we  hear  the  voice 
of  our  Great  Father  beyond  the  great  waters.  Our  hatchets  are  sharp 
sued  on  our  affections.  We  promise  obedience." 


BURGOYNE    MAKING    A    SPEECH    TO    THE    INDIANS. 

It  was  all  very  fair  for  the  old  chief  to  promise  it;  but  the  people  in 
Vermont,  who  had  fought  the  Indians  twenty  years  before,  knew  how  lit 
tle  reliance  could  be  placed  on  such  promises ;  and  many  of  them  packed 
up  their  goods  and  started,  with  their  families,  to  cross  the  Green  Mount 
ains  to  the  Connecticut  Valley. 

Soldiers  were  wanted  to  stop  Burgoyne,  and  Dodifer  buckled  on  his 
knapsack  once  more,  shouldered  his  gun,  and  marched  to  Ticonderoga,  on 
Lake  Champlain.  He  had  stopped  a  night  there,  on  his  return  from 
Canada. 

The  fort  stands  at  the  outlet  of  Lake  George.  The  French  built  a  for- 
tmcation  there  in  1775,  and  called  it  Fort  Carillon  ;  but  the  Indians  called 


TICONDEROGA  AND  HUBBARDTON. 


157 


the  place  Cheonderoga,  meaning  sounding  waters  f  which  soon  became 
Ticonderoga. 

A  great  deal  of  fighting  had  been,  done  in  the  region  from  1755  to  '59. 
Putnam,  Stark,  and  a  great  many  others  who  were  now  fighting  the  Brit 
ish,  had  fought  the  French  and  Indians  there.  General  Howe's  brother 
had  been  killed  there.  Many  of  the  British  officers  now  fighting  the 
Americans  had  fought  there  side  by  side  with  Putnam  and  Stark.  Gen 
eral  Amherst  took  it  from  the  French  in  759,  and  the  English  had  made 
it  a  strong  fortification.  Ethan  Allen,  with  a  company  of  Green  Mount- 


COUNTRY    AROUND    TICONDEROGA. 


ain  boys,  had  seized  it  on  the  10th  of  May,  1775,  astonishing  the  British 
officers  in  command  by  demanding  the  surrender  in  the  name  of  "  Con 
gress  and  the  Great  Jehovah."  General  Knox  had  dragged  a  large  num 
ber  of  the  cannon  to  Boston  in  February,  ?76,  and  Dodifer  had  rammed 
home  many  a  ball  into  the  eigh teen-pounders  on  Winter  Hill.  But  now 
other  cannon  were  mounted  on  the  parapets,  and  General  St.  Clair,  who 
was  in  command,  was  making  preparations  to  give  Burgoyne  a  warm  re 
ception.  He  had  about  two  thousand  five  hundred  men ;  but  about  nine 
hundred  soldiers  from  "New  Hampshire  and  Massachusetts  came  to  aid 


158 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


TICONDKROGA. 


him,  making  his  force  three  thousand  four  hundred.  St.  Clair  was  con 
fident  that  Burgoyne  would  not  be  able  to  take  the  fort.  He  built  a  great 
boom  of  timber  across  the  narrow  part  of  the  lake,  opposite  the  fort,  and 
erected  another  fort  on  a  high  hill,  called  Mount  Independence,  on  the 
Vermont  side.  It  was  called  Mount  Independence,  from  the  fact  that  the 
Declaration  of  Independence  was  read  to  the  soldiers  on  the  top  of  the 
mountain  in  '76,  the  soldiers  having  swung  their  hats  and  cheered  lustily 
at  the  conclusion  of  the  reading. 

Dodifer  was  once  more  with  the  army  at  Ticonderoga.     He  was  a  ser 
geant  now,  and  went  out  with  a  scou ting-party  one  day  toward  Chimney 

Point,  opposite  Crown  Point,  to  see  what 
Burgoyne  was  doing.  He  came  across  a 
Tory  who  was  distributing  a  proclamation 
to  the  people.  General  Burgoyne  had  writ 
ten  it  at  Montreal.  It  was  a  printed  docu 
ment,  and  General  Burgoyne  expected  that 
it  would  strike  terror  to  the  hearts  of  the 
people  in  the  New  Hampshire  Grants,  as 
Vermont  was  then  called.  The  soldiers 
gathered  round  while  Dodifer  read  it.  Thus 

CH1MNEV    POINT.  * 


TICONDEROGA  AND   HUBBARDTON.  159 

John  Burgoyne,  Esquire,  Lieutenant-general  of  His  Majesty*  s 
Forces  in  America,  Colonel  of  the  Queen's  Regiment  of  Light  Dragoons, 
Governor  of  Fort  William,  in  North  Britain;  one  of  the  Commons 
of  Great  Britain  in  Parliament,  and  Commanding  an  Army  and  Fleet 
employed  on  an  Expedition  from  Canada? 

"  Any  more  titles  ?"  a  soldier  asked. 

The  proclamation  described  the  army,  how  powerful  it  was,  and  magni 
fied  the  number  of  Indians.  General  Burgoyne  said: 

"  1  have  but  to  give  stretch  to  the  Indian  forces  under  'my  direction 
—  and  they  amount  to  thousands  —  to  overtake  the  hardened  enemies  of 
America." 

The  proclamation  threatened  terrible  consequences  upon  all  who  would 
not  submit.  The  soldiers  were  not  in  the  least  frightened  by  the  procla 
mation,  but  took  the  Tory  to  the  fort  a  prisoner. 

On  the  1st  of  July  Burgoyne  was  ready  to  move.  The  Indians  went 
through  the  woods  along  the  western  shore  of  the  lake  toward  the  fort. 
while  the  British  and  Hessians,  about  eight  thousand,  embarked  once  more, 
and  sailed  up  the  lake. 

The  American  soldiers,  from  the  top  of  Mount  Independence,  could 
see  far  down  the  lake.  They  beheld  the  boats,  one  after  another,  come 
round  a  point  of  land  in  grand  procession.  There  were  so  many  boats 
that  the  lake  seemed  black  with  them.  The  bright  uniforms,  the  flags, 
the  forest  of  bayonets  gleaming  in  the  sun,  the  dipping  of  the  oars,  made 
it  a  grand  spectacle. 

The  British  landed  on  the  New  York  side  north  of  the  fort,  pitched 
their  tents,  and  advanced  and  took  possession  of  the  road  leading  to  Lake 
George.  Lieutenant  Twiss,  the  chief-engineer  of  Burgoyne's  army,  looked 
at  Mount  Defiance.  He  saw  that  it  was  much  higher  than  Ticonderoga, 
and,  although  the  mountain  was  steep  and  rugged,  he  thought  that  cannon 
might  be  dragged  to  the  top.  General  Eraser  set  his  soldiers  to  work  dur 
ing  the  night,  and  before  morning  they  had  a  path  to  the  top;  but  when 
the  sun  rose  they  quit  work,  and  lay  still  in  the  woods  through  the  day. 
The  next  night  the  soldiers  were  at  it  again,  and,  under  the  light  of  the 
full  moon,  dragged  several  cannon  to  the  top,  and  placed  them  in  position 
to  pour  a  fire  down  into  the  fort. 

It  was  Dodifer's  turn  to  stand  guard  on  that  night.  The  moon  was 
full,  and  its  beautiful  light  fell  upon  the  mountain  and  reflected  its  shad 
ows  from  the  lake.  The  air  was  calm;  not  a  ripple  disturbed  the  water. 

In  the  fort  every  thing  was  hushed  in  silence.     All  except  the  sentinels 


160 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


TICONDEROGA 


TTTE    LAKE,  FROM    MOUNT    DEFIANCE. 


were  asleep.  Dodifer  could  hear  confused  noises  from  the  British  camp, 
and  wondered  what  was  going  on.  The  morning  dawned,  and  as  the  light 
streamed  np  the  east  he  saw  that  the  top  of  Mount  Defiance  was  swarm 
ing  with  British  troops.  General  St.  Clair  came  out  from  his  quarters  and 
beheld  the  scene  with  amazement.  He  saw  that,  having  neglected  to  for 
tify  that  point,  the  fort  was  of  no  account.  He  must  evacuate  it  at  once. 
But  as  the  British  could  see  all  that  was  going  on  in  the  fort,  he  could 
make  no  movement  till  night. 

General  Fraser  was  not  quite  ready  to  open  fire,  and  the  day  passed 
quietly ;  but  when  night  came  every  body  was  astir  in  the  fort.  All  hands 
were  set  to  work  loading  bateaux  with  provisions  and  ammunition.  St. 
Clair  had  two  hundred  bateaux,  besides  some  armed  galleys.  The  boats, 
as  fast  as  loaded,  started  up  the  lake  toward  Skenesborough  (Whitehall). 
To  make  the  British  think  that  he  was  going  to  stand  a  siege,  General  St 
Clair  ordered  the  cannon  to  open  fire  upon  Mount  Defiance. 


TICONDEROGA   AND   HUBBARDTON. 


161 


GENERAL    ST.     C'LATR. 


Dodifer  laid  down  his  musket,  and  helped  load  and  fire  the  great  thirty- 
two-pounder.     They  elevated  the  muzzle 
of  the  gun  so  as  to  send  the  ball  plump 
upon  the  top   of  the    mountain.      That 
made  it  easy  loading. 

Dodifer  rammed  home  the  cartridge, 
then  a  soldier  put  the  heavy  thirty-two- 
pound  hall  into  the  muzzle  of  the  gun, 
and  Dodifer  pushed  it  down  with  the 
rammer.  While  he  was  doing  this  an 
other  soldier  primed  the  gun :  then  all 
stood  back  while  one  touched  it  off.  The 
gun-carriage  would  almost  leap  from  the 
ground,  and  the  report  went  rolling  up 
and  down  the  lake  and  out  over  the  hills, 
and  then  as  they  listened  they  could  hear  the  ball  crash  against  the  rocks, 
or  tear  its  way  through  the  trees,  making  it  decidedly  uncomfortable  to 
the  British  on  the  mountain. 

The  soldiers  in  the  fort  packed  their  knapsacks  with  provisions,  and 
their  cartridge-boxes  with  powder.  It  was  about  three  o'clock  when  they 
left  the  fort  and  crossed  the  bridge  to  the  Vermont  side. 

As  Dodifer  crossed  the  bridge  he  could  see  signs  of  approaching  day. 
General  St.  Clair  had  given  strict  orders  against  setting  any  of  the  build 
ings  on  fire;  but  suddenly  the  top  of  Mount  Independence  was  all  ablaze. 
General  Fermoy,  in  command  there,  disobeyed  the  order,  and  set  the  bar 
racks  on  fire.  The  British  on  Mount  Defiance  could  see  all  that  was  going 
on ;  their  drums  beat  the  long  roll,  and  the  British  and  Hessians  sprung  to 
their  arms  to  be  ready  to  make  pursuit. 

It  was  nearly  four  o'clock  when  Dodifer,  who  was  in  the  rear-guard, 
under  Colonel  Francis,  started  from  the  foot  of  Mount  Independence. 
The  army  was  retreating  to  Castleton,  in  Vermont.  Besides  his  gun,  Dod 
ifer  had  cartridge-box  and  bullet-pouch  filled  with  powder  and  balls,  and 
his  knapsack  with  provisions.  He  had  his  blanket  —  in  all  nearly  sixty 
pounds,  that  he  staggered  under.  All  day  long,  through  the  hot  midsum 
mer  sun,  he  marched,  reaching  Hubbardton,  eighteen  miles  from  Ticoiide- 
roga,  at  night. 

Every  body  was  in  motion  in  General  Burgoyne's  army.  Some  of  the 
soldiers  rushed  into  the  fort,  others  went  to  work  with  axes  cutting  away 
the  bridge  and  the  boom,  and  long  before  noon  the  British  gun-boats  were 
past  the  obstruction,  and,  with  all  sail  spread,  were  hastening  to  capture  the 


1G2 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


bateaux  of  General  St.  Clair.     Before  night  the  gun-boats  came  up  with 

them  near  Skenesborough- 
The  crews,  seeing  the  Brit- 

|  ish  boats  close  upon  them, 

_=  ran  them  ashore,  set  them 

Ji  on  fire,  and  fled  to  Fort 

Edward. 

So  the  fortress,  which 
every  body  supposed  would 
be  an  insuperable  barrier 
to  Burgoyne,  had  fallen  in 
a  night,  and  there  was  noth 
ing  to  hinder  his  advance  to 
Albany,  except   a  few  hundred 
troops  under  General  Schuyler  at 
Fort  Edward. 

The  news  was  carried  by  messenger»  w 
Boston,  New  York,  and  Philadelphia.  Ev 
ery  body  was  astounded.  General  Washing 
ton  was  at  Philadelphia,  watching  General 
Howe.  This  was  what  he  wrote  to  Gen- 
bciiuyler  ; 

«  The  evacuation  of  Ticonderoga  is  an 
event  of  chagrin  and  surprise  not  apprehended,  nor  within  the  compass  of 
my  reasoning." 

When  the  evacuation  took  place,  the  people  of  New  England  were 
turning  out  by  the  thousand  to  oppose  Burgoyne.  Some  companies  were 
almost  at  Ticonderoga;  but  now  they  turned  sadly  about  and  marched 
home.  It  was  a  disheartening  day  that  5th  of  July,  1777. 

But  there  was  more  disheartening  news  for  the  country  to  hear.  Col 
onel  Francis,  with  his  own  Massachusetts  regiment,  Colonel  Seth  Warner's 
regiment  of  Green  Mountain  Boys,  and  Colonel  Hale's  New  Hampshire 
regiment,  spent  their  first  night  at  Hubbardton.  Dodifer  had  not  slept  a 
wink  for  forty  -eight  hours.  He  eat  his  supper,  spread  his  blanket  under 
a  tree  in  a  wheat-field,  and  soon  was  sound  asleep,  with  his  knapsack  for  a 
pillow.  Colonel  Francis  did  not  know  that  General  Fraser,  with  a  portion 
of  the  British  troops,  and  General  Eeidesel,  with  the  Hessians,  were  in  pur 
suit  of  him.  Quite  likely  he  thought  that  Burgoyne  would  take  his  whole 
army  by  water  to  Skenesborough.  But  there  were  a  large  number  of 
Tories  rrom  Skenesborough,  and  the  towns  in  New  York  and  Vermont, 


THE  PLACE  WHERE  THE  BOATS 
BURNED. 


TICONDEROGA  AND  HUBBARDTON.  163 

with  General  Burgoyne.     Major  Skene  himself,  who  lived  at  Skenesbor- 
ongh,  had  joined  Burgoyne,  and  was  giving  all  the  information  possible, 
and  doing  what  he  could  to  help  Burgoyne  conquer  his  fellow-countrymen. 
Some  of  the  Tories  who  knew  all  the  roads  were  acting  as  guides  to  Gen 
eral  Fraser,  who  inarched  late  into  the  night.     General  Fraser  was  inform 
ed  that  the  rear-guard,  under  Colonel  Francis,  had  halted  at  Ilubbardton, 
and  laid  his  plans  to  surprise  and  capture  it.     With  the  light -infantry  he 
pressed  on  till  he  was  within  three  miles  of  Hubbardton,  when  he  halted 
and  allowed  his  men  to  rest  till  three  o'clock,  and  then  started  again. 

It  was  sunrise  on  the  morning  of  the  6th  of  August.  The  drummer  had 
beaten  the  reveille,  and  the  American  soldiers  had  risen  from  their  beds 
on  the  ground.  Some  were  folding  up  their  blankets,  some  washing  their 
faces  in  a  little  brook.  Others  were  kindling  fires  to  cook  their  breakfast 
and  light  their  pipes.  Dodifer  was  getting  ready  to  eat  breakfast,  when 
there  was  the  crack  of  a  gun,  fired  by  one  of  the  pickets.  Then  another, 
and  another.  A  picket  suddenly  discovered  a  red-coat  standing  on  a  big 
rock,  and  looking  around  to  see  what  he  could  discover.  The  picket  fired 
at  him,  and  the  soldier  rolled  from  the  rock,  a  dead  man ;  but  behind  him 
were  other  British  soldiers,  and  now  it  was  discovered  that  General  Fraser. 
with  the  light-infantry,  was  upon  them. 

Dodifer  quit  his  breakfast,  seized  his  gun,  and  every  body  else  did  the 
same.  "  Fall  in  !"  shouted  Colonel  Francis,  and  in  a  moment  the  soldiers 
fell  into  line.  Colonel  Francis  had  about  thirteen  hundred  men ;  but  some 
were  sick,  others  were  stragglers  that  had  been  picked  up  on  the  way. 
General  Frasei  had  about  eight  hundred  of  the  best  soldiers  in  Burgoyne's 
army,  and  General  Reidesel  was  coming  with  as  many  Hessians. 

General  Fraser  was  forming  his  lines  to  make  an  attack ;  but  Colonel 
Francis  did  not  wait  for  him.  He  marched  through  the  wheat-field,  and 
fell  upon  the  British.  The  fight  began  along  a  fittle  brook,  partly  in  the 
field  and  partly  in  the  woods.  Colonel  Francis  was  a  brave  officer,  and  so 
was  Colonel  Warner,  and  they  commanded  brave  men.  The  men  in  War 
ner's  regiment  were  fighting  for  their  homes,  for  many  of  them  lived  in 
that  region. 

General  Fraser  was  also  a  brave  officer,  the  ablest  in  Burgoyne's  army 
-abler  than  Burgoyne  himself.     In  all  England  there  were  no  better  sol 
diers  than  those  with  him  at  that  moment.     They  were  under  excellent 
discipline ;  but  they  found  their  match  in  the  undisciplined  troops  in  front 
of  them. 

Colonel  Francis  advanced  boldly  to  meet  the  British,  and  in  a  few  mo 
ments  there  was  a  terrific  fire.  Dodifer  saw  a  battalion  of  red-coats  come 


164 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


out  from  the  woods.  The  rays  of  the  rising  sun  fell  in  their  faces,  and 
were  reflected  from  their  bright  buckles,  gnu-barrels,  and  bayonets.  Be 
yond  the  red  uniforms  was  a  dark  background  of  shadows  under  the  tail 
forest  -  trees.  He  took  deliberate  aim,  as  did  his  comrades,  and  many  a 
British  soldier  fell  under  their  withering  lire.  For  nearly  an  hour  the  fight 
raged,  when  the  British  gave  way,  and  the  Americans  were  masters  of  the 
field ;  but  only  for  a  moment,  for  just  then  the  Hessian  drum-beat  was 
beard,  and  General  Reidesel  appeared,  with  his  banners  waving  in  the 


morning  air.  He  quickly  formed  his  men,  and  the  British,  who  had  retreat 
ed,  now  came  back  to  renew  the  battle. 

The  Tories  with  General  Fraser  told  him  that  the  only  road  by  whicn 
the  Americans  could  retreat  was  one  leading  south-west  to  Skenesborough, 
He  at  once  sent  the  Earl  of  Balcarris,  with  the  grenadiers,  to  take  posses 
sion  of  it,  and  to  fall  upon  the  left  flank  of  the  Americans.  At  the  same 
time  General  Reidesel  attacked  the  right  flank. 

It  is  possible  that  the  Americans  would  have  remained  masters  of  the 
field  even  now,  had  not  the  stragglers  and  the  men  in  Colonel  Ilale's  regi 


TICONDEKOGA  AND  HUBBAKDTON. 


165 


ment  retreated  when  they  saw  the  British  in  possession  of  the  road.  A 
panic  seized  them,  and  they  fled  up  a  steep  hill-side  into  the  woods.  Many 
were  so  frightened  that  they  threw  away  their  guns  and  every  thing  else. 

Dodifer  saw  the  grenadiers  come  up  the  road,  to  attack  Colonels 
Francis  and  Warner  in  the  rear.  At  the  same  moment  the  Hessians 
came  down  upon  the  right,  and  Fraser,  with  the  light-infantry,  charged 
in  front.  He  saw  Colonel  Francis  fall  mortally  wounded.  The  line  gave  ; 
way  as  a  dam  breaks  in  a  freshet,  and  every  body  ran.  Dodifer  was  too 
old  a  soldier  to  throw  away  his  gun  or  knapsack,  or  any  thing  else,  till 
obliged  to.  He  had  not  toiled  through  the  woods  to  Quebec  for  nothing. 
He  had  no  intention  of  throwing  away  his  dinner.  He  made  his  way  up 
the  steep  hill-side,  with  the  bullets  whistling  about  him  aud  the  British  in 
pursuit,  but,  with  the  others,  made  his  way  through  the  woods,  and  reached 
Rutland. 


BATTLE-FIELD    AT    HUBBARDTON. 


It  was  a  terrible  blow.  More  than  one  hundred  had  been  killed  and 
wounded,  some  had  been  taken  prisoners — in  all,  more  than  three  hundred 
were  lost.  The  little  army  was  scattered  and  disheartened. 

But  General  Fraser  had  not  won  his  victory  without  loss.  Nearly  two 
hundred  British  and  Hessians  had  been  killed  or  wounded  in  the  short  but 
desperate  battle. 


166 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


CHAPTEE    XIV. 

FORT  SCHUYLER. 


"j^TICIIOLAS  DOLOFF  was  on  the  march  once  more.  Men  were 
•L-*  needed  to  check  Burgoyne,  and  he  shouldered  his  gun  and  started. 
He  marched  to  Albany,  where  the  troops  were  gathering  under  General 
Schuyler. 


ALBANY     ONE     HUNDRED     YEARS     AGO. 


FORT  SCHUYLER. 


167 


He  found  that  Albany  was  a  queer  old  town.  It  wac,  settled  by  the 
Dutch.  Many  of  the  houses  were  built  of  brick,  which  they  had  brought 
from  Holland.  The  buildings  stood  with  their  gables  toward  the  street. 

The  old  Dutch  burghers  took  life  easy,  smoking  their  pipes  and  drink 
ing  beer,  and  talking  with  their  friends.  In  the  warm  summer  evenings 
the  round-faced  Dutch  girls  used  to  sit  beneath  the  porches  of  the  queer 
old  houses,  and  chat  with  the  young  mynheers  of  the  town. 

Troops  were  wanted  to  drive  back  Colonel  St.  Leger  at  Fort  Schuyler 
up  the  Mohawk.  During  the  French  and  Indian  war  it  was  called  Fort 
Stanwix;  but  it  had  been  changed  to  Schuyler  in  honor  of  General 
Schuyler,  who  lived  at  Albany, 
and  who  was  in  command  of  the 
Northern  Military  Department, 
doing  what  he  could  to  stop  Bur- 
goyne. 

Nicholas  and  his  fellow -sol 
diers  were  marching  to  stop  Col 
onel  St.  Leger,  whom  Burgoyne 
had  sent  from  Montreal  up  the 
St.  Lawrence  and  through  Lake 
Ontario  to  Oswego.  St.  Leger 
was  to  attack  Fort  Schuyler,  and 
then  sweep  down  the  valley  of 
the  Mohawk,  and  join  him  at 
Albany.  It  would  not  be  a  dif 
ficult  journey  for  St.  Leger,  for 

he  could  take  all  his  cannon  and  supplies  by  water  up  the  Oswego  Eiver, 
through  Oneida  Lake,  almost  to  the  fort.  When  he  had  captured  the 
fort,  he  could  drag  his  boats  a  short  distance  to  the  Mohawk,  and  descend 
that  stream  to  Albany. 

Colonel  St.  Leger  was  accompanied  by  Sir  John  Johnson,  son  of  Sir 
William  Johnson,  who  defeated  Dieskau  at  Lake  George  in  1755,  whose 
home  was  at  Johnson  Hall,  in  the  valley  of  the  Mohawk.  Sir  John  had 
fled  to  Canada  in  1776,  and  had  enlisted  a  regiment  of  Canadians  and 
Tory  Americans,  who  wore  coats  trimmed  with  green,  and  so  were  called 
"Johnson  Greens." 

Another  officer  with  Colonel  St.  Leger  was  Colonel  John  Butler,  who 
had  enlisted  a  regiment  of  Tories,  most  of  them  citizens  of  the  Mohawk 
Valley,  who  had  fled  to  Canada.  Another  Tory  officer  was  Colonel  Daniel 
Clous,  a  son  of  Sir  William  Johnson,  but  whose  mother  was  an  Indian. 


GENERAL    PHILIP    SCHUYLER. 


168 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


Besides  these,  Colonel  St.  Leger  had  the  Mohawk  chief,  Joseph  Brant, 
whose  Indian  name  was  Thayendanegea,  and  whose  mother  Sir  William 
took  for  one  of  his  wives.  (Thayendanegea  means,  in  English,  "Bun 
dle  of  Sticks.")  He  had  been 
educated  by  Eev.  Mr.  Wheelock, 
at  Lebanon,  Connecticut,  who 
taught  Indian  children,  and  who 
started  Dartmouth  College,  in 
New  Hampshire,  as  an  Indian 
school.  The  young  chief  could 
speak  good  English,  and  had  been 
trying  to  educate  his  tribe.  He 
had  accepted  the  Christian  relig- 
*on'  and  was  a  n"ss^onary  inter- 

preter  to  the  good  Mr>  Kirkland> 

who  Pre«shed  in  a  little  meeting- 
house  near  Johnson  Hall ;  but  Sir 
John  had  espoused  the  king's  side 
in  the  war,  and  it  was  quite  natu 
ral  that  Bundle  of  Sticks  should 
take  the  same  side.  More,  he  had  been  to  England,  and  had  been  made 
much  of  by  Sir  John's  friends  in  high  life.  Bundle  of  Sticks  had  in 
fluenced  the  Indians,  and  all  the  tribes,  except  the  Oneidas,  had  agreed 


BUNDLE    OF    STICKS. 


JOHNSON  8    IIOUSK. 


FORT  SCHUYLER. 


169 


BUTLER  S    HOUSE. 


to  take  the  war-path  against  the  "  Boston  men,"  as  they  called  the  Amer 
icans. 

St.  Leger  had  in  all  seventeen  hundred  men,  with  several  cannon,  and 
an  abundant  supply  of  provisions.  A  great  many  of  his  soldiers  had  their 
homes  in  the  vicinity  of  Fort  Schuyler,  and  they  were  going  to  fight  their 
aid  neighbors  and  friends. 

The  first  night  after  leaving  Albany,  Nicholas  and  his  fellow-soldiers 
camped  at  Schenectady ;  the  second  night 
they  reached  Johnson  Hall,  the  house  built  ^^IflilS^ 

by  Sir  William,  and  where  he  used  to  en 
tertain  the  Indian  chiefs  and  distribute 
trinkets  to  the  braves  and  squaws,  and  from 
which  Sir  John  had  fled  the  year  before. 
The  house  was  built  in  1760.  It  was  sixty 
feet  long  and  forty  wide,  and  two  stories 
high.  The  walls  were  thick,  and  there  were 
loop  holes  around  the  eaves  through  which 
it  would  be  easy  to  fire  upon  an  enemy 
outside.  There  were  two  stone  buildings 
near  by,  with  loop-holes  in  the  walls.  Although  the  Indians  were  friendly 
to  Sir  William,  he  had  taken  the  precaution  to  make  his  buildings  forts, 
for  there  was  no  knowing  what  might  happen.  Sir  John  had  fled  from 
the  place  the  year  before  with  Brant  and  Colonel  John  Butler,  and  Walter 
Butler,  a  son  of  John,  who  lived  in  a  small  house  down  the  valley. 

The  next  day,  Nicholas  passed  the  church  in  which  Mr.  Kirkland 
preached,  and  where  Bundle  of  Sticks  used  to  listen  to  his  sermons  and 
interpret  them  to  the  Indians.  After  passing  the  meeting-house,  they 
^^^(^^  came  to  a  large  brick  house,  the  residence  of  Gen 

eral  Herkirner,  who  welcomed  them  heartily.  They 
found  the  militia  of  the  country,  nearly  eignt  hun 
dred  in  number,  quartered  there,  for  the  citizens 
knew  that  St.  Leger  was  on  his  way,  and  wculd 
soon  be  in  the  valley,  and  they  had  turned  out  to 
defend  their  homes.  We  shall  hear  more  about  his 
neighbors  by-and-by. 

Beyond  General  Herkimer's  the  soldiers  came 
to  a  place  called  Little  Falls,  where  the   river  has 
worn  a  narrow  channel  through  a  great  ridge  of 
rocks,  over  which  it  leaps,  whirls,  and  tumbles  in  a 
THE  CHURCH.  frightful  manner.      The  baggage  of  the  regimen! 


I 


170 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


and  a  lot  of  supplies  for  Fort  Schtiyler  had  been  taken  along  in  boats ;  but 
here  the  soldiers  had  to  unload  them,  carry  them  past  the  falls,  and  reload 
them. 


THE    MOHAWK    AT   LITTLE   FALLS. 


The  next  camping-place  was  at  "German  Flats,"  settled  by  German* 
in  1720,  where  there  was  a  stone  meeting-house.  The  next  day  they  halt 
ed  at  a  place  called  Oriskany,  where  a  little  creek  joined  the  Mohawk, 
and  where  the  road  ran  through  a  ravine,  once  a  causeway  made  of  logs,  a 
place  which  we  shall  visit  again  farther  on. 

Just  before  sunset,  Nicholas  looked  across  a  field  and  saw  the  fort 
idiich  he  had  come  to  defend  situated  opposite  a  bend  in  the  river.  The 
gates  opened,  and  he  and  his  fellow-soldiers  marched  in,  glad  to  be  at  their 
journey's  end  The  soldiers  in  the  fort  set  up  a  shout  of  joy ;  for  that  very 

afternoon,  the  2d  of  August,  Bundle 
of  Sticks  and  his  Indians,  and  Lieu 
tenant  Bird  with  a  British  flag,  the  ad- 

JiS:  vauce  column  of  St.  Leger's  army,  had 

made  their  appearance,  and  St.  Leger 
was  not  far  off.  At  that  very  moment 
they  could  hear  the  British  drums,  and 
in  a  short  time  the  red-coats  and  Hes 
sians,  and  the  Johnson  Greens  and  To 
ries,  were  seen  coming  across  the  plain 
north-west  of  the  fort. 

•  Colonel  Gansevoort  commanded  the 
fort,  and  had  a  brave  officer  with  him 
Colonel  Willett,  and  about  one  thousand 
men.     They  had  provisions  enough  foi 
STONE  MEETING-HOUSE  AT  GERMAN  FLATS,    six  weeks,  and  plenty  of  ammunition 


FORT   SCHUYLER. 


171 


COLONEL    GANSEVOORT. 


for  the  muskets,  but  lacked  cannon-balls.    He  saw  that  the  fort  was  strong, 
and  was  confident  that  St.  Leger  never  could  make  much  impression  on 

the  thick  earth  embankments.  He 
felt  very  sure  that  they  could  success 
fully  defend  it. 

Colonel  Gansevoort  had  no  flag 
but  soon  contrived  to  make  one  oy 
cutting  up  some  shirts  for  the  white 
stripes,  and  some  flannel  for  the  red 
stripes.  He  lacked  the  blue  for  the 
field  of  stars,  but  Captain  Swartwout 
had  a  blue  cloak. 

"  Here,  take  it,"  said  the  captain. 
Colonel  Gansevoort  accepted  it, 
cut  out  a  large  square  piece,  sewed 
the  stars  and  stripes  to  it,  nailed  the 
flag  to  a  pole,  and  raised  it  above  the 
fort,  and  was  ready  for  St.  Leger. 
That  officer  had  marched  up  in  grand  style  from  Lake  Oneida.  He 
gave  the  Indians,  under  Brant,  the  post  of  honor,  with  the  British  flag  at 
their  head.  Then  came  sixty  Tory  sharp-shooters,  led  by  Captain  Watts, 
then  Colonel  John  Butler  with  his  Tories,  and  Sir  John  Johnson  with 
the  Johnson  Greens;  and  then  the  Eighth  and  Thirty-fourth  British  reg 
iments,  and  the  Hessians,  followed  by  the  artillery  and  baggage.  His 
drums  were  beating  and  colors  flying.  Perhaps  he  thought  to  frighten 
the  Americans ;  but  they  were  not 
so  easily  'frightened. 

A  British  officer  with  a  white 
flag  approached  the  fort.  Colonel 
Gansevoort  sent  out  an  officer  to 
see  what  he  wanted,  and  found 
that  he  had  brought  a  proclama 
tion  very  much  like  the  one  which 
Rurgoyne  had  sent  out  from  Lake 
Champlain,  offering  clemency  to 
all  who  would  lay  down  their 
arms,  but  declaring  terrible  venge 
ance  upon  all  who  would  not. 
The  soldiers  read  the  proclama 
tion,  and  laughed  at  it  COLONEL  MARINUS  WILLETT. 


THE    BOYS    OF    '76. 


The    next 

St.  Leger  got  his  artil 
lery  into  position,  and 
began  to  cannonade  the 
fort.  The  balls  struck 
into  the  earth  -  walls, 


LEGER  8  ATTACK  UPON 
FORT  SCIIU1L.ER. 


some  flew  over  the  Ton 
but  no  soldier  was  harm 
ed.  During  the  day  the 
Indians  crept  up  through 
the  grass,  on  their  hands 
and  knees,  and  wounded 


two  or  three  men ;  but  Nicholas  and  his  comrades  soon  stopped  that  fun. 
They  kept  close  watch  through  the  loop  holes,  and  a  half-dozen  tired  as 
soon  as  they  saw  the  Hash  of  an  Indian's  gun,  and  the  savages  went  back 
quicker  than  they  came. 

While  this  was  going  on.  Colonel  Gansevoort  sent  word  to  General 
Ilerkirner  that  the  attack  had  begun.  General  Ilerkimer  marched  the 
next  day,  the  5th  of  August,  with  his  eight  hundred  men.  The  messen 
gers  started  back  to  the  fort  with  the  news  that  Ilerkimer  was  coming. 
Ilerkimer  reached  Oriskany,  eight  miles  from  the  fort,  before  noon,  and 
halted.  He  was  a  prudent  man.  He  thought  that  if  St.  Leger  knew  he 
waa  on  hi&  way,  the  British  commander  might  get  between  him  and  the 
fort,  and  attack  him  at  a  disadvantage.  lie  had  sent  word  to  Gansevoort 
to  tire  three  guns  the  moment  the  messenger  arrived,  and  he  halted  to 
hear  the  guns,  for  then  Gansevoort  would  act  in  concert  with  him.  If  St. 
Leger  left  to  attack  him,  Gansevoort  would  make  a  sortie  on  St.  Leger. 

But  the  officers  and  men  were  impatient  of  the  delay ;  they  wanted  to 
push  on.  Colonel  Cox  and  Colonel  Paris  urged  him  to  hasten  forward, 

I  O 

1'hey  accused  him  of  being  a  coward.     That  was  hard  to  bear. 

"  1  am  placed  over  you  as  a  father  and  guardian,  and  shall  not  lead 
7011  into  difficulties  from  which  1  may  not  be  able  to  extricate  you,"  Iler 
kimer  replied. 

That  did  not  satisfy  the  impatient  men. 


FORT   SCHUYLER.  173 

"  You  are  a  Tory,"  said  Cox. 

That  was  a  sharp  sting.  Cox  and  his  fellow-colonels  were  next  in  com 
niand,  and  Herkimer  saw  that  to  delay  any  longer  would  have  a  disas 
trous  effect  upon  the  men. 

"  March  on  !"  he  shouted. 

Well  would  it  have  been  for  Colonel  Cox  and  many  of  the  impatient 
men  if  they  had  heeded  the  wise  plan  of  General  Herkimer. 

"  If  we  are  attacked,"  said  he,  "  you  who  accuse  me  of  being  a  cow 
ard  will  be  the  first  to  run." 

The  column  moved  on.  General  Herkimer  made  a  mistake  in  not 
sending  pickets  in  advance,  and  we  shall  soon  see  what  happened  for  want 
of  such  prudence.  The  men  marched  without  order,  not  dreaming  that 
they  might  be  attacked. 

The  Tories  with  St.  Leger  knew  that  Herkimer  was  on  his  way,  and 
St.  Leger  sent  Bundle  of  Sticks,  Butler,  and  Captain  Watts,  with  about 
twelve  hundred  men,  to  surprise  him.  Nicholas,  from  the  parapet  of  the 
fort,  saw  the  Indians  and  Tories  move  down  the  river,  and  wondered 
where  they  were  going.  The  messenger  sent  by  Herkimer  had  not  then 
arrived.  It  was  noon  when  he  came.  He  had  taken  a  roundabout  course 
to  elude  the  Indians. 

"Fire  three  cannon  as  quick  as  you  can,  for  Herkimer  is  on  the  march, 
and  will  cut  his  way  through.  He  wants  a  sortie  made  from  the  fort  at 
once,"  said  the  messenger. 

The  soldiers  gave  a  hurra.  All  hands  were  ready  to  go.  But  a  dark 
cloud  had  been  rising  in  the  west,  and  the  lightnings  were  flashing  and 
thunder  rolling,  and  the  rain  soon  fell  in  torrents.  When  the  shower  was 
over  the' gates  opened,  and  Colonel  Willett,  with  two  hundred  and  fifty 
men  and  a  cannon,  started  out,  moved  rapidly  across  the  field,  and  made 
a  furious  attack  upon  the  Johnson  Greens,  the  British,  and  the  Hessians. 
The  attack  was  so  sudden,  so  unexpected  and  furious,  that  the  enemy  fled 
in  all  directions.  Nicholas  and  his  comrades  gave  a  hurra,  and  rushed 
into  the  Tory  camp.  Sir  John  Johnson  tried  for  a  moment  to  rally  his 
men,  but  soon  found  that  he  must  take  to  his  heels,  or  be  captured.  He 
had  no  time  to  put  on  his  coat.  Nicholas  and  his  comrades  seized  all  the 
plunder  that  was  visible,  then  rushed  upon  the  Indian  camp,  set  fire  to  the 
wigwams,  and  chased  the  Indians  into  the  woods.  In  a  few  minutes,  be 
fore  St.  Leger  could  get  his  troops  under  arms,  they  had  seized  twenty-one 
wagon-loads  of  clothing,  provisions,  and  ammunition  —  taken  five  British 
standards,  all  of  Sir  John's  baggage,  his  writing-desk  and  papers,  and  wero 
back  in  the  fort  again  without  losing  a  man.  They  raised  the  standard  on 


174 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


the  parapet  beneath  the  stars  and  stripes,  so  that  St.  Leger  could  see 
and  hurraed  louder  than  ever. 

General  Herkimer  had  reached  the  ravine  at  Oriskany.  His  men 
were  crossing  the  causeway.  Just  at  that  place  the  road  ran  nearly  south, 
and  there  was  a  hill  covered  with  beeches  and  maples  on  the  west  side 
The  soldiers  were  inarching  without  any  order,  never  mistrusting  that  the 
hill  was  swarming  with  Tories  and  Indians.  Suddenly  there  was  a  wild 
yell,  the  rattle  of  guns,  and  the  balls  came  pouring  down  upon  them.  Col 
onel  Cox,  who  had  charged  Herkimer  with  being  a  coward  and  a  Tory,  fell 
dead.  The  column  was  thrown  into  confusion.  It  was  a  terrible  moment. 
Men  were  falling,  but  no  one  was  to  be  seen.  The  yells  came  from  all 
quarters,  the  bullets  also.  Those  in  the  rear  fled  in  an  instant  toward  Fort 
Herkimer,  leaving  their  comrades  to  light  the  battle  alone. 


BATTLE-FIELD    AT    ORISKANY. 


A  moment  later,  Herkimer,  who  was  on  horseback,  received  a  ball 
through  one  of  his  legs.  He  was  taken  from  his  horse. 

"  Take  off  the  saddle,"  he  said. 

A  soldier  took  it  off,  and  placed  it  on  the  ground  under  a  tree.  The 
brave  man  sat  down  in  it. 

"Now,  fight!"  he  said,  and  encouraged  his  men,  telling  them  to  get 
behind  the  trees.  They  were  surrounded,  and  could  not  escape.  They 
saw  the  Indians  scalping  the  dead,  recognized  some  of  their  old  neighbors 


FORT   SCHUYLER.  175 

among  the  Tories,  and  resolved  to  fight  to  the  bitter  end.  They  saw  the 
brave  old  man  whom  they  had  accused  of  being  a  coward,  with  his  leg 
shattered  and  bleeding,  take  out  his  tinder-box,  light  his  pipe,  and  com 
mence  smoking  as  calmly  as  if  sitting  beneath  the  porch  of  his  old  home. 
That  put  them  to  the  blush.  They  plucked  up  heart,  loaded  their  guns, 
took  deliberate  aim,  and  picked  off  the  Indians  and  Tories  as  if  they  were 
so  many  wolves  and  foxes. 

While  the  battle  had  been  going  on,  deep  and  heavy  thunder  had  been 
rolling  overhead,  and  the  rain  began  to  fall.  Neither  party  could  load 
their  guns  while  it  was  raining.  During  the  shower  Herkimer  re-arranged 
his  men.  He  formed  them  in  a  circle,  told  them  to  take  their  stand  be 
hind  the  large  trees — two  men  to  a  tree.  He  had  noticed  that  the  Indians, 
after  a  soldier  had  fired,  would  rush  up  with  their  hatchets,  and  kill  him 
while  he  was  reloading  his  gun. 

"  One  fire,  and  the  other  keep  watch,"  said  Herkimer. 

The  battle  began  again.     The  Indians  tried  their  old  game. 

A  soldier  fired.  An  Indian  rushed  forward  to  bury  his  hatchet  in  the 
soldier's  skull,  but  the  next  moment  fell  headlong  with  a  bullet  through 
his  own  skull. 

The  Tory  leader  thought  that  he  could  capture  Herkimer  by  stratagem. 
He  sent  one  of  his  companies  to  the  rear,  told  the  men  to  turn  their  coats 
inside  out  to  hide  the  green  facings,  and  come  as  Americans  from  the  fort 
to  aid  Herkimer. 

Soon  there  was  a  cry  among  the  Tories  that  the  Americans  from  the 
fort  were  close  at  hand.  The  turn -coats  came  down  the  road,  breaking 
through  the  Tory  lines.  They  were  close  upon  Herkimer,  when  Captain 
Gardiner  'recognized  an  old  Tory  neighbor,  and  the  Americans  poured  a 
volley  into  the  ranks  of  their  pretended  friends.  So  that  game  could  not 
be  played.  More  than  half  of  Herki trier's  men  were  killed  or  wounded; 
but  still  they  fought  on,  never  thinking  of  giving  in.  They  had  picked  off 
nearly  one  hundred  Indians.  The  Indians  wanted  to  take  scalps,  but  could 
not  get  up  to  the  wounded  without  themselves  being  shot.  Suddenly  a 
panic  seized  them. 

"  Oonah !  oonah !"  was  the  cry  which  the  Americans  heard,  and  in  an 
instant  the  Indians  were  gone.  The  panic  seized  the  Tories,  and  they  too 
fled,  leaving  their  killed  and  wounded.  More  than  two  hundred  of  the 
Indians  and  Tories  had  fallen,  and  more  than  four  hundred  of  the  Ameri 
cans.  The  brave  general  was  carried  down  the  river  to  his  own  home, 
where  he  died  a  few  days  later.  He  had  fought  one  of  the  bravest  battles 
of  the  war,  and  was  victor. 


1T6 


THE   BOYS    OF  76. 


GENERAL    HEKKIMEK  S    HOUSE. 


The  Tories  and  Indians  made  their  way  back  to  camp  to  find  that  then 

baggage  was  inside  the  fort.  It 
was  not  comforting  to  think  that 
they  had  been  defeated,  and  had 
lost  their  baggage  while  absent. 

The  next  morning  a  British 
officer  approached  the  fort  with  a 
flag,  having  a  letter  for  Colonel 
Gansevoort,  written  by  Lieutenant- 
colonel  Billings  and  Major  Frey, 
who  had  been  captured  at  Oriska- 
ny,  in  which  they  urged  Colonel 
Gansevoort  to  surrender,  for  Gen 
eral  Ilerkimer  had  been  utterly 
defeated.  Colonel  Gansevoort  had 
no  idea  of  surrendering,  and  a  few 
days  later  learned  that  the  officers  had  to  choose  between  writing  the  letter 
and  being  shot. 

The  officer  demanded  the  surrender  of  the  fort. 

"  Tell  Colonel  St.  Leger,"  said  Gansevoort,  "  that  I  do  not  accept  a  ver 
bal  summons  to  surrender." 

The  next  morning,  Colonel  John  Butler  and  two  British  officers  ap 
peared  before  the  fort  with  a  flag.  Nicholas  went  out  with  an  officer  to 
see  what  they  wanted. 

"  We  have  a  letter  to  deliver  to  Colonel  Gansevoort,  and  wish  to  be  ad 
mitted  to  the  fort,"  said  Butler. 

"Blindfold  them,  and  admit  them,"  said  Gansevoort. 
The  officers  were  blindfolded.  They  were  taken  into  Colonel  Ganse- 
voort's  dining-room ;  but  before  they  entered,  Gansevoort  had  the  blinds 
closed  so  that  they  could  not  get  a  sight  of  any  thing  outside.  Candles 
were  lighted,  and  the  bandages  taken  from  their  eyes.  Nicholas  stood 
guard  at  the  door  and  heard  all  that  \vas  said. 

Major  Ancram,  the  British  officer,  addressed  Colonel  Gansevoort. 
Colonel  St.  Leger  wished  to  avoid  further  bloodshed,  and  the  only  sal 
vation  of  the  garrison  was  an  immediate  surrender  on  the  honorable  terms 
which  St.  Leger  would  offer.  The  Indians  were  eager  to  march  down  the 
valley  and  massacre  the  inhabitants,  and  could  not  be  restrained  unless 
the  fort  was  surrendered.  There  was  no  relief  for  the  garrison,  for  HerRi- 
mer  had  been  defeated,  and  General  Burgoyne  was  at  Albany.  Colonel 
Gansevoort  and  Colonel  Willett  wrere  satisfied  that  the  speech  was  all  a  lie. 


FORT    SCHUYLER.  177 

If  Ilerkimer  had  been  defeated  and  Burgoyne  was  at  Albany,  why  the 
persistent  attempts  to  obtain  a  surrender  without  attempting  a  siege?  The 
threat  to  let  the  Indians  loose  aroused  the  ire  of  all  the  officers.  Colonel 
Gansevoort  deputed  Colonel  Willett  to  reply  to  Major  Ancram.  Willett 
looked  him  in  the  eye  and  said  : 

"Do  I  understand  you,  sir,  to  say  that  you  came  from  a  British  colonel 
who  is  in  command  of  the  army  that  invests  this  fort?  By  your  uniform 
you  appear  to  be  a  British  officer.  You  come  to  the  commander  of  this 
fort  to  inform  him  that  if  he  does  not  deliver  up  the  garrison,  Colonel 
St.  Leger  will  send  his  Indians  to  murder  our  women  and  children.  You 
will  please  reflect,  sir,  that  their  blood  will  be  on  your  heads,  not  on  ours. 
We  are  doing  our  duty.  The  garrison  is  committed  to  our  charge,  and 
we  will  take  care  of  it.  I  consider  the  message  you  have  brought  a  de 
grading  one  for  a  British  officer  to  send,  and  by  no  means  reputable  for  a 
British  officer  to  carry.  For  my  own  part,  before  I  would  consent  to  de 
liver  this  garrison  to  such  a  murdering  set  as  your  army,  by  your  own  ac 
count,  consists  of,  I  would  suffer  my  body  to  be  tilled  with  splinters  and  set 
on  fire,  as  you  know  has  at  times  been  practiced  by  such  hordes  of  women 
and  children  killers  as  belong  to  your  army." 

The  officer  hung  his  head  in  shame.  He  and  Butler  were  blindfolded 
once  more,  and  they  were  led  out  of  the  fort.  They  had  seen  nothing,  nor 
had  they  learned  any  thing,  except  that  they  had  a  plucky  garrison  to  con 
quer. 

St.  Leger  placed  his  sentinels  around  the  fort  so  that  no  one  could  get 
in  or  out,  and  began  to  dig  trenches.  lie  must  approach  it  by  a  regular 
siege. 

Colonel  Gansevoort  wished  to  communicate  the  situation  of  affairs  to 
Colonel  Schuyler  at  Albany.  Who  would  run  the  risk  of  getting  through 
St.  Leger's  lines  ? 

"  I  will,"  said  Colonel  Willett. 

"  So  will  I,"  said  Captain  Stockwell. 

They  waited  till  ten  o'clock  at  night.  It  was  pitch -dark  and  raining 
when  they  started.  They  crept  on  their  hands  and  knees  through  the  tall 
grass  in  the  meadow,  crossed  the  river  on  a  log,  and  made  their  way  past 
the  sentinels.  A  dog  barked,  and  they  found  that  they  were  close  to  an 
Indian  camp.  They  did  not  dare  to  move — did  not  know  which  way  was 
north,  which  south.  From  eleven  o'clock  till  almost  day-break  they  stood 
there,  not  daring  to  move.  Joyful  sight !  The  clouds  broke  in  the  east, 
and  they  saw  the  bright  morning-star  gleaming  above  the  horizon.  Stealth* 
ily  they  crept  along.  They  heard  the  gurgling  of  the  water  in  the  river, 


178  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

went  down  to  it,  and  waded  in  the  stream,  so  that  the  Indians  could  not 
track  them.  They  reached  a  settlement,  obtained  horses,  and  rode  as  fast 
as  they  could  to  Albany. 

General  Arnold  was  there,  and  started  at  once  with  Colonel  Learned's 
brigade  of  Massachusetts  troops.  The  troops  readied  Little  Falls.  There 
they  found  some  Tory  prisoners,  who  had  been  captured  at  Oriskany.  One 
was  Yost  Schuyler,  a  nephew  of  General  Herkimer.  The  citizens  had 
tried  him  by  court-martial,  and  condemned  him  to  be  hanged  ;  and  now  his 
mother  came  to  Arnold  begging  that  he  would  spare-  her  son's  life. 

"  I  can  not  interfere,"  said  Arnold ;  and  the  poor  woman,  almost  dis 
tracted,  pleaded  still  harder. 

Arnold  thought  he  could  use  Yost  to  great  advantage. 

"  I  will  spare  him  on  one  condition,"  said  Arnold  :  "  that  he  shall  go  to 
St.  Leger,  and  tell  him  that  a  great  army  is  on  its  way  to  relieve  the  fort; 
and  I  will  hold  his  brother  in  prison  as  a  hostage  for  the  faithful  perform 
ance  of  the  service." 

The  brother  was  put  into  prison,  and  Yost  was  glad  enough  to  start  on 
(such  an  errand.  A  friendly  Oneida  went  with  him  to  aid  him.  Yost  hung 
up  his  coat,  and  had  the  soldiers  fire  several  bullets  through  it.  He  put  it 
on  and  started.  He  reached  Bundle  of  Sticks's  camp,  and  ran  into  it  out 
of  breath.  The  Indians  were  at  the  moment  consulting  the  Great  Spirit 
through  their  medicine-man. 

"  The  Americans  are  coming,"  said  Yost. 

"  How  many  ?"  the  Indians  asked. 

He  pointed  to  the  leaves  on  the  trees  and  to  the  holes  in  his  coat.  All 
of  those  bullets  the  Americans  had  fired  at  him.  Just  then  the  friendly 
Oneida  came  upon  the  run,  and  two  more  that  he  had  picked  up,  arid  they 
pointed  to  the  leaves  on  the  trees. 

"  Burgoyne  is  «nt  to  pieces,"  said  one  of  them,  telling  a  big  lie. 

"  Arnold  is  dose  by  with  three  thousand  men,"  said  the  other,  telling 
another  lie. 

The  chiefs  ran  to  St.  Leger  with  the  news,  and  said  that  they  were  go 
ing  home.  They  would  not  stay  and  be  killed.  St.  Leger  made  great 
promises  to  induce  them  to  stay,  offered  them  all  the  rum  they  could  drink, 
but  they  would  not  touch  it. 

"You  said  there  would  be  no  fighting  for  Indians — that  we  might  look 
on  and  see  white  men  fight ;  but  our  braves  have  been  killed.  We  will  not 
stay." 

They  were  gone.  The  Tories  became  panic-stricken,  and  fled.  St. 
Leger  went.  The  Tories  threw  awav  their  arms  and  knapsacks,  and  every 


FORT   SCHUYLER.  179 

thing  else,  in  their  haste;  and  the  Indians  who  had  carried  the  news  pick 
ed  up  the  plunder,  and  kept  crying  that  the  Americans  were  coming,  and 
frightened  the  Tories  almost  out  of  their  wits. 

Yost  ran  a  little  way  with  the  rest,  then  turned  about,  carne  back  tc 
the  fort,  and  told  Colonel  Gansevoort  what  had  happened,  and  the  gar 
rison  rushed  out,  followed  the  fugitives,  overtook  them  at  Oneida,  killed 
some,  captured  others,  burned  their  boats,  and  dispersed  the  motley  crew 
who  had  lost  every  thing,  and  returned  to  tao  fort  laden  with  the  spoils  of 
victory. 


ISO  THE  BOYS   OF  76. 


CHAPTER  X"V. 

BENNINGTON. 

TICONDEROGA  was  taken  ;    St.  Glair's  army  scattered  ;    Burgoyne 
was  pushing  on  to  the  Hudson ;  General  Howe,  with  a  great  arrr>y, 
was  menacing  Philadelphia ;    Colonel  St.  Leger,  at  Fort  Schuyler,  was 
ready  to  sweep  down  the  Mohawk ;  the  Indians  were  killing  and  scalping, 
and  the  people  were  flying  in  terror  before  them. 

The  days  were  dark  and  gloomy,  for  Great  Britain  was  putting  forth 
all  her  forces. 

The  people  of  Vermont  left  their  wheat-fields,  their  homes,  packed  up 
what  goods  they  could,  and  moved  into  New  Hampshire  and  Massachu 
setts.  Some  of  the  citizens  of  Albany  fled  into  the  country. 

"We  are  greatly  burdened  with  people  who  have  fled  from  the  New 
Hampshire  Grants,"  wrote  the  good  minister  of  Stockbridge,  Massachu 
setts,  "almost  down  to  the  Connecticut  line." 

"  The  disaster  at  Ticonderoga  has  given  our  cause  a  dark  and  gloomy 
aspect,"  wrote  Dr.  Thacher  in  his  journal. 

"  Nothing  since  the  war  began  has  created  such  dissatisfaction,"  said 
the  Boston  Gazette. 

In  a  week  an  army  of  nearly  five  thousand  had  been  dispersed,  and 
there  was  only  a  handful  of  men  on  the  Hudson  to  oppose  Burgoyne,  and 
these  were  retreating  to  Albany.  Tents  were  gone,  provisions  gone,  guns 
gone,  courage  gone,  and  an  exultant  enemy  getting  ready  to  move  nn  and 
desolate  the  country. 

No  wonder  that  General  Burgoyne  felt  well.  He  sat  down  and  wrote 
a  letter  to  Lord  George  Germain,  and  this  was  what  he  wrote : 

"As  things  have  turned  out,  were  I  at  liberty  to  march  in  force  imme 
diately  by  my  left  instead  of  my  right,  I  should  have  little  doubt  of  sub 
duing  before  winter  the  provinces  where  the  rebellion  originated." 

The  ministers  at  London  had  directed  him  to  march  to  Albany,  so  that 
he  could  not  turn  aside  as  he  wished  and  march  to  Boston.  He  must  go 
&n ;  but  he  thought  it  would  be  an  easy  matter  to  march  across  the  coun- 


BENN1NGTON. 


181 


try  to  Boston.     He  perhaps  thought  differently  a  few  days  later,  as  we 
shall  see. 

Dodifer  marched  from  Rutland  to  Bennington.  There  he  learned 
that  the  Indians  were  killing  and  scalping  the  inhabitants  at  Fort  Edward; 
that  a  beautiful  girl,  Jane  M'Crea,  had  been  killed  and  scalped.  Her 
rother  was  a  Whig;  but  she  had  a  lover,  David  Jones,  who  was  a  Tory, 
and  had  joined  Burgoyne, 
who  had  given  him  a 

•  o 

lieutenant's  commission. 
The  news  of  her  death 
was  a  terrible  blow  to 
Lieutenant  Jones.  It  is 
said  that  no  smile  ever 
was  seen  upon  his  face 
afterward ;  that  the  gray 
hair  came,  and  that  he 
grew  old  while  yet  young 
in  years. 

On  the  same  day  that 
the  Indians  killed  Jane 
M'Crea,  they  also  killed 
and  scalped  a  farmer, 
John  Allen,  who  lived 
on  the  banks  of  the  Hud 
son,  his  wife,  and  two 
children. 

So  many  had  been 
killed  and  scalped,  that 
General  Gates,  who  took 
command  of  the  North 
ern  army,  wrote  a  letter 
to  Burgoyne,  remonstrat 
ing,  in  the  name  of  hu 
manity,  against  his  per 
mitting  the  Indians  to 
kill  the  unoffending  in 
habitants  : 

"  Upward  of  one  hun 
dred  men,  women,  and 

children  have  perished  by  FLACK  WHERE  JANK  M'CREA  WAS  MURDERED. 


182  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

the  hands  of  the  ruffians  to  whom,  it  is  asserted,  you  have  paid  the  price  of 
blood,"  wrote  General  Gates. 

But  Burgoyne  could  not  control  his  "  gentle  hyenas,"  as  Mr.  Burke 
called  them.  To  kill  and  scalp  was  the  Indian's  mode  of  warfare. 

Though  the  prospect  was  so  gloomy,  the  people  had  no  intention  of 
giving  up  the  contest.  The  Vermont  Committee  of  Safety,  at  Manchester, 
sent  a  messenger  to  New  Hampshire.  The  New  Hampshire  Assembly 
came  together  on  the  17th  of  July,  at  Exeter.  What  to  do  they  djd  not 
know.  It  was  no  use  to  wait  for  Congress  to  act,  for  that  body  was  in  ses 
sion  at  Baltimore.  The  State  must  defend  itself.  There  was  no  money 
in  the  treasury  to  pay  troops  or  to  purchase  provisions.  They  might  issue 
bills  of  credit,  but  who  would  take  them?  They  might  promise  to  pay, 
but  who  would  furnish  beef,  pork,  and  flour  on  their  promises? 


JOHN    LANGDON  S    HOUSE. 


The  farmers  sat  in  silence.  Then  up  rose  John  Langdon,  who  kept 
a  store  in  Portsmouth,  down  by  the  sea.  It  was  a  short  speech  that  he 
made.  This  is  what  he  said  : 

"  I  have  three  thousand  dollars  in  hard  money ;  I  will  pledge  my  plate 
for  as  much  more ;  I  have  seventy  hogsheads  of  Tobago  rum,  which  shall 
be  soid  for  as  much  as  it  will  bring :  these  are  at  the  service  of  the  State 


BENNINGTON.  183 

If  we  succeed  in  defending  our  homes  and  firesides,  I  may  be  remuner 
ated  ;  if  we  do  not,  the  property  is  of  no  value  to  me.  Our  old  friend 
Stark,  who  did  so  nobly  at  Bunker  Hill,  may  be 
safely  intrusted  with  the  enterprise,  and  we  will 
r;heck  the  progress  of  Burgoyne." 

Glorious  John  Langdon  ! 

The  farmers  listened  to  it.  They  were  thrill 
ed  by  it.  With  so  much  hard  cash  to  start  with, 
and  so  much  rum.  that  they  could  sell,  they 
could  go  ahead. 

Before  night  the  militia  of  the  State  was  all 
reorganized,  and  messengers  were  riding  on  fast 
horses  to  all  the  towns  in  the  Merrirnac  Valley, 
with  orders  to  colonels  and  captains  to  march  at         GENERAL  JOHN  STARK. 
once.     One  messenger  rode  westward  to  Derryfield  with  a  general's  com 
mission  in  his  pocket  for  Colonel  John  Stark,  Dodifer's  and  Elijah's  col 
onel  at  Bunker  Hill,  to  take  command  of  all  the  troops,  and  to  do  what  he 
could  to  stop  Burgoyne. 

A  great  day's  work  that,  as  we  shall  see.  Before  the  week  was 
through,  the  men  composing  Colonel  Stickney's,  Nichols's,  and  Hobart's 
regiments,  twenty -five  companies  in  all,  were  on  the  march.  Colonel 
Stickney  had  602  men  ;  Colonel  Nichols,  594 ;  and  Colonel  Hobart,  448 ; 
in  all,  1644.  Each  man  packed  his  knapsack,  left  his  grain,  ripe  for  the 
sickle,  and  started.  They  all  flocked  to  Charlestown,  on  the  Connecticut 
River.  General  Stark  was  there.  Some  of  the  men  he  set  to  work  run 
ning  bullets.  He  had  only  one  pair  of  molds;  but  those  were  kept  in 
use  day  and  night  He  wanted  lead,  and  some  of  the  farmers  brought  the 
clock-weights,  some  their  pewter  spoons  and  porringers,  to  be  melted. 

General  Stark  found  an  old  cannon  at  Charlestown ;  it  was  rusty  and 
not  mounted ;  but  he  obtained  a  pair  of  cart-wheels,  placed  it  on  the  axle, 
and  sent  it  over  the  Green  Mountains.  In  some  places  where  the  hills 
were  too  steep  f  >r  the  horses  to  drag  it,  the  soldiers  laid  down  their  guns, 
lifted  the  wheels,  and  tugged  at  the  ropes. 

Old  men  sixty  and  seventy  years  of  age  turned  out,  and  boys  of  fif 
teen.  Dodifer  was  surprised  to  see  his  younger  brother,  Enoch,  come  into 
camp.  He  was  only  fifteen.  When  the  call  came  for  troops,  Enoch  had 
no  coat,  for  the  family  had  hard  work  to  get  bread  enough  to  eat,  to  say 
nothing  of  clothes.  But  his  mother  soon  had  a  coat  for  him.  She  took  a 
meal  bag,  cut  a  hole  for  his  head,  two  holes  for  his  arms,  cut  off  a  pair  of 
her  stockings,  sewed  them  on  fur  sleeves,  and  with  his  knapsack  and  gun 


184 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


he  joined  the  brave  men  who  were  determined  to  do  what  they  could  in 
defense  of  the  country.  They  stopped  wherever  night  overtook  them, 
kindled  a  bivouac  fire,  eat  their  supper,  and  lay  down  to  sleep  beneath 
the  trees. 


DRAGGING    THli    CANNON. 


BENNINGTON.  185 

General  Stark  arrived  at  Bennington  on  the  6th  of  August.  The  next 
day  General  Lincoln  came  from  General  Schuyler,  who  was  at  Saratoga, 
ordering  General  Stark  to  march  at  once  to  that  place ;  but  General  Stark 
was  under  orders  from  the  State  of  New  Hampshire,  with  liberty  to  atf 
according  to  his  own  judgment. 


NEW    HAMPSHIRE    BOYS. 


Schiiyler  wanted  to  get  an  army  in  front  of  Burgoyne.  General  Stark 
thought  that  he  could  attack  him  to  good  advantage  on  the  flank  and  rear, 
and  would  not  go. 

Burgoyne  had  reached  the  Hudson,  but  before  he  could  move  on  he 
must  have  a  supply  of  provisions  sent  forward  from  Lake  Champlain.  He 
must  have  horses,  oxen,  and  wagons.  lie  wanted  to  mount  the  Hessian 
dragoons,  so  that  they  could  sweep  over  the  country,  and  bring  in  cattle. 
Fortunately  for  him,  the  Americans  had  a  lot  of  flour,  beef,  pork,  cattle, 
horses,  and  wagons,  at  Bennington,  which  had  been  collected  for  his  spe 
cial  purpose.  He  would  send  a  party  to  seize  them,  and  then  march  to 
Charlestown,  down  the  Connecticut  to  Brattleboro',  then  turn  west  and 
join  him  again,  while  Sir  Henry  Clinton  would  come  up  from  New  York, 
and  Colonel  St.  Leger  would  come  down  from  Albany.  It  would  be  a 


186 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


grand  move  and  a  joyful  meeting,  for  by  that  time  the  rebellion  would  be 
pretty  effectually  crushed. 

Burgoyne  sent  Colonel  Ban  me,  a  Hessian  officer,  with  General  Reide- 
sel's  dismounted  dragoons,  a  company  of  sharp-si  looters,  the  best  marks 
men  of  Fraser's  division,  a  battalion  of  Tories  from  Vermont  and  New 
York,  under  Colonel  Peters ;  a  part  of  a  Canadian  regiment ;  the  Hessian 
artillery,  with  two  cannon ;  fifty  chasseurs ;  and  one  hundred  and  fifty  In 
dians — in  all,  between  seven  and  eight  hundred  men. 

On  the  13th  of  August,  Baume  reached  Cambridge,  twelve  miles  west 
of  Bennington,  where  he  surprised  fifteen  Americans  and  captured  five  of 
them,  besides  some  cattle,  which  he  sent  to  Burgoyne,  with  the  information 
that  there  were  eighteen  hundred  Americans  at  Bennington,  who,  he  sup 
posed,  would  retire  on  his  approach. 

General  Stark  did  not  know  that  Baume  was  so  near  him,  for  the  men 
who  had  escaped  from  Cambridge,  when  they  came  into  Bennington,  said 
that  they  had  seen  only  some  Tories  and  Indians.  General  Stark  would 
not  have  the  Tories  and  Indians  prowling  about  the  country  in  that  way, 
and  sent  Lieutenant -colonel  Gregg,  with  two  hundred  men  of  Colonel 
Nichols's  regiment,  down  to  stop  the  plunderers. 

Dodifer  was  one  of  the  party.     It  was  early  in  the  morning  when  they 

started.  They  marched  down  the 
valley  of  a  little  river  called  the 
Walloomscoick. 

Mr.  Van  Schaick  had  a  mill  on 
I  the  river,  and  a  bridge  crossed  the 
stream  close  by  the  mill.  Dodifer 
had  crossed  the  river,  and  was  push 
ing  on,  when  he  saw  an  Indian  down 
the  road  in  the  bushes.  The  next 
moment  a  bullet  came  whizzing 
through  the  air.  He  sent  one  in  the 
other  direction,  and  a  moment  later 
the  guns  were  cracking  all  around 
him  and  the  bullets  flying.  The 
two  parties  had  come  into  collision. 
Colonel  Gregg  ordered  his  men  to 
retreat  across  the  bridge,  and  then, 
seeing  a  great  body  of  the  enemy  down  the  road,  told  the  men  to  break 
down  the  bridge. 

Some  of  the  soldiers  ran  into  the  mill,  and  fired  from  the  windows* 


VAN    SCHAICK  S    MILL. 


BENNINGTON.  187 

others  outside  fired  from  behind  trees.  Dodifer  and  some  others  threw 
the  planks  of  the  bridge  into  the  river,  and  began  to  cut  the  stringers; 
but  before  they  had  finished,  the  bullets  came  thick  and  fast,  and  they 
had  to  run. 

Colonel  Gregg  sent  word  to  General  Stark  of  what  was  going  on,  and 
General  Stark  sent  a  messenger  northward  to  Manchester,  twenty-six  miles^ 
for  Colonel  Warner's  regiment  to  hasten  to  Ben  n  ing  ton.  Having  done  this, 
instead  of  retreating,  he  started  with  all  his  troops  to  meet  Baume. 

The  British  and  Hessians  were  repairing  the  bridge,  and  messengers 
from  Baume  were  riding  to  Burgoyne,  with  the  news  that  he  had  driven 
the  rebels,  and  taken  several  barrels  of  flour  and  some  wagons. 

General  Stark  formed  his  men  in  line  of  battle  two  miles  above  the 
mill;  but  it  was  nearly  night,  and  he  did  not  like  the  position  he  had 
chosen,  and  concluded  to  fall  back  to  his  camping-ground.  It  seemed  to 
some  of  the  soldiers  like  retreating;  but  Dodifer  knew  what  stuff  General 
Stark  was  made  of,  and  it  did  not  trouble  him.  He  felt  sure  there  would 
be  hot  work  before  long. 

Baume  followed  Stark  up  the  valley  to  a  hill  overlooking  the  little  riv 
er,  pitched  his  tents,  and  encamped  for  the  night,  which  set  in  dark  and 
rainy.  The  British  and  Hessians  were  in  their  tents ;  but  the  Americans 
had  few  tents.  General  Stark  had  his  head-quarters  in  The  Catamount 
tavern,  so  called  from  the  figure  of  a  catamount  on  the  sign.  Dodifer 
and  his  brother,  and  a  great  many  other  soldiers,  slept  in  the  meeting-house, 
Some  slept  in  barns  and  sheds,  or  wherever  they  could  find  shelter. 

In  the  night,  Dodifer  heard  some  soldiers  tramping  through  the  mud, 
and  learned  that  they  had  come  from  Williarnstown  and  Pittsfield  and  oth 
er  towns  in  Massachusetts.  There  were  about  one  hundred,  under  Colonel 
Jacob  Symonds :  and  Rev.  Mr.  Allen,  of  Pittsfield,  came  with  them  in  his 
sulky.  He  had  been  a  chaplain  at  Ticonderoga,  and  could  fight  as  well 
as  preach. 

Mr.  Allen  drove  to  the  tavern,  and  hastened  to  see  General  Stark. 

"  General,"  he  said,  "  the  people  of  Berkshire  have  frequently  been 
called  upon  to  fight,  but  never  have  had  a  chance,  and  we  have  resolved 
that  if  you  don't  give  us  a  chance  now,  never  to  turn  out  again." 

"Do  you  want  to  go  now,  in  the  rain  and  darkness?"  the  general  asked. 

"No,  I'm  not  particular  about  that." 

"Well,  if  the  Lord  gives  us  sunshine  once  more,  and  I  don't  give  you 
fighting  enough,  you  needn't  turn  out  again." 

When  Dodifer  awoke  in  the  morning,  he  saw  that  there  was  not  a 
cloud  in  the  sky.  The  air  was  calm.  Not  a  breath  of  air  stirred  the  leaves 


188 


THE  BOYS  OF  '76. 


of  the  trees.     The  ground  was  soaked.     There  were  pools  of  water  in  the 
road,  and  the  grass  was  wet ;  but  the  sun  soon  dried  it. 

Dodifer  took  a  stroll  out  to  the  picket-line,  picking  blackberries  by  the 
roadside,  to  take  a  look  at  the  enemy.  There  they  were  on  a  hill  the 
other  side  of  the  river.  The  Hessians  had  rekindled  their  camp-fires,  and 
were  cooking  their  breakfasts  and  drying  their  clothes.  They  had  thrown 
up  an  intrenchment  on  the  top  of  the  hill.  He  could  see  the  sunlight  re 
fleeted  from  their  cannon.  Down  by  the  bridge  that  crossed  the  river 
were  two  log-houses:  the  Canadians  were  there.  On  a  little  knoll  nearer 
the  east  side  of  the  Walloomscoick  were  the  Tories,  under  Colonel  Peters. 
They  had  thrown  up  intrenchments.  He  could  see  the  Indians  skulking 
about  as  if  to  get  a  chance  to  scalp  a  Yankee.  He  went  back  to  camp, 
cleaned  his  gun,  and  was  ready  for  battle. 

General  Bauine  had  learned  enough  to  make  him  cautious.  lie  con 
cluded  not  to  move  on  without  re-enforcements.  He  strengthened  his  in 
trenchments,  and  waited.  The  river  near  his  intrenchments  is  so  wind 
ing  that  it  almost  forms  the  letter  S — running  west,  then  south,  then  west 
again.  The  hill  on  which  Baume  was  encamped  is  between  the  two  bends. 


BENNINGTON    BATTLE-GROUND. 

[The  British  and  Hessian  intrenchments  were  on  the  hill  in  the  centre  of  the  view.  The  Tories  wert 
by  the  bridge,  at  the  right  hand,  on  both  sides  of  the  river.  The  road  from  Cambridge  is  seen  crossing 
the  hill  at  its  base,  and  leads  eastward  over  the  bridge  to  Benuington.  Colonel  Stickney  attacked  the 
Tories  by  the  bridge,  drove  them  across  it,  and  ascended  the  hill  near  the  fence  running  np  it.  General 
Stark,  with  the  main  body,  Colonel  Nichols,  and  Colonel  Herrick,  all  attacked  from  the  ground  now  cov 
ered  with  woods.  The  second  line  of  battle  was  formed  near  the  three  trees  at  the  left  of  the  view.] 


BENNINGTON.  189 

A  small  brook  conies  down  from  the  north-west,  and  empties  into  the  river 
by  the  upper  bend.  North  and  west  of  the  hill  was  a  dense  forest.  South 
of  the  hill  were  cleared  fields.  The  road  up  which  Baume  had  marched 
from  Cambridge  crossed  the  river  at  the  foot  of  the  hill,  and  continued 
east  to  Bennington  about  two  miles. 

Baume  directed  Colonel  Peters  and  his  Tories  to  cross  the  bridge  and 
throw  up  intrenchments  on  the  little  knoll  south  of  the  road.  He  placed 
the  Canadian  troops  in  and  around  the  log-houses  by  the  bridge ;  the  Ger 
mans  and  British  occupied  the  hill,  while  the  Indians  skulked  in  the  woods. 
Five  hundred  of  Baume's  men  were  disciplined  troops. 

The  men  and  boys  who  had  gathered  at  Bennington  were  nearly  all 
of  them  farmers.  They  had  come  from  the  hay-fields  to  drive  back  the 
invader.  True,  they  numbered  eighteen  hundred — one  hundred  and  fifty 
from  Massachusetts,  a  few  from  Vermont,  and  fifteen  hundred  from  New 
Hampshire.  Baume  had  eight  hundred;  but  he  was  strongly  intrenched, 
had  two  cannon;  his  troops  were  disciplined,  and  had  bayonets.  Military 
men  would  say  that  the  probabilities  were  all  in  favor  of  a  victory  to 
Baume.  But  General  Stark  and  his  men  had  come  to  fight.  General 
Stark  divided  his  forces  into  three  divisions — each  division  to  attack  at  the 
same  moment. 

Noon.  He  selects  Colonel  Stickney  and  Colonel  Hobart,  with  two  hun 
dred  men  from  their  regiments,  to  attack  the  Tories  under  Colonel  Petere 
east  of  the  river.  He  directs  Colonel  Herrick,  with  three  hundred,  to  cross 
the  river  above  the  upper  bend,  where  Baume  can  not  see  him,  make  a 
long  march  through  the  woods,  go  round  north  of  the  hill,  and  approach 
it  from  the  west.  He  directs  Colonel  Nichols  to  follow  Colonel  Herrick 
with  two  hundred  men,  and  be  ready  to  attack  from  the  north.  Colonel 
Nichols  wants  more  men,  and  General  Stark  sends  another  hundred.  That 
leaves  about  one  thousand  with  General  Stark. 

We  see  the  parties  starting  out.  Colonel  Stickney  and  Colonel  Hobart 
leave  the  road,  go  through  a  corn-field ;  and  each  soldier  pulls  off  a  com 
tassel,  and  sticks  it  under  his  hat-band — not  for  a  plume ;  but  they  are  all 
in  citizen's  dress,  and  so  are  the  Tories  under  Peters,  and  the  tassel  will 
enable  them  to  distinguish  friends  from  foes.  Colonel  Stickney  marches 
through  a  piece  of  woods,  comes  out  into  an  open  field  in  front  of  the 
Tories,  to  attract  attention  ;  but  he  will  not  make  an  attack  till  he  hears 
the  rattle  of  Herri ck's  guns  from  the  west. 

Three  o'clock.  It  has  taken  Herrick  three  hours  to  make  his  circui- 
tons  march  through  the  woods.  Stark  and  Colonel  Warner  are  sitting  in 
their  saddles,  with  the  thousand  men  in  line,  half  a  mile  up  the  river, 


190 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


where  Bauine  can  not  see  them.  Nichols  has  reached  his  position  in  the 
woods  north  of  the  hill.  All  are  waiting  the  signal.  There  comes  a  rattle 
of  guns  from  the  west.  Herrick  has  begun  the  battle.  At  the  first  vql- 
ley  the  Indians  take  to  their  heels,  through  the  woods,  down  the  valley. 
They  ha\e  been  in  the  woods,  and  have  discovered  that  they  are  full  of 
Yankees.  Yankees  on  the  south,  Yankees  on  the  east,  Yankees  on  the 
north,  Yankees  on  the  west.  They  have  no  idea  of  being  caught  in  a  trap. 


"Forward!"  It  is  General  Stark  who  issues  the  order.  The  one 
thousand  men  move  through  the  woods,  and  come  out  in  view  of  the  in- 
trenchment.  The  soldiers  can  see  it  swarming  with  British  and  Hessian 
troops. 

"  Soldiers,  there  are  the  red-coats  !  We  must  beat  them,  or  else  Molly 
Stark  will  be  a  widow  to-night,"  says  General  Stark. 

Dodifer  has  been  with  General  Stark  behind  the  rail-fence  at  Bunker 
Hill,  and  knows  that  there  is  to  be  no  boy's  play  in  this  battle. 

"Hurra!  hurra!"  the  soldiers  shout,  making  the  woods  ring,  and  let 
ting  the  British  and  Hessians  know  that  the  battle  is  about  to  begin  in 
earnest. 

They  march  nearer,  and  begin  the  conflict.     Almost  at  the  same  in- 


BENNINGTON.  193 

Btant  there  conies  a  roll  from  Stickney  and  Ilobart,  who  are  confronting 
the  Tories,  and  a  roar  from  Nichols.  On  all  sides  the  battle  begins.  The 
old  cannon  on  cart-wheels,  which  General  Stark  found  at  Charlestown, 
thunders  —  not  hurling  cannon-balls  upon  the  intrenchments,  but  stones, 
such  as  the  soldiers  can  ram  into  it.  for  Stark  has  no  cannon-balls.  The 
two  brass  field-pieces  of  Baume  reply.  The  British  and  Hessians  load  and 
fire  as  fast  as  they  can,  and  the  hill  smokes  like  a  volcano. 

Men  begin  to  drop  in  the  ranks ;  but  nearer  and  still  nearer  to  the 
intrenchments  move  the  lines. 

"  Drive  the  Tories  into  the  river !"  is  the  shout  which  Stickney's  and 
Ilobart's  men  send  up.  They  rush  upon  the  intrench ment,  pour  in  a  vol 
ley.  Hobart  closes  around  it  on  one  side,  Stickney  on  the  other.  The 
struggle  is  short  and  desperate ;  but  the  Tories  suddenly  lose  heart,  and 
flee  across  the  bridge.  Stickney  and  Hobart  follow,  make  a  rush  upon 
the  Canadians  in  the  houses,  and  drive  them  out  and  take  possession. 
Some  of  the  Tories  flee  down  the  road  toward  Cambridge ;  but  most  of 
them  join  Baume  on  the  hill.  Hotter  grows  the  fight,  nearer  and  still 
nearer.  The  battle  now  is  on  and  around  the  hill.  More  deafening  the 
roar. 

Baume  sees  that  the  battle  is  going  against  him.  His  ammunition  is 
failing.  His  men  are  brave.  The  Americans  have  no  bayonets.  He  will 
charge  upon  them.  The  Eeidesel  dragoons  make  a  rush,  but  are  received 
with  a  volley.  Dodifer  fires  into  their  faces;  and,  though  a  line  of  bayo 
nets  is  gleaming  in  his  face,  he  will  not  run.  He  seizes  his  gun  by  the 
barrel,  and  is  ready  to  annihilate  the  Hessians.  The  dragoons  waver,  corne 
to  a  halt,  then  turn  and  flee  to  their  intrenchments. 

"  Charge !  charge !"  The  order  goes  along  the  line.  Officers  shout  it, 
soldiers  shout  it.  With  a  yell,  the  Americans  spring  forward,  sweep  up 
the  hill,  and  rush  upon  the  intrenchments,  to  beat  out  the  brains  of  the 
Hessians  and  British.  They  leap  over  the  breastwork,  seize  the  cannon, 
capture  the  gunners.  The  Hessians  fall  on  their  knees,  throw  down  their 
guns,  hold  up  their  hands.  Dodifer  can  not  understand  a  word  of  their 
language,  but  knows  that  they  are  crying  for  quarter.  Others,  seeing 
that  the  battle  is  lost,  flee  down  the  road  toward  Cambridge,  leaving  every 
thing  in  their  flight. 

What  a  wild  hurra  goes  up!  The  battle  is  won,  and  the  victorious 
troops  disperse  to  collect  the  prisoners  and  the  booty.  The  regiments 
are  all  disorganized.  General  Stark  has  promised  them  all  the  plunder, 
and  each  soldier  is  hunting  for  guns,  swords,  pistols,  or  blankets. 

But  suddenly  they  hear  a  drum-beat,  and  Lieutenant-colonel  Breymaiij 


194:  THE  BOYS  OF  7& 

with  five  hundred  British,  makes  his  appearance.  He  has  marched  twelve 
miles  from  Cambridge,  has  met  the  fugitives,  gathered  them  up,  and  is 
hastening  on  with  his  fresh  troops  to  retrieve  the  disaster. 

"  Fall  in !  fall  in !"  is  the  cry  of  the  Americans.  The  lines  reform. 
Men  do  not  stop  to  find  their  own  regiments,  but  fall  in  where  they  are. 

On  come  the  British,  driving  all  before  them.  And  now  the  battle 
rages  hotter  than  ever.  All  is  confusion  on  the  American  side,  every  thing 
in  order  on  the  British.  Their  volleys  are  regular,  and  roll  like  peals  of 
thunder;  while  each  American  fights  by  himself.  The  British  have  two 
cannon.  The  Americans  wheel  the  two  captured  from  Baume  into  posi 
tion,  and  fire  them.  Step  by  step  Breyman  advances,  and  the  Americans 
fall  back.  Are  they  to  lose  the  battle,  after  all  ? 

And  now  Colonel  Warner's  regiment,  the  one  hundred  and  fifty  men 
who  were  at  Hubbardton,  make  their  appearance.  They  have  marched 
from  Manchester,  twenty  -  five  miles,  have  heard  the  roar  of  battle,  and 
have  come  upon  the  run.  They  are  burning  to  avenge  the  disaster  at 
Hubbardton.  They  fall  upon  the  British  like  a  thunder-bolt.  The  red- 
coated  line  wavers,  breaks,  and  then,  seized  with  a  panic,  all  who  can  get 
away,  flee ;  those  who  can  not,  throw  down  their  arms  and  give  themselves 
up  as  prisoners.  The  escaped  ones  flee  down  the  road,  followed  by  the 
Americans  to  Yan  Schaick's  mill.  There,  in  the  evening  twilight,  the  pur 
suit  ends,  and  the  victorious  soldiers  return  to  the  battle-ground  and  count 
up  the  spoils  of  victory — four  cannon,  nine  hundred  muskets,  swords,  and 
pistols,  and  seven  hundred  prisoners.  Two  hundred  and  seven  British 
have  been  killed  or  wounded.  The  American  loss  is  about  one  hundred. 

The  expedition  which  was  to  supply  Burgoyne  with  horses,  wagons, 
cattle,  and  provisions,  has  ended  in  disaster.  A  thousand  men  have  been 
lost,  and  horses  and  wagons  have  not  been  obtained.  Burgoyne  begins 
to  see  that  it  would  not  be  so  easy  as  he  had  thought  to  march  to  Bos 
ton.  The  farmers  of  New  Hampshire  have  beaten  two  of  his  best  officers 
in  a  pitched  battle.  Without  bayonets  they  have  charged  upon  intreneh 
ments — a  thing  unheard  of.  His  prospects,  yesterday  so  bright,  have  all 
been  changed.  He  sees  that  he  will  have  trouble  before  reaching  Albany. 
He  writes  a  letter  to  Lord  Germain.  This  is  the  beginning  of  disaster; 
he  fears  worse,  but  will  try  and  do  his  duty. 

More  discouraging  news  reaches  him.  An  Indian  comes  from  the 
valley  of  the  Mohawk.  Colonel  St.  Leger  has  not  been  able  to  take  Fort 
Schuyler,  and  is  retreating  to  Canada ;  so  he  will  have  no  help  from  that 
quarter. 


BRANDYWINE. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

BftANDYWINE. 

ELIJAH  and  Esek  were  on  the  march  once  more.  After  the  battle  al 
Princeton,  General  Washington  established  his  quarters  at  Morris- 
town,  in  New  Jersey.  The  winter  had  passed  away,  summer  had  come, 
and  the  army,  now  containing  fourteen  thousand  men,  was  marching 
southward ;  for  General  Howe  had  put  his  army  on  board  the  ships,  and 
General  Washington  concluded  that  he  was  intending  to  sail  south,  ascend 
the  Delaware,  and  attack  Philadelphia.  Such  was  Howe's  design,  who 
sailed  from  New  York  on  the  23d  of  July  with  eighteen  thousand  men. 
He  reached  Delaware  Bay,  and  then  learned  that  Washington  had  erect 
ed  strong  fortifications  on  the  river.  He  spread  his  sails  once  more  for 
Chesapeake  Bay.  It  was  a  long  voyage,  and  it  was  the  25th  of  August 
before  he  reached  the  place  he  had  selected  for  landing,  on  the  Elk 
River. 

During  these  sultry  days  of  August  the  army  was  moving  south-west 
from  Philadelphia,  to  meet  the  British.  Esek  was  marching  with  his  gun 
on  his  shoulder,  but  Elijah  was  on  horseback.  He  had  been  appointed  a 
captain.  ,The  first  week  in  September  the  army  was  posted  on  the  river 
Brandywine,  a  small  stream  which  runs  south,  and  empties  into  Delaware 
Bay  at  Wilmington. 

Elijah  had  studied  surveying  a  little.  He  was  quick  to  see  the  features 
of  a  country,  and  so  had  been  appointed  an  engineer,  to  select  positions 
and  lay  out  intrenchments. 

General  Washington  thought  that,  with  the  Brandywine  for  a  defense, 
he  could  hazard  an  attack  from  General  Howe  with  a  fair  prospect  of  a 
victory.  Howe  would  have  to  cross  the  stream  at  some  ford,  for  there 
were  no  bridges. 

Elijah  rode  up  and  down  the  river  and  saw  all  the  fords,  and  took 
notice  of  the  banks,  the  fields,  roads,  hills,  fences,  and  woods,  for  in  a  bat 
tle  a  fence  or  a  hill  is  sometimes  of  great  value  to  an  army. 

He  began  at  a  place  called  Pyle's  Ford,  and  rode  up  the  east  side  of 


196 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


WASHINGTON'S  HEAD-QUARTERS  AT  BRANDYWINE. 


the  river.     General  Maxwell  was  stationed  at  that  ford  with  one  thousand 

Pennsylvania  militia.     His  troops  were  encamped  on  a  rocky  hill.     The 

^__  next  ford,  a  half  mile  above, 

was  Chad's,  on  the  great 
road  leading  from  Phila 
delphia  to  Wilmington. 

About  two  miles  east  oi 
the  river  was  the  house  of 
Mr.  Benjamin  King,  where 
Washington  had  his  head 
quarters.  General  Wayne 
commanded  a  brigade  at 
Chad's  Ford,  and  Captain 
Proctor,  of  the  artillery, 
had  his  six  guns  planted  to 
sweep  the  crossing. 
A  mile  farther  up  was  Brinton's  Ford,  and  two  miles  above  that  was 
Jones's  Ford,  and  seven  miles  above  Chad's  was  Jefferis's  Ford.  About  two 
miles  north-east  from  Mr.  Chad's  house,  which  was  near  the  ford  on  the 
east  side,  was  a  Quaker  meeting-house,  called  the  Birmingham  meeting 
house,  a  long,  narrow,  one-storied  building  with  board  blinds  on  the  win 
dows.  General  Sullivan,  who  was  in  command  of  the  right  wing,  had  his 
head-quarters  near  by.  His  troops  were  encamped  west  of  the  meeting 
house,  between  it  and  the  river.  Sullivan  had  his  own  brigade,  and  Lord 
Stirling's  and  General  Stevens's.  General  Conway  was  with  Stirling's 
brigade.  There  were  two  French  officers 
with  General  Sullivan:  General  De 
Borre,  who  had  fought  in  Europe,  but 
who  had  been  with  the  army  only  a 
short  time ;  and  a  young  French  noble 
man,  Lafayette,  who  had  just  arrived  in 
America  in  his  own  vessel  to  aid  the  pa 
triots  with  his  fortune  and  his  services. 

Looking  across  the  fields  toward  the 
south-east,  Elijah  could  see  a  little  clus 
ter  of  houses  called  Dilworth  village. 
Riding  north  from  Birmingham  meet 
ing-house,  he  passed  over  a  ridge  of  land 
called  Osborne's  Hill,  and  came  to  a  little  village  called  Sconnel,  whert 
there  was  another  Quaker  meeting-house.  Turning  west  from  Sconnel,  he 


CHAD  S    HOUSE. 


BRAND  YWINE. 


197 


LAFAYETTE. 


came  to  Jefferis's  Ford.    Mr.  Emmon  Jefferis  lived  near  by  in  a  large  stone 
house.     The  merchants  of  Wilmington  had  moved  their  wines,  sugars,  and 

other  goods  to  Mr.  Jefferis's  house 
for  safe-keeping.  It  would  have  been 
better  if  they  had  moved  them  some 
where  else,  as  we  shall  see. 

Elijah's  horse  waded  through  the 
stream,  which  was  only  knee -deep. 
Reaching  the  west  bank,  he  galloped 
south  a  mile  and  came  to  the  west 
branch  of  the  Brandywine.  He  cross 
ed  that  at  a  place  called  Trimble's 
Ford,  and  rode  south,  crossing  roads 
which  led  to  Jones's  and  Brinton's 
Ford,  and  came  to  the  great  road 
leading  to  Wilmington.  At  the  junc 
tion  of  the  two  roads  was  a  tavern 
kept  by  Johnny  Welsh,  as  every  body 
called  him.  He  called  his  tavern 
the  Lancaster  Hotel.  From  there  Elijah  rode  east  to  Chad's  Ford,  about 
three  miles  distant. 

There  had  been  a  good  deal  of  marching  and  countermarching  by 
the  two  armies,  but  General  Washington  had  placed  his  troops  to  cover 
these  fords,  and  General  Howe  was  approaching  from  the  west.  Howe 
reached  Johnny  Welsh's  tavern,  and  halted  to  see  what  he  could  do.  He 
saw  that  it  would  cost  him  a  good  many  men  were  he  to  attempt  to  cross 
at  Pyle's/or  Chad's,  or  Jones's,  or  Brinton's.  He  must  find  a  back  door 
somewhere,  and  get  in  through  that.  This  was  his  plan  :  He  would  leave 
five  thousand  Hessians  under  General  Knyphausen 
to  make  a  feint  at  Pyle's  and  Chad's ;  but  would 
go  with  ten  thousand  up  the  road  to  Trimble's  Ford, 
cross  that,  move  on  to  Jefferis's,  cross  that,  march  to 
the  little  village  of  Sconnel,  and  then  come  down 
in  Sullivan's  rear  at  Birmingham  meeting-house. 
It  would  be  a  long  march — fifteen  miles — but  if  he 
could  carry  out  his  plan,  it  would  be  successful. 

General  Washington  thought   likely  that  Howe      LAFAYETTE'S  HEAD-QUAR- 

•1,1  i    •  I  3       J«  TERS    AT    BRANDYWINE. 

might  be   making  some   such   movement,  and   di 
rected  General  Sullivan  to  keep  a  sharp  lookout  upon  all  the  upper  fords. 
The  llth  of   September   came.     The    morning  was  foggy.     Neither 


198  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

army  could  see  the  other — just  the  morning  for  General  Howe.  About 
day-break,  General  Maxwell  sent  out  his  pickets  toward  Johnny  Welsh's, 
who  quickly  brought  back  word  that  the  Hessians  were  advancing  toward 
Pyle's  and  Chad's  Ford.  The  pickets  fired  upon  each  other.  The  Ameri 
cans  fell  back,  and  Knyphausen  advanced  slowly.  About  ten  o'clock  the 
Hessians  showed  themselves  in  the  fields,  but  did  not  seem  inclined  to 
advance.  Maxwell  concluded  to  invite  them  on,  and  crossed  the  ford. 
Knyphausen  thought  he  was  going  to  be  attacked  in  earnest,  and  opened 
with  his  artillery.  Proctor's  guns  replied.  There  was  sharp  firing  of 
muskets,  and  Maxwell  retreated  across  the  ford. 

All  the  morning  General  Sullivan  kept  a  sharp  lookout  upon  the  fords. 
He  sent  Colonel  Bland,  with  some  cavalry,  across  the  river  at  Jones's  Ford 
to  reconnoitre.  In  a  short  time  a  trooper  came  back,  saying  that  Howe 
was  marching  north  toward  Jefferis's  Ford. 

General  Sullivan  sent  Elijah  with  the  information  to  General  Wash 
ington.  While  Elijah  was  at  Washington's  head-quarters,  another  officer 
came  with  a  dispatch  from  Colonel  Ross,  who  also  was  out  reconnoitring. 
He  had  discovered  the  British  army  marching  northward  toward  Jefferis's 
Ford.  Another  officer  came  from  Colonel  Hazen,  confirming  the  dis 
patches. 

Washington  saw  that  Howe  had  divided  his  army.  He  sent  Elijah 
back  to  General  Sullivan  with  instructions  to  cross  the  Brandywine  at 
Jones's  Ford,  and  fall  upon  the  rear  of  Howe.  He  told  General  Greene 
to  push  across  Chad's  Ford  and  attack  Knyphausen  on  his  left  flank,  while 
he,  with  the  main  army  and  Maxwell,  would  cross  at  Ely's  Ford  and  attack 
Knyphausen's  right  flank.  Sullivan  would  keep  Howe  from  returning  to 
help  Knyphausen,  while  Greene  and  himself  would  grind  the  latter  to 
powder,  and  seize  all  of  the  baggage  which  had  been  left  at  Johnny  Welsh's. 
They  would  quickly  finish  Knyphausen,  and  be  ready  for  Howe. 

It  was  about  noon,  and  the  troops  were  ready  to  move ;  but  now  a 
messenger  came  down  from  the  region  of  Jefferis's  Ford,  sent  by  Major 
Spear,  of  the  militia,  who  said  that  he  had  not  seen  any  thing  of  Howe  in 
that  region.  Another  officer  came  to  General  Sullivan,  who  said  that  he 
had  seen  nothing  of  Howe  in  the  vicinity  of  Jefferis's  Ford.  General  Sul 
livan  did  not  know  what  to  make  of  it,  and  sent  word  to  Washington  by 
Elijah  once  more.  General  Washington  was  also  unable  to  comprehend 
it.  He  thought,  perhaps,  Howe  had  made  a  march  north  to  entice  him 
across  the  river,  and  that  his  army  was  concealed  in  the  woods  above 
Jones's  Ford. 

"  Tell  General  Sullivan  to  wait,"  was  the  answer  Elijah  carried  back. 


BRAND  YWINE. 


199 


PLACE    WHERE    HOWE    AND 

CLINTON    CROSSED    THE 

BRANDYWINE. 


It  was  a  great  mistake  which  Major  Spear  had  made.  He  had  only 
been  toward  Jefferis's  Ford,  not  to  it.  Had  he  gone  a  little  nearer,  he 
would  have  seen  the  whole  British 
army  halted  beneath  the  trees.  Gen 
eral  Howe  and  General  Cornwallis, 
and  the  other  officers,  were  in  Jef 
feris's  house,  having  a  merry  time  in 
drinking  the  fine  old  Madeira  wine 
of  the  Wilmington  merchants.  They 
drank  all  they  wanted,  and  took 
along  a  large  quantity,  and  made  Mr. 
Jefferis  show  them  the  way  to  Scon- 
nel.  It  was  Sunday,  and  the  Quak 
ers  were  holding  a  meeting  in  the 
meeting-house  there. 

Howe  made  a  rapid  march  down 
the  road  to  Birmingham  meeting 
house.  A  Whig  farmer,  Thomas 
Cheney,  saw  the  British,  and  in  an  instant  he  was  on  the  back  of  his  mare, 
and  flying  like  the  wind  down  the  road  to  let  Washington  know  of  their 
approach.  The  British  skirmishers  fired  at  him,  but  the  balls  flew  wide  of 
their  aim. 

Just  about  the  same  time  Colonel  Bland  discovered  the  British,  and 
sent  a  messenger  to  Sullivan  that  Cornwallis  was  advancing  over  Osborne's 
Hill. 

Sullivan's  troops  had  all  been  facing  westward,  but  now  he  had  to 

change  front  and  face  them  north. 
General  De  Borre's  brigade  was  sta 
tioned  by  Birmingham  meeting 
house,  and  from  there  Sullivan's  line 
extended  west  nearly  to  the  Bran- 
dywine.  He  had  hardly  changed 
front  before  the  Hessians  were  upon 
him. 

Mr.  Samuel   Jones  lived    in   a 
house  a  short  distance  north  of  the 
meeting-house,  and   some    of   the 
Americans  took  position  in  his  or 
chard  and  garden,  and,  when  the  Hessians  were  near  enough,  opened  fire. 
It  is  the  beginning  of  the  battle.     A  few  minutes  later  a  terrible  con- 


BIRMINGHAM    MEETING-HOUSE. 


200 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


flict  is  raging. 


Cornwallis  has  between  twenty  and  thirty  cannon.  Sulli 
van  brings  his  into  position,  the  small -arras  join  in,  and  there  is  a  great 
uproar.  Cornwallis  lias  twice  as  many  soldiers  as  Sullivan,  and  the  con 
test  is  unequal. 

General  Howe  is  with  the  troops  east  of  the  road,  and  is  swinging 
them  out  through  the  fields  to  close  in  upon  the  men  in  the  garden  and 
by  the  meeting-house.  The  Hessians  charge  to  drive  them  out  with  the 


bayonet,  but  the  Americans  force  them  back.  General  Sullivan  sends 
Elijah  down  to  tell  them  to  hold  the  position,  that  Washington  will  soon 
be  there  to  help  them ;  but  before  Elijah  reaches  the  spot,  De  Borre's  men 
give  way  and  flee  past  the  meeting-house  in  confusion.  Elijah  tries  to 
rally  them,  but  in  vain.  He  rides  back  to  Sullivan,  who  is  in  the  centre 
of  the  line,  just  in  season  to  see  the  left  give  way  before  Cornwallis,  who 


BRANDYWINE.  201 

has  swept  around  from  the  west.  Sullivan  and  Lafayette  try  to  rally  their 
men.  Elijah  sees  Lafayette  leap  from  his  horse,  sword  in  hand,  and  dis 
covers  that  the  animal  has  been  shot  through  one  leg  and  can  not  move. 
Two  of  Sullivan's  aids  fall.  The  bullets  are  flying  around  him.  The 
centre,  under  General  Conway,  still  holds  its  ground ;  but  the  British  are 
on  three  sides.  It  is  useless  to  attempt  to  hold  the  position  any  longer. 
Of  what  use  is  the  centre  of  a  dam  when  both  banks  have  been  swept 
away  ?  All  flee  across  the  fields  and  through  the  woods  and  pastures  to 
ward  Dilworth. 

A  welcome  sight  greets  the  eyes  of  the  fleeing  soldiers.  General 
Greene  has  been  marching  from  Chad's  Ford  north-east  upon  the  double- 
quick,  and  there  he  is  near  Dilworth,  forming  his  line  and  rallying  the 
fugitives.  The  moment  that  he  heard  Sullivan's  guns,  he  started  Wee- 
dori's  brigade,  and  the  men  have  made  four  miles  in  forty  minutes.  The 
soldiers  are  panting  for  breath,  the  sweat  is  pouring  down  their  cheeks ; 
but  there  they  are  with  their  artillery  in  position  to  sweep  a  narrow  defile. 
Washington  is  riding  along  the  line,  and  Greene  and  Washington  together 
are  bringing  order  out  of  confusion. 

Cornwallis  is  hastening  on.  So  rapid  has  been  his  pursuit  that  his 
lines  are  broken.  He  comes  to  the  defile,  but  his  troops  make  a  sudden 
halt,  for  grape  and  solid  shot  are  plowing  through  their  ranks.  He  forms 
his  lines,  and  advances  to  the  attack  again ;  but  with  the  troops  he  has  at 
hand  can  make  no  impression  on  that  wall  of  men  before  him.  He  tries 
again  and  again,  but  his  troops  have  had  a  wearisome  march;  they  are 
panting  with  the  heat.  They  have  lost  their  energy,  and  it  is  a  terrible 
fire  that  rolls  upon  them  from  that  line  of  men.  From  three  o'clock  till 
sunset  Greene  and  Washington  hold  the  line,  and  Howe  and  Cornwallis 
can  not  force  it. 

While  this  is  going  on  at  Dilworth,  cannon  are  thundering  and  mus 
kets  rattling  at  Chad's  and  Pyle's  Ford.  Knyphausen  has  been  on  the 
watch ;  he  sees  Greene  leave  suddenly.  Wayne  and  Maxwell,  with  two 
thousand  men,  are  left  to  hold  the  fords;  but  he  has  five  thousand.  He 
moves  upon  Chad's  Ford,  plants  his  artillery  to  cannonade  the  other  bank. 
His  column  moves  on.  The  soldiers  go  down  the  bank,  and  enter  the 
water.  Proctor's  guns  blaze  upon  them ;  whole  platoons  drop  into  the 
stream;  the  water  is  crimsoned  with  their  blood,  their  bodies  float  down 
river;  but  before  the  cannoneers  caji  reload,  a  large  number  have  gained 
the  shelter  of  the  eastern  bank,  and  are  ready  fur  an  attack.  Wayne  it- 
waiting  for  them.  But  suddenly  a  messenger  comes  from  Sullivan  an 
nouncing  the  disaster  to  his  troops. 


202 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


No  use  for  Wayne  to  remain  there;  to  do  so  will  be  fatal.  Corn- 
wallis  will  soon  be  between  him  and  Washington.  Knyphausen  is  so  near 
now  that  he  can  not  withdraw  Proctor's  guns.  He  orders  a  retreat,  leaving 


THE  PLACE  WHERE  KNYPHAUSEN  CROSSED  THE  BRANDYWINE. 

the  cannon  to  the  Hessians.  He  hastens  across  the  field  and  comes  up  to 
aid  Greene  and  Washington  in  keeping  Corn  wallis  at  bay.  Maxwell  re 
treats,  and  joins  Washington. 

The  Sabbath  sun  goes  down  upon  the  battle-field.     Howe  has  won  the 

victory  by  getting  in  at  the 
back  door  once  more,  and  all 
because  the  men  who  were 
detailed  to  look  after  the  door 
did  not  go  near  it  to  see 
whether  or  not  Howe  was 
there.  They  only  went  to 
ward  it.  Had  Major  Spear 
not  sent  in  any  report,  in  all 

HOWE'S    HEAD-QUARTERS    AFTER    THE    BATTLE    OF  probability     tll6      battle      WOllM 

BRANDYWINE.  J      £  „ 

have  had  a  far  different  end 
ing,  for  Knyphausen  would  have  been  annihilated,  had  not  the  order  which 
Washington  had  given  been  countermanded,  and  Howe  might  have  lost 
his  baggage  before  he  could  have  retraced  his  steps. 


BRANDYWINE. 


203 


Defeated  once  more.  It  was  a  sad  night  to  the  Americans.  Twelve 
hundred  of  their  number  had  been  captured,  wounded,  or  killed.  Howe 
had  lost  eight  hundred ;  but  his  army  was  much  the  largest.  Washington 
had  lost  his  strong  position,  and  must  retreat.  During  the  night  the  army 
moved  north-east  toward  Philadelphia. 


OLD    PHILADELPHIA. 


The  news  of  the  battle  reached  the  city  before  morning,  and  the  peo« 
pie  were  greatly  excited.  Many  of  the  Whigs  packed  up  their  goods  and 
moved  into  the  country.  Some  of  the  streets  were  almost  deserted.  The 
Tories  remained,  ready  to  welcome  General  Howe, 


204:  THE  BOYS  OF  '76. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

STILLWATER. 

DODIFER  HANSCOM  was  a  lieutenant.  He  had  fought  bravely  at 
Bunker  Hill,  at  Quebec,  Bennington,  and  Hubbardton,  and  was  well 
qualified  to  command  men.  A  few  days  after  the  battle  at  Bennington 
he  marched  south-west,  and  came  to  the  Hudson  River,  opposite  Stillwater, 
crossed  on  a  floating  bridge,  and  came  to  Mr.  Bemis's  tavern.  It  was  a 
large  house  on  the  great  road  leading  from  Albany  to  Canada.  It  was  a 
place  wrell  known ;  for  the  young  people  of  Albany,  before  the  war,  if  they 
took  a  sleigh -ride  in  winter,  usually  rode  up  the  river  to  Bernis's  tavern, 
where  they  were  sure  of  having  a  good  supper  after  a  dance. 

Between  the  tavern  and  the  river  there  was  a  smooth  field.  Behind 
the  house  were  hills  covered  with  oaks  and  pines. 

Dodifer  found  four  or  five  thousand  troops  on  Mr.  Bemis's  farm. 
They  had  just  arrived  from  the  mouth  of  the  Mohawk,  and  General 
Gates,  who  had  succeeded  General  Schuyler,  was  in  command  —  a  small 
man  with  a  red  face.  He  was  Adjutant-general  of  the  Continental  Army  ; 
but  as  there  was  a  great  deal  of  dissatisfaction  with  General  Schuyler,  who 
was  held  responsible  for  the  disaster  at  Ticonderoga,  General  Gates  had 
been  appointed  to  the  command.  It  was  hardly  just  to  hold  General 
Schuyler  responsible  for  what  had  happened  at  Ticonderoga,  and  the  scat 
tering  of  the  army.  He  was  a  brave  officer,  but  unfortunately  situated, 
and  the  people  had  lost  confidence  in  him. 

Colonel  Morgan  Lewis,  the  quartermaster  of  the  army,  was  laying  out 
a  camp  on  the  beautiful  interval  in  front  of  the  tavern,  and  building  an 
intrenchment  to  stop  Burgoyne  from  coming  down  the  road.  While  the 
soldiers  were  at  work  with  picks  and  shovels,  a  young  man  from  Poland 
came  into  camp.  He  had  served  in  the  armies  of  Poland,  and  had  come 
to  America  to  aid  the  patriots  in  preserving  their  liberties.  He  had  called 
upon  General  Washington,  offering  his  services. 

"  What  can  you  do  T  Washington  asked. 

"  Try  me,"  said  the  young  man. 


STILLWATER. 


205 


That  pleased  Washington,  who  appointed  him  an  engineer,  and  here 

he  was. 

He  looked  at  the  camp  and  at  the  hills,  up  the  river  and  behind  the 

tavern. 

"  It  vill  be  easy  for  ze  enemy  to  fire  ze  cannon-balls  into  ze  camp  from 
that  hill,"  said  the  young  Polander,  Thaddeus  Kosciuszko,  pointing  to  a 
hill. 

"  From  that  hill  they  vill  be  able  to  see  all  that  you  vill  be  doing :  they 
vill  aim  ze  cannon  at  your  shoe-buckles,"  he  said,  pointing  to  another  hill. 

Colonel  Lewis  was  astonished.  He  had  not  thought  of  that.  He  saw 
that  the  young  foreigner  knew  more 
about  military  engineering  than  Gen 
eral  Gates,  or  any  body  else  in  the 
army.  But  General  Gates  was  a 
proud,  self -conceited  man,  who  had 
selected  the  site  for  the  camp ;  and  it 
would  not  do  for  Kosciuszko,  or  any 
body  else,  to  inform  him  that  Bur- 
goyne,  with  his  artillery,  would  drive 
the  army  from  that  position  in  a  very 
few  minutes.  But  Major  Wilkin 
son  introduced  Kosciuszko  to  General 
Gates,  who  soon  saw  that  the  foreign 
er  knew  what  he  was  talking  about. 

"  You   will   please   ride   over   the 
ground  around  here,  examine  the  positions,  and  give  Colonel  Lewis  the 
benefit  of  your  advice,"  said  Gates. 

"  If  you  vish  ze  place  defended,  I  must  know  how  many  men  you  have 
before  laying  out  ze  vorks,"  said  Kosciuszko. 

"  About  five  thousand." 

"  Very  veil.     Now  ve  vill  ride  and  see  ze  ground. 

Colonel  Lewis  rode  with  him  up  the  hills  and  along  the  ravines. 

"  Here  is  ze  place  for  ze  breastvorks,  and  there  ve  vill  make  ze  angle. 
Ve  vill  carry  ze  line  up  ze  hill,"  said  Kosciuszko,  selecting  the  proper  place 
for  building  the  line  of  intrenchments. 

The  soldiers  went  to  work  under  Kosciuszko's  direction,  and  in  a  short 
time  had  a  line  of  works  extending  from  the  river,  up  the  hills,  to  the 
house  of  Mr.  Neilson,  nearly  a  mile. 

General  Glover's  brigade  was  stationed  down  by  the  river ;  then  came 
General  Nixon's  and  General  Paterson's.  General  Gates's  head  -  quarters 


KOSCIUSZKO. 


206 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


were  in  Mr.  Chatfield's  house,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  riv 
er.    Beyond  Gates's  head-quarters  was  General  Poor's  brigade — three  New 

Hampshire    regiments    (Colonel    Gil- 
ley's,  Colonel  Scammell's,  and  Colonel 
Hale's),  which   had   fought  at  Tren 
ton    and    Princeton,   and   were    now 
ready   to   do   their   best   in   stopping 
Burgoyne.     Besides  these,  there  were 
Colonel  Yan  Cortlandt's  and  Colonel 
Henry  Livingston's  New  York  regi 
ments,   Colonel    Cook's    and   Colonel 
Latimer's  Connecticut  troops,  and  Col 
onel   Morgan's    riflemen,   and   Major 
Dearborn's  battalion  of  New  Hampshire  troops — three  hundred  and  fifty 
picked  men.    They  drilled  as  light-infantry,  but  were  attached  to  Morgan's 
command ;  for  they  were  nearly  all  armed  with  rifles. 

A  few  days  later,  General  Learned's  brigade  of  Massachusetts  troops — 
consisting  of  Bailey's,  Wesson's,  and  Jackson's  regiments,  and  James  Liv- 
ington's  New  York  regiment — arrived.  With  them  came  Nicholas  Doloff, 
from  Fort  Schuyler. 

General  Arnold  was  in  command  of  the  left,  with  his  head  -  quarters 
near  Mr.  Neilson's  house. 


GATES  8    HEAIJ-QUARTERS    AT    SARATOGA. 


NEILSON  S    HOUSE. 


General  Bnrgoyne,  after  his  success  at  Ticonderoga  and  Hubbardton, 
had  pushed  on  to  Fort  Edward.  He  had  had  a  smart  skirmish  before 
reaching  Fort  Edward  ;  but,  having  reached  the  Hudson,  had  taken  things 
easy.  He  had  scattered  the  Americans ;  the  road  was  opened  to  Albany. 


STILLWATER.  207 

He  must  transport  boats  from  Lake  Champlain  to  the  Hudson,  bring  for 
ward  his  supplies,  and  then  he  would  push  on. 

The  boats  were  loaded  on  wheels  in  Wood  Creek,  which  empties  into 
Lake  Champlain,  and  then,  with  six  horses  in  a  team,  drawn  to  the  Hud 
son,  about  twenty  miles.  It  was  slow  work,  however,  for  the  teamsters 
were  in  no  hurry.  They  were  getting  British  gold,  and  the  longer  they 
could  work,  the  more  money  they  would  have.  The  horses  had  been  pur 
chased  in  Canada,  and  the  Canadians  had  been  shrewd  enough  to  sell  all 
their  old,  knock-kneed,  spavined,  ring-boned  animals  at  high  prices.  They 
had  come  from  Canada  by  land,  along  the  Vermont  shore,  and  had  had  no 
grain.  In  a  short  time  they  were  broken  down. 

Burgoyne  and  his  officers  had  a  mountain  of  baggage — fine  uniforms, 
ruffled  shirts,  camp  equipage,  and  things  good  to  eat.  They  must  have 
wine  at  dinner;  and  there  was  so  much  to  be  transported — boats,  cannon, 
powder,  balls,  tents,  pots,  kettles,  biscuit,  beef,  pork,  sugar,  rum,  rice,  wine, 
trunks,  bales,  and  boxes — and  the  teams  were  so  poor  and  so  few,  that  it 
was  slow  work. 

The  trouble  was,  Burgoyne  and  all  his  officers  liked  to  play  cards  and 
drink  wine  too  well,  not  unfrequently  sitting  up  all  night,  and  consequent 
ly  were  not  fit  for  business  in  the  morning.  From  the  middle  of  July  to 
the  middle  of  September,  Burgoyne  was  employed  in  getting  ready  to 
move  on. 

Meanwhile,  the  Americans  were  assembling.  General  Gates  now  had 
eight  or  nine  thousand  men,  with  a  line  of  strong  fortifications  in  front  of 
Burgoyne.  General  Stark  was  on  his  left  flank.  Colonel  Brown,  with 
some  troops,  captured  three  hundred  British  near  Ticonderoga,  and  a  ves 
sel  containing  provisions  and  ammunition.  He  captured  also  several  can 
non,  and  made  an  attack  upon  Ticonderoga. 

Burgoyne  found  that  he  must  move  on,  and  be  quick  about  it.  On 
the  13th  of  September,  he  built  a  bridge  of  boats,  and  crossed  to  the  west 
bank  of  the  Hudson.  He  might  have  gone  down  the  east  bank,  but  Lord 
North  and  Lord  Germain  had  given  him  strict  orders  to  go  to  Albany,  and 
he  was,  therefore,  obliged  to  cross  the  river.  On  the  18th,  he  went  into 
camp  two  miles  north  of  Mr.  Keilson's  house,  on  Mr.  Freeman's  farm. 

There  was  a  frost  on  the  ground  the  next  morning.  The  grass  in  the 
fields  was  white  with  it.  The  air  was  calm,  and  the  sun  shone  from  a 
cloudless  sky.  The  blue  smoke  curled  up  from  hundreds  of  camp-fires, 
and  rested  upon  the  hills. 

All  through  the  forenoon  Dodifer  could  hear  a  confused  sound  in  the 
British  camp — the  beating  of  drums,  the  rumbling  of  cannon-wheels  and 


208 


THE   BOYS   OF   76. 


baggage -wagons.  Burgoyne  had  a  great  train  of  artillery  down  by  the 
river,  under  General  Phillips.  The  Hessians,  under  General  Reidesel, 
were  there.  The  right  wing  was  commanded  by  General  Fraser,  and  was 
composed  of  the  British  light -infantry,  the  grenadiers,  and  the  riflemen 
under  Colonel  Breyman.  Fraser  had  also  a  regiment  of  Tories  and  the 
Indians. 

General  Burgoyne  directed  the  Tories  and  Indians  to  creep  up  to  a  ra 
vine  where  the  American  pickets  were,  and  begin  an  attack,  which  would 
attract  the  attention  of  the  Americans ;  and,  while  they  were  hastening  to 
that  point,  He  would  make  a  march  with  the  light-infantry  and  grenadiers 
west  through  the  woods,  get  close  up  to  the  breastworks,  fire  his  cannon 
to  let  Reidesel  know  he  was  ready,  and  then,  down  by  the  river,  and  up 
in  the  woods,  the  battle  would  begin  in  earnest 

It  was  a  very  nice  plan,  but  the  American  pickets  all  along  the  line 
;vere  on  the  lookout.     At  half-past  eleven,  those  away  out  on  the  left  dis 
covered  Fraser's  movement,  and  sent 
word  to  General  Gates. 

Colonel  Morgan  and  the  sur 
geon  of  Morgan's  brigade  are  in 
the  quartermaster's  tent.  Colonel 
Lewis,  the  quartermaster,  has  in 
vited  them  in  to  lunch.  His  cook 
has  broiled  some  kidneys,  and  pep 
pered  them  hot.  The  quartermas 
ter  has  a  jug  of  rum.  They  call 
the  jug  Brown  Betty,  and  Colonel 
Morgan  is  kissing  Brown  Betty's 
lips,  when  a  sergeant  enters  the 
tent. 

"  Is  this  Colonel  Morgan  ?"  the 
sergeant  asks. 
"  That  is  my  name." 

"  I  am  General  Arnold's  orderly,  and  am  directed  to  hand  this  to  you," 
says  the  sergeant,  presenting  a  paper. 

Colonel  Morgan  sets  the  jug  upon  the  ground,  and  reads  the  paper. 
"  It  shall  be  done,  or  my  name  is  not  Dan,"  he  says,  bringing  his  big 
fist  down  upon  the  table,  jumping  from  his  seat,  and  running  out. 

Colonel  Lewis  and  Dr.  Potts  wonder  what  it  all  means,  but  soon  see 
that  the  paper  is  an  order  from  General  Arnold : 

"  The  enemy  in  force  is  advancing  to  turn  the  left  of  our  position. 


COLONEL  MORGAN. 


STILLWATEK. 


209 


Colonel  Morgan  will  meet  him  with  his  command,  and  instantly  engage 
him,"  is  the  order. 

Colonel  Lewis  leaps  into  his  saddle  and  rides  np  to  Morgan's  quar 
ters.  He  finds  the  regiment,  between  five  and  six  hundred  in  all — more 
than  half  of  them  New  Hampshire  boys  —  ready  to  march.  Dearborn 


COLONEL  MORGAN S  HOUSE. 


leads  oft';   Major  Morris,  of  New  Jersey,  and  Major  Butler,  of  Pennsyl 
vania,  with  their  battalions,  follow. 

General  Burgoyne  has  laid  a  very  nice  plan  of  attack.  The  Indians 
and  Canadians  are  slowly  working  their  way  up  through  the  woods.  In  a 
few  minutes  they  will  fall  upon  General  Gates's  left  wing.  The  Sixty- 
second  regiment  is  close  behind  them,  and 
General  Fraser  is  following.  He  will  strike 
a  blow  which  will  be  felt ;  but  Colonel  Mor 
gan  is  going  to  make  some  alterations  in 
Burgoyne's  plan. 

Dearborn  forms  his  line,  and  comes  up 
to  the  American  pickets,  who  have  been 
slowly  falling  back.  The  New  Hampshire 
boys  soon  make  it  so  hot  for  the  savages 
that  they  flee  through  the  woods,  followed 
by  the  Canadians.  Morris  and  Butler  file  into  line,  and  Morgan  moves 
on  through  Mr.  Neilson's  wheat -field.  Mr.  Neilson  has  girdled  the  great 


210  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

trees,  and  the  dead  trunks,  blackened  by  fire,  are  standing  thick  in  the 
field,  in  the  middle  of  which  is  the  Sixty-second  British  regiment,  which 
numbers  six  hundred.  The  noon-day  sun  falls  in  the  men's  faces  as  they 
stand  there  looking  south-west.  The  riflemen  open  fire.  Each  man  loads 
and  fires,  taking  deliberate  aim  at  the  line  of  red-coated  men.  The  Brit 
ish  see  the  puffs  of  white  smoke  rolling  np  amidst  the  limbless  trunks, 
and  fire  rapidly,  but  at  random,  and  wildly. 

The  riflemen  charge  upon  the  British,  and  drive  them.  They  follow 
on,  but  soon  come  face  to  face  with  the  Twentieth,  Twenty-first,  and 
Ninth  regiments,  the  grenadiers,  and  eight  cannon.  There  is  a  blaze 
of  fire  along  the  whole  British  line.  The  cannon-shot  crash  through  the 
trunks  of  the  trees,  the  air  is  filled  with  leaden  rain ;  the  British  advance, 
and  the  riflemen,  in  turn,  are  obliged  to  retreat.  The  battle  has  raged 
scarcely  twenty  minutes,  but  during  that  time  terrible  the  slaughter  in  the 
Sixty-second  regiment.  More  than  half  have  been  killed  or  wounded. 

Not  many  of  the  riflemen  have  fallen,  but  they  are  scattered  in  the 
woods.  Colonel  Morgan  blows  a  whistle,  and  its  shrill  notes  ring  through 
the  forest,  sharp  and  clear,  above  ,the  noise  and  confusion.  The  riflemen 
hear  it,  and  flock  once  more  around  their  leader. 

General  Burgoyne,  thinking  that  he  has  put  a  large  part  of  the  Ameri 
cans  to  flight,  advances  toward  the  intrench  men  ts. 

The  three  New  Hampshire  regiments,  under  General  Poor,  were  be 
hind  the  intrenchments  by  Neilson's  house.  They  heard  the  volley  of  the 
riflemen,  and  the  louder  volley  of  the  British  light-infantry,  and  the  roar 
of  the  British  cannon.  They  could  see  the  smoke  of  battle  rolling  above 
the  trees.  Then  came  the  lull,  and  some  of  the  riflemen  were  running  to 
the  intrenchments. 

"Forward!"  said  General  Poor,  and  Scammeirs  regiment  filed  down  a 
path  toward  the  ravine.  Colonel  Cilley  and  Colonel  Hale  followed  with 
their  regiments. 

Dodifer  and  Nicholas  were  together  once  more.  They  could  hear  a 
rattling  fire  down  on  their  right  toward  the  river ;  but  the  Tories  and  Ca 
nadians  there  were  getting  the  worst  of  it,  for  thirteen  had  been  killed, 
and  thirty-five  captured. 

They  met  a  rifleman  who  informed  them  that  Captain  Yan  Swearin- 
gen  and  Lieutenant  Morris,  and  twenty  of  the  riflemen  had  been  capt 
ured  ;  that  the  regiment  was  very  much  scattered,  and  that  the  British 
were  pressing  on.  The  next  moment  Dodifer  and  Nicholas  found  them 
selves  face  to  face  with  the  enemy.  There  were  fifteen  hundred  Amer 
icans  against  three  thousand  British. 


STILLWATER.  211 

There  were  volleys  on  both  sides.  The  New  Hampshire  men  took  de 
liberate  aim,  fired,  and  stepped  behind  trees  while  loading.  The  British 
soon  found  that  they  had  a  stubborn  foe  before  them.  The  men  who  had 
fought  at  Bunker  Hill,  Trenton,  and  Princeton  were  not  going  to  run  at 
the  first  fire.  Not  an  inch  of  ground  would  they  yield.  The  battle  raged 
furiously,  the  British  slowly  advancing,  the  New  Hampshire  boys  standing 
their  ground. 

From  two  o'clock  till  four,  the  three  New  Hampshire  regiments,  with 
Dearborn's  New  Hampshire  battalion,  and  the  few  riflemen  that  Morgan 
had  called  back,  faced  the  whole  of  Eraser's  force.  They  compelled^the 
British  to  give  way,  but  Fraser  rallied  them.  The  British  prepared  to 
charge  bayonets. 

"  Charge !  charge !"  was  the  cry  that  ran  along  their  lines,  and  the 
light-infantry  came  sweeping  through  the  woods  with  a  hurra;  but  the 
New  Hampshire  boys  let  them  have  a  volley  in  their  faces,  and  drove 
them  back  again. 

The  British  officers  were  brave  men.  Several  of  them  were  earls, 
lords,  or  baronets.  Their  reputation  was  at  stake.  They  ran  along  the 
wavering  lines  and  rallied  the  men,  encouraging  some,  swearing  at  oth 
ers;  but  the  men  in  homespun  clothes,  fighting  in  their  shirt  -  sleeves,  and 
some  of  them  without  shoes  or  stockings,  born  in  log-cabins,  and  having 
no  title  of  nobility,  were  just  as  brave  and  noble  as  any  of  the  earls,  lords, 
and  members  of  Parliament  of  England.  A  title  does  not  always  confer 
nobility.  Worth  makes  the  man.  The  New  Hampshire  men  had  no 
thought  of  yielding  the  ground  so  long  as  their  ammunition  held  out. 

The  eight  cannon  which  Burgoyne  has  brought  into  position  are  all 
thundering.  They  add  to  the  uproar,  but  do  very  little  harm.  The  New 
Hampshire  troops  have  no  cannon ;  the  artillery  is  behind  the  breastworks 
at  Neilson's  house.  Dodifer  and  his  comrades  pick  off  the  artillery-men 
one  by  one,  and  shoot  the  horses. 

"  Let  us  take  the  cannon !"  some  one  says. 

"Hurra!" 

In  an  instant,  almost  before  they  know  what  they  are  about,  they  are 
rushing  forward  up  to  the  muzzles  of  the  guns.  The  artillery-men  flee. 
Dodifer  and  Nicholas  seize  a  gun,  and  begin  to  turn  it  round,  but  the  next 
moment  the  light-infantry  are  sweeping  down  upon  them.  They  see  a 
line  of  gleaming  bayonets,  and  they  in  turn  are  obliged  to  run.  The  light- 
infantry  follow  them  with  a  yell.  That  does  not  frighten  the  New  Hamp 
shire  boys,  but  inspirits  them.  They  turn  about  and  meet  their  pursuers, 
and  the  battle  goes  on  hotter  than  ever. 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

General  Reidesel  is  down  by  the  river,  waiting  for  orders  from  IJur- 
goyne.  He  hears  the  din  of  the  conflict  growing  louder  every  moment, 
and  fears  that  things  are  going  badly.  He  sends  an  officer  up  to  see  if  he 
is  wanted,  and  the  officer  returns  with  a  request  for  him  to  hasten  up  to 
support  Burgoyne,  who  thinks  that  he  is  fighting  nearly  the  whole  army 
under  Gates,  whereas  up  to  this  moment  only  Morgan  and  the  New  Hamp 
shire  men  have  taken  part.  Reidesel  starts  with  a  portion  of  his  men  and 
several  cannon. 

The  New  Hampshire  men  have  fired  away  nearly  all  of  their  arnmu- 


EiS 


BATTLE-FIELD    AT    STILLWATER. 


nition,  and  there  is  a  lull  in  the 
strife,  while  they  fall  back  and 
wait  for  more  powder. 

It  is  half-past  three.  Burgoyne  and  Fraser  think  that  they  have  driv 
en  the  Americans,  and  are  reforming  their  lines  to  storm  the  intrench- 
ments;  but  suddenly  the  battle  begins  again.  Colonel  Cook,  with  the 
Connecticut  men,  leaves  the  intrenchments,  moves  forward,  and  joins  the 
New  Hampshire  men. 

The  British  are  on  the  north  side  of  the  ravine,  through  which  flows  a 
little  brook.  The  Americans  are  on  the  south  side,  and  the  battle  rages, 
now  on  one  side  and  now  on  the  other. 

Half -past  four.  General  Reidesel  is  coming  up  through  the  woods 
with  one  regiment,  two  companies,  and  several  cannon.  The  Hessians 
come  into  line  east  of  the  British  light -infantry.  The  artillery  unlimber. 
But  others  besides  the  New  Hampshire  and  Connecticut  men  are  taking 
part  in  the  battle  now.  Colonel  Brooks,  Colonel  Learned,  and  Colonel 


STILL  WATER.  213 

Marshall,  commanding  three  Massachusetts  regiments,  and  Colonel  Van 
Cortlandt,  and  Colonel  James  Livingston,  with  two  New  York  regiments, 
are  in  front  of  Bnrgoyne,  and  the  battle  is  terrific. 

Things  are  going  badly  on  the  British  side.     The  Sixty -second  regi- 

£^i  O  O  •/  •/  D 

ment  is  cut  to  pieces.  Colonel  Anstruther  and  Major  Harnage  wounded; 
a  great  many  captains  and  lieutenants  killed  or  wounded,  and  the  whole 
force  on  the  point  of  retreating.  Captain  Jones  has  lost  thirty-six  of  his 
artillery-men,  and  has  not  enough  left  to  work  his  guns. 

During  a  lull  in  the  battle,  Dodifer  can  hear  the  British  officers  giving 
their  orders  to  get  ready  to  charge  bayonets,  and  then  the  British  come 
through  the  woods ;  but  there  is  a  ripple,  a  roar,  like  a  great  wave  of  the 
sea  breaking  upon  the  rocks,  and  the  British  line  tumbles  to  pieces. 

General  Arnold  is  riding  along  the  American  lines,  encouraging  the 
soldiers,  and  Dodifer  sees  a  stout  man  riding  here  and  there  along  the 
British  lines.  He  is  in  the  thickest  of  the  fight,  encouraging  and  rallying 
the  wavering  troops.  It  is  the  same  officer  that  commanded  the  British 
at  Hubbardton — General  Fraser.  He  has  left  his  home  on  the  banks  of 
a  beautiful  lake  in  Scotland  to  win  glory  in  America.  Dodifer  admires 
his  bravery. 

Six  o'clock.  It  is  sunset,  on  this  19th  day  of  September.  All  through 
the  afternoon  the  battle  has  raged  in  the  fields  and  woods,  and  along  the 
ravine.  Burgoyne  has  not  reached  the  American  intrenchments.  The 
Americans  have  not  fought  behind  breastworks,  but  have  met  him  in  the 
fields  and  woods.  He  did  not  expect  to  encounter  such  stubborn  resist 
ance,  and  is  amazed.  His  troops  have  fought  bravely,  but  have  gained  no 
advantage.  He  has  lost  a  great  many  men,  and  some  of  his  ablest  offi 
cers  ;  and'  now  the  sun  goes  down,  and  the  main  body  of  the  Americans, 
as  twilight  comes  on,  retire  to  their  intrenchments,  to  rest  till  the  morning. 
Not  all  go  back,  for  through  the  evening  small  parties  hang  on  Burgoyne's 
flank,  creep  up  close  to  his  lines,  and  pour  in  a  volley  now  and  then. 

Burgoyne  confidently  expected  in  the  morning  to  strike  the  American 
right  flank  such  a  blow  that  every  rebel  would  take  to  his  heels ;  but  he 
has  made  no  advance,  and  is  perplexed  to  know  what  to  do  next.  His 
wearied  troops  lie  down  upon  the  battle-field  beneath  the  stars,  with  the 
dead  and  dying  around  them.  Little  sleep  do  they  get  with  the  rattling  of 
wagons  here  and  there,  picking  up  the  wounded,  and  the  American  pickets 
firing  every  few  minutes. 

Burgoyne  tries  to  make  himself  think  that  he  has  won  a  victory;  but 
there  is  the  thought  that  it  was  his  object  to  advance,  that  he  has  not  made 


214  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

any  progress,  that  the  Americans  are  ready  to  dispute  every  inch  of  ground 
in  the  morning,  that  the  object  of  the  Americans  was  to  stop  him,  and  in 
that  they  have  succeeded.  He  has  lost  between  six  and  seven  hundred 
men,  and  the  Americans  less  than  three  hundred. 

Dodifer  and  Nicholas  lie  down  to  sleep,  quite  well  satisfied  with  what 
they  have  done.  They  have  fought  the  British  in  the  open  field,  and  are 
ready  to  fight  them  again,  confident  that  they  can  defeat  them. 

The  sun  rises  clear  on  the  morning  of  the  20th ;  the  srnoke  of  the  bat 
tle-field  hangs  along  the  valley.  Dodifer  and  Nicholas  are  ready  for  the 
battle,  or  would  be  if  they  only  had  some  powder  and  balls.  They  do  not 
know  that  there  is  very  little  powder  in  camp — not  enough  for  another  bat 
tle  ;  but  General  Gates  knows  it.  No  order  comes  to  renew  the  attack. 
Burgoyne  does  not  care  to  renew  it.  The  pickets  hear  a  sound  of  axes, 
and  soon  report  that  Burgoyne  is  erecting  breastworks.  Instead  of  attack 
ing,  he  is  afraid  of  being  attacked. 

General  Gates  will  wait  for  more  powder;  besides,  time  is  his  ally. 
Fresh  troops  are  on  their  way,  and  Burgoyne's  provisions  are  growing  less, 
He,  better  than  Burgoyne,  can  afford  to  wait. 


GERMANTOWN.  215 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

GERMANTOWN. 

A  FTER  the  battle  of  Brandywine,  General  Washington  retreated  to- 
•"-  ward  Philadelphia.  The  army  was  defeated,  but  not  discouraged, 
though  the  soldiers  were  in  a  sad  plight.  They  had  lost  a  great  deal  of 
baggage — tents  and  blankets,  and  they  had  barely  food  enough  to  last  from 
day  to  day.  More  than  a  thousand  were  barefoot;  yet  in  a  day  or  two 
they  were  ready  for  another  battle,  and  stood  resolutely  facing  the  British. 

The  two  armies  were  twenty  miles  west  of  Philadelphia.  General 
Howe  determined,  if  possible,  to  get  possession  of  the  city  by  skillful 
manoeuvring  instead  of  lighting  another  battle,  for,  though  he  had  won 
the  victory  at  Brandywine,  he  had  lost  a  great  many  men.  To  accom 
plish  this  object,  he  must  cross  the  Schuylkill  River.  He  marched  north 
east,  as  if  intending  to  cross  at  Swedes'  Ford,  and  approach  the  city  from 
the  north. 

Washington  saw  the  movement,  and  crossed  the  Schuylkill  nearer  the 
city,  to  be  ready  to  face  him.  But  Howe,  instead  of  crossing  the  river, 
marched  up  the  west  bank.  Where  was  he  going?  It  was  plain  enough 
that  he  was  after  the  beef,  pork,  flour,  and  other  supplies  which  had  been 
collected  at  Reading,  away  up  the  river;  and,  to  save  them,  Washington 
made  a  rapid  march  up  the  east  bank. 

Captain  Elijah  Favor  had  a  great  deal  of  riding  to  do.  He  was  kept 
in  advance  of  the  army,  obtaining  information  of  Howe's  movements— not 
an  easy  thing  to  do,  for  many  of  the  people  were  Tories,  and  gave  him 
false  information.  Many  narrow  escapes  he  had  from  capture  by  the  Tory 
troopers  sent  out  by  Howe  to  scour  the  country. 

But  General  Howe,  although  marching  toward  Reading,  had  no  in 
tention  of  going  there.  What  were  a  few  barrels  of  beef  and  flour  ii? 
comparison  with  the  greater  prize — Philadelphia?  He  was  marching  to 
get  Washington  away  from  the  city,  and  had  succeeded,  for  the  American 
army  had  pressed  on  through  Norristown  to  Pottstown.  Howe  was  on  the 
west  bank  of  the  river,  opposite  Pottstown.  Suddenly  he  faced  about, 


216 


THE   BOYS   OF   76. 


made  a  rapid  march,  crossed  the  river  at  Norristown,  and  was  in  possession 
of  the  prize.     He  had  won  it  without  fighting  another  battle.    He  eucamp- 


THE    TUNKER    MEETING-HOUSE. 


ed  the  army  six  miles  cut  of  the  city,  at  Germantown,  while  Washington 
went  into  camp  about  twelve  miles  north  of  that  place. 


THE  CHEW  HOUSE,  GERMANTOWN. 


GERMANTOWN.  217 

The  British  army  was  encamped  in  a  delightful  old  town.  There  was 
a  wide  and  level  street  a  mile  long,  with  houses  on  both  sides,  many  of 
them  more  than  one  hundred  years  old,  with  porches  and  verandas,, 
where  the  German  citizens  were  accustomed  to  sit  in  the  summer  even 
ings  and  smoke  their  long-stemmed  pipes,  and  tell  stories  of  the  father 
land.  Behind  the  houses  were  nice  gardens,  filled  with  cabbages,  which 
they  made  into  sourkrout. 

On  Sundays  the  people  of  Germantown  assembled  for  worship  in  a 
little  old  meeting-house  with  a  low  roof.  They  were  TunJcers — which  is 
the  German  for  "Dippers" — Baptists  who  kept  the  seventh  day  for  Sun 
day.  Some  of  the  people  were  Whigs  and  some  Tories.  Judge  Chew,  who 
lived  at  the  north  end  of  the  street  in  a  large  stone  house,  on  the  east  side 
of  the  road,  was  a  Tory.  He  was  rich,  and  a  judge,  and  rode  in  a  coach, 
with  a  driver  and  footman  in  gold-laced  cocked  hats.  He  lived  in  fine 


^^^iPf^li^-'^   "**£      •****      . 
•^C'^----^*,  '*'     *^>«        "  ^ 


THE   CHEW   COACH. 


style,  with  a  retinue  of  servants.  The  grounds  around  the  house  were 
beautifully  laid  out.  He  had  some  charming  daughters,  and  it  was  a  de 
lightful  place  for  the  British  officers  to  spend  an  afternoon  or  evening. 

The  owner  of  so  fine  an  estate  —  being  a  judge,  a  public  man,  and  loyal 
to  the  king  —  was  greatly  respected  by  General  Howe  and  other  British 
officers.  They  took  care  that  his  property  should  not  be  destroyed,  and 
a  guard  was  kept  about  the  premises.  Judge  Chew  gave  grand  receptions 
to  the  officers  and  all  the  big-wigs.  It  was  delightful  to  the  officers,  after 
their  hardships  in  the  field,  to  be  invited  to  one  of  Judge  Chew's  entertain 
ments,  and  spend  the  evening  in  the  society  of  the  agreeable  young  ladies 
of  the  city. 

The  house  stood  on  the  southern  slope  of  a  hill,  called  Mount  Airy, 


218 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


From  the  top  of  the  hill,  a  road  ran  south-west  to  the  Wissahicon  Creek, 
and  across  it  to  the  Manatawny  road,  which  runs  parallel  with  the  creek, 
and  crosses  it  at  its  mouth.  Another  road,  called  School-house  Lane,  leads 
from  the  Manatawny  road,  below  the  creek,  up  to  the  Germantown  road, 
and  crosses  it — running  north-east.  East  of  Germantown,  it  is  called  the 


RECEPTION    IN    CHEW    HOUSE. 


Limekiln  road.     The  market-house  stands  at  the  crossing ;  but  east  of  the 
Limekiln  road  is  another — the  Old  York  road. 

This  is  the  way  the  British  army  was  encamped :  The  right  wing  ex 
tended  out  to  the  York  road.  The  Queen's  Rangers,  under  Colonel  Simcoe, 
were  there,  and  south  of  them  were  the  Guards.  On  the  Limekiln  road 
was  the  light -infantry,  under  General  Grant;  while  along  School -house 
Lane  was  the  left  wing,  composed  of  Hessians,  under  General  Knyphausen. 


GERMANTOWN.  219 

General  Howe  had  his  head -quarters  about  a  mile  south  of  the  market 
house. 

At  the  north  end  of  the  town,  in  the  field  opposite  Judge  Chew's,  was 
the  Fortieth  regiment,  under  Colonel  Mnsgrove.  He  had  two  cannon  on 
the  top  of  Mount  Airy,  in  the  road  by  Mr.  Allen's  house.  The  pickets 
were  a  short  distance  beyond. 

Although  General  Washington  had  been  defeated  at  Brandywine — 
although  he  had  lost  Philadelphia,  he  was  ready  to  give  battle  any  day; 
but  General  Howe  seemed  to  be  contented  with  what  he  had  accomplish 
ed,  and  made  no  movement. 

Washington  resolved  to  make  a  night  march,  and  fall  upon  Howe.  He 
<vmild  attack  at  four  points  at  the  same  time :  sending  one  column,  under 
Colonel  Forman  and  Colonel  Smallwood,  down  the  York  road,  to  attack 
the  Rangers ;  another,  under  General  Greene,  with  General  Stevens  and 
General  M'Dougall,  down  the  Limekiln  road,  to  attack  the  troops  under 
General  Grant ;  one,  under  General  Armstrong,  to  go  down  the  Mana- 
tawny  road,  cross  the  Wissahicon,  and  attack  the  Hessians  there ;  while 
Washington  himself,  with  Wayne,  Nash,  Maxwell,  Sullivan,  and  Conway, 
and  Knox,  with  the  artillery,  would  move  down  the  main  road,  drive  Col 
onel  Musgrove  from  Mount  Airy,  and  attack  the  Hessians  under  Knyp- 
hausen. 

The  morning  of  the  4th  of  October  was  selected  for  the  attack.  It  was 
seven  o'clock  in  the  evening  previous  when  the  columns  started.  General 
Washington  had  ordered  the  pickets  the  day  before  not  to  permit  any  one 
to  pass  toward  the  city,  and  no  information  of  the  movement  reached  Gen 
eral  Howe.  Colonel  Forman  and  Colonel  Smallwood,  having  farther  to 
march  than  the  other  columns,  started  first.  The  other  columns  started  in 
order. 

The  night  was  dark,  the  road  uneven,  and  the  cannon  rumbled  heavily 
over  the  stones.  Before  morning,  a  thick  fog  set  in.  and  the  column  made 
slow  progress.  It  was  a  march  of  twelve  miles,  and  day  was  breaking 
when  General  Conway's  troops,  who  led  the  column  commanded  by  Wash 
ington,  came  upon  the  British  pickets  north  of  Allen's  house,  who  fled  and 
gave  the  alarm.  The  British  artillery-men  were  asleep  in  their  tents,  but 
sprung  to  their  feet,  lighted  their  port-fires,  rammed  home  a  cartridge,  and 
fired  at  random  into  the  fog. 

The  deep,  heavy  roar  awoke  every  soldier  in  the  British  army,  and  in 
less  than  a  minute  drums  were  beating  down  in  the  field  by  Judge  Chew's 
house,  in  the  light  -  infantry  camp  by  the  market -house,  in  the  Hessian 
camp  south  -  west  of  the  market  -  house ;  while  out  in  the  camp  of  the 


220 


THE   BOYS   OF  7ft. 


Queen's  Rangers  there  was  a  quick  saddling  of  horses.  Nobody  knew 
what  was  going  on  ;  but  a  minute  later  there  was  a  roll  of  small-arms. 

Sullivan  was  behind  M'Dougall.  His  men  jumped  over  the  fence  on 
the  right-hand  side  of  the  road,  dashed  across  a  field,  and  came  to  the  lane 
leading  from  Allen's  house  to  the  Schuylkill. 

South  of  the  lane,  the  Fortieth  British  regiment  was  encamped ;  and 
the  soldiers  were  putting  on  their  cartridge-boxes,  and  the  officers  buckling 
on  their  swords,  when  Sullivan's  men  fell  upon  them.  Some  were  shot 
down  at  once,  some  fled,  others  returned  the  lire. 


"  To  the  house !"  shouted  Colonel  Musgrove  ;  and  about  half  of  the 
regiment  rushed  to  Judge  Chew's  house.  Its  stone  walls  would  make  a 
fortress.  The  British  soldiers  entered  the  house,  and  poured  a  terrible  fire 
from  the  windows  upon  Sullivan's  men,  many  of  whom  were  shot  down. 
The  other  British  soldiers  fled  through  Germantown. 

"  Let  us  leave  these  men  in  the  house  and  push  on,"  said  General 
Reed. 

"  Oh  no.  that  will  never  do.     We  must  not  leave  a  fort  with  five  hun- 


GERMANTOWN.  221 

dred  men  in  it  in  our  rear,"  said  Knox.  "  We  will  bring  np  the  artillery 
and  knock  it  to  pieces." 

"While  doing  it  we  shall  lose  the  main  chance,"  said  Reed. 

"  We  will  leave  it  to  General  Con  way,"  said  Knox. 

General  Con  way  decided  to  wheel  the  artillery  into  position  and  batter 
the  house  to  pieces.  A  messenger  was  sent  with  a  white  flag  demanding 
the  surrender  of  the  house,  but  was  killed  by  a  shot  from  the  windows. 

"  Set  the  house  on  fire,"  said  one. 

"I  will  do  it,"  said  Major  White,  one  of  Sullivan's  aids.  He  was  a 
brave  man.  He  ran  up  to  the  house  on  the  rear,  where  there  were  no 
windows,  with  a  fire  -  brand,  and  held  it  against  the  wood  -  work ;  but  a 
British  soldier  discovered  what  he  was  doing,  ran  down  cellar,  and  fired 
out  of  the  cellar-window,  and  the  brave  young  officer  fell  dead,  with  the 
fire-brand  in  his  hand. 

General  Wayne,  with  his  division,  had  got  a  good  distance  past  the 
house,  but,  finding  that  Sullivan  and  Con  way  had  halted,  came  back  to 
help  capture  the  British.  Knox  wheeled  his  artillery  into  position  to  rid 
dle  the  house  with  shot,  and  killed  some  of  the  soldiers  inside,  but  found 
it  no  easy  matter  to  batter  down  the  walls.  He  would  have  to  punch 
many  a  hole  through  the  edifice  before  the  walls  would  crumble. 

While  this  was  going  on,  General  Greene  was  pushing  down  the  Lime 
kiln  road.  He  had  farther  to  march  than  Washington,  and  it  was  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour  after  the  firing  of  the  cannon  at  Allen's  before  he  fell 
upon  the  light-infantry  east  of  the  market-house.  He  heard  the  roar  of 
battle  through  the  fog,  and  knew  that  the  British  would  all  be  under 
arms.  He  suddenly  found  himself  face  to  face  with  a  body  hastening 
toward  Chew's  house,  and  the  fight  began  in  the  orchards,  fields,  and  gar 
dens.  There  was  a  great  deal  of  firing  at  random. 

Smallwood  and  Forman,  for  some  reason,  failed  to  drive  in  the  Tories, 
and  so  turn  the  right  flank  of  the  British.  General  Howe  was  surprised 
at  the  vigor  of  the  attack  ;  he  was  thinking  of  retreating. 

Neither  Washington  nor  Howe  could  see  what  was  going  on.  Men 
got  lost :  Americans  fell  into  the  h^ds  of  the  British,  and  British  into  the 
hands  of  the  Americans.  In  a  short  time  all  was  confusion.  The  sol 
diers  fired  at  random ;  but  General  Greene  pushed  his  way  into  German- 
town,  and  met  General  Agnew,  of  the  British  troops,  advancing  toward 
Judge  Chew's  house.  Sullivan,  with  Colonel  Armstrong,  commanding  a 
regiment  of  North  Carolinians,  swept  down  toward  Wissahicon  Creek,  and 
drove  the  British  there  back  into  Germantown ;  but  the  fog  was  so  thick 
that  no  one  could  tell  what  was  going  on. 


222  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

"  We  are  surrounded,"  said  some  of  the  soldiers,  hearing  the  firing  at 
Chew's  house  in  the  rear;  and  the  soldiers  in  Sullivan's  division,  just  when 
victory  was  in  their  grasp,  took  to  their  heels.  The  officers  tried  to  stop 
them,  but  in  vain.  The  golden  moment  was  lost,  and  the  whole  army  re 
treated.  They  had  lost  one  hundred  and  fifty-two  killed,  and  five  hun 
dred  and  twenty-one  wounded,  besides  some  prisoners — nearly  one  thou 
sand  in  all.  General  Howe  lost  about  eight  hundred,  among  them  two  of 
his  best  officers,  General  Agnew  and  Lieutenant-colonel  Bird. 

The  American  army  did  not  go  back  to  its  old  camp,  but  to  White- 
marsh,  six  miles  from  Germantown.  The  soldiers  were  not  discouraged,  as 
after  the  battle  at  Brandywine,  for  they  had  attacked  the  British  and  all 
but  defeated  them. 


THE  HIGHLANDS  OF  THE   HUDSON- 


223 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

THE   HIGHLANDS  OF  THE    HUDSON. 

ANTHONY'S  NOSE  is  a  mountain  in  the  Highlands,  on  the  east  bank 
of  the  Hudson,  nearly  eleven  hundred  feet  high.  Its  sides  are  steep, 
and  white  granite  ledges  crop  out  here  and  there,  and  great  bowlders  are 
scattered  at  its  base.  On  the  other  side  of  the  river,  a  little  lower  down, 
rises  Dunderberg,  the  Thunder  Mountain.  Up  beyond  its  rocky  defiles,  in 
the  Catsbergs,  Rip  Yan  Winkle  saw  the  old  bowlers  at  play,  and  drank 
some  of  their  schnapps,  and  had  his  twenty  years  of  sleep,  according  to 
the  old  legend.  These  two  mountains  form  the  gate- way  of  the  Hudson, 
and  through  it  winds  the  noble  river. 

On  the  east  bank,  two  miles  below  Anthony's  Nose,  the  Americans 
erected  Fort  Independence,  and  on  the  west  bank,  opposite  the  Nose,  Fort 
Clinton,  and  just  above  it  Fort  Montgomery.  Fort  Clinton  required  a  gar 
rison  of  about  four  hundred  men,  Fort  Montgomery  about  eight  hundred. 
A  great  iron  chain  was 
stretched  across  the  river, 
and  a  boom  made  of  logs. 
Above  the  boom  were  sev 
eral  ships.  These  were  the 
defenses  of  the  Highlands ; 
and  it  was  believed  that  the 
British  fleet  never  would  be- 
able  to  get  past  them. 

The  month  of  Septem 
ber  came,  and  this  is  the 
way  the  men  stood  upon 
the  chess-board :  Up  at  Sar 
atoga,  General  Burgoyne 
was  trying  to  push  south- 


VI EW    FROM    FORT    CLINTON    (LOOKING    NORTIl). 


ward,  but  was  confronted  by  General  Gates.     In  the  Highlands  was  Gen 
eral  Putnam,  with  nearly  five  thousand  men,  many  of  them  New  England 


224 


THE   BOYS    OF  '76. 


militia,  with  no  British  army  in  front  of  him  nearer  than  New  Vork,  where 
Sir  Henry  Clinton  was  in  command ;  but  he  had  few  troops,  for  General 
Ho\ve  had  sailed  into  Chesapeake  Bay  witli  nearly  the  whole  army,  arid 
was  moving  to  capture  Philadelphia.  General  Washington  was  out  on  the 
Brandywine,  trying  to  prevent  him  from  taking  that  city.  Washington 
wanted  more  troops;  and  as  Sir  Henry  Clinton  had  no  force  that  he  could 
send  up  the  Hudson  to  aid  Burgoyne,  he  sent  an  order  to  Putnam  to  for 
ward  twenty-five  hundred  men  to  Philadelphia. 

The  troops  marched  south,  leaving  Putnam  only  fifteen  hundred  mili 
tia,  besides  six  hundred  farmers  from  Dutchess  and  Ulster  counties,  in  New 


GENERAL    GEORGE    CLINTON. 


York,  who  came  in  to  help  garrison  Fort  Montgomery  and  Fort  Clinton. 
There  was  also  a  small  garrison  in  Fort  Independence.  General  James 
Clinton  commanded  Fort  Clinton ;  and  his  brother  George,  who  became 
the  first  Governor  of  New  York,  commanded  Fort  Montgomery.  They 
were  in  no  way  related  to  Sir  Henry  Clinton.  They  were  brave  men ;  but 
neither  they  nor  General  Putnam  had  any  expectation  of  being  attacked. 

General  Burgoyne  was  in  trouble.  St.  Leger  had  failed  at  Fort 
Schuyler ;  Baume  and  Breyman  had  been  routed  at  Bennington ;  and  he 
himself  had  been  defeated  at  Stillwater.  He  had  heard  nothing  from 


THE   HIGHLANDS  OF  THE   HUDSON.  225 

New  York,  and  wondered  if  the  army,  which  he  expected  would  meet  him 
at  Albany,  had  started,  lie  sent  a  message  to  Sir  Ilenry,  and  the  messen 
ger,  piloted  by  Tories,  had  no  difficulty  in  getting  through  the  American 
lines.  Sir  Ilenry  sent  him  back  again,  with  the  information  that  he  was 
about  to  move  up  the  Hudson,  and  attack  the  forts  in  the  Highlands.  He 
could  do  it,  now  that  General  Robertson  had  arrived  from  England  with 
two  thousand  fresh  troops. 

Sir  Ilenry  sent  spies  up  to  Peekskill  to  find  out  the  situation  of  affairs 
• — Tories  who  had  enlisted  in  the  king's  service,  under  Governor  Try  on, 
the  former  Governor  of  North  Carolina  and  New  York.  One  of  the  spies, 
Nathan  Palmer,  a  lieutenant  in  a  Tory  regiment,  was  discovered  at  Peeks- 
kill,  and  arrested.  A  court-martial  was  called  by  General  Putnam  to  try 
him.  The  general  would  not  have  him  executed  as  General  Howe  exe 
cuted  Nathan  Hale,  without  a  trial.  It  was  proved  that  Palmer  was  a 
lieutenant  in  Tryon's  regiment. 

Governor  Tryon  heard  of  the  arrest,  and  sent  a  letter  to  General  Put 
nam,  claiming  that  Palmer  was  a  British  officer,  and  threatening  vengeance 
if  he  was  executed.  The  threat  did  not  frighten  Putnam,  who  sent  back 
tnis  reply : 

"SiR, — Edmund  Palmer,  an  officer  in  the  enemy's  service,  was  sjaken 
as  a  spy,  lurking  within  our  lines.  He  has  been  tried  as  a  spy,  condemn 
ed  as  a  spy,  and  shall  be  executed  as  a  spy ;  and  the  flag  is  ordered  to 
depart  immediately.  ISRAEL  PUTNAM. 

"P.S. — He  has  been  accordingly  executed. 

The  Tories  kept  clear  of  Putnam  after  that. 

On  Saturday  evening,  October  4th,  Sir  Ilenry  Clinton  and  General 
Yaughan,  with  three  frigates  and  a  large  fleet  of  schooners  and  boats,  with 
five  thousand  men  on  board,  left  New  York,  and  sailed  up  the  Hudson. 
The  wind  was  fair,  the  night  dark.  The  Americans  up  in  the  Highlands 
knew  nothing  of  the  movement. 

On  Sunday  morning,  the  British  were  at  Tarrytown ;  and  before  noon, 
Sir  Henry  landed  three  thousand  men  at  Yerplanck's  Point,  eight  miles 
below  Peekskill. 

Messengers  rode  up  the  river  spreading  the  news.  General  Putnam 
sent  riders  in  every  direction  alarming  the  people..  The  countrymen  who 
were  at  church  hastened  home,  seized  their  guns,  and  started  to  aid  in 
driving  back  the  invaders.  They  came  into  Putnam's  camp ;  and  by 
night  he  had  two  thousand  men.  He  was  sure  that  Sir  Ilenry  intended 


226  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

to  march  to  Peekskill,  and  from  there  get  in  rear  of  Fort  Independence; 
for  the  three  frigates  had  moved  np  and  dropped  anchor  within  cannon- 
shot  of  the  fort.  General  Putnam  sent  an  officer  to  General  James  and 
General  George  Clinton. 

"  Send  me  all  the  men  you  can  spare,"  was  his  order. 

Monday  morning  dawned.  A  heavy  fog  hung  over  the  river,  and 
under  its  cover  Sir  Henry  made  his  next  move.  He  had  no  intention  of 
attacking  Fort  Independence,  but  was  after  other  game. 

The  troops  which  had  landed  at  Verplanck's  went  on  board  the  boats, 
rowed  across  the  river,  and  landed  at  Stony  Point — all  except  some  regi 
ments  of  Tories  under  Colonel  Bayard  and  Colonel  Fanning,  Governor 
Tryon's  son-in-law.  Governor  Clinton  and  his  brother  were  on  the  alert. 
They  suspected  that  the  landing  at  Verplanck's  was  only  a  feint.  They 
remembered  how  General  Clinton,  leading  the  British  army,  had  entered 
the  back  door  at  Long  Island,  and  Major  Logan,  with  one  hundred  men, 
was  sent  up  to  Dunderberg  to  keep  watch.  Major  Logan  soon  sent  back 
word  that  forty  boats  had  crossed  to  Stony  Point. 

Another  party  of  thirty  men  went  out  from  Fort  Clinton,  over  the  hills 
behind  Dunderberg,  on  the  road  leading  to  Haverstraw,  and  suddenly 
found  themselves  face  to  face  with  the  British.  Crack!  went  their  rifles, 
and  the  British  fired  in  return ;  but  the  bullets  fell  harmlessly  around  the 
Americans,  who  fled  to  the  forts,  giving  the  alarm. 

"  The  British  are  approaching  the  forts,"  was  the  message  which  Gov 
ernor  Clinton  sent  to  General  Putnam,  by  a  man  named  Waterbury.  But 
the  man  was  a  traitor.  He  left  the  fort,  secreted  himself,  and  the  next 
day  joined  the  British. 

So  it  came  about  that  on  Monday  afternoon,  while  Sir  Henry  Clinton 
and  General  Yaughan  were  approaching  the  rear  of  the  forts,  along  the 
steep  and  narrow  mountain-roads,  General  Putnam  was  out  on  horseback 
reconnoitring  the  enemy  at  Verplanck's,  wondering  why  they  did  not  ad 
vance,  and  in  utter  ignorance  of  what  Sir  Henry  was  doing,  till  he  heard 
the  rattle  of  muskets  from  the  other  side  of  the  Hudson  behind  Dunder 
berg.  All  the  while  the  two  generals  in  the  forts  were  wondering  why 
Putnam  did  not  send  re-enforcements — little  thinking  that  the  messenger 
was  a  traitor,  and  hiding  in  the  woods. 

Out  on  the  bank  of  a  gurgling  brook,  south-west  of  the  forts,  in  the 
ravine  between  Bear  Hill  and  Dunderberg,  the  British  army  divided. 
Lieutenant-colonel  Campbell,  with  nine  hundred  men,  took  a  narrow  road 
leading  around  Bear  Hill.  He  had  the  Fifty -second  and  Fifty -seventh 
regiments,  a  battalion  of  Hessians  under  Colonel  Emerick,  and  a  regiment 


THE  HIGHLANDS  OF  THE  HUDSON. 


227 


of  Tories.  A  Tory,  who  knew  the  road,  piloted  them.  They  were  to  at 
tack  Fort  'Montgomery ;  but  had  to  make  a  march  of  seven  miles. 

Sir  Henry  Clinton  halted  with  the  remainder  of  the  troops  a  while; 
for  it  was  only  three  miles  that  he  had  to  march  to  get  in  rear  of  Fort 
Clinton.  His  men  rested  beneath  the  trees  till  nearly  three  o'clock,  and 
then  moved  toward  the  fort. 

Lieutenant-colonel  Campbell,  with  the  left-hand  column,  winds  around 
Bear's  Hill,  descends  into  a  ravine,  crosses  a  brawling  stream  called  by  the 
Dutch  Peploap's  Kill,  climbs  another  hill,  turns  east,  and  approaches  the 


BLOODY    POND. 


fort.  Suddenly  a  cannon  blazes  in  front  of  them.  Governor  Clinton  has* 
sent  out  a  cannon  and  sixty  men.  The  roar  of  the  gun  rolls  over  the 
mountains.  The  governor  hears  it,  and  sends  another  cannon  with  one 
hundred  men. 

It  is  an  unequal  contest — only  one  hundred  and  sixty  against  nine 
hundred. 

While  the  British  are  forming,  the  Americans  from  behind  the  trees 
keep  up  a  destructive  fire,  and  the  cannon  roar  again  and  again.  One  of 
the  guns  bursts ;  but  they  keep  up  the  fight  with  the  other  till  the  British 


228  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

charge  bayonets,  and  then  the  gunners,  after  driving  a  spike  into  the  vent- 
hole,  retreat  to  the  fort. 

Sir  Henry  Clinton  is  working  toward  Fort  Montgomery  along  a  narrow 
path.  He  marches  down  the  valley,  and  comes  to  the  shore  of  a  pond— 
Sinnipink  the  Dutch  called  it;  but  since  the  battle  it  has  been  known  as 
Bloody  Pond,  for  on  that  night  blood  flowed  freely  on  its  shores.  Be 
tween  the  pond  and  the  river  the  Americans  have  built  a  strong  abatis; 
and  while  Sir  Henry's  pioneers  are  clearing  a  way  through  it  with  their 
axes,  the  Americans  pour  down  a  deadly  fire.  But  the  Americans  are  few 
and  the  British  many,  and  the  abatis  is  cleared  at  last;  and  Sir  Henry 
with  his  troops  are  ready  to  attack  the  fort.  He  sends  a  white  flag,  and 
the  officer  carrying  it  bears  this  summons : 

"The  garrisons  of  both  forts  must  surrender  within  five  minutes,  or 
they  will  be  put  to  the  sword." 

To  surrender  is  to  yield  their  liberty  without  a  struggle ;  that  were  un 
worthy  of  brave  men.  To  surrender  is  to  go  to  the  old  hulk — the  prison- 
ship  at  New  York — with  all  its  horrors ;  that  were  worse  than  death. 

"  The  forts  will  be  defended  to  the  last,"  is  the  reply  which  Lieutenant- 
colonel  Livingston  carries  from  Governor  Clinton  to  Sir  Henry  Clinton. 

It  is  four  o'clock.  The  three  frigates  have  slipped  past  Fort  Independ 
ence,  and  make  their  appearance  below  the  forts.  The  battle  begins  in 
earnest  now.  There  are  six  hundred  in  the  forts,  when  there  should  be 
fifteen  hundred  to  make  it  an  equal  contest.  Oh,  if  the  troops  under  Put 
nam  were  only  there!  But  the  traitor  is  hiding.  Putnam  hears  the  up 
roar,  but  he  is  too  far  away  to  render  aid. 

In  the  British  ranks  is  a  brave  officer  from  Poland — Count  Grabowski 
He  leads  the  grenadiers  in  a  charge  upon  the  fort,  but  three  bullets  pierce 
him,  and  he  falls  mortally  wounded.  Up  by  Fort  Clinton,  Colonel  Camp 
bell  falls.  Step  by  step  only  can  the  British  gain  ground.  From  four 
o'clock  till  dark  the  battle  rages. 

Night  comes,  and  under  cover  of  the  darkness  the  Americans  flee, 
some  across  the  river,  others  tip  the  bank,  and  some  fall  into  the  hands  of 
the  British.  One  of  their  prisoners  is  the  brave  boy,  Esek  Earl,  who  has 
been  in  so  many  battles.  With  the  other  prisoners,  he  is  taken  to  New 
York,  and  confined  in  the  old  hulk,  the  Jersey,  at  anchor  between  New 
York  and  Brooklyn. 

Above  the  boom  is  a  fleet  of  American  vessels,  but  the  wind  is  against 
them,  and  they  can  not  escape.  The  crews  set  them  on  fire,  push  off  in 
boats,  and  escape  to  the  mountains.  Magnificent  the  scene  on  that  dark 
and  cloudy  night.  The  flames  light  up  the  mountains.  From  the  sides 


THE   HIGHLANDS   OF  THE  HUDSON. 


229 


of  the  vessels  belch  forth  sheets  of  flame,  as  the  shotted  guns  become  heat 
ed;  and  then,  as  the  magazines  explode,  great  columns  of  flame  shoot 
upward,  illumining  momentarily  all  the  surrounding  scene,  and  raining 
down  a  shower  of  golden  light  as  the  burning  fragments  fall  into  the 


aver. 


BURNING   THE    SHIPS. 


One  hundred  cannon  have  been  lost ;  three  hundred  men  have  been 
killed,  wounded,  or  taken  prisoners.  An  immense  amount  of  powder  has 
been  captured,  besides  other  supplies.  The  forts  are  gone ;  the  great  chain 
is  broken. 

On  this  night  of  October  6th  all  obstructions  are  removed,  and  Sir 
Henry  Clinton,  with  his  army  of  nearly  four  thousand  men,  may  move  on 
to  Albany  to  aid  Burgoyue ;  but  he  is  in  no  hurry.  Is  it  because  he  is 
well  satisfied  with  what  he  has  accomplished  ?  In  twenty-four  hours  he 
might  be  in  possession  of  Albany,  and  moving  on  to  Saratoga,  and  the 
army  under  Gates  would  be  scattered  right  and  left,  and  the  grand  plao 
thought  out  by  Burgoyne  accomplished.  Why  does  Sir  Henry  wait  a 
week  before  sending  General  Yaughan  up  to  Esopus  and  Kingston,  and 
then  only  to  act  the  part  of  a  marauder  in  burning  those  places?  Who 
can  tell  ?  It  is  one  of  the  mysteries  of  history.  If  he  were,  on  this  Mon- 


230 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


day  night,  to  push  on,  wind  and  tide  favoring,  on  Wednesday  he  might  be 
in  Albany,  and  in  possession  of  Gates's  supplies.  Such  a  movement  would 
force  Gates  to  leave  his  position  in  front  of  Burgoyne.  The  relief  would 
be  timely. 

If  to  the  Americans  the  night  of  the  4th  at  Germantown,  and  the 
night  of  the  6th  at  the  base  of  the  Dunderberg,  are  hours  of  gloom  and 
despondency,  the  night  of  the  7th  shall  be  one  of  hope  upon  the  upper 
Hudson.  If  Sir  Henry  Clinton  were  to  push  on,  he  might  even  now  turn 
the  tide  setting  against  Burgoyne.  But  he  lingers,  and  the  opportunity 
passes,  never  to  return. 

Esek  is  in  the  old  prison-ship.  Oh,  the  horrors  of  the  place !  It  is 
crowded  with  men.  Some  are  dying  with  fever,  some  with  consumption. 
All  are  starving.  They  have  little  to  eat,  and  that  not  fit  to  feed  swine. 
The  beef  is  tainted,  their  bread  full  of  bugs  and  worms.  They  are  cov 
ered  with  vermin.  They  are  in  rags.  The  air  is  reeking  with  pestilence. 
Their  cheeks  grow  thin  and  pale.  They  die  like  sheep,  and  are  borne  out 
and  tumbled  into  a  trench  on  the  Long.  Island  shore.  The  officer  in  com 
mand  is  coarse  and  brutal.  Humanity  has  fled  from  his  bosom.  General 
Clinton,  as  General  Howe  did  before  him,  permits  it  all. 


THE    PRISON-SHIP    "JERSEY. 


Esek  tried  to  keep  up  a  brave  heart,  but  his  strength  began  to  fail.  He 
loathed  the  food.  Sometimes  the  bread  was  made  of  bran,  or  moldj 
meal.  The  meat  was  so  foul  that  he  could  not  taste  it.  He  had  no  blank 
et,  but  was  obliged  to  sleep  on  the  bare  deck.  His  clothes  were  only 
rags.  No  mother  near  to  help  him ;  no  one  to  comfort  him :  strength  go 
ing,  life  going,  hope  going  day  by  day. 

Gone  at  last.  Out  to  the  trench  they  bear  him,  and  lay  him  with  the 
others.  So  the  brave  boy  gives  his  life  to  his  country. 


SARATOGA.  231 


CHAPTER  XX. 

SARATOGA. 

THE  golden  opportunity  had  passed  away.  The  day  after  the  Battle  of 
Hubbardton,  Burgoyne,  if  he  had  pressed  on  with  what  supplies  he 
could  carry,  might  have  reached  Albany  without  much  opposition.  The 
few  dispirited  troops  under  Schuyler  would  have  been  swept  away  like 
chaff  before  the  wind ;  but  now  an  army  larger  than  his  own,  securely  in 
trenched,  blocked  his  way.  General  Stark  and  the  men  of  New  Hamp 
shire  had  given  him  his  first  staggering  blow  at  Bennington ;  and  now  he 
had  received  another  blow,  squarely  in  the  face,  mainly  from  New  Hamp 
shire  men,  the  men  through  whose  country  he  thought,  when  at  Ticonde^ 
roga,  he  could  march  to  Boston.  Burgoyne  received  startling  news  from 
the  North — that  five  hundred  New  England  militia,  on  the  night  of  the  25th 
of  September,  in  the  midst  of  a  furious  storm,  had  captured  two  hundred 
bateaux,  an  armed  sloop,  several  gun -boats,  provisions,  ammunition,  and 
two  hundred  and  ninety -three  prisoners  at  Ticonderoga.  They  had  re 
taken  Mount  Defiance,  and  only  wanted  heavy  artillery  to  force  the  gar 
rison  in  the  fort  to  surrender.  So  his  communication  with  Canada  was 
cut  off. 

On  the  29th  of  September,  General  Lincoln,  with  two  thousand  fresh 
troops  from  New  England,  arrived  at  Saratoga.  During  all  these  days 
Dodifer  and  Nicholas  were  hard  at  work  building  forts  and  intrench- 
ments,  and  cutting  down  trees.  If  there  was  a  strong  line  on  the  day  of 
battle,  there  was  one  far  stronger  now. 

The  British  soldiers  were  hard  at  work.  Down  by  the  river  in  front 
of  his  camp,  Burgoyne  built  a  strong  breastwork,  and  planted  his  cannon 
behind  it.  His  camp  was  on  a  pine  plain,  and  he  carried  the  breastwork 
across  it  toward  the  south,  then  it  curved  and  ran  north-west,  inclosing  the 
field  on  Mr.  Freeman's  farm.  North-west  of  Mr.  Freeman's  half  a  mile, 
on  a  hill,  the  Hessians,  under  Colonel  Breyman,  threw  up  forts  and  breast 
works. 

The  Indians  began  to  leave  Burgoyne.     They  could  see  that  the  battle 


232  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

had  gone  against  him,  and  they  found  that,  instead  of  taking  scalps,  their 
own  scalps  were  in  danger. 

Every  night  the  pickets  fired  at  each  other.  One  night  a  party  of 
farmers  came  into  camp  and  wanted  a  frolic.  One  of  them  took  a  trump 
et,  and  the  others,  about  twenty  of  them,  with  their  guns,  crept  down  close 
to  the  British  lines.  The  man  with  the  trumpet  blew  it  as  loud  as  he 
could,  and  the  others  set  up  a  fearful  yell. 

"  Surrender,  or  you  are  dead  men  !"  they  shouted ;  and  the  frightened 
sentinels  threw  down  their  guns  and  gave  themselves  up,  thinking  that  the 
whole  army  was  upon  them,  and  the  twenty  citizens  came  into  camp  with 
their  captives. 

General  Burgoyne's  hopes  revived,  for  a  messenger  had  reached  him 
from  New  York  with  a  letter  from  Sir  Henry  Clinton.  It  was  dated  Sep 
tember  10th.  Sir  Henry  said  that  he  should  go  up  the  Hudson  and  at 
tack  Fort  Clinton  and  Fort  Montgomery,  in  the  Highlands,  the  20th  of 
September. 

Burgoyne  expected  to  see  Gates  sending  off  half  his  army  southward, 
but,  instead  of  that,  Gates  was  receiving  more  troops  every  day.  It  seem 
ed  as  if  all  New  England  were  on  the  march  toward  Saratoga.  Burgoyne, 
not  disheartened,  sent  several  messengers  by  different  routes  southward  with 
letters  to  Sir  Henry,  telling  him  to  hasten  to  Albany;  that  he  had  provisions 
enough  to  last  till  the  12th  of  October.  But  on  the  1st  of  the  month  the 
British  soldiers  had  to  get  along  with  only  half  as  much  food  as  they  had 
been  receiving.  Although  the  soldiers  were  on  short  rations,  General  Bur 
goyne  and  his  generals  sat  down  to  good  dinners;  and,  after  dinner,  drank 
the  health  of  the  king,  the  ministry,  their  friends,  and  success  to  the  ex 
pedition.  Many  of  the  officers  had  their  wives  with  them;  and  although 
the  Americans  were  closing  around  them,  they  laughed,  sung,  played  cards, 
and  drank  each  other's  health  as  if  they  were  out  on  a  grand  picnic.  Gen 
eral  Keidesel  had  his  wife  and  children  along  with  him.  His  wife  was  a 
baroness,  a  good  and  noble  woman.  The  nights  were  cool,  and  there  were 
rainy  days,  bringing  discomfort.  One  of  the  English  officers  had  a  house 
built  for  her,  with  a  chimney  and  fire-place,  as  if  the  army  had  settled 
down  there  for  the  winter ! 

General  Burgoyne  wanted  forage  for  his  horses.  There  was  a  field  of 
oats  out  beyond  Breyman's  camp  toward  the  west,  but  Morgan  with  his 
riflemen  were  just  beyond  it,  and  to  get  the  oats  a  large  force  must  be  sent 
out. 

It  was  the  7th  of  October,  a  beautiful  morning.  The  Baroness  Reide- 
sel  thought  that  she  must  give  a  dinner  party  to  Burgoyne  and  his  officers, 


SARATOGA.  233 

and  invited  them  to  dine  with  her  in  the  afternoon.  They  accepted  the 
invitation.  They  would  return  from  the  foraging  expedition  in  season. 

Soon  after  breakfast,  General  Burgoyne,  with  General  Fraser,  General 
Phillips,  and  General  Reidesel,  started  with  about  fifteen  hundred  men  and 
several  cannon.  They  took  a  path  that  led  south-west  to  the  field  about 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  distant.  They  reached  it,  and  the  soldiers  formed 
in  line,  and  the  forage  men,  with  their  sickles  and  scythes,  began  to  gather 
the  oats.  Some  of  the  officers  climbed  upon  the  top  of  a  house  and  looked 
southward  to  see  what  they  could  discover.  General  Burgoyne  wanted  to 
know  just  how  the  American  left  was  situated,  and  while  the  foragers 
were  loading  their  carts  he  concluded  to  push  on  and  find  out.  He  sent 
the  Indians  and  Canadians  in  advance. 

Nicholas  was  doing  picket  duty.  He  heard  a  noise  partly  behind  him, 
and  saw  the  Indians  creeping  toward  him  from  the  west.  He  fired  at  the 
nearest  Indian,  and  then  the  guns  began  to  rattle.  The  Indians  came  on 
with  a  whoop,  and  Nicholas  and  the  other  pickets  had  to  take  to  their 
heels;  but  not  till  they  had  discovered  that  behind  the  Indians  were  the 
grenadiers. 

The  alarm  had  been  given,  and  before  they  reached  the  lines  Nicholas 
could  hear  the  drums  beating  the  long  roll,  and  the  shouts  of  the  officers 
calling  upon  the  men  to  fall  in.  The  Indians  and  grenadiers  came  almost 
to  the  lines,  but  Morgan  and  his  riflemen  fell  upon  them  and  drove  them 
back  through  the  woods  to  General  Burgoyne,  who,  instead  of  retreating, 
concluded  that  he  would  risk  another  battle,  and  ordered  up  the  rest  of 
the  troops. 

This  is  the  way  the  British  army  was  drawn  up:  The  light -infantry, 
under  Earl  Balcarras,  were  farthest  west ;  next  were  some  British  troops, 
under  General  Phillips;  then  the  Hessians,  under  General  Reidesel;  then 
farther  east  some  grenadiers,  under  Major  Ackland ;  and  the  artillery,  un 
der  Major  Williams. 

General  Fraser,  with  five  hundred  men,  was  in  advance  of  the  light- 
infantry.  General  Burgoyne  planned  to  have  the  Hessians  and  other 
troops  in  the  centre  begin  the  battle ;  and  when  the  Americans  came  out 
to  attack  Reidesel,  he  intended  that  Fraser  should  fall  upon  their  flank, 
and  drive  them  pell-mell  to  their  breastworks.  It  was  a  very  good  plan, 
but  the  game  of  flanking  was  one  in  which  Morgan  decided  to  have  a 
hand.  He  marched  west,  took  a  circuit  among  the  hills,  and  got  into  po 
sition  to  fall  upon  Fraser's  rear. 

It  was  past  two  o'clock  when  General  Poor,  with  the  three  New  Hamp 
shire  regiments — the  same  that  had  begun  the  battle  at  Trenton,  and  alsu 


234 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


on  the  19th  of  September — with  a  part  of  Learned's  Massachusetts  troops, 
marched  out  from  the  intrenchments.  The  three  New  Hampshire  regi* 
ments  were  farthest  east,  and  their  line  of  march  would  bring  them  direct 
ly  against  Burgoyne's  artillery.  Learned's  line  of  march  would  bring  him 
against  the  grenadiers. 

Dodifer  was  with  General  Poor,  and  Nicholas  with  Morgan.  General 
Poor  marched  down  the  little  brook  called  Mill  Creek,  muddy  with  the 
trampling  of  men,  crossed  it,  and  came  close  up  to  the  artillery.  Dodifer 
saw  the  cannon  on  the  slope  above,  the  artillery-men  standing  with  lighted 
port-fires. 

The  next  moment  there  was  a  roar,  a  crashing  of  the  limbs  of  the  trees 
above  him,  and  a  whizzing  of  shot  over  his  head.  The  cannon  had  been 

aimed  too  high,  and  very 
few  soldiers  fell.  The 
small-arms  joined  in  ;  but 
the  New  Hampshire  troops 
faced  the  fire,  just  as  they 
faced  the  sleet  and  the 
snows  of  the  winter  storms, 
without  flinching.  They 
inarched  up  the  hill,  al 
most  to  the  muzzles  of  the 
guns,  before  they  fired. 

Dodifer  and  the  sol 
diers  of  his  company 
sprung  upon  one  gun, 
drove  the  gunners,  and 
seized  the  piece ;  but  the 
next  moment  the  grena 
diers  were  upon  them,  and 
they  had  to  give  it  up. 
They  fell  back,  reloaded  their  guns,  fired  another  volley,  seized  it  a  sec 
ond  time,  but  again  were  driven.  The  fire  was  rolling  along  the  line. 
Learned  was  attacking  the  Hessians  and  grenadiers.  Once  more  the  New 
Hampshire  boys  sprung  upon  the  artillery,  but  were  driven  back. 

In  the  midst  of  this  uproar,  there  came  a  volley  from  the  west.  Mor 
gan,  with  fifteen  hundred  men,  suddenly  appeared;  and  Fraser,  instead  of 
having  fallen  upon  the  Americans,  found  that  the  Americans  had  fallen 
upon  him.  A  part  of  Morgan's  men  fired  upon  Eraser's  picked  corps ; 
while  the  balance,  under  Major  Dearborn,  wheeled,  and,  with  a  cheer, 


BATTLE    OF   THE    7TH    OF    OCTOBER. 


SARATOGA.  235 

rushed  down  upon  the  light  -  infantry.  There  was  fighting  all  along  the 
lines.  The  light -in  fan  try  were  facing  south-east,  to  meet  Learned;  but 
they  found  Dearborn  coming  from  the  south-west;  while  behind  them, 
toward  the  north-west,  was  Morgan.  Attacked  in  front  and  in  flank,  the 
light -infantry  began  to  waver;  but  the  officers  rallied  them.  The  Hes 
sians  in  front  of  Learned  were  standing  firm. 

It  was  past  three  o'clock,  when  Learn  ed's  troops  saw  their  old  com 
mander,  General  Arnold,  ride  down  the  lines.  They  received  him  with  a 
cheer.  He  was  not  their  commander  now :  there  was  a  misunderstanding 
between  him  and  Gates,  and  Arnold  had  demanded  a  pass  to  join  General 
Washington,  which  Gates  had  granted.  Gates  was  back  in  his  head-quar 
ters,  and  had  not  been  upon  the  field.  General  Poor  might  issue  orders  to 
his  own  brigade,  Learned  to  his,  Morgan  to  his ;  but  there  was  no  general 
commander  on  the  field. 

General  Arnold  had  heard  the  roar  of  battle.  From  the  breastworks 
at  Neilson's  he  could  see  the  smoke,  and  get  a  glimpse  of  what  was  going 
on.  He  could  remain  quiet  no  longer,  but  sprung  into  his  saddle  and  gal 
loped  toward  the  battle-field. 

"  Bring  him  back.  He'll  do  something  rash,"  says  General  Gat'js  to 
Major  Armstrong. 

Arnold  sees  Major  Armstrong  following,  and,  thinking  what  his  errand 
may  be,  dashes  down  the  line,  waving  his  sword.  He  has  no  right  to  give 
an  order,  but  nevertheless  gives  one. 

"  Forward  !"  he  shouts ;  and  the  line,  with  a  hurra,  sweep  upon  the 
Hessians. 

The  fight  is  getting  fiercer.  The  two  armies  are  close  together.  Dod- 
ifer  is  in  the  thickest  of  the  fight,  his  face  and  hands  begrimed  with  pow 
der.  The  smoke  from  the  Hessian  guns  envelops  him.  Once  more  he 
rushes  up  to  the  muzzle  of  a  cannon,  and  lays  his  hand  upon  it ;  and  the 
grenadiers,  under  Major  Ackland,  rush  up  and  fire  at  him.  He  and  his 
comrades  are  once  more  driven  back ;  but  in  the  melee  Major  Ackland 
falls,  with  a  shot  through  both  legs.  Major  Williams,  who  is  commanding 
the  artillery,  is  wounded,  and  both  officers  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  Amer 
icans. 

Colonel  Cilley,  commanding  one  of  the  New  Hampshire  regiments, 
forms  his  men  once  more.  He  waves  his  sword,  and  Dodifer  rushes  again 
into  the  white,  sulphurous  cloud  upon  the  cannon. 

The  artillery -men  are  few  now.  One  by  one  the  men  have  dropped 
beside  the  guns.  Major  Williams  is  not  there  to  help  them.  The  grena 
diers  are  still  ready  to  support  them ;  but  Major  Ackland  is  not  there  to 


236 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


animate  them.  Through  the  cloud,  up  to  the  guns,  rush  Dodifer  and  his 
comrades. 

"Hurra!"  It  is  theirs.  The  artillery  -  men  flee,  and  the  grenadiers 
have  not  the  courage  to  attempt  to  recover  it.  Colonel  Cilley  leaps  astride 
the  cannon,  waves  his  sword.  Dodifer  helps  wheel  it  round,  lays  down  his 
gun,  seizes  the  port-fire,  still  smoking  beside  the  gun.  One  of  the  soldiers 
rams  home  a  cartridge,  another  primes  it.  Dodifer  runs  his  eye  along  the 
sight,  then  touches  it  off,  and  the  shot  goes  tearing  through  the  Hessian 
ranks.  To  take  a  cannon  from  the  enemy,  and  turn  it  upon  them,  fills 
him  with  new  life.  This  pays  for  all  the  toils  and  hardships  through  the 
wilderness  to  Quebec,  for  the  defeat  at  Ticonderoga  and  Hnbbardton.  He 
swings  his  hat,  joins  in  the  hurra,  but  the  next  moment  clasps  his  hands 
upon  his  breast  and  falls  upon  the  ground. 

A  comrade  bends  over  him.  "Tell  mother — that — that — I  have- 
done — what — I — could." 


NEVER  AGAIN  WILL  HEAR  THE  FOOTSTEPS  OF  HER  BOY. 

Oh,  brave  boy !  yon  gave  all  you  had  to  give  to  your  country — your 
life  !  The  world  never  will  know  how  great  the  gift.  And  the  mother  far 
away  in  her  humble  home,  childless  now,  never  again  will  hear  the  foot- 


SARATOGA. 


237 


steps  of  her  boy,  or  gaze  upon  his  manly  face  ;  but  it  will  be  her  joy  to 
know  that  he  did  what  he  could  for  his  country. 

On  the  battle-field,  Major  Armstrong  was  trying  to  reach  Arnold  ;  but 
Arnold  did  not  stop  to  give  him  a  chance.  Wherever  the  fight  was  hottest, 
wherever  the  balls  were  flying  thickest,  there  was  Arnold  riding  reckless 
ly,  giving  orders  without  authority,  and  directing  all  the  movements,  wThile 
Gates  was  in  his  tent  discussing  the  general  question  of  the  Revolution 
with  Sir  Francis  Clark,  who  had  been  carried  there  a  prisoner,  mortally 
wounded. 

On  the  British  side  is  an  officer,  General  Fraser,  who  sees  that  the  fort 
unes  of  the  day  are  turning  against  Burgoyne,  and  who  is  doing  what  he 
can  to  rally  and  inspirit  the  British.  He,  and  not  Burgoyne,  is  the  real 
commander  and  leader.  He  brings  order  out  of  confusion.  Now  he  is 
on  horseback,  now  on  foot  in  the  thickest  of  the  fight.  At  a  critical  mo 
ment  he  is  wounded,  and  borne  from  the  field  to  the  house  where  the  Bar 
oness  Reidesel  is  staying.  She  has  invited  him  and  General  Burgoyne  to 

and  taken  a  hand  in  a 


take  dinner  there.  The 
cloth  is  laid,  the  table 
spread,  but  the  dishes  are 
quickly  removed,  and 
the  brave  man,  with  the 
blood  oozing  from  his 
wound,  laid  upon  the  ta- 
ble.  He  was  to  have 
drank  the  king's  'health, 


game  of  cards  after  din- 
ner  ;  but  he  has  emptied 
his  last  goblet,  played  his 
last  game.  Little  heeds 
he  the  roar  of  battle. 
His  fighting  is  finished. 
He  is  thinking  of  his  far- 
away  home  among  the 


mountains  of  Scotland,  bright  with  the  heather  and  broom.  Never  more 
will  he  behold  them.  He  laments  the  ambition  that  led  him  to  leave  a 
beautiful  Highland  home.  "  Fatal  ambition  !  Poor  General  Burgoyne  !" 
are  the  words  that  fall  from  his  lips.  He  knows  that  the  battle  is  going 
against  Burgoyne.  He  knows  that  his  own  life  soon  will  fade  away. 

It  is  stated  by  most  historians  that  General  Fraser  was  riding  every 
where  along  the  British  line  ;  that  Colonel  Morgan  called  some  of  his  rifle 
men  around  him,  pointed  out  Fraser.  saying,  "  That  is  General  Fraser  ;  I 
admire  and  honor  him  ;  but  it  is  necessary  he  should  die.  Take  your  sta 
tions  in  yonder  bushes,  and  do  your  duty,"  and  that  soon  after  General 
Fraser  fell,  shot,  as  has  been  supposed,  by  Timothy  Murphy. 

There  is  reason  to  believe  that  there  is  not  much  truth  in  the  story. 
Two  of  General  Burgoyne's  officers,  after  their  return  to  England,  testified 
that  Fraser  was  on  foot  when  he  was  shot.  It  is  reasonable  to  suppose 
that  Morgan  never  had  seen  Fraser.  He  had  had  no  opportunity  to  make 


238  THE  BOYS   OF  76. 

his  acquaintance,  never  had  met  him  except  in  the  battle  of  the  19th  of 
September.  It  is  quite  probable  that  Morgan  directed  his  men  to  pick  off 
the  British  officers,  as  a  great  many  other  generals  have  done  in  battle. 
There  was  a  fearful  loss  of  officers,  but  it  is  very  doubtful  if  Morgan  espe 
cially  pointed  out  Fraser  to  his  men. 

The  British  light  -  infantry  have  given  way.  The  man  who  has  led 
them  on,  and  encouraged  them  by  his  bravery,  is  no  longer  there  to  lead 
them.  Down  through  the  woods  and  across  the  field  to  their  intrench- 
ments  they  flee.  General  Reidesel,  General  Phillips,  and  General  Bnr- 
goyne  do  what  they  can  to  rally  the  discouraged  men,  but  vain  their  ef 
forts.  The  Americans  follow  them.  General  Tenbroeck,  with  some  New 
York  troops,  comes  down  from  the  American  intrenchments  to  take  part 
in  the  contest.  Arnold  is  in  his  glory.  He  places  himself  at  the  head  of 
Paterson's  and  Glover's  brigade,  leads  them  up  to  the  trees  which  Bur- 
goyne  has  felled  in  front  of  his  intrenchments,  and  fires  at  the  British  be 
yond  them ;  but  he  can  not  storm  the  intrenchments  there. 

Arnold  rides  to  Leonard's  brigade  and  leads  it  against  the  Canadians 
and  Tories.  Nicholas  is  in  this  charge.  Colonel  Brooks's  Massachusetts 
^egiment  storms  the  Canadian  breastworks.  With  a  hurra  the  men  leap 
Dver  the  logs,  and  drive  the  Canadians  before  them.  This  leaves  the  Hes 
sian  breastwork  exposed.  Having  carried  the  Canadian  line,  Arnold  rides 
to  Livingston's  and  Wesson's  regiment,  and,  with  some  of  Morgan's  men, 
charges  Breyman's  position. 

The  Hessians  have  seen  the  ferocious  man  on  a  brown  horse,  riding 
everywhere  upon  the  field,  waving  his  sword  amidst  the  smoke,  and  now  he 
is  attacking  them.  They  fire  a  volley  and  flee,  panic-stricken,  toward  the 
Hudson.  But  the  volley  brings  down  the  fearless  rider.  A  bullet  passes 
through  the  same  leg  that  was  wounded  under  the  walls  of  Quebec. 
Though  he  falls,  the  men  whom  he  is  leading  do  not  falter ;  but  rush  on, 
over  fallen  trees,  over  the  breastworks.  Breymari  falls  mortally  wounded, 
and  the  whole  of  his  line  gives  way.  Some  of  the  Hessians  fall  upon  their 
knees  and  surrender,  and  others  throw  away  their  guns  and  flee  through 
the  woods  toward  their  camp. 

It  is  sunset.  Arnold  is  lying  upon  the  ground  bandaging  his  leg,  when 
Major  Armstrong,  who  has  been  chasing  him  for  two  hours,  rides  up  and 
delivers  General  Gates's  order.  Arnold  is  ready  to  obey  it  now,  for  the 
victory  is  won. 

The  October  sun  goes  down  upon  a  bloody  field.  Hundreds  have  been 
killed,  hundreds  wounded.  It  is  a  gloomy  night  to  General  Burgoyne. 
All  his  bright  anticipations  are  gone  forever.  He  will  not  sit  down  to  a 


SARATOGA. 


239 


Nearly  all  his  troops 


PLACE    WHEKE    GEJSEltAL    FUASbK    WAS    BUK1KD. 


Christmas  dinner  with  Sir  Henry  Clinton  in  Albany, 
have  been  engaged,  while 
not  half  of  the  Americans 
have  been  upon  the  field. 
General  Burgoyne  was 
not  ready  to  renew  the 
battle  the  next  day.  He 
was  in  no  condition  to 
take  the  aggressive.  Nor 
did  General  Gates  at 
tempt  it.  Time  would 
give  him  the  victory  with 
out  the  shedding  of  blood.  The  militia  of  New  England  were  hastening 
to  aid  him.  General  Fellows  had  three  thousand  men  on  the  east  bank 
of  the  Hudson,  and  was  sending  his  cannon  shot  into  Bnrgoyne's  camp. 
General  Stark,  with  two  thousand,  was  on  his  way  to  Fort  Edward  to  seize 
that  point. 

General  Fraser  was  dead.  Out  from  the  baroness's  house  his  brother 
officers  bore  him  to  his  grave.  It  was  a  sad  procession,  and  the  shot  from 
Fellows's  gnns  covered  the  chaplain  and  the  mourners  with  dust  as  they 
stood  beside  the  grave.  General  Fellows  soon  saw  that  it  was  a  funeral 
procession,  and  honored  the  brave  man  by  firing  minute-guns,  so  it  was 
not  hate  that  inspired  the  patriots  in  battle.  They  could  honor  their  ene 
mies  while  fighting  for  their  liberties. 

It  was  sunset  when  Burgoyne  and  his  officers  stood  there,  and,  amidst 
the  roar  of  cannon,  heard  the  chaplain,  the  Rev.  Mr.  Brudenell,  read  the 
solemn  service  for  the  dead — "  Earth  to  earth,  and  dust  to  dust."  Darkness 
came  on.  Dark  clouds  rolled  up  from  the  east,  and  the  rain  began  to  fall. 

Although  the  tempest  was  raging, 
Burgoyne's  army  was  on  the  march. 
At  Crown  Point  he  had  said, "  His 
army  must  not  retreat;"  but  now, 
in  the  darkness  and  storm,  it  was 
on  its  way  back  to  Fort  Edward. 
All  was  confusion.  The  road  was 
muddy.  In  the  darkness  men 
tumbled  headlong  to  the  ground. 
Teams  broke  down,  or  else  were 
stalled  in  the  mud.  The  Baroness 
Reidesel  and  her  children,  and  all  the  wives  of  the  officers,  were  out  in  the 


GENERAL  SCHUYLEK  S  HOUSE. 


240 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


GENERAL    SCHUYLER's    MILL. 


storm.     These  ladies,  who  had  lived  delicately  all  their 
lives  at  home,  through  the  long  and  dreary  night  were 
exposed  to  the  chilling  wind  and  the  driving  rain, 
making  hardly  half  a  mile  an  hour,  so  crowded  the 
road,  so  deep  the  mud,  so  great  the  confusion. 

General  Burgoyne  halted  at 
six  o'clock  in  the 
morning.  He 
might  have  gone 
farther,  but  he 
was  on  his  old 
camp-ground,  the 
first  he  had  oc 
cupied  after  cross 
ing  the  Hudson. 

"  Why  doesn't  General  Burgoyne  go  on  ?"  asked  the  Baroness  Reidesel. 
"He  is  tired,  and  means  to  halt  here  till  night  and  give  us  a  supper," 
said  General  Phillips,  who  was  out  of  patience  with  Burgoyne. 

And  a  grand  supper  General  Burgoyne  gave  to  his  officers.  The  wife 
of  one  of  the  officers  of  the  commissary  department,  who  was  no  better 
than  she  should  be,  sat  by  his  side  at  the  table,  and  drank  Champagne 
with  him,  and  the  officers  clinked  their  glasses,  and  laughed  and  sung 
songs,  while  the  poor  wounded  soldiers  were  lying  half  starved  under 
the  trees  and  fences,  and  the  good  Madame  Reidesel  was  making  them 
broth. 

General  Burgoyne  had  ordered  the  soldiers  to  set  fire   to   General 

Schuyler's  house  and  mill  near 
his  encampment,  and  the  houses 
of  all  the  Whigs,  thus  doing  by 
the  torch  what  damage  he  could 
not  with  the  sword. 

General  Burgoyne  made  an 
excuse  for  halting — because  the 
boats  in  the  river,  containing  his 
provisions,  could  not  make  head 
way  against  the  stream  as  fast  as 
the  army  marched.  The  roads 
were  so  muddy  that  the  Ameri- 

THE    HOUSE    OCCUPIED    BY    BARONESS    REIDESEL.          ^     ^      ^     ^^     ^     ^^ 

till  cour  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  of  the  10th.     On  the  morning  of  the  llth 


SARATOGA. 


241 


Burgoyne  found  that  they  were  upon  him,  and  had  captured  some  of  the 
boats  in  the  river.  lie  was  going  to  retreat  along  the  same  road  down 
which  he  had  come  from  Fort  Edward,  but 
General  Fellows  was  in  possession  of  it. 
Then  he  resolved  to  march  up  the  west 
side  of  the  Hudson,  and  cross  the  river  op 
posite  Fort  Edward  ;  but  General  Stark  had 
sent  Colonel  Cochran  to  take  possession  of 
that  point. 

General  Fellows,  on  the  east  side  of  the  Hudson,  was  sending  cannon- 
balls  into  Burgoyne's  camp  once  more.  There  was  no  place  of  safety  for 
the  sick  and  wounded,  or  the  women  and  children.  The  Baroness  Reidesel 
and  several  women,  with  a  number  of  wounded  officers,  had  to  take  refuge 
in  the  cellar  of  a  house,  and  remain  there  day  after  day,  holding  their 
breath  in  terror  as  the  cannon-balls  crashed  through  the  house. 


THE    CELLAR. 


BURGOYNE'S  CAMP  ON  THE  13iH  or  OCTOBER. 


Although  they  were  close  to  the  river,  they  could  get  no  water,  except 
what  a  courageous  woman  brought  to  them.  The  American  soldiers  in 
the  woods  on  the  east  bank  of  the  river  would  not  fire  upon  her. 


242 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


On  the  afternoon  of  the  12th,  Burgoyne  held  a  council  of  his  officers, 
and  it  was  decided  to  make  a  rapid  retreat  to  Ticonderoga — -to  cut  their 
way  through  the  Americans  at  Fort  Edward;  but  scouts  said  it  was  im 
possible  to  retreat.  The 
Americans  had  broken  down 
all  the  bridges,  and  held  the 
road. 

On  the  moi™g  of  the 

13tb?  Bnrgoyne  ca*lled  an. 

other  council.  The  officers 
met  in  a  large  tent.  Pret 
ty  soon  musket -balls  began 
to  cut  through  the  canvas. 
General  Burgoyne  was  seat 
ed  at  a  table,  asking  the  of 
ficers  what  was  to  be  done. 
Just  then  General  Fellows 
sent  an  eighteen-pound  can 
non-shot  into  the  tent  and 
across  the  table,  which  set 
the  officers  thinking  that 
something  must  be  done 
very  quickly. 

"  Shall  we  negotiate  with 
General  Gates  ?"   Burgoyne 
asked.    The  cannon-ball  was 
a  powerful  argument  in  fa 
vor  of  such  a  proposition.    A 
drummer  with  a  white  flag 
went  out  toward  the  Amer 
ican  lines,  and  the  riflemen 
stopped  firing.     An  Ameri 
can  officer  advanced  to  meet 
him,  and  so  negotiations  be 
gan  for  a  surrender  of  the 
British  army  on  the  17th. 
But  a  faint  gleam  of  hope  came  to  Burgoyne.      On  the  night  of  the 
16th,  a  messenger  from  Sir  Henry  Clinton  worked  his  way  past  General 
Gates's  sentinel,  and  reached  Burgoyne.     He  had  been  several  days  on  his 
journey ;  but  Tories  had  helped  him  on.     He  had  traveled  up  the  east  side 


SARATOGA. 


243 


of  the  Hudson,  and  brought  joyful  news.  Sir  Henry  had  taken  the  forts 
on  the  Hudson,  and  had  sent  General  Vaughan  as  far  up  as  the  town  of 
Esopus.  Burgoyne  called  his  officers  together  once  more. 

"  Will  it  be  honorable,"  he  asked,  "  to  break  off  negotiations  now  ?" 
General  Reidesel,  General  Hamilton,  and  several  other  officers,  said  it 
would  not  be  honorable.      Burgoyne  thought  differently.     But  the  Amer 
icans  knew  what  had  taken  place  on  the  Hudson,  and  a  messenger  arrived 
from  Gates  with  a  note.    The  American  army  was  drawn 
up  in  order  of  battle;  and  if  the  surrender  was 
not  carried  out  in  order  as  agreed  upon,  the  con 
test  would   be    renewed   at   once.       Burgoyne 
signed  the  papers,  and  his  army  marched  into 
1^^  a  field  by  the  river,  laid  their  arms  upon 
%   the    ground,   and    emptied    their   car- 
^~      tridge-boxes. 


PLACE    WHERE    THE    BRITISH    LAID    DOWN    THEIR    ARMS. 

General  Burgoyne  and  his  officers,  in  their  rich  uniforms,  rode  along 
the  bank  of  the  river  toward  the  American  camp.  General  Gates  came 
out  to  meet  him,  with  the  officers  of  his  staif.  Colonel  Wilkinson  intro 
duced  them. 

"  The  fortune  of  war  has  made  me  your  prisoner,"  said  Burgoyne,  rais 
ing  his  hat. 

"  I  shall  always  be  ready  to  bear  testimony  that  it  has  not  been  through 
any  fault  of  your  excellency,"  Gates  replied ;  and  then  the  whole  party 
rode  to  Gates's  quarters,  and  had  a  good  dinner.  In  the  afternoon,  the 
American  army  was  drawn  up  in  two  lines  on  the  interval  near  the  river 


244  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

—  one  brigade  behind  another  —  reaching  more  than  a  mile,  and  several 
ranks  deep. 

Nicholas  heard  the  fifes  and  drums  playing  "  Yankee  Doodle ;"  then 
he  saw  two  officers  on  horseback  —  one  carrying  the  Stars  and  Stripes ; 
then  came  a  company  of  American  cavalry ;  and  then  the  captive  army, 
the  British  light-infantry  in  front.  No  guns  in  their  hands  now.  It  was 
a  sorrowful  procession.  They  had  come  to  conquer,  but  were  conquered. 
Five  thousand  seven  hundred  and  ninety -one  marched  past.  They  had 
left  behind  forty-two  cannon,  and  nearly  five  thousand  muskets.  Nicholas 
stood  near  General  Gates's  tent.  He  saw  General  Gates  and  General  Bur- 
goyne  standing  there — Burgoyne,  large  and  stout,  wearing  his  rich  uniform 
covered  with  gold  lace.  Gates  was  small,  and  had  on  a  blue  frock.  He 
saw  General  Burgoyne  hand  his  sword  to  Gates,  who  took  it,  held  it  a 
moment,  and  then  returned  it. 

So  the  grand  army  which  was  to  divide  New  England  from  the  other 
colonies — which,  in  the  flush  of  success  at  Ticonderoga,  Burgoyne  thought 
could  march  to  Boston  —  was  on  its  way  there  to  the  tune  of  "Yankee 
Doodle,"  but  not  as  victor. 

Nicholas  beheld  it  with  joy ;  and  then  the  thought  came — "  Oh  that 
Dodifer  were  here  to  see  it!" — he  who  had  fought  so  nobly  and  given  his 
life  to  his  country.  But  the  brave  boy  was  at  rest  forever,  on  the  hills  ci 
Saratoga — his  battles  ended,  his  victory  won  ! 


OPERATIONS  ON   THE  DELAWARE.  245 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

OPERATIONS  ON  THE  DELAWARE. 

THE  shores  of  the  Delaware  River  below  the  junction  of  the  Schuyl 
kill  are  low  and  marshy.     The  wild  ducks  build  their  nests  in  the 
reeds  along  the  shores  and  upon  the  islands.     There  are  Hog  Island,  Mud 
Island,  and  Billings  Island. 

The  Americans  had  a  fleet  of  vessels  in  the  river ;  but,  in  addition,  to 
keep  the  British  fleet  from  getting  up  to  the  city,  they  placed  a  line  of  ob 
structions  from  the  Pennsylvania  to  the  New  Jersey  shore.  On  Mud  Isl 
and  they  erected  a  fort,  named  Fort  Mifflin ;  and  on  the  New  Jersey  shore 
was  another  fortification,  at  Red  Bank,  named  after  General  Mercer,  who 
was  killed  at  Princeton.  On  the  New  Jersey  shore,  opposite  the  chevaux- 
de-frise  which  had  been  placed  in  the  river,  the  Americans  began  to  throw 
up  another  fort. 

General  Washington  hoped  that  General  Howe,  although  in  possession 
of  Philadelphia,  would  not  be  able  to  take  these  forts.  If  they  could  be 
maintained,  General  Howe  would  find  it  a  difficult  thing  to  stay  in  Phila 
delphia—so  far  away  from  his  ships  and  supplies. 

The  fleet,  under  Admiral  Howe,  sailed  down  the  Chesapeake,  came  up 
the  Delaware,  and  was  ready  to  co-operate  with  the  army. 

General  Howe  sent  Colonel  Stirling,  with  two  regiments,  to  capture  the 
unfinished  fortification  (K  in  the  plan).  They  marched  down  from  Ches 
ter,  and  crossed  the  river  in  boats  below  Billings  Island.  There  were  only 
a  few  Americans  in  the  unfinished  work.  When  they  saw  the  British  ad 
vancing  they  spiked  their  guns,  set  fire  to  their  barracks,  and  fled  up  the 
river  to  the  fort  at  Red  Bank.  Colonel  Stirling  completed  the  destruction 
of  the  works,  helped  the  fleet  open  a  passage  through  the  chevaux-de-frise, 
and  returned. 

Six  small  vessels  sailed  through  the  opening  in  the  chevaux- de-frise. 
The  fleet  could  have  sailed  up  to  Philadelphia  if  it  had  not  been  for  the 
fort  at  Red  Bank,  which  would  be  able  to  riddle  any  vessel  that  might  at 
tempt  to  pass  it.  That  must  be  taken.  General  Howe  sent  Count  Donop, 


246 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


a  brave  young  Hessian  office1  with  two  thou 
sand  five  hundred  picked  Hessians,  to  capt- 

••<!^^z^^^-^<-^^^"^  ure  it.  The  Hessians  crossed  the  Delaware 
at  Philadelphia,  and  marched  down  the  New  Jersey  side  to  Haddonfield 
on  the  evening  of  October  21st. 

The  next  morning  Count  Donop  started  for  Fort  Mercer.  With  his 
brave  soldiers  he  would  have  no  difficulty  in  capturing  it,  which,  though 
it  had  an  embankment  on  the  river-side,  was  very  weak  landward.  Col 
onel  Christopher  Greene,  of  Rhode  Island,  who  had  marched  through  the 
wilderness  of  Maine  to  Canada  with  Arnold,  held  the  fort  with  four  hun 
dred  Rhode  Island  troops.  Early  in  the  morning  of  the  22d,  Count  Donop 
rnine  to  Timber  Creek,  a  little  stream  that  empties  into  the  Delaware  above 
Fort  Mercer,  but  found  that  the  Americans  had  taken  up  the  bridge,  and 
that  he  must  march  four  miles  up  the  brook  before  he  could  ford  it.  It 
was  a  long  and  tiresome  march — eight  miles  out  of  the  way — and  it  gave 
Colonel  Greene  time  to  make  all  preparations  possible.  He  had  fourteen 
cannon  mounted  in  the  fort,  but  most  of 
them  had  been  placed  in  position  to  fire 
at  the  ships,  and  he  had  to  change  some 
of  them  to  the  landward  side.  His  men 
worked  with  a  will,  and  were  ready  for 
the  Hessians. 

It  was  afternoon  when  Donop  reached 
Red  Bank.  He  formed  his  men  in  line 
of  battle  in  a  piece  of  woods,  but,  be 
fore  beginning  the  attack,  sent  an  officer 
and  a  drummer  with  a  white  flag  toward 
the  fort.  Colonel  Greene  sent  out  an  officer  to  see  what  was  wanted. 

"The  King  of  England  orders  his  rebellious  subjects  to  lay  down  theb 


THE    FORT    AT    RED    BANK. 


OPERATIONS   ON   THE   DELAWARE.  247 

arms.    They  are  warned  that  if  they  stand  battle,  no  quarter  will  be  given." 
The  officer  came  into  the  fort  with  the  message. 

"  Say  to  him  that  we  ask  no  quarter,  nor  will  we  give  any.  We  shall 
defend  the  fort  or  make  it  our  tomb,"  was  Colonel  Greene's  quiet  but  de 
termined  reply. 

The  Hessian  officer  returned  to  Count  Donop.  The  British  fleet  in 
the  river  came  up  stream,  and  began  a  furious  cannonade.  But  the  shot 
buried  themselves  in  the  mud  or  flew  harmlessly  over  the  works. 

Count  Donop  brought  up  his  cannon,  formed  his  men,  and  moved  to 
the  attack.  It  was  nearly  night,  and  he  expected  to  be  in  possession  of 
the  fort  before  dark.  He  sent  half  of  his  men  to  attack  on  the  north 
side,  while  he,  with  the  rest,  approached  from  the  south.  The  fort  con 
sisted  of  two  parts,  the  main  fort  and  the  outworks.  The  latter  were 
unfinished ;  they  were  weak,  and  could 
not  be  defended.  The  main  fort  was 
stronger,  and  Colonel  Greene  widely  de 
termined  not  to  attempt  to  hold  the  out 
works. 

South  of  the  fort  a  short  distance 
was  a  brick  house  with  "  I.  A.  W.  1748  " 
on  one  of  the  gables,  the  initials  stand 
ing  for  James  and  Anna  Whitall.  The 
house  had  been  built  twenty-nine  years. 
Mr.  Whitall  lived  there  with  his  wife 

WHITALL  S    HOUSE    AT    RED    BANK. 

and  family.     He  was  a  Quaker,  and  a 

good  Whig.     Seeing  that  the  battle  was  about  to  begin,  he  and  his  wife 

left  the  house ;  but  his  mother,  an  old  lady,  would  not  leave. 

"  God  will  take  care  of  me,"  she  said. 

The  Hessians,  attacking  on  the  north,  after  keeping  up  a  lively  can 
nonade  for  half  an  hour,  advanced.  At  the  same  time,  the  British  ships 
began  to  bombard  the  fort  more  furiously.  From  the  north  and  the  south 
the  shot  were  falling  into  the  fort. 

The  Hessians  charged  upon  the  outer  works,  but  were  surprised  to  find 
no  one  there.  They  set  up  a  shout,  as  if  they  had  already  won  the  victory. 
There  was  no  ditch  between  the  main  fort  and  the  earth-works,  and  they 
imagined  it  would  be  an  easy  matter  to  rush  up  the  bank  and  plant  their 
flag  upon  it.  They  could  not  see  any  Americans.  What  had  become  of 
the  men  who  had  just  said  that  they  neither  asked  for  nor  gave  quarter'* 
Not  one  was  in  sight.  Were  they  hiding,  panic-stricken  by  the  bombard 
ment?  With  a  shout,  they  rushed  forward.  Suddenly  the  fort  was  all 


248 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


Bb. 


VIEW    FROM    RED    BANK. 


ablaze.  From  embrasure 
and  rampart  there  burst 
out  a  flame  and  a  storm  of 
iron  hail  and  leaden  rain 
that  swept  them  down  in 
an  instant.  They  could  not 
stand  before  it.  All  who 
could  get  away  fled  in  con 
sternation  from  the  spot. 
While  this  is  going  on,  Count  Donop  is  advancing  from  Mr.  Whitall's 
house.  The  cannon  of  the  fleet  are  sending  a  storm  of  solid  shot  and 
bombs  into  the  fort.  Suddenly  the  cannonade  ceases,  for  the  Hessians  are 
about  to  leap  over  the  ramparts.  They  rush  bravely  up ;  but  now  that  side 
of  the  fort  is  all  aflame.  Count  Donop  falls,  and  his  next  in  command. 
Colonel  Mingerode.  The  Hessians  are  brave:  they  climb  on  their  hands 
and  knees  up  the  embankment,  fire  into  the  faces  of  the  Americans,  who, 
in  turn,  the  next  instant  blow  out  the  brains  of  their  assailants.  The 
Rhode  Island  men  have  piles  of  grenades  —  hand -bombs  —  which  they 
set  on  fire  and  toss  over  the  embankment,  which  explode  among  the  Hes 
sians,  who  have  lost  their  brave  leader.  He  is  lying,  mortally  wounded, 
at  the  bottom  of  the  ditch.  There  is  no  one  to  inspirit  them.  They  lose 
courage.  The  fire  is  growing  hotter.  More  murderous  the  storm.  A 
moment,  and  they  are  fleeing  past  Whitall's  house,  disorganized,  panic- 
stricken — running  in  terror  to  Iladdonfield. 

It  was  five  o'clock  when  the  attack  began,  and  it  is  not  yet  six,  but 
the  battle  is  over.  The  last  rays  of  the  setting  sun  fall  upon  the  Stars 
and  Stripes,  still  proudly  floating  above  the  ramparts ;  while  below,  heaped 
one  upon  another,  are  four  hundred  Hessians,  killed  or  wounded.  Inside 
the  fort  are  eight  dead  and  twenty-nine  wounded,  and  nearly  half  of  these 
casualties  occurred  through  the  bursting  of  a  cannon.  The  Hessians  were 
so  panic-stricken  that  they  left  their  leader  lying  at  the  foot  of  the  em 
bankment. 

In  the  evening  twilight,  Colonel  Manduit,  the  French  engineer,  who 
had  laid  out  the  works,  and  who  assisted  in  defending  them,  was  out  amidst 
the  wounded.     He  heard  a  voice  among  the  slain, 
"  Please  take  me  out." 


OPERATIONS  ON  THE   DELAWARE.  249 

It  was  Count  Donop.  The  kind-hearted  Frenchman  hastened  to  help 
him,  conveyed  him  to  Mr.  Whitall's  house,  and  kindly  cared  for  him ; 
but  his  wound  was  mortal.  "I  die  a  victim  to  ambition  and  the  ava- 


THE    EXPLOSION    OF    THE    BRITISH    SHIP. 


rice  of  my  sovereign,"  he  said  ;  and  he  might  have  added  that  he  was 
slain  through  the  incapacity  of  Lord  North  and  the  stubbornness  of  the 
king. 

Tt  was  a  terrible  defeat  to  General  Howe.     Four  hundred  men  lost, 


250 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


and  nothing  gained,  and  the  fleet  as  far  from  Philadelphia  as  ever.  The 
country  rang  with  the  praises  of  Colonel  Greene  and  the  brave  men  who 
had  inflicted  so  signal  a  defeat  upon  the  enemy. 

Colonel  Greene  was  greatly  assisted  by  Commodore  Hazlewood,  with 
a  fleet  of  small  vessels  in  the  river.  He  had  more  than  twenty  of  all 
kinds — galleys,  floating  batteries,  one  brig,  besides  fourteen  old  vessels  fit 
ted  up  as  fire-ships,  with  tar-barrels  on  board,  which  he  could  set  on  fire, 
and  which  would  float  down  with  the  tide  against  the  British  fleet.  Com 
modore  Hazlewood  had  about  one  hundred  cannon,  and  he  kept  up  a  hot 
fire  upon  the  British  fleet. 

Two  days  later,  in  the  morning,  the  British  ships  made  an  attack  on 
Fort  Mifflin.  The  Augusta,  with  sixty-four  guns ;  the  Roebuck,  with  for 
ty-four  ;  two  frigates ;  the  Merlin,  with  eighteen  guns ;  and  a  galley,  came 
up  the  river  and  opened  a  furious  cannonade.  Lieutenant-colonel  Smith, 
of  Lancaster,  Pennsylvania,  was  in  the  fort,  commanding  the  garrison. 
His  men,  from  Colonel  Lamb's  artillery  regiment,  worked  the  guns  vigor 
ously.  Commodore  Hazlewood  dropped  down  with  his  fleet,  and  the  fort 
and  fleet  together  made  it  hot  for  the  British. 

Colonel  Smith  sent  a  red  -  hot  shot  at  the  sixty  -  four  -  gun  ship,  the 
Augusta,  which  struck  the  hull,  and  in  a  very  short  time  the  ship  was  in 
flames.  She  was  on  a  mud-bank,  and  could  not  get  away.  The  fire  worked 
its  way  into  the  seams  of  the  ship.  The  sailors  tried  in  vain  to  put  it  out. 

They  fled  to  their  boats,  and  about  noon 
the  ship  blew  up  with  a  tremendous  ex 
plosion.  The  British  did  not  like  to  give 
up  the  contest,  and  the  fight  went  on 
from  one  till  two,  from  two  till  three  in 
the  afternoon.  The  Merlin  was  lying 
near  the  mouth  of  Mud  Creek.  The 

o-unner  sent  a  red-hot  shot  which  struck 

& 

into  the  side  of  that  ship,  and  set  it  on 
fire,  and    there  was   another    explosion. 
The  Roebuck,  whose  commander  fear- 
that  she  might  be  served  in  the  same  way, 
the   other   ships,  dropped   down   the   river. 
So  in  an  afternoon  the  king  had  lost  two  fine 
ships. 

General  Howe  was  chagrined.  There  he  was  in  Philadelphia  with  a 
great  army,  and  yet  two  garrisons  of  less  than  twelve  hundred  men,  with 
t)je  fleet  of  Commodore  Ilazlewood,  had  prevented  the  ships  from  coming 


and 


FORT    MIFFLIN. 


OPERATIONS   ON   THE   DELAWARE.  251 

op  to  fhe  city.  He  must  take  Fort  Mifflin  on  Mud  Island,  and  Fort  Mer 
cer  at  Red  Bank,  or  he  would  be  compelled  to  abandon  Philadelphia.  He 
adopted  a  new  plan.  He  saw  that  Fort  Mifflin,  on  the  side  toward  Car 
penter's  Island,  was  very  weak.  There  were  no  cannon  mounted  to  sweep 
that  island,  and  he  sent  an  expedition  in  the  night  to  take  possession  of 
it.  The  troops  met  with  no  opposition,  and  in  a  few  days  he  had  five 
batteries  erected,  with  some  of  the  heaviest  cannon  of  the  fleet  mounted. 
He  brought  up  a  floating-battery  mounting  twenty-two  guns,  and  anchor 
ed  it  south-west  of  the  fort  near  Hog  Island,  within  fifteen  hundred  feet 
of  the  fort.  Two  sixty-four-gun  ships  and  two  forty-gun  ships  came  up  to 
take  part  in  the  bombardment.  All  told,  the  British  had  between  two  hun 
dred  and  fifty  and  three  hundred  cannon,  besides  mortars,  to  rain  a  storm 
of  shot  and  shell  upon  the  little  fort. 

Every  thing  is  ready  on  the  part  of  the  British.  The  ships  advance, 
and  the  batteries  on  the  shore  open  fire.  All  through  the  day  the  cannon 
ade  goes  on,  ships  and  batteries  firing  rapidly,  the  cannon  of  the  fort  reply 
ing  slowly.  Lieutenant  Treat,  commanding  the  artillery,  is  killed  by  the 
bursting  of  a  bomb,  The  barracks  are  knocked  to  pieces.  Till  late  into 
die  night  the  fire  is  kept  up. 

At  day-break  the  next  morning  the  ships  and  batteries  open  once  more. 
The  shot  fall  thick  and  fast  without  the  inclosure.  Colonel  Smith  sits 
down  in  the  barracks  to  write  a  letter  to  General  Yarnum,  who  is  on  the 
New  Jersey  shore :  a  shot  passes  through  the  chimney,  scattering  the  bricks 
in  every  direction,  and  knocking  him  senseless.  Lieutenant-colonel  Russell, 
of  Connecticut,  takes  command ;  and  Colonel  Smith,  with  other  wounded, 
is  taken,  in  a  boat  across  the  river  to  Red  Bank.  Faster  rain  the  bombs, 
more  vigorously  than  ever  the  British  sailors  work  the  guns.  From  day 
break  till  midnight,  the  cannonade  goes  on.  The  palisades  around  the 
fort  are  knocked  to  pieces.  A  cannon-shot  comes  through  an  embrasure 
and  dismounts  a  gun,  killing  the  gunner.  Lieutenant -colonel  Russell  is 
worn  out,  and  Major  Thayer,  of  Rhode  Island,  assumes  command.  There 
is  very  little  rest  for  the  three  hundred  men  under  Major  Thayer.  The 
firing  goes  on  till  midnight,  and  the  British  only  stop  from  weariness. 

On  the  12th,  the  ships,  at  day-break,  open  fire  once  more.  The  top  of 
the  fort  is  plowed  through  and  through  by  solid  shot.  The  bombs,  which 
bury  themselves  in  the  embankment,  blow  out  cart-loads  of  earth.  Two 
more  guns  are  disabled,  the  laboratory  blows  up,  and  the  block-house  at 
the  north-west  corner  of  the  fort  is  knocked  to  pieces. 

The  hard  blows  are  not  all  on  one  side.  Major  Thayer  sends  his  shot 
with  unerring  aim  into  the  fleet,  splintering  masts  and  spars.  They  crash 


252  THE   BOYS  OP  76. 

through  the  sides  of  the  vessels  and  make  fearful  havoc  among  the 
crews. 

The  morning  dawns  once  more,  and  the  Americans  discover  the  float 
ing-battery  close  to  the  fort.  During  the  night,  with  the  incoming  tide, 
the  British  have  come  to  fight  at  close  quarters.  The  thirty-two-pounders 
open.  They  are  so  near  that  the  shot  pass  through  the  embankment. 
But  the  shot  from  the  fort  tell  with  greater  effect  upoi  the  battery.  Its 
thick  timbered  sides  are  smashed  in,  and  before  noon  there  is  very  little 
left  of  it — every  gun  is  silenced. 

The  hard-worked  men  in  the  fort  are  worn  out.  Soldiers  drop  asleep 
beside  the  guns  while  the  bombs  are  bursting  around  them.  Unless  re 
lieved,  they  can  not  hold  out  much  longer.  They  have  boats  in  which,  if 
need  be,  they  can  retreat  in  the  night  up  the  river  to  the  fleet,  or  across  to 
Red  Bank.  They  will  not  give  in,  however,  just  yet. 

The  British  are  nearly  in  despair,  and  are  thinking  of  abandoning  the 
siege.  There  is  a  traitor  in  the  garrison.  A  soldier  who,  perhaps,  has  had 
enough  fighting,  steals  out  from  the  fort,  jumps  into  a  boat,  makes  his 
way  to  the  fleet,  and  informs  the  British  that  Major  Thayer  is  just  ready 
to  abandon  the  fort.  It  revives  the  drooping  spirits  of  the  British.  Orders 
are  sent  to  the  ships  to  come  to  close  quarters  in  the  morning.  The  ad 
miral  will  knock  the  fort  level  with  the  ground,  or  sink  his  ships  in  the 
attempt. 

The  sun  rises,  and  the  hard-worked  soldiers  in  the  fort  see  that  prepa 
rations  are  making  for  a  terrific  assault.  They  behold  the  Somerset,  the 
sixty-four-gun  ship  which,  at  day-break  on  the  17th  of  June,  1775,  began 
a  cannonade  upon  Bunker  Hill,  and  the  Iris,  carrying  sixty-four  guns, 
coming  up  close  to  the  fort  to  attack  in  front. 

The  Vigilant,  with  twenty  twenty -four -pounders,  and  an  old  vessel 
with  three  guns,  work  their  way  up  west  of  the  fort,  and  take  position 
where  they  can  not  be  harmed  by  any  of  its  guns.  The  ships  do  not  get 
into  position  till  ten  o'clock.  Then,  at  a  signal,  the  fire  begins.  From  all 
sides,  except  the  north,  the  storm  is  poured  upon  the  fort.  The  ships  are 
so  near  that  the  men  in  the  rigging  can  pick  off  the  gunners  the  moment 
they  attempt  to  load  a  gun.  The  cannon,  one  after  another,  are  dismount 
ed,,  the  carriages  knocked  to  pieces.  By  noon  all  the  cannon,  except  two, 
are  disabled.  There  is  not  a  safe  place  in  the  fort.  Many  are  killed,  and 
more  wounded  ;  but  Major  Thayer  will  not  raise  the  white  flag.  All 
day  long  the  storm  rages.  The  block-houses  are  knocked  to  pieces,  the 
palisades  all  leveled,  the  embrasures  torn  away,  and  yet  the  brave  little 
band  will  not  surrender. 


OPERATIONS   ON  THE   DELAWARE.  253 

Night  shuts  down  upon  the  scene ;  but  there  is  no  diminution  of  the 
storm.  The  deep  roar  of  the  cannonade  goes  on.  In  the  darkness  Major 
Thayer  places  his  wounded  in  the  boats.  Among  them  is  Captain  Talbot, 
with  a  wound  in  the  hip,  another  in  his  wrist;  but,  though  wounded,  he 
has  kept  on  cheering  the  men.  The  boats  push  off  in  the  darkness,  and 
make  their  way  to  Red  Bank.  Major  Thayer  and  forty  men  remain  till 
midnight.  It  is  useless  to  remain  longer.  He  will  leave  the  spot;  but  he 
will  leave  in  triumph.  A  train  is  laid,  the  match  applied,  and  while  it  is 
burning  the  heroic  defenders  glide  away  in  the  boats,  and  while  the  row 
ers  are  pulling  at  the  oars,  the  flames  break  out,  licking  up  every  thing 
that  can  burn  about  the  fort.  Nearly  two  hundred  and  fifty  have  been 
killed  and  wounded  in  the  defense,  and  more  than  that  number  have  fallen 
on  board  the  ships. 

There  still  remained  Fort  Mercer.  Colonel  Greene  and  his  brave  men 
were  still  there.  General  Howe  sent  Cornwallis,  with  two  thousand  men, 
to  attack  it  in  conjunction  with  the  fleet.  Cornwallis  crossed  the  river 
from  the  west  side  below  the  fort,  and  came  to  the  little  village  of  Wood- 
bury.  General  Washington  sent  General  Greene  across  the  Delaware 
above  Philadelphia,  at  Burlington,  with  Lafayette ;  but  Greene  had  a 
small  force,  and  could  not  think  it  prudent  to  risk  a  battle,  and  on  the 
20th  of  November,  seeing  that  he  was  about  to  be  attacked,  and  that  there 
was  little  hope  of  holding  the  fort,  now  that  Fort  Miffiin  had  fallen,  he 
evacuated  it,  and  so  saved  the  garrison.  A  few  of  the  small  vessels  of 
Commodore  Hazlewood's  fleet  crept  up  past  Philadelphia  in  the  dark 
ness,  while  all  the  others  were  set  on  fire  to  prevent  their  falling  into  the 
hands  of  the  British. 

It  was  a  gloomy  day,  that  21st  of  November,  to  the  little  army  under 
Washington.  Philadelphia  was  in  the  possession  of  the  British,  the  river 
was  open,  the  forts  and  fleet  destroyed.  General  Howe  had  a  great  army, 
and  Washington  was  powerless  to  resist  him. 


254: 


THE  BOYS  OF  '76. 


CHAPTEE  XXII. 

VALLEY  FORGE  AND  PHILADELPHIA. 

ENERAL  HOWE  was  quite  well  satisfied  with  what  he  had  done. 
He  had  defeated  Washington  at  Brandy  wine,  repulsed  him  at  Ger- 
mantown,  taken  the  forts  on  the  Delaware,  and  was  in  possession  of  Phil 
adelphia.  Re-enforcements  were  on  their  way  from  England,  his  army 
was  in  good  condition,  while  Washington's  was  growing  weaker.  Many 
of  the  citizens  of  Philadelphia  had  welcomed  him  with  open  arms  as  their 
deliverer,  while  the  farmers  of  the  surrounding  country  hailed  him  with 
favor,  for  he  had  British  gold,  which  he  was  ready  to  pay  for  their  garden- 
sauce,  butter,  cheese,  eggs,  cattle,  and  horses. 


a  Resolution 
GRESSputti 
Iftdelplia  Nov. z- \j? 6 


CONTINENTAL    MONEY. 


The  money  issued  by  Congress,  made  of  paper,  was  poor  stuff.     It  was 
only  a  promise  to  pay,  and  the  promise  was  not  worth  much.     The  money 


VALLEY  FORGE   AND   PHILADELPHIA. 


was  so  poor  that  one  hundred  dollars  would  hardly  buy  a  pair  of  boots. 


oor  as 


the 


money  was, 


GENERAL    HOWE  S    QUARTERS    AT    HIGH 
STREET,    PHILADELPHIA. 


A.  good  coat  would  cost  live  hundred  dollars. 
Congress  had  not  paid  the  soldiers  in 
the  army;  and  General  Howe  was  con 
fident,  now  that  he  was  in  possession  of 
Ihe  two  largest  cities  in  America,  that 
the  rebellion  would  soon  die  out. 

General  Howe  moved  the  army 
from  Germantown  down  to  the  out 
skirts  of  Philadelphia,  where  the  sup 
plies  could  be  delivered  directly  from 
the  ships.  He  established  his  head-quar 
ters  on  High  Street,  one  door  from  the 
corner  of  Sixth  Street.  He  was  kind  to  the  poor  people  in  the  city,  al 
lowing  them  to  go  out  past  the  pickets  to  get  flour  at  the  old  mill  in 
Frankford. 

General  Washington  was  still  at  Whitemarsh,  where  he  had  encamped 
after  the  battle  of  Germantown.     His  army  was  growing  weaker  day  by 
day.     What  to  do  he  did  not  know.     He  could  not  attack  Howe  in  Phila 
delphia.     Where  should  he  go,  or  what  do  ?     He  had  little  to  eat.     His 
soldiers  had  no  blankets.     Some  were  almost  naked.     Many  had  no  shoes. 
Winter  was  close  at  hand,  and  the  time  of  many  of  the  soldiers  was  expir 
ing.     Yet  still  he  waited,  hoping  that  Howe  would  make  some  movement. 
General  Howe  resolved  to  make  a  movement.     He  saw  that  Washing 
ton  was  growing  weaker ;  he  would  strike  one  more  blow,  and  finish  the 
war.     He  would  make  a  night  march,  fall  upon  Washington  like  a  thun 
der-bolt,  and  scatter  the  Amer 
icans  to  the  winds,  or  perhaps 
capture  the  entire  army.   None 
but  his  most  trustworthy  offi 
cers  should  know  of  the  move 
ment. 

General   Ilowe^s  adjutant 
general  was  quartered  at  Mr. 
Darrah's  house,  on  South  Sec 
ond   Street.       It   was   a   long 
brick  building,  with  a  balcony 
over    the    lower    story.      Mr. 
Darrah  was  a  Quaker,  but  he  was  a  Whig,  and  had  a  noble  wife — Lydia. 
"Lydia,"  said  the  British  adjutant -general,  one  day,  "  I  expect  some 


WHITEMARSH. 


256 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


friends  here  to-night,  and  I  want  the  upper  back-room  made  ready.  And, 
one  thing  more,  Lydia,  be  sure  to  have  all  the  folks  in  the  house  early  to 
bed." 

"  It  shall  be  as  thee  dost  desire,"  said  Lydia. 

In  the  evening,  General  Howe  and  several  of  his  officers  came  to  the 
house.  The  servants  were  all  in  bed.  Lydia  admitted  the  gentlemen. 

"You  can  go  to  bed  now,  Lydia,  and  lie  till  I  call,"  said  the  adjutant- 
general. 

Lydia  went  to  her  room,  lay  down  without  undressing,  but  not  to 
sleep.  What  were  the  officers  there  for?  Why  so  much  secrecy?  An 
irresistible  impulse  seizes  her  to  know  what  is  going  on.  In  her  stockings, 
she  glides  noiselessly  to  the  door  of  the  chamber,  bends  her  ear  to  the  key 
hole,  and  hears  the  adjutant -general  read  an  order,  which  General  Howe 
has  written : 

"  To-morrow  night  the  army  will  make  a  secret  march  to  surprise  and 


capture   the   American 
army." 

Back  to  her  room 
she  glides.  An  hour 
passes.  The  officers  are 
ready  to  leave,  and  the 
adjutant-general  knocks 
on  her  door.  She  is 
not  asleep,  but  all  her 
senses  are  awake  as 


LYDIA    DARRAH  S    HOUSE. 


never  before.  She 
makes  no  answer.  An 
other  rap — still  no  an 
swer.  A  thumping  now 
— she  is  sleeping  sound 
ly,  the  adj  ntant  -  gener 
al  thinks.  She  awakes. 
She  will  be  out  in  a 
moment.  She  arises, 


waits  a  little  while,  then 
appears  in  the  hall,  to  open  the  street-door  for  General  Howe  and  his  offi 
cers.  She  goes  back  to  bed ;  but  all  night  long  she  is  thinking,  and  pray 
ing  that  God  will  aid  her  in  what  she  is  about  to  do. 

Lydia  wanted  some  flour.  She  rode  on  horseback  in  the  morning  to 
General  Howe's  head-quarters,  and  obtained  a  pass  to  go  to  the  old  mill  in 
Frankford.  It  was  five  miles  to  the  mill ;  but  while  the  grist  was  grinding, 
she  had  time  to  ride  beyond  it  toward  Whitemarsh.  She  rode  till  stop 
ped  by  an  American  sentinel.  Major  Craig  was  in  command  of  the  pick 
ets.  Lydia  called  him  aside,  whispered  a  few  words  in  his  ear,  and  rode 
back,  took  her  grist,  and  returned  to  Philadelphia. 

Night  comes.  The  British  army  is  astir,  marching  secretly,  but  rapidly 
northward.  Just  before  day-break,  the  American  pickets,  who  have  been 
charged  to  be  on  the  watch,  discover  the  British  approaching.  Word 
runs  down  the  line,  but  General  Washington  is  ready.  The  army  is  unde/ 
vms,  and  in  line  of  battle. 


VALLEY  FORGE  AND  PHILADELPHIA. 

General  Howe  forms  his  line,  but  is  surprised  to  find  Washington  pre 
pared  for  him,  with  his  army  so  advantageously  posted  that  he  does  not 
dare  to  attack.  He  must  change  his  plan.  He  marches,  counter-marches ; 
there  is  some  skirmishing ;  but  Howe  does  not  think  it  prudent  to  bring 
on  a  battle.  Back  to  the  city  march  the  British.  The  adjutant-general 
rides  to  his  quarters. 

"  Lydia,  I  would  like  to  see  you  in  my  room,"  he  says  to  the  true-heart 
ed  woman.  "  Lydia,  were  any  of  your  family  up  on  the  night  that  1  re 
ceived  some  company  ?" 

"  Nay,  they  were  all  in  bed  at  eight  o'clock." 

"  Strange,  very  strange.  You,  I  know,  were  asleep,  Lydia ;  for  I  knock 
ed  three  times  at  your  door  before  I  could  wake  you :  yet  it  is  certain  we 
were  betrayed.  I  am  at  a  loss  to  think  who  could  have  given  information 
to  Washington  of  our  intended  movement.  We  found  him  drawn  up  in 
line  of  battle,  and,  like  a  pack  of  fools,  we  had  to  march  back  again." 

Foiled  in  his  effort  to  surprise  Washington,  General  Howe  settled  down 
in  Philadelphia  for  the  winter,  while  Washington,  with  his  army  dwindling 
every  day,  looked  around  to  find  winter-quarters.  Pitiable  the  condition 
of  the  troops — shoeless,  and  almost  naked. 

"  I  will  give  ten  dollars  to  the  man  who  will  get  up  the  best  shoe  out 
of  a  raw  hide,"  was  the  offer  of  Washington.  He  could  not  get  shoes,  and 
the  soldiers  took  the  hides  of  the  cattle  killed  for  beef  and  made  mocca 
sins  of  them. 

Valley  Forge  was  the  place  selected  for  winter-quarters,  and  thither  the 
army  marched.  What  an  uneasy  march  it  was  through  the  snow  by  the 
barefooted,  ragged  men!  All  the  way  there  were  blood-stains.  They  had 
to  ford  the  river  on  that  wintry  day;  and  when  they  reached  the  place  se 
lected  for  the  encampment,  they  had  to  sleep  on  the  frozen  ground  till 
they  could  build  huts.  They  had  few  axes,  but  in  a  very  short  time  each 
brigade  had  its  cluster  of  houses.  Each  brigade  was  a  village  by  itself, 
laid  out  in  streets,  each  house  sheltering  sixteen  men.  They  built  fire 
places  and  bunks  and  ovens.  Besides  their  houses,  they  had  to  build  in 
trenchments  and  forts,  guarding  against  a  surprise  from  the  British. 

The  camp  was  on  the  west  bank  of  the  Schuylkill.  It  was  a  strong  po 
sition — so  strong  that  General  Howe  did  not  care  to  make  an  attack  upon 
it.  General  Knox  had  his  cannon  planted  to  sweep  all  the  approaches 
The  snow  was  deep.  Very  little  provision  could  be  had,  and  less  clothing. 
Congress  had  no  supplies,  the  soldiers  no  money ;  Congress  failed  to  pay 
them ;  starvation  stared  them  in  the  face.  Oh,  the  dreary  days  of  that 
terrible  winter ! 


258 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


"For  some  days  past  there  has  been  little  less  than  a  famine  in  the 
camp,"  wrote  Washington  on  the  16th  of  February.  "  Some  of  the  men 
have  not  had  any  meat  for  a  week." 


WASHINGTON  S    HEAD-QUARTERS,  VALLEY    FORGE. 

Sickness  broke  out,  and  the  men  began  to  die.  They  could  get  no 
hay  for  the  artillery  horses.  The  people  in  the  vicinity  were  Tories,  who 
carried  every  thing  they  had  to  sell  to  Philadelphia,  where  they  could  ob 
tain  gold.  There  were  men  in  Congress,  and  officers  in  the  country,  who 
were  doing  what  they  could  to  degrade  Washington  from  the  command. 
Gloomy  the  days  !  But  amidst  the  gloom  the  great  man  commanding  the 

army  never  faltered,  nor  did  Gen 
eral  Greene,  nor  Sullivan,  nor 
Wayne;  not  one  among  the  offi 
cers,  nor  among  the  soldiers. 
They  were  starving,  but  they 
would  be  free. 

A  brave  man  came  into  the 
camp,  an  officer  from  Prussia, 
Baron  Steuben.  He  had  come 
across  the  ocean  to  aid  the  Amer 
icans,  and  Congress  made  him 
inspector  -  general.  The  troops 
were  undisciplined,  and  so  were 
the  officers.  They  knew  nothing 
of  military  drill,  but  under  the 
instruction  of  this  noble  man 
they  quickly  learned  how  to 
BARON  STEUBEN  handle  their  guns,  how  to  wheel, 


VALLEY  FORGE  AND  PHILADELPHIA. 


253 


and  march,  and  change  front.  He  was  sharp  and  strict,  but  was  as  kind- 
hearted  as  a  child,  and  the  soldiers  loved  him.  Starving,  almost  naked, 
yet  learning  how  to  fight.  So  the  winter  passed  away,  General  Howe 
never  once  molesting  them. 

The  people  of  England  were  dissatisfied  with  the  way  things  were 
going  on  in  America.  General  Howe  was  commander-in-chief,  and  his 
brother,  Admiral  Richard  Howe,  was  in  command  of  the  fleet.  The  win 
ter  had  passed,  and  General  Howe  had  been  spending  his  time  in  Phila 
delphia,  with  a  great  army  quartered  there.  He  had  made  no  effort  to  mo 
lest  Washington,  with  his  handful  of  starving  and  almost  naked  troops,  at 
Valley  Forge,  only  twenty  miles  away.  In  the  autumn  he  had  turned 
away  from  helping  Burgoyne — had  won  a  victory  at  Brandywine,  but  had 
been  all  but  defeated  at  Germantown.  He  had  declined  a  battle  at  Go- 
shen,  had  marched  out  to  Whitemarsh  to  surprise  Washington,  but  had 
returned,  not  daring  to  make  an  attack.  He  had  spent  the  winter  in  dis 
sipation  at  Philadelphia,  the  army  doing  nothing. 

There  was  so  much  dissatisfaction  with  General  Howe  in  England 
that  he  resigned,  and  Sir  Henry  Clinton  was  appointed  commander-in- 
chief.  General  Howe  was  to  sail  on  the  19th  of  May,  and  his  officers  got 
up  a  grand  entertainment  in  his  honor. 

Weeks  were  spent  in  making  preparations.  It  was  held  on  the  18th 
of  May.  First  there  was  a  procession  of  boats  on  the  river.  All  of  the 
boats  belonging  to  the  fleet  were  gayly  decorated  with  flags,  and  filled  with 
the  officers  of  the  navy  and  army  and  ladies.  Bands 
of  music  played,  and  salutes  were  fired  as  the  pro 
cession  moved  down  the  river  from  Mr.  Knight's 
wharf  to  Mr.  Wharton's  house,  where  upon  the  lawn 
in  front  of  it  triumphal  arches  and  spacious  pavilions 
had  been  erected. 

The  officers  landed,  the  grenadiers  and  light- 
infantry  vvere  drawn  up  to  receive  them,  and  they 
marched  beneath  the  triumphal  arches  to  the  lawn, 
where  a  tournament  was  to  be  held.  Two  small  pa 
vilions  had  been  erected  for  the  tournament.  On 
the  front  seats  of  each  were  seven  young  ladies, 
dressed  in  Turkish  costume,  wearing  turbans,  and 
exhibiting  the  favors  which  they  intended  to  bestow 
upon  the  gallant  knights  who  were  to  enter  the  lists 
in  their  behalf. 

Now  was  heard  the  blowing  o±  trumpets,  and  a  company  of  knights 


(XNE    OF    THE    LADIES. 


THE   BOYS   OF  776. 

dressed  in  the  costume  of  the  days  of  chivalry,  in  white  and  red,  mounted 
on  horses  gayly  caparisoned,  accompanied  by  their  squires,  came  down  the 
avenue.  In  advance  of  them  came  a  herald,  with  two  roses  on  the  lapel 
of  his  tunic,  with  the  motto,  "  We  droop  when  separated" 

Then  came  Lord  Cathcart  upon  a  powerful  horse.  He  was  chief  of  the 
knights.  Two  negro  slaves  ^^^  ^  ^ie  motto>  Surmounted 
wearing  white  breeches  and  by  Love.  The  "Knights  of 

blue  sashes,  with  large  silver  the   Blended  Rose,"  and  the 

clasps    around    their    necks,  "Knights     of    the    Burning 

held  his  stirrups.  On  his  HlBfcjr  Mountain/'  with  their  es- 
right  hand  walked  his  two  quires,  all  in  gorgeous  cos- 

esquires,  one  bearing  his  JF^^^^P  tume,  made  their  appear 
lance  and  the  other  his  &  Wv^  1  ance,  riding  in  front  of  the  pa- 
shield,  with  a  device  of  Cu-  CAPTAIN  vilions,  wheeling,  curveting, 
pid  riding  a  lion,  and  upon  CATHCAKT.  throwing  down  their  gloves, 
riding  at  each  other  full  tilt,  tiring  their  pistols,  flourishing  their  swords, 
and  doing  a  great  deal  of  foolery. 

When  the  tournament  was  over,  they  dismounted,  and  escorted  the 
ladies  into  the  great  pavilions,  and  had  lunch,  tea,  and  liquors;  and  the 
knights  kneeled  before  the  ladies,  and  received  their  favors.  From  the 
pavilions  they  went  into  the  great  dancing-hall,  which  had  been  erected, 
and  gayly  painted  and  decorated,  for  the  occasion. 

The  officers  had  been  through  the  city,  and  called  upon  the  citizens  to 
lend  their  mirrors  to  add  to  the  display,  and  had  obtained  eighty-five, 
which  were  placed  around  the  room  in  a  way  to  reflect  and  re-reflect  its 
bewildering  scenery.  Leading  from  the  hall  were  side  rooms  where  the 
dancers  could  obtain  refreshments.  The  bands  came  in  and  took  their 
places,  and  the  dancing  began,  and  was  kept  up  till  ten  o'clock,  when  there 
was  a  magnificent  display  of  fire-works  in  front  of  the  house,  and  all  Phil 
adelphia  was  there  to  witness  it.  At  midnight  supper  was  announced. 

Suddenly  one  side  of  the  ball-room  opened,  and  the  amazed  dancers 
perceived  that  what  they  had  supposed  to  be  a  blank  wall  was  a  series  of 
folding-doors,  which  had  been  concealed.  They  saw  before  them  a  mag 
nificent  saloon,  two  hundred  and  ten  feet  long,  forty  wide,  and  twenty-two 
high,  with  alcoves  for  sideboards.  The  ceiling  was  carved,  and  painted  a 
light  stone-color,  with  vine-leaves  and  festoons  of  flowers.  Fifty-six  pier- 
glasses  reflected  the  scene,  all  superbly  decorated  with  flowers.  There 
were  eighteen  chandeliers,  with  twenty-four  lights  each,  suspended  from 
the  ceiling,  and  one  hundred  branches,  or  side  lights,  with  three  candles 
in  each.  There  were  four  hundred  and  thirty  plates  laid.  Twenty-four 


VALLEY    FORGE   AND   PHILADELPHIA.  261 

black  slaves,  in  Oriental  costume,  with  silver  collars  on  their  necks,  bent 
low,  almost  touching  their  heads  to  the  floor,  as  General  Howe  and  the 
other  officers  entered.  Toward  the  end  of  supper  the  herald  of  the  Blend 
ed  Rose,  with  his  trumpeters,  came  into  the  hall  and  proclaimed  the  toasts 
—the  king's  health,  the  queen's,  the  royal  family,  the  army,  the  navy,  the 
knights,  and  the  ladies — the  bands  playing,  and  the  company  draining  their 
wine-glasses  at  each  toast. 

After  supper,  those  who  cared  to  dance  went  back  to  the  ball-room, 
while  those  who  preferred  to  play  cards  retired  to  the  pavilions,  and  played 
till  morning,  betting  high,  and  some  of  them  getting  so  drunk  that  their 
servants  had  to  carry  them  to  bed.  The  next  day  General  Howe  sailed 
for  England,  leaving  Sir  Henry  Clinton  in  command. 


262  THE  BOYS   OF  76. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

STONY   POINT. 

KING'S  FERRY  was  the  place  where  troops  and  provisions  were  taken 
across  the  Hudson,  a  line  of  communication,  of  great  value  to  Gen 
eral  Washington.  General  Clinton  thought  that  he  could  strike  a  dam 
aging  blow  by  securing  it.  The  ferry  was  from  Verplanck's  Point,  a  rocky 
headland  on  the  east  side,  to  Stony  Point  on  the  west  side.  At  Yerplanck's 
stood  Fort  Lafayette,  guarded  by  seventy  men.  Stony  Point,  another  small 
fortification,  was  guarded  by  twenty  men. 

On  the  night  of  May  31st,  1779,  Sir  Henry  Clinton  sailed  up  the 
Hudson  with  several  ships  of  war  and  a  large  force.  He  sent  General 
Vaughan  with  troops  to  the  east  shore.  Both  started  at  midnight,  Clinton 
to  take  Stony  Point,  Vaughan  to  take  Fort  Lafayette.  The  twenty  men 
at  Stony  Point  discovered  Clinton's  approach,  and  fled.  Sir  Henry  took 
possession  of  the  fort,  turned  its  guns  upon  Lafayette,  and  the  seventy  men 
had  to  surrender,  for  General  Vanghan  had  cut  off  their  retreat 


STONY    FOINT. 


Having  captured  the  forts,  Clinton  set  his  soldiers  to  work  to  make 
Stony  Point  a  formidable  fortress,  which  was  not  a  difficult  matter,  for  the 


STONY  POINT. 


263 


Point  was  a  rocky  hill  projecting  into  the  river,  with  a  marsh  behind,  over 
which  the  tide  flowed,  and  which  was  crossed  by  a  causeway  and  bridge. 
Two  lines  of  abatis  were  built  between  the  fort  and  the  marsh,  which  was 
nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  fort,  while  the  fort  itself  was  a  strong  work, 
large  enough  to  require  a  garrison  of  seven  hundred  men,  with  cannon 
mounted  to  defend  it  on  all  sides. 

All  communication  between  New  England  and  the  other  colonies  now 
was  at  West  Point  or  above,  which  was  a  great  inconvenience  to  Washing 
ton,  who  wished,  if  possible,  to  gain  possession  of  King's  Ferry  once  more* 
But  he  had  no  troops  to  spare  to  make  a  regular  attack.  If  captured  at 
all,  it  must  be  by  a  surprise.  There  was  one  general  in  the  army  who  was 
well  fitted  to  attempt  the  capture  of  Stony  Point  by  such  a  movement — 
the  general  who,  when  a  school-boy,  was  always  building  forts,  and  mar 
shaling  his  playmates :  neglecting  his  studies  until  his  good  old  uncle,  who 
was  educating  him,  gave  up  in  despair  of  his  ever  being  a  scholar.  This 
was  General  Wayne  —  "Mad  Anthony,"  the  soldiers  called  him,  because 
he  was  terribly  in  earnest  about  what  lie  undertook. 

General  Washington  met  General  Wayne  at  Sandy  Beach,  fourteen 
miles    from    Stony   Point,  to   talk 
over    the     matter.       Wayne    was 
ready  to  undertake  such  an  enter 
prise. 

u  Pll  storm  hell,  general,  if  you 
will  only  plan  it,"  said  Wayne. 

"Hadn't  we  better  try  Stony 
Point  first  ?"  Washington  replied. 

This  was  the  plan :  To  make 
a  night  march  ;  the  men,  with  their 
muskets  unloaded,  to  cross  the 
marsh  at  low  tide ;  a  party  in  ad 
vance  with  axes  to  clear  away  the 
abatis;  the  soldiers  to  wear  white 
cockades,  to  distinguish  each  other 
in  the  darkness,  and  rush,  with  fix 
ed  bayonets,  into  the  fort. 

General   Wayne    and    Colonel 

Febiger  reconnoitred  the  fort.  A  deserter  informed  General  Wayne  in 
regard  to  its  construction,  and  how  the  cannon  were  placed.  General 
Wayne  selected  his  troops,  and  thought  out  his  plan  of  attack,  but  kept  hi* 
plan  to  himself,  and  sent  out  small  parties  to  guard  all  the  roads,  and  pre 


GENERAL    ANTHONY    WAYNE. 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

vent  any  one  from  giving  information  to  the  British  of  any  movement  he 
might  make. 

The  fort  was  a  series  of  redoubts  on  the  summit  of  Stony  Point  and 
an  abatis,  which  extended  across  the  Point  a  little  distance  from  the  marsh. 
There  was  a  second  abatis,  extending  nearly  across  the  Point,  strengthened 
by  three  redoubts,  in  which  there  were  brass  twelve-pounders. 

At  twelve  o'clock  on  the  15th  of  July,  a  hot  summer  day,  General 
Wayne  starts  with  his  troops,  three  regiments  of  Continental  light-infant 
ry — one  under  Colonel  Butler,  one  under  Colonel  Febiger,  and  one  under 
Colonel  Meigs — also  a  battalion  of  Massachusetts  troops,  under  Major  Hull, 
and  two  companies  of  North  Carolina  troops,  under  Major  Murfey ;  also 
some  artillery-men,  to  work  the  cannon  in  the  fort,  if  he  succeeds  in  taking- 
it.  He  moves  along  narrow  roads — so  narrow  and  rocky  and  uneven  that 
the  men  march  some  of  the  way  in  single  file.  The  sun  goes  down,  and 
the  twilight  comes  on.  At  eight  o'clock,  the  head  of  the  column  is  at 
Mr.  Springsteel's,  a  mile  and  a  half  from  the  fort.  No  man  is  allowed  to 
speak.  In  silence  the  men  march,  in  silence  they  come  into  line,  throw 
themselves  upon  the  ground,  and  eat  their  supper  of  bread  and  cold  meat. 

General  Wayne  forms  his  men  into  two  columns.  The  right  column 
contains  Febiger's  and  Meigs's  regiment  and  Major  Hull's  battalion.  Col 
onel  Butler's  and  Major  Murfey's  troops  compose  the  other.  General 
Wayne  will  command  the  right,  and  Colonel  Butler  the  left.  lie  places 
one  hundred  and  fifty  men  in  advance  of  his  column,  under  Lieutenant- 
colonel  Fleury  ;  and  in  advance  of  them  twenty  pioneers,  under  Lieutenant 
Knox ;  and  in  front  of  the  other,  one  hundred  men,  under  Major  Stewart; 
and  twenty  pioneers,  under  Lieutenant  Gibbon.  The  men  do  not  know 
what  they  are  to  do.  Up  to  this  time,  Wayne  has  kept  the  plan  to  himself 
and  his  chief  officers.  He  orders  each  soldier  to  pin  a  piece  of  white  pa 
per  to  his  hat.  They  will  be  able  by  that  to  distinguish  friend  from  foe. 

"  We  are  going  to  attack  the  fort,"  he  said ;  "  and  the  first  man  inside 
of  it  shall  have  five  hundred  dollars,  and  immediate  promotion ;  the  sec 
ond,  four  hundred ;  the  third,  three  hundred ;  the  fourth,  two  hundred ; 
the  fifth,  one  hundred.  If  any  of  you  are  so  lost  to  the  sense  of  honor  as 
to  attempt  to  retreat  or  skulk,  any  officer  is  authorized  to  put  you  to  death. 
1  shall  share  the  dangers  with  you.  This  is  the  watch-word,  ( The  fort  is 
our  own?  " 

Till  half-past  eleven  the  men  rest ;  and  the  brave  general,  having  ma 
tured  all  his  plans,  writes  a  letter  to  a  friend  in  Philadelphia,  asking  him 
to  take  care  of  his  young  children  if  he  falls  in  the  assault.  This  done,  the 
columns,  in  silence,  move  toward  the  fort.  They  come  to  the  marsh.  Gen- 


STONY  POINT. 


267 


"\ 


itHffl     jQMWtol)f(7r/i 


eral  Wayne  moves  to  the  right,  and  Butler  to  the  left.  The  tide  has  not 
wholly  ebbed,  and  the  water  is  two  feet  deep  on  the  marsh. 

A  picket  stands  at  the  top  of  the  hill  south  of  the  bridge.  Two  men 
approach  him  stealthily,  and  before  he  can  give  an  alarm  he  is  a  prisoner. 
The  columns  divide — Wayne  going  down  the  hill  toward  the  marsh  near 
the  river,  and  Butler  toward  the  bridge.  The  men  enter  the  water.  A 
picket  on  the  side  toward  the  fort  hears  them,  fires  his  gun,  and  gives  the 
alarm.  The  sentinels  in  the  fort  hear  it,  and  the  drums  beat ;  the  British 
officers  and  soldiers  leap  from  their  barracks  and  seize  their  arms. 

A  moment  later,  and  the  cannon  are  flashing.  On  through  the  water, 
across  the  miry  marsh,  to  the  hill,  the  troops  move  with  unloaded  muskets. 
The  bayonet  alone  is  to  win  the  victory.  Up  to  the  abatis  rush  the  pio 
neers  with  their  axes.  Some  fall,  never  more  to  rise ;  but  the  others  work 
on,  cutting  away  the  timbers. 

They  make  an  opening,  and  the  column,  like  water  pouring  through  a 
mill-race,  rushes  through.  A  moment,  and  they  are  at  the  second  abatis. 
A  few  minutes  of  hard  work  there,  with  the  bullets  falling  like  hail  around 
them,  and  the  men  are  streaming  through  the  second  opening,  and  forming 
to  rush  upon  the  batteries.  A  shot  strikes  the  brave  leader — a  musket-ball, 
tearing  his  scalp  and  glancing  from  the  skull.  He  falls,  with  the  warm 
blood  streaming  over  his  face.  "  Forward  !  forward  !  Carry  me  into  the 
fort;  let  me  die  there  !"  he  shouts.  On,  over  rocks  and  fallen  trees,  led  by 
Fleury  and  Febiger,  rush  the  men,  to  avenge  the  fall  of  their  leader. 

"  The  fort  is  our  own  /"     Febiger  shouts  it.     "  The  fort  is  our  own!" 


268  THE   BOYS   OF   76. 

It  goes  up  from  five  hundred  voices.  On  over  the  breastworks,  plunging 
the  bayonet  into  all  who  resist,  like  a  tornado  they  sweep,  bearing  down 
all  before  them.  Cannon  blaze  in  their  faces,  but  there  are  no  answer 
ing  guns.  Nothing  can  resist  the  furious  assault.  Over  on  the  left,  at  the 
same  moment,  Butler  is  sweeping  over  the  breastworks.  "  The  fort  in 
our  own  f"  is  the  answering  cry,  ringing  out  over  the  hills. 

The  British  see  only  an  array  of  dusky  forms  in  the  darkness,  an  army 
of  black  shadows  pouring  into  the  fort,  encircling  them  on  all  sides.  They 
fire  at  the  shadows,  and  the  next  moment  the  shadows  are  trampling  them 
to  the  earth,  and  the  bayonet  is  doing  its  bloody  work.  "  Mercy !  mercy  ! 
Don't  kill  us !  We  surrender !  Mercy  !  mercy  !" 

Just  such  a  cry  went  up  in  the  woods  of  Long  Island  from  American 
lips,  but  British  ears  were  deaf  to  the  cry.  It  was  fun  to  pin  the  rebels 
to  the  earth  with  the  bayonet,  to  cut  and  mangle  them  while  they  cried 
for  mercy.  Shall  not  the  victors  have  their  revenge  ?  Shall  they  not  have 
the  satisfaction  of  driving  home  the  bayonet  and  avenging  their  comrades? 
No.  There  is  no  revenge  so  sweet  and  satisfying  as  mercy.  It  is  the 
glory  of  this  hour  of  triumph  that  the  cry  is  not  made  in  vain.  The  mo 
ment  that  resistance  ceases,  the  slaughter  stops.  Let  it  be  remembered 
forever  that  there,  in  the  darkness  at  Stony  Point,  in  the  hour  of  triumph, 
with  the  memory  of  past  wrongs  rankling  in  their  hearts,  the  men  who  are 
fighting  for  their  liberty  heed  the  cry  for  mercy.  No  blood  shed  in  re 
venge  stains  their  victory. 

Fifteen  minutes  ago  the  Americans  were  wading  through  the  water  on 
the  marsh;  but  the  fort  is  their  own;  and  their  brave  leader,  stunned,  not 
killed,  is  receiving  Colonel  Johnson's  surrender.  In  these  fifteen  minutes, 
fifteen  Americans  have  been  killed  and  eighty  wounded ;  of  the  British, 
nineteen  have  been  killed,  seventy -two  wounded,  and  four  hundred  and 
sixty -seven  captured. 

At  two  o'clock  in  the  morning,  General  Wayne  writes  this  letter  to 
Washington : 

"Stony  Point,  16th  July,  1779.     2  o'clock  A.M. 

"DEAR  GENERAL,  —  The  fort  and  garrison,  with  Colonel  Johnson,  are 
ours.  Our  officers  and  men  behaved  like  men  who  are  determined  to  be 
free.  Yours  most  sincerely,  ANTT  WAYNE. 

"GENERAL  WASHINGTON." 

Morning  came,  and  the  artillery-men  turned  the  cannon  upon  the  British 
vessels,  compelling  them  to  slip  their  cables  and  drift  down  stream.  Great 
was  the  rejoicing  over  the  exploit  of  "  Mad  Anthony  "  and  his  men. 


MONMOUTH. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

MONMOUTH. 

THE  ship  which  brought  Sir  Henry  Clinton's  commission  as  command 
er- in -chief  also  brought  an  order  for  him  to  evacuate  Philadelphia, 
and  concentrate  his  troops  at  New  York.  War  had  been  declared  between 
England  and  France,  and  it  would  not  be  an  easy  matter  to  supply  the 
army  at  Philadelphia,  so  far  inland,  with  all  the  French  navy  afloat  upon 
the  sea,  and  American  privateers  swarming  along  the  coast,  on  the  watch 
for  supply-ships. 

Sir  Henry  Clinton  was  a  more  energetic  officer  than  General  Howe, 
and  he  began  at  once  to  prepare  to  evacuate  Philadelphia;  but  he  had 
such  an  amount  of  baggage,  so  many  ship-loads  of  supplies,  that  a  month 
passed  before  he  was  able  to  begin  his  march.  The  vessels  finally  were 
loaded.  The  officers  bade  farewell  to  the  ladies  with  whom  they  had 
danced,  and  were  ready  for  their  departure. 

General  Clinton  had  about  ten  thousand  men.  He  gathered  up  all 
the  horses  and  wagons  he  could  find,  sent  out  parties  to  scour  the  country 
and  bring  in  all  they  could  lay  their  hands  upon,  taking  them  without 
offering  any  pay  in  return.  He  collected  all  the  boats  of  the  fleet,  and 
had  them  moored  along  the  shore  below  the  city.  He  let  it  be  understood 
that  the  army  was  going  by  water,  thinking  thus  to  deceive  Washington, 
who  was  still  at  Yalley  Forge  keeping  a  keen  lookout. 

On  the  17th  of  June,  General  Clinton  started.  The  soldiers  left  their 
barracks,  marched  down  to  the  river-bank,  stepped  into  the  boats,  and  were 
ferried  across  to  the  New  Jersey  shore  —  riot  all,  for  the  Hessians  from 
Anspach  had  been  so  long  in  America  that  they  began  to  like  the  country ; 
and  Sir  Henry  was  afraid  that,  if  he  undertook  to  march  them  across  New 
Jersey,  they  would  desert  in  a  body.  It  was  about  nine  o'clock  when  the 
army  began  to  cross ;  the  boats  were  going  from  shore  to  shore  all  through 
the  night.  By  nine  o'clock  on  the  morning  of  the  18th,  General  Clinton 
was  at  Haddon  field — five  miles  from  the  river.  The  baggage  was  there, 
and  General  Knyphausen's  division  was  appointed  to  guard  it.  The  Bail- 


270 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


A   BAGGAGE- WAGON. 


gers  and  Yagers,  under  General  Leslie,  were  mounted  on  good  horses the 

best  in  the  army — and  started  in  advance  to  scour  the  country,  robbing  and 
plundering  the  inhabitants.  General  Clinton  started  for  the  Earitan  Kiver, 
where  he  would  embark  the  troops.  He  had  so  many  wagons  and  horses 
loaded  with  packs  that,  with 
his  troops,  the  column  was 
twelve  miles  long. 

If  General  Clinton  sup 
posed  that  Washington  was 
all  in  the  dark  as  to  his 
movements,  he  was  mis 
taken,  for,  on  the  30th  of 
May,  Washington  had  made 
all  preparations  to  march 
to  the  Hudson  the  moment  General  Clinton  started.  His  orders  were  all 
written  out ;  the  baggage  was  kept  in  condition  to  be  packed  in  a  moment. 

The  army  consisted  of  five  divisions.  The  first  was  commanded  by 
General  Lee,  and  consisted  of  Poor's  New  Hampshire  brigade,  Yarn  urn's 
Rhode  Islanders,  and  the  Connecticut  brigade.  The  second  division  was 
commanded  by  General  Miiflin,  and  consisted  of  three  brigades,  mostly 
from  Pennsylvania.  The  third  was  commanded  by  General  Lafayette, 
and  consisted  of  North  Carolina  and  New  York  troops.  The  fourth 
was  commanded  by  Baron  De  Kalb,  and  consisted  of  Glover's,  Pater- 
sou's,  and  Learned's  brigades  of  Massachusetts  troops.  The  fifth  was  com 
manded  by  Lord  Stirling,  and  consisted  of  Yirginia  and  Maryland  troops. 
There  were  sixteen  brigades,  besides  the  artillery  and  the  cavalry — in  all, 
about  ten  thousand. 

Besides  these,  there  were  the  troops  under  General  Maxwell,  and  the 
New  Jersey  militia  under  General  Dickinson — about  two  thousand  more. 
General  Washington  directed  General  Maxwell  and  General  Dickinson 
to  break  down  the  bridges  on  all  the  streams  in  advance  of  Clinton ;  and 
these  troops  were  scattered  here  and  there  to  do  what  they  couid  to  im 
pede  his  march. 

General  Washington  sent  a  trusty  man — Captain  M'Lane — into  Phil 
adelphia  to  ascertain  what  was  going  on.  He  crossed  the  river  with  the 
troops,  went  through  the  ranks  at  Haddonfield,  saw  the  order  in  which  they 
were  to  march,  then  made  his  way  back  to  the  city,  and  before  ten  o'clock 
on  the  morning  of  the  18th,  while  Sir  Henry  was  at  Haddonfield,  Captain 
M'Lane  was  riding  into  Washington's  camp  at  Yalley  Forge  with  the 
news.  Before  night  the  whole  army  was  in  motion ;  leaving  the  place 


MONMOUTH. 


271 


forever  consecrated  to  liberty  by  its  terrible  suffering  and  patient  endur 


ance. 


General  Greene  was  quartermaster-general.  He  had  made  admirable 
arrangements  to  supply  the  army  with  food.  General  Lee  had  been  ex 
changed  for  General  Prescott,  who  had  been  captured  in  Rhode  Island, 
and  was  once  more  in  command  of  his  division.  General  Washington 
wanted  to  attack  the  British  at  the  first  favorable  opportunity ;  but  General 
Lee  and  a  majority  of  the  generals  thought  it  better  to  hover  on  Clinton's 
flanks  and  rear,  and  cut  off  his  men  piecemeal.  The  army  crossed  the 
Delaware,  the  second  and  fourth  divisions  at 
CoryelPs  Ferry,  above  Trenton,  and  the  other 
divisions  at  Sherard's  Ferry. 

General  .Clinton  did  not  wish  to  fight  a 
battle  except  on  ground  of  his 


THE    COUNTRY 
BETWEEN    NEW 

YORK    AND 
PHILADELPHIA. 


own  choosing.    Lie  found 
it  slow  marching  along  the 
sandy   roads.     He    soon    saw 
that  General  Washington  would 
give  him  trouble  if  he   undertook  to 
'march    to   the   Raritan    River;    for  Washington,  al~ 
though  he  had  farther  to  march,  was  moving  swiftly. 

On  the  25th  of  June,  Clinton  concluded  to  make  a  rap 
id  march  to  Sandy  Hook,  and  turned  east  for  that  purpose. 
On  Saturday,  June  27th,  Captain  Elijah  Favor,  engineer  and  aid  to 
General  Washington,  was  riding  from  division  to  division,  exploring  all 
the  roads.  General  Washington  was  at  Englishtown,  six  miles  west  of 
Monmouth,  with  Mifflin's,  De  Kalb's,  and  Stirling's  divisions.  Elijah 
started  with  an  order  to  General  Lee,  who  was  commanding  in  advance, 
"  to  attack  the  enemy  unless  there  should  be  powerful  reasons  to  the  con 
trary."  He  found  General  Lee  half-way  between  Englishtown  and  Mon 
mouth  Court-house,  encamped  near  Freehold  meeting-house,  a  wooden 
building,  with  a  weather-cock  on  the  steeple,  and  old  moss-covered  grave 
stones  around. 


272 


THE  HOYS  OF  76. 


THE    MEETIXG-HOTJSK    AT    FREEHOLD. 


far  beyond  the  meeting-house  was  the  parsonage-house^  a  small, 
>ne-storied  building,  with  a  steep  roof,  a  chimney  at  each  end,  a  \vell- 

sweep  and  a  barn  near  by. 
Beyond  the  parsonage  was  an 
orchard,  and  beyond  that  a 
swamp.  He  crossed  the  swamp 
on  a  corduroy  road,  and  came 
to  a  hill  east  of  it.  where  Mr. 
Wikoff  lived.  Near  Mr.  Wi- 
koffs  was  a  heolge-fence.  Eli 
jah  w.as  accustomed  to  observe 
the  natural  features  of  the 
country,  and  he  saw  in  an  in 
stant  that  a  body  of  men  shel 
tered  by  such  a  hedge  might 

make  a  stout  resistance  to  an  enemy  in  front.     South-east  from  Mr.  Wi- 
koff's  was  Mr.  Carr's  house,  about  half  a  mile  distant. 

"  The  British  are  at  the  court-house/'7  said  Mr.  Wikoff. 
Elijah  rode  toward  Mr.  Carr's  house,  where  he  found  General  Lee's 
pickets.  From  Mr.  Carr's  he  could  see  the  Queen's  Rangers  and  some  in 
fantry  encamped  in  a  field  just  north  of  the  court-house.  He  could  .see 
that  there  was  a  road  leading  north  from  the  court-house  to  Amboy,  and 
another  leading  east  toward  Middletown  and  Sandy  Hook. 

"  General  Clinton  has  sent  his  baggage  in  advance  to  Middletown," 
said  Mr.  Carr,  "  and  these  are  only  the  rear-guard.  There  are  more 
troops  up  in  that  direction,"  he  added,  pointing  north-east. 

Elijah  turned  north,  for  he  was  almost  up  to  the  British  pickets,  and 
rode  through  the  fields  till  he  came  to  a  road  leading  from  the  meeting 
house  to  the  Amboy  road,  rode  up  that  to  the  Amboy  road,  where  he 
could  see  the  British  grenadiers  encamped  on  the  east  side  of  another 
swamp  in  a  field.  Having  seen  this,  he  hastened  back  to  the  meeting 
house,  saw  Generals  Lee  and  Lafayette,  and  reported  what  he  had  seen. 

A  little  after  midnight,  Elijah  rode  from  General  Washington's 
headquarters  to  General  Lee's  with  an  order.  General  Washington 
wished  General  Lee  to  send  six  or  eight  hundred  men  south  of  the  court 
house  to  make  an  attack  upon  the  British  the  moment  they  were  ready 
to  move  on. 

It  was  Sunday  morning.  General  Lee  read  the  order,  looked  at  his 
watch,  and  saw  that  it  was  nearly  one  o'clock.  It  would  be  light  by 
three,  and  the  British  would  begin  to  move  before  sunrise. 


MONMOUTH.  273 

"  I  will  send  Colonel  Morgan,"  said  General  Lee. 

Captain  Edwards,  Lee's  aid,  wrote  an  order  to  Morgan,  directing  him 
to  march  at  once  and  join  General  Dickinson,  who  was  south-east  of  the 
court-house,  and  to  make  an  attack  as  soon  as  the  British  started.  A  few 
minutes  later,  Colonel  Morgan  was  on  the  march. 

"  The  British  are  getting  ready  to  move,"  was  the  word  which  General 
Dickinson  sent  in. 

General  Lee  ordered  his  troops  to  leave  their  packs  by  the  meeting 
house,  and  those  who  were  lame  and  worn  out  to  guard  them.  The  troops 
were  soon  ready  to  move,  but  there  was  no  one  to  guide  them.  None  of 
the  officers  knew  the  ground.  Elijah  offered  to  act  as  guide.  With  six 
cavalry-men  to  act  as  scouts,  the  column  started  up  the  road  leading  from 
the  meetingrhouse  to  the  Amboy  road. 

Colonel  Grayson's  Virginia  regiment  led  the  column,  followed  by  Col 
onel  Jackson's  Massachusetts  regiment.  Then  came  Scott's,  Vanillin's, 
Wayne's,  and  Maxwell's  brigade,  and  Colonel  Oswald's  artillery.  Alto 
gether,  General  Lee  had  about  four  thousand  men. 

The  sun  had  risen.  The  air  was  sultry.  Not  a  breath  stirred  the 
leaves  of  the  maples.  The  farmers,  knowing  that  a  battle  was  imminent, 
had  flocked  in  from  the  surrounding  country  to  see  it,  and  walked  along 
with  the  soldiers.  There  was  no  beating  of  drums,  for  General  Lee  did 
not  want  to  let  the  British  know  that  he  was  on  the  march. 

Colonel  Grayson  came  to  the  Amboy  road,  marched  across  it,  turned 
north-east,  crossed  a  little  brook  winding  through  a  swampy  piece  of 
ground.  They  were  on  the  left  flank  of  the  British  encamped  on  the  plain. 
Colonel  *Jackson,  General  Scott,  and  General  Maxwell  followed.  General 
Wayne  marched  straight  across  the  road  to  a  piece  of  woods,  and  was  in 
front  of  the  British. 

The  pickets  were  firing  at  each  other  down  by  the  court-house.  lie 
rode  down  in  that  direction.  North-east  of  the  court-house  he  could  see 
the  Queen's  Rangers,  five  or  six  hundred,  and  as  many  grenadiers,  getting 
ready  to  make  a  charge.  He  found  General  Lee  talking  with  General 
Dickinson.  "The  whole  British  army  is  close  by,"  said  General  Dickin 
son,  "  and  I  think  they  will  send  a  column  to  flank  us  on  the  right." 

It  was  nine  o'clock,  and  the  sun  was  intensely  hot.  The  soldiers  wiped 
the  perspiration  from  their  foreheads,  drank  at  the  brook,  and  filled  their 
canteens.  The  British  cavalry  came  trotting  over  the  plain  to  make  a 
charge,  but  Jackson's  men  fired  a  volley,  and  they  fled  in  great  confusion. 

Captain  Oswald  wheeled  up  two  of  his  cannon  across  the  swamp.  He 
had  only  one  ammunition-wagon,  and  it  was  so  heavy  that  he  could  not  get 


274  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

it  across,  and  the  soldiers  carried  the  cartridges  in  their  arms.  He  sent  his 
shot  whirring  across  the  plain,  plump  into  the  ranks  of  the  British.  The 
British  artillery  opened — one  twelve-pounder  and  five  six-pounders.  Os 
wald's  gunners  fell,  one  by  one,  till  at  last  there  were  not  men  enough  to 
work  one  of  the  guns. 

General  Wayne  was  under  Lafayette,  and  his  brigade  moved  down 
near  the  court-house.  Lafayette  thought  it  a  good  time  to  make  a  charge 
and  capture  the  British  cannon. 

"  Be  ready  to  charge,"  was  Wayne's  order  to  his  troops.  His  soldiers 
believed  in  him.  He  was  so  fearless  on  the  battle-field  that  they  called 
him  "  Mad  Anthony." 

"  Retreat !"  was  the  order  that  came  to  Wayne  from  Lee.  Wayne 
could  not  understand  it,  but,  instead  of  attacking,  he  began  to  retreat  by 
the  court-house.  General  Lee  had  discovered  that  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  who 
had  started  for  Middletown,  had  faced  about  with  his  divisions,  and  was 
rapidly  advancing.  The  information  he  received  in  regard  to  the  British 
was  contradictory.  He  did  not  wish  to  bring  on  a  general  engagement, 
but  to  cut  off  the  rear-guard.  The  ground  upon  which  he  was  located  was 
not  favorable,  and  he  ordered  the  troops  under  Lafayette  to  fall  back. 

Contradictory  orders  reached  Scott,  Gray  son,  Maxwell,  and  Jackson. 
Some  of  the  regiments  were  advancing,  others  standing  still,  others  retreat 
ing.  Soon  all  was  confusion.  The  British  cavalry  made  a  charge,  and 
added  to  the  confusion.  Back  through  the  woods  and  fields,  and  across 
the  swamps,  the  troops  marched — some  of  them  going  upon  the  run — pant 
ing  in  the  heat,  back  past  Mr.  Carr's  house,  through  grain -fields  and  over 
fences. 

General  Washington  had  reached  the  meeting-house,  where  Lee's  men 
had  left  their  knapsacks.  He  was  glad  to  know  that,  after  all  the  months 
of  waiting,  he  was  at  last  up  with  the  enemy.  He  gave  the  command  of 
the  right  wing  to  General  Greene,  and  the  left  to  General  Stirling,  urging 
them  to  hasten  on.  He  did  not  know  what  was  going  on  in  front,  but  just 
beyond  the  meeting-house  he  met  a  fifer  who  was  running,  and  who  was 
very  much  frightened. 

"  What  are  you  running  away  for  ?"  asked  Washington. 

"  The  army  is  retreating,"  said  the  fifer. 

"  The  army  retreating !  I'll  have  you  whipped,  sir,  for  telling  such  a 
story !"  said  Washington,  who  turned  to  a  cavalry-man  and  said,  "  Here, 
keep  this  fellow  under  guard." 

Washington  rides  on.     He  meets  another  man. 

"  Do  you  belong  to  the  army  ?" 


MONMOUTH.  275 

«  Yes,  sir." 

"  Where  do  you  come  from,  and  what  are  you  retreating  for  ?" 

"  The  whole  army  is  retreating." 

"  I  can  not  believe  it." 

"  I  will  go  forward,  your  Excellency,  and  see  what  this  means,"  says 
3ne  of  Washington's  aids,  Colonel  Harrison,  who  rides  away  upon  the  gal 
lop. 

"  What  are  you  retreating  for  ?"  he  asks  of  Captain  Jones,  in  Colonel 
Gray  son's  regiment. 

"  All  of  the  troops  are  retreating." 

"  What  are  you  retreating  for  ?"  he  asks  of  Captain  William  Smith. 

"  That  is  more  than  I  can  tell." 

Captain  Harrison  meets  Colonel  Ogden,  and  asks  the  same  questions. 

Colonel  Ogden  is  red  in  the  face.  He  is  hot  and  panting  and  angry, 
not  at  the  question,  but  because  the  army  is  retreating.  He  swears  a  big 
oath. 

"  We  are  flying  from  a  shadow,  sir ;"  and  then  there  are  more  oaths. 

Colonel  Harrison  meets  Colonel  Mercer. 

"  You  will  find  out  presently  what  we  are  retreating  for.  You  will  see 
several  columns  of  infantry  and  horsemen  in  a  few  minutes,"  says  Captain 
Mercer. 

"  There  are  no  more  British  now  than  when  they  marched  from  Phila 
delphia,  and  we  came  here  to  meet  foot  and  horse,"  is  the  reply  of  the 
plucky  colonel. 

He  meets  Lieutenant-colonel  Rhea,  of  New  Jersey. 

"  What  are  you  retreating  for  ?"  is  the  question. 

"  There  is  no  need  of  our  retreating,  and  we  are  not  ordered  to  retreat 
to  any  particular  place." 

General  Washington  rides  across  the  swamp  near  the  parsonage,  as 
cends  the  hill  upon  the  other  side  of  it,  and  meets  General  Lee. 

"  What  is  all  this  ?"  Washington  asks,  with  a  flushed  face. 

"Sir?   sir?" 

It  is  all  that  General  Lee  can  utter  at  the  moment.  Perhaps  he  does 
not  quite  understand  the  question,  and  he  sees  that  Washington  is  very 
angry. 

"  Whence  this  retreat,  and  what  the  meaning  of  this  confusion  ?"  Wash 
ington  asks. 

"  My  orders  have  not  been  obeyed,"  Lee  replies. 

"  It  is  only  the  rear-guard  and  a  covering  party  that  you  are  retreating 
from." 


276 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


t(  Perhaps  so ;  but  the  enemy  is  stronger  than  I  am,  and  I  did  not  want 
to  risk  being  cut  off." 

"You  ought  not  to  have  solicited  the  command,  unless  you  intended 
to  tight." 

"  It  is  not  for  the  interest  of  the  army  to  have  a  general  action,  and, 
under  the  circumstances,  I  did  not  feel  warranted  in  bringing  on  one." 

General  Washington  makes  no  reply,  but  rides  forward. 

The  troops  commanded  by  Lafayette  and  Wayne  are  coming  from  the 
court-house,  marching  past  Mr.  Carr's  house.  Colonel  Oswald  orders  Cap 
tain  Cook  to  place  two  of  his  guns  in  the  orchard  near  Mr.  Carr's.  Cook 
unlimbers  them,  and  opens  fire  once  more  upon  the  British. 

Maxwell,  Scott,  Grayson,  and  Jackson  are  retreating  through  the  woods 


"i^^MJfcsttWr-^^ 


PLAN   OF   THE    BATTLE    AT   MONMOUTH. 

K  a,  a,  position  occupied  by  the  British  army  the  night  before  the  battle;  b,  Britten  cletach- 

f  ment  moving  toward  Monmouth  ;  c,  c,  British  batteries ;  d,  d,  Colonel  Oswald's  American  bat- 

Jl  teries  •  c,  American  troops  formed  near  the  court-house ;  /,  first  position  taken  by  General  Lee 

in  hif  retreat ;  g,  attack  of  the  British  in  the  woods ;  h,  h,  position  taken  by  General  Lee ;  i,  a 
British  detachment;  k,  last  position  of  the  British  troops  west  of  the  marsh;  m,  army  formed  by  Washing 
ton;  n,  British  detachment;  o,  American  battery;  p,  parsonage  ;  r,  first  position  of  British  after  the  battler 
«,  second  position;  t,  where  the  British  lay  through  the  night;  1,  the  place  where  Washington  met  Lee;  2. 
the  hedge-row ;  3,  the  meeting-house ;  A,  Maxwell's  brigade ;  B,  Wayne's  brigade ;  C,  Varnum's  brigade ;  D. 
Scott's  brigade;  E,  F,  Jackson'8  and  Grayson's  regiments;  G,  Mr.  Carr's  house;  H,  I,  J,  Maxwell,  Scott 
Grayson,  and  Jackson  marching  to  the  attack ;  K,  L,  Greene  and  Varnum ;  M,  Stirling ;  N,  Lafayette ;  O, 
Greene  and  Washington. 

on  the  left.  Varnum's  brigade  is  coming  back  by  the  hedge-fence.  The 
British  cavalry  are  pressing  hard  upon  the  rear  of  those  retreating  from 
the  court-house.  They  are  close  upon  the  two  cannon  which  Oswald  has 
had  in  position  on  the  plain. 

Elijah  sees,  and  so  does  every  body  else,  that,  unless  a  stand  be  made  on 
the  hill  between  Mr.  Carr's  house  and  the  swamp,  the  guns  will  be  lost. 
He  remembers  the  hedge-fence,  and  points  out  the  spot  to  General  Wayne. 

"  Take  position  there  !"  shouts  Wayne  to  Lieutenant  -  colonel   Olney, 


MONMOUTH.  277 

leading  Yarnum's  brigade.  The  panting  men,  just  ready  to  drop  fainting 
to  the  earth,  overcome  by  the  heat,  file  round  the  fence,  and  take  position 
behind  it.  Past  them  go  the  retreating  troops.  Cook  has  got  his  two 
cannon  into  position.  Oswald  is  there  with  Cook.  On  come  the  British. 
The  cannon  thunder,  and  Yarn  urn's  men  pour  in  a  deadly  fire,  and  the 
British  cavalry-men  tumble  from  their  horses,  and  the  grenadiers  reel  to 
the  earth. 

Up  to  this  moment  there  has  been  no  battle,  only  a  little  skirmishing 
and  cannonading.  A  golden  opportunity  has  been  lost  through  a  misun 
derstanding  of  orders,  through  indecision,  through  contradictory  informa 
tion,  through  disinclination  of  Lee  to  bring  on  a  general  engagement.  Far 
different  would  have  been  the  aspect  of  affairs,  if  Scott,  Jackson,  Grayson, 
Maxwell,  and  Wayne  had  been  directed  to  fall  with  all  their  force  upon 
the  British  early  in  the  morning.  But  now  they  are  all  in  retreat.  The 
militia,  under  Dickinson,  are  scattered  everywhere,  while  Morgan,  who 
has  been  making  a  long  march  to  be  ready  to  fall  upon  the  British  flank, 
is  chafing  like  a  lion  under  the  change  that  has  taken  place  in  Lee's  ar 
rangements.  It  will  not  do  for  him  to  attack  now.  Lee  and  Washington 
meet  once  more  by  the  hedge -fence.  It  is  no  time  for  the  commander 
in-chief  to  be  angry  now.  He  needs  Lee's  services. 

"Will  you  take  command  here,  sir?"  Washington  asked. 

"  Yes,  sir;  and  your  orders  shall  be  obeyed." 

Washington  rides  across  the  causeway  to  the  parsonage.  The  main 
army  has  arrived.  In  a  moment  Greene  is  arranging  his  division  on  the 
right,  and  Stirling  on  the  left. 

"  Form  in  rear !"  is  Washington's  order  to  the  retreating  troops ;  and 
Grayson,  Maxwell,  Scott,  Jackson,  Wayne,  all  form  behind  the  new  line. 

General  Kuox  has  been  riding  over  the  field.  He  sees  where  he  can 
plant  his  cannon  to  good  advantage.  The  British,  under  Cornwallis,  have 
been  coming  round  upon  the  left,  and  now  Clinton  advances  from  the 
court-house.  Yarnum  retreats  across  the  swamp.  Captain  Cook  brings 
hack  his  guns,  and  the  British  artillery  and  infantry  take  possession  of  the 
hedge-fence,  and  the  battle  begins  in  earnest. 

It  is  past  noon.  The  sun  hangs  like  a  brazen  ball  in  the  sky.  There 
is  not  a  breath  of  air  to  cool  the  fevered  brows  of  the  soldiers  in  either 
army.  Men  drop  fainting  to  the  earth,  stricken  down  by  the  sun.  Some 
of  the  skirmishers  are  in  an  orchard,  and  fight  beneath  the  shade  of  the 
apple-trees.  Some  gain  the  covert  of  the  woods,  secure  themselves  behind 
the  trees,  and  pour  a  galling  fire  upon  the  red-coats.  Some  find  shelter  in 
the  parsonage  barn.  Spectators  have  climbed  upon  the  roof  of  the  meet- 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


fri£3M" 

''A?*','*-.-- 


THE    BATTLE-FIELD    AT    MONMOUTH. 

[This  view  is  toward  the  north.  The  house  is  the  parsonage  in  which 
Mr.  Freeman  lived.  The  tree  at  the  left  hand,  with  boys  and  dog  beneath  it, 
is  standing  in  the  orchard  where  Wayne  took  position  on  the  retreat,  and 
where  Oswald  opened  his  batteries.  The  American  line  extended  past  the 
house.  On  the  hill  beyond  the  well-sweep  General  Greene  posted  his  men; 
and  on  the  hill  seen  in  the  distance,  between  the  house  and  barn,  Stirling 
took  position.  The  morass  was  in  the  hollow  to  the  right  of  the  barn.  The 

hedge-row  was  on  the  top  of  the  hill  beyond  the  two  men  in  the  field.  The  British  cannon  were  planted 
there.  General  Knox  placed  the  American  artillery  behind  the  house.  The  British  General  Monckton  was 
killed  on  the  side  of  the  hill  near  where  the  two  men  are  standing.] 

ing-house  to  watch  the  strife.  Some  are  standing  in  the  church-yard.  A 
cannon-ball  comes  bounding  over  the  ground,  and  mortally  wounds  a  man 
who  is  sitting  upon  a  grave-stone. 

Oswald's  men  work  their  guns  with  great  vigor,  sending  solid  shot  and 
grape-shot  across  the  swamp  into  the  ranks  of  the  British.  One  of  the 
gunners,  an  Irishman,  falls.  He  is  married,  and  his  wife  Molly  has  been 
with  him  through  all  the  campaign.  She  is  bringing  water  from  a  spring 
for  the  gunners  to  wet  the  sponges  when  they  swab  the  cannon.  She 
puts  down  her  bucket,  seizes  the  rammer,  and  takes  his  place  at  the  gun. 
The  army  cheers  her  as  she  rams  home  cartridge  after  cartridge. 

All  through  the  afternoon  the  fight  goes  on.  No  more  retreating  now. 
The  drill  which  the  soldiers  have  had  under  Baron  Steuben,  at  Valley 
Forge,  is  telling  in  this  battle.  Since  that  terrible  day  for  the  British  at 
Bunker  Hill,  Sir  Henry  Clinton  has  seen  no  such  obstinate  fighting.  Corn- 
wallis  makes  an  attempt  to  turn  Stirling's  left,  but  is  driven.  Clinton 
pounds  away  at  Wayne  in  the  centre,  but  without  avail.  He  tries  to  turn 
Greene's  right,  but  Knox  brings  up  his  spare  guns,  arid  sends  a  storm  of 
shot  and  shell  into  the  advancing  ranks. 


MONMOUTH.  279 

The  sun  goes  down  with  the  roar  of  the  conflict  still  rolling  far  away. 
The  troops  of  both  armies  are  exhausted ;  but  Washington,  having  restored 
order  out  of  confusion,  having  held  his  ground  against  every  attempt  of 
Clinton  and  Cornwallis,  is  determined  to  renew  the  attack  in  the  morning. 
He  sends  General  Poor,  with  the  New  Hampshire  troops  from  Stirling's 
position,  round  upon  the  left,  to  be  ready  to  begin  the  attack  at  daylight. 

The  troops  eat  their  supper  without  leaving  their  ranks,  and  lie  upon 
their  arms.  Washington  issues  his  final  orders,  wraps  himself  in  his  cloak, 
and  lies  down  with  them. 

Midnight.  The  British  are  astir.  They,  too,  have  been  lying  upon 
their  arms..  Silently  they  rise  and  move  away,  regiment  by  regiment, 
battery  after  battery,  the  pickets  going  last :  all  so  quietly  and  secretly, 
that  General  Poor's  pickets  hear  nothing  of  the  departure. 

Day  breaks,  and  General  Poor  is  ready  to  begin  the  attack ;  but  there 
is  no  one  to  be  attacked — none  but  the  wounded  and  the  dead  ;  for  Clin 
ton  has  fled,  and  is  on  his  march  to  Middletown,  leaving  all  his  wounded 
behind  him.  He  is  too  far  away  to  be  overtaken.  He  has  lost  nearly 
one  thousand  in  killed,  wounded,  and  prisoners,  while  Washington  has  lost 
less  than  three  hundred.  So  Washington  brought  victory  out  of  defeat. 


280  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

AFFAIRS   IN  RHODE  ISLAND. 

British  were  in  possession  of  the  town  of  Newport,  in  Rhode  Lsl 
and.     General  Prescott,  who  had  succeeded  Earl  Percy,  was  in  com 
mand  in  the  summer  of  1777.     He  was  proud,  haughty,  and  a  tyrant,     lie 
arrested  many  of  the  citizens,  threw  them  into  prison,  and  kept  them  there 
month  after  month,  preferring  no  charges  against  them. 

When  walking  the  streets,  if  he  saw  two  or  three  citizens  talking  to 
gether,  he  would  shout,  "  Disperse,  you  damned  rebels !" 

Every  man  was  expected  to  take  off  his  hat  to  him.  One  evening  as  he 
was  riding  out  to  his  quarters,  he  overtook  a  Quaker,  who  walked  along 
minding  his  own  business,  taking  no  notice  of  the  ruffian  general,  who 
rode  his  horse  against  the  inoffensive  man,  pinned  him  against  the  wall, 
knocked  off  his  hat,  and  told  his  guard  to  arrest  him. 

He  gave  splendid  parties,  and  lived  like  a  nabob,  plundering  the  poor, 
defenseless  people,  and  cultivating  the  friendship  of  the  rich  Tories. 

There  was  a  brave,  cool-headed  man  in  Providence,  Colonel  William 
Barton,  who  resolved  to  capture  the  tyrant.  Colonel  Barton  received  in 
formation  that  Prescott  had  taken  Mr.  Overing's  house  for  his  head-quar 
ters.  Mr.  Overing  lived  about  midway  the  island,  five  miles  from  New 
port,  the  house  overlooking  the  blue  waters  of  Narraganset  Bay.  It  was 
a  large,  old-fashioned,  two-storied  house,  with  a  gambreled  roof,  and  trees 
around  it,  nearly  a  mile  from  the  water. 

Colonel  Barton  and  John  Hunt,  a  soldier  in  Colonel  Elliot's  company 
of  artillery,  talked  over  the  expedition.  John  was  born  near  Mr.  Over- 
ing's  house,  and  knew  every  room  in  it,  and  the  grounds  around,  and 
where  would  be  the  best  place  to  make  a  landing. 

Colonel  Barton  selected  Captain  Eleazer  Adams,  Lieutenant  Andrew 
Stanton,  Lieutenant  John  Wilcox,  and  Lieutenant  Samuel  Potter,  men  as 
cool  and  courageous  as  himself,  to  be  his  officers.  He  selected  Joshua 
Babcock  arid  Samuel  Phillips  as  sergeants,  and  thirty-four  men.  every  one 
accustomed  to  rowing,  all  brave  men,  and  ready  to  follow  their  leader  any 
where  without  asking  any  questions. 


AFFAIRS   IN   RHODE    ISLAND. 


281 


COLONEL    BARTON. 


It  was  past  nine  o'clock,  on  the  night  of  July  10th,  1777,  when  Col 
onel  Barton  started  from  Warwick  Point,  on  the  west  shore  of  Narra- 
ganset  Bay,  with  six  boats.  Their  oars 
were  muffled.  The  men  rowed  in  si 
lence.  It  was  a  long  pull  down  past 
Prudence  Island  and  over  to  the  other 
shore;  but  the  strong-armed  rowers 
sent  the  boats  swiftly  through  the  wa 
ter.  There  were  three  British  frigates 
at  anchor  which  they  must  pass,  and 
the  frigates  had  guard-boats  here  and 
there,  which  must  be  avoided.  They 
heard  the  ships'  bells  strike  the  hour  of 
midnight  as  they  glided  past  the  frig 
ates. 

John  Hunt  knew  the  best  place  for 
a  landing  —  a  little  cove  sheltered  by 
trees.  Silently  the  boats  came  to  the 
shore,  and  silently  the  men  laid  down  their  oars  and  stopped  upon  the 
beach.  They  were  divided  into  parties,  one  to  keep  the  boats,  the  others 
to  approach  the  house  from  different  directions.  Each  man  knows  what 
he  is  to  do.  Up  a  sheltered  ravine  they  move.  South  of  them,  not  a 
hundred  rods  distant,  are  the  head-quarters  of  the  cavalry,  and  north  of 
them,  not  more  than  eighty  rods,  are  the  head-quarters  of  the  guard ;  and 
these  brave  men  are  slipping  in  between,  to  seize  a  general  and  carry  him 
away  !  It  is  a  bold  undertaking.  Half  of  the  party  moves  toward  the 
house  under  cover  of  a  piece  of  woods;  the  other  crosses  a  barley -field 
into  the  road,  and  approaches  the  front  of  the  house,  where  a  sentinel  is 
pacing  his  beat.  John  Hunt  and  Colonel  Barton  are  in  advance,  and 
right  behind  are  the  true  men,  ready  to  act  their  part. 

"  Who  comes  there  ?" 

No  answer. 

"  Who  comes  there?     Advance,  and  give  the  countersign." 

"  We  have  no  countersign.     Have  you  seen  any  deserters  ?" 

The  answer  quiets  the  sentinel's  fears,  arid  in  an  instant  he  is  a  prison 
er,  disarmed,  and  a  pistol  at  his  face. 

"  Make  the  least  noise,  and  you  are  a  dead  man." 

Quickly  the  door  is  opened.  Major  Barrington,  Prescott's  aid,  hears 
men  tramping  through  the  hall  and  ascending  the  stairs.  He  springs  to  a 
window,  and  leaps  to  the  ground,  but  only  to  find  himself  a  prisoner. 


282 


THE  BOYS  OF  76.   - 


General  Prescott  hears  the  disturbance,  sits  up  in  bed,  wondering  what 
is  going  on.  The  door  of  his  room  opens,  and  Colonel  Barton  and  his 
men  rush  in.  The  candle-light  falls  upon  the  frightened  Briton. 

"  You  are  my  prisoner,  sir.     Come  in  silence,  as  you  value  your  life." 

"  Will  you  not  let  me  dress  ?" 

"  No  time  for  that.     Put  on  your  cloak." 

General  Prescott's  cloak  is  thrown  over  his  shoulders,  one  of  the  party 
gathers  up  his  breeches  and  stockings,  and  they  descend  the  stairs.  Two 


THE    HOUSE    IN    WHICH    PRESCOTT    WAS 
CAPTURED. 


men  lock  arms  with  him,  and  at  a  quick 
step  the  prisoners  are  borne  to  the  boats. 
Silently  the  boats* move  away  past  the  frigates  and  guard-boats.  The 
rowers  could  hear  a  commotion  on  shore  —  drums  beating,  guns  firing, 
rockets  shooting  upward ;  but  their  arms  were  strong,  the  night  was  dark, 
and  before  daylight  the  boats  were  at  the  Warwick  landing. 

"  You  have  made  a  bold  push,"  says  Prescott,  now  that  he  was  per 
mitted  to  speak. 


AFFAIRS  IN  RHODE  ISLAND.  283 

"And  have  been  fortunate,"  is  Barton's  quiet  reply. 
Morning  dawned,  and  there  was  a  commotion.  A  coach  drove  into 
town,  in  which  were  seated  Colonel  Elliot  (who  owned  it),  Colonel  Barton, 
and  the  hated  British  general  and  his  major,  guarded  by  Colonel  Barton's 
soldiers.  Every  body  rushed  into  the  street  to  see  the  crest-fallen  prison- 
el's,  rejoicing  at  the  capture  of  the  hated  tyrant. 

Prescott  was  sent  to  General  Washington,  then  on  the  Hudson.  He 
passed  through  Lebanon,  Connecticut,  and  the  party  guarding  him  stopped 
at  Captain  Alden's  tavern  for  dinner.  Among  other  dishes  on  the  table 
was  one  of  succotash — boiled  beans  and  corn.  Prescott  never  had  seen 
any  such  food,  and  did  not  know  how  delicious  it  was ;  for  corn  in  En 
gland  is  only  fed  to  hogs,  and  beans  to  sheep.  He  threw 
the  dish  upon  the  floor. 

"  Do  you  give  me  pigs'  feed  ?"  he  said,  in  a  rage. 
That  roused  Captain  Alden,  who  got  his  horse -whip, 
and   gave   the   haughty   fellow   a  terrible   whipping,   and 
taught  him  a  lesson  which  he  remembered, 
for  he  was  very  careful  not  to  throw  any 
more  dishes  upon  the  floor. 

In  May,  1778,  General  Pigot,  who  was 
in  command  of  the  British  in  Newport, 
sent  Lieutenant-colonel  Campbell,  with  six 
hundred  men,  to  burn  some  boats  which 

THE  ALDEN  TAVERN  *ke  Americans  were  building   at  Warren. 

They  sailed  on  a  frigate  and  in  boats.     At 

daylight  the  people  in  Warren  were  astonished  to  find  an  army  marching 
into  town  with  drums  beating  and  colors  flying.  The  British  burned  the 
boats  and  the  meeting-house,  entered  the  houses,  captured  the  citizens, 
and  marched  on  to  Bristol,  burned  twenty  houses  there,  snatched  rings 
from  the  fingers  of  the  women,  stole  their  silver  shoe-buckles,  pillaged  the 
houses,  and  started  back. 

Word  was  sent  to  Providence  of  what  was  going  on.  Colonel  Barton 
started,  with  twenty  men,  on  horseback.  The  farmers  in  the  surrounding 
towns  joined  him.  They  came  upon  the  British  at  Bristol  Ferry,  and  bold 
ly  attacked  them.  Colonel  Barton  and  four  of  his  men  were  wounded,  but 
several  of  the  British  fell  before  they  reached  their  boats. 

On  the  retreat  through  Warren,  a  drummer  with  a  big  base-drum  fel) 
behind.  Some  women,  seeing  that  there  were  no  troops  near,  seized  what 
ever  they  could  lay  their  hands  on  for  weapons — brooms,  shovels,  and  tongs 
— ran  out,  and  surrounded  him. 


284 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


"You  are  our  prisoner,"  they  shouted. 

"  I  am  not  sorry  to  be  captured,  for  I  am  very  tired,"  said  the  drum 
mer,  giving  himself  up. 

In  July,  1778,  a  large  number  of  vessels  arrived  from  England  with 
troops.  It  was  supposed  that  the  British  intended  to  attack  Providence 
and  march  to  Boston.  General  Pigot  had  seven  thousand  men  ;  while 
General  Sullivan,  who  was  at  Providence,  had  only  sixteen  hundred. 


ADMIRAL    D  KSTAING. 


But  the  29th  of  June  was  a  joyful  day  to  the  Americans,  for  twelve 
French  line-of-battle  ships  and  four  frigates  sailed  into  Narraganset  Bay. 
It  was  the  fleet  of  Count  D'Estaing — the  first  French  fleet  to  arrive  on  the 
coast  to  aid  the  Americans. 

There  was  great  consternation  among  the  British  at  Newport.  Three 
British  vessels  over  in  the  East  Bay  were  at  once  blown  up,  and  four  frig 
ates  and  a  corvette  were  run  ashore  and  burned  in  Newport  Harbor — the 


AFFAIRS   IN   RHODE   ISLAND. 


285 


Cerberus,  twenty-eight  guns ;  Falcon,  sixteen  ;  Lark,  thirty -two  ;  Orpheus, 
thirty  two;  Juno,  thirty-two;  Grand  Duke,  forty;  Flora,  thirty-two  —  in 
all,  the  vessels  carried  two  hundred  and  twelve  guns.  This  was  a  sad  loss 
to  the  British,  but  it  was  better  to  destroy  them  than  to  have  them  fall 
into  the  hands  of  the  French. 

General  Sullivan  was  in  com 
mand  at  Providence.  The  militia 
flocked  in  from  Massachusetts  and 
New  Hampshire,  as  well  as  from 
xihode  Island.  Generals  Greene 
and  Lafayette  came  with  some  of 
the  Continental  troops.  Elijah  Fa 
vor  came :  he.  was  a  major  now. 

On  the  9th  of  August,  General 
Sullivan  crossed  the  narrow  strait 
at  the  north  end  of  Rhode  Island 
with  about  eight  thousand  men.  At 
the  same  time,  D'Estaing  landed 
/venty-flve  hundred  troops  on  the 
island  of  Canonicut,  in  the  harbor. 
But  that  very  afternoon  another 
fleet  appeared  in  sight  —  thirteen 
line  -  of  -  battle  ships  and  twenty- 
three  others  —  Lord  Howe's  fleet 
from  New  York.  The  French 
troops  Wjere  re  -  embarked,  and 
D'Estaing  sailed  down  the  bay  to 
meet  Howe  in  the  open  ocean. 

The  wind  was  east,  thick  clouds 
rolling  in  from  the  sea,  the  wind 
blowing  a  gale,  and  the  rocky  shores 
white  with  surf ;  but  the  fleets  en 
gaged.      The  French  captured  the 
Senegal,  frigate,  and  a   bomb -ves 
sel  ;  but  D'Estaing' s  own  vessel,  the  Languedoc,  had  its  masts  and  spars 
badly  splintered.      A  storm  came  on,  and  the  admirals,  instead  of  send 
ing  each  other  to  the  bottom,  had  cpite  enough  to  attend  to  in  manag 
ing  the  vessels. 

Fv>r  two  days  and  nights  the  storm  raged.     The  troops  suffered  severe 
ly.     They  had  no  shelter  except  the  fences  and  walls.     They  were  wet 


MAP    OF    RHODE    ISLAND,    1778. 


286  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

through,  their  provisions  were  spoiled,  their  powder  damaged.  Fair  weath 
er  came,  but  the  French  fleet,  instead  of  returning  to  Newport,  sailed  for 
Boston. 

A  grand  opportunity  was  lost.  Had  the  French  fleet  remained  in  the 
harbor,  and  the  French  troops  co-operated  with  the  Americans,  with  the 
fleet  to  help,  the  British  lines  could  have  been  carried,  and  the  army  capt 
ured  ;  but  now  the  Americans  must  retreat. 

On  the  night  of  the  28th  of  August  the  army  fell  back  twelve  miles 
to  Butts's  Hill,  at  the  north  end  of  the  island.  Elijah  Favor  rode  here  and 
there  to  see  where  the  troops  could  be  advantageously  placed,  and  fortifi 
cations  erected  to  cover  the  retreat.  He  saw  that  there  were  two  roads- 
one  over  on  the  east  side,  and  one  near  the  west  side  of  the  island.  He 
was  quite  sure  that  the  British  would  advance  up  both  roads  in  pursuit, 
and  they  did. 

At  daylight  there  was  a  commotion  in  the  British  camp.  Lieutenant- 
colonel  Campbell  and  the  Twenty-second  regiment  marched  in  haste  up  the 
east  road  about  five  miles,  and  came  to  a  cross-road  which  ran  up  the 
hill  toward  the  west  past  Mr.  Gibbs's  house.  A  part  of  the  regiment 
went  up  the  cross-road,  little  thinking  that  there  was  a  regiment  of  Amer- 
cans  lying  in  wait  for  them  behind  Mr.  Gibbs's  stone  wall,  and  that  Col 
onel  Laurens,  Colonel  Fleury,  and  Major  Talbot,  with  the  rear-guard  of 
the  Americans,  were  holding  the  roads ;  but  suddenly  there  was  a  flash 
ing  of  guns,  and  nearly  half  of  the  Twenty -second  regiment  went  down 
before  the  murderous  fire.  Two  Hessian  regiments  came  to  the  support 
of  Lieutenant -colonel  Campbell,  but  before  they  arrived  the  rear-guard 
was  retreating  to  the  main  army,  near  Butts's  Hill. 

The  British  followed,  and  by  noon  the  whole  army  was  drawn  up  in 
line  of  battle  on  Quaker  Hill  and  Anthony's  Hill,  about  a  mile  from 
Butts's,  while  the  fleet  sailed  up  the  bay  to  throw  shot  and  shells  into  the 
American  camp. 

General  Greene  was  in  command  of  the  right  wing  of  the  Americans. 
He  had  Glover's,  Yarnum's,  Cornell's,  and  Colonel  Christopher  Greene's 
brigade.  It  was  the  same  Colonel  Greene  who  commanded  at  Red  Bank, 
and  defeated  Count  Donop.  General  Greene  posted  his  men  in  the  woods 
between  Anthony's  and  Butts's  Hill,  and  waited  for  the  British. 

It  is  nearly  two  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  when  the  Hessians  descend 
the  slope  of  Anthony's  Hill  and  approach  Greene's  line.  They  are  con 
fident  of  driving  the  Yankees;  but  suddenly  the  woods  blaze  with  mus 
ketry,  and  the  advancing  line  is  thrown  into  confusion.  The  Hessians  fire 
a  few  volleys,  but  are  driven. 


AFFAIRS   IN  RHODE   ISLAND. 


287 


BRITISH    ENCAMPMENT. 

a,  Anthony's  Hill.  b,  Quaker  Hill. 

The  day  is  very  warm,  and  the  Hessians  in  the  open  field  suffer  from 
tne  heat  and  the  terrible  fire  poured  upon  them,  while  the  Americans  in 
the  shade  suffer  very  little.  Though  the  ships  are  sending  broadsides  into 
the  woods,  few  are  killed  or  wounded. 

The  British  are  ready  at  last  for  a  grand  attack.  General  Pigot  sends 
a  large  force  to  drive  Greene  from  his  position,  and  the  battle  begins  in 
earnest.  The  troops  approach  the  woods  and  open  fire.  The  British  ar 
tillery  on  the  hill  are  throwing  shot  and  shell  upon  Butts's  Hill,  and  the 
American  cannon  there  are  replying.  The  ships  fire  broadsides;  but 
General  Sullivan  has  sent  some  heavy  guns  down  to  the  water's  edge, 
and  the  Americans  train  these  guns  so  correctly  that  the  shot  take  effect 
upon  the  vessels,  which  very  soon  cut  their  cables,  and  sail  away  from  the 
destructive  fire. 

General  Sullivan  sees  that  Pigot  is  massing  nearly  all  of  his  troops  in 
front  of  Greene,  and  sends  out  a  party  to  attack  Pigot's  right  wing ;  and 


BUTTS  S    HILL,   LOOKING    SOUTH. 

[The  view  is  taken  from  the  American  intrenchments  on  Butts's  Hill.  The  windmill  is  on  Quaker  Hill. 
The  hill  at  the  right  is  Anthony's.  The  British  artillery  fired  from  both  hills.  Sullivan  replied  from  the 
ditch  in  the  foreground.  The  battle  was  down  by  the  third  fence,  at  the  left  hand  of  the  view.  A  small 
brook  winds  along  near  the  fence,  and  in  the  ravine  was  a  belt  of  woods,  where  Greene  posted  his  men.] 


288 


THE   BOYS   OF   76. 


the  militia  attack  with  such  vigor  that  Pigot  does  not  dare  to  weaken  his 
right  wing  to  strengthen  his  left, 

Pigot  resolves  to  make  a  grand  charge  upon  Greene.  His  men  ad- 
vanco,  but  are  cut  down  almost  as  rapidly  as  the  British  were  at  Bunker 
Hill.  Colonel  Christopher  Greene's  regiment  is  composed  of  negroes, 
many  of  whom  have  been  slaves  ;  but  they  fight  for  their  liberty  now  with 
desperation.  The  British  and  Hessians  approach  the  woods  to  drive  the 
Americans  out  with  the  bayonet,  but  are  unable.  The  lines  waver  and 
break,  and  the  Americans  rush  out,  capture  a  cannon,  and  return  in  tri 
umph  to  their  lines. 

The  sun  goes  down.  Two  hundred  and  eleven  Americans  have  been 
killed,  wounded,  or  captured,  while  the  British  have  lost,  including  prison 
ers,  one  thousand  and  twenty-three. 


VIEW   LOOKING    NORTH    FROM    BUTTS  8    HILL. 


[The  view  shows  the  intrenchments  in  the  foreground.    The  Americans  retreated  past  the  houses  in  the 
centre  of  the  picture.] 

Thus  closed  one  of  the  best-managed  battles  of  the  war.  But  General 
Sullivan,  though  he  had  repulsed  the  British,  saw  that  he  must  retreat  to 
the  main-land,  for  Sir  Henry  Clinton  had  arrived  with  four  thousand  men, 
and  the  ships  could  come  up  on  both  sides  and  cut  off  his  retreat,  Silently 
the  troops  marched  away  in  the  darkness,  and  before  morning  the  whole 
army  was  on  the  main-land. 


AFFAIRS   IN   SOUTH    CAROLINA. 


289 


CHAPTER  XXYL 

AFFAIRS   IN   SOUTH   CAROLINA. 

SAVANNAH  was  in  the  hands  of  the  British,  and  so  was  the  whole 
State  of  Georgia.  The  Tories  outnumbered  the  patriots.  Sir  Henry 
Clinton  thought  that  South  Carolina  could  be  made  loyal  by  a  vigorous 
campaign,  and  that  North  Carolina  and  Virginia  would  soon  wheel  into 
line  as  loyal  provinces.  The  loyal  cause  was  far  more  hopeful  in  the 
South  than  in  the  North.  To  bring  back  those  revolted  provinces,  he 
sailed  from  New  York  with  five  thousand  men,  and  a  large  fleet,  under 
Admiral  Arbuthnot,  to  subdue  Charleston,  and  anchored  at  Edisto  Inlet, 
south  of  Charleston,  on  the  10th  of  February,  1780.  The  times  were  hard 
in  South  Carolina.  The  paper  money  was  of  so  little  value  that  it  took 
seven  hundred  dollars  to  buy  a  pair  of  shoes.  The  people  were  nearly  dis 
couraged,  and  the  patriotism  which 
had  flamed  so  gloriously  in  '76  was 
dying  out.  Many  of  the  people 
were  ready  to  swear  allegiance  to 
the  king. 

General  Lincoln  was  in  com 
mand  at  Charleston.  When  the 
British  landed,  he  had  only  four 
teen  hundred  men,  and  more  than 
half  of  these  were  from  North  Car 
olina,  and  their  term  of  enlistment 
was  nearly  ended.  Lincoln  did  not  ' 
think  that  he  could  hold  the  city; 
but  Clinton  staid  a  month  at  Edis 
to  before  beginning  operations,  and 
Lincoln  changed  his  mind  and  be 
gan  to  throw  up  intrenchments  west  of  the  town,  for  he  saw  that  Clinton 
would  be  likely  to  attack  from  that  direction.  The  town  is  situated  on  a 
tongue  of  land  between  the  Cooper  and  Ashley  rivers.  Re-en forcementa 

10 


GENERAL    LINCOLN. 


290 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


GOVERNOR    RUTLEDGE. 


were  on  their  way — seven  hundred  Virginians,  under  General  Woodford, 
who  came  to  take  the  place  of  the  Carolina  troops.     Governor  Rutledge, 

the  State  Executive,  called  upon 
the  militia  to  turn  out;  but  few 
came,  however,  and  General  Lin 
coln  could  muster  only  about  two 
thousand  men. 

On  the  20th  of  March,  Admiral 
Arbuthnot  got  his  fleet  over  the 
bar.  He  did  not  attempt  to  attack 
Fort  Moultrie ;  but  though  the 
guns  of  the  fort  fired  at  the  fleet, 
he  sailed  past  it,  and  anchored 
within  cannon-shot  of  the  town. 
General  Clinton  had  already  march 
ed  up  the  shore,  and  seized  Fort 
Johnson,  on  the  south  side  of  the 
harbor.  From  there  he  marched 
up  the  south  bank  of  the  Ashley.  The  boats  from  the  fleet  went  up  past 
the  town,  ferried  the  troops  across  the  river,  and  on  the  1st  of  April  the 
siege  began.  On  the  2d  of  April,  Lord  Cornwallis  arrived  from  New  York 
with  three  thousand  troops,  and  the  British  took  possession  of  the  country 
east  of  Cooper  River.  No  fresh  provisions  could  be  carried  into  Charles 
ton  now.  All  communication  with  the  outside  world  was  cut  off.  Lin 
coln  thought  he  could  force  his  way  out  through  Sir  Henry's  lines  between 
the  Cooper  and  the  Ashley,  but  the  people  implored  him  not  to  abandon 
the  city.  The  American  general  and  the  inhabitants  agreed  upon  terms 
of  capitulation — to  give  up  the  city,  if  the  troops  could  be  allowed  to  re 
tire  ;  but  Sir  Henry,  having  got  the  American  fort  in  his  grasp,  would  not 
accept  the  terms,  and  the  siege  went  on.  Day  and  night  bombs  were 
bursting  and  cannon-shot  crashing  through  the  town.  The  Tories  in  the 
city  were  doing  what  they  could  to  help  the  British.  A  flag  was  sent  out 
to  know  what  Sir  Henry  would  consent  to,  and  word  came  back  that 
troops,  ships,  supplies,  every  thing,  must  be  surrendered  without  any  con 
ditions.  Private  property  would  not  be  molested,  and  the  prisoners  might 
be  paroled.  General  Lincoln  would  not  surrender  on  such  terms,  and  the 
firing  began.  All  through  the  day  and  night  of  May  10th  shells  were 
bursting  in  the  town.  Women  and  children  were  killed,  and  there  was  no 
place  of  safety.  The  fleet  came  up,  and  were  ready  to  bombard  the  town 
To  hold  out  any  longer  was  useless ;  more  than  that,  it  would  be  inhuman; 


AFFAIRS  IN  SOUTH  CAROLINA. 


291 


and  on  the  12th  of  May  the  Americans  marched  out  and  gave  up  their 
arms.  Four  hundred  cannon  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  British,  and  two 
thousand  prisoners.  Two  hundred  and  ten  of  the  influential  citizens  sign 
ed  an  address  of  congratulation  to  Clinton.  The  Tories  cheered,  swung 
their  hats,  and  many  of  them  enlisted  in  the  royal  service.  People  from 
the  country  came  in  and  swore  allegiance  to  the  king.  Sir  Henry  was 
greatly  gratified.  In  a  very  short  time  Carolina,  as  well  as  Georgia,  would 
be  wholly  loyal.  He  divided  his  army — sending  Cornwallis,  with  about 
three  thousand  men,  toward  North  Carolina,  and  Lieutenant -colonel  Con 
ger,  with  nearly  two  thousand,  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles  west  to  a  place 
called  "  Ninety  -  six."  He  sent  another  detachment  from  Savannah  to 
Augusta.  These  would  overawe  the  patriots,  and  the  loyalists  would  be 
in  power  once  more. 


There  was  only  one  body  of  American  troops  in  the  State.  Colonel 
Abraham  Buford  had  raised  four  hundred  men,  and  was  on  his  way  to 
Charleston  with  two  pieces  of  artillery  when  the  city  capitulated.  He 
was  one  hundred  and  forty  miles  from  Charleston  in  the  north-west,  re 
treating  to  North  Carolina.  Sir  Henry  Clinton  had  one  energetic  cavalry 
officer,  Colonel  Tarleton,  a  young  lawyer  from  Liverpool,  twenty-six  years 
old,  a  thick-set,  swarthy  man,  with  black  eyes,  and  sullen,  revengeful  tern- 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

per.  Sir  Henry  directed  him  to  disperse  this  last  remnant  of  patriot  sol 
diers  in  the  South.  Tarleton  had  seven  hundred  men  on  horseback  —  a 
part  of  them  cavalry,  and  the  rest  mounted  infantry.  He  went  like  the 

wind,  one  hundred  and  five  miles  in  fifty-five 
hours ;  and  before  Bnford  mistrusted  that  the 
British  were  near  him,  found  himself  sur 
rounded. 

Tarleton  sent  a  summons  to  surrender. 
"  Sir,"  the  summons  began,  "  resistance  being 
vain,  to  prevent  the  effusion  of  human  blood 
I  make  offers  which  can  never  be  repeated. 
You  are  now  almost  encompassed  by  a  corps 
of  seven  hundred  troops  on  horseback :  half 
COLONEL  TARLETON.  of  that  number  are  infantry,  with  cannon  ; 

the   rest,  cavalry.       Earl  Cornwallis   is  like 
wise  within  a  short  inarch,  with  nine  British  battalions." 

This  was  a  lie.  Cornwallis  was  far  away,  and  Tarleton  had  only  about 
four  hundred  men — the  other  three  hundred  having  been  tired  out.  Col 
onel  Buford  considered  them  humiliating,  and  would  not  accept  them. 

While  the  flag  of  truce  was  raised,  while  Buford  was  conferring  with 
Tarleton's  officers,  Tarleton  was  arranging  his  men.  It  was  a  violation  of 
all  the  rules  of  war — an  expedient  which  an  honorable-minded  man  would 
have  scorned  to  use.  But  Tarleton  was  not  an  honorable  man.  Buford's 
men  stood  at  ease,  not  expecting  an  attack.  The  flag  of  truce  went  back 
to  Tarleton's  lines,  and  a  moment  later  the  British  cavalry,  with  drawn 
swords,  were  rushing  from  all  directions  upon  the  Americans.  In  a  mo 
ment  the  lines  were  broken.  A  few  fired  their  guns,  but  most  of  the  sol 
diers  threw  them  down  and  gave  themselves  up  as  prisoners.  Then  began 
the  butchery.  One  hundred  and  thirteen  men  killed  outright;  one  hun 
dred  and  fifty  wounded.  Only  fifty-three  were  spared. 

Tarleton  made  no  effort  to  restrain  his  men.  He  saw  the  defenseless 
men  cut  down  by  his  savage  soldiers,  and  murdered  in  cold  blood.  Bu 
ford  and  a  few  others  escaped.  The  British  loss  was  only  five  killed,  and 
fifteen  wounded. 

Tarleton  left  the  wounded  lying  upon  the  field  of  slaughter,  and,  with 
his  prisoners  and  the  two  captured  cannon  and  wagons,  marched  back  to 
General  Cornwallis,  who  wrote  an  account  of  the  achievement  to  Sir  Hen 
ry  Clinton.  "  I  can  only  add,"  he  said,  "  the  highest  enconiums  on  the 
conduct  of  Lieutenant-colonel  Tarleton.  It  will  give  me  the  most  sensible 
satisfaction  to  hear  that  your  excellency  has  been  able  to  obtain  for  him 


AFFAIRS   IN   SOUTH   CAROLINA. 


293 


some  distinguished  mark  of  his  majesty's  favor."     The  favor  of  the  king 
for  butchering  three  hundred  men  who  had  thrown  down  their  arms ! 

General    Clinton,   Lord    Cornwallis,   and    Colonel    Tarleton    perhaps 
thought  that  such  a   massacre  would   intimidate  the   people,  and  make 


THE    BUTCHERY    OF    BUFORD's    MEN. 


294 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


them  loving  subjects  of  the  king ;  but  it  had  just  the  opposite  effect.  The 
patriots  on  their  farms  among  the  Carolina  hills  were  more  determined 
than  ever  to  resist  the  British. 

Not  far  from  the  place  of  the  massacre  was  a  school,  kept  by  Mr. 
Humphries.  One  of  the  boys  attending  school  and  studying  Latin  was 
named  Andrew  Jackson,  thirteen  years  old.  His  older  brother  had  been 
killed  at  Stono  Inlet,  near  Charleston,  by  the  British.  Andrew  was  not  at 
all  awed  by  the  slaughter  of  Buford's  men,  nor  were  the  settlers,  who  form 
ed  themselves  into  a  company  as  soon  as  Tarleton  departed,  and  Andrew 


ANDREW    AND    THE    BRITISH    OFFICER. 

was  one  of  the  number.  A  few  weeks  later  a  party  of  British  came  back 
to  Waxhaw,  where  Andrew  lived,  to  plunder  the  inhabitants.  The  com 
pany  assembled  at  the  meeting-house,  and  the  British  attacked  them.  An 
drew  and  another  brother  escaped ;  but  the  next  day  the  Tories  told  the 
British  where  they  were  secreted,  and  they  were  captured. 

Andrew  was  placed  under  guard.     One  of  the  British  officers  came 
ap  to  him.     "  Here,  sir,  clean  my  boots  !"  he  said,  imperiously. 

"  I  am  a  prisoner  of  war,  sir,  and  I  look  for  such  treatment  as  I  am 
entitled  to,"  said  Andrew. 

Out  came  the  ruffian's  sword.     A  blow  was  aimed  at  Andrew's  head 


AFFAIRS  IN   SOUTH   CAROLINA. 


295 


HOUSE    IN    WHICH    ANDREW    JACKSON    WAS    BORN. 


The  boy  threw  up  his  left  arm  to  ward  it  off,  and  the  bright  blade  came 
down  upon  the  arm,  cleaving  the  flesh  to  the  bone.  His  brother  also  was 
wounded  in  the  head, 
because  he  would  not 
do  the  bidding  of  the 
brutal  fellows.  Not  sat 
isfied  with  this,  they  were 
thrust  into  jail.  No  sur 
geon  came  to  dress  their 
wounds.  The  older  broth 
er,  Robert,  soon  sickened 
and  died,  and  Andrew  was 
left  alone  in  the  world. 
He  was  exchanged  a  few 
days  later.  He  paid  the 
British  off  in  1815,  at 
New  Orleans,  when  com 
mander  of  the  American  army.  From  the  little  old  tumble-down  house 
in  which  he  was  born  at  Waxhaw,  he  marched  on  through  life  to  be  Pres- 
'dent  of  the  United  States. 

When  General  Washington  discovered,  in  May,  that  Sir  Henry  Clinton 
had  sailed  southward,  he  sent  Baron  De  Kalb,  with  General  Small  wood 
and  fourteen  hundred  troops  from  Delaware,  Maryland,  and  Virginia,  south. 
They  started  from  Morristown,  New  York,  on  the  14th  of  April.  A  long 

and  weary  march  was  before  the  troops. 

It  was  the  6th  of  July  when  they  reach 
ed  Hillsborough,  in  North  Carolina.  The 
news  of  the  fall  of  Charleston  and  the 
massacre  at  Waxhaw  reached  General 
Washington,  and  he  saw  that  De  Kalb, 
though  a  brave  officer,  was  not  the  man  to 
organize  an  army  in  the  South,  and  Gen 
eral  Gates  was  appointed  commander  of 
the  Southern  department. 

It  was  a  hard  task  that  Gates  had  be 
fore  him.  A  majority  of  the  people  in 
South  Carolina  were  Tories.  The  patriots 
were  crushed  out.  There  was  no  public  spirit.  It  was  the  hot  season 
of  the  year.  Loyalists  swarmed,  ready  to  give  information  to  Corn  wall  is 
and  withhold  it  from  Gates,  to  send  him  on  a  false  scent,  or  betray  him 


BARON    DE    KALB. 


296 


THE   BOYS   OF  '76. 


COLONEL    SUMTER. 


concentrated    under  Cornwallis. 


at  every  opportunity.  He  had  no  money  and  few  supplies.  But  there 
were  patriots  in  North  Carolina  who  had  turned  out  under  General  Gas- 
well.  The  patriots  in  South  Caro 
lina  were  not  all  dead.  Colonel 
Suniter  had  raised  a  few  hundred 
men,  and  was  harassing  the  British 
wherever  he  could  get  a  chance,  cut 
ting  off  their  supplies,  capturing  a 
few  prisoners  here  and  a  few  more 
there.  Cornwallis  learned  that 
Gates  was  approaching,  and  hasten 
ed  from  Charleston  to  Camden,  one 
hundred  miles  north-west.  General 
Gates  sent  a  part  of  his  little  force 
to  Colonel  Su  inter,  who  was  farther 
south,  and  marched  with  the  rest 
toward  Camden,  where  twenty -five 
hundred  British  and  Tories  had 
General  Stevens,  with  seven  hundred 
Virginia  militia,  joined  General  Gates. 

The  American  army  was  at  Rugeley's  Mills,  thirteen  miles  north  of 
Camden.  Gates  intended  to  make  a  night  march  and  surprise  Cornwal 
lis.  Colonel  Armand,  with  some  cavalry,  led  the  column,  followed  by 
the  Maryland  and  Delaware  brigades,  under  Colonel  Smallwood  and  Gen 
eral  Gist.  This  division  was  under  De  Kalb.  Then  came  the  North  Car 
olina  militia,  under  General  Caswell,  and  the  Virginians,  under  General 
Stevens.  It  was  ten  o'clock  when  the  column  started.  There  were  about 
four  thousand  in  all. 

One  day  a  strange  cavalcade  came  into  Gates's  camp — twenty  or  thirty 
men  on  horseback,  in  a  great  variety 
of  costumes,  some  in  uniform,  some 
in  citizen's  dress,  some  in  deer-skins — 
white  men  and  negroes — but  all  had 
rifles.  Their  leader  was  Francis  Mar 
ion,  a  brave,  keen -eyed,  active  man, 
who,  with  his  few  men,  was  a  con 
stant  thorn  to  Cornwallis,  cutting  off 
his  supplies,  pouncing  upon  his  scout 
ing  parties,  here  one  day,  somewhere  else  to-morrow,  hiding  in  swamps, 
eluding  the  British,  riding  a  hundred  miles,  and  striking  a  blow  and  dis- 


RDGELEYS    BRIDGE. 


AFFAIRS  IN   SOUTH   CAROLINA. 


297 


appearing  before  Cornwallis  could  overtake  him.     People  called  him  the 
"Swamp  Fox." 

Marion  was  a  partisan  leader,  but  Gates  did  not  have  a  high  opinion 
of  partisans,  and  took  no  pains  to  cultivate  Marion's  friendship,  and  so  de 
prived  himself  of  a  valuable  ally. 


MARION    ON    HIS    WAY    TO    JOIN    OATB». 


Cornwallis,  in  Camden,  has   conceived   the  idea   of  making   a   night 

inarch  and  surprising  General   Gates.      His  officers   know   the   country; 

10* 


298  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

they  say  that  Gates  is  in  a  weak  position  at  Rugeley's  Bridge.  The  Tories 
will  guide  and  aid  him. 

At  the  same  time  that  Gates  begins  to  move,  Cornwallis  is  also  on  the 
march.  Silently,  through  the  darkness,  the  two  armies  approach  each 
other  along  the  road  parallel  to  the  Wateree  River,  and  about  two  miles 
east  of  it. 

It  is  two  o'clock  in  the  morning.  The  American  cavalry  cross  Graney 
Quarter  Creek,  a  little  stream  running  into  the  Wateree.  They  ascend 
the  hill  south  of  it,  and  march  past  a  clearing.  The  road  is  sandy.  The 
column  is  winding  through  the  woods.  The  road  passes  between  two 
swamps,  and  just  south  of  the  swamps  is  another  little  stream,  Sander's 
Creek.  The  British  column  has  crossed  Sander's  Creek,  and  is  between 
the  swamps. 

The  two  armies  are  face  to  face.  Both  are  surprised.  There  is  a  quick 
flashing  of  muskets.  Some  of  Armand's  troops  are  killed  at  the  first  fire, 


SANDER  S   CREEK. 


and  the  others  fall  back,  throwing  the  column  into  confusion.  Colonel 
Porterfield,  a  brave  officer,  who  has  commanded  one  of  the  flanking  par 
ties  in  the  march,  falls  mortally  wounded.  Colonel  Armstrong,  command 
ing  the  right  flank,  rallies  his  men,  pours  a  volley  into  the  British  lines, 
and  both  armies  come  to  a  stand-still. 

General  Gates  is  surprised,  so  is  Cornwallis ;  but  Cornwallis  sees  that 
he  has  an  advantageous  position.  There  is  a  swamp  east  of  him,  a  swamp 
west  of  him.  Gates  can  not  flank  him  on  either  side.  He  can  form  his 
men  in  a  line  between  the  swamps  and  win  a  victory. 

Gates  does  not  know  the  ground.  It  is  dark.  The  men  see  nothing  of 
the  enemy.  He  calls  a  council  of  his  officers.  "  Gentlemen,  you  know 
the  ground  better  than  I  do.  What  are  your  opinions?"  he  asked. 

The  officers  did  not  know  the  ground. 

"  It  is  too  late  to  retreat,"  says  General  Stevens. 


AFFAIRS  IN  SOUTH  CAROLINA. 


"Then  nothing  more  is  to  be  said.  Gentlemen  will  please  take  then 
posts,"  Gates  replies. 

It  is  a  simple  matter  for  Cornwallis  to  form  his  men.  He  has  only  tc 
parade  them  across  the  road,  and  out  in  the  woods  on  either  side.  Gen 
eral  Webster  commands  on  the  east  side,  and  Lord  Rawdon  on  the  west. 

General  Gates  places  the  Second  Maryland  brigade  and  the  Delaware 
troops  west  of  the  road, 
under  General  Gist.  The 
North  Carolina  militia, 
under  General  Caswell, 
are  posted  in  the  centre. 
The  Virginians,  under 
General  Stevens,  are  sent 
east  of  the  road,  and  the 
First  Maryland  brigade, 
under  Smallwood,  is 
placed  in  the  rear,  on  the 
east  side  of  the  road. 

The  artillery  of  both 
armies  is  placed  in  the 
centre.  All  of  this  is 
done  in  the  darkness. 
Day  dawns.  The  Amer 
ican  artillery  opens.  Gen 
eral  Stevens's  men  nev 
er  have  been  under  fire. 
They  do  not  know  what  a 
battle  is.  They  advance 
boldly  to  attack  the  Brit 
ish  regulars,  who  have 
been  in  many  engage 
ments.  They  will  drive  the  British  with  their  bayonets.  But  snddenl; 
the  British,  under  Webster,  are  in  motion  toward  the  Yirginiaris,  who  fir* 
one  volley,  then  turn  and  flee,  panic-stricken,  from  the  field,  many  throwing 
away  their  guns. 

A  moment  later,  all  the  North  Carolina  militia,  under  Caswell,  except 
Dixon's  regiment,  do  the  same.     The  whole  of  Gates's  left  wing  has  giver 
way:   only  the  Continental  troops  and  Dixon's  right  are  left  to  oppos* 
Cornwallis.     The  two  armies  are  about  equal  in  number  now;  but  Com 
wallis  has  all  the  advantage  of  position. 


300  THE  BOYS  OF  '7«. 

Lord  Rawdon  advances  upon  the  Americans,  who  receive  his  fire  and 
return  it.  The  American  artillery  (four  pieces)  pours  grape  and  canister 
into  the  British  ranks,  and  makes  fearful  havoc.  The  Marylanders  charge 
upon  the  British  and  throw  them  into  confusion.  Some  of  the  British  flee 
Oh !  if  the  militia  had  only  stood  their  ground,  they  would  have  driven  the 
British  pell-mell  down  the  road,  and  across  Sander's  Creek  to  Camden 
8  mall  wood  advances  with  his  brigade  to  take  the  place  of  the  fugitives. 
Fie  is  too  late.  His  troops  are  too  few,  and  General  Webster,  with  the 
whole  right  wing  of  the  British,  closes  in  upon  him,  and  gains  his  flank. 
The  battle  rages  from  swamp  to  swamp.  In  the  centre,  on  both  sides,  the 
artillery  is  flaming. 

No  order  comes  from  Gates  to  De  Kalb.  But  an  opportunity  has 
come.  Things  are  favorable  for  a  charge. 

"  Forward !  forward  I"  The  order  runs  along  the  line.  The  troops 
under  Gist  advance,  pour  in  a  volley,  and  make  terrible  havoc  in  the  Brit 
ish  ranks.  The  British  are  driven,  and  fifty  prisoners  taken.  Cornwallis 
rallies  his  men,  and  hurls  his  whole  force  upon  the  Marylanders.  The  line 
that  has  stood  so  firmly,  the  men  who  have  fought  so  nobly,  are  cut  down 
in  an  instant.  The  day  is  lost.  The  artillery-horses  are  shot,  the  gunners 
bayoneted.  The  Americans  flee — some  across  the  swamp,  others  down  the 
r^ad,  others  through  the  woods.  The  British  cavalry,  under  the  blood 
thirsty  and  implacable  Tarleton,  ride  over  the  fugitives,  trampling  them 
down,  slashing  their  heads  open,  showing  no  mercy.  Once  more  it  is  a 
massacre.  The  brave  De  Kalb  falls,  pierced  by  eleven  bayonet-wounds. 
The  Delaware  regiment  is  annihilated ;  more  than  a  third  of  the  Ameri 
cans  are  slaughtered,  after  giving  themselves  up  as  prisoners.  Seven  hun 
dred  are  killed,  wounded,  or  captured.  The  British  loss  was  nearly  five 
hundredo  All  the  baggage,  two  hundred  wagons,  and  eight  cannon  fell 
into  Cornwallis's  hands.  The  Tories,  seeing  that  the  patriots  are  defeated, 
inhumanly  murder  the  fugitives  who  ask  for  food  at  their  doors. 

Tarletcn  went  in  pursuit  of  Sumter,  who  was  on  the  west  side  of  the 
Wateree,  surprised  him,  massacred  nearly  two  hundred  men,  took  a  large 
number  of  prisoners,  and  scattered  the  whole  of  Sumter's  force. 

Just  before  the  battle  at  Camden,  General  Gates  was  so  sure  of  vic 
tory  that  he  sent  General  Marion  with  his  followers  to  destroy  all  the 
boats  on  the  rivers  between  Camden  and  Charleston,  in  order  to  prevent 
Cornwallis's  retreat.  Marion  was  at  work  destroying  the  boats,  when  a 
negro  brought  him  word  that  Gates  was  defeated,  De  Kalb  killed,  and  the 
whole  army  routed,  and  that  a  party  of  British  were  coming  to  capture 
him,  and  near  at  hand.  In  a,  moment  Marion  and  his  men  were  dashing 


AFFAIRS  IN   SOUTH   CAROLINA. 


301 


through  the  woods  to  a  swamp  not  far  from  Nelson's  Ferry,  where  ho  con 
cealed  his  men.  They  were  but  thirty. 

Marion's  scouts  were  on  the  lookout.  One  came  riding  in,  saying  fcha< 
a  party  of  British,  with  the  prisoners  captured  at  Camd0n,  had  carted  tor 
Charleston. 

"  How  many  prisoners  are  there  3"  Marion  asked. 

"About  two  hundred." 

"  How  large  is  the  guard  3" 

"  We  counted  ninety." 

"  Ninety !     These  we  must  have,"  said  Marion. 


MARION   IN   PURSUIT   OF   THE    BRITISH. 


Through  the  day  Marion  remains  in  the  swamp.  His  men  rest  beneath 
the  leafy  shade  of  the  oaks.  Long  trails  of  moss  hang  pendent  from  the 
trees,  waving  in  the  summer  breeze.  So  deep  the  shade,  that  at  midday 
there  is  only  twilight  where  the  brave  men  lie  concealed.  At  nigLt,  nc 
one  could  find  them  there. 

The  sun  goes  down.     Their  horses  are  fresh.     The  thirty  will  follow 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

their  beloved  commander  wherever  he  may  lead.  Oat  from  the  gloonry 
depths  of  the  swam].)  they  ride  to  the  open  ground,  and,  like  the  wind, 
they  dash  away,  and  reach  the  Wateree  River,  where  the  ferry-man  in 
forms  him  that  he  has  just  set  the  prisoners  on  the  other  side  of  the 
stream.  The  ferry -man  is  a  Tory,  arid  does  not  know  that  it  is  Marion 
whom  he  is  paddling  across. 

The  British,  with  the  prisoners,  have  halted  for  the  night  at  the  Blue 
Tavern.  No  pickets  are  out.  The  British  officer  in  command  of  the  party 
has  no  thougnt  of  a  surprise,  for  the  Americans  have  been  utterly  routed 
at  Camden.  Like  a  thunder- bolt,  the  thirty  fall  upon  the  guard.  In  a 
moment,  they  are  captured,  all  the  guns  of  the  British  stacked  in  the  yard 
before  the  tavern  seized,  and  the  prisoners  released.  The  British  officer 
in  charge  climbed  up  a  chimney,  thinking  thus  to  hide ;  but  he  was  quick 
ly  pulled  out,  well  covered  with  soot.  Thus,  without  losing  a  man,  the 
;<  Swamp  Fox,"  whom  Gates  had  looked  down  upon,  released  all  the  pris 
oners,  and  captured  ninaty  British. 


WEST  POINT. 


303 


CHAPTEE  XXVII. 

WEST  POINT. 

AFTER  the  capture  of  Forts  Montgomery  and  Clinton,  on  the  Hud 
son,  in  September,  1777,  when  Burgoyne  was  at  Saratoga,  General 
Washington  and  Congress  saw  the  necessity  of  having  a  strong  fort  erect 
ed  farther  up  the  river  at  West  Point,  to  protect  the  ferrying  of  troops  and 
supplies  between  New  England  and  the  other  colonies.  Nature  had  made 
it  so  strong  a  place  that  it  was  not  difficult  to  build  a  fortress  which  the 
whole  British  army  could  not  capture. 

The  young  officer  from  Poland  who  had  planned  the  intrenchments  at 


MAP    OF    HUDSON    RIVER    AT    WEST    POINT. 


304 


THE   BOYS   OF  '76. 


Stillwater  —  Thaddeus  Kosciuszko  —  was  employed  to  plan  the  intrench 
ments,  and  Captain  Elijah  Favor  was  directed  to  aid  him.  They  began 
work  on  the  20th  of  March,  1778,  staking  out  the  lines,  and  setting  a  large 
number  of  soldiers  at  work.  The  walls  were  of  earth  and  logs,  fourteen 
feet  high,  and  twenty-one  wide  at  the  base.  It  was  eighteen  hundred  feet 
around  the  main  work.  There  were  bastions  and  ditches,  and  it  had  many 
angles.  It  could  be  approached  from  one  side  only — that  toward  the  riv 
er;  and  for  a  defense  there,  they  erected  a  strong  oak  palisade  —  driving 
the  logs  into  the  earth,  and  bolting  them  together  at  the  top.  One  hun 
dred  guns  of  all  kinds  were  placed  in  the  main  fort  and  the  surrounding 
works. 

To  make  it  impossible  for  the  British  ships  to  get  past  it  at  night,  it 
was  decided  to  have  a  great  iron  chain  stretched  across  the  river  just 
above  the  fort.  The  links  were  large,  and  the  whole  chain  weighed  one 
hundred  and  eighty  tons.  The  soldiers  floated  great  pine -logs  down  the 
river,  and  laid  them  side  by  side,  to  buoy  the  chain ;  fastened  it  to  the  logs 
with  iron  staples,  and  bolted  each  end  to  the  ledges  on  the  shores.  The 
fort  was  so  strong,  and  was  so  conveniently  situated,  that  General  Wash 
ington  had  his  supplies  of  powder  stored  there. 


I'AKT    OK    THE    CHAIN. 


While  the  fort  was  building,  Elijah  had  his  head  -  quarters  at  a  house 
owned  by  Mr.  Beverly  Eobinson,  on  the  east  side  of  the  river,  and  two 
miles  down  stream.  It  was  a  delightful  place,  close  by  the  river,  with  a 
piazza  on  the  south  side,  and  surrounded  by  apple,  plum,  and  cherry  trees. 


WEST   POINT. 


305 


THE  BKVEKLY  KUBINSON  HOUSE. 


Mr.  Robinson  was  .a  Tory,  and  had  fled  to  New  York,  and  had  been  com 
missioned  a  colonel  in  the  British  service.     Mr.  Robinson's  sister  was  Mary 

Phillipse,  the  young  lady  to  whom, 
in  1756,  General  Washington    paid 
his  addresses,  but  who  had  married 
General  Washington's    old    compan 
ion  in  arms,  Major  Morris. 

After  the  British  evacuated  Phila 
delphia,  General  Arnold  was  sent  by 
General  Washington  to  take  posses 
sion  of  that  city.  He  lived  in  fine 
style,  gave  good  dinners,  and  spent 
more  money  than  he  received.  He 
was  forty  years  old,  and  a  bache 
lor;  but  he  saw  a  girl  who  charmed 
him  —  Margaret  Shippen,  youngest 
daughter  of  Judge  Shippen,  who  was 
only  eighteen.  His  love  was  reciprocated,  and  she  became  Mrs.  Arnold. 

General  Arnold  was  in  debt,  and  men  who  are  hard  pressed  for  mon 
ey  not  unfrequently  do  that  which  is  not  lawful.  He  was  in  command, 
and  a  military  commander  in  time  of  war  has  great  power.  He  op 
pressed  the  citizens,  used  the  army  teams  for  his  own  use,  engaged  in 
speculations,  but  lived  in  great  style, 
and  instead  of  diminishing  his  debts, 
became  more  deeply  involved.  The 
people  of ,  Philadelphia  were  offend 
ed  at  his  exactions,  and  the  Presi 
dent  and  Council  of  the  State  pre 
ferred  charges  against  him  to  Con 
gress,  and  a  court-martial  was  order 
ed  to  investigate  them. 

General  Arnold  had  spent  money 
in  Canada,  and  he  sent  a  bill  to  Con 
gress,  claiming  that  a  large  amount 
was  due  him.  Congress  did  not 
think  that  he  was  entitled  to  what 
he  claimed,  and  Arnold  resigned  his 
commission.  He  was  angry  that  a 
court  should  be  called  to  investigate 
the  charges  against  him.  BENEDICT 


390 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


General  Arnold's  young  wife  held  in  kindly  remembrance  one  of  the 
young  British  officers,  who,  by  his  wit,  his  genial  nature,  his  poetical  tal 
ents,  his  ability  to  paint  pictures  and  make  off-hand  sketches,  had  made 
the  winter  so  agreeable  —  Major  John  Andre  —  and  who  was  now  with 
Sir  Henry  Clinton  in  New  York — his  quarters  at  Mr.  Kip's  house,  on  the 
shore  of  the  East  Eiver.  Friendly  letters  passed  between  them.  One  day, 
among  other  letters  received  by  Sir  Henry  Clinton  by  flag  of  truce  from 
the  American  lines,  was  one  from  Philadelphia.  The  writer  did  not  give 
his  full  name,  but  signed  himself  Gustavus.  He  stated  that  he  was  a  per 
son  of  importance  in  the 
American  service,  but  he 
was  dissatisfied  with  what 
Congress  was  doing.  He 
did  not  like  the  alliance 
with  France,  and  he  was 
ready  to  leave  the  Ameri 
cans  and  become  loyal,  if 
he  could  be  assured  of  the 
safety  of  his  person,  and 
be  indemnified  for  the  loss 
of  his  property.  Sir  Hen 
ry  Clinton  was  quite  will 
ing  to  find  out  who  this 
person  of  some  conse 
quence  might  be. 

"  You  will  please  an 
swer  that  under  a  dis 
guised  hand  and  an  as 
sumed  name,"  were  his  in 
structions  to  his  adjutant- 
general,  Major  John  An 
dre;  and  the  major  wrote  a  reply,  inviting  further  correspondence,  and 
signed  the  letter  John  Anderson — John  Andre's  own;  and  so  it  came 
about  that,  during  the  winter  of  1779 -'80,  there  was  a  correspondence 
between  Mr.  Gustavus,  of  Philadelphia,  and  John  Anderson,  merchant, 
of  New  York. 

Sir  Henry  Clinton  had  a  suspicion  that  Mr.  Gustavus  was  General 
Arnold,  for  the  court  which  had  investigated  the  charges  against  Arnold 
had  condemned  him  to  be  reprimanded  for  oppressing  the  people  of  Phil 
adelphia,  and  other  irregularities.  Arnold  expected  to  be  triumphantly 


JOHN    ANDRE. — [FROM    PORTRAIT    BY    JOSHUA    REYNOLDS.] 


I 


WEST   POINT.  309 

vindicated,  and  it  was  terribly  galling  to  his  proud  spirit  to  be  conducted 
into  the  presence  of  General  Washington  and  receive  a  reprimand.  He 
bore  it  with  becoming  acquiescence,  however,  and  renewed  his  profes 
sions  of  loyalty  to  the  patriot  cause.  He  would  still  serve  his  country. 
Little  does  General  Washington  know  of  the  thoughts  that  are  coursing 
through  the  brain  of  General  Arnold  as  he  stands  before  the  commander- 
m-chief  and  the  officers  of  the  court. 


"One  may  smile,  and  smile,  and  be  a  villain. 


What  he  is  thinking  of  we  shall  perhaps  see  by-and-by. 

Months  pass.  Summer  comes.  General  Arnold  is  a  patriot.  He  has 
not  allowed  the  rejection  of  his  claim  by  Congress,  nor  the  finding  of 
the  court-martial,  to  dampen  his  ardor  for  his  country.  The  time  has 
come  for  active  operations  ;  but  his  wound  received  at  Saratoga  will  not 
permit  him  to  ride  horseback.  He  would  like  to  be  reinstated  in  com 
mand  as  major-general.  He  could  command  at  West  Point.  General 
Washington  would  like  to  have  him  command  the  right  wing  of  the  army, 
but  General  Arnold  declines  the  honor  on  account  of  his  wound,  and  so 
is  appointed  to  command  the  impregnable  and  all  -important  fortress  at 
West  Point,  where  all  the  powder  is  stored  —  the  stronghold  protecting  the 
Hudson,  and  which  the  whole  British  army  can  not  capture. 

Sir  Henry  Clinton  was  still  receiving  letters  from  Mr.  Gustavus,  who 
was  no  longer  in  Philadelphia,  but  somewhere  up  the  Hudson.  Mr.  Gus 
tavus  was  in  the  mercantile  line.  He  had  something  to  sell,  and  wrote 
about  tobacco  and  dry  goods.  His  letters  were  addressed  to  "  Mr.  John 
Anderson,  Merchant,  to  the  care  of  James  Osberne,  to  be  left  at  the  Rev 
erend  Mr.  Odell's,  New  York." 

Mr.  Gustavus  was  a  man  of  consequence  now.  He  had  something  be 
sides  his  influence  to  sell.  He  could  turn  over  a  fortress,  with  one  hun 
dred  cannon,  powder,  balls,  provisions  ;  and,  with  the  fortress,  he  could  sell 
an  army,  a  nation. 

On  the  31st  of  August,  a  boat  sailed  down  the  Hudson,  with  a  white 
flag  fluttering  in  the  breeze.  There  was  a  gentleman  on  board  the  boat 
by  the  name  of  Heron,  a  member  of  the  Connecticut  Legislature.  He 
carried  a  package  of  letters,  and  among  them  one  for  John  Anderson,  mer 
chant.  Mr.  Heron  did  not  know  who  wrote  it,  nor  what  was  in  it  ;  but 
Mr.  Heron  had  a  talk  with  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  and  informed  him  that  he, 
though  a  member  of  the  Connecticut  Legislature,  was  dissatisfied  with 
Congress,  and  that  the  rebellion  would  soon  come  to  an  end  through  :& 
weakness. 


310 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


On  that  same  day,  in  the  afternoon,  a  ship  sailed  down  the  Narrows 
for  England,  with  Colonel  Dairy mple  on  board,  and  other  officers  of  the 
English  army.  They  carried  information  too  important  to  be  put  on  pa> 
per,  which  they  would  whisper  in  private  to  Lord  North,  and  be  taken  by 
him  into  the  royal  closet,  where  they  would  whisper  it  to  the  king,  that  a 
British  fleet  would  go  up  the  Hudson  with  troops,  and  capture  West  Point 

A  plan  was  being  arranged 
under  which  it  would  im 
mediately  fall  into  the 
hands  of  the  British.  Be 
fore  Washington  was  aware 
of  it,  the  rebellion  would 
be  crushed,  and  Washing 
ton's  army  scattered  to  the 
winds,  or  else  captured,  and 
the  French  also. 

The  ship  arrived  in  En 
gland,  and  a  day  or  two 
later  it  was  known  in  Lon 
don  that  the  rebellion  was 
soon  to  receive  its  finishing 
blow. 

Mr.  Gustavus,  up  the 
Hudson,  was  ready  to  do 
some  trading  with  Mr.  John 
Anderson,  merchant,  of 
New  York.  Thus  far  they 
had  carried  on  the  negotia 
tions  about  tobacco  and  dry 
goods  by  correspondence, 
but  it  was  desirable  to  have 
a  private  interview.  Mr.  Gustavus  was  living  with  a  young  and  beautiful 
wife  and  their  young  babe,  in  Colonel  Beverly  Robinson's  house,  nestled 
on  the  east  bank  of  the  Hudson,  just  below  West  Point.  Colonel  Bev 
erly  Robinson  was  a  loyal  subject  of  the  king,  holding  a  commission,  and 
knew  Mr.  Gustavus  personally,  and  was  selected  to  arrange  a  meeting. 

Colonel  Sheldon,  commanding  the  cavalry  in  Westchester  County,  re 
ceived  a  letter  from  New  York  written  by  John  Anderson : 

"New  York,  September  7th,  1780. 

"  SIR, — I  am  told  my  name  is   made  known  to  you,  and  that  I 


HALL  IN  THE  BEVERLY  ROBINSON  HOUSE HEAD-QUAR 
TERS  OF  ARNOLD. 


WEST  POINT.  311 

hope  your  indulgence  in  permitting  me  to  go  out  with  a  flag,  which  will 
be  sent  to  Dobbs's  Ferry,  Sunday 
next,  the  llth,  at  12  o'clock,  when 
I  shall  be  happy  to  meet  Mr.  G— 
"JOHN  ANDERSON." 

Colonel  Sheldon  never  had 
heard  of  John  Anderson,  and  did 
not  quite  know  what  to  make  of  it. 
He  sent  the  letter  to  General  Ar 
nold. 

"  If  a  man  by  the  name  of  John 
Anderson  comes  to  the  lines,  send 
me  word  by  express,  and  bring  him 
to  head-quarters,"  were  Arnold's  in 
structions.  COLONEL  ROBINSON. 

Sunday  came.  There  was  to  be  a  meeting  on  this  day  on  the  east 
shore  of  the  Hudson,  near  Dobbs's  Ferry.  No  church  bell  would  ring, 
there  would  be  no  crowd  of  worshipers,  no  preaching  or  praying,  no  min 
ister;  but  Mr.  Gustavus  would  meet  Mr.  John  Anderson  and  talk  over  a 
little  trade  they  had  in  hand. 

On  Saturday  night  General  Arnold  went  down  the  river  from  Robin 
son's  house,  and  spent  the  night  at  the  house  of  Mr.  Joshua  Smith,  at 
Long  Clove,  two  miles  above  Haverstraw.  He  intended  to  cross  to  the 
east  side  of  the  river  in  the  morning,  to  the  neutral  ground,  between  the 
outposts  of  his  own  lines  and  those  of  Sir  Henry  Clinton.  Possibly  he 
would  meet  somebody  from  New  York  there.  He  had  heard  that  Mr. 
John  Anderson,  merchant,  of  New  York,  was  to  be  there  on  Sunday  morn 
ing.  Mr.  Anderson  and  Colonel  Robinson  went  up  the  river  on  Saturday 
afternoon,  but,  by  some  mistake,  instead  of  going  to  the  spot  where  they 
were  to  meet  Mr.  Gustavus,  they  went  on  board  the  Vulture  frigate. 

Sunday  morning  the  sailors  on  the  Vulture  see  a  boat  coming  down 
the  Hudson.  An  American  major-general  is  seated  at  the  stern.  The 
boat  carries  no  white  flag.  It  is  within  cannon-shot,  and  the  sailors  ram 
home  a  shot  and  let  it  fly  at  the  boat,  which  quickly  turns  about  to  get 
beyond  reach,  and  so  there  is  no  meeting  on  this  Sunday  morning  between 
Mr.  Gustavus  and  Mr.  Anderson  on  the  east  bank  of  the  Hudson.  Gen 
eral  Arnold  goes  up  the  river  to  the  Robinson  house,  and  Major  Andre 
returns  to  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  at  Kip's  house,  each  wondering  how  there 
happened  to  be  no  meeting. 


312 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


Count  Rochambeau  had  arrived  at  Newport,  in  Khode  Island,  with  a 
French  army,  and  General  Washington  was  to  go  eastward  to  Hartford,  to 
meet  him  there  and  arrange  a  campaign. 


SMITH  S    HOUSK. 


Sir  Henry  Clinton  was  getting  impatient.  The  importance  of  obtain 
ing  West  Point  grew  upon  him,  and  he  sent  Colonel  Robinson  up  the  river 
to  see  what  could  be  done  about  it.  Colonel  Robinson  went  on  board  the 
Vulture,  and  the  ship,  with  a  white  flag  flying,  sailed  up  the  river  to  Tel- 
er's  Point,  and  came  to  anchor.  Colonel  Robinson  delivered  a  letter  to 
Colonel  Livingston,  in  command  of  the  Americans  there,  addressed  to 
General  Arnold.  The  letter  was  forwarded  to  Robinson's  house.  General 
Arnold  was  at  dinner  with  a  company  of  officers  when  the  servant  put  the 
letter  into  his  hands. 

"  The  enemy  have  sent  Colonel  Robinson  up  the  river  asking  for  an 
interview  with  me,"  he  remarked. 

The  second  in  command  at  West  Point  was  Colonel  Lamb,  the  man 
who  had  his  jaw  shot  away  by  the  side  of  Montgomery,  on  that  fearful 
night  at  Quebec,  on  the  last  day  of  December,  1776.  Mr.  Lamb  was  re 
lated  to  Colonel  Robinson;  but  he  was  a  true  patriot,  and  Robinson  a 
Tory. 

"  To  grant  such  a  request  would  be  exceedingly  impolitic.     It  would 


WEST   POINT.  313 

give  the  public  ground  for  suspecting  improper  connections,"  was  Colonel 
Lamb's  outspoken  remark. 

General  Arnold  showed  the  letter  to  Gen 
eral  Washington. 

"  It  is  considered  highly  improper  for  the 
commander  of  a  post  to  grant  such  an  inter 
view.  A  trustworthy  officer  may  be  sent,  but 
it  is  better  to  have  nothing  to  do  with  business 
that  pertains  to  the  civil  authorities." 

General  Washington  and  General  Arnold 
ride  side  by  side  to  Peekskill,  and  pass  the 
night,  On  the  following  morning  General 
Washington  bids  Arnold  good-bye.  They 

never  will  meet  again.     The  one  goes  east  to  Hartford;  the  other  returns 
to  the  fine  old  mansion  on  the  banks  of  the  Hudson. 

It  would  be  discourteous  not  to  take  notice  of  the  letter  sent  by  Col 
onel  Kobinson ;  for,  in  war,  commanders  of  armies  should  pay  particular 
regard  to  any  courteous  request  of  an  enemy.  The  messenger  who  goes 
down  to  Teller's  Point  carries  this  reply : 

"  I  will  send  a  person  in  whom  you  can  confide,  by  water,  to  meet  you 
at  Dobbs's  Ferry,  at  the  landing  east  side,  on  Wednesday  the  20th,  who 
will  conduct  yon  to  a  place  of  safety,  where  I  will  meet  you." 

The  letter  is  not  intended  for  Colonel  Beverly  Robinson,  but  for  John 
Anderson. 

In  the  Kip  house,  on  the  20th  of  September,  Sir  Henry  Clinton  is  giv 
ing  his  last  instructions  to  his  youthful  and  beloved  adjutant-general,  who  is 
going  up  the  Hudson  to  transact  some  important  business — the  purchasing 
of  the  strongest  fortress  in  America.  The  last  words  are  spoken,  and  the 
light-hearted  officer  leaves  Sir  Henry's  apartment.  Upon  the  veranda  he 
meets  Polly  Kip,  the  merry  daughter  of  the  host.  Major  Andre  has  been 
so  long  an  inmate  of  the  house  that  he  may  address  her  familiarly.  He 
stands  before  her,  with  his  boyish  face  and  pleasant  smile,  in  his  handsome 
uniform.  Perhaps,  as  he  gazes  upon  her,  his  thoughts  fly  far  away  over 
the  sea  to  an  English  home,  and  he  thinks  of  the  days  when  he  so  stood 
before  Honora  Sneyd,  his  true-love,  whose  portrait,  painted  by  himself,  is 
this  moment  inclosed  in  a  locket  upon  his  neck.  Alas !  she  is  the  wife  of 
another,  and  never  again  will  he  clasp  her  to  his  heart.  Pie  beholds  the 
fair,  fresh  countenance  of  the  light-hearted  Dutch  girl. 

uCome,  Polly,  I  am  going  up  the  river.  We  are  old  friends;  kiss  me 
good-bye." 


314 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


"  Oh,  you  be  hanged  !" 

Polly  will  not  give  such  a  favor  —  not  even  to  Sir  Henry  Clinton's 
young  and  brilliant  and  good  adjutant -general.  Little  does  Polly  Kip, 

little  does  Major  Andre,  think  the 
words  spoken  in  jest  may  be  pro 
phetic  of  impending  doom. 

John  Anderson  is  sailing  up  the 
Hudson  with  wind  and  tide  in  his 
favor.  He  does  not  land  at  Teller's 
Point,  but  goes  on  board  the  Vult 
ure,  and  spends  the  night. 

Autumn  has  come.  The  apples 
are  ripening,  and  an  old  farmer  on 
the  east  side  of  the  Hudson,  near 
Teller's  Point,  is  making  cider.  A 
party  of  American  militia  are  drink 
ing  and  carousing  around  the  press, 
and  the  farmer,  to  get  rid  of  them, 
informs  them  that  the  Vulture  has 
come  up  the  river,  and  is  at  anchor 
just  off  the  point. 

"  You  had  better  go  down  and  bother  the  British,  than  to  stay  here 
and  bother  me,"  he  says. 

It  is  a  good  suggestion.  The  young  men  think  that  i\«?f  will  take  a 
look  at  the  Vulture.  They  are  ready  for  a  lark.  How  would  it  do  to 
hang  out  a  white  flag  and  toll  a  boat  out  from  the  Vulture,  get  it  with 
in  gun-shot,  and  then  give  a  volley?  The  bumpkins  know  little  of  the 
rules  of  war,  and  care  less.  It  will  be  a  capital  joke,  and  so  they  hang 
out  a  white  cloth. 

Mr.  John  Anderson  and  Colonel  Beverly  Robinson  see  it.  That  is  the 
place  where  they  are  to  meet  a  messenger  from  General  Arnold.  Captain 
Sutherland,  commander  of  the  Vulture,  sends  a  boat  to  see  about  the  white 
flag ;  but  as  the  boat  nears  the  shore  suddenly  there  is  a  cracking  of  rifles, 
and  the  bullets  splash  the  water  or  splinter  the  boat.  It  is  treachery  un 
heard  of,  a  violation  of  all  the  rules  of  warfare,  and  the  officer  in  the  boat 
goes  back  to  the  Vulture  boiling  over  with  wrath ;  and  the  captain  of  the 
ship,  hot  with  anger,  sends  a  letter  to  General  Arnold,  wanting  to  know 
the  meaning  of  such  treachery,  and  John  Anderson  begins  to  suspect  that 
he  has  been  made  a  fool  of.  Twice  he  has  failed  of  meeting  Mr.  Gustavus. 
The  trustworthy  man  whom  General  Arnold  had  selected  to  meet  Mr. 


HONORA    SNKYD. 


WEST  POINT.  315 

John  Anderson  and  conduct  him  to  a  place  of  safety  was  Mr.  Joshua  Smith, 
owner  of  the  house  at  Long  Clove,  on  the  west  side  of  the  Hudson,  just 
above  Haverstraw.  Mr.  Smith  was  a  Whig  —  at  least  he  claimed  to  be 
one.  He  was  an  intelligent  man,  and  owned  a  large  farm.  His  brother 
was  a  Tory,  and  was  in  New  York  with  General  Clinton ;  and  some  of 
Mr.  Smith's  Whig  neighbors  were  quite  confident  that  Mr.  Smith  at  Long 
Clove  kept  Judge  Smith  informed  of  all  that  was  going  on  up  river,  and 
that  what  Judge  Smith  knew  Sir  Henry  Clinton  knew.  General  Arnold 
came  to  the  conclusion  that  Mr.  Smith  was  just  the  man  to  meet  Mr.  John 
Anderson,  and  bring  him  to  a  place  where  he  could  confer  with  him  on 
important  public  matters. 

Would  Mr.  Smith  be  willing  to  send  his  family  away  for  a  few  days  ? 
The  matter  was  of  a  nature  which  General  Arnold  wished  to  keep  from 
the  public,  and  Mr.  Smith  was  ever  ready  to  do  what  he  could  for  his 
country,  and  was  ready  to  oblige  General  Arnold,  and  so  carried  his  wife 
and  children  up  the  river  to  Fishkill  on  a  visit,  and  the  house  was  at  the 
service  of  General  Arnold. 

General  Arnold  came  down  the  river  to  Mr.  Smith's  house.  Would 
Mr.  Smith  be  kind  enough  to  go  down  the  river  in  the  night  to  the  Vult 
ure,  and  bring  a  Mr.  John  Anderson,  merchant,  of  New  York,  to  a  point 
on  the  shore  below  Haverstraw  ?  General  Arnold  would  supply  him  with 
passes.  He  might  go  in  the  day-time  by  flag  of  truce,  but  it  was  better 
to  do  it  in  the  night.  Mr.  Smith  had  some  hesitation  about  going  in  the 
night,  but  it  was  at  the  request  of  a  major-general  of  the  American  army, 
who  had  fought  gallantly  in  Canada  and  at  Saratoga;  it  was  a  matter  of 
great  public  importance,  and  he  could  not  refuse.  He  obtained  two  boat 
men,  Samuel  and  Joseph  Colquhoun,  two  of  his  tenants,  and  in  the  dark 
ness  they  leave  Long  Clove,  and  go  down  past  Haverstraw  to  the  Vulture. 
The  sentinel  on  board  the  Vulture  hails  them.  They  are  friends,  with 
passes  from  General  Arnold.  Mr.  John  Anderson  steps  on  board,  and 
they  pull  to  the  shore.  In  the  darkness,  the  boatmen  and  Mr.  Smith  can 
only  see  that  he  is  a  young  man,  wrapped  in  a  blue  cloak. 

The  boat  reaches  the  land.    Mr.  Smith  climbs  the  bank,  and  finds  Gen 
eral  Arnold  standing  beneath  the  dark  and  gloomy  fir-trees  at  the  foot  of 
the  palisades.     Mr.  John  Anderson— for  such  is  the  gentleman's  name,  as 
Mr.  Smith  understands — steps  upon  the  land  and  meets  General  Arnold, 
and  the  two  move  away  a  little  distance. 

No  lisp  of  their  conversation  is  heard  by  Smith  or  the  boatmen.  Hour 
after  hour  passes.  The  morning  dawns.  The  bargain  is  not  completed, 
but  it  is  quite  time  that  Mr.  John  Anderson  should  be  on  his  way  back  to 


sie 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


ARNOLD,  ANDRE,  AND  SMITH:   THK  MIDNIGHT  MEETING. 

the  ship.  He  is  ready,  but  the  boatmen  are  not.  They  have  had  a  long 
pull ;  their  arms  ache.  Besides,  Samuel  and  Joseph  Colquhoun  are  Whigs. 
They  are  simple-hearted  men.  They  did  not  wish  to  go  to  the  Vulture  at 
the  outset,  and  they  will  not  make  a  second  trip.  The  sentinel  challenged 
them  roughly ;  the  officer  on  the  deck  of  the  Vulture  was  rude  to  them ; 
the  sailors  chaffed  them.  They  do  not  care  to  be  chaffed  a  second  time. 
Possibly  their  neighbors  will  ask  them  what  they  went  for.  Possibly  they 
have  a  little  distrust  of  this  midnight  meeting,  although  General  Arnold, 
commander  at  West  Point,  is  one  of  the  parties. 

Mr.  John  Anderson  is  anxious  to  be  off.  General  Arnold  wishes  them 
to  go ;  Mr.  Smith  importunes  them. 

"  No,  our  arms  ache      Besides,  Colonel  Livingston,  who  is  in  command 


WEST   POINT. 


317 


over  on  the  east  side  at  Teller's  Point,  is  going  to  cannonade  the  Vulture 
in  the  morning,"  say  the  boatmen  to  Mr.  Smith,  who  reports  their  answer 
to  Mr.  John  Anderson. 

"  Oh,  they  can  reach  the  ship,  and  get  out  of  the  way  before  the  can- 
nonade  begins;  and  the  flag  that  carried  them  to  the  ship  will  protect 
them  on  their  return,"  says  Mr.  Anderson. 

But  the  boatmen  will  not  go.  Day  is  breaking.  'Up  in  the  woods 
Mr.  Smith's  negro  servant  is  waiting.  He  followed  General  Arnold  from 


THE    HTTOROW   BETWEEN    BOBBs's    FERRY    AND    WEST    POINT. 

Smith's  houce,  and  is  holding  General  Arnold's  horse,  and  the  horse  which 
he  himself  rode.  The  business  which  Mr.  Anderson  has  in  hand  is  not 
qnite  completed,  and  it  will  be  best  for  him  to  mount  the  negro's  horse 
and  ride  with  General  Arnold  up  to  Mr.  Smith's,  beyond  Haverstraw. 
Tliey  mount  the  steeds  and  ride  away,  and  the  boatmen  and  Mr.  Smith 
and  the  negro  glide  along  the  western  shore  of  the  river,  reaching  Mr. 
Smith's  house  almost  as  quickly  as  the  riders. 


318  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

The  roar  of  a  cannon  breaks  upon  the  morning  air.  Colonel  Living 
ston  has  begun,  and  the  balls  go  plump  into  the  sides  of  the  Vulture,  at 
anchor  near  the  mouth  of  the  Croton  River.  John  Anderson  hears  the 
uproar,  looks  out  of  the  window,  and  sees  the  Vulture  spreading  her  white 
wings  to  the  morning  breeze  and  sailing  away.  He  feels  a  sinking  of 
heart.  What  would  he  not  give  at  that  moment  to  be  on  board ! 

General  Arnold  and  the  merchant  breakfast  together.  Arnold  is  very 
careful  to  address  him  as  Mr.  Anderson.  After  breakfast  they  go  into  a 
chamber,  and  General  Arnold  shows  him  a  paper — a  plan  of  West  Point. 
They  talk  about  money,  about  troops  being  placed  in  particular  localities 
on  a  particular  night  in  squads,  where  they  might  run  a  chance  of  being 
captured,  if  a  British  force  were  suddenly  to  appear.  General  Arnold 
says  that  a  link  has  been  taken  out  of  the  great  iron  chain,  and  that,  if  a 
British  fleet  should  happen  to  get  past  the  fort,  the  sailors  could  quickly 
separate  the  boom,  and  the  two  ends  would  swing  round  against  the 
shores.  If  a  British  army  should  happen  to  be  marching  some  night  up 
toward  West  Point,  it  would  be  an  easy  matter  for  some  of  the  officers, 
dressed  in  American  uniform,  to  gallop  into  the  fort  and  see  how  the 
troops  were  situated.  They  could  do  it  very  easily  if  they  had  the  coun 
tersign  ;  and  as  General  Arnold  knows  what  the  countersign  is  to  be,  he 
will  just  whisper  it  to  Mr.  Anderson. 

This  is  the  22d  of  September,  and  on  the  26th,  at  midnight,  a  British 
army  will  be  marching  to  surprise  the  garrison  at  West  Point. 

It  was  ten  o'clock  in  the  forenoon  when  General  Arnold  got  through 
his  business  with  Mr.  John  Anderson.  He  left  some  papers  with  Mr.  An 
derson,  bid  him  good-bye,  stepped  into  his  barge,  and  the  rowers  pulled 
up  stream  to  the  Robinson  house.  Mr.  Anderson  looks  at  the  papers,  pulls 
off  his  boots,  and  puts  the  papers  inside  of  his  stockings.  He  hardly  knows 
why,  only  General  Arnold  suggested  it.  He  might  carry  all  there  is  on 
the  papers  in  his  head ;  but  perhaps  they  will  be  of  value  to  Sir  Henry 
Clinton.  It  would  be  better  for  him  if  he  were  to  burn  the  papers.  The 
ashes  would  tell  no  tale.  It  would  have  been  better  if  he  had  held  a  white 
flag  in  his  hand  when  he  came  on  shore  last  night,  even  if  no  one  saw  it  in 
the  darkness. 

Through  the  day  Mr.  Anderson  remains  at  Mr.  Smith's  house.  He 
looks  out  of  the  window  and  views  the  landscape.  Evening  comes.  Just 
as  twilight  is  fading  away,  Mr.  Smith  and  a  stranger  ride  down  to  King's 
Ferry  The  ferry-man  is  well  acquainted  with  Mr.  Smith. 

"We  are  on  our  way  up  river,"  Mr.  Smith  remarks  to  the  ferry-man. 
The  Granger  with  Mr.  Smith  is  a  nice-looking  young  man,  dressed  in  a 


WEST   POINT. 


319 


beaver  hat  a  little  the  worse  for  wear,  a  plum-colored  coat  trimmed  with 
tarnished  gold  lace,  nankeen  small-clothes,  and  white-topped  boots.  Good 
boots  they  are.  Over  all 
is  a  blue  cloak  with  a 
heavy  cape.  They  cross 
the  river.  Mr.  Smith  and 
Mr.  Anderson  mount  their 
horses,  with  a  negro  serv 
ant  following,  for  Mr. 
Smith  is  a  man  of  conse 
quence. 

They  gallop  up  the 
road  leading  toward  West 
Point,  away  from  New 
York,  away  from  the  Vult 
ure.  They  come  to  a  road  turning  off  to  the  right  hand.  A  guide-board, 
standing  at  the  junction,  with  an  arrow  pointing  down  the  road  over  which 
they  have  ridden,  has  this  direction  : 


VIEW    FROM    SMITH  8    HOUSE. 


"Dish  hi 8  di  Rode 
tu  de  Kishnigs  Farry" 


Mr.  Smith  wishes  to  ride  toward  New  York,  but  he  has  informed  the 
ferry-man  that  he  is  going  "  up  along,"  and  it  will  not  do  to  turn  to  the 
right  here;,  they  ride  on  two  miles  farther,  and  then  turn  south-east.  A 
sentinel  halts  them,  but  they  have  passes.  Captain  Boyd,  in  command  of 
the  sentinels,  examines  the  passes : 

"  Head- quarters,  Robinson  House,  September  22d,  1780. 

"Joshua  Smith  has  permission  to  pass  the  guards  to  White  Plains  and 
to  return,  he  being  on  public  business  by  my  direction. 

"B.  ARNOLD,  Major-general* 

"  Head-quarters,  Robinson  House,  September  22d,  1780. 

u  Permit  Mr.  John  Anderson  to  pass  to  the  White  Plains,  or  below,  ii 
he  chooses,  he  being  on  public  business  by  my  direction. 

"B.  ARNOLD,  Major-general^ 


"The  passes  are  all  right.     The  best  road  is  by  North  Castie.     The 


320 


THE   BOYS   OF  7(>. 


Tarrytown  road  is  infested  by  Cow-boys,  and  you  had  1  tetter  not  attempt 
to  get  on  to-night,"  says  Captain  Boyd. 

Mr.  Smith  thought  it  prudent  advice,  and  halted  at  a  farm-house  til) 
morning. 

John  Anderson  and  Mr.  Smith  were  up  by  day-break  on  the  morning 
of  the  23d  of  September.  Mr.  Anderson  had  not  been  asleep.  He  had  a 
haggard  look,  and  had  grown  old.  Mr.  Smith  and  Mr.  Anderson  would 
not  stop  for  breakfast,  but  before  sunrise  were  galloping  southward  on 
important  public  business ;  and  Mr.  Smith  was  ignorant  as  to  what  that 


THE    BREAKFAST    OF    HASTY-PUDDING. 


business  might  be.  He  may  have  had  a  suspicion  that  something  not  quite 
right  was  going  on ;  but  General  Arnold  had  not  enlightened  him  in  re 
gard  to  it. 

Twelve  miles,  and  they  halted  for  breakfast.  It  was  at  a  small  house. 
The  Cow-boys  had  been  there  during  the  night  and  robbed  the  lone  female 
occupant  of  almost  every  thing.  She  could  only  give  them  some  liasty- 
pudding,  which  the  Dutch  called  soupaan.  Curious  that  this  same  John 
Anderson  should  have  written,  a  few  weeks  before,  a  poem  called  "  The 
Cow  Chase,"  in  which  he  had  ridiculed  the  men  who,  while  fighting  for 
their  liberty,  could  get  nothing  but  water  and  hasty-pudding.  These  were 
his  lines: 


WEST   POINT.  321 

"  For  many  heroes  bold  and  "brave, 
From  New  Bridge  and  Tapaan, 
And  those  that  drink  Passaick's  wave, 
And  those  that  eat  soupaan." 

"  1  must  bid  you  good-bye  here,"  Mr.  Smith  said,  while  eating  his 
pudding. 

They  were  close  to  the  Croton  River.  Mr.  Anderson  would  find  no 
sentinel  beyond  that.  He  would  be  on  neutral  ground.  If  he  were  to 
fall  in  either  with  the  Cow-boys  or  the  Skinners,  Mr.  Smith  would  be  of 
no  service  to  him.  The  Cow-boys  were  a  set  of  rascals  who  shouted  "  God 
save  the  king!"  but  who  plundered  every  body.  The  Skinners  were  an- 


THE    OLD    CHURCH    AT    SLEETY    HOLLOW. 

other  set  of  ruffians  who  shouted  "  Hurra  for  Congress !"  but  who  plun 
dered  all  they  met.  Sometimes  the  Cow-boys  and  Skinners  joined  their 
forces,  and  made  raids  among  the  farmers,  drove  off  their  cattle,  and  rob 
bed  them  of  their  provisions.  Besides  these,  there  were  bands  of  militia, 
composed  of  the  farmers,  who  joined  together  to  protect  themselves  from 
the  Cow-boys,  the  Skinners,  and  the  British.  If  Mr.  Anderson  were  to 
fall  in  with  either  party  he  would  get  along  just  as  well  alone  as  with  Mr 

II 


322 


THE   BOYS   OP  76. 


Smith.  They  hade  each  other  good-bye.  Mr.  Smith  and  his  negro  serv 
ant  rode  to  the  Robinson  house,  where  Mr.  Smith  sat  down  to  General 
Arnold's  table  to  dinner,  and  informed  General  Arnold  that  Mr.  Ander 
son  was  well  on  his  way  to  the  British  lines.  The  general  was  well  satis 
fied  with  what  Mr.  Smith  had  done. 

Mr.  Anderson  pursues  his  solitary  way.     He  comes  to  two  roads,  om 
leading  to  Tarrytown,  the  other  farther  east;  but  both  leading  toward  New 
York.     Which  shall  he  take  ? 
Is  it  that  the  right-hand  road  will  take  him  down  through  Sleepy  Hoi 


THE    OLD    MILL    IN    SLEEPY    HOLLOW. 


low,  where  a  little  brook  winds  down 

from  the  hills,  and  where  the  little 

old  Dutch  church  is  standing?    There  i 

have    been    delightful  legends   since 

then  about  Sleepy  Hollow.     It  was 

there   that  Ichabod   Crane,  the   tall, 

lean,  and  awkward  school-master,  fell 

in  love  with  Katrina  Van  Tassel,  sung  with  her  in  the  old  church,  sat  in 

her  father's  kitchen  during  the  long  evenings,  looking  into  her  eyes,  and 


WEST  POINT. 


323 


thinking  how  delightful  it  would  be  to  have  Katrina  forever  by  his  side 
m  a  kitchen  of  their  own.  Going  by  the  way  of  Sleepy  Hollow,  John 
Anderson  would  cross  the  bridge  by  the  old  mill,  where  the  ghostly  horse 
man,  enveloped  in  a  cloak,  on  a  fiery  steed,  carrying  his  head  on  the  pom 
mel  of  the  saddle  instead  of  on  his  shoulders,  chased  the  school-master  and 
threw  his  head  at  him,  and  so  frightened  Ichabod  that  he  fled  from  Sleepy 
Hollow,  and  left  Katrina  to  be  married  to  his  rival,  Brom  Bones. 

John  Anderson,  as  he  rode  along  the  solitary  road  over  the  hills  and 
through  the  valleys,  with  no  one  to  keep  him  company,  was  thinking  how 
soon  he  might  come  across  a  British  sentinel.  Is  there  any  reason  why 
he  should  take  the  right-hand  road  rather  than  the  left?  No,  for  the  dis 
tance  by  one  is  no  greater  than  the  other,  and  both  are  equally  safe. 

He  turns  to  the  right.  Oh,  if  he  had  but  taken  the  left !  He  goes  to 
his  destiny,  and  with  him  goes  the  destiny  of  a  nation. 

Mr.  Anderson  is  thirsty,  and  asks  for  a  drink  of  water  at  Mr.  Ham 
mond's  farm-house,  and  the  little  Hammond  boy,  who  holds  his  bay  horse 
by  the  rein,  notices  that  it  is  a  good  horse,  but  that  there  are  burrs  in  its 
mane  and  tail,  that  the  rider  wears  a  plum-colored,  silver-laced  coat,  and 
nice  boots. 


THE    HEADLESS    HORSEMAN,    SLEEPY    HOLLOW 


324  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

"  How  far  is  it  to  Tarrytowri,  my  lad  ?" 

u  Four  miles." 

"  Four  miles !     I  did  not  think  it  so  far." 

His  is  a  pleasant  voice.     The  traveler  rides  on,  and  meete  some  Quaker 
farmers. 
/      "  Friends,  are  there  any  troops  out  below  ?" 

The  men  wearing  broad-brimmed  hats  have  seen  none. 

Mr.  Anderson  meets  a  man  on  horseback,  an  American  officer.  His 
hair  stands  on  end;  his  heart  leaps  into  his  mouth.  It  is  an  officer 
whom  he  knows,  and  who  knows  him — Colonel  Samuel  P.  Webb.  They 
stare  at  each  other,  and  pass  on.  He  has  now  reached  the  Hudson.  A 
little  farther,  and  he  will  meet  British  sentinels.  He  is  light-hearted 
once  more. 

The  traveler  has  reached  Sleepy  Hollow.  The  air  is  still  on  this  sweet 
September  day.  He  hears  the  water  falling  over  the  dam  by  the  mill ;  he 
can  see  the  little  old  church,  and  before  him  is  the  bridge  where  the  ghost 
ly  horseman  threw  his  head  at  Ichabod  Crane. 

Beyond  it,  on  the  south  side  of  the  stream,  is  a  wood  of  oak,  and  chest 
nuts,  and  alders,  and  matted  grape-vines.  Three  young  men  are  seated 
in  the  bushes  beneath  the  vines.  They  have  been  there  but  a  little  while, 
but,  having  been  out  all  night,  have  sat  down  to  rest,  and  are  playing 
cards.  There  are  four  other  men  on  a  hill  at  a  little  distance,  looking 
toward  Tarrytown  to  see  if  the  British  down  below  are  making  any  move 
ments.  They  do  not  belong  to  the  army,  but  call  themselves  militia.  The 
officer  up  at  Salem  has  given  them  liberty  to  come  down  toward  Tarry- 
town  to  see  what  they  can  discover,  and  to  punish  the  Cow  boys,  if  they 
can  get  an  opportunity. 

One  of  the  men  under  the  grape-vines  is  John  Paulding.  He  is  only 
twenty-one  years  old;  he  is  six  feet  high.  Twice  has  he  been  arrested 
and  taken  to  New  York  a  prisoner.  He  obtained  the  uniform  which  he 
is  now  wearing  from  a  German  Yager,  and  made  his  escape ;  and  here  he 
is  with  his  rifle,  on  the  lookout  for  somebody  on  whom  he  can  make  re 
prisals. 

David  Williams,  another  of  the  three,  marched  to  Canada  under  Gen 
eral  Montgomery.  He  has  nothing  to  do  now,  and  is  working  for  his 
board  for  whomsoever  will  employ  him,  and  his  food  consists  principally 
of  johnny-cake. 

Isaac  Van  Wart  lives  up  by  Pine  Ridge.  But  here  are  the  three. 
They  hear  the  sound  of  a  horse's  hoofs.  One  is  engaged  in  shuffling  the 
cards. 


WEST    POINT.  325 

"  There  comes  a  trader,  going  to  New  York,"  says  Yan  Wart. 

"  He  is  a  gentlemanly  -  looking  man,  is  well  dressed,  and  has  top- 
boots  on.  Hadn't  you  better  stop  him  T  says  Williams  to  Paulding,  the 
captain. 

All  three  spring  to  their  feet,  and  seize  their  rifles. 

"Halt!" 

It  is  the  command  of  the  man  who  has  been  twice  a  prisoner.  The 
traveler  reins  in  his  horse. 

"Where  are  you  going?" 

"  My  lads,  I  hope  you  belong  to  our  party." 

"  Which  party  is  that  ?" 

What  shall  the  traveler  say  ?  He  is  close  to  Tarrytown.  He  is  going 
south.  Of  course,  these  are  Cow-boys,  or  else  British  soldiers  in  disguise. 
One  wears  a  Yager  uniform.  It  will  not  do  to  hesitate. 

"  The  lower  party." 

"  So  do  we." 

The  youthful  heart  beneath  that  plum -colored  coat  bounds  with  ex 
ultation. 

"  Thank  God,  I  am  once  more  among  friends !" 

How  strange  and  wonderful  that  in  these  words  lie  the  destiny  of  a 
nation  and  the  future  history  of  a  continent ! 

"  I  am  glad  to  see  you.  I  am  a  British  officer,  out  of  the  country  on 
particular  business,  and  I  hope  you  won't  detain  me  a  moment." 

He  pulls  his  gold  watch  from  his  pocket.  Better  have  left  it  in  the 
fob. 

"  You  are  our  prisoner,"  says  Paulding. 

"  Ha !  ha  !  Here  is  General  Arnold's  pass  !"  The  traveler  pulls  the 
pass  written  by  Arnold  from  his  pocket.  "  My  God !  I  must  do  any  thing 
to  get  along,"  he  says  in  a  low  voice  to  himself. 

The  man  in  the  Yager  uniform  reads  it. 

"  Had  you  shown  this  first,  I  would  have  let  you  go,  but  now  I  must 
examine  you.  Dismount !" 

It  is  a  peremptory  order,  and  John  Anderson,  so  near  the  British  lines, 
and  yet  at  this  moment  farther  from  them  than  ever,  is  led  to  the  road 
side,  to  the  shelter  of  a  gigantic  tree. 

"  You  will  bring  down  the  displeasure  of  General  Arnold  by  doubting 
me." 

"  We  must  search  you." 

"  I  have  no  papers.     You  will  bring  yourselves  into  trouble." 

"Take  off  your  cloak  !" 


326 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


His  cloak  is  laid  aside,  and  the  plum-colored  coa';.  There  is  a  British 
uniform  beneath  it. 

"  Let  us  see  your  boots !" 

They  find  nothing  in  his  boots.     How  about  his  stockings  ? 
Here  is  something !"     Paulding's  hand  is  upon  the  fatal  paper. 

Ah  !  Why  did  lie  take  that  paper  in  Benedict  Arnold's  handwriting 
What  good  could  it  do  him  !  He  could  have  remembered  it  all.  Fatal 
mistake !  Three  half-sheets. 


CAPTURE    OF    ANDRE. 


"West  Point"  is  written  on  the  outer  sheet.     Paulding  uses  wicked 
words  at  times. 

"  By  God,  he  is  a  spy  !     Where  did  you  obtain  these  papers?" 

No  answer. 

"  What  will  you  give  us  to  let  you  go  ?"  Van  Wart  asks. 


WEST   POINT.  327 

"All  that  I  have,  and  a  hundred  guineas,  and  any  quantity  of  goods." 

"  I  won't  release  him  for  ten  thousand  guineas,"  says  Paulding,  with 
an  oath. 

"  Will  you  escape  if  we  give  you  an  opportunity  ?" 

"  Of  course  I  will." 

"  Then  we  will  not  let  yon." 

"  Take  me  to  the  nearest  American  camp,"  says  John  Anderson.  He 
will  talk  no  more. 

It  was  twelve  miles  to  the  nearest  American  outpost,  at  North  Castle, 
where  John  Anderson  was  delivered  by  his  captors  to  Colonel  Jameson, 
who  examined  the  papers  found  in  Anderson's  stockings. 

"  Will  you  please  inform  General  Arnold  that  John  Anderson,  with  a 
pass  signed  by  him,  has  been  arrested  ?"  said  the  prisoner. 

It  was  Colonel  Jameson's  duty  to  report  the  arrest  to  General  Arnold, 
and  he  concluded  that  he  might  as  well  send  John  Anderson  at  once  to 
head-quarters,  and  transmit  the  papers  to  General  Washington.  Lieutenant 
Allen,  with  four  soldiers  of  the  Continental  militia,  was  ready  to  start 
with  John  Anderson  for  West  Point. 

A  company  of  cavalry  on  dapple-gray  horses,  under  Major  Tallrnadga 
came  galloping  up.  Major  Tallmadge  was  appointed  by  Washington  to 
guard  this  section  from  the  depredations  of  the  Cow-boys  and  Skinners, 
and  to  carry  on  a  secret  correspondence  with  spies  in  New  York.  His 
troops  wear  glittering  helmets  with  horse-tail  plumes,  and  have  bear-skin 
holsters  manufactured  in  France.  They  have  been  out  on  a  scout. 

Tallmadge  was  a  young  man  only  twenty -six  years  old,  but  his  was  an 
old  head  on  young  shoulders. 

"A  man  was  arrested,"  said  Colonel  Jameson,  "down  near  Tarrytown 
this  morning.     He  had  a  pass  from  General  Arnold,  and  was  going  towaid 
New   York.     He   had   some   papers    in    his 
stockings  stating  the  number  of  guns  at  West 
Point,  the  number  of  soldiers,  and  where  they 
are  posted.     His  name  is  John  Anderson,  and 
I  have  just  sent  him  to  West  Point  to  Gen- 
erald  Arnold,  and   dispatched  the  papers  to 
Washington." 

Major  Tallmadge  listened  intently.  He 
remembered  that  a  few  weeks  before  Colonel 
Sheldon  had  received  a  letter  written  in  New 
York  by  John  Anderson,  who  was  to  be 
taken  to  Arnold's  head-quarters.  And  now  MAJO*  TALLMAD«B. 


328  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

John  Anderson  had  been  arrested  going  toward  New  York  with  important 
papers  on  his  person.  What  was  the  meaning  of  it?  General  Arnold 
was  in  correspondence  with  the  enemy.  The  papers  found  on  John  An 
derson  were  in  Arnold's  handwriting.  Major  Tallmadge  turned  the  mat 
ter  over  in  his  mind.  "  General  Arnold  is  a  traitor !"  he  exclaimed.  That 
was  the  conclusion  he  arrived  at. 

"  That  can  not  be,"  said  Colonel  Jameson,  astonished  at  the  suggestion. 

"  You  ought  not  to  let  Arnold  know  of  it." 

"  It  is  my  duty.     He  is  my  superior,  in  command  of  the  department." 

"  I  will  take  all  the  blame  if  you  will  send  a  man  to  bring  Anderson 
back." 

Colonel  Jameson  could  not  believe  that  Arnold  was  a  traitor,  but  con 
eluded  to  have  Anderson  brought  back. 

Early  in  the  morning  Anderson  is  sent  to  Colonel  Sheldon's  head-quar 
ters  at  South  Salem.  Lieutenant  King  has  charge  of  him,  and  walks  with 
him  in  the  yard  in  front  of  the  house.  He  is  an  affable  gentleman,  arid 
soon  wins  the  confidence  of  John  Anderson. 

"  I  must  make  a  confidant  of  somebody.  John  Anderson  is  not  my 
name.  I  am  Major  John  Andre,  Adjutant-general  of  the  British  army." 

The  prisoner  breathes  more  freely  now. 

"  The  papers  found  on  you  have  been  sent  to  General  Washington,  and 
he,  and  not  General  Arnold,  will  decide  what  shall  be  done  with  you,"  is 
the  information  imparted  to  Major  Andre. 

Paper  and  ink  are  supplied  him,  and  he  writes  a  full  and  frank  letter 
to  General  Washington,  claiming  that  he  is  not  a  spy.  Against  his  inten 
tion  he  was  conducted  inside  of  the  American  lines.  He  came  in  his 
British  uniform.  He  signed  the  letter  John  Andre,  Adjutant -general, 
and  an  officer  started  with  it  in  search  of  General  Washington. 

Washington  is  at  Fishkill,  on  his  way  west  from  Hartford.  He  meetc 
the  French  envoy,  M.  De  Luzerne,  who  has  just  come  from  General  Ar 
nold's  head-quarters,  and  is  on  his  way  east.  They  stop  at  Fishkill  for 
dinner,  and  one  of  the  guests  at  the  table  is  Mr.  Joshua  Smith,  who,  after 
escorting  Mr.  John  Anderson  to  the  Croton  River,  has  ridden  up  there  to 
get  his  family ;  General  Arnold  having  no  further  use  for  his  house,  his 
important  public  business  having  all  been  transacted. 

General  Washington  having  returned  from  Hartford  by  the  upper 
road,  and  Colonel  Jameson's  messenger  having  gone  to  Hartford  by  the 
lower  road,  the  former  has  heard  nothing  in  regard  to  the  arrest  of  one 
John  Anderson  ;  and  for  the  same  reason  Major  Andrews  letter  has  not 
come  into  the  American  commander's  hands. 


WEST  POINT.  329 

Mr.  Smith  sits  at  the  table,  ignorant  that  Mr.  John  Anderson  has  been 
arrested,  ignorant  that  John  Andre'  and  John  Anderson  are  one  and  the 
same  person. 

The  sweet,  sad  season  of  the  year  has  come.  The  changing  foliage  is 
brio-lit  with  autumnal  hues.  General  Arnold  and  his  young  wife  are  at 
the  Kobinson  House.  A  sentinel,  on  the  morning  of  the  25th  of  Sep 
tember,  is  pacing  his  beat  before  the  door.  From  West  Point  comes  the 
roll  of  the  morning  drum.  Only  once  more  will  the  drummer  beat  it 
there  beneath  the  Stars  and  Stripes.  To-morrow  night  the  cross  of  St. 
George  will  float  above  the  ramparts,  and  the  Stars  and  Stripes  will  soon 
be  seen  no  more  on  the  Western  continent.  The  flag  will  be  heard  of  no 
more,  except  in  history,  as  the  flag  of  the  rebels,  who  were  subdued  by 
the  valor  of  the  British  troops,  and  by  the  defection  of  one  of  the  most 
trusted  and  popular  American  officers.  Such  may  have  been  the  thoughts 
that  flashed  through  the  brain  of  Major-general  Arnold,  as  he  listened  to 
that  morning's  reveille. 

Early  in  the  morning,  a  light  traveling  -wagon  drives  into  the  door 
yard.  It  is  General  Washington's  baggage  van,  and  the  officer  in  charge 
has  the  pleasure  of  presenting  the  compliments  of  General  Washington 
and  the  Marquis  de  Lafayette,  who,  with  their  suites,  will  do  themselves1 
the  honor  of  breakfasting  at  the  Robinson  house.  A  little  later  the  mar 
quis  rides  up  to  the  door 
with  his  suite  and  other 
officers. 

General  Washington 
has  turned  aside  to  exam 
ine  the  fortifications  by 
the  river,  and  begs  that 
Mrs.  Arnold  will  not  delay 
breakfast  on  his  account. 

TFIE    BREAKFAST-ROOM. 

Ihe  breakfast -table  is 

spread  in  the  large  room.  It  is  a  low  apartment)  with  wainscoted  walls 
and  great  beams  overhead.  The  beautiful  young  wife  presides  with 
charming  grace  at  the  table. 

A  horseman  rides  into  the  yard  and  halts  beneath  the  cherry-trees — 
Lieutenant  Allen.  He  comes  from  Colonel  Jameson,  and  has  a  letter  foj 
General  Arnold.  Colonel  Jameson  has  deemed  it  his  duty  to  report  to  his 
superior  the  capture  of  a  man  by  the  name  of  John  Anderson,  and  to  state 
that  the  papers  upon  him  have  been  forwarded  to  General  Washington, 

General  Arnold  breaks  the  seal,  and  reads  the  letter  at  the  table.     He  is  a 

11* 


330  THE   BOYS   OF  '76. 

little  embarrassed  ;  but  the  conversation  goes  on,  and  General  Arnold  takes 
part  in  it  for  a  few  minutes. 

"  Excuse  me,  gentlemen ;  I  have  some  business  that  will  require 
my  attention  a  few  moments.  Please  make  yourselves  at  home  mean 
while." 

He  leaves  the  room  and  calls  one  of  his  aids :  "  Have  the  barge  ready 
instantly.  I  must  cross  to  West  Point  without  delay.  Order  the  coxswain 
and  crew  at  once." 

He  calls  Lieutenant  Allen  aside :  "  You  must  not  mention  to  any  one 
that  you  have  brought  a  letter  from  Colonel  Jameson." 

He  spoke  to  the  hostler :  "  Bring  a  horse,  quick.  Any  horse — a  wagon- 
horse,  even !" 

His  orders  are  peremptory,  and  the  men  move  quickly  to  obey. 

The  guests  are  eating  alone,  for  the  young  wife,  accustomed  to  all  her 
husband's  moods,  sees  that  something  unusual  has  occurred.  She  excuses 
herself,  rises  from  the  table,  and  passes  into  her  chamber. 

One  of  his  aid's  horses  is  at  the  door.  The  coxswain  of  the  barge,  Mr. 
Larvey,  is  mustering  the  crew.  General  Arnold  meets  his  young  wife  in 
her  chamber.  He  kisses  their  babe. 

"  We  must  part  at  once,  and  perhaps  forever." 

The  loving  arms  that  clasp  his  neck  unclose,  and  with  a  wild  outcry 
she  swoons  upon  the  floor. 

"Take  care  of  her,"  he  says  to  the  chamber-maid,  that  moment  enter 
ing.  He  descends  to  the  breakfast-room. 

"  I  beg  your  indulgence,  gentlemen ;  but  Mrs.  Arnold  has  been  seized 
with  sudden  illness,"  he  says  to  the  Marquis  Lafayette  and  the  other 
officers,  still  sitting  at  the  table.  He  seizes  his  holster,  with  pistol 
and  powder-flask,  leaps  into  the  saddle,  and  dashes  down  the  hill  to  the 
water. 

"Take  your  places!"  He  shouts  it  to  the  oarsmen  standing  on  the 
shore,  leaps  from  the  horse,  springs  into  the  barge. 

"  Push  off !" 

The  barge  glides  from  the  shore. 

"  I  am  going  to  the  Vulture  with  a  flag  of  truce,  and  must  get  there  as 
quick  as  I  can,  and  back  again  to  meet  Washington.  You  shall  have  two 
gallons  of  rum,  my  boys,  when  you  get  back." 

It  is  eighteen  miles  to  the  Vulture — a  long  pull ;  but  swiftly  the  boat 
glides  down  the  stream,  and  while  on  their  way  Major-general  Arnold  ex 
amines  his  pistols,  re-primes  them,  cocks  and  uncocks  them,  and  conducts 
himself  as  the  barge-men  never  have  seen  him  before. 


WEST   POINT. 


331 


Colonel  Livingston  is  still  at  Teller's  Point.  He  sees  the  barge  of 
General  Arnold  moving  swiftly  down  stream,  General  Arnold  himself 
Holding  the  white  flag — his  pocket-handkerchief  tied  to  a  cane.  What 
is  the  meaning  of  it  ?  A  major-general  never  goes  with  a  flag  of  truce. 
Colonel  Livingston  will  go  out  and  see  the  meaning  of  such  a  procedure; 
but  before  he  can  summon  his  rowers,  the  barge  is  along-side  the  Vulture, 
still  lying  at  anchor  in  the  river,  but  beyond  the  reach  of  Livingston's 
cannon. 


ARNOLD  S    ESCAPE. 


General  Arnold  unties  the  handkerchief,  and  with  it  wipes  away  the 
great  beads  of  sweat  upon  his  brow.  He  climbs  the  side  of  the  ship. 
Colonel  Beverly  Robinson  is  on  board :  he  is  there  waiting  for  Mr.  John 
\nderson,  merchant;  but  the  merchant's  foot  nevermore  will  press  the 


THE   BOYS  OF  7G. 

deck  of  the  Vulture.  In  the  cabin,  to  Robinson  and  Captain  Suther 
land,  the  traitor  narrates  the  story.  The  plan  has  failed  —  Andr£  is  a 
prisoner ;  but  Arnold  has  escaped,  to  enter  the  king's  service.  He  goes 
upon  the  deck,  and  calls  the  coxswain,  Larvey,  and  the  crew  on  board. 

"  You  must  enter  the  king's  service,  or  1  shall  detain  you  as  prison 
ers,"  he  says. 

The  malignity  and  hate  so  long  smothered  has  taken  fire,  and  this  is 
its  first  outburst. 

"  If  General  Arnold  likes  the  King  of  England,  let  him  serve  him. 
We  love  our  country,  and  intend  to  live  or  die  in  support  of  her 
cause"  are  the  words  of  the  coxswain.  Glorious  Larvey!  Words  that 
shall  never  die.  A  century  has  passed  since  they  were  uttered,  but  how 
thrilling  to  read  them  !  Six  of  the  boat's  crew  swear  their  allegiance  to 
America. 

Captain  Sutherland  turns  with  contempt  from  Arnold.  He  will  not 
interfere,  however,  with  Arnold's  orders,  and  the  heroes  are  prisoners  for 
the  time  being.  They  are  taken  to  New  York,  but  are  at  once  released 
on  parole  by  Sir  Henry  Clinton. 

General  Washington  and  the  officers  of  the  army  had  not  forgotten 
how  the  brave  man  from  Connecticut,  Nathan  Hale,  was  executed,  with 
out  trial,  as  a  spy ;  but  not  so  should  Major  Andre  suffer.  He  was  tried 
by  court-martial,  found  guilty,  and  condemned  to  die.  The  day  before 
liis  execution,  he  drew  a  pretty  picture  of  the  Highlands  of  the  Hudson, 
and  here  it  is  : 


FAC-STMTLE    OF    A    SKETCH    BY    MAJOR    ANDRE,    MADE    THE    DAY   BEFORE    UK    WAS    EXECUTED. 


WEST   POINT.  335 

The  American  army  was  at  Tappan,  in  New  York,  and  there,  in  the 
presence  of  all  the  soldiers,  he  was  hanged.  He  was  so  kind  and  genial 
and  gifted,  that  all  who  knew  him  loved  him.  Every  kindness  was  shown 
him,  and  many  of  the  soldiers  shed  tears  when  they  saw  him  die.  In  En 
gland  his  fate  was  sorely  lamented,  and  the  king  caused  a  monument  to  be 
erected  in  Westminster  Abbey  to  his  memory ;  and  yet  he  suffered  justly 
for  he  was  a  spy. 


MONUMKNl    TO    ANDRE. 


334  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

KING'S   MOUNTAIN   AND   THE   COWPENS. 

AUGUST  16th,  1780,  at  Camden,  was  a  sad  day  for  the  patriots  ol 
the  South.  There  was  no  army  to  oppose  the  British ;  but,  though 
Gates  was  defeated,  the  Whigs  living  up  in  the  mountains  had  no  inten 
tion  of  yielding.  They  would  still  be  patriots.  The  Tories,  on  the  other 
hand,  joined  Cornwallis  in  large  numbers;  and  Cornwallis  concluded  to 
raise  a  Tory  army,  and  also  to  send  a  force  into  the  mountains  to  crush 
out  the  Whigs.  He  dispatched  Major  Ferguson,  of  the  Seventy-first  regi 
ment,  with  one  hundred  and  ten  regulars  and  as  many  more  Tories,  to 
inarch  up  to  the  mountains,  and  compel  the  Whigs  to  take  the  oath  of 
loyalty,  or  else  harry  them  out  of  the  country. 

Ferguson  started  and  marched  north-west.  The  Tories  flocked  to  his 
standard,  and  in  a  few  days  he  had  a  force  of  eleven  hundred  men,  who 
plundered  the  people,  burned  their  houses,  drove  off  their  cattle,  and  in 
some  instances  committed  brutal  murder. 

Men  who  live  among  the  mountains  are  always  lovers  of  liberty;  and 
the  more  the  Tories  plundered  and  burned,  the  more  the  Whigs  resolved 
that  they  would  not  be  subdued.  Messengers  rode  here  and  there,  sum 
moning  the  patriots  to  arms.  They  answered  the  summons,  and  from  all 
the  mountain  glens  hastened  to  the  rendezvous.  It  was  harvest -time. 
They  could  find  potatoes  and  pumpkins  and  corn  ripening  in  the  fields, 
and  so  needed  no  commissariat,  no  long  train  of  wagons.  Each  man  had 
his  powder-horn  and  bullet -pouch  filled  with  ammunition.  They  could 
make  quick  marches.  At  night  they  could  lie  down  and  sleep  sweetly 
beneath  the  evergreen  pines.  In  the  woods  were  deer;  and  they  were  all 
true  marksmen,  and  could  bring  down  a  buck  upon  the  run.  They  knew 
that  Ferguson  was  on  the  march — that  in  a  few  days  the  Tories  would  be 
burning  their  houses. 

Colonel  Campbell  gathered  four  hundred  men  from  Washington  Conn 
ty;  in  Virginia,  Colonel  Isaac  Shelby  rallied  two  hundred  and  forty;  and 
Colonel  John  Sevier  came  with  two  hundred  and  forty  North  Carolinians 


KING'S  MOUNTAIN  AND   THE   COWPENS.  335 

Colonel  M'Dowell  came  with  one  hundred  and  sixty  who  had  fled  from 
before  Ferguson.  Colonel  Cleaveland  came  with  three  hundred  and  fifty 
from  the  counties  of  Wilkes  and  Surrey ;  and  Colonel  James  Williams 
came  with  four  hundred  from  South  Carolina.  They  met  at  the  Cow- 
pens,  near  the  North  Carolina  line.  Ferguson  was  about  thirty  miles 
away,  at  King's  Mountain,  on  the  line  between  North  and  South  Carolina, 
fifteen  miles  east  of  Broad  River.  Colonel  Campbell  was  chosen  com 
mander.  They  had  come  out  to  fight,  and  determined  to  strike  a  blow, 
and  not  wait  to  receive  one.  It  was  resolved  that  nine  hundred  of  their 
best  men  should  make  a  forced  march,  and  strike  Ferguson  unawares,  and 
the  rest  were  to  follow  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

It  is  after  dark,  on  the  6th  of  October,  when  they  start.  They  leave 
the  Cowpens,  move  eastward,  cross  the  Broad  Rive.*,  and  push  on  for 
King's  Mountain.  They  know  the  roads.  The  column  winds  through 
the  forests.  In  the  morning,  they  halt,  rest  their  horses  a  while,  and  re 
sume  the  march. 

Ferguson  is  resting  securely  on  the  mountain.  He  knows  that  the 
Whigs  are  gathering  in  the  West ;  but  he  is  in  a  strong  position,  and  does 
not  expect  to  be  attacked. 

The  mountaineers  halt  within  a  mile  of  Ferguson's  position.  Colonel 
Campbell  forms  his  little  army,  less  in  number  by  two  hundred  than  the 
foe  he  is  seeking.  Colonel  Campbell's  own  regiment,  with  part  of  Colonel 
Cleaveland's  and  Colonel  Shelby's,  takes  the  right;  Colonel  Servier,  the 
left ;  Colonel  Williams  and  the  rest  of  Cleaveland's  form  the  centre.  It  is 
three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  In  this  order  they  move  so  silently  that 
they  are  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of  Ferguson  before  they  are  discov 
ered.  Colonel  Campbell  has  sent  his  wings  around,  as  Stark  sent  his  at 
Bennington,  to  close  in  upon  the  enemy,  and  make  the  attack  from  every 
quarter. 

There  is  a  sudden  commotion  in  Ferguson's  ranks,  a  quick  springing  to 
arms.  A  moment  later,  Shelby's  and  Campbell's  regiment  are  pouring 
their  fire  into  the  ranks  of  the  confused  Tories.  It  is  in  the  forest.  A 
little  brook  winds  beneath  the  trees.  There  are  hillocks  here  and  there, 
and  sheltered  places,  from  which  each  party  may  fire  upon  the  other. 

The  other  regiments  hear  the  rattling  of  the  guns,  and  hasten  on.  Five 
minutes  later,  they,  too,  are  engaged.  The  Tories  are  astonished  at  the 
suddenness  and  fierceness  of  the  attack.  They  had  joined  Ferguson,  ex 
pecting  to  have  fine  opportunities  to  plunder  their  neighbors,  and  now  they 
are  in  battle,  and  the  bullets  are  pouring  in  upon  them  from  every  quarter. 
Ferguson  orders  his  regulars  to  charge,  and  for  a  moment  the  mountain- 


336 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


eers  are  driven  ;  but  they  rally  and  drive  the  regulars  in  turn.  The  To 
ries  fight  with  desperation  from  behind  rocks  and  trees,  and  the  mount 
aineers  attack  with  equal  courage.  If  a  Tory  exposes  himself,  if  he  steps 
from  behind  a  tree,  bullets  come  from  several  directions.  The  mountain 
eers  are  on  all  sides,  and  have  the  advantage.  Colonel  Ferguson  falls,  and 
the  command  devolves  upon  Captain  Depeyster.  He  is  unaccustomed  to 
such  a  mode  of  warfare.  '  He  can  charge  an  enemy ;  but  to  meet  an 
enemy  behind  rocks  and  trees  is  not  the  way  they  fight  in  England.  He 
forms  a  few  of  his  men,  to  charge  and  break  the  line  of  the  Whigs.  They 
rush  down  the  mountain  side,  but  from  front  and  flank  the  bullets  come; 
his  men  drop,  the  others  turn  and  flee.  But  whither  shall  they  flee  ? 
They  run  north,  but  find  themselves  confronted  by  Colonel  Cleaveland. 
They  are  hemmed  in,  and  there  is  no  escape.  Depeyster  raises  a  white 
flag.  A  shout  of  triumph  goes  up  from  the  victors.  Now  is  the  time  for 
revenge.  Down  at  Waxhaw,  Tarleton  murdered  Buford's  men  in  cold 
blood.  No  plea  for  mercy  stayed  the  sword.  But  no  such  slaughter  shall 
tarnish  this  victory  of  the  mountaineers,  and  the  firing  ceases. 


KING'S    MOUNTAIN    BATTLE-GROUND. 

[The  battle  was  fought  on  the  hills,  as  seen  in  the  picture,  and  the  twelve  Tories  were  hanged  upon 
toe  large  tree  at  the  right-hand  side  of  the  brook.  The  head-stone  at  Colouel  Ferguson's  grave  is  seen  just 
beyond  the  tree.] 

Yet  among  the  prisoners  are  twelve  Tories,  who  have  been  implacable 
m  their  hale ;  who  have  plundered  the  people,  burned  their  houses,  and 
hanged  all  who  opposed  them;  whose  hands  are  red  with  blood:  they 
shali  suffer.  Ropes  are  thrown  over  the  branches  of  a  tulip-tree,  and 


KING'S  MOUNTAIN  AND  THE   COWPENS.  339 

twelve  are  hanged — the  meting-out  of  a  just  retribution  to  those  who  have 
shown  no  mercy. 

The  rivers  in  North  arid  South  Carolina  rise  in  the  Alleghanies,  and 
run  south-east  to  the  sea.  In  North  Carolina  is  the  Dan,  which  passes 
into  Virginia,  and  becomes  the  Roanoke.  South  of  the  Dan  are  two  small 
streams,  one  called  Reedy  Fork,  and  the  other  Troublesome  Creek,  rising 
amidst  the  hills.  Below  the  junction  the  stream  is  called  the  Haw  for 
forty  miles  or  more.  At  the  south-east  corner  of  Chatham  County,  nearly 
in  the  centre  of  the  State,  another  stream  comes  in  from  the  west,  called 
Deep  River,  and  from  this  point  to  the  sea  the  stream  is  called  Cape  Fear 
River. 

South  of  these  is  the  Yadkin,  which  rises  away  up  in  the  north-west 
section  of  the  State,  runs  across  the  State  into  South  Carolina;  but  in  that 
State  it  is  called  the  Great  Pedee.  Beyond  these  is  the  Catawba,  which 
in  South  Carolina,  for  one  hundred  miles  or  more,  is  called  the  Wateree, 
and  for  a  short  distance  the  Congaree,  and  lastly  the  Santee.  It  empties 
into  the  Atlantic  about  forty  miles 
north  of  Charleston. 

In  the  fall  of  the  year,  up  near  the 
mountains,  there  are  sudden  freshets, 
and  at  such  times  for  a  day  or  two  the 
rivers  can  not  be  forded. 

On  the  2d  of  December,  1780, 
General  Greene  took  command  of  the 
Southern  Department,  at  Charlotte, 
North  Carolina,  a  village  of  thirty  or 
forty  houses,  about  ten  miles  east  of 
the  Catawba,  and  twenty  from  the 
South  Carolina  line.  He  had  in  all 

,  ,         ,  GENERAL  NATHANIEL  GREENE. 

about    two   thousand    men ;   but    only 

eight  hundred  were  fit  for  duty,  for  many  of  the  soldiers  were  nearly 

naked,  and  they  had  no  blankets. 

"  The  troops  may  be  said  to  be  literally  naked,"  General  Greene  wrote 
to  Thomas  Jefferson,  Governor  of  Virginia.  On  the  day  he  took  com 
mand  there  were  not  three  days'  provisions  in  camp.  He  had  not  a  dol 
lar  of  hard  money.  He  had  Continental  paper  money,  but  one  hundred  dol 
lars  of  Continental  money  were  worth  only  one  silver  dollar.  The  people 
would  not  touch  it.  General  Gates  had  decided  to  have  the  army  spend 
the  winter  at  Charlotte,  and  had  begun  to  build  huts  there ;  but  General 
Greene  resolved  at  once  upon  a  winter  campaign,  and  on  the  16th  march- 


340 


THE  BOYS   OF  76. 


ed  south -east  into  South  Carolina,  and  encamped  on  the  east  side  of  the 
Great  Pedee,  on  Clieraw  Hill.  He  wanted  shirts  for  his  soldiers,  but  had 
no  money. 

"Pay  in  salt,"  he  said  to  his  quartermaster,  and  so  obtained  the  shirts, 
although  he  had  little  salt  to  spare. 

The  soldiers  belonging  to  North  Carolina  were  in  the  habit  of  going 
home  when  they  pleased.  "  That  must  be  stopped  ;  no  more  going  home 
without  leave.  I  will  hang  the  first  offender,"  said  Greene. 

A  man  went  home,  was  arrested,  and  executed,  and  there  was  no  more 
going  home  after  that.  Troops  joined  him  from  Virginia — four  hundred 
infantry  and  three  hundred  cavalry.  General  Morgan  was  with  him — the 
man  who  had  marched  with  Arnold  to  Canada,  who  commanded  the  in 
fantry  at  Stillwater  and  Saratoga.  He  was  nearly  as  poor  as  the  soldiers, 
had  but  one  shirt  now,  and  whenever  he  wanted  it  washed  he  had  to  wrap 
himself  in  his  cloak. 

General  Otho  II.  Williams,  who  had  marched  from  Maryland  to  Bos 
ton,  in  1775,  as  lieutenant  in  a  rifle  company,  and  acted  as  adjutant-gen 
eral,  and  who  had  been  in  the  bat 
tle  of  Camden,  was  there;  and  now 
young  Henry  Lee,  of  Virginia,  came 
with  Colonel  William  Washington. 

Colonel  Washington  had  just 
captured,  on  the  4th,  a  party  of  Tories 
at  Rugeley's  Mills,  twelve  miles  from 
Camden,  the  place  from  which  Gates 
had  started  to  attack  Cornwallis. 
There  were  one  hundred  and  twelve 
Tories  under  Rugeley,  who  owned 
the  mill.  Colonel  Washington  came 
upon  them  suddenly  and  surrounded 
them.  The  Tories  ran  into  Ruge 
ley's  log-house  and  barn.  Williams 
had  no  cannon  to  batter  the  build 
ings  down,  but  he  mounted  a  pine  log  on  a  pair  of  cart-wheels,  aimed  it  at 
the  house,  and  sent  a  summons  to  Rugeley  to  surrender  before  he  opened 
fire  upon  the  buildings,  and  Rugeley  and  the  whole  one  hundred  and  ten 
gave  themselves  up.  There  was  hearty  laughing  among  the  Americans 
when  the  crest-fallen  Tories  discovered  the  deception. 

Cornwallis  was  at  Winnsborough ;  and  General  Greene  divided  his 
army  by  sending  Morgan  to  harass  Corriwallis's  foraging  and  scouting 


COLONEL    WILLIAM    WASHINGTON. 


KING'S   MOUNTAIN   AND  THE   COWPENS. 

parties.  General  Morgan  was  more  than  one  hundred  miles  west  of  Gen 
eral  Greene,  close  to  the  North  Carolina  line,  at  a  place  where  the  farmers 
who  pastured  their  cattle  on  the  hills  brought  them  up  at  night  for  milk 
ing,  and  it  was  therefore  called  the  Cowpens.  Morgan  has  about  one 
thousand  men — all  infantry  except  one  hundred  and  twenty  men  under 
Colonel  Washington. 

General  Cornwallis  sees  that  Greene  has  divided  his  army,  and  is  too 
far  away  to  aid  Morgan,  and  resolves  to  send  Tarleton,  with  eleven  hun 
dred  of  his  best  troops,  to  crush  him  at  a  single  blow.  At  the  same  time, 
he  intends  to  move  with  his  troops  from  Winnsborough  north,  midway  be 
tween  the  Catawba  and  Broad  rivers,  and  will  cut  off  Morgan's  retreat 
into  North  Carolina,  and  then  move  on  to  invade  that  State,  march  north 
east,  get  in  the  rear  of  Greene,  and  cut  him  off  from  Virginia. 

General  Morgan  keeps  his  eyes  open.  He  does  not  intend  to  be  sur 
prised.  His  spies  inform  him  that  Tarleton,  with  eleven  hundred  men,  is 

coming:  like  the  wind  to  crush  him.     About  half  of  his  men  are  militia. 

& 

He  knows  that  they  will  be  likely  to  run  at  the  first  fire,  as  they  did  at 
Camden ;  and  in  the  battle  which  he  intends  to  fight  he  will  fix  things  so 
that  they  can  not  flee  with  any  hope  of  escaping.  He  selects  his  position 
not  far  from  the  bank  of  the  river,  where  there  is  no  ford,  and  where  the 
water  is  deep.  Tarleton  will  attack  him  from  the  front,  to  drive  him 
toward  the  river.  It  is  in  the  woods,  where  there  is  no  under-brush. 
There  are  no  swamps  near  to  which  his  militia  can  flee.  He  posts  his 
first  line  on  a  ridge  of  land,  and  behind  it  about  two  hundred  feet  is 
another  higher  ridge,  on  which  he  establishes  his  second  line. 

There  are  Tories  in  Tarleton's  ranks,  and  the  hate  is  bitter  between 
Whig  and  Tory.  Morgan  has  no  cannon.  He  knows  that  early  in  the 
morning  Tarleton  will  make  his  appearance  after  a  long  night's  march. 
He  considers  that  Tarleton's  men  will  be  weary,  while  his  own  will  be 
fresh. 

Morning  comes,  and  Morgan  is  up  early.  The  scouts  bring  information 
that  Tarleton  is  not  far  away.  Morgan  gives  his  men  a  hearty  breakfast, 
and  while  they  are  eating  it  he  passes  through  the  lines  and  looks  at  their 
guns. 

"  This  is  the  way  to  use  a  bayonet,"  he  says,  as  he  shows  a  raw  soldier 
how  to  stand  a  charge.  "  This  is  the  way  to  swing  the  sword,"  he  says 
to  a  dragoon.  "  Hold  up  your  heads,  boys.  Stand  your  ground  till  you 
have  fired  three  times,  and  the  day  is  yours."  He  believes  that  by  that 
time  the  militia  will  not  be  frightened  at  the  whistling  of  bullets,  and  wil> 
get  over  the  idea  of  running  away. 


342 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


COLONEL    JOHN    E.    HOWARD. 


Morgan  puts  his  best  troops — Howard's  Marylanders,  who  have  been  in 
battle — on  the  highest  ridge  in  the  centre,  and  his  two  companies  of  Virgin 
ians  on  the  left.  The  Virginians  are 
old  soldiers;  some  of  them  fought  at 
Monmouth,  Brandy  wine,  and  German- 
town.  On  the  left  he  places  his  rifle 
men.  Lieutenant-colonel  Howard  has 
command  of  the  line.  Out  in  front 
of  their  line  he  places  the  Georgia 
and  North  Carolina  militia,  and  in  ad 
vance  of  them  one  hundred  and  twen 
ty  picked  men,  with  rifles,  who  can 
bring  down  a  squirrel  any  time  from 
the  highest  trees.  Behind  the  second 
hill  he  places  Colonel  Washington  with 
his  cavalry  —  out  of  sight,  ready  to 
move  in  an  instant. 
The  Tories  in  Tarleton's  ranks  know  the  ground.  "  The  wroods  are 
open,  and  free  from  swamps.  Morgan  is  about  six  miles  from  Broad 
River,  close  by  a  creek,"  they  say  to  Tarleton.  Tarleton  is  delighted. 
Long  before  the  fugitives  can  reach  the  creek  he  will  cut  them  to  pieces. 

"  Lay  aside  your  knapsacks,  and  every  thing  except  your  guns  and  am 
munition,"  are  Tarleton's  orders.  He  will  have  his  men  go  into  the  fight 
so  that  they  can  be  as  light  of  foot  as  the  Americans,  to  trample  them 
down  the  moment  he  gets  them  upon  the  run.  He  does  not  stop  to  take 
breakfast.  He  will  finish  the  little  job  he  has  in  hand,  and  eat  breakfast 
afterward. 

"  File  right,  and  attack  the  left  flank,"  are  Tarleton's  orders  to  the  light- 
infantry.  He  sends  a  three-pounder  to  open  fire.  The  light-infantry  file 
into  position.  The  Seventh  regiment  forms  in  front  of  Morgan's  centre 
with  the  other  three-pounder.  He  sends  fifty  dragoons  to  the  right  flank 
and  fifty  to  the  left.  A  battalion  and  two  hundred  cavalry  are  placed  in 
a  second  line. 

While  Tarleton  is  forming,  Morgan  goes  along  the  line.  "Be  firm — 
keep  cool — take  good  aim.  Give  two  volleys  at  killing  distance,  and  the 
victory  is  yours.  You  of  the  main  line,  here  on  the  hill,  must  not  lose 
heart  when  you  see  the  skirmishers  and  the  militia  out  in  front  of  you 
fall  back.  That  is  a  part  of  the  plan.  They  will  draw  the  fire  of  the 
British,  and  then  fall  back." 

He  says  this,  knowing  that  the  militia  will  run.     He  came  to  the  Car- 


KING'S   MOUNTAIN  AND   THE   COWPENS. 


343 


THE    COWPENS    BATTLE-GKOUND. 

Another  empty  saddle  —  another. 
Another  saddle  emptied — more — 


olinians  and  Georgians.  "Let  me  see — which  is  most  entitled  to  credit, 
the  Georgians  or  Carolinians?  I'll  let  you  decide  that  question  here." 
So  he  encourages  them — each  to  do 
their  best.  He  takes  his  position  on 
the  hill  where  he  can  overlook  all. 

The  fifty  British  dragoons  on  the 
right  and  the  fifty  on  the  left  are  ad 
vancing.  They  are  going  to  make  a 
charge  upon  each  flank,  and  double 
up  Morgan's  line  in  a  twinkling. 
The  rifles  crack.  One  saddle  emp 
tied  —  another  —  another  —  another. 
But  still  the  British  dragoons  come 
on  —  the  militia  begin  to  fall  back. 
The  British  cannon  begin  to  thunder, 
fifteen  in  all,  and  the  horses  are  running  wild. 

The  militia  are  falling  back,  but  they  are  not  frightened,  and  the  men 
in  line  on  the  hill  keep  steady  ranks,  as  the  militia  fall  behind  them. 
There  comes  a  hurra  from  the  British,  who  have  driven  the  riflemen  and 
skirmishers,  and  will  make  quick  work  of  it  now.  They  advance  upon 
the  run. 

The  hill  is  a  sheet  of  flame,  and  the  British  come  to  a  walk.  They 
were  going  to  charge  bayonet,  but  conclude  to  pour  in  a  volley  first. 
Three  volleys  have  been  fired  on  each  side.  The  Americans  are  getting 
used  to  the  whistling  of  bullets,  and  they  have  no  thought  of  running. 
Tarletoii'is  surprised.  He  did  not  expect  such  resistance.  "Forward  the 
second  line,"  is  his  order.  He  will  hurl  his  whole  force  upon  the  rebels, 
and  smite  them  down  with  a  single  sledge-hammer  stroke. 

"Now  is  the  time."  It  is  Morgan's  order  to  the  cavalry  behind  the 
hill.  Out  from  the  shelter  of  the  sand-hill  move  the  troopers.  Through 
the  woods  they  ride,  and  fall  suddenly  upon  the  British  dragoons,  and  put 
them  to  flight. 

Tarleton's  second  line  is  moving  upon  Howard — swinging  out  upon 
his  right  to  outflank  him. 

"Right  company,  change  front!"  is  Howard's  order;  but  the  men 
think  he  has  ordered  a  retreat,  and  begin  to  fall  back.  Howard  sees  the 
mistake.  He  will  not  countermand  the  order,  for  the  men  are  not  fright 
ened.  He  will  take  a  new  position. 

Morgan  sees  the  movement,  and  hastens  to  the  spot.  "  What  are  you 
retreating  for  ?"  he  shouts. 


34±  THE   BOYS   OF   76. 

"  Simply  a  change  of  position,  to  protect  my  right  flank." 

"  Are  you  beaten  ?" 

"  Do  those  men  march  as  if  they  were  beaten  ?" 

"  Right !  I  will  ride  back  and  select  the  best  position,  arid  when  you 
veach  it  face  about  and  let  them  have  it." 

Off  to  the  new  spot  rides  Morgan. 

"Hurra!  Hurra!"  It  is  the  shout  of  the  British  coming  upon  the 
run.  Now  they  will  sweep  all  before  them. 

Colonel  Washington  is  by  Morgan's  side. 

"  They  are  coming  like  a  mob.  Turn  and  let  them  have  it,  and  I  will 
charge  them,"  he  shouts  to  Howard. 

"  Right  about  face  !" 

The  retreating  men  face  suddenly  about.  There  is  a  flash  and  rattle. 
The  British  come  to  a  sudden  halt.  Down  from  the  hill  ride  the  dra 
goons,  with  Washington  leading  them. 

"  Give  them  the  bayonet !"  It  is  Howard's  shout.  Back  over  the 
ground  across  which  they  have  just  retreated  move  the  Marylanders.  Like 
a  thunder-bolt,  Washington's  cavalry  sweep  on.  The  British  line  goes 
down.  Some  of  the  soldiers  throw  away  their  guns  and  flee,  some  are  cut 
down  by  the  sword,  others  hold  up  their  hands  and  beg  for  mercy. 

The  victory  is  won !  It  is  not  a  half-hour  since  Tarleton  began  the 
battle,  and  now  his  army  is  a  panic-stricken  mob.  Eighty  killed,  one  hun 
dred  and  fifty  wounded,  six  hundred  prisoners,  two  cannon,  eight  hundred 
muskets,  thirty-five  wagons,  one  hundred  cavalry  horses — lost  in  fifteen 
minutes. 

Morgan  has  lost  twelve  killed  and  sixty-one  wounded. 

"Give  them  Tarleton's  quarter — kill  them!"  It  is  the  cry  of  the 
Whigs  against  the  Tories. 

But  Morgan  will  not  permit  a  man  to  be  put  to  death.  Such  a  victory 
shall  not  be  marred  by  the  slaughter  of  men  after  they  have  surrendered. 


GENERAL  GREENE'S  RETREAT.  345 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

GENERAL  GREENE'S  RETREAT. 

ON  the  day  of  the  battle  of  the  Cowpens,  Cornwallis  was  thirty  miles 
east  of  that  place,  between  the  Broad  and  Catawba  River.  It  was 
astounding  intelligence  which  a  dragoon  brought  to  him  on  the  even 
ing  of  the  17th  of  January.  Tarleton  defeated  !  routed !  Eight  hun 
dred  men  lost !  Impossible  !  But  the  fugitives  were  coming  in.  There 
was  no  doubt  about  it.  Instead  of  crushing  Morgan,  Tarleton,  with  supe 
rior  numbers,  had  suffered  an  ignominious  defeat.  It  was  intolerable. 
Cornwallis  would  quickly  punish  the  rebel  general.  By  marching  rapidly 
due  north,  he  could  cut  off  Morgan  before  that  officer,  with  his  prisoners 
and  plunder,  could  reach  the  Catawba.  General  Leslie  was  close  at  hand, 
advancing  from  Camden  with  about  one  thousand  men,  and  upon  his  ar 
rival  he  would  push  ahead. 

But  over  at  the  Cowpens  on  that  same  night  General  Morgan  was 
thinking  of  what  Cornwallis  would  be  doing.  That  he  would  determine 
to  rescue  the  prisoners,  was  certain.  That  he  could  do  it,  unless  Morgan 
stirred  himself,  was  equally  clear. 

At  midnight  Morgan  left  the  battle-field  with  his  exultant  army.  He 
had  two  cannon  now,  and  wagons  and  provisions.  The  roads  were  miry;  it 
was  raining;  and  he  could  make  only  ten  miles  in  twenty-four  hours.  He 
crossed  the  Broad  River  and  pushed  for  the  Little  Catawba,  reached  it,  and 
crossed  with  his  provisions  and  baggage.  Cornwallis  had  lost  his  prey. 
Two  days  later  he  reached  the  ford,  chagrined  to  find  that  Morgan  was  in 
advance  of  him. 

Bitter  the  disappointment.  He  would  have  Morgan  yet.  "Burn  all 
the  surplus  baggage,"  is  his  order,  and,  to  set  an  example,  burns  his  own. 
He  will  keep  only  four  wagons,  for  the  sick,  for  hospital  stores,  and  ammu 
nition.  He  will  live  on  the  country  and  march  day  and  night,  to  rescue 
the  prisoners  and  punish  the  rebel  commander. 

Morgan  is  down  with  rheumatism.  His  troops  need  rest;  but  his  scouts 
inform  him  that  Cornwallis  is  burning  his  baggage.  Morgan  comprehends 


346  THE   BOYS    OF   76. 

the  meaning  of  it,  and  it  is  high  time  for  him  to  move.  His  army  is 
smaller  than  it  was.  The  Georgia  and  South  Carolina  militia  have  re 
turned  to  their  homes,  and  the  Virginia  militia  have  staid  out  their  time. 

On  Cheraw  Hill,  one  hundred  miles  east  of  the  Cowpens,  is  Greene's 
camp.  Great  the  rejoicing  there  at  the  news  of  the  victory  at  the  Cow- 
pens. 

"  Be  ready  to  march,"  is  Greene's  order  on  the  25th  of  January.  A  mes-. 
senger  hastens  northward.  He  is  to  ride  clear  across  North  Carolina  to  the 
Virginia  lines  with  this  order :  "  Have  boats  in  readiness,  so  that  the  army 
can  cross  the  Dan."  Boats  in  readiness  !  What  can  General  Greene,  who 
is  down  at  Cheraw,  want  of  boats  away  up  there  in  Virginia,  two  hundred 
miles  away  ?  But  General  Greene  has  looked  over  the  chess-board,  and  sees 
the  kind  of  move  that  Cornwallis  may  make,  and  it  is  well  to  be  prepared. 
Another  messenger  hastens  north-west  to  the  Yadkin  on  a  similar  errand. 
"  Send  recruits,"  is  his  letter  to  Governor  Thomas  Jefferson,  of  Virginia ; 
also  to  Governor  Thomas  Nash,  of  North  Carolina.  "  Hang  on  Cornwal- 
lis's  rear;  cut  off  his  detachments,"  is  the  word  sent  south  to  the  Swamp 
Fox,  Francis  Marion,  who  is  one  day  in  one  place,  and  hiding  in  a  swamp 
the  next,  moving  so  rapidly  that  the  British  know  not  where  to  put  their 
fingers  on  him.  "  March  north-west  to  Salisbury,"  is  the  word  to  General 
Hnger,  whom  he  places  in  command  of  his  little  force  at  Cheraw;  then 
mounting  his  horse,  with  twenty  dragoons  to  accompany  him,  he  strikes 
across  the  country  to  join  Morgan. 

Morgan  is  marching  north-east,  aiming  for  Salisbury ;  while  Cornwal 
lis,  being  east  of  him  at  the  outset,  is  marching  nearly  north,  to  intercept 
him  before  he  reaches  the  Catawba.  Rapid  the  retreat,  but  swifter  the 
pursuit.  Morgan  reaches  the  river,  sends  his  baggage  and  prisoners  across, 
and  then  his  little  army.  Just  as  the  sun  goes  down,  the  British,  under 
O'Hara,  reach  the  river;  but  O'Hara  does  not  dare  to  attempt  to  cross 
till  re -enforcements  arrive,  and  when  they  come  it  is  evening.  Corn 
wallis  decides  to  let  his  troops  rest  till  morning,  and  then  he  will  cross 
and  seize  his  prey.  But  all  night  long  the  rain  falls  in  torrents,  and  in 
the  morning  the  river  is  a  wild  and  turbulent  stream  —  too  deep  to  be 
forded. 

While  the  rain  is  pouring,  General  Greene  rides  into  Morgan's  camp. 
He  is  covered  with  mud,  and  weary,  but  receives  a  hearty  welcome  from 
Morgan. 

"  What  is  your  line  of  retreat  ?"  he  asks. 

Morgan  points  it  out — still  north-east. 

"  That  will  not  do ;  Cornwallis  will  overtake  you ;"  and  he  selects  an- 


GENERAL  GREENE'S  RETREAT. 


347 


other  road.     He  sends  a  messenger  to  Huger,  who  is  moving  toward  Salis 
bury,  to  change  his  route  and  to  make  rapid  marches. 

The  flood  goes  down  almost  as  rapidly  as  it  rose.  The  water  is  still 
deep,  but  Cornwallis  is  determined  to  secure  his  prey.  He  is  near  Beat- 
tie's  Ford.  Six  miles  below  Beattie's  Ford  is  Cowan's  Ford.  Cornwallis 
decides  to  send  Lieutenant-colonel  Webster  to  Beattie's  Ford,  to  make  a 
feint  of  crossing,  while  he  steals  off  at  midnight  with  the  main  army,  to 
cross  at  Cowan's,  and  get  in  rear  of  Morgan.  Needless  strategy,  for  Mor 
gan  has  left  the  river,  and  is  on  the  march ;  but  Colonel  Davidson,  with 
seven  hundred  North  Carolina  farmers,  is  at  Cowan's,  guarding  the  ford. 
The  river  is  wide,  but  the  British 
wade  across  it.  The  farmers  fire 
a  volley  or  two,  but  the  British 
greatly  outnumber  them.  Col 
onel  Davidson  falls,  and  they  flee 
—  most  of  them  to  their  homes. 
About  three  hundred  retreat  to 
Tarrant's  tavern,  toward  Salis 
bury.  They  halt  at  noon. 

Tarleton  —  more  savage  and 
blood-thirsty  than  ever  after  his 
defeat — thinks  to  surprise  them ; 
but  they  are  on  the  alert,  and 
Tarleton  has  the  mortification  of 
seeing  twelve  of  his  men  killed 
and  fifteen  wounded.  There  are 
some  old  men  and  boys  around 
Tarrant's  unarmed,  but  they  are  Whigs,  and,  in  revenge,  his  soldiers 
slaughter  them  indiscriminately. 

Greene  is  only  seven  miles  away ;  a  messenger  reaches  him :  "  David 
son  is  dead.  The  militia  are  dispersed.  Cornwallis  is  over  the  Catawba." 

With  a  heavy  heart,  the  commander  turns  toward  Salisbury.  He  rides 
up  to  the  door  of  Mr.  Steele's  tavern.  Dr.  Head  is  there  awaiting  his  ar 
rival. 

"What!   alive,  general ?" 

"  Yes ;  tired,  hungry,  alone,  and  penniless." 

The  hostess  is  a  true-hearted  woman.  A  few  minutes  later  a  break 
fast  is  ready ;  and  while  he  is  eating  it  she  places  a  bag  filled  with  bright 
silver  dollars  in  his  hands,  saying,  "  You  need  them,  and  I  can  do  without 
them." 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

Over  the  mantel  hangs  a  portrait  of  King  George.  General  Greene, 
with  a  heart  too  full  for  utterance  at  the  devotion  of  the  noble  woman, 
turns  the  portrait  to  the  wall,  and  writes  with  his  pencil  upon  the  back, 
"  Hide  thy  face,  King  George,  and  blush." 

It  is  fifteen  miles  to  the  Yadkin.     Greene  rides  on.     The  river  is  hMi 

O        7 

but  no  matter  for  that :  the  messenger  whom  he  sent  up  this  way  on  the 
25th  of  January  was  faithful  to  his  trust,  and  boats  are  plying  from  shore 
to  shore.  Before  night  the  army  is  upon  the  other  side  of  the  stream.  So, 
then,  that  forethought  about  boats  was  not  idle  thinking. 

Morning  dawns.  Cornwallis  has  been  marching  all  night.  He  comes 
to  the  Yadkin.  There  is  the  dark  rolling  river  between  him  and  his  prey. 
The  bird  is  just  beyond  his  reach.  He  can  only  gnash  his  teeth  and  can- 


WHERE    GREENE    CROSSED    THE    YADKIN. 


nonade  the  American  camp.  His  cannoneers  can  see  the  top  of  a  log- 
cabin  sheltered  by  a  ledge  of  rocks.  Somehow  they  understand  that  Gen 
eral  Greene  has  taken  it  for  his  head-quarters.  The  general  is  writing  dis 
patches.  A  cannon-ball  passes  through  the  roof,  tears  up  the  shingles, 
rattles  the  splinters  upon  the  table :  the  general  looks  up  a  moment,  and 
goes  on  with  his  writing.  "  It  will  be  impossible  for  Greene  to  get 
across  the  Dan,"  say  the  spies  to  Cornwallis ;  and  the  British  commander 
resolves  to  make  one  more  effort  to  secure  his  prey.  As  soon  as  the  river 
falls  he  will  have  him.  Northward  moves  Greene's  little  army  toward 
Guilford,  fifty  miles  distant.  "  Join  me  there,"  is  the  word  to  Huger,  who 
is  forty  miles  east  of  Salisbury. 


GENERAL  GREENE'S  RETREAT. 


349 


The  roads  are  frozen  at  night,  and  knee-deep  with  mud  at  midday.  The 
streams  are  swollen,  the  bridges  gone.  The  men  are  shoeless,  coatless,  and 
without  blankets.  He  reaches  Guilford,  where  the  troops  from  Cheraw 
join  him  on  the  9th  of  February.  All  together,  Greene  has  only  two  thou 
sand  and  thirty-six  men,  and  Cornwallis  is  by  the  Yadkin  with  three  thou 
sand  of  bis  picked  troops.  He  is  chafing  like  a  baffled  hound.  He  must 
get  at  Greene.  He  inarches  up  the  west  bank  of  the  Yadkin,  thirty  miles 
to  Huntsviile ;  the  river  is  shallow  there,  and  he  can  ford  it.  He  is  only 
twenty-five  miles  from  Guilford,  due  east,  and  he  is  nearer  than  Greene  to 
the  shallow  fords  of  the  Dan.  He  thinks  that  Greene  has  no  boats  on  the 
Dan,  and  is  sure  of  his  prey. 

"  It  is  not  prudent  to  fight  if  we  can  avoid  it,"  is  what  Greene's  officers 
in  council  think,  and  it  is  in  accordance  with  Greene's  opinion.  Then 
there  will  be  a  race  for  the  Dan. 

Greene  has  already  sent  off  his  heavy  baggage,  but  he  mupt  have  a 
rear-guard  that  can  move  rapidly.  Morgan  is  sick  with  the  rheumatism ; 
and  Colonel  Williams,  the  brave-hearted  Marylander,  is  appointed  to  com 
mand  it.  He  has  all  the  cavalry  under  Colonel  Humphreys,  Howard's  in 
fantry,  and  the  riflemen — seven  hundred,  in  all,  of  the  best  men  of  the  lit 
tle  army,  as  true  as  steel  every  one  of  them. 

It  is  seventy  miles  from  Guilford  Court-house  to  the  Dan.     Cornwallis 
is  twenty-five  miles  west,  pushing  north-east,  and  Greene  is  also  marching 
north-east.     Greene  takes  the  main 
road.     Colonel  Williams  swings  out 

c5 

between  the  two  armies  on  another 
road. 

General  O'Hara  is  in  advance, 
with  the  British  cavalry  and  a  body 
of  light-infantry,  and  the  van-guard 
of  the  British  and  the  rear-guard  of 
the  Americans  are  constantly  ex 
changing  shots. 

At  three  o'clock  every  morning 
Williams  is  on  the  march,  not  halt 
ing  till  the  middle  of  the  forenoon 
for  breakfast.  A  rest  of  an  hour, 
or  till  the  British  appear,  and  then 
the  soldiers  are  on  the  road  again, 
marching  thirty  miles  a  day  through  the  mud,  making  their  way  with 
bleeding  feet.  There  are  snow-squalls;  but  through  the  rain  and  sleet 


COLONEL    OTHO    H.    WILLIAMS. 


350 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


and  snow,  across  the  swollen  streams,  the  little  army  pushes  on.  The 
militia  have  deserted.  "  All  but  eighty  have  left  me,"  is  Greene's  letter 
to  Governor  Nash,  of  North  Carolina. 

February  13th  was  the  third  day  of  the  race.  Williams  was  eating 
breakfast  when  a  Whig  citizen  rode  up.  "  The  British  van  -  guard  are 
close  upon  you !"  he  shouted. 

"  Reconnoitre  them,"  said  Williams  to  Captain  Armstrong. 

Williams's  force  moves  on,  all  except  Colonel  Lee,  with  a  squad  of  the 
cavalry,  who  secret  themselves  in  the  thick  woods.  There  is  a  clatter  of 
horses'  feet,  and  Armstrong  and  a  little  bugler,  on  a  jaded  pony,  come 


RETREAT  OF  THE  CAVALRY. 


riding  in,  with  a  squadron  of  British  cavalry  at  their  heels.  The  little  bu 
gler,  a  boy  of  thirteen,  gives  himself  up ;  but  the  next  moment  a  broad 
sword  cleaves  his  head  open,  and  he  falls  dead. 

"  Charge  !"  The  secreted  Americans  wheel  into  the  road,  and  eighteen 
of  the  British  are  pitched  from  their  saddles,  while  two  Americans  only  fall 
in  the  encounter.  The  leader  of  the  British  is  Captain  Miller,  who  is 
taken  prisoner. 

"  You  butchered  that  poor  little  bugler,  you  ruffian,  and  now  you  shall 
hang  for  it !"  are  the  quick,  hot  words  of  Williams. 

"  I  did  not  do  it.     It  was  a  drunken  soldier." 


GENERAL  GREENE'S  RETREAT. 


351 


"  You  could  have  prevented  it." 

The  soldiers  fix  a  noose,  but  the  British  army  is  close  at  hand,  and 
there  is  no  time  to  execute  the  sentence;  they  hurry  away,  keeping  fast 
tiold  of  the  prisoners. 


GREENE  CROSSING  THE  DAN. 


All  through  the  day  the  race  goes  on.     At  every  little  stream  the 
Americans,  under  Williams,  wait  and  give  their  pursuers  a  volley. 

Night  comes — cold,  dark,  rainy.     Williams  sees  a  fire  in  the  forest.     Is 


352  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

it  possible  that  Greene  has  halted  to  try  the  wager  of  battle  ?  Williams's 
heart  sinks  within  him.  It  must  be  that  Cornwallis,  by  forced  marches, 
has  got  between  Greene  and  the  Dan,  and  a  battle,  with  the  odds  against 
the  Americans,  is  inevitable.  But  two  days  ago  Greene  was  there,  and 
halted  a  few  hours,  and  the  fires  have  been  blazing  the  while.  Three 
hours'  rest,  and  Williams  is  moving.  He  halts  once  more  for  breakfast. 
A  horseman  rides  in  from  the  north. 

"  The  greater  part  of  our  wagons  are  over  the  Dan,  and  the  troops  are 
crossing,"  is  the  word  from  Greene. 

Hurra !  hurra !  hurra !  So  load  the  shout  that  it  reaches  the  ears  of 
the  British  close  at  hand,  and  they  wonder  what  it  may  mean. 

"Irwirfs  Ferry,  5£  o'clock. — All  our  troops  are  over,  and  the  stage 
clear.  The  infantry  will  cross  here.  Major  Ilardman  has  posted  his 
party  in  readiness  on  this  side,  and  the  infantry  and  artillery  are  posted 
on  the  other,  and  I  am  ready  to  remain  and  give  you  a  hearty  welcome," 
is  the  second  note  from  Greene. 

Up  to  the  river  march  the  wearied  troops.  Into  the  boats  they  leap, 
and  reach  the  other  shore. 

Safe  the  army,  safe  the  prisoners,  safe  the  baggage.  It  has  been  a 
shase  of  two  hundred  miles.  Ah !  that  was  wise  forethought,  the  sending 
of  that  messenger  from  Cheraw  to  the  Dan,  to  secure  all  the  boats  on  the 
river. 

Cornwallis  is  chagrined.  He  has  burned  his  baggage,  inarched  two 
hundred  miles,  his  troops  are  worn  out,  and  he  has  been  defeated  and  baf 
fled  at  every  move.  There  will  be  a  pretty  story  afloat  over  in  England  in 
regard  to  his  being  checkmated  by  a  Yankee  blacksmith  from  Rhode  Isl 
ind  who  knows  nothing  of  military  science. 


GU1LFOKD   COURT-HOUSE. 


353 


CHAPTER  XXX. 

GUILFORD   COURT-HOUSE. 

f^ORNWALLIS  was  at  Hillsborough,  forty  miles  south  of  the  Dan.  It 
VJ  was  an  important  town  —  a  place  where  the  Legislature  met  every 
other  year.  A  majority  of  the  people  in  that  section  of  the  country  were 
Tories.  Cornwallis  raised  the  royal  standard,  and  called  upon  all  good, 
loyal  subjects  to  rally  around  it.  The  Tories  were  delighted.  General 
Greene  had  been  driven  out  of  the  State,  the  loyal  cause  was  in  the  as 
cendant.  Now  that  a  royal  army  was  there,  they  would  rally  and  subdue 
the  Whigs.  Men  came  to  Cornwallis  offering  to  raise  companies.  He  had 
seven  offers  in  a  day.  His  lordship  was  delighted.  Greene  had  escaped 
him,  but  there  was  not  a  regiment  of  American  troops  in  the  State.  He 
could  write  home  a  glowing  letter  to  the  king.  He  was  far  from  his  sup 
plies,  which  were  at  Wilming 
ton,  fully  one  hundred  miles 
away ;  but  the  loyal  people 
would  feed  him,  and  he 
would  soon  be  able  to  push 
north  into  Virginia. 

On  the  17th  of  February, 
he  sent  Tarleton  north-xvest, 
with  about  four  hundred  men, 
to  bring  in  the  loyalists  in 
that  direction  who  were  gath 
ering  under  Colonel  Pyle. 
On  the  very  next  day  Greene 
sent  Colonel  Lee  and  Colonel 

Pickens  across  the  Dan,  and  *WS/^  »WMlHn 

made  preparations  for  the 
whole  of  his  little  army  to 
follow.  He  had  no  intention 
of  sitting  down  and  allowing 

12 


COLONEL    LEB. 


354  THE    BOYS   OF    7u. 

the  Tories  to  come  to  Cornwallis.  If  he  could  only  keep  them  in  awe,  his 
lordship  in  a  very  short  time  would  move  somewhere  else.  Greene  went 
with  Lee  and  Pickens  a  day's  march,  giving  them  instructions,  and  return 
ed  in  the  night  to  his  army. 

Lee  and  Pickens  heard  that  Tarleton  had  passed  north-west,  and  they 
followed  on  his  track.  They  captured  two  of  Tarleton's  officers,  and 
found  out  where  Tarleton  was.  Tarleton  does  not  know  that  Lee  and 
Pickens  are  on  his  track,  and  Lee  arid  Pickens  inform  the  country  people 
that  they  are  Tories  on  their  way  to  join  Tarleton :  by  so  doing,  perhaps 
they  will  be  able  to  get  within  striking  distance  before  Tarleton  discovers 
who  they  are. 

The  column  is  winding  along  the  forest  roads.  Tarleton  is  not  more 
than  three  or  four  miles  away,  resting  in  perfect  security,  thinking  that 
Lee  and  all  of  Greene's  army  are  forty  miles  distant  on  the  other  side  of  the 
Dan.  Two  Tories  ride  into  Lee's  lines,  thinking  the  troops  are  Tarleton's. 

"  We  come  from  Colonel  Pyle,  who  is  close  at  hand,  coming  on  a  cross 
road  with  four  hundred  loyalists,"  they  say. 

"Ah,  indeed!" 

"  He  will  soon  be  here,"  they  repeat. 

Colonel  Lee  sends  word  to  Pickens  to  place  his  riflemen  in  the  woods 
out  of  sight  The  riflemen  wear  green  twigs  in  their  hats. 

"  Will  one  of  you  please  ride  back  to  Colonel  Pyle  with  Colonel  Tarle 
ton's  compliments,  and  ask  him  if  he  will  be 'so  good  as  to  draw  out  by  the 
roadside,  that  my  troops  may  pass  on  to  their  encampment," 

Lee  makes  the  request.  He  has  determined  to  capture  the  whole  force 
of  four  hundred  mounted  Tories.  He  will  get  his  whole  line  in  front  of 
them,  halt  it,  and  inform  Colonel  Pyle  that  the  whole  force  are  prisoners. 
Pyle's  men  have  their  muskets  slung  upon  their  shoulders,  and  will  not  be 
able  to  make  resistance.  The  lines  move  along.  Lee  meets  Colonel  Pyle, 
and  shakes  hands  with  him.  Suddenly  there  is  firing  down  the  lines.  The 
trick  has  been  discovered,  and  the  Tories  begin  to  fire.  Terrible  their  mis 
take.  They  are  at  a  disadvantage.  Lee  would  fain  capture  them  without 
shedding  a  drop  of  blood,  but  the  melee  has  begiwi.  It  lasts  scarcely  five 
minutes;  but  when  it  is  over  ninety  Tories  are  stretched  upon  the  ground. 
Pyle  escapes  to  a  little  pond  close  by,  and  conceals  himself  by  its  reedy 
shores.  The  whole  body  is  captured  or  dispersed.  Tarleton  was  only  two 
miles  distant.  He  heard  the  firing,  and  prepared  for  battle.  Lee  con 
cluded  to  wait  till  morning  before  attacking,  and  in  the  night  was  joined 
by  three  hundred  mountaineers  who  had  heard  of  Greene's  retreat,  and 
had  voluntarily  left  their  homes  and  hastened  to  his  aid. 


GUILFORD   COURT-HOUSE.  355 

Morning  came,  but  Tarleton  was  not  to  be  seen  :  he  was  on  his  way 
east  to  Hillsborough,  too  far  to  be  overtaken.  The  Tories,  who  were  in 
tending  to  flock  to  Cornwallis's  aid,  concluded  to  wait  a  little  g 
while.  They  were  amazed  to  find  the  Americans  on.  the 
move,  and  astonished  at  the  fate  of  the  four  hundred 
under  Colonel  Pyle. 

On  the  23d,  Greene,  with  his  whole  army,  was 
south  of  the  Dan.     The  Tories  were  more  down 
cast  than  ever,  and  the  Whigs,  so  lately  discour 
aged,  plucked   up  heart   again. 
The    militia   hastened    to   join 
Greene. 

Cornwall.is  was  astounded 
when  he  found  Greene  south 
of  the  Dan  and  on  the  head 
waters  of  the  Haw  River,  which  becomes  the  Cape  Fear  River  farther 
down.  He  suddenly  found  his  foraging  parties  cut  off,  and  his  troops 
constantly  harassed  by  Marion,  Williams,  Pickens,  Sumter,  arid  Lee,  who 
would  be  in  one  place  to-day  and  somewhere  else  to-morrow,  and  who 
kept  the  Tories  in  such  awe  that  very  few  came  to  join  the  royal  stand 
ard.  Cornwallis  moved  out  from  Hillsborough  to  the  Haw  to  strike  a 
crushing  blow;  but  he  could  not  get  at  General  Greene. 

The  10th  of  March  came.  The  trees  were  clothed  in  green,  wild  flow 
ers  bloomed  by  the  wayside,  the  air  was  filled  with  their  fragrance ;  but 
on  this  day  the  soldiers  of  the  two  armies  had  little  time  to  admire  the 
beautiful  in  nature. 

Greene  had  four  thousand  two  hundred  and  forty-three  infantry,  and 
one  hundred  and  sixty-one  cavalry.  Only  one  thousand  four  hundred  and 
ninety  were  Continental  troops,  the  rest  militia,  who  had  come  out  for  a 
few  weeks'  campaign.  In  a  short  time  they  would  all  be  on  their  way 
home.  General  Greene  wanted  to  fight,  and  he  determined  to  take  a 
good  position  and  offer  battle  to  Cornwallis.  He  might  not  win  a  victory; 
but  a  battle,  even  if  not  a  victory,  might  be  a  blow  which  would  cripple 
Cornwallis.  Greene  would  take  care  that  a  defeat  should  not  be  a  rout. 
His  cavalry  were  superior  to  Cornwallis's,  and  could  cover  a  retreat.  The 
ground  around  Guilford  Court-house  would  be  a  favorable  position.  The 
main  road  runs  north  and  south ;  another  road  runs  off  west,  at  right  an 
gles,  and  leads  to  the  Reedy  Fork  of  the  Haw  River. 

The  court-house  stands  at  the  junction  of  the  roads,  with  a  field  north 
of  the  Reedy  Fork  road,  and  another  old  field  south  of  it,  extending  one 


356 


THE   BOYS   OF   '76. 


hundred  rods  or  more.  There  is  a  piece  of  woods,  and  south  of  the 
woods  corn-fields  on  both  sides  of  the  road,  where  the  farmers  have  just 
planted  their  corn ;  and  beyond  the  fields  there  is  a  ravine,  with  a  little 
brook  winding  through  it.  The  ground  slopes  all  the  way  from  the  court 
house  to  the  brook,  a  distance  of  more  than  half  a  mile. 

Cornwallis  is  south-west  of  Guilford,  near  New  Garden  meeting-house. 
He  is  surprised  to  hear  that  Greene  has  id-anced  nearly  twenty  miles  from 
the  Reedy  Fork,  and  is  ready  to  offer  him  battle.  For  two  weeks  he  has 
been  trying  to  get  at  him,  and  now  Greene  is  waiting  for  him.  He  can 


GUILFORD    COURT-HOUSE. 


not  decline  such  an  offer.  He  has  twenty-five  hundred  disciplined  British 
troops  and  several  cannon,  and  he  will  crush  the  man  whom  he  has  been 
endeavoring,  not  only  for  the  last  two  weeks,  but  all  winter,  to  catch. 

On  the  southern  border  of  the  forest  behind  the  log  fence,  along  the 
northern  edge  of  the  corn-field,  Greene  posts  the  North  Carolina  militia 
and  some  riflemen,  under  Colonels  Butler  and  Eaton.  They  have  a 
splendid  position,  protected  by  the  fence,  and  will  have  a  good  chance  at 
the  British  as  they  come  across  the  corn-field.  Behind  them,  about  nine 
hundred  feet,  he  places  the  second  line,  the  Virginia  militia,  in  command 
of  General  Lawson,  east  of  the  road,  and  General  Stevens  west  of  it.  Back 
by  the  court-house,  along  the  road  leading  to  Reedy  Fork  on  the  top  of  the 
hill,  he  places  the  Continental  infantry.  They  are  twelve  hundred  feet  in 


GU1LFOKD   COURT-HOUSE. 


357 


the  rear  of  the  Virginians.  General  Huger  commands  on  the  west,  and 
Colonel  Williams  on  the  east  side  of  the  Salisbury  road.  Greene,  with  the 
remainder  of  his  troops,  is  near  the  court-house.  Colonel  Washington, 
with  his  cavalry  and  some  infantry,  is  placed  to  support  Huger  on  the 
west ;  while  Colonel  Lee,  with  his  cavalry,  is  stationed  on  the  east  to  sup 
port  Williams.  Greene  has  four  pieces  of  artillery.  Captain  Singleton, 
with  two  six-pounders,  takes  position  in  the  road  between  the  corn-fields, 
and  the  other  two  pieces  are  on  the  hill  south-west  of  the  court-house. 

General  Cornwallis  is  forming  his  men.      The  North  Carolinians  see 
the  British  coming  from  the  woods.    The  Seventy-first  regiment,  Highland- 


G,  British  advancing ;  1,  first  position  of  British ;  B,  front  line  of  Americans— North  Carolinians ;  C,  sec 
ond  line  of  Americans  ;  A,  American  right  wing;  E,.  Maryland  and  Virginia  Continentals;  2,  second 
position  of  British ;  D,  fight  between  Hessians  and  Americans ;  3,  third  position  of  British. 

ers,  swings  out  east  of  the  road.  A  Hessian  regiment,  under  Colonel  Bose, 
follows.  General  Leslie  commands  the  wing.  The  Twenty -third  and 
Thirty-third  regiments,  under  Colonel  Webster,  file  to  the  left,  west  of  the 
road.  The  artillery  is  in  the  centre,  with  the  light-infantry  and  the  Ya 
gers  behind.  A  battalion  of  the  Guards,  under  Lieutenant -colonel  Nor 
ton,  file  east  to  support  Leslie,  and  General  O'Hara,  with  the  Grenadiers 
and  second  battalion  of  the  Guards,  file  west  to  support  Webster. 

The  two  six-pounders,  under  Singleton,  open  fire,  and  the  British  guns 


358  THE   BOYS   OF  '76. 

reply.  Slowly  the  British  advance  across  the  corn-field.  The  North  Car 
olinians  open  fire  too  soon.  They  do  not  wait,  as  Stark's  men  waited  at 
Bunker  Hill.  The  bullets,  for  the  most  part,  go  wide  of  the  mark;  only 
here  and  there  a  man  drops.  On  the  British  move.  They  are  within 
good  distance,  and  they  halt  and  fire  a  volley. 

"  Charge !"  Leslie  shouts  it.  With  a  hurra  the  line  sweeps  across  the 
corn-field,  and  the  North  Carolinians  drop  their  gnus,  throw  away  knap 
sacks  and  canteens,  and  flee  like  a  flock  of  sheep  through  the  woods. 

"  Stand  !  stand  !  Come  back  !  come  back  !"  shout  the  officers  ;  but  in 
vain.  In  a  moment  they  are  gone.  Foolish  men!  If  they  had  but  re 
served  their  fire  till  the  British  were  within  ten  rods,  if  they  had  stood 
their  ground  behind  the  fence,  far  different  would  have  been  the  result  of 
the  battle.  Back  through  the  woods,  through  the  second  line  they  stream 
ed,  all  except  a  handful,  under  Colonel  Campbell,  who  bravely  maintain 
their  ground  a  while. 

But  the  British  are  brought  to  a  stand,  for  the  flanking  troops  of  Col 
onel  Washington  and  Colonel  Lee  are  galling  them.  Cornwallis  half- 
wheels  the  Hessian  regiment  to  face  the  east,  and  attacks  Lee;  and  the 
Thirty-third  regiment,  with  the  light-infantry,  makes  a  similar  movement 
west  to  attack  Washington.  He  fills  the  gap  in  the  line  by  advancing 
two  battalions  of  the  Guards.  It  is  a  well-executed  movement,  like  that 
which  a  checker-player  makes  when  he  keeps  the  way  to  a  king-row  well 
guarded. 

On  toward  the  Virginians  moves  the  compact  line  of  British.  The 
Virginians  pour  in  a  deadly  fire,  and  there  is  confusion  in  the  British 
ranks;  but  the  men  are  old  soldiers,  and  discipline  holds  them.  The  Vir 
ginians  retreat,  not  panic-stricken,  but  in  excellent  order.  Cornwallis  is 
confident  of  an  easy  victory.  The  British,  under  Webster,  come  out  into 
the  field  in  front  of  the  Mary  landers,,  under  Colonel  Gunby.  The  Mary- 
landers  have  been  in  many  a  battle.  Their  muskets  blaze,  and  then  they 
rush  forward  down  the  hill,  charging  bayonet.  It  is  discipline  against  dis 
cipline.  Webster's  line  wavers,  gives  way,  and  the  men  flee  in  confusion 
toward  the  woods.  Oh  for  another  regiment  like  that  from  Maryland  ! 
Vain  the  wish ;  they  are  the  only  veterans  on  the  field.  Greene  has  no 
troops  to  throw  in  behind  them,  to  press  on  and  follow  up  the  work. 
Stevens  is  wounded,  the  Virginians  in  retreat;  and  Leslie  and  O'Hara,  on 
the  British  side,  are  just  ready  to  fall  upon  the  Second  regiment  of  Mary- 
landers,  under  Colonel  Greene.  Gunby  goes  down  beneath  his  horse,  but 
Howard  takes  command.  The  cavalry  under  Washington  charge  the 
British. 


GUILFORD   COURT-HOUSE. 


359 


Cornwallis's  horse  is  shot  beneath  him,  and  he  has  the  mortification  of 
seeing  his  best  troops  fleeing  from  the  field.  The  flight  must  be  stayed, 
the  pursuers  driven,  or  the  day  is  lost. 

"  Open  with  the  artillery !"  he  shouts. 

"  It  will  kill  our  own  men,"  O'Hara  replies. 

"  I  know  it,  but  it  must  be  done." 

Crash  go  the  British  cannon,  and  British  and  Americans  fall  before 
the  murderous  storm.  In  a  moment  the  British  soldiers  drift  past  the 
artillery,  and  the  Americans  are  stopped.  It  is  the  crisis  of  the  battle — 
the  end  of  it. 

On  the  east  side  of  the  road  the  British  are  advancing.  The  American 
militia  are  retreating.  Greene  surveys  the  scene.  He  sees  what  has  been 


BATTLE-FIELD    AT    GUILFORD. 


gained,  and  what  may  be  lost.  He  has  inflicted  a  terrible  blow  upon  Corn- 
wallis.  He  can  retreat  now,  and  save  his  army.  To  remain  and  attempt 
to  win  the  victory  will  end  in  failure,  and  he  issues  the  order  for  retreat. 
The  horses  are  shot,  and  he  must  leave  his  artillery  behind  him. 

"  You  will  cover  the  retreat,"  is  his  order  to  the  Second  Marylanders. 
The  regiment  takes  its  stand,  and  the  army  files  away  in  good  order,  ready, 
if  pressed,  to  turn  at  any  moment  and  smite  the  pursuers.  Lee  and  Wash 
ington,  with  the  cavalry,  remain  with  the  Marylanders.  Tarleton  would 
like  to  rush  upon  them,  but  Cornwallis  has  narrowly  escaped  an  utter  rout, 
and  calls  him  back.  About  four  hundred  Americans  have  been  killed  and 
wounded,  while  Cornwallis  has  lost  six  hundred  and  thirty-three. 

This  battle,  in  itb  results,  was  one  of  the  most  important  of  the  war. 


360 


THE   BOYS   OF  '76. 


In  December,  when  Greene  took  the  command  of  the  Southern  Depart 
ment,  the  British  and  Tories  were  masters  of  the  Southern  States.  They 
held  a  line  of  posts  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  mountains.  Cornwallis  had 
fully  four  thousand  men  in  the  iield ;  but  now  he  was  forced  to  abandon 
the  interior,  and  make  a  hasty  retreat  to  the  sea-coast,  at  Wilmington.  The 
Tories  were  disheartened,  and  the  Whigs  triumphant ;  and  the  cause  of 

liberty,  which  had   been  so  gloomy, 
was  bright  once  more. 

General  Marion  was  north  of 
Charleston,  not  far  from  the  Santee 
Kiver,  when  a  British  officer  came 
with  a  flag  of  truce  to  see  him  about 
exchanging  prisoners,  and  was  taken 
into  the  camp  blindfolded.  The  of 
ficer  had  heard  much  about  Mar 
ion  ;  and  instead  of  finding,  as  he 
had  expected,  a  man  of  noble  pres 
ence  in  an  elegant  uniform,  he  saw 
a  small,  thin  man,  in  homespun 
clothes.  Around  were  Marion's  sol 
diers,  some  of  them  almost  naked, 
some  in  British  uniforms,  which  they 
had  captured  —  a  motley  set,  with  all  kinds  of  weapons,  large  muskets, 
rifles,  shot-guns,  swords  made  by  country  blacksmiths  from  mill -saws. 
The  business  upon  which  the  officer  had  come  was  soon  settled. 

"  Shall  I  have  the  honor  of  your  company  to  dinner  ?"  said  Marion. 
The  officer  saw  no  preparation  for  dinner.     A  fire  was  burning,  but 
there  were  no  camp-kettles,  no  Dutch  ovens,  no  cooking  utensils. 
"  Give  us  our  dinner,  Tom !"  said  Marion  to  one  of  his  men. 
Tom  was  the  cook.     He  dug  open  the  fire  with  a  stick,  and  poked  out 
a  fine  mess  of  sweet  -  potatoes.     He  pricked  the  large  ones  to  see  if  they 
were  done,  blew  the  ashes  from  them,  wiped  them  on  his  shirt-sleeve, 
placed  the  best  ones  on  a  piece  of  bark,  and  laid  them  on  the  log  between 
Marion  and  the  officer. 

"  I  fear  our  dinner  will  not  prove  so  palatable  to  you  as  I  could  wish, 
but  it  is  the  best  we  have,"  said  Marion. 

The  British  officer  was  a  gentleman,  and  eat  of  the  potatoes,  but  soon 
began  to  laugh.  "  I  was  thinking,"  he  said,  "  what  some  of  my  brother- 
officers  would  say  if  our  Government  were  to  give  such  a  bill  of  fare  an 
this.  I  suppose  this  is  only  an  accidental  dinner." 


GENERAL    MARION. 


GUILFORD  COURT-HOUSE. 


361 


"  Not  so,  for  often  we  don't  get  even  this." 

"  Though  stinted  in  provisions,  yon,  of  course,  draw  double  pay.'9 


MARION   INVITING   THE    BRITISH    OFFICER   TO   DINNER. 

"  Not  a  cent,  sir.     We  don't  have  any  pay.     We  are  fighting  for  our 
liberty." 

The  officer  was  astonished.    They  had  a  long  and  friendly  talk,  and  the 
officer,  bidding  Marion  good-bye,  went  back  to  Georgetown. 

12* 


362  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

Colonel  Watson  was  in  command  of  the  British  there.  "  What  makes 
you  look  so  serious  ?"  Colonel  Watson  asked. 

"  I  have  cause  to  look  serious,"  the  officer  replied. 

"  Has  Marion  refused  to  treat  ?" 

"  No,  sir ;  but  I  have  seen  an  American  general  and  his  officers,  with- 
3 nt  pay,  almost  without  clothes,  living  on  roots  and  drinking  water,  and  all 
for  liberty  !  What  chance  have  we  against  such  men  f ' 

The  officer  was  so  impressed  by  what  he  had  seen,  that  he  could  fight 
no  more,  but  disposed  of  his  commission  and  returned  to  England. 

General  Greene  sent  Marion  and  Lee  south  to  get  between  the  British 
and  Charleston,  and  cut  off  their  supplies.  They  marched  to  Fort  Watson, 
a  strong  fortification  on  the  east  bank  of  the  Santee  River,  about  fifty 
miles  north  of  Charleston.  It  was  built  of  logs,  stood  on  a  hill,  arid  was 
garrisoned  by  one  hundred  and  twenty  men,  commanded  by  Lieutenant 
M'Kay.  They  sent  him  a  summons  to  surrender;  but  he  was  a  brave  of 
ficer,  and  informed  them  that  he  intended  to  defend  the  fort.  He  knew 
that  Lord  Rawdon  would  soon  be  there  to  aid  him  with  several  hundred 
•nen.  Marion  and  Lee  knew  that  Lord  Rawdon  was  on  the  march,  and 
they  resolved  to  capture  the  fort  before  he  arrived. 

They  saw,  that  there  was  no  well  in  the  fort,  and  that  the  garrison  had 
to  come  out  and  creep  down  to  the  river  to  obtain  water.  The  riflemen 
soon  stopped  that.  Then  M;Kay  set  his  men  at  work  digging  a  well,  and 
carried  it  down  to  the  level  of  the  lake,  and  had  a  good  supply  of  wrater. 

Lee  and  Marion  knew  that  there  was  a  large  amount  of  supplies  in  the 
fort,  for,  besides  what  was  inside,  there  were  boxes  and  barrels  outside. 
Some  of  the  militia  tried  to  creep  up  and  get  a  barrel ;  but  the  garrison 
killed  one  and  wounded  another.  A  brave  negro,  named  Billy,  with  Mar 
ion,  looked  at  the  supplies,  saw  that  one  of  the  hogsheads  was  only  a  few 
feet  from  the  edge  of  the  bluff,  and  resolved  to  try  what  he  could  do. 
He  crept  up  very  near  without  being  seen,  then,  before  the  British  could 
fire  upon  him,  he  was  crouched  behind  the  hogshead.  The  ground  was  a 
declivity,  and  soon  the  British  soldiers  saw  that  the  hogshead  was  in  mo 
tion.  They  fired  at  it,  but  they  could  only  see  some  black  fingers  clasp 
ing  the  chimbs,  and  in  a  few  minutes  the  hogshead  disappeared  down  the 
hill. 

Billy  obtained  an  axe,  broke  open  the  hogshead,  and  found  that  he  had 
captured  one  hundred  and  fifty  shirts,  one  hundred  knapsacks,  fifty  blank 
ets,  and  six  cloaks.  He  distributed  them  to  the  soldiers,  many  of  whom 
had  no  shirts.  Marion  named  the  negro  "Captain  Billy,"  and  every  one 
treated  the  brave  fellow  with  great  respect. 


GUILFOKD   COURT-HOUSE. 


363 


Rawdun  was  close  at  hand.  Marion  and  Lee  could  see  the  light  of  his 
camp-tires  on  the  hills  in  the  west.  Whatever  was  done  must  be  done 
quickly.  But  what  could  they  do?  They  had  no  cannon;  and  even  if 
they  had,  they  could  not  batter  down  the  fort ;  but  a  bright  thought  came 
to  Colonel  Mahan — to  build  a  tower  which  would  overlook  the  fortification. 
As  soon  as  night  came,  all  the  axes  in  the  camp  were  in  use.  The  British 
could  hear  the  choppers,  and  wondered  what  was  going  on ;  but  they  were 
astonished  in  the  morning  when  they  saw  a  tower  higher  than  the  fort, 
and  a  swarm  of  men  on  the  top  firing  through  loop-holes,  and  picking  oft 
with  their  rifles  every  man  who  showed  his  head  above  the  parapet.  Lord 
Rawdon  had  not  corne,  and  Lieutenant  M'Kay  saw  that  he  would  soon 
lose  all  his  men,  and  that  he  must  surrender.  Before  noon  the  Americans 
were  in  possession  of  the  fort,  and  all  its  supplies. 


MARION    AND   LEE    CAPTURING    FORT    WATSON. 


364  THE  BUYS   OF  76. 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 

EUTAW. 

A  BOUT  forty  miles  north-west  of  Charleston,  near  the  line  between 
-£^-  Charleston  and  Orangeburg  counties,  are  some  wonderful  springs. 
The  water  boils  up  from  the  ground,  clear  and  pure.  It  is  a  subterrane 
an  river  that  appears  upon  the  surface,  and  that  winds  through  the  low 
lands  north-west  for  about  two  miles, 
and  empties  into  the  Santee  at  Nelson's 
Ferry. 

Beneath  the  grateful  shade  of  the 
surrounding  forest,  Colonel  Stuart,  in 
command  of  the  British  forces  in  South 
Carolina,  was  encamped  on  the  8th  of 
September,  1781.  Lord  Rawdon  had 
returned  to  England,  worn  down  by  the 

NELSONS    FERRY.  „       -  „       -  .  ~    ,  ,      ~ 

fatigue  of  the  campaign.  Colonel  Stu 
art  had  twenty -three  hundred  men.  General  Greene  was  only  sixteen 
miles  distant,  on  the  high  hills  of  the  Santee,  north  of  the  river.  There 
were  no  boats  on  the  Santee  by  which  he  could  cross  it  to  attack  Stuart, 
and  he  had  only  twenty-six  hundred  men,  of  whom,  however,  not  more 
than  sixteen  hundred  could  be  of  any  account  in  a  battle,  for  a  thousand 
were  poorly  armed,  or  were  sick,  or  were  required  to  bring  in  supplies. 
Yet  General  Greene  determined  to  strike  a  blow  at  the  British. 

He  broke  up  his  carnp  on  the  22d  of  August,  marched  north-west  about 
twenty-five  miles,  almost  to  Camden,  and  crossed  at  the  Camden  Ferry  ; 
then  turned  south,  and  marched  rapidly  to  the  Congaree,  about  twenty-live 
miles,  and  crossed  it  at  Friday's  Ferry;  then  turned  south-east  toward 
Eutaw  Springs,  twenty-five  miles  away ;  making  a  march  of  seventy-five 
miles  to  get  sixteen.  Rain  had  been  falling,  the  swamps  were  filled 
with  water,  and  all  the  low-lands  were  flooded,  making  the  march  a  diffi 
cult  one.  The  sun  was  hot,  and  at  midday  the  army  rested ;  but  from 


EUTAW. 


365 


day -break  till  mid  -  forenoon,  and  from  four  o'clock  till  late  in  the  night, 
the  soldiers  plodded  their  weary  way. 

General  Greene  learned  that  General  Stuart  intended  to  erect  a  fort 
at  the  springs,  from  which  parties  could  go  out  in  all  directions  to  rob  the 
Whigs,  and  stir  up  the  Tories  to  enlist  in  the  king's  cause,  and  he  deter 
mined  to  strike  a  blow  that  would  frustrate  the  design,  even  if  he  were 
defeated  in  battle.  He  had  few 
stores,  and  would  not  risk  them. 
He  prepared  for  a  retreat,  if  a 
retreat  should  be  necessary,  by 
sending  all  his  heavy  baggage 
to  Howell's  Ferry,  on  the  Con- 
garee,  where  it  could  be  taken 
across  the  river  at  a  minute's 


EUTAW    SPRINGS. 


warning. 

General  Marion  knew  all 
the  country  —  every  lonely  path 
through  the  woods,  as  well  as 
every  highway;  and  so  vigilant 
were  his  men,  that  Stuart's  spies, 
scouts,  and  foraging  parties  were 
captured  one  by  one.  Stuart, 
having  no  suspicion  that  Greene  was  making  such  a  roundabout  move 
ment,  was  resting  in  security  at  Eutaw  Springs. 

Stuart's  camp  is  a  few  rods  south  of  the  springs,  in  a  field  at  the  junc 
tion  of  the  great  road  leading  south-east  to  Charleston,  with  the  river  road 
running  east  and  west.  There  is  a  brick  two-story  house  on  the  north  side 
of  the  road  at  the  junction,  with  a  garden  behind  it  reaching  down  to  the 
springs.  West  of  the  house,  and  north  of  the  road,  is  a  cleared  field ;  and 
there  is  another  field  across  the  road,  and  opposite  the  first.  In  these  fields 
Stuart  has  pitched  his  tents.  There  are  fences  around  the  garden  and 
fields.  It  is  only  a  mile  north  in  a  direct  line  to  the  river.  The  swamp 
and  creek  in  that  direction  will  prevent  Greene  from  flanking  Stuart  on 
the  north.  The  woods  around  the  field  are  thick,  the  trees  tall  and  large, 
and  the  gray  moss  hangs  in  long,  trailing,  sombre  masses  from  the  timber. 
The  clearing  is  on  a  hill  thirty  feet  or  more  above  the  level  of  the  springs. 
It  is  a  strong  position ;  but  General  Greene  determines  to  attack  it,  never 
theless. 

General  Greene  is  at  Burdett's  plantation,  seven  miles  west  of  Eutaw, 
on  the  7th  of  September.     The  men  go  into  camp,  cook  their  supplies,  and 


366  THE   BOYS  OF  '76. 

lie  down  beneath  the  trees  for  a  few  hours'  rest  before  inarching  to  battle. 
Stuart  does  not  know  that  they  are  there;  but  during  the  night  two  North 
Carolina  men,  who  have  been  forced  into  service  against  their  will,  take 
revenge  by  deserting. 

"We  come  from  the  American  army.  It  is  only  seven  miles  distant, 
and  you  are  going  to  be  attacked  in  the  morning,"  they  say,  when  brought 
before  General  Stuart. 

The  British  general  does  not  believe  it.  Greene  can  not  have  reached 
that  position  undiscovered.  The  men  are  spies,  and  he  orders  them  un 
der  guard.  If  he  finds  that  they  are  spies,  they  will  dangle  from  the 
limbs  of  one  of  the  live-oaks  in  the  morning.  He  will  see,  however,  if 
there  are  any  Americans  lurking  in  the  vicinity;  and  orders  Major  John 
Coffin,  brother  of  Admiral  Isaac  Coffin,  and  refugee  from  Boston,  who 
sailed  with  General  Howe  to  Halifax  in  1776,  and  who  is  now  in  Carolina 
fighting  for  the  king,  to  beat  them  up. 

By  daylight  Greene  is  on  the  march  with  about  twenty-three  hundred 
men.  At  the  same  time,  Major  Coffin,  with  four  hundred  men,  is  pushing 
out  to  see  if  there  is  any  truth  in  the  report  of  the  deserters,  and  also  to 
dig  sweet-potatoes  on  a  plantation  not  far  away.  He  suddenly  finds  him 
self  face  to  face  with  Major  Armstrong,  of  Lee's  cavalry,  who  is  leading 
the  advance  of  Greene. 

"  There  are  some  Whig  militia,"  is  the  word  in  Coffin's  ranks. 

"  Charge !"  is  the  order  of  Coffin,  and  his  troops  come  riding  down  the 
road  to  scatter  the  Whig  militia ;  but  the  Whig  militia  do  not  run.  They 
sit  in  their  saddles,  take  deliberate  aim,  and  one  after  another  of  the  Brit 
ish  troops  tumbles  to  the  ground.  "  Charge !"  It  is  Lee  who  gives  the 
command,  and  his  men,  with  drawn  swords,  sweep  down  the  road,  scatter 
ing  the  British  in  an  instant.  Forty  prisoners  are  captured,  and  several 
are  killed  and  wounded. 

The  potato-diggers,  protected  by  a  body  of  infantry,  are  close  at  hand ; 
but  the  diggers  throw  down  their  hoes,  and  flee  toward  Eutaw. 

General  Greene,  seeing  the  British  infantry,  directs  his  aid  to  ride  to 
ward  them,  and  inform  them  that  if  they  do  not  surrender  he  will  be 
under  the  necessity  of  cutting  them  to  pieces ;  and  the  British  give  them 
selves  up.  Major  Coffin's  party  is  utterly  routed.  A  sudden  but  effective 
blow  has  been  struck  already  upon  Stuart. 

There  is  commotion  in  Stuart's  camp — drums  beating,  soldiers  spring 
ing  to  their  arms.  Some  of  the  soldiers  take  position  behind  the  garden 
fence,  others  place  logs  around  the  brick  house,  and  in  a  short  time  make 
it  a  strong  fort.  The  walls  are  thick,  and  Greene,  with  his  two  three- 


EUTAW. 


367 


pounders  and  two  six-pounders,  will  have  to  batter  them  a  long  while  be 
fore  he  can  make  them  crumble.  From  the  windows  Stuart's  marksmen 
will  pick  off  the  Americans  as  they  approach. 

Stuart  could  hardly  believe  that  Greene  was  at  hand  with  his  whole 
force,  or  that  he  would  dare  attack  him  in  so  strong  a  position.  He  did 
not  strike  his  tents,  for  he  was  sure  of  driving  the  rebels  pell-mell  up  the 
road  in  a  very  few  minutes.  He  formed  his  men  in  a  single  line  in  the 
edge  of  the  woods  by  the  field,  four  hundred  feet  from  his  tents. 

On  the  north  side  of  the  road,  west  of  the  garden,  he  placed  the  Third 
regiment,  or  "the  Buffs,"  as  the  soldiers  called  them.  Colonel  Cruger,  with 
the  fragments  of  several  battalions  and  companies,  is  placed  in  the  centre 
across  the  road,  and  the  Sixty-third  and  Sixty-fourth  on  the  south  side. 
Behind  the  Buffs,  he  placed  a  battalion  of  light  -  infantry,  under  Major 
Majoribanks.  The  major  had  his  troops  in  a  thicket  of  black-jack.  Some 
of  his  soldiers  were  posted  by  the  spring.  Major  Coffin,  with  his  cavalry, 
was  placed  in  the  field  south,  to  guard  the  left  flank.  The  artillery  was 
stationed  in  the  road,  while  a  detachment  of  infantry  was  sent  out  a  mile 
to  skirmish  with  Greene  as  he  advanced. 

Greene  formed  his  men  in  two  lines.  In  the  front  line  which  he 
placed  south  of  the  road,  on  the  right,  was  a  battalion  of  South  Carolina 
militia,  under  General  Marion ;  then  came  two  battalions  of  North  Caro 
lina  militia,  under  Colonel  Malmedy.  On  the  north  side  of  the  road  was 
another  battalion  of  South  Caro 
lina  militia,  under  Colonel  Pick- 
ens.  The  whole  front  line  was 
under  Marion.  He  planted  his 
two  six -pounders  in  the  road  be 
tween  the  North  Carolinians.  A 
short  distance  behind  them  he 
stationed  three  small  brigades  of 
Continental  troops.  On  the  south 
side  of  the  road,  behind  Marion's 
South  Carolinians,  he  placed  the 
North  Carolinians,  three  battalion? 
of  them,  commanded  by  Lieuten 
ant-colonel  Ashe,  Major  Arm 
strong,  and  Major  Blount.  Gen 
eral  Sumner  commanded  the  bri 
gade.  In  the  centre  were  two  battalions  of  Virginians,  under  Major  Snead 
and  Captain  Edmonds — both  under  Colonel  Campbell.  On  the  north  side 


COLONEL    PICKENS. 


368  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

of  the  road  were  the  Mary  landers — one  battalion  under  Lieutenant-colonel 
Howard,  the  other  under  Major  Hardman,  and  both  under  General  WiJ 
liams.  He  gave  General  Lee  charge  of  the  right  flank,  and  placed  some 
battalions  of  State  troops,  commanded  by  Colonel  Wade  Hampton,  Col 
onel  Polk,  and  Colonel  Middleton — the  whole  under  Colonel  Henderson — 
to  protect  the  left.  General  Greene  had  still  a  few  troops  left.  He  would 
not  extend  his  lines,  and  so  held  them  in  reserve.  They  were  Lieutenant- 
colonel  Washington's  cavalry,  and  a  battalion  of  Delaware  troops,  under 
Captain  Kirkwood. 

General  Greene  believed  in  double  lines  and  in  a  reserve,  arid  he 
placed  his  best  troops  in  the  second  line,  as  at  Guilford  Court-house.  If 
the  first  line  of  militia  gives  way,  as  possibly  it  may,  there  will  be  some 
old  soldiers  behind  to  receive  the  shock.  At  Guilford  he  was  the  party 
attacked ;  but  now  things  are  reversed,  and  he  is  about  to  attack  a  superior 
force.  What  chance  has  he  of  success  ?  Not  much.  Why,  then,  does  he 
attack  ?  Because,  even  if  he  is  defeated,  he  can  strike  a  blow  which  will  be 
almost  equivalent  to  a  victory.  If  he  can  give  an  effective  blow,  he  will 
compel  Stuart  to  leave  the  interior  and  take  refuge  in  Charleston,  and  so 
free  the  upper  country.  He  will  take  care  that  a  defeat  shall  not  be  a 
rout,  as  he  did  at  Guilford.  That  battle,  though  he  was  driven  from  the 
field,  compelled  Cornwallis  to  retreat  to  Wilmington,  and  it  was  the  turn 
ing-point  of  the  war  in  the  South.  If  he  can  compel  Stuart  to  retreat  to 
Charleston,  it  will  be  a  victory.  To  complete  his  arrangements,  he  places 
his  two  three-pounders  in  the  front  line,  and  the  two  six-pounders  in  the 
second  line.  He  will  begin  the  battle  with  the  militia  and  the  three- 
pounders,  but  will  end  it  with  the  Continental  troops  and  the  six-pound 
ers.  Stuart  will  find  the  contest  hardest  at  the  close,  and  not  at  the  be 
ginning. 

It  is  nine  o'clock.  The  sky  is  cloudless,  and  the  day  is  hot,  but  the 
men  are  sheltered  by  the  foliage  of  the  trees.  They  are  in  the  woods,  and 
the  trees  will  be  a  shelter  not  only  from  the  burning  heat,  but  also  from 
the  bullets  of  the  enemy. 

The  army  was  still  a  mile  from  the  Eutaw,  moving  slowly,  when  it  met 
the  detachment  which  Stuart  had  sent  out.  Lee  was  in  front.  He  con 
cluded  that  he  was  near  the  main  body  of  the  British.  There  was  the 
roar  of  a  cannon,  and  a  ball  came  whirring  through  the  woods.  Lieuten 
ant  Gaines  unlirnbered  his  three-pounders;  and  when  the  British  sent  a 
shot,  Gaines  returned  two ;  and  in  a  very  short  time  the  British  fell  back 
to  Eutaw.  The  troops  filed  right  and  left,  and  took  position  in  the  order 
of  battle.  Gaines  unlimbered  his  three-pounders  again  and  opened  fire, 


EUTAW.  369 

and  the  British  artillery  replied.  Gaines  was  a  good  gunner,  and  he  verv 
soon  dismounted  one  of  the  British  guns,  but  not  long  after  had  both  of 
his  three-pounders  disabled.  The  militia  were  getting  used  to  the  sound 
of  the  cannon.  The  cannon-balls  of  the  British  made  havoc  among  the 
trees,  but  flew  harmlessly  over  the  heads  of  the  soldiers. 

Through  the  under-brush  the  militia  in  the  front  line  can  see  now,  as 
they  advance,  the  bright-red  uniforms  of  the  British  regulars.  It  is  about 
a  quarter-past  nine  when  the  musketry  begins.  The  success  of  the  morn 
ing  has  stirred  the  blood  of  the  militia.  They  have  got  used  to  the  roar 
of  the  cannon ;  they  are  partly  sheltered  by  the  trees,  and  they  take  steady 
aim.  They  fire,  load,  step  forward  a  little,  fire  again,  and  so  advance. 
The  British  are  firing,  and  the  air  is  filled  with  the  whistling  bullets. 

Over  on  the  right,  General  Lee's  infantry  is  engaged  with  the  Sixty- 
third  British.  The  Sixty -fourth,  in  turn,  is  pressing  the  North  Carolin 
ians  in  the  centre,  under  Malmedy;  but  the  North  Carolinians,  anxious 
to  wipe  out  the  stain  of  the  panic  at  Guilford,  hold  their  ground  till  they 
have  fired  seventeen  rounds;  then,  and  not  till  then,  do  they  yield.  They 
do  not  flee  panic-stricken,  but  fall  back  behind  the  Continentals,  under 
Sumner. 

Stuart  has  resolved  to  break  Greene's  centre.  He  will  strike  a  great 
blow  there  by  moving  straight  down  the  road.  He  will  throw  in  his  re 
serve,  and  it  shall  be  like  a  wedge  driven  into  a  log :  by  such  a  movement 
he  will  rend  Greene  asunder,  and  cut  him  up  piecemeal.  The  fight  goes 
on  more  fiercely,  and  at  close  quarters.  The  three-pounders  are  disabled; 
but  the  six-pounders  open  with  a  louder  roar.  Henderson,  on  the  north  side 
of  the  road,  can  not  advance  against  Majoribanks  on  account  of  a  thicket ; 
but  he  holds  his  ground,  and  Lee  is  holding  his,  on  the  right  flank.  Stu 
art  presses  on  his  men  in  the  centre,  and  the  North  Carolina  Continentals 
retreat  in  confusion.  But  there  are  two  cool-headed  men  on  horseback  in 
the  rear  who  are  watching  the  battle.  One  is  the  man  from  Rhode  Island, 
whom  Washington  long  ago  selected  as  the  fittest  general  of  the  army  to 
be  his  successor,  in  case  he  should  fall — General  Greene.  Close  by  is  Otho 
H.  Williams,  who  has  been  Greene's  right  arm  all  through  the  Southern 
campaign. 

"Advance  and  sweep  the  field  with  your  bayonets  !"  is  Greene's  order; 
and  the  Virginians  and  Marylanders,  under  Campbell,  with  loaded  mus 
kets  and  fixed  bayonets,  advance.  On,  on,  slowly  and  steadily,  they  move, 
till  they  are  not  more  than  one  hundred  feet  from  the  British.  So  near, 
and  no  faltering  on  either  side !  It  takes  courage  for  men  to  stand  still 
and  look  into  the  muzzles  of  a  line  of  muskets  so  near,  knowing  that  the 


;37U  THE  BOYS  OF  76. 

next  moment  a  murderous  storm  will  burst  forth  —  a  lightning  flash,  a 
cloud  of  blinding  smoke  and  roar  of  thunder,  and  that  there  is  certain 
death  for  scores  of  men  behind  it  all.  Face  to  face  stand  the  Continent 
als  and  the  veterans  of  England.  There  are  two  flashes  of  lightning,  two 
thunder-peals,  and  the  ground  is  strewed  with  the  dying  and  the  dead. 

The  Continentals  do  not  stop  to  reload ;  they  do  not  flee,  not  even 
falter;  but,  with  a  wild  hurra,  burst  through  the  cloud  and  rush  upon  the 
British,  who  flee  in  confusion  through  the  woods  and  across  the  field. 

There  is  a  panic  in  Stuart's  camp.  Men  are  fleeing  in  haste  down  the 
Charleston  road,  horsemen  crying,  "  We  are  defeated  !"  Some  of  them 
ride  forty  miles  to  Charleston.  The  Americans  secure  two  cannon.  The 
field  is  won — so  the  soldiers  think.  They  are  in  possession  of  Stuart's 
camp.  Tents,  provisions,  all  are  theirs.  Provisions !  Rum !  What  sol 
dier  can  refrain  from  halting  and  taking  a  dram,  a  big  drink,  after  such  a 
triumph  ?  They  rend  the  air  with  their  shouts.  They  drink,  and  shake 
hands  over  the  victory.  Lee  is  following  the  British,  but  suddenly  comes 
to  a  halt,  for  the  brick  house  is  a  fortress.  The  British  are  inside,  as  in 
the  Chew  house,  at  Germantown,  and  pour  a  murderous  fire  from  the 
windows.  The  British  outside  have  not  all  fled.  In  the  thicket  below 
the  house,  and  around  the  spring,  is  their  right  wing,  protected  by  the 
thicket,  the  garden  fence,  and  the  defenses  which  Stuart  lias  thrown  up. 
The  battle  is  not  over,  nor  is  the  victory  won.  How  shall  the  British  be 
dislodged  ?  Colonel  Washington  sees  a  place  down  by  the  creek  where  his 
cavalry  can  dash  through  in  sections,  and  get  in  their  rear.  The  attempt 
is  made,  but  the  troops  go  down  one  by  one.  Washington's  horse  is  shot 
under  him,  and  before  he  can  disentangle  himself  he  is  captured.  Hamp 
ton  and  Henderson  and  Kirkwood  advance,  and  the  British,  under  Majori- 
banks,  are  compelled  to  fall  back  to  the  garden.  The  fence  has  been  made 
so  strong  that  the  garden  and  the  house  make  together  a  formidable  for 
tress.  Stuart  and  Coffin  are  behind  the  house  rallying  the  fugitives.  What! 
British  veterans  flee  before  a  motley  crew  of  countrymen  !  For  shame ! 

Rum,  rum — things  good  to  eat,  plunder — what  wonder  that  the  coun 
trymen  never  before  in  battle,  never  before  under  discipline,  should  stop 
to  eat  and  drink,  and  secure  the  baggage?  But  while  they  are  doing  it, 
the  British,  chagrined  and  burning  to  recover  their  lost  encampment,  a;  3 
rallying.  Gaines  has  been  trying  his  six-pounders  upon  the  house,  but  the 
walls  are  thick,  and  the  balls  do  not  pierce  them.  One  by  one  his  gunners 
fall,  and  now  Majoribanks  makes  a  rush,  drives  the  Americans,  and  seizes 
the  two  British  guns  again,  and  brings  them  back  to  the  house.  Stuart  has 
reformed  his  men.  He  is  in  possession  of  the  house  and  the  garden,  and 


BUT  AW.  371 

General  Greene  can  not  dislodge  him.  The  British  have  a  small  cannon 
in  the  house,  and  fire  it  from  a  window,  sweeping  down  the  Americans. 
The  success,  the  rum,  the  plunder,  the  heat,  all  have  told  on  them.  The 
battalions  are  disorganized ;  brave  officers  have  been  lost.  Greene  sees  that 
it  will  not  be  possible  to  get  possession  of  the  house,  and  that  it  is  useless 
to  attempt  it.  He  has  struck  a  telling  blow,  and  is  confident  that  Stuart 
will  soon  retreat  to  Charleston.  It  is  nearly  one  o'clock :  the  men  have 
marched  seven  miles,  fought  four  hours,  and  they  are  not  demoralized ;  on 
the  contrary,  feel  that  they  have  won  a  victory.  He  places  Hampton  in 
position  to  guard  the  rear,  and  draws  off  the  troops,  taking  one  British 
cannon,  though  leaving  his  own  in  their  hands ;  but  two  of  them  are  disa 
bled  and  of  no  account.  Campbell  is  dead.  Washington,  Howard,  and 
Henderson  are  wounded.  One  hundred  and  thirty  privates  have  been 
killed,  and  the  loss,  all  told,  is  five  hundred  and  thirty-five,  or  nearly  one- 
fourth  of  the  army.  The  British  have  lost,  in  killed  and  wounded,  six 
hundred  and  ninety-three.  Back  to  the  camp  of  the  night  before  Greene 
marches,  taking  with  him  over  five  hundred  prisoners. 

The  morning  of  the  9th  dawns,  and  Stuart  is  marching  toward  Charles 
ton.  He  has  lost  half  of  his  army.  He  has  destroyed  every  thing  that  he 
can  not  take  away.  Lee  and  Marion  are  hanging  on  his  rear,  picking  up 
stragglers.  So  the  defeat,  as  at  Guilford,  becomes  a  victory,  and  people 
all  over  the  country  and  across  the  water  in  England  said,  that  of  all  the 
American  commanders,  next  to  Washington,  stood  Nathaniel  Greene,  d 
Rhode  island 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


CHAPTEK  XXXII. 

FORT  GRISWOLD. 

NEW  LONDON  was  an  important  town  on  the  west  bank  of  the 
Thames,  in  Connecticut.  Privateers  were  fitted  out  there  which 
captured  many  British  ships.  The  shiprnen  and  sailors  of  New  London 
were  brave  and  daring.  One  day  in  May,  1779,  a  British  fleet  of  twenty- 
one  vessels,  under  convoy  of  a  frigate,  and  the  Lad y  Erskine,  of  ten  guns, 
was  passing  along  the  Sound,  when  three  sloops  sailed  out  of  the  harbor 
and  captured  the  Lady  Erskine.  So  energetic  were  the  New  London 
sailors,  that  nine  Tory  privateers  were  captured  between  the  1st  of  March 
and  the  13th  of  June,  1779.  British  ships  arriving  from  England  and 
sailing  np  the  Sound  to  New  York,  almost  at  the  end  of  the  voyage,  were 
suddenly  pounced  upon  and  captured  by  the  New  London  sailors.  In 
August,  1781,  the  ship  Hannah,  from  London,  with  the  richest  cargo 
brought  to  America  during  the  war,  was  captured  by  the  Minerva  and 
taken  into  that  port. 

The  capture  exasperated  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  and  he  determined  to 
make  New  London  pay  for  it.  Perhaps  he  thought  also  that  a  movement 
of  a  force  into  Connecticut  would  trouble  Washington,  who  was  closing 
around  Cornwallis  at  Yorktown.  An  expedition  of  thirty-two  vessels — 
eight  of  them  war-ships — was  fitted  out.  Two  thousand  men  were  sent 
from  New  York,  and  General  Arnold  was  made  commander.  He  was 
born  close  by  New  London.  His  home  was  on  the  bank  of  the  Thames, 
between  New  London  and  Norwich,  and  he  was  just  the  man,  Sir  Henry 
thought,  to  be  let  loose  upon  his  old  neighbors. 

The  people  of  New  London  looked  out  upon  the  calm  waters  of  the 
Sound  on  the  evening  of  the  5th  of  September,  and  saw  a  great  fleet  of 
vessels  sailing  close  under  the  Long  Island  shore ;  but  many  a  fleet  had 
sailed  the  Sound  during  the  war,  passing  by  New  London ;  and  so,  think 
ing  that  no  harm  was  nigh,  they  went  to  bed  as  on  other  nights. 

The  vessels  were  steering  eastward.  Little  did  the  sleepers  in  New 
London  dream  that,  when  darkness  came  on,  all  the  vessels  turned  theiv 


FORT   GRJSWOLD.  373 

prows  northward,  shook  out  all  their  sails  to  the  gentle  breeze  blowing 
from  the  south  -  west,  and  sailed  for  the  harbor  of  New  London.  Gen 
eral  Arnold  intended  to  land  before  daylight.  Gradually  the  fleet  ap 
proached  the  harbor.  It  was  one  o'clock.  Another  half -hour,  and  he 
would  drop  anchor  before  the  town ;  but  suddenly  the  wind  shifted  north, 
blowing  directly  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  river;  and  instead  of  going 
straight  into  the  harbor,  the  vessels  had  to  tack  this  way  and  that  way,  get 
ting  a  little  nearer  at  every  turn. 

Day  dawned.  The  people  of  New  London  were  astounded.  A  great 
fleet,  with  eight  war-ships,  was  just  ready  to  enter  the  harbor.  The  meet 
ing-house  bell  was  rung.  Boom !  boom  !  went  two  guns  from  Fort  Gris- 
wold.  That  was  the  signal  which  had  been  agreed  upon  as  an  alarm. 
Three  guns  were  to  be  a  signal  of  rejoicing  over  the  news  of  a  great  vic 
tory.  As  soon  as  the  echoes  had  died  away,  boom !  boom !  boom !  came 
from  the  fleet.  A  Tory  had  toM  Arnold  what  the  signals  were.  The 
people  out  in  the  country  had  heard  the  two  cannon-shots,  and  were  ready 
to  seize  their  guns ;  but  what  was  the  meaning  of  the  three  ? 

The  people  leaped  from  their  beds  in  terror.  Out  on  the  Sound  were 
the  ships  of  the  enemy.  In  a  short  time  British,  Hessians,  and  Tories 
would  be  landing.  Men  harnessed  their  horses ;  there  was  a  quick  pack- 
ing-up  of  things  most  valuable.  Men,  women,  and  children,  half-dressed, 
were  running  through  the  streets,  crying  and  wringing  their  hands.  Wom 
en,  laden  with  bags  and  pillow-cases,  with  infants  in  their  arms,  hastened 
out  of  the  town.  They  had  no  time  to  stop  to  get  breakfast.  Hungry, 
barefoot,  bare-headed,  with  disheveled  hair,  they  hastened  into  the  fields 
and  pastures,  or  on  to  the  country-houses,  where  the  kind-hearted  neigh 
bors  gave  them  breakfast  and  shelter. 

There  was  a  fort  on  each  side  of  the  river :  Fort  Trumbull,  on  the  west 
or  New  London  side ;  and  Fort  Griswold,  on  the  Groton  side.  Captain 
Shapley  commanded  at  Fort  Trumbull,  which  was  simply  a  battery  facing 
the  water  on  three  sides,  open  behind,  and  only  designed  to  be  used  against 
ships  in  the  harbor.  Captain  Shapley  had  but  twenty-three  men.  There 
were  eight  cannon  in  the  battery,  but  two  of  them  were  dismounted.  Fort 
Griswold  was  a  stronger  work.  It  had  stone  walls  ten  feet  high.  There 
was  a  ditch  outside,  and  on  the  walls  were  pickets  projecting  twelve  feet ; 
and  there  were  one  hundred  and  fifty  men,  most  of  them  farmers  and  cit 
izens  of  Groton,  who  seized  their  guns  and  hastened  to  defend  the  fort, 
when  they  heard  the  booming  of  the  cannon. 

Colonel  Ledyard  was  in  command  of  New  London  and  Groton.  He 
sent  messengers  out  into  the  country  to  carry  the  alarm,  and  men  rode  on 


374  THE   BOYS   OF.  76. 

foaming  horses,  as  Paul  Revere  rode  on  the  19th  of  April,  1775.  Colonel 
Ledyard  hoped  that  the  people  from  the  country  would  arrive  in  season  to 
help  him  defend  the  forts,  and  lie  resolved,  come  what  would,  to  hold  Fort 
Griswold. 

"  If  I  must  lose  to-day  my  honor  or  life,  yon  who  know  me  can  tell 
which  it  will  be,"  he  said,  as  he  stepped  into  the  ferry-boat  and  crossed  the 
river  to  defend  the  fort. 

Although  Arnold  had  hoped  to  land  before  day- break,  it  was  nearly 
ten  o'clock  before  the  ships  could  get  into  the  bay.  They  dropped  anchor, 
the  boats  were  lowered,  and  about  one  thousand  men  entered  them :  the 
Thirty-eighth  British  regiment ;  a  regiment  of  Tories,  under  Colonel  Bev 
erly  Robinson  (the  man  who  owned  the  house  near  West  Point) ;  a  regi 
ment  of  New  Jersey  Tories,  under  Lieutenant-colonel  TJphara ;  and  sixty 
Hessian  Yagers.  The  boats  pulled  toward  a  little  cove,  where  there  was 
a  sandy  beach.  The  men  leaped  into  the  water,  waded  to  the  shore,  and 
formed  quickly,  as  if  about  to  face  a  great  army.  The  first  movement 
was  toward  Fort  Trumbull.  The  twenty-three  men,  under  Captain  Shap 
ley,  saw  them  advancing,  and  loaded  the  six  cannon  with  grape-shot. 

"Be  ready  to  spike  the  guns,"  said  Captain  Shapley  A  cannoneer 
stood  by  each  piece,  waving  the  port-fire. 

"'Let  them  have  it!"  shouted  the  captain.  The  guiio  blazed.  A  half- 
dozen  men  dropped  in  the  Britisn  raiii\s. 

"Drive  in  the  spikes,"  said  Captain  Shapley.  The  spikes  were  driven 
into  the  vent-holes,  and  the  twenty -three  ran  to  their  boats,  leaped  into 
them,  and  started  for  Fort  Griswold  ;  but  they  were  so  near  the  British 
fleet,  that  the  boats  were  fired  upon,  and  seven  of  the  men  wounded  and 
captured. 

Arnold  hastened  on  to  the  town.  On  the  common  by  the  meeting 
house  was  an  old  iron  cannon.  Some  of  the  citizens  loaded  it,  and  fired 
at  the  approaching  British,  and  then  fled.  Other  citizens  fired  from  be 
hind  fences ;  but  the  few  could  not  do  much  against  a  thousand  men. 

Over  on  the  Groton  side,  at  Fort  Griswold,  a  brave  fight  is  going  on. 
Lieutenant -colonel  Eyre  has  landed,  with  two  British  regiments  —  a  bat 
talion  of  New  Jersey  Tories  and  some  Hessians,  with  two  .cannon.  Col 
onel  Eyre  is  able  to  get  within  four  hundred  feet  of  the  fort  without  being 
exposed,  by  leading  his  men  along  under  the  shelter  of  a  ledge  south-east 
of  the  fort. 

It  is  noon.     He  sends  a  white  flag  toward  the  fort. 

"I  demand  an  instant  and  unconditional  surrender,"  is  his  summonc 

Colonel  Ledyard  summons  the  officers — Captain  A  very,  Captain  Stan- 


FORT   GRISWOLD.  375 

ton,  and  Captain  John  Williams.  They  are  farmers,  and  live  near  by,  and 
have  rushed  into  the  fort  to  defend  it. 

"  Defend  the  fort !"  they  say ;  and  the  officer  goes  back  to  Lieutenant- 
colonel  Eyre,  who  sends  a  second  summons :  "  If  obliged  to  storm  the 
works,  martial  law  shall  be  put  in  force,"  is  the  message.  That  means 
that  no  quarter  will  be  given. 

Captain  Shapley  has  reached  the  fort,  and  Colonel  Ledyard  sends  him 
out  with  the  reply  of  the  brave  men :  "  We  shall  not  surrender,  let  the  con 
sequences  be  what  they  may." 

Colonel  Eyre  prepares  to  advance.  He  will  make  a  rush,  leap  the 
ditch,  climb  the  walls,  and  get  inside  before  the  garrison  can  reload  after 
firing  once. 

Captain  Halsey  stands  by  an  eighteen -pounder.  He  is  an  old  sailor, 
and  has  been  in  many  a  fight.  He  rams  home  two  bags  filled  with  grape- 
shot. 

The  British  move  on  toward  the  fort.  Captain  Halsey  runs  his  eye 
along  the  cannon.  They  are  in  range. 

"Fire!"  he  shouts.  The  cannoneer  touches  it  off.  The  air  is  filled 
with  the  whirring  shot,  and  twenty  men  go  down.  A  wide  gap  has  been 
made  in  the  British  ranks,  and  the  entire  line  is  thrown  into  confusion. 

"On!  on!"  shout  the  officers,  striking  the  reluctant  soldiers  with  their 
swords. 

From  every  embrasure  a  stream  of  fire  bursts  forth,  and  the  ground  is 
quickly  strewed  with  the  killed  and  wounded.  Colonel  Eyre  falls  mortally 
wounded,  and  three  other  officers  of  the  Fifty  -  fourth  regiment  are  disa 
bled.  The  Fortieth  regiment,  under  Major  Montgomery,  swings  round 
toward  the  east  and  north.  His  men  rush  to  the  ditch.  Now  they  are  so 
near  that  the  cannon  can  not  harm  them.  Joseph  Woodmancy  stands  be 
hind  the  parapet,  and  loads  and  fires  his  musket  right  down  into  their 
faces.  Samuel  Edgecomb  thinks  there  is  a  better  way  than  that,  and  he 
picks  up  cannon-balls  (nine  -  pounders)  and  hurls  them  down  upon  the 
heads  of  the  British,  smashing  their  skulls. 

The  British,  to  get  into  the  fort,  must  tear  away  the  pickets  which  run 
out  from  the  walls  over  the  ditch.  A  soldier  climbs  upon  the  back  of  a 
comrade,  reaches  up  and  seizes  one  of  the  pickets ;  but  before  he  can 
wrench  it  away,  Edgecomb  dashes  out  his  brains. 

But  other  soldiers  are  climbing  up.  Their  heads  appear  above  the 
pickets.  Oh  for  more  men  !  If  there  were  three  hundred,  instead  of 
only  one  hundred  and  tifty5  in  the  fort,  those  heads  would  drop  in  a 
twinkling 


376  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

Major  Montgomery  is  a  brave  officer.  He  climbs  up  through  the  pick 
ets,  but  Jordan  Freeman,  a  negro,  is  as  brave  as  Major  Montgomery.  He 
has  no  gun,  only  a  long-handled  spear,  which  he  plunges  into  Montgom 
ery's  side,  and  the  Briton  falls,  mortally  wounded,  into  the  ditch  upon  the 
heads  of  his  men. 

The  British  are  swarming  through  the  embrasures.  It  is  the  many 
against  the  few  —  seven  to  one.  A  British  soldier  leaps  from  the  parapet 
inside,  and  rushes  to  unbar  the  gate,  but  a  shot  brings  him  down.  Anoth 
er  succeeds.  He  unbars  the  gate,  and  the  British  rush  in. 

"  Stop  firing !"  shouts  Colonel  Ledyard.  He  sees  that  the  fort  is  lost, 
and  his  men  cease  the  contest,  all  except  Captain  Shapley  and  the  few  men 
with  him  over  in  the  south-west  bastion,  who  do  not  know  what  has  taken 
place. 

The  British  wheel  a  nine-pounder,  and  pour  a  volley  of  grape  into  the 
men.  Captain  Shapley  and  Lieutenant  Chapman  are  killed,  and  the  men 
throw  down  their  arms  and  stand  before  their  captors.  Now  that  Colonel 
Eyre  and  Major  Montgomery  have  fallen,  Major  Bromfield  commands  the 
British. 

"  Who  commands  here  ?"  he  shouts. 

"  I  did,  but  you  do  now,"  is  Ledyard's  reply,  handing  out  his  sword. 

Major  Bromfield  takes  it,  draws  back  his  arm,  and  plunges  the  weap 
on  to  the  hilt  through  the  body  of  the  brave  man.  He  withdraws  the 
bloody  blade,  and  the  commander  falls  dead  to  the  earth. 

Captain  Peter  Richards,  and  Captain  Ledyard,  a  nephew  of  the  col 
onel,  see  that  no  quarter  is  to  be  given,  and  resolve  to  sell  their  lives  as 
dearly  as  possible ;  but  in  a  moment  they  are  cut  down,  and  hacked  to 
pieces. 

The  British  platoons  enter  the  fort,  and  fire  into  the  unresisting  Amer 
icans.  '  Some  of  the  Americans  rush  to  the  magazine,  but  the  British  fire 
into  it,  and  the  fugitives  fall  in  heaps.  Major  Bromfield  is  afraid  that 
the  magazine  will  explode,  and  stops  the  firing ;  but  the  living  are  pulled 
out  and  bayoneted.  Some  rush  into  the  barracks,  but  the  British  stand  by 
the  door  and  windows  and  shoot  them  as  if  they  were  sheep  in  a  pen. 

Mr.  Mallison  is  a  strong  man.  He  rushes  to  the  parapet,  leaps  over 
the  pickets,  lands  in  the  ditch  outside  the  fort,  and,  though  a  dozen  mus 
kets  blaze  at  him,  escapes  to  the  woods. 

William  Seymour  is  lying  upon  the  ground,  with  his  knee  shattered  by 
a  ball,  and  the  British  soldiers  give  vent  to  their  fiendish  passions  by  stab 
bing  him  thirteen  times.  Lieutenant  Avery  has  had  an  eye  shot  out,  his 
skull  broken,  and  his  brains  are  spattered  upon  the  ground.  A  soldier 


FORT  GRISWOLD.  377 

stabs  him  in  the  side ;  and  yet  he  breathes,  recovers,  and  lives  forty  years 
to  narrate  the  horrors  of  the  day. 

For  the  credit  of  humanity,  let  it  be  said  that  one  British  officer  is  ten 
der-hearted.  "  Stop  !  stop !  In  the  name  of  God,  stop  !  My  soul  can't 
bear  it !"  he  shouts,  and  rushes  upon  the  soldiers  with  his  sword  to  stop  the 
butchery. 

It  stops  because  there  are  no  more  to  be  butchered.  There  were  one 
hundred  and  fifty  at  the  outset.  Captain  Shapley  came  with  about  twelve 
men,  making  one  hundred  and  sixty  in  all ;  but  General  Arnold,  in  his 
report,  says  that  eighty-five  were  killed,  and  sixty  wounded,  most  of  them 
mortally — one  hundred  and  forty-five  butchered  ! 

Sir  Henry  Clinton  sends  home  this  indorsement  of  the  massacre : 

"  The  assault  of  Fort  Griswold  will  impress  the  enemy  with  every  ap 
prehension  of  the  ardor  of  British  troops,  and  will  hereafter  be  remember 
ed  with  the  greatest  honor  to  the  Fortieth  and  Fifty-fourth  regiments  and 
their  leaders." 

Major  Bromfield  was  promoted  for  his  conduct.  So  the  massacre  was 
indorsed  by  the  general,  by  the  ministers,  and  the  king. 

The  British  soldiers  stripped  the  dead,  plundered  the  living,  picked  up 
the  wounded,  tossed  them,  bleeding  and  fainting,  into  a  cart,  and  ran  the 
cart  down  a  hill  over  the  stones.  It  came  against  a  tree  with  a  terrible 
jar.  Some  died ;  others  fainted.  They  took  them  from  the  cart  to  a 
house,  and  left  them  there;  dug  a  ditch,  threw  their  own  dead  (about 
forty)  into  it ;  and  left  a  party  to  lay  a  train  to  the  magazine ;  set  a  house 
on  fire,  and  marched  to  their  boats,  for  from  every  road  men  were  hasten 
ing  with  their  guns. 

While  the  massacre  was  going  on,  Arnold  was  in  New  London.  One 
party  under  Colonel  Upham,  with  the  New  Jersey  Tories,  marched  up 
Cape  Ann  Lane  to  Mr.  Latimer's  house.  It  was  so  far  out  of  the  village 
that  a  great  many  of  the  people  had  moved  their  goods  into  it.  A  house 
so  far  out  of  the  town  certainly  would  be  spared,  they  thought ;  but  it  was 
soon  in  a  blaze,  and  all  the  goods  were  consumed. 

Arnold,  with  Lord  Dalrymple,  who  acted  as  aid  to  him,  rode  up  to  a 
hill  overlooking  the  town,  where  he  could  see  every  thing  that  was  going 
on.  In  the  river  he  sees  the  ships  trying  to  escape  up  stream  to  Norwich, 
and  people  are  running  from  the  town.  And  now  the  flames  of  burning 
buildings  ascend  to  heaven.  The  soldiers  are  going  in  all  directions  with 
fire-brands,  setting  fire  to  houses,  stores,  ships,  and  boats. 

An  English  officer  comes  to  Captain  Richards's  house,  where  the  cap 
tain's  daughter  is  lying,  too  ill  to  be  moved.  He  is  humane  enough  to  bid 


378  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

the  soldiers  spare  it ;  but  all  the  other  houses  and  stores  in  the  vicinity  are 
set  on  fire.  Arnold,  sitting  on  his  horse,  issues  his  orders.  "  Soldiers,  do 
your  duty  !"  he  shouts. 

A  Tory  leads  the  British,  and  pilots  them  to  the  homes  of  the  Whigs. 
Houses,  stores,  piles  of  lumber,  ships,  boats,  wharves,  and  goods  are  given 
to  the  flames.  The  soldiers  stave  in  the  heads  of  hogsheads  filled  with 
molasses,  and  a  river  of  molasses  runs  down  one  of  the  streets.  They  rip 
open  bags  of  coffee,  destroy  hogsheads  of  rum,  and  drink  themselves  drank 
The  market-house,  the  Episcopal  church,  the  jail,  all  are  set  on  fire.  The 
harbor  is  a  sea  of  fire.  All  the  fishing-boats  and  ships  are  in  flames.  The 
fire  burns  the  hempen  cables,  and  the  ships  are  blown  by  the  wind  hither 
and  thither,  burning  to  the  water's  edge,  and  then  the  blackened  hulls  dis 
appear  beneath  the  waves.  While  the  flames  are  wildest,  Arnold  is  eating 
dinner  in  the  house  of  an  old  acquaintance,  helping  himself  to  the  best  the 
house  affords.  While  eating,  the  house  takes  fire,  and  he  is  forced  to  leave. 
So  almost  to  the  spot  where  he  was  born  the  traitor  brings  the  torch  and 
the  sword  to  the  homes  of  those  who  have  honored  and  trusted  him. 

The  sun  descends  the  western  sky.  Evening  comes.  But  what  a 
scene !  Blackened  ruins  in  New  London ;  many  mangled  corpses  in  Fort 
Griswold;  and  out  upon  the  hills  hundreds  of  homeless  men,  women,  and 
children,  stripped  of  every  thing — their  husbands,  brothers,  fathers  slain  ! 

Down  to  the  beach  march  the  British,  who  leap  into  their  boats  and 
row  out  to  the  ships.  They  have  left  a  train  of  powder  in  Fort  Griswold, 
and  soon  they  expect  to  see  a  grand  explosion  of  the  magazine — a  lighting- 
up  for  a  moment  of  the  heavens,  and  then  a  shower  of  burning  timbers, 
followed  by  total  darkness.  That  shall  be  the  close  of  this  day's  work. 
But  Major  Peters,  of  Norwich,  has  reached  the  fort.  The  barracks  are  on 
fire.  He  sees  the  train  laid  to  the  magazine.  There  is  a  pump,  but  the 
British  have  knocked  out  its  spout.  He  can  only  find  an  old  cartridge- 
box,  but  he  uses  it  for  a  bucket,  gets  at  the  water,  moistens  the  train  of 
powder,  and  prevents  the  explosion.  Other  men  come  to  his  aid,  and  they 
put  out  the  fire. 

The  British  ships  are  sailing  down  the  bay,  and  the  women  and  chil 
dren  are  coming  to  see  how  it  fares  with  their  husbands  and  fathers.  There 
they  lie  —  eighty -five  of  them  —  cold  in  death,  massacred  and  mangled. 
Calm  and  serene  the  features  of  the  brave  commander.  There  lies  Daniel 
Williams,  only  fifteen  years  old.  He  fought  for  freedom,  and  was  massa 
cred  in  cold  blood.  Near  by  him  lies  Thomas  A  very.  His  father  was  a 
lieutenant,  They  fought  side  by  side.  "Tom,  my  boy,  do  your  duty!" 
said  the  father,  when  the  fight  was  hottest 


FORT   GRLSWOLD.  379 

"  Never  fear,  father,"  Tom  replies :  but  the  next  moment  is  cut  down. 
He  is  only  seventeen. 

"  It  is  in  a  good  cause,  my  boy,"  says  the  father ;  and  a  moment  later 
he  lies  by  the  side  of  the  son,  pierced  through  and  through  by  British 
bayonets. 

With  torches  in  their  hands,  women  move  amidst  the  slain  in  search  of 
their  husbands.  One  wife  wipes  the  gore  from  the  faces  of  thirty  of  the 
dead  before  she  finds  the  one  dearer  than  all  others  on  earth.  Never  more 
will  the  glazed  eyes  beam  upon  her,  never  more  the  loving  arms  clasp  her 
to  his  heart.  A  wail  of  anguish  rends  the  air. 

The  people  are  coming  now  from  all  parts  of  the  country.  Far  away 
the  farmers  have  seen  the  pillar  of  cloud  ascending  to  heaven,  and  are 
rushing  with  their  guns.  And  women  are  as  brave-hearted  as  their  hus 
bands.  "  John,  don't  get  shot  in  the  back !"  shouts  a  wife  to  her  husband, 
as  he  starts  with  his  rifle. 

They  are  too  late.  The  massacre  is  finished,  the  burning  accomplished, 
and  the  enemy  sailing  back  to  New  York.  They  can  only  gaze  with  swell 
ing  hearts  upon  the  scene  of  blood  and  woe,  lend  helping  hands  to  those 
so  sorely  stricken,  or,  lifting  them  to  heaven,  swear  anew  their  allegiance  to 
the  cause  they  have  espoused.  Never,  never  will  they  lay  down  their  arms 
till  America  is  free  and  independent,  and  the  last  British  soldier  driven 
from  the  land. 


380 


THE   BOYS  OF  76. 


CHAPTEE  XXXIII. 

YORKTOWN. 

THIS  is  the  way  the  men  stood  upon  the  checker-board:  Sir  Henry 
Clinton  was  in  New  York ;  there  was  a  body  of  troops  on  Long 
Island,  and  a  fleet  in  the  harbor ;  Lord  Cornwallis  was  in  Virginia,  and 
there  was  a  small  fleet  in  Norfolk  harbor;  British  troops  were  in  pos 
session  of  Charleston  and  Savannah.  The  South  was  pretty  much  con 
quered,  and  Sir  Henry  hoped  that  in  a  very  short  time  Cornwallis  would 
bring  Virginia  to  terms. 

On  the  other  side,  the  American  army  was  at  North  Castle,  at  White 
Plains,  and  Dobbs's  Ferry,  and  the  French  army  also.  General  Washing 
ton  and  Count  Rochambeau  had  their  head 
quarters  at  the  house  of  Mr.  Livingston,  near 
Dobbs's  Ferry,  a  large  mansion  with  an  ell,  a 
piazza,  and  delightful  grounds  around  it. 
General  Lafayette  was  down  in  Virginia,  at 
Williamsburg,  with  a  handful  of  men,  watch 
ing  Cornwallis.  In  the  West  Indies  was  a 
French  fleet,  under  Count  de  Grasse.  Gen 
eral  Washington  expected  that  about  the  mid 
dle  of  August,  Count  de  Grasse  would  sud 
denly  make  his  appearance  off  Sandy  Hook, 
and  that,  with  his  aid,  he  could  besiege  Sir 
Henry,  capture  the  troops  on  Long  Island, 
and  eventually  take  New  York.  General  Clinton  had  his  spies  in  Wash 
ington's  army,  and  they  reported  to  him  that  such  was  the  plan. 

Sir  Henry  became  alarmed.  He  dispatched  a  vessel  to  Virginia,  and 
ordered  Cornwallis  to  send  him  three  thousand  men.  Cornwallis  could 
spare  them,  and  then  be  able  to  drive  Lafayette  out  of  the  State.  A 
day  or  two  after  the  vessel  set  sail,  Sir  Henry's  heart  was  gladdened  by 
the  arrival  of  a  fleet  from  England  with  three  thousand  Hessians.  On 
August  13th,  General  Washington  and  Count  Rochambeau,  Robert  Morris 


ROCHAMBEAU. 


YORKTOWN.  381 

(the  man  who  could  obtain  money  when  every  body  else  failed),  and  Mr. 
Richard  Peters,  Secretary  of  the  Board  of  War,  were  talking  over  the 
plans  of  the  campaign  at  the  Livingston  house,  when  letters  were  brought 
in  for  Washington  and  Rochambeau.  A  vessel  had  arrived  at  Newport, 
bringing  a  mail  from  Count  de  Grasse,  who  said  that  he  had  decided  not 
to  sail  to  New  York.  This  upset  all  their  plans.  Washington  was  disap 
pointed.  The  French  fleet,  under  D'Estaing,  had  failed  Sullivan  at  Rhode 
Island,  and  now  De  Grasse  was  overturning  all  his  plans. 

Another  messenger  came  from  the  South  with  letters  from  Lafayette, 
with  the  information  that  Cornwallis  was  embarking  a  portion  of  his  army 
at  Portsmouth  for  New  York. 

Another  messenger  arrives  from  the  East,  bringing  a  letter  from  Count 
de  Barras,  in  command  of  a  French  fleet  at  Newport,  who  has  received 
another  letter  from  Count  de  Grasse,  who  has  concluded  not  to  stay  at  the 
West  Indies,  but  will  sail,  on  the  13th  of  August,  for  the  Chesapeake,  with 
twenty-eight  ships  of  the  line,  and  thirty-two  hundred  troops,  under  Gen 
eral  St.  Simon,  and  will  be  ready  to  co-operate  with  the  Americans  in 
any  movement.  Joyful  news  this !  But  it  is  a  long  distance  for  men  to 
travel  on  foot  from  the  Hudson  to  Norfolk.  There  are  great  rivers  to 
cross  —  the  Hudson,  the  Delaware,  the  Susquehanna,  the  Potomac,  and 
many  other  streams — a  long,  weary,  tedious  march  over  poor  roads.  It  is 
three  hundred  miles.  It  will  take  a  month.  A  vessel  from  New  York, 
with  a  fair  wind,  will  make  the  run  from  Sandy  Hook  to  the  Chesapeake 
in  forty-eight  hours ;  and  Sir  Henry  Clinton  can  move  his  whole  army  to 
Virginia  before  Washington  can  cross  the  Susquehanna. 

General  Washington  reads  the  letter,  and  turns  to  Judge  Peters.  "  Sir, 
what  can  you  do  for  me  ?" 

Judge  Peters  is  the  man  selected  by  the  Board  of  War  to  consult  with 
Washington. 

"  With  money,  every  thing ;  without  it,  nothing,"  Peters  replies. 

"  What  sum  do  you  want  ?"  asks  Mr.  Morris,  who  is  already  thinking 
where  he  can  obtain  the  money. 

Twenty  thousand  dollars  hard  cash  will  do  something.  Count  Rocham 
beau  can  spare  so  much  from  his  military  chest  till  the  1st  of  October,  and 
Robert  Morris  will  be  sure  to  pay  it  then.  The  matter  is  quickly  arranged. 

There  is  activity  in  the  American  army.  Orders  are  issued  to  clear 
the  road  to  Kingsbridge.  The  army  is  going  to  attack  New  York.  A 
company  of  men  go  down  toward  New  York  to  clear  away  the  trees,  so 
that  the  army  can  march ;  and  Sir  Henry  expects  an  attack  from  the 
north.  A  body  of  men  go  down  on  the  Jersey  side  and  mark  out  a 


382 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


place  for  an  encampment,  and  erect  ovens  for  baking  bread.  General 
Washington  has  a  large  number  of  boats  or  vessels.  Is  he  going  to  launch 
them  below  Paulus  Hook,  and  make  a  movement  for  Staten  Island,  and 
erect  batteries  which  will  drive  the  fleet  out  of  the  Narrows  ? 

General  Clinton  is  keeping  a  sharp  lookout  for  such  a  movement.  Now 
that  three  thousand  Hessians  have  arrived,  he  does  not  need  any  troops 
from  Cornwallis,  and  has  sent  a  vessel  countermanding  his  order,  but  re 
questing  Cornwallis  to  continue  to  harass  the  rebels  in  Virginia. 

A  rebel  is  brought  into  Sir  Henry's  camp.  He  is  a  young  Baptist  min 
ister,  Rev.  Mr.  Montaigne,  who  was  arrested  by  the  Cowboys  at  Ramapo, 
on  the  west  side  of  the  Hudson.  He  was  carrying  dispatches  from  Wash 
ington  to  one  of  his  officers,  and  it  is  very  evident,  from  some  things  in 
the  dispatch,  that  Washington  has  a  scheme  for  the  capture  of  New  York. 

On  the  19th  of  August  the  American  army  was  under  arms;  but,  in 
stead  of  marching  down  to  Kingsbridge  and  crossing  Harlem  River,  the 
troops  turned  north,  marched  to  King's  Ferry,  crossed  the  Hudson,  and 
moved  down  the  west  bank.  It  was  evident  to  Cornwallis  that  General 

Washington  had  changed  his 
plan,  and  was  going  to  inarch 
down  to  Newark  or  Amboy, 
and  cross  to  Staten  Island. 

And  now,  for  a  few  days, 
Sir  Henry  can  not  find  out  ex 
actly  where  Washington  is,  or 
what  he  is  doing.  He  can  get 
no  information ;  every  avenue 
leading  to  the  city  is  guarded, 
and  his  spies  can  not  get  in. 

The  Americans  were  march 
ing  south,  making  eighteen  to 
twenty  miles  a  day.  On  the 
1st  of  September  they  crossed 
the  Delaware  at  Trenton.  The 
next  day  they  passed  through 
Philadelphia.  When  the  French 
troops  arrived,  dressed  in  their 
gorgeous  uniforms  of  white 
broadcloth  faced  with  green,  their  bands  of  music  playing,  the  inhabitants 
were  wild  with  excitement.  Congress  was  sitting  there,  and  the  troope 
passed  in  review  before  the  President,  Hon.  Thomas  M'Kean. 


THOMAS  M'KEAN. 


YORKTOWN. 

On  the  4th  the  troops  were  at  Wilmington  ;  on  the  5th,  at  the  head  of 
the  Elk,  on  the  Chesapeake.  General  Washington  has  had  men  employed 
in  collecting  all  the  vessels  in  the  bay  at  that  po'iit,  and  no  fewer  than 
eighty  are  in  waiting;  and  the  troops  embark. 

Let  ns  take  another  look  at  the  chess-board.  At  this  moment  Corn 
wall  is  was  Throwing  up  intrenchments  at  Yorktown.  He  would  leave  a 
small  force,  and  then  fall  upon 
Lafayette,  who  was  at  Wil- 
liamsbnrg,  the  capital  of  Vir 
ginia,  only  twelve  miles  dis 
tant,  with  his  quarters  in  Ra 
leigh  Tavern.  Williarasburg 
was  a  rebellions  town.  It  was 
the  head-quarters  of  the  rebell 
ion  in  Virginia,  and  had  been 

from    the   first.       It    Was   there,  RALKIGH  TAVERN. 

in  the  House  of  Burgesses,  that  the  young  lawyer  Patrick  Henry  astonish 
ed  the  Tories  and  electrified  the  patriots  by  his  speech  in  March,  1775, 
advocating  the  separation  of  the  colonies  from  England. 

"  There  is  no  retreat,"  he  said,  "  but  in  submission  and  slavery.  Our 
chains  are  forged ;  their  clankings  may  be  heard  on  the  plains  of  Boston. 
*  *  *  I  know  not  what  course  others  may  take ;  but,  as  for  me,  give  me 
liberty,  or  give  me  death !" 

Cornwallis  has  seven  thousand  men,  and  as  soon  as  his  intrenchments 
are  completed  he  will  finish  the  war  in  Virginia. 

Up  in  New  York  are  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  Admiral  Graves,  and  Admi 
ral  Hood'.  The  latter  has  just  arrived  from  the  West  Indies.  Admiral 
"Rodney,  in  command  of  the  British  fleet  there,  has  discovered  that  Count 
de  Grasse  has  sailed  for  the  American  coast,  probably  for  New  York,  and 
has  sent  Flood  with  fourteen  ships  to  co-operate  with  Admiral  Graves,  who 
has  four  ships  of  the  line,  and  together  they  will  be  a  match  for  Count  de 
Grasse. 

Admiral  Hood  is  surprised  not  to  find  De  Grasse  at  Sandy  Hook. 
Where  can  he  be?  At  New  York?  No;  for  word  comes  that  Admiral 
de  Barras  has  sailed  with  the  French  fleet  from  Newport  southward. 

Light  begins  to  dawn  upon  Sir  Henry.  Count  de  Grasse  and  Barras 
are  to  meet  in  the  Chesapeake.  Washington  and  Rochambeau,  instead  of 
attacking  New  York,  have  outgeneraled  him,  and  are  on  their  way  south 
to  attack  Cornwallis  !  It  is  as  clear  as  day  now. 

Whatever  is  to  be  done  must  be  quickly  done.     Perhaps,  if  a  move- 


384 


THE   BOYS   OF   '76. 


merit  were  made  into  Connecticut,  General  Washington  would  turn  about 
and  hasten  back.     General  Arnold  was  therefore  sent  on  an  expedition  to 


GIVE   ME   LIBERTY,  OR   GIVE   ME  DEATH ! " 

New  London,  as  we  have  seen.  But  General  Washington  had  laid  his 
plans,  and  no  movements  of  General  Arnold  to  pillage  and  burn  the  de 
fenseless  towns  would  call  him  back. 


YORKTOWN.  385 

Admiral  Graves  and  Admiral  Hood  spread  their  sails  for  the  Chesa 
peake.  On  the  5th  of  September,  at  sunrise,  the  Count  de  Grasse,  looking 
eastward  from  Lynn  Haven  Bay,  at  Cape  Henry,  saw  a  fleet  of  vessels.  It 
must  be  Count  de  Barras,  he  thought,  coming  from  Newport;  but  soon  he 
discovered  that  it  was  the  English  fleet  under  Graves.  He  was  ready  for 
a  flght,  but  wanted  more  sea-room,  and  sailed  out  upon  the  Atlantic.  It 
was  four  o'clock  when  the  flght  began. 
Only  a  part  of  the  two  fleets  got  into 
action.  The  battle  went  on  till  sunset. 
Graves  could  not  get  all  of  his  vessels 
into  action,  and  hauled  off  to  wait  till 
morning.  During  the  engagement,  the 
Terrible,  one  .  of  his  ships,  was  so  much 
damaged  that,  after  taking  out  the  men 
and  stores,  she  was  set  on  fire  and  burned. 
The  French  lost  two  hundred  and  twenty 
men,  killed  and  wounded;  the  English 
two  hundred  and  forty -six.  Morning 
came,  but  Graves  was  not  quite  ready  to  commence  the  battle.  Nor  was 
De  Grasse,  who  hoped  soon  to  see  the  topmasts  of  Count  de  Barras's  fleet 
dotting  the  horizon.  For  five  days  the  fleets  stood  on  and  off,  sometimes 
close  inland  and  then  out  upon  the  sea.  On  the  10th  of  September,  Count 
de  Grasse  sailed  back  to  the  Chesapeake,  and  a  glad  sight  met  his  eyes, 
for  there  was  De  Barras  with  his  fleet  and  troops  and  transports,  with 
heavy  siege-guns  and  military  stores.  Admiral  Graves  hastened  back ;  but 
there,  blocking  his  way,  were  the  combined  French  fleets  getting  ready  to 
sail  out  and  sink  him.  There  was  but  one  thing  to  be  done — and  that  to 
spread  his  sails  for  New  York.  On  the  llth  of  September,  while  the 
American  army  was  at  Annapolis,  Admiral  Graves  was  fleeing  from  the 
Chesapeake. 

Cornwallis  sees  a  net  drawing  around  him.  The  fleet  has  gone.  He 
can  not  flght  his  way  inland  past  Williamsburg,  for  Lafayette  blocks  his 
way  there,  If  he  were  to  attempt  it,  whither  could  he  go  ?  Nowhere,  and 
be  safe.  Washington  and  Rochambeau  and  Lafayette  would  soon  be 
upon  his  track,  or  cutting  him  off.  He  can  only  throw  up  strong  defenses 
and  stand  a  siege  till  Sir  Henry  Clinton  hastens  to  his  relief.  Sir  Henry 
should  have  hastened  with  half  his  army  when  Admiral  Graves  sailed. 
Then  was  his  golden  opportunity. 

Down  past  the  mouth  of  York  River,  where  the  French  ships  wer^ 
blockading  Cornwallis,  into  James  River,  and  up  the  James  to  Jamestown, 

13 


386 


THE   BOYS   OF  76. 


sailed  the  ships  from  Elkton,  landing  on  the  25th,  and  marching  to  Wil- 
liamstown.  On  the  28th,  the  combined  army  of  twelve  thousand  men 
inarched  from  Williamsburg  to  Yorktown. 


THE    LANDING    AT    JAMESTOWN. 


Yorktown  was  a  small  place  of  about  sixty  houses.  One  of  the  best 
was  owned  by  Governor  Nelson,  who  was  with  Washington,  in  command 
of  the  Virginia  militia. 

The  York  River  is  about  half  a  mile  wide,  and  lying  in  the  stream 
were  several  British  ships. 

Major  Elijah  Favor's  services  were  called  for  to  lay  out  the  lines.  lie 
rode  over  the  ground  and  reconnoitred  it.  He  saw  that  the  ground  was 
for  the  most  part  level,  that  the  soil  was  a  sandy  loam,  and  that  it  would 

be  an  easy  matter  to  dig  intrenchments. 
South  of  Yorktown,  a  little  more  than  a 
mile,  was  a  large  field,  and  immediately 
south  of  that  a  little  brook  had  its  rise, 
which  ran  southward.  The  brook  was 
the  dividing  line  between  the  French 
and  American  armies.  The  French  oc 
cupied  the  ground  from  the  brook  north 
west  to  York  River.  Washington  and 
Rochambeau  had  their  marquees  pitched 
on  the  west  side  of  the  stream.  Crossing 


GOVERNOR    NELSON'S    HOUSE. 


head  -quarters,  with  the  artillery  around  it.     By  the  roadside  was  Baron 
Steuben's  tent.      He  had   command  of  the  Pennsylvania,  Virginia,  and 


YORKTOWN. 


387 


Maryland  Continental  troops.  Next  were  the  New  York,  Ehode  Island, 
and  New  Jersey  troops,  under  General  James  Clinton,  also  the  sappers 
and  miners.  The  tents  of  the  troops  reached  to  the  road  leading  east 
from  Yorktown  to  Hampton. 


A,  British  outworks  taken  possession  of  by  the  Americans  on  their  arrival ;  B,  first  parallel;  C,  D,  American 
batteries ;  E,  a  bomb  battery  ;  G,  French  battery ;  H,  French  bomb  battery ;  I,  second  parallel ;  K,  re 
doubts  stormed  by  the  French ;  M,  M,  M,  French  batteries ;  N,  French  bomb  battery ;  O,  American 
batteries. 

Crossing  this  road  and  riding  north-east,  Major  Favor  came  to  Lafay 
ette's  tent.  Under  his  command  were  the  Virginia  militia,  and  in  ad 
vance  of  them  was  General  Lincoln,  with  the  light-infantry.  General 
Lincoln's  tent  was  close  by  Wormeley's  Creek,  almost  over  to  York  River. 
Riding  back,  he  took  a  view  of  the  French  lines.  Nearest  Rochambean's 
quarters  were  the  French  brigades,  commanded  by  Baron  Viomenil  and 


388 


THE   BOYS   OF.  76. 


Viscount  Viomenil.     Beyond  them  were  the  troops  from  the  West  Indies, 
under  General  St.  Simon. 

Out  in  the  river  lie  could  see  the  British  ships,  the  Guadaloupe  and 
Charon,  of  forty-four  guns  each,  and  several  transports.  Over  on  Glouces 
ter  Point  there  were  nearly  one  thousand  British,  under  General  Tarle- 
ton  and  Lieutenant-colonel  Dundas.  But  Count  de  Grasse  had  sent  the 
French  marines  on  shore,  and  the  Duke  de  Lauzun,  with  his  brigade,  and 

General  Weedon,  with  a  body  of  Virginia 
militia,  the  whole  under  General  de  Choise, 
were  sent  across  York  River  to  lay  siege  to 
Gloucester. 

Major  Favor  now  lost  one  of  his  best 
friends,  Colonel  Scammell,  the  adjutant- 
general  of  the  army.  He  was  from  New 
Hampshire,  and  had  been  in  the  battle  of 
Bunker  Hill,  under  Stark.  Scammell  had 
seen  service  all  through  the  war,  and  had 
been  wounded  at  Stillwater.  He  rode  out 
to  reconnoitre  Cornwallis's  lines  close  by  the 
York  River,  west  of  the  town.  He  did  not 
know  that  behind  a  knoll  covered  by  thick 
bushes  was  a  body  of  Hessian  cavalry. 
Suddenly  a  squad  of  Hessians  was  upon  him. 
He  saw  that  he  could  not  escape,  and  held 
up  his  hand ;  but  a  Hessian  wantonly  fired 
at  his  breast.  He  fell  from  his  horse,  mor 
tally  wounded,  and  was  taken  prisoner. 

General  Cornwallis  saw  that  he  could 
not  hold  his  outer  lines  against  the  great 
army,  and  abandoned  works  which  had  cost  him  a  great  deal  of  hard 
labor  to  construct.  All  the  horses  in  the  American  army  were  set  to 
work  hauling  cannon,  ammunition,  and  supplies  from  Jamestown.  Gen 
eral  Washington  was  anxious  to  hasten  the  siege,  for  he  had  received 
word  that  Admiral  Digby  had  arrived  at  New  York  from  England  with  a 
fleet.  He  knew  that  Graves  and  Digby  would  soon  make  their  appear- 
ance,  and  probably  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  with  his  army,  to  rescue  Cornwallis 
Day  and  night  the  soldiers  worked. 

The  night  of  October  6th  was  very  dark,  but  Elijah  Favor  had  looked 
over  the  ground  in  front  of  the  British  out  by  Wormeley's  Creek,  and 
knew  just  where  to  drive  down  his  stakes  for  the  soldiers  to  begin  their 


LAUZUN. 


YORKTOWN. 


389 


intrenchments.  He  went  with  a  body  of  soldiers  within  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  of  the  British  lines.  A  part  stood  guard  while  the  others  worked. 
No  one  was  allowed  to  speak.  In  silence  they  toiled— so  silently  that  the 
British  sentinels  heard  no  sound.  In  the  morning  they  had  a  breastwork 
so  high  that  it  sheltered  them  from  the  British  guns.  The  next  night 
they  dragged  up  several  twenty-four-pounders,  and  placed  them  in  position. 


THE    PLACE    WHERE    ADJUTANT-GENERAL    SCAMMELL    WAS    KILLED. 

On  the  night  of  the  10th,  the  artillery  was  ready.  Colonel  Lamb,  the 
brave  man  who  had  lost  a  jaw  at  Quebec;  Lieutenant  -  colonel  Ebenezer 
Stevens,  who  had  fought  under  Arnold  on  Lake  Champlain  in  '75,  and  in 
Canada  in  '76,  and  who  had  commanded  the  artillery  at  Stillwater ;  and 
Colonel  Carrington,  took  turns  in  directing  the  artillery. 

The  batteries  opened  and  sent  their  solid  shot  and  shells  into  Corn- 
wallis's  lines.  Cornwallis's  guns  replied,  and  all  night  long  there  was 
a  roaring  of  cannon  and  bursting  of  bombs.  The  French  fired  hot  shot 


THE    FORTIFICATIONS    AT    YORKTOWN. 


across  the  water  at  the  Guadaloiipe,  the  Charon,  and  the  transport  -  ships. 
The  Ouadaloupe  had  to  cut  her  cable  and  creep  away.  The  Charon  was 
set  on  fire  and  burned,  and  also  three  of  the  transports.  The  lurid  flames 
lighted  up  the  heavens,  and  gave  courage  to  the  besieging  troops.  Cap 
tain  Stevens  made  it  so  hot  for  the  British  that  they  ceased  firing,  and  the 
British  gunners  lay  down  behind  their  intrenchments  to  find  shelter. 


390  THE   BOYS  OF  76. 

On  the  night  of  the  llth,  Elijah,  with  a  party  of  men,  got  within 
almost  nine  hundred  feet  of  the  British,  arid  threw  up  a  new  line  of  re 
doubts.  They  soon  had  guns  mounted  in  them,  and  ponnded  away  at  the 
British  with  more  effect  than  ever.  But  there  were  two  batteries  of  the 
British — one  east  of  the  town,  down  by  the  river,  and  another  a  little  far 
ther  west — which  partly  enfiladed  the  new  intrenchments.  It  was  decided 
to  capture  them.  The  American  light-infantry,  under  Lafayette,  would 
capture  the  one  by  the  river,  and  the  French  grenadiers  and  chasseurs, 
under  Baron  Yiomenil,  would  take  the  other. 

Colonel  Alexander  Hamilton,  the  young  captain  who  commanded  two 
pieces  of  artillery  at  Harlem  when  the  British  undertook  to  cross  the 
Bronx  in  1776,  is  appointed  to  command  the  American  detachment.  Cap 
tain  Ogden,  of  New  Jersey,  has  command  of  the  advance.  Cornwallis  has 
erected  a  strong  abatis.  The  troops  move  out  silently  in  the  darkness.  No 
word  is  spoken.  They  approach  the  redoubt.  The  British  cannon  blaze. 
The  British  soldiers  fire  over  the  intrenchments  at  the  dusky  forms  which 
they  see  approaching — not  marching  now,  but  rushing  on  up  to  the  abatis, 
tearing  it  away,  and  leaping  over  the  embankments.  Short  the  contest. 
In  a  minute  they  are  victorious,  having  thirty-nine  killed  and  wounded. 
The  British  lose  eight  killed  and  wounded,  and  about  twenty  are  captured. 
General  Washington,  General  Lincoln,  and  General  Knox  are  in  one  of 
the  redoubts  awaiting  the  result.  The  shout  that  goes  up  when  the  vic 
tory  is  won  is  sweet  music  to  their  ears. 

Not  so  successful  are  the  French.  One  hundred  and  twenty  soldiers 
garrison  the  redoubt  which  they  are  to  attack.  The  French  march  brave 
ly  up  to  the  abatis,  but  halt  there,  and  fire  in  the  darkness.  For  an  hour 
the  fire  goes  on,  and  one  hundred  are  killed  and  wounded  before  the  Brit 
ish  in  the  redoubt,  after  having  eighteen  killed  and  wounded,  call  for  quar 
ter.  Forty-one  are  captured,  but  the  rest  make  their  escape.  And  now 
the  captured  guns  are  turned  and  aimed  at  Cornwallis's  main  line. 

The  night  of  the  14th  comes.      Cornwallis  resolves  to 
make  a  sortie.      The  British  troops  march  out  just  before 
day-break  and  surprise  the  French,  driving  them 
from  their  lines ;  but  the  troops  in  the  rear 
come  up  and  drive  the  British  back  again 
into    the    town.      Now  the  cannon   of 
the  allies  are  so  near  that  they  can 
pour   a   cross-fire  into   the  British 
camp.     There  is  only  one  safe  place 
THE  ONLY  SAFE  PLACED  inside  of  Cornwall's  lines,  a  cave 


YORKTOWN. 


391 


VIEW    AT    YORKTOWN. 


under  the  bank  by  the  river;    everywhere  else  the  shot  and  bombs  are 
falling. 

Cornwallis  conceives  the  idea  of  taking  his  array  across  York  Eiver 
to  Gloucester  Point,  surprising  the 
allied  troops,  hemming  them  in, 
and  then  seizing  all  their  horses 
and  marching  north  through  Vir 
ginia,  Maryland,  and  Pennsylvania 
to  New  York.  He  thinks  that  he 
can  get  horses  and  mount  his  men. 
He  does  not  think  of  the  rivers  he 
will  have  to  cross,  nor  that  the 
news  will  go  a  great  deal  faster 
than  he  can  march,  nor  that  he 
will  find  the  people  rising  to  block 
his  way,  nor  that  the  fleet  can  sail 
up  the  Chesapeake  with  the  army 
and  be  at  Baltimore  in  advance 
of  him.  It  is  the  wild  idea  of  a  man  driven  to  desperation  by  the 
prospect  of  defeat  and  humiliation.  There  is  no  reason  in  it,  yet  he  en 
deavors  to  carry  it  out.  All  night  long  the  boats  at  his  command  are 
transporting  troops  to  Gloucester  Point.  In  two  more  nights  he  will  have 
them  all  north  of  York  River.  But  the  winds  and  waves  are  high,  and  the 
boats  can  not  pass.  He  sees  that  the  project  must  be  given  up. 

Cornwallis  is  in  General  Nelson's  house,  which  he  is  using  for  his  head 
quarters.  The  morning  of  October  17th  dawns,  and  with  its  dawning  the 
cannon-balls  begin  to  plow  their  way  through  the  house,  and  the  British 
commander  is  forced  to  leave  it.  The  first  shot  is  fired  by  General  Nel 
son  himself.  All  the  morning  the  uproar  goes  on.  Few  shots  can  Corn 
wallis  send  back,  for  the  American  riflemen  are  picking  off  his  gunners. 
His  troops  are  exposed  everywhere.  The  killed  are  increasing,  and  every 
where  the  wounded  multiplying.  Amidst  the  uproar  the  Americans  hear 
the  roll  of  British  drums  beating  a  parley.  The  cannonade  ceases,  a  white 
flag  is  raised  on  the  British  works,  and  an  officer  comes  out.  General  Corn 
wallis  proposes  a  suspension  of  hostilities  for  twenty-four  hours,  and  the 
appointment  of  commissioners  (to  meet  at  Mrs.  Moore's  house)  to  negotiate 
a  surrender. 

Twenty-four  hours !  By  that  time  Admirals  Digby  and  Graves  and 
General  Clinton  may  appear.  No;  General  Washington  can  not  give  so 
long  a  time.  Lord  Cornwallis  will  please  send  his  propositions  in  writing 


392 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


MOORE  8    HOUSE. 


before  the  commissioners  are  appointed ;  there  shall  be  no  fighting  for  two 
hours.     Lord  Corn  wall  is  assents. 

Out  in  Mrs.  Moore's  house  the  commissioners  meet.     Colonel  Laurens 
%  ,  for  the  Americans,  and  the  Vis 

count  de  Koailles  for  the  French ; 
Lieutenant -colonel  Dundas  and 
Major  Eoss  for  the  British ;  -and 
the  terms  are  agreed  upon.  The 
gunners  may  extinguish  their  port 
fires  now,  the  soldiers  may  throw 
down  their  arms,  for  nearly  a  cent 
ury  will  pass  before  there  will  be 
any  more  fighting  at  Yorktown. 

At  two  o'clock  on  the  after 
noon  of  October  19th,  the  surren 
der  takes  place  on  the  field,  not 

far  from  Washington's  and  Rochambeau's  quarters.  The  Americans  are 
paraded  north  of  the  Hampton  road,  the  French  south  of  it,  the  lines  ex 
tending  more  than  a  mile.  Washington,  on  his  bay  horse,  is  at  the  head 
of  the  Americans,  and  Rochambeau  at  the  head  of  the  French.  The  offi 
cers  of  both  armies  have  put  on  their  best  uniforms.  The  Stars  and 
Stripes  float  above  the  Americans,  while  above  the  French  are  the  lilies 
of  France.  Out  from  Yorktown  come  the  British.  In  silence  and  in  sad 
ness  they  march.  Upon  many  a  bronzed  cheek  there  are  tears,  for  it  is 
humiliating  to  surrender.  Between  the 
lines  they  march,  and  lay  their  guns 
upon  the  ground.  The  standards, 
twenty-eight  in  number,  are  to  be  de 
livered  up.  Ensign  Wilson,  of  Clin 
ton's  brigade,  receives  them.  He  is 
the  youngest  officer  in  the  service, 
only  eighteen ;  but  well  does  he  per 
form  his  part  —  receiving  them  from 
the  British  captains  and  handing  them 
to  the  twenty-eight  sergeants  appoint 
ed  to  receive  them. 

Cornwallis  is  not  there.  He  is 
heart-sick.  His  disappointment,  grief,  and  mortification  are  too  great  to 
be  borne.  lie  has  sent  for  O'Hara  to  deliver  up  his  sword.  General 
Washington  has  appointed  General  Lincoln,  who  had  to  surrender  to  Corn- 


BRITISH    FLAG. 


YORKTOWN.  395 

wallis  at  Charleston,  to  receive  it.  General  Lincoln  holds  it  a  moment, 
and  gives  it  back  to  O'Hara,  to  be  returned  to  Cornwallis. 

The  scene  is  over.  Eleven  thousand  men,  including  soldiers,  sailors, 
and  Tories,  are  surrendered  —  a  little  over  seven  thousand  being  British 
and  Hessians.  Seventy-five  horses,  one  hundred  and  sixty-nine  iron  can 
non — all  the  supplies  and  ammunition,  tents,  camp  equipage,  eleven  thou 
sand  dollars  in  money,  are  among  the  spoils. 

J°Jj  j°y>  j°y  everywhere!  Lieutenant  -  colonel  Tilghman  is  sent  by 
Washington  to  carry  the  news  to  Congress  at  Philadelphia.  It  is  mid 
night  when  he  arrives.  The  watchmen  are  going  through  the  town ;  the 
slumbering  people  hear  them  crying  the  hour  of  midnight  as  never  before 
— louder,  quicker,  and  more  joyfully.  "Twelve  o'clock,  and  Cornwallis 
is  taken  /" 

Out  from  their  beds  they  spring.  Women  in  night-caps  appear  at  the 
windows,  people  rush  into  the  streets  to  hear  the  news — Cornwallis  taken! 
Cornwallis  taken !  No  news  like  that  since  Burgoyne  laid  down  his  arms 
at  Saratoga. 


396 


THE  BOYS  OF  76. 


CHAPTEK  XXXIV. 

CONCLUSION. 

WITH   the  surrender  of  the  British  army  at  Yorktown  the  king's 
ministers  lost  all  hope  of  conquering  the  Americans.     It  was  a  ter 
rible  blow  to  Lord  North.     When  he  received  a  letter  informing  him  of 
the  surrender  of  Cornwallis,  he  threw  up  his  hands  as  if  a  bullet  had 
struck  him,  and  said,  "  O  God,  it  is  all  over !" 

The  king  was  for  sending  more  armies,  but  the  British  people  were 
tired  of  the  war.  They  had  seen  one  army  after  another  melt  away ; 
taxes  \\ere  more  burdensome  than  ever,  and  they  saw  that  the  Americans 
never  could  be  conquered ;  that  men  who  would  throw  down  the  axe  and 
hoe,  and  leave  the  plow  in  the  furrow,  and  hasten  to  capture  an  army, 


WASHINGTON  S    HEAD-QUARTERS    AT    NEWBUKGH. 


CONCLUSION. 


397 


would  maintain  their  liberties  against  the  king's  attempts  to  subjugate 
them.  There  were  many  Englishmen  who  from  the  beginning  stoutly 
maintained  that  the  Americans  were  right,  and  that  they  ought  to  be  free ; 
and  there  was  so  much  opposition  to  a  continuance  of  the  struggle,  that 
Lord  North  resolved  to  give  up  all  further  effort,  for  it  had  already  cost 
England  h've  hundred  million  dollars  and  fifty  thousand  lives. 

There  were  still  British  soldiers  in  America.  In  South  Carolina  the 
Whigs  continued  to  fight  the  British  and  Tories.  Sir  Henry  Clinton  was 
in  New  York,  and  General  Washington  with  the  American  army  was  on 


INTERIOR    OF    ROOM — WASHINGTON  S    HEAD-QUARTERS    AT    NEWBURGH. 

the  Hudson  at  Newburgh,  with  his  head-quarters  in  a  Dutch  farm-house. 
It  was  a  quaint  old  building.  The  dining-room  had  seven  doors,  and  only 
one  window.  The  fire-place  was  large,  the  walls  low,  and  there  were  great 
beams  overhead ;  but  there  the  commander-in-chief  entertained  his  officers 
and  their  wives.  Mrs.  Washington  was  with  him,  and  many  pleasant  din 
ner  parties  assembled  in  the  spacious  dining-room. 

It  was  nearly  two  years  after  the  surrender  of  Cornwallis  at  York- 
town  before  the  war  was  wholly  ended;  but  on  the  3d  of  September, 
1783,  a  treaty  was  made  at  Paris  between  the  English  and  American  corn- 


398  THE   BOYS   OF  76. 

missioners,  and  the  United  States  was  recognized  as  a  free  and  independ 
ent  nation. 

So,  after  fighting  more  than  seven  years,  after  suffering  untold  hard 
ships  and  privations,  the  Boys  of  '76  obtained  their  liberties,  established 
the  United  States  as  a  nation,  and  secured  to  mankind  a  government  of 
the  people  and  for  the  people  forever. 


THE    END. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  5O  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


OCl  9 


n  17 


PR    71958 


-m 


•trw 


LD  21-100m-7,'39(402s) 


YD  06570 


333012 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


